Skip to main content

Full text of "Sanskrit English Dictionary Monier Williams MLBD"

See other formats




with special reference to 



Boden Professor of Sanskrit 

Hon. D.C.L. Oxon, Hon. LL.D. Calcutta, Hon. Ph.D. Gottingen 
Hon. Fellow of University College and Sometime Fellow of Balliol College, 



with the collaboration of 

of the University of Strassburg 


of the University of Jena 

And Other Scholars 





The first edition ot this Dictionary had the advantage of being published by 
the Delegates of the Oxford University Press, with the support of the Secretary 
of State tor Incia m Cornell. The present greatly enlarged and improved work 
enjoys tr.e same privileges. The first edition appeared in the summer of 1872. 
Toe extent of its indebtedness to the great seven-volumed Sanskrit-German 

Tr.esaurtis compiled by the two eminent German Sanskritists, Otto Bohtlingk 
and Rudolf Roth, with the assistance of many distinguished scholars, such as 
Professor A. \\ eber of Berlin—then only completed as far as the beginning of the 
letter v —was fully acknowledged by me in the Preface. 

Having regard, however, to the entire originality of the plan of my own work, 
I did not venture to describe it as based on the great Sanskrit-German Worterbuch. 
For that plan I claimed to be alone responsible. F#very particle of its detail was 
thought out in my own mind, and the whole work was brought to completion by 
me, with the co-operation of five successive assistants—whose names were duly 
recorded—in about twelve years from the date of my election to the Boden 
Professorship in the University of Oxford. 

The words and the meanings of the words of a Dictionary can scarcely be 
proved by its compilers to belong exclusively to themselves. It is not the mere 
aggregation of words and meanings, but the method of dealing with them and 
arranging them, which gives a Dictionary the best right to be called an original 

In saying this I am not claiming any superiority for my own method over 
that of the two great German Sanskrit scholars—which, of course, has advantages 
of its own. Nor am I detracting one whit from the tribute of admiration which 
I and other lexicographers are always desirous of rendering to the colossal 
monument of industry and scholarship represented by their work. I am merely 
repeating my claim to the production of a Sanskrit-English Dictionary on a. wholly 
unique plan—a plan the utility of which has been now proved by experience. 

It was not thought desirable to print off more than a thousand copies of the 
first edition of my book. These—notwithstanding the necessarily high publishing 
price—were sold off in a few years. It then became a question as to how the 
continuous demand for the Dictionary was to be met, and the Delegates decided 
to provide for it by a supplementary facsimile edition, produced by a photo¬ 
lithographic process. Copies printed by that process have been procurable ever 
since. Of course I was well satisfied with the factual evidence thus afforded of the 



practical utility of my Dictionary, and the more so as, along with many eulogistic 
reviews and notices, it met with some adverse criticism, especially at the hands 
of German Sanskpitists. 

Not that such criticisms discouraged me. On the contrary, as soon as I 
became aware of the likelihood of my volume becoming out of print, I set about 
preparations for a new edition on the very same general plan, although with an 
earnest determination to improve the original work by the light of such critical 
animadversions as seemed to me to be pertinent. And I must at once acknowledge 
that in these efforts I received valuable suggestions from Professor Ernst Leumann 
of the University of Strassburg, who was my first collaborator at an early stage 
of the new undertaking (see p. xxxi). It ought, however, to be put on record 
that, even before Professor Leumann’s co-operation, I had made the discovery that 
the great increase in the number of printed Sanskrit texts and works bearing on 
Sanskrit scholarship, since the issue of my first edition, would entirely preclude 
the idea of my producing a mere ‘ rechauffe ’ of my former volume, with additions, 
however numerous, introduced from my own interleaved copy and the contributions 
of fellow-Sanskritists. It would necessitate the re-writing of the whole from be¬ 
ginning to end—a formidable task, tantamount to the production of an entirely new 
Dictionary. This task I began to put in hand alone at least twenty years ago, 
and it is only due to the authorities at the India Office, under whose auspices this 
work was inaugurated, and with whose assistance it has been printed, that I should 
explain the causes which have led to the unexpected delay in its publication. 

In real truth I am bound to confess that I entered upon my third lexico¬ 
graphical career with a little too magnificent audacity, and a little too airy hope* 
fulness, at a time when my energies were severely tried, not only by my ordinary 
duties of lecturing in Sanskrit, but by other collateral activities. 

Amongst the latter it may be mentioned that I had devoted myself to 

researches into Indian religions and philosophies, for a series of public lectures 

before the University, which I felt bound to give in my capacity of Boden 

Professor. And I certainly could not have ventured to carry on these researches 

—much less to have printed them in various books as trustworthy 1 —if I had not 

gained a ‘first-hand’ knowledge of my subject by placing my own mind in direct 

touch with the mind of the learned natives of India in their own country. 


It was for this and other cognate reasons 2 that — with the consent and 
approbation of two successive Vice-Chancellors, and at my own expense—I under¬ 
took voyages to India on three several occasions (in 1875-6, 1876-7, 1883-4), 
and extended my travels from Bombay to Calcutta and the confines of Tibet— 
from Cashmere to Madras and the extreme South, including the chief homes of 
Buddhism in the island of Ceylon. 

1 Some of these books are referred to in the present 
Dictionary; for example, that on ‘ Hinduism ’ (pub¬ 
lished by the S. P. C. K., 13th edition) ; that on 
‘ Brahmanism ’ &c. (also called ‘ Religious Thought 
and Life in India;' published by Mr. j. Murray, 
Albemarle Street, 4th ed., referred to as RTL.); that 
on ‘Indian Wisdom’ (published by Messrs. Luzac 
of Great Russell Street, 4th ed., referred to as IW.); 

that on ‘Buddhism’ (also published by Mr. Murray, 
2nd ed., referred to as MWB.). 

2 One of these was the founding of an Indian 
Institute for the promotion of Indian studies in my 
own University of Oxford. Another was to induce 
the Government of India to found six Government 
scholarships for enabling deserving Indians to finish 
their education at our University. 


® 9 


On each occasion I was cordially assisted by the Governor-General and local 
Governments of the day h On each occasion, too, I found scattered throughout 
vast areas old fellow-students and pupils of my own administering immense pro¬ 
vinces. and eager to help me in my investigations; and on each occasion I met to 
my surprise with learned and thoughtful natives—not only in the cities and towns, 
:u: even in remote villages—able and willing to converse with me in Sanskrit, as 
well as in their own vernaculars, and to explain difficult points in their languages, 
literatures, religions, and philosophies. 

It may well be believed that these Indian journeys were of great value 
in extending the horizon of my own knowledge, and increasing my power of 
improving the Dictionary, but it must be confessed that they interrupted its 
continuous prosecution. 

And, in very deed, the intermittent character of my latest lexicographical career 
would have made its completion during my life-time almost hopeless, had I not 
been ably aided by successive assistants and fellow-workers, whose co-operation is 
gratefully acknowledged by me subsequently (p. xxxi); that of Professor C. Cappeller 
having extended over far the larger portion of the work. 

And this is not all that I have to urge in extenuation of my apparent dilato¬ 
riness. A still more unavoidable cause of delay has been the unlooked-for amount, 
of labour involved. This is fully explained in the Introduction (see p. xvi), but 
I may briefly mention here that it has consisted in adding about 60,000 Sanskrit 
words to about 120,000 —the probable amount of the first edition; in fitting the 
new matter into the old according to the same etymological plan; in the veri¬ 
fication of meanings, old and new; in their justification by the insertion of 
references to the literature and to authorities; in the accentuation of nearly 
every Sanskrit word to which accents are usually applied; in the revision and 
re-revision of printed proofs; until at length, after the lapse of more than a quarter 
of a century since the publication of the original volume, a virtually new Dictionary 
is. sent forth. 

It would, of course, be unreasonable to look for perfection in the result of 
our combined efforts. The law of human liability to error is especially applicable 
to the development of a new method of any kind. Nor are the imperfections of 
this volume ever likely to become better known to the most keen-sighted critics 
than they are to the compilers themselves. 

It is said of the author of a well-known Dictionary that the number of 
mistakes which his critics discovered in it, were to him a source of satisfaction 
rather than annoyance. The larger a work, he affirmed, the more likely it was 
to include errors; and a hypercritical condemnation of these was often symptomatic 
of a narrow-mindedness which could not take in the merit of any great per¬ 
formance as a whole. 

Without having recourse to this convenient way of discomfiting critics of the 
Ckidranveshin type, and without abating one iota of justifiable confidence in the 

1 The three Viceroys were Lord Northbrook, the and to Sir Richard Temple for receiving me at 
late Lord Lytton, and Lord Ripon. I owe a deep Government House, Belvedere, during the Piince of 
debt of gratitude to Lord Ripon for receiving me as Wales’ visit in 1875-6; and to Sir James Fergusson for 
his guest at Government House, Calcutta, in 1883-4 ; receiving me at Government House, Bombay, in 1884 


* * » 


general trustworthiness of the present Dictionary, its compilers can yet be keenly 
alive to its thoroughly human character. 

Speaking for myself I may say that blended with my thankfulness for the 
longevity that has enabled me to see a protracted undertaking brought to a com¬ 
pletion, is a deep consciousness that I am not young enough to consider myself 
infallible. Indeed it is at once the joy and sorrow of every true scholar that the 
older he grows the more he has to confess himself a learner rather than a teacher, and 
the more morbidly conscious he becomes of his own liability to a learner's mistakes. 

From all true scholars I do not fear, but court, criticism. Such critics 
will understand how a sense of responsibility may increase with advancing age, 
putting an author out of conceit with his own performances, and filling him with 
progressively intensified cravings after an impossible perfection. They will make 
due allowance for the difficulties besetting the production of so many densely 
printed pages, often comprising column after column of unbroken serried type, and 
abounding with countless dots and diacritical marks. Nor will they be surprised at 
occasional inequalities of execution in a work representing efforts spread over numerous 
years. Nor will they need to be reminded that occasional distractions, trials of health 
and weariness of spirit are unavoidably incident, not only to the responsible head of 
a prolonged undertaking, but to his several assistants. Indeed it is no disparagement 
to those who have contributed to the detail of this work to admit that a com¬ 
pilation, which is the result of the collaboration of so many different personalities, must 
in some degree reflect the idiosyncrasies and infirmities peculiar to each. 

Yet notwithstanding my desire that due weight should be given to such 
considerations, I may be pardoned if I express my confident expectation that the 
volume now offered to students of both Sanskrit and comparative philology, will 
supply them with the most complete and useful one-volumed Sanskrit-English 
Dictionary ever yet produced — a Dictionary, too, which in its gradual progress 
has, I trust, kept pace with the advancing knowledge and scholarship of the day. 

At all events I feel sure that I may affirm for my collaborators, as well as for 
myself, that we have earnestly striven to secure for this new volume, even 
more than for the old, the possession of four principal characteristics, namely:— 
i. Scholarly accuracy; 2. Practical utility; 3. Lucidity of arrangement, designed to 
set forth, as clearly as possible, the etymological structure of the language, and 

its bearing on that of the cognate languages of Europe; 4. Completeness and 

comprehensiveness, at least to the fullest extent attainable in the latest state of 
Sanskrit research, and to the utmost limit compatible with compactness and 
compression into a single volume. 

And here it is my duty to aotify, in justice as much to my assistants as to 

myself, that I must be held primarily responsible, not only for the plan, but for 

the general character of the whole Dictionary. This will be understood when 
I state that I have from the first exercised a strict superintendence over the 
details of both editions—not only in carefully supervising the manuscript, but in 
adding new words, in modifying or amplifying meanings, in subjoining explanations 
from my own literary notes—made during my sojourning at the chief seats of 
learning in India—in examining and re-examining every proof-sheet. 

I ought to state, however, that during occasional attacks of illness I have been 



compelled to trust more to my collaborators than at other times 1 ; and I must also make 
an exception in regard to the Additions, the abundance of which is justifiable 
by the circumstance that many of them are taken from texts and books published 
quite recently. For although a manuscript list of all the words and meanings in the 
supplementary pages was submitted for my approval, and although many words 
in the list have been eliminated by me, while others have been added from my 
own notes, yet the necessity for passing the worst winter months in a Southern 
climate has made it impossible for me to have at hand every new book needed 
for the verification of every addition which I have allowed to be retained. 

With regard to a strictly personal criticism in which I have for many years 
been content to acquiesce without comment, I may perhaps advantageously—now 
that I have nearly arrived at the end of my career—make a brief explanation. 
Some of my critics and a few candid friends have expressed surprise that I should 
have devoted so much of my long tenure of the Boden Professorship to the dry, 
dreary and thankless drudgery of writing Dictionaries and Grammars, and to 
practical researches carried on among the Pandits of India in their own country, 
rather than to the duty of proving the profundity of my learning and my fitness 
to occupy a high Professorial position by editing or translating obscure Sanskrit 
texts which have never been edited or translated before 2 3 . 

In explanation I must draw attention to the fact that I am only the second occupant 
of the Boden Chair, and that its Founder, Colonel Boden, stated most explicitly in his 
will (dated August 15, 1811) that the special object of his munificent bequest was to 
promote the translation of the Scriptures into Sanskrit, so as ‘ to enable his countrymen 
to proceed in the conversion of the natives of India to the Christian Religion V 

It was on this account that, when my distinguished predecessor and teacher, 
Professor H. H. Wilson, was a candidate for the Chair in 1832, his lexicographical 
labours were put forward as his principal claim to election. 

Surely then it need not be thought surprising, if following in the footsteps 
of my venerated master, I have made it the chief aim of my professorial life to 
provide facilities for the translation of our sacred Scriptures into Sanskrit 4 , and for 

1 I cannot allow myself to think that the Dictionary 
has suffered much from this cause, except perhaps 
during the collaboration of the late Dr. Schonberg, the 
rapid impairment of whose powers did not at first strike 
me so as to make me aware of the necessity for increased 
vigilance on my part (see p. xxxi). 

2 I believe it is held that for an Alpine climber to 
establish a reputation for mountaineering he must as¬ 
cend some peak, however comparatively insignificant, 
that has never been ascended before. But the appli¬ 
cation of such a principle as a sole proof of scholarship 
in the present day, can no more hold good in Sanskrit 
than in Greek and Latin. At all events let any one 
who claims a reputation for superior scholarship on 
that sole ground associate with Indian Pandits in their 
own country and he will find out that far severer proofs 
of his knowledge and acquirements will be required of 
him there. 

3 Lieutenant-Colonel Boden, of the-Bombay Native 

Infantry, returned to England in 1807 and died at Lisbon, 

Nov.2i,i8n. His daughter died Aug. 24,1827, where¬ 
upon his bequest passed to the University of Oxford, 
but the first election to the Chair, for some reason 
unknown to me, did not take place till 1832. 

4 In his address proposing himself for election to 
the Boden Electors, Professor H. H. Wilson laid stress 
on what he had done for ‘ the rendering of Scripture 
Terms into the Sanskrit language/ It was doubtless 
on this account that after he was elected he urged me 
to compile an English-Sanskrit Dictionary—a work 
never before attempted. I laboured at this for about 
seven years, and although the result (published in a 
thick volume by the Directors of the East India Com¬ 
pany in 1851) cannot, I fear, be said to meet the needs 
of the present day, yet it should be borne in mind that 
it was pioneering work. Nor can it be said to have 
been useless, seeing that seven years after its publication 
the following testimony to its utility was voluntarily 
tendered by the Rev. J. Wenger, translator of the Bible 
into Sanskrit and Editor of Dr. Yates’ Sanskrit. Die- 



the promotion of a better knowledge of the religions and customs of India, as the 
best key to a knowledge of the religious needs of our great Eastern Dependency. 
My very first public lecture delivered after my election in i860 was on ‘The Study 
of Sanskrit in Relation to Missionary Work in India’ (published in 1861). 

For the rest, I have already alluded to the advantage which this Dictionary 
has derived from the support of the Governments of India, and I ought here 
to acknowledge with gratitude that, without the subsidy granted by successive 
Secretaries of State in Council, the present volume could not have been sold to 
the public at the price at which it is now offered. In regard to the Oxford 
University Press it will be sufficient to say that this volume adds to the countless 
evidences of its efficiency and of the wealth of its resources. But I may be 
permitted to congratulate its Delegates and Controller on their good fortune in 
possessing an unrivalled Oriental Press-reader in Mr. Pembrey. For more than 
forty years he has read the final proofs of all my books; and I can from my own 
experience, and without exaggeration, affirm, that I doubt whether any one can 
surpass him in the perfection to which he has brought the art of detecting errors 
due to the inadvertence of both authors and printers. 

It is only necessary for me to add that having been alone responsible for 
the singularity of the plan of the original Dictionary, I thought it desirable to 
prefix to the first edition several sections of introductory explanations. In the 
same way my supremacy in the production of the present new work necessitates my 
undertaking the responsibility of writing a new series of explanations, in which I have 
deemed it desirable to pursue the main lines of my previous method, and not to 
discard any portion of the old matter which could be advantageously retained. 

Indian Institute, Oxford, 1899. 



This Dictionary, to which my father devoted so many years of labour, was 
completed by him a few days before his death, which took place at Cannes, in the 
south of France, on April xi, 1899. It had been his hope to see this work published 
shortly after his return to England. Although this desire was not granted, it was 
a satisfaction to him to know that the last revise had received his final corrections, 
and that the book would be issued from the University Press within a few weeks 
of his death. 

M. F. Monier-Williams. 

May 4, 1899* 

tionary:—‘I received a copy of Professor Monier 
Williams' English and Sanskrit Dictionary at a time 
when I was about to commence a translation into 


Sanskrit of portions of the Old Testament. I have 
used it daily for the last seven years, and the more 
I have consulted it the more excellent I have found it. 
I feel bound to say that he appears to have succeeded, 
not only beyond my previous ideas of what was likely, 
but also of what was feasible, to be accomplished at the 
present time. The Pundits whom I employ have like¬ 
wise expressed their unqualified admiration of the labour 

and erudition which his volume displays. The Rev. J. 
Parsons of Benares, who has been engaged for seme 

years past in preparing a new Hindee version or* the 
New Testament, has likewise derived material assistance 
from Professor M. W.’s work. Indian 

T-O * ' —1 • ^ 

i M '—A W « 

TV 1 * 

generally owe him a large debt of 

Let me add that I hope the present Sarskpt-English 
Dictionary will furnish some young scholar 
materials*for the compilation of a far more satisfactory 
English-Sanskrit Dictionary than that which I began 
to compile more than half a century ago. 



Statement of the circumstances which led to the peculiar System of Sanskrit Lexicography 
introduced for the first time in the Monier- Williams Sanskrit-English Dictionary of 187a. 

To enable me to give a clear account of the gradual development of the plan of the present work, 
I must go back to its earliest origin, and must reiterate what I stated in the Preface to the first edition, 
that my predecessor in the Boden Chair, Professor H. H. Wilson, once intended to compile a Sanskrit 
Dictionary in which all the words in the language were to be scientifically arranged under about 2,000 
roots, and that he actually made some progress in carrying out that project. Such a scientific arrangement 
of the language would, no doubt, have been appreciated to the full by the highest class of scholars. 
Eventually, however, lie found himself debarred from its execution, and commended it to me as a fitting 
object for the occupation of my spare time during the tenure of my office as Professor of Sanskrit at 
the old East India College, Haileybury. Furthermore, he generously made over to me both the beginnings 
of his new Lexicon and a large MS. volume, containing a copious selection of examples and quotations 
(made by Pandits at Calcutta under his direction 3 ) with which he had intended to enrich his own volume. 
It was on this account that, as soon as I had completed the English-Sanskrit part of a Dictionary of 
my own (published in 1851), I readily addressed myself to the work thus committed to me, and actually 
carried it on for some time between the intervals of other undertakings, until the abolition of the old 
Haileybury College on January 1, 1858. 

One consideration which led my predecessor to pass on to me his project of a root-arranged Lexicon 
was that, on being elected to the Boden Chair, he felt that the elaboration of such a work would be 
incompatible with the practical objects for which the Boden Professorship was founded 1 2 . 

Accordingly he preferred, and I think wisely preferred, to turn his attention to the expansion of the 
second edition of his first Dictionary s — a task the prosecution of which he eventually intrusted to a 
well-known Sanskrit scholar, the late Professor Goldstiicker. Unhappily, that eminent Orientalist was singularly 
unpractical in some of his ideas, and instead of expanding Wilson’s Dictionary, began to convert it into 
a vast cyclopedia of Sanskrit learning, including essays and controversial discussions of all kinds. He 
finished the printing of 480 pages of his own work, which only brought him to the word Arim-dama (p. 87 
of the present volume), when an untimely death cut short his lexicographical labours. 

As to my own course, the same consideration which actuated my predecessor operated in my case, 
when I was elected to fill the Boden Chair in his room in i860. 

I also felt constrained to abandon the theoretically perfect ideal of a wholly root-arranged Dictionary 
in favour of a more practical performance, compressible within reasonable limits—and more especially as 
I had long become aware that the great Sanskrit-German Worterbuch of Bohtlingk and Roth was 
expanding into dimensions which would make it inaccessible to ordinary English students of Sanskrit. 

Nevertheless I could not quite renounce an idea which my classical training at Oxford had forcibly 
impressed upon my mind—viz. that the primary object of a Sanskrit Dictionary should be to exhibit, 
by a lucid etymological arrangement, the structure of a language which, as most people know, is not only 
the elder sister of Greek, but the best guide to the structure of Greek, as well as of every other member 
of the Aryan or Indo-European family—a language, in short, which is the very key-stone of the science 
of comparative philology. This was in truth the chief factor in determining the plan which, as I now 
proceed to show, I ultimately carried into execution. 

1 This will be found in the library presented by me to the 
Indian Institute, Oxford. 

2 The main object was really a missionary one, as I have 

shown in the Preface to this volume (p. ix), and in my Life of 

I. H. Wilson appended to my Reminiscences of Old Haileybury 
College (published by A. Constable & Co.). 

3 His first Dictionary was published in 1819, and his second in 
S32, while he was a candidate for the Boden Professorship. 


• • 

And it will conduce to the making of what I have to say in this connexion clearer, if I draw 
attention at the very threshold to the fact that the Hindus are perhaps the only nation, except the Greeks, 
who have investigated, independently and in a truly scientific manner, the general laws which govern t h e 
evolution of language. 

The synthetical process which comes into operation in the working of those laws may be well called 

samskarana, ‘putting together/ by which I mean that every single word in the highest type of language 

(called Samskrita 1 ) is first evolved out of a primary Dhatu —a Sanskrit term usually translated by ‘Root/ 

but applicable to any primordial constituent substance, whether of words, or rocks, or living organisms— 

and then, being so evolved, goes through a process of ‘ putting together' by the combination of other 

elementary constituents. 


Furthermore, the process of ‘putting together’ implies, of course, the possibility of a converse process 
of vydkarana , by which I mean ‘undoing’ or ‘decomposition;’ that is to say, the resolution of e.erv 
root-evolved word into its component elements. So that in endeavouring to exhibit these processes of 
synthesis and analysis, we appear to be engaged, like a chemist, in combining elementary substances 
into solid forms, and again in resolving these forms into their constituent ingredients. 

It seemed to me, therefore, that in deciding upon the system of lexicography bes: calccna.e: :: 
elucidate the laws of root-evolution, with all the resulting processes of verbal synthesis and analvs.s. 
constitute so marked an idiosyncrasy of the Sanskrit language, it was important to keep prominently in 
view the peculiar character of a Sanskrit root—a peculiarity traceable through the whole family of so-called 
Aryan languages connected with Sanskrit, and separating them by a sharp line of demarcation from the 
other great speech-family usually called Semitic 2 . 

And here, if I am asked a question as to what languages are to be included under the name Aryan— 

a question which ought certainly to be answered in limine , inasmuch as this Dictionary, when first 

published in 1872, was the first work of the kind, put forth by any English scholar, which attempted 

to introduce comparisons between the principal members of the Aryan family—I reply that the Aryan 

languages (of which Sanskrit is the eldest sister 3 , and English one of the youngest) proceeded from 

a common but nameless and unknown parent, whose very home somewhere in Central Asia cannot be 

fixed with absolute certainty, though the locality may conjecturally be placed somewhere in the region of 

Bactria (Balkh) and Sogdiana, or not far from Bokhara and the first course of the river Oxus 4 . From 

this centre radiated, as it were, eight principal lines of speech—each taking its own course and expanding 

in its own way—namely the two Asiatic lines: (A) the Indian—comprising Sanskrit, the various ancient 

Prakrits, including the Prakrit of the Inscriptions, the Pali 6 of the Buddhist sacred Canon, the Ardha- 

Magadh! of the Jains, and the modern Prakrits or vernacular languages of the Hindus, such as H:r. 

Marathi, Gujarati, Bengali, Oriya &c. (B) the Iranian — comprising the Avesta language commonly caked 

Zand or Zend 6 , old Persian or Akhaemenian, Pahlavi, modern Persian, and, in connexion with these 

Armenian and Pushtu; and then the six European lines: (A) Keltic, (B) Hellenic, (C) Italic, (D) Tenteruc. 

(E) Slavonic, (F) Lithuanian, each branching into various sub-lines as exhibited in the present languages cf 

Europe. It is this Asiatic and European ramification of the Aryan languages which has led to their being 
called Indo-European. 

Now if I am asked a second question, as to what most striking feature distinguishes all these 
languages from the Semitic, my answer is, that the main distinction lies in the character of their roots 

Sanskrit is now too Anglicized a word to admit of its being 
written as it ought to be written according to the system of trans¬ 
literation adopted in the present Dictionary—Samskrit. 

The name Semitic or Shemitic is applied to Assyrian, 
Hebrew, Aramaic (or Aramaean), Arabic, and Himyaritic, 
because in the tenth chapter of Genesis, Shem is represented as 
father of the principal nations speaking these languages—e.g. 
Assur (Assyria), Aram (Syria), and of Arphaxad, grandfather 
of Eber, from whom came the Hebrews—-or Trans-Euphratian 
race, the name Hebrew coming from^c, and really meaning 
‘one who lives beyond (a river)’—and Joktan, the father of 
many of the tribes inhabiting South Arabia. It is usual, too, to 
reckon among Semitic races the people of Abyssinia, whose 
sacred and literary language is the Ethiopic or Ge’ez, while their 
spoken dialects are Tigre for the norih and north-east, and 
Amharic for the centre and south, all presenting affinities with 
the ancient Himyaritic Arabic of South Arabia (Yaman). Hence, 
speaking generally, we may classify Semitic languages under the 
two heads of: — 1. ‘ North Semitic/ comprising Assyrian, Hebrew, 

and Aramaic; 2. ‘ South Semitic/ comprising Arabic, Himyaritic, 
and Ethiopic. 

3 Though the younger sisters sometimes preserve older forms. 

4 According to some German Theorists the cradle-land of the 
Aryans was in the steppes of Southern Russia. Others have 
fantastically placed it in Northern Europe. Most scholars hold 
to the old idea of ‘ somewhere in Central Asia/ and probably in 
the region of Bactria (Balkh) and Sogdiana, although there might 
have been a second centre of migration. I myself firmly believe 
that Balkh was once a chief ancient home of Aryan civilization. 
Its ruins are said to extend for twenty miles. 

5 See note 3, p. xxv, on Pali and on the Prakrit of the inscriptions. 

6 As to the Avesta, commonly called Zend (more correctly 
Zand), this is that ancient language of Eastern Iran in which are 
written the sacred books of the Zoroastrians, commonly called 
Zend-Avesta—books which constitute the bible and prayer-book 
of the Parsis—those fugitives from Persia who are scattered 
everywhere throughout India, and are now among the most 
energetic and loyal of our Indian fellow-subjects. 



or radical sounds; for although both Aryan and Semitic forms of speech are called ‘ inflective V it should 
be well understood that the inflectiveness of the root in the two cases implies two very different processes. 

For example, an Arabic root is generally a kind of hard tri-consonantal framework consisting of three 
consonants which resemble three sliding but unchangeable upright limbs, moveable backwards and forwards 
to admit on either side certain equally unchangeable ancillary letters used in forming a long chain of 
derivative words. These intervenient and subservient letters are of the utmost importance for the diverse 
colouring of the radical idea, and the perfect precision of their operation is noteworthy, but their 
presence within and without the rigid frame of the root is, so to speak, almost overpowered by the ever 
prominent and changeless consonantal skeleton. In illustration of this we may take the Arabic tri- 
consonantal root XTB, * to write/ using capitals for the three radical consonants to indicate their 
unchangeableness; the third pers. sing, past tense is XaTaBa, ‘he wrote/ and from the same three 
consonants, by means of certain servile letters, are evolved with fixed and rigid regularity a long line 
of derivative forms, of which the following are specimens:—XaTB, and XiTaBat, the act of writing; 
KaTiB, a writer; maXTuB, written; taXTTB, a teaching to write; muXaTaBat, and taXaTuB, the 

act of writing to one another; mutaXaTiB, one engaged in mutual correspondence; i 

, the act of 

dictating ; maXTaB, the place of writing, a writing-school; XiTaB, a book; XiTBat, the act of transcribing. 

In contradistinction to this, a Sanskrit root is generally a single monosyllable 1 2 , consisting of one or 
more consonants combined with a vowel, or sometimes of a single vowel only. This monosyllabic radical 
has not the same cast-iron rigidity of character as the Arabic tri-consonantal root before described. True, it has 
usually one fixed and unchangeable initial letter, but in its general character it may rather be compared to 
a malleable substance, capable of being beaten out or moulded into countless ever-variable forms, and 
often in such a way as to entail the loss of one or other of the original radical letters; new forms being, 
as it were, beaten out of the primitive monosyllabic ore, and these forms again expanded by affixes 
and suffixes, and these again by other affixes and suffixes 3 , while every so expanded form may be again 
augmented by prepositions and again by compositions with other words and again by compounds of 
compounds till an almost interminable chain of derivatives is evolved. And this peculiar expansibility arises 
partly from the circumstance that the vowel is recognized as an independent constituent of every Sanskrit 
radical, constituting a part of its very essence or even sometimes standing alone as itself the only root. 

Take, for example, such a root as Bhu, To be' or ‘to exist/ From this is, so to speak, beaten out 
an immense chain of derivatives of which the following are a few examples:— Bhava or Bhavana, being; 
Bhava, existence; Bhavana, causing to be; Bhavin, existing; Bhnvana, the world; Bird or Bhdmi, 
the earth; Bhd-dhara, earth-supporter, a mountain; Bhd-dhara-ja 9 mountain-born, a tree; Bhd-pa, an 
earth-protector, king; Bhdpa-pntra, a king’s son, prince, &c. &c.; TJd-bhd, to rise up; Praty-a-bhd, 
to be near at hand; Frddbhdta, come forth, &c. 4 

Sanskrit, then, the faithful guardian of old Indo-European forms, exhibits these remarkable properties 
better than any other member of the Aryan line of speech, and the crucial question to be decided was, 
how to arrange the .plan of my Dictionary in such a way as to make them most easily apprehensible. 

On the one hand I had to bear in mind that, supposing the whole Sanskrit language to be referable 
to about 2,000 roots or parent-stems 5 , the plan of taking root by root and writing, as it were, the 
biographies of two thousand parents with sub-biographies of their numerous descendants in the order of 
their growth and evolution, would be to give reality to a beautiful philological dream—a dream, however, 
which could not receive practical shape without raising the Lexicon to a level of scientific perfection 
unsuited to the needs of ordinary students. 

On the other hand I had to reflect that to compile a Sanskrit Dictionary according to the usual plan 

1 As distinguished from unchangeably * monosyllabic’ like the 
Chinese, and * agglutinative ’ like the Dravidian of Southern 
India, and like the Turkish and other members of an immense 
class of languages, in which there are no so-called * inflections/ 
but merely affixes dr suffixes * glued’ as it were to the root or 
body of a word, and easily separable from it, and not blending 
intimately with it, and so, as it were, inflecting it. 

2 Of course it is well understood that there are in Sanskrit 

a certain number of dissyllabic roots, but I am here merely 

contrasting Semitic and Aryan roots generally. 

5 The vikarana of a root may be called an ‘ affix/ and the 
verbal termination &c. a ‘ suffix/ 

* For other illustrations of this see I. kri, p. 300; 1. iru y 
p. 1100; 1. sthd, p. 1262 of this volume. 

5 The number of distinct Dhatus or radical forms given in 
some collections is 1,750, but as many forms having the same 
sound have different meanings, and are conjugated differently, 

they are held to be distinct roots and the number is thereby 
swelled to 2,490. It should be noted, too, that a great many of 
these Dhatus are modifications or developments of simpler 
elements, and this Dictionary does not always decide as to 
which of two, three or more roots is the simplest, although when 
roots are allied their connexion is indicated. Probably the real 
number of elementary radicals in Sanskrit might be reduced to a 
comparatively small catalogue—even, as some think, to a list of 
not more than about 120 primitive roots. Many Sanskrit roots 
have alternative Prakrit forms or vice versa, and both lorms are 
allowed to co-exist, as bhan and bkan } dhan and dhan, nrit and 
not ; others whose initials are aspirated consonants have passed 
into other aspirated consonants or have retained only the aspirate, 
as in bhri, dkri, dhvri , hvri, hri &c. Again, such a root as svad 
is probably nothing but a compound of su and root ad, and such 
roots as Stubh, stumbfi, stambh are plainly mere modifications of 

each other. 



of treating each word as a separate and independent entity, requiring separate and independent explanation, 
would certainly fail to give a satisfactory conception of the structure of such a language as Sanskrit, and 
of its characteristic processes of synthesis and analysis, and of its importance in throwing light on the 
structure of the whole Indo-European family of which it is the oldest surviving member. 

I therefore came to the conclusion that the best solution of the difficulty lay in some middle course- 
some compromise by virtue of which the two lexicographical methods might be, as it were, interwoven. 

It remains for me to explain the exact nature of this compromise, and I feel confident that the plan 
of the present work will be easily understood by any one who, before using the Dictionary, prepares the 
way by devoting a little time to a preliminary study of the explanations which I now proceed to give. 


Explanation of the Plan and Arrangement of the Work, and of the Improvements 

introduced into the Present Edition . 

Be it notified, at the very threshold, that there are four mutually correlated lines of Sanskrit words in 
this Dictionary:—(i) a main line in Nagari type, with equivalents in Indo-Italic type 1 ; (2) a subordinate 
line (under the Nagari) in thick Indo-Romanic type 1 ; (3) a branch line, also in thick Indo-Romanic type, 
branching off from either the first or the second lines with the object of grouping compound words under 
one head; (4) a branch line in Indo-Italic type, branching off from leading compounds with the object 
of grouping together the compounds of those compounds. Of course all four lines follow the usual 
Sanskrit Dictionary order of the alphabet (see p. xxxvi). 

The first or main line, or, as it may be called, the ‘ Nagari line,’ constitutes the principal series of 
Sanskrit words to which the eye must first turn on consulting the Dictionary. It comprises all the roots 
of the language, both genuine and artificial (the genuine being in large Nagari type), as well as many 
leading words,in small Nagari, and many isolated words (also in small Nagari), some of which have their 
etymologies given in parentheses, while others have their derivation indicated by hyphens. 

The second or subordinate line in thick Indo-Romanic type is used for two purposes: — (a) for 
exhibiting clearly to the eye in regular sequence under every root the continuous series of derivative words 
which grow out of each root; (d) for exhibiting those series of cognate words which, to promote facility 
of reference, are placed under certain leading words (in small Nagari) rather than under the roots them¬ 

The third or branch line in thick Indo-Romanic type is used for grouping together under a leading 
word all the words compounded with that leading word. 

The fourth or branch Indo-Italic line is used for grouping under a leading compound all the 
words compounded with that compound. 

The first requires no illustration; the second is illustrated by the series of words under 1. kri 
(p. 300) beginning with 1. Xrit, p. 301, col. 3, and under 1. hard (p. 253) beginning with 1. KaraJta 
(p. 254, col. 1); the third by the series of compounds under 1. hard (p. 253, col. 1), and K&rana 
(p. 254, col. 1); the fourth by the series of compounds under -vira (p. 253, col. 3). 

And this fourfold arrangement is not likely to be found embarrassing; because any one using the 
Dictionary will soon perceive that the four lines or series of Sanskrit words, although following their 
own alphabetical order, are made to fit into each other without confusion by frequent backward and 
forward cross-references. In fact, it will be seen at a glance that the ruling aim of the whole arrangement 
is to exhibit, in the clearest manner, first the evolution of words from roots, and then the interconnexion 

of groups of words so evolved, as members of one family descended from a common source. Hence 

all the genuine roots of the language are brought prominently before the eye by large Nagari typ-e; 
while the evolution of words from these roots, as from parent-stocks, is indicated by their being printed 
in thick Romanic type, and placed in regular succession either under the roots, or under some leading 
word connected with the same family by the tie of a common origin. It will be seen, too, that in the 

case of such leading words (which are always in Nagari type), their etymology—given in a parenthesis— 

applies to the whole family of cognate words placed under them, until a new series of words is introduced 
by a new root or new leading-word in Nagari type . In this way all repetition of etymologies is avoided, 
and the Nagari type is made to serve a very useful purpose. 

It will also be seen that words which are different in meaning, but appear identical in form, are distinguished 

1 I use the expression f Indo-Romanic * and * Indo-Italic * to 
denote the expanded Roman and Italic alphabets adapted by the 
use of diacritical points and marks to the expression of Sanskrit 

and other Indian languages. The thick Indo-Romanic type 
employed in this volume is a product of the Oxford Clarendon 
Press, and therefore named Clarendon type. 



from each other by the figures i, 2, 3, &c., placed before the Indo-Romanic or Indo-Italic transliterated forms : 
see, for example, 1. a-sita ,, 2. asita (p. 113) 1 ; 1. A'pya, wq 2. apya , ’WTO 3. (pp, i 42j 

144); 1. Jr#, Yf 2. Jr#, 7*! 3. Jr# (p. 735). 

In regard to the roots of the language, it will be observed that they are treated of in the present 
work—both in respect of the meanings and of the exhibition of tenses, participles, and verbal forms 
evolved from them—more thoroughly and exhaustively than has hitherto been attempted in a Dictionary 2 . 

Furthermore, all the verbs formed from the roots with prepositions (as, for example, anu-^/kri, 

p. 31, sam-abhi-zy-a-f hri, p. 1156) are arranged according to the method followed in Greek 

and Latin Lexicons; that is to say, such verbs are to be looked for in their own alphabetical order, and 
not under the roots kri and hri. The practical convenience resulting from this method, and the great advantage 
of exhibiting the connexion of every verb and its meanings with its derivatives, constitute in my opinion 
an invaluable gain, especially to the student who studies Sanskrit as he would Greek and Latin, and makes 
it a guide to the study of the other members of the Indo-European family. At all events it forms one 
of the unique features of the present work, stamping it with an individuality of its own, and differentiating 
it from all other Sanskrit Dictionaries. The labour entailed in the process — necessarily a wholly pioneering 
process — of thus rearranging the verbs in a language so rich in prepositions, can only be understood by 
those who have undergone it. 

As to the separation of meanings it must be noted that mere amplifications of preceding meanings 
are separated by a comma, whereas those which do not clearly run into each other are divided by 
semicolons. A comma, therefore, must always be taken as marking separate shades of meaning , except 
it occurs in parenthetical observations. 

Let it be observed, however, that all the meanings of a word belonging to a group are not always 
given in full, if they may be manifestly gathered from the other members of the group. This applies 
especially to participles and participial formations. 

Observe too that all remarks upon meanings and all descriptive and explanatory statements are given 
between ( ), all remarks within remarks and comparisons with other languages between [ ]. 

I was told by a friendly critic, soon after the appearance of the first edition, that meanings and 
synonyms had been needlessly multiplied, but when the book had been fairly tested by repeated and 
extended application to various branches of the literature, it was found that apparently superfluous 
synonyms often gave the precise meanings required to suit particular passages. In the present edition 
to save space—some synonyms which seemed mere surplusage have been rejected; and I fear I may 
have occasionally gone too far in sanctioning some of these rejections. For experience proves that the 
practical utility of a Dictionary is less impaired by a redundancy than by a paucity of meanings. 

Again, a glance at the following pages will show that the arrangement of compound words under 
a leading word, as introduced in the edition of 1872, and continued with modifications in the present 
edition, is entirely novel. 

It may perhaps be objected that there are too many of these compounds; but once more it may be 
urged that a Sanskrit Dictionary must not be tried by ordinary laws in this respect, for Sanskrit has 
developed more than Greek and German and any other Aryan language the faculty of forming compounds. The 
love of composition is indeed one of its most characteristic features. To exclude compounds from a Sanskrit 
Lexicon would be, so to speak, to ‘ unsanskritize' it. Not only are there certain compounds quite 
peculiar to Sanskrit, but, in the grammar, composition almost takes the place of Syntax, and the various 
kinds of compound words are classified and defined with greater subtlety and minuteness than in any 
other known language of the world. When a student is in doubt whether to translate compounds like 
Indra-satru as Bahuvrlhis or Tatpurushas, the Dictionary is surely bound to aid in clearing up his 
perplexity. Even as it is, many useful compounds have, I fear, been sacrificed to the exigencies of space. 
The meanings of these, however, can be easily inferred from the meaning of their component members. 
Take, for example, such a word as samynkt&ksliara, ‘a compound or conjunct letter/ 

Another distinctive peculiarity of this Dictionary consists in the articles on mythology, literature, 
religion, and philosophy, scattered everywhere throughout its pages. My own collection of notes from 
various sources, especially those made during my three Indian journeys and published in the books 
named in the Preface to this volume (see p. vi, with note), have enabled me to furnish students with 
much useful information on many subjects not hitherto treated of in Sanskrit Dictionaries. It will, I feel 

1 la this first case the hyphen used in the transliterated form 
is no doubt sufficient to distinguish the two forms from each other. 
Hence, to economize space, the figures have occasionally towards 
the end of the work been omitted (see samdnd , Sa-mdna, p. 1160). 

2 I must, however, here repeat the acknowledgment of my 
original indebtedness to ‘ Westergaard’s Radices;’ nor must 
I omit to mention Whitney’s valuable Index of Roots, Verb- 
forms and Primary Derivatives. 



sure, be admitted that the knowledge gained by me from personal contact with Indian Pandits and 

educated men in their own Universities, and with all sorts and conditions of Hindus in their own 
towns and villages, has been a distinct advantage to this Dictionary. It has enabled me to give much 
useful information not found in other works, and to avoid many mistakes made by Sanskritists who have 
only a book-knowledge of India. 

A further peculiar feature is the introduction of a large number of names of persons and places. 
This may be objected to as a needless extension of the scope and limits of a Dictionary. In extenuation 
I contend that greater liberty ought to be allowed to a Sanskrit Dictionary in this respect than to 
Greek and Latin Lexicons, because Oriental alphabets have no capital letters enabling such names to be 
distinguished from ordinary nouns. 

Then again, in regard to the names of works, which are also multiplied to an unusual extent, 

Sanskrit literature is so vast that, although—as I hold — very little worthy of attention remains to be 
edited, yet it may often be of great importance to have attention drawn to unknown treatises, or to 
commentaries on well-known works ascertained to exist in manuscript in the libraries of Europe or 

As to plants and trees, the adjective qualifying the name of a plant, as well as the name of the 
plant itself, ought occasionally to be marked, according to the rules of botanical science, with an initial 
capital letter. But it is often difficult for a non-botanist to decide as to the correct usage. It was therefore 
thought better to use capital letters for both substantive and adjective, especially as in the new edition, to 
save space, the word ‘plant’ is omitted. Hence the second capital letter, though often inappropriate, 

serves as a symbol for denoting that the epithet is that of a plant. 

I need scarcely draw attention to the comparisons from cognate languages which manifestly 
constitute a special feature of this volume. Many doubtful comparisons have been eliminated from the 
present edition. A few questionable ones have, I fear, been retained or rashly inserted, but they will be 
easily detected (e.g. under Ayasya, p. 85). 

In regard to what may be thought a needless multiplication of indecent words and meanings, offensive 
to European notions of delicacy, I am sorry to say that they had to be inserted, because in very truth 
Sanskrit, like all Oriental languages, abounds with words of that character, and to such an extent, that 
to have omitted them, would have been to cut out a large percentage of the language. A story is told 
of a prudish lady who complimented Dr. Johnson on having omitted all bad words from his English 
Dictionary; whereupon he replied: c Madam, it is true that I have done so, but I find that you have 
been looking for them.’ In point of fact students of Sanskrit literature cannot sometimes avoid looking 
for such words. Nor have I, except in rare instances, veiled their meaning under a Latin translation 
which only draws attention to what might otherwise escape notice. 

In extenuation it may fairly be urged that in India the relationship between the sexes is regarded as 


a sacred mystery, and is never held to be suggestive of improper or indecent ideas. 

After the foregoing explanation of the general plan of the work it remains to describe some of the 
more noteworthy changes and improvements introduced into the present edition. 

And let me at once say that, as it was intended to give explanations of even more Sanskrit words 
than are treated of in the great Worterbuch of Bohtlingk and Roth, and in the later Worterbuch of the 
former, and, as it was decided that to prevent its expansion beyond the limits of one compact 
volume, the number of pages in the new edition should not be augmented by much more than a hundred 
and fifty, it became a difficult problem to devise a method of making room for the ever-increasing number 
of words which, as the work grew under our hands, continually pressed more and more for admission into 
its purview. 

Let any critic, then, who may feel inclined to pass a severe judgment on the contrivances for 
abbreviation in the present edition of the Dictionary, think for a moment of the difficulties in which its 
compilers found themselves involved. It was only gradually that the actual fact revealed itself—the very 
startling fact that we had to provide for the treatment of about one half more Sanskrit words, simple 
and compound, than in the first edition. That is to say, calculating as I had done that the number of 
Sanskrit words—simple and compound—in the first edition amounted to about 120,000, it became evident 
to us, as the work proceeded, that the number to be provided for in the new edition could not be 
reckoned at less than 180,000. It was as if a builder employed in repairing one of his own buildings 
had been told that he had to provide for the crowding of 1,800 human beings into a room, originally 
constructed by him to hold only twelve hundred. 

Or perhaps the difficulty may be better illustrated thus:—A traveller, after having made a voyage 
round the world, starts some time afterwards for a second similar journey. The rules of the ship in 



which he embarks only permit of his taking a limited amount of baggage into his cabin, and naturally 
his first idea is to take the same box which accompanied him on the first occasion. Into this he begins 
by packing his possessions, with perhaps a little more compression than before. He soon finds, however, 
that the lapse of time has added to his acquisitions, and that no close packing will enable him to make 
room for them. What then is he to do? He is permitted to make his one box a little longer and 
deeper; but even then he has not room enough. His only resource is to make his one receptacle 
huld more by filling up every crevice, and fitting one article into the other by various ingenious 


This is an illustration of the difficulties encountered in the process of compressing the immense mass 
of new matter which had to be brought within the compass of the new edition. It has been possible to 
lengthen the pages of the new volume by about an inch, so that each column now contains about eight or 
nine lines more than in the first edition, and the volume has been increased in thickness by more than 
one hundred pages (and with the Addenda by 147 pages). These enlargements have given considerable 
additional space, but not nearly as much as was needed. All sorts of contrivances for contracting, 
abridging, and abbreviating had, therefore, to be adopted, so as to secure the greatest economy of space 
without impairing the completeness of the work—considerations which will, I hope, be a valid excuse for 
the occasional violations of uniformity which forced themselves upon us, as the need for greater com¬ 
prehensiveness, within a limited circumference, became more and more imperative. 

Perhaps the necessity for such measures will be better understood if I here enumerate some of the 
sources whence the additional matter in the present volume has been derived. 

Imprimis, all the latter portion of the great seven-volumed Worterbuch of the two great German 
lexicographers beginning with the letter ^ v. Next, all the additions in Geheimrath von Bohtlingk's later 
compilation, and especially his Nachtrage. Then all my own manuscript Addenda in the interleaved copy 
of my first edition 1 ; and lastly all the words from many important pure Sanskrit and Buddhistic Sanskrit 
works printed and published in recent years, most of which will be named in the sequel. 

Doubtless, therefore, in describing the improvements which mark this new' Dictionary, the first place 
should be given to the vast mass of new matter introduced into it. This I venture to assert, after a 
somewhat rough calculation, amounts to very little short of 60,000 additional Sanskrit words with their 


And a still further increase has resulted from the introduction of references to authorities, and to 
those portions of the literature in which the words and meanings recorded in the Dictionary occur. The 
reason given by me for abstaining from more than a few such references in the first edition, was that 
abundant quotations were to be found in the great seven-volumed Thesaurus—so often named before— 
which all who used my Dictionary could easily find means of consulting. In real fact, however, not 
a few words and meanings in the earlier portion of the first edition of my book were entered on the 
authority of Professor H. H. Wilson, while many more in the middle and towards the end were inserted 
from sources investigated independently by myself, and were not supported by any of the quotations given 
in the Thesaurus. It followed as a matter of course that, very soon after the publication of my first 
edition in 1872, the almost entire absence of independent references of my own was animadverted upon 
regretfully by even friendly critics. 

Naturally, therefore, I determined to remedy an evident defect by introducing a large number of 
references and quotations into the new edition. Nor is it surprising that this determination grew and 
strengthened in the course of execution, so much so, indeed, that after the printing of page 60 I decided, 
with Professor Leumann’s co-operation, to give no words and no series of meanings without quoting 
some authority for their use, or referring to the particular book or portion of literature in which they 


And further, it became a question whether we were not bound to indicate by a reference in every 
case not merely the particular books, but the chapter and line in which each word w r a^ to be found, and 
sometimes even to quote entire passages. This, in fact, as will be seen, has been occasionally done, but 
it soon became evident, that the immense copiousness of Sanskrit literature—a copiousness far exceeding 
that of Greek and Latin—would preclude the carrying out of so desirable an object in full, or even to 
a somewhat less extent than in the great St. Petersburg Thesaurus—unless indeed my new Dictionary 
was to be enlarged to a point beyond the limits of a single compact volume. Nay, it soon became clear 
that the exigencies of space would make the mere enumeration of all the works in which a word occurs 
impossible. In the end it was found that the use of the symbol &c., would answer all the purpose of 

a full enumeration. 

1 Unfortunately in noting down words for insertion I omitted to quote the sources whence they were taken, as I did not at 
the time contemplate improving my new edition by the addition of references. 




Hence it must be understood that RV . 1 * 3 &c, &c. denotes that a word occurs in the whole literature— 
both Vedic and Post-Vedic—beginning with the Rig-veda, while Mn. &c. signifies that the use of a word 

is restricted to the later literature beginning with Manu. 

And again, when a word had not yet been met with in any published literary work, but only in 

native lexicons, it was decided to denote this by the letter L. 

As to the words and meanings given on my authority and marked MW., many of them have been 
taken by me from commentaries or from the notes which I made after conversations with learned Pandits 
in their own country. For it seems to me that Sanskrit Dictionaries ought sometimes to give important 
modern words and meanings as used by modem educated Sanskrit scholars in India—such, for example, 

as the meaning of prdna-pratishtha 3 (see Additions under Prftna, p. 133°)* 

Then a third improvement in the present edition, as every true scholar will admit, is the accentuation 
of words occurring in accentuated texts, although it will be found, I fear, that occasional accidental omissions 
occur, and in cross-references the accent has often been designedly dropped. Many accents, too, which are 
only known from Panini and the Phit-sutras have been intentionally omitted. 

It is admitted that accentuation is marked only in the oldest Vedic texts, and that in later times it 
must have undergone great changes—so far at least as the spoken accent was concerned. And this led me 
to decide that in preparing a practical Dictionary which employed so many complicated diacritical marks, 
it would be better not to increase the complication by adding the marks of accentuation. All accentuation 
was, therefore, designedly omitted in the first edition. But the careful study of Panini s grammar, which 
my higher lectures, during the period of my active occupancy of the Boden Chair (1860-1888), obliged 
me to carry on, forced upon me the conviction that, inasmuch as at the time when the great Indian 
Grammarian—the chief authority for both Vedic and classical grammar—elaborated his wonderful system, 
every word in Sanskrit, as much in the ordinary language as in the Vedic, had its accent 8 , a knowledge 
of accents must be often indispensable to a right knowledge of the meaning of words in Sanskrit. 

And in real truth the whole of Panini’s grammar is interpenetrated throughout by the ruling idea of 

the importance of accentuation to a correct knowledge of words and their meanings. 

For example, we learn from Pan. vi, 1, 201, that the word ksh&ya means ‘ abode,' but kshayfi. with 
the accent on the last syllable means ‘destruction/ And again, from Pan. vi, 1, 205, that datta, ‘given, 
which as a p. participle has the accent on the second syllable ( daita) is accentuated on the first syllable (i.e. 
is pronounced datta ) when it is used as a proper name. On the other hand, by Pan. vi, 1, 206, dliflshta 
has the accent on the first syllable, whether as a participle, or as a name (not dhrishta at p. 5 T 9 )- 

Further, by Pan. vi, 1, 223 and vi, 2, 1 all compounds have different meanings according to 
the posilion of the accent. Hence Indra-s&trn means either ‘ an enemy of Indra * or ‘ having Indra as an 
enemy,’ according as the accent is on the last or first member of the compound ( Indra-satrti or Indra-sairu; see 
Additions, p. 1321). These examples may suffice to show the importance of accentuation in affecting meanings. 

That this holds good in all languages is shown by the careful way in which accentuation is marked 
in modern English Dictionaries. How, indeed, could it be otherwise when the transference of an accent 
from one syllable to another often makes such important alteration in the sense as may be noted in the 
words ‘ gdllant 1 and ‘ gallant/ ‘ record * and ‘ recdrd/ * present ’ and ‘ present, ‘ august and august, 

‘desert’ and 


accentuation on comparative 
the accentuation of Greek ai 

Manifestly then it would have been inexcusable had we omitted all accentuation in the present enlarged 
and improved work 4 * * * . It must be admitted, however, that incidence of accent has not been treated 

with exact uniformity in every page of this volume. 

In Panini's system, as is well known, the position of the accent is generally denoted by some indicatory 

letter, attached to the technical names given by him to his affixes and suffixes, including the terminations 

1 Rig-Veda has now become an Anglicized word, and the dot 
under the R has been omitted in the Dictionary for simplicity. 

* I am sorry to have to confess that imbued as I once was with 
false notions as to the deadness of Sanskrit, I have sometimes 
omitted to give the meanings of important modern words like 
pr&na-pratishtha in the body of the Dictionary. 

3 The absence of accent was only permitted in calling out to 
a person in the distance, Pan. i, 2, 33. 

4 The importance of correct accentuation and intonation in 

a language, the very sound of which is held by the Hindus to be 
divine, and the bearing of Sanskrit accentuation on that of 

Greek, had become so impressed on me, that when I was sent as 

a Delegate to the Berlin International Congress of Orientalists by 

the Government of India in 1881, I requested Pandit &yamajl 

Krishna-varma (who was also a Government Delegate) to illustrate 
my paper on Vedic hymns by repeating them with the right accentu¬ 
ation. The Pandit’s illustrations were not only much appreciated, 
but received with grateful acknowledgments at the time by the 
eminent Chairman, Prof. A. Weber, and other Sanskrit scholars 
present, but were misconstrued by one of my auditors the well- 
known and most energetic Hon. Secretary of the Royal Asiatic 

:iety. That gentleman made the Pandit’s illustrative additions 
subject of an extraordinary criticism in a paper on ‘ Oriental 
lgresses,’ written by him and published in the Calcutta Review, 
. CLXI (1885), and quite recently reprinted. A letter lately 
iived by me from Professor A. Weber, and printed last year in 

. m « 1 ' 1 

A nvir 

we both felt at the statements in that paper. 



of verbs and of verbal derivatives (called pratyayd). Thus, by Pan. vi, i, 163 the letter c added to a suffix 
(as in ghurac, Pan. iii, 2, 161), indicates that the derivative bhangnra formed by that suffix is accented on 
the last syllable (e.g. bhangnra). 

In Vedic texts printed in Nagari character the accents are denoted by certain short lines placed above 
and below the letters, but in the present Dictionary we have not thought it necessary to mark the accent of 
words printed in Nagari, but only of their equivalents in Romanic and Italic type, the common Udatta or 
a;u:e accent being marked by and the rarer Svarita by 

And in this connexion it should be mentioned that the employment of the long prosodial mark (“ ) 
:o denote long vowels (e. g. a) has manifestly one advantage. It enables the position of an accent to be 
indicated with greater clearness in cases where it falls on such vowels (e. g. a). 

Next to the three principal improvements thus explained ought certainly to be reckoned the increased 
mechanical aids provided for the eye, to facilitate the search for words in pages overcrowded with 
complicated and closely printed type. And most conspicuous among these aids is the employment of 
thick ‘Clarendon’ type (see p. xiv, note 1) in place of the Italics of the previous edition, both for 
the derivatives under roots and under leading words and for the compounds under such words; thus 
allowing the Italic type to be reserved for compounds of compounds. 

Then another improvement of the same kind has been effected by the distribution of the compounds 
belonging to leading words under two, three, or even more separate heads, according to the euphonic 
changes in the finals of these words. Thus in the first edition all the compounds belonging to the leading 
word Bahis were arranged under the one word Bahts (=Vahis); but in the present edition these 
compounds are far more readily found by their segregation under the five heads of Bahis, Bahih, Bahir, 
Bahis, and Bahish (see pp. 726, 727). 

Furthermore, among useful changes must be reckoned the substitution of the short thick line (not 
necessarily expressive of a hyphen 3 ) for the leading word in all groups of compounds whose first member 
is formed with that leading word. Take, for example, such an article as that which has the leading 
word Agni, at pp. 5, 6. It is easy to see that the constant repetition of Agni in the compounds formed 
with that word was unnecessary. Hence — kana, — karman &c. are now substituted for Agni-kana, Agni- 
karman &c. By referring to such an article as Maha, at pp. 794-802, an idea may be formed of the 
space economized by this simple expedient. 

And here I must admit that a few changes may possibly be held to be doubtful improvements, 
the real fact being that they have been forced upon us by the necessity for finding room for those 
60,000 additional Sanskrit words with their meanings, the accession of which to the pages of the 
Dictionary—as already mentioned—became a paramount duty. 

For instance, towards the end of the work, the exigencies of space have compelled us to use Italics 
with hyphens, not only in the case of sub-compounds (as, for example, - mani-maya under candra-kanta 
at p. 386, col. 3, is for candrakanta-mani-zuaya), but also in the case of compounds falling under 
words combined with prepositions (as, for example, under such words as 2. Vi-bndha, Vi-bhaga, at p, 977). 

The same exigencies of space compelled us to group together all words compounded with 3. vi 
(see p. 949) and with 7, sa (see under sa-kahkata, p. 1123 &c.). 

The same considerations, too, have obliged us to make a new departure in extending the use of 

the little circle 0 to English words. Its ordinary use, of course, is to denote that either the first or last 

part of a Sanskrit word has to be supplied. For instance, such a word as kesa-v°> coming after 1. Vapanlya 
at p. 919 stands for kesa-vapaniya , while °da, c data , °dasva after codati \ at p. 400, are for coda, codata , 
codasva; and similarly c dyotana under Pra-dyota at p. 680 is for Fra-dyotana. 

The application of this expedient to English words has enabled us to effect a great saving. It must 
be understood that this method of abbreviation is only applied to the leading meaning which runs 

through a long article, or to English words in close juxtaposition . For example, the leading signification 

of ratha under the article 1. rat ha (p. 865) being ‘chariot/ this is shortened to ‘ch c ’ in the remainder of 
the article; and ‘clarified butter ; in one line is shortened to ‘cl° b°' in the next. By referring to such 
an article as sahasra, at p. 1195, it will be seen what a gain in space has thus been effected. 

In cases like - c nsa under kola (p. 261) the 0 denotes that -°nsa is not a complete word without the 
prefixing of a, which is not given because it has become blended with the final a of the leading word kalCx. 

Much space, too, has been gained by the application of the symbols A A A A (adopted at Professor 

Leumann’s suggestion) to denote the blending of short and long vowels. Thus A denotes the blending 

of two short vowels (as of a -fa into d); A denotes the blending of a short with a long vowel (as of 
a-fa into (?); A denotes the blending of a long with a short (as of a + a into <f); A denotes the blending 

of two long vowels (as of a-fa into tf), and so with the other vowels, e.g. / for a + t\ 6 for a-f w, d for a + 6 

&c. (see for example krit&gni for hr it a -f agni, kritddaka for kri/a + udaha, at p. 303). 

1 Some compound words which are formed by Taddhita affixes supposed to be added to the whole word ought not strictly to have 
a hyphen. 

b 2 


A further economy has been effected by employing the symbol for root. 

In this new edition, too, the letters ‘ mfn.’ placed after the crude stems of words, have been generally 

substituted for the forms of the nominative cases of all adjectives, participles, and substantives (at least 

after the first ioo pages), such nominative forms being easily inferred from the gender. But it must be 
borne in mind that nearly all feminine stems in d and l are also nominative forms. In cases where adjectives 
make their feminines in i this has been generally indicated, as in the previous edition. Occasionally, too, the 
neuter nominative form [am) is given as an aid to the eye in marking the change from one gender to another. 

Other contrivances for abbreviation scarcely need explanation; for instance, ‘ N.' standing for ‘ name ’ 
is applicable to epithets as well as names, and when it applies to more than one person or object in 
a series, is omitted in all except the first; e.g. 4 N. of an author, RV.; of a king, MBh/ &c. 

Also, the figures i, 2, 3 &c. have been in some cases dropped (see note 1, p. xv), and the mention 

of cl. 8 is often omitted after the common root kri. 


Finally, I have thought it wise tp shorten some of the articles on mythology, and to omit some of the 
more doubtful comparisons with the cognate languages of Europe. 




Extent of Sanskrit Literature comprehended in the Present Edition. 

I stated in the Preface to the first edition of this work—written in 1872—that I had sometimes 
been asked by men learned in all the classical lore of Europe, whether Sanskrit had any literature. 
Happily, since then, a great advance in the prosecution of Indian studies and in the diffusion of a 
knowledge of India has been effected. The efforts and researches of able Orientalists in almost every 
country have contributed to this result, and I venture to claim for the Oxford Indian Institute and its 
staff of Professors and Tutors a large share in bringing this about. 

Nevertheless much ignorance still prevails, even among educated English-speakers, in respect of 
the exact position occupied by Sanskrit literature in India—its relationship to that of the spoken 
vernaculars of the country and the immensity of its range in comparison with that of the literature of 
Europe. I may be permitted therefore to recapitulate what I have already said in regard to the term 
‘ Sanskrit/ before explaining what I conceive ought to be included under the term ‘ Sanskrit literature.' 

By Sanskrit, then, is meant the learned language of India—the language of its cultured inhabitants— 
the language of its religion, its literature, and science — not by any means a dead language, but one 
still spoken and written by educated men in all parts of the country, from Cashmere to Cape Comorin, 
from Bombay to Calcutta and Madras h Sanskrit, in short, represents, I conceive, the learned form of 
the language brought by the Indian branch of the great Aryan race into India. For, in point of fact, the 
course of the development of language in India resembles the course of Aryan languages in other countries, 
the circumstances of whose history have been similar. 

The language of the immigrant Aryan race has prevailed over that of the aborigines, but in doing so has 
separated into two lines, the one taken by the educated and learned classes, the other by the unlearned— 
the latter again separating into various provincial sub-lines 2 . Doubtless in India, from the greater 
exclusiveness of the educated few, and the desire of a proud priesthood to keep the key of knowledge 
in their own possession, the language of the learned classes became so highly elaborated that it 
received the name Samskrita, or 'perfectly constructed speech’ (see p. xii), both to denote its superiority to 
the common dialects (called in contradistinction Frakrita) and its more exclusive dedication to religious 
and literary purposes. Not that the Indian vernaculars are exclusively spoken languages, without any 
literature of their own; for some of them (as, for example, Hindi, Hindustani, and Tamil, the last belonging 
to the Dravidian and not Aryan family) have produced valuable literary works, although their subject-matter 
is often borrowed from the Sanskrit. 

Next, as to the various branches of Sanskrit literature which ought to be embraced by a Dictionary 
aiming, like the present, at as much completeness as possible—these are fully treated of in my book 
1 Indian Wisdom * (a recent edition of which has been published by Messrs. Luzac & Co.). It will be 

1 A paper written by Pandit SyamajI Krisbna-varma on ‘Sanskrit 
as a living language in India/ was read by him at the Berlin 
Oriental Congress of 188.1, and excited much interest. He argues 
very forcibly that ‘Sanskrit as settled in the Ash\&dhydyT of 
Panini was a spoken vernacular at the time when that great gram¬ 
marian flourished.* In the same paper he maintains that Sanskrit 
was the source of the Prakrits, and quotes Vararucfs Prakrita-pra- 
kasa xii, 2 (Prakritih saipskritam/Sanskrit is the source’). Of 

course the provincialized Prakrits—though not, as I believe, derived 
directly from the learned language, but developed independently— 
borrowed largely from the Sanskrit after it was thus elaborated. 

7 It has been recently stated in print that Russian furnishes an 
exception to the usual ramification into dialects, but Mr. MorfiU 
informs me that it has all the characteristics of Aryan languages, 
separating first into Great and Little Russian and then into other 



sufficient therefore to state here that Sanskrit literature comprises two distinct periods. Vedic and 
Post-Vedic, the former comprising works written in an ancient form of Sanskrit which is to the later 
form what the language of Chaucer is to later English. 

Vedic literature begins with the Rig-veda (probably dating from about 1200 or 1300 b. c.), and 
extending through the other three Vedas (viz. the Yajur, Sama, and Atharva-veda), with their Brahmanas, 
Upanishads, and Sutras, is most valuable to philologists as presenting the nearest approach to the original 
Aryan language. Post-Vedic literature begins with the Code of Manu (probably dating in its earliest form 
from about 500 b. c.), with its train of subsequent law-books, and extending through the six systems of 
philosophy, the vast grammatical literature, the immense Epics 1 , the lyric, erotic, and didactic poems, 
the Niti-sastras with their moral tales and apothegms, the dramas, the various treatises on mathematics, 
rhetoric, prosody, music, medicine, &c. f brings us at last to the eighteen Puranas with their succeeding 
Upa-puranas, and the more recent Tantras, many of which are worthy of study as repositories of the 
modern mythologies and popular creeds of India. No one person, indeed, with limited powers of mind 
and body, can hope to master more than one or two departments of so vast a range, in which scarcely 
a subject can be named, with the single exception of Historiography, not furnishing a greater number 
of texts and commentaries or commentaries on commentaries, than any other language of the ancient 
world. To convince one’s self of this one need only glance at the pages of the present Dictionary, and 
note the numerous works named there, which, if the catalogue were complete, would probably amount 
to a total number not far short of the 10,000 which the Pandits of India are said to be able to enumerate. 

Nor is it their mere number that astonishes us. We are appalled by the length of some of 

India's literary productions as compared with those of European countries. For instance, Virgil’s 

^Eneid is said to consist of 9,000 lines, Homer’s Iliad of 12,000 lines, and the Odyssey of 15,000, 

whereas the Sanskrit Epic poem called Maha-bharata contains at least 200,000 lines, without reckoning 
the supplement called Hari-vansa 2 . In some subjects too, especially in poetical descriptions of nature 

and domestic affection, Indian works do not suffer by a comparison with the best specimens of Greece 
and Rome, while in the wisdom, depth, and shrewdness of their moral apothegms they are unrivalled. 

More than this, the Hindus had made considerable advances in astronomy, algebra, arithmetic, 
botany, and medicine, not to mention their superiority in grammar, long before some of these sciences 
were cultivated by the most ancient nations of Europe. Hence it has happened that I have been painfully 
reminded during the progress of this Dictionary that a Sanskrit lexicographer ought to aim at a kind of 
quasi omniscience. Nor will any previous University education, such at least as was usual in my 
enable him to explain correctly the scientific expressions which—although occasionally borrowed from the 
Greeks—require special explanation. 

In answer then to the question: What extent of Sanskrit literature is comprehended in this 
Dictionary ? I reply that it aims at including every department, or at least such portions of each department 
as have been edited up to the present date. 

And here 1 must plainly record my conviction that, notwithstanding the enormous extent of Sanskrit 
literature, nearly all the most important portions of it—Vedic or Post-Vedic—worthy of being edited or 
translated have been already printed and made accessible in the principal public libraries of the world 3 . 

No doubt the vast area of India’s philosophical literature has not yet been exhaustively explored; 
but its most important treatises have been published either in India or in Europe. In England we may 
appeal with satisfaction to the works of our celebrated scholar Colebrooke, of the late Dr. Baliantyne, and 
more recently of such writers as E. B. Cowell, A. E. Gough, and Colonel Jacob, all of whom have 
contributed to the elucidation of this most difficult, but most interesting branch of study, while among 
Continental scholars the names of Deussen, Garbe, and Thibaut are most distinguished. 

1 See the chapters on the Epic poems in 4 Indian Wisdom,’ and 
my edition of the ‘Story of Nala,’ published at the Clarendon 
Press, and my little work on ‘Indian Epic Poetry’ (now scarce). 

3 The late Professor Biihler has shown that the inscriptions of 
about 500 a. D. quote the Maha-bharata and describe it as con¬ 
taining 100,000 verses. 

3 I do not mean this remark to apply to Buddhistic literature, 

which is very extensive, and is partly in Sanskrit, and has much 

still unedited and untranslated. The Divydvadana , edited by 

Professor E. B. Cowell and Mr. Neil, is an example. It is 

written in Sanskrit or rather in a kind of Sanskritized Pali, 

or Pali disguised in Sanskrit garb. Other Buddhist Texts, written 

in Sanskrit, are now being ably edited by the well-known Tibetan 


traveller, Rai Sarat Candra Das, Bahadur, C.I.E.,to whom I was 
greatly indebted for help in my researches at Darjeeling and its 

neighbourhood. Much Jaina philosophical literature, too, is 
still unedited, although well worthy of attention, and although 
only occasionally referred to in this Dictionary. It is written in 
Sanskrit as well as in Ardba-Magadh! Prakrit, for the elucidation 
of which Professor Leumann has done such excellent work. In 
fact, the Sanskrit form of Jaina philosophical literature (now being 
ably expounded by Mr.Vircand Ghandhi at Chicago) still offers an 
almost wholly unexplored field of investigation. Furthermore, 
it must be admitted that in some cases better editions of pure 
Sanskrit works are needed, bor example, a better critical 
edition of the Maha-bharata than those of Calcutta and Bombay is 
a desideratum. The Southern Recension of that immense work 
is I believe engaging the attention of Dr. Liiders, Librarian of 
the Indian Institute. 



There is also much still to be done in what may be called Epigraphic or Inscription literature, in which 
Dr. Fleet, Dr. E. Hultzsch, and Professor F. Kielhorn are labouring so effectively. And I am happy to say 
that we have occasionally availed ourselves of their labours in the following pages. 

The Tantras, too, present a field of research almost wholly untrodden by European scholars, and these 
books at one time attracted much curiosity as likely to present a hopeful mine for exploitation. I therefore, 
during my Indian journeys, searched everywhere for good MSS. of the most popular Tantras, with 
a view to making the best procurable example of them better known in Europe by a good printed edition 
and translation. Everywhere I was told that the Rudra-yamala Tantra was held in most esteem h But 
after a careful examination of its contents I decided that it was neither worth editing nor translating (see 
my ‘Brahmanism and Hinduism/ pp. 205-208). 

As to translations, the long array of ‘ Sacred Books of the East' might well be supposed to have 
exhausted the whole reservoir of Sanskrit works worthy of being translated; even admitting that the entire 
range of Sanskrit literature is held to be more or less sacred. Yet the series is still incomplete*. 

Assuming then my opinion on this point to be correct, I think I may fairly claim for the present 
Dictionary as great an amount of comprehensiveness as existing circumstances make either possible or 
desirable. Of course the earlier part of the work must perforce be less complete than the later. Nor can 
it be said to deal with every branch of literature with equal thoroughness, but its defects are, I hope, 
fairly remedied by the ample Additions at the end of the volume. 


Reasons for applying the Roman Alphabet to the expression of Sanskrit , with an account of 

the Method of Transliteration employed in the Present Dictionary . 

As I cherish the hope that this Dictionary may win its way to acceptance with the learned natives of 
India, I must ask European scholars to pardon my diffuseness if I state with some amplitude of detail my 
reasons for having applied the Roman or Latin alphabet to the expression of Sanskrit more freely than 
any other Sanskrit lexicographer. 

For indeed I know full well that all who belong to the straitest sect of Hindu scholars will at once 
flatly deny that their divine Sanskrit can with any propriety be exhibited to the eye clothed in any other 
alphabetical dress than their own 4 divine Nagarl.' Na hi putarfi sydd go-kshiram kva-dritau dhfitam , ‘ let 
not cow's milk be polluted by being put into a dog's skin/ How can it possibly be, they will exclaim, 
that the wonderful structure of our divine language and the subtle distinctions of its sacred sounds can be 
properly represented by such a thoroughly human and wholly un-Oriental graphic system as a modern 
European alphabet? 

Let me, then, in the first place point out that our so-called European alphabet, as adopted by the Greeks, 
Romans, and modern nations of Europe, is really Asiatic, and not European in its origin. And secondly, 
let me try to show that it has certain features which connect it with the so-called divine Nagarl alphabet 
of the Brahmans. Nay more, that it is well suited to the expression of their venerated Sanskrit; while its 
numerous accessory appliances, its types of various kinds and sizes, its capital and small letters, hyphens, 
brackets, stops &c., make it better suited than any other graphic system to meet the linguistic requirements 
of the coming century—a century which will witness such vast physical, moral, and intellectual changes, 
that a new order of things, and almost a new world and a new race of beings, will come into existence. 
In that new' world some of the most inveterate prejudices and peculiarities now separating nation from nation 
will be obliterated, and all nationalities—brought into fraternal relationship—will recognize their kinship 
and solidarity. 

Even during the present century the great gulf dividing the West from the East has been partially bridged 
over. Steam and electricity have almost destroyed the meaning of differences of latitude and longitude; 
and nations which were once believed to be actually and figuratively the antipodes of each other haye been 
brought to feel that mere considerations of distance are no obstacles to the reciprocal interchange of personal 
intercourse, and no bar to the adoption of all that is best in each other's customs and habits of thought. 

And a still more remarkable event has happened. Europe has learnt to perceive that in imparting 

* A section of it has been printed in Calcutta. 

9 The use made of some of the series is thankfully acknowledged 
at p. xxxii; but it is surprising that the long line of 49 thick 
octavo volumes includes no complete translation of India’s most 
sacred book—the Rig-veda. Only about 180 out of 1017 hymns 
are translated in vols. xxxii and xivi. when a continuous English 

version of all the hymns might have been given in one volume. 
It is regrettable, too, that vol. xlii only gives about a third of the 
Atharva-veda hymns, and that the Bhagavata-puriina, which is a 
bible of modem Hinduism, has no place in the list, while some 
volumes give translations of far less important works, and some give 
re-translations of works previously translated by good scholars. 


» * * 


some of the benefits of her modern civilization to Eastern races, she is only making a just return for the 
lessons imparted to her by Asiatic wisdom in past ages. 

For did she not receive her Bible and her religion from an Eastern people? Did not her system of 
counting by twelves and sixties come to her from Babylonia, and her invaluable numerical symbols and 
decimal notation from India through the Arabs? Did not even her languages have their origin in a common 
Eastern parent? It cannot, therefore, be thought surprising if her method of expressing these languages 
by graphic symbols also came to her from an Eastern source. 

We cannot, indeed, localize with absolute certainty the precise spot whence issued the springs of that 
grand flow of speech which spread in successive waves—commencing with the Sanskrit in Asia and the 
Keltic in Europe—over a large proportion of those two continents. Nor can we fix, beyond all liability to 
question, the local source of the first known purely phonographic alphabet. But we stand on sure ground 
when we assert that such an alphabet is to be found inscribed on Phoenician monuments of a date quite 
as early as the cognate Moabite inscription on the stone of King Mesha, known to belong to the middle 
of the ninth century b. c. 1 

It was of course a priori to be expected that Phoenicia—one of the chief centres of trade, and 
the principal channel of communication between the Eastern and Western worlds in ancient times 
—should have been compelled to make use of graphic symbols of some kind to enable her to carry 

on he: commercial dealings with other nations; and it may fairly be conjectured that a mere system 

cf ideograms ^ould have been quite unsuited to her needs. But this does not prove that the phonographic 
sigr.s :r. 7 r.rer. can inscriptions were invented all at once, without any link of connexion with previously 
currtn: .:-:g:aphic prototypes. And it is certainly noteworthy that the discovery at Tei-ei-Amarna in Egypt 
cf lexers from an ancient king of Jerusalem written on tablets in the early Babylonian cuneiform script 2 
proves that a Babylonian form of ideographic writing existed in Palestine and the neighbourhood of Phoenicia 
as early as the fifteenth century b. c. 

Those, however, who have conjectured that the Phoenician phonograms were developed out of the 
Babylonian cuneiform symbols, cannot be said to support their hypothesis by any satisfactory proof, literary 
or epigraphic. 

Nor does the theory which makes the South Semitic or Himyaritic scripts 3 the precursors and 

prototypes of the Phoenician seem to rest on sufficiently clear evidence. 

On the other hand it is certain that if we investigate the development of the Egyptian hieroglyphic 
ideograms, we shall find that they passed into a so-called ‘hieratic* writing in which a certain number of 
phonograms were gradually introduced. And it is highly probable that Phoenicia in her commercial inter¬ 
course with a country so close to her shores as Egypt, or perhaps through a colony actually established 
there, became acquainted in very early times with this Egyptian hieratic scrip 1 :. 

Furthermore, a careful comparison of the elaborate tables printed in the latest edition of the Encyclopaedia 
Britannica, and in the Oxford ‘ Helps to the Study of the Biblegiving the Egyptian and Phoenician 
symbols side by side—tends no doubt to show a certain resemblance of form between five or six of the 
Phoenician and corresponding Egyptian letters. 

Nevertheless, the comparison by no means makes it clear that all the Phoenician letters were derived 
from Egyptian models 4 * * * , nor does it invalidate the fact that existing epigraphic evidence is in favour of regarding 
Phoenicia as practically the inventor of that most important factor in the world's progress—a purely phono¬ 
graphic alphabet. 

Here, however, I seem to hear some learned native of India remark:—It may be true that the Phoenician 
inscriptions are prior in date to those hitherto discovered in India; but do you really mean to imply that 
India's admirably perfect Deva-nagari alphabet, which we hold to be a divine gift 8 , was borrowed from 
the imperfect alphabet of a nation of mere money-making traders, like the Phoenicians? Is it not the case 
that the earliest elements of civilization and enlightenment have always originated in the East, and spread 
from the East to the West—not from the West to the East ? And if, as is generally admitted, the symbols for 
numbers, which were as essential to the world's progress as letters, originated in India and passed through 

1 The Phoenician inscriptions have been deciphered by assuming 

that the Phoenician language must have been akin to Hebrew. 

Although their age cannot be ascertained with absolute certainty, 

yet there is good reason to believe that some of them are of 

greater antiquity than the cognate Moabite inscription of King 

Mesha which was found at Dibon, a little N.E. of Jerusalem and 

south of Heshbon. 

8 Some of these tablets show that diplomatic correspondence 
passed between Babylonia and Egypt through Palestine. In fact, 
‘Babylonian’ was in those days the language of diplomacy, as 

French once was in Europe, Other tablets in Babylonian cunei¬ 
form character have proved to be letters written by the king of 
Jerusalem to the Egyptian monarch to whose suzerainty he appears 
to have been subject, 

* There are two kinds of Himyaritic inscriptions, viz. Sabgean 
and Minsean. 

* Notwithstanding the elaborate proofs given by the Abbe Van 
Drival in his ingenious and interesting treatise on ? fortune de 

5 See note %> p. xxvi. 



Semitic countries into Europe, why should not alphabets have had the same origin and the same course? 
Did not the Hindus invent for themselves their own grammar, their own science of language, their own 
systems of philosophy, logic, algebra, and music? Have they not an immense literature on these and other 
subjects, much of which must have been written down at least 600 years b.c.? And are there not references 
in this literature to the existence of writing in India in very ancient times? for instance, in the Vasishtha 
Dharma-sutra of the later Vedic period, in the Laws of Manu \ in Panini, who lived about 400 b. c. 1 2 , in 
the Pali Canon of the Buddhists which refers to writing schools and writing materials 3 . And again, do not 
the actual inscriptions of King Asoka of the third century b. c. exhibit a remarkably perfect system of alpha¬ 
betical signs, and many varying forms in different districts of India, postulating several centuries of antecedent 
development 4 ? And if no Indian epigraphs of an earlier date than the reign of Asoka have yet been discovered, 
is not that due to the circumstance that the art of incising letters on stone and metal only came into use 
when great Hindu kings arose, whose empire was sufficiently extensive to make it necessary to issue edicts 
and grants to their subjects? Bearing all this in mind, may it not be contended that if there has been any 
plagiarism in the matter of alphabets, the borrowing may have been from the Hindus rather than by them? 

Such questions as these have often been addressed to me by learned Pandits, and it must be confessed 
that they are by no means to be brushed aside as unworthy of consideration. Quite the reverse. They 
contain many statements to which no exception can be taken. But my present object is not to furnish 
incontestable proof of the derivation of Indian alphabets from a Phoenician source. It is rather to point out 
to Indian scholars that even admitting (with some eminent authorities) that there is good ground for claiming 
an indigenous origin for Hindu alphabets, many of the letters composing them offer points of contact and 
affinity with those of Phoenicia, and therefore with those of Greece and Rome and modern Europe. 

And at the outset it must be frankly acknowledged that the first phonographic alphabet brought to 
light on ancient Phoenician monuments constituted by no means a perfect alphabetic system. It had, no doubt, 
advanced beyond the ideographic stage, and even to some extent beyond the syllabic, but its phonograms 

were only twenty-two in number, and mainly represented consonants. It had not attained to the level of 

an alphabet in which vowel symbols are promoted to an equality of representation with consonantal, and 
treated as compeers, not as mere secondary appendages. And even to this day, the Semitic alphabets 
connected with the Phoenician—viz. the Hebrew, Aramaean, and Arabian—are nearly as imperfect, and very 
little better than, so to speak, consonantal skeletons, wanting the life-blood which vowels only can impart. 

Indeed, the imperfection of the Phoenician script is well shown by the fact that the Greeks who, as 
every one admits, were indebted to the Phoenicians for their rudimentary consonantal method of writing, 
had no sooner received it (probably quite as early as 800 b. c.) than they began to remedy its defects, and 
gradually developed out of it a true alphabetic method of their own, which was ultimately made to flow from 
left to right in opposition to the Semitic method. 

Similarly, too, the Romans when they had accepted the Phoenician graphic signs from the Greeks, 

found it necessary to improve upon them, and ultimately developed out of them an even more practical 

alphabetic system. 

But surely these two facts may be appealed to as making it not improbable that if the Greeks and 
Romans, two highly intellectual races, sprung from the same Aryan stock as the Brahmans, condescended 
to accept certain rudimentary phonograms from the Phoenicians, and to expand them into alphabets suited to 
the expression of their own languages, the Brahmans also might have deigned, if not to accept a foreign alphabet, 
at least to improve their own graphic system by modifications introduced through contact with Semitic races. 

Nor should it be forgotten that in later times the Hindus did actually borrow a Semitic alphabet from 
Arabia for the expression of their vernacular Hindi 6 . 

No doubt it must be admitted that, had any overmastering conviction of the necessity for the 
general use of written signs taken hold of the Hindu mind in early times, India would not have 
consented to be beholden to other countries for even improvements in her own forms of writing. 

But the most patriotic of India’s patriots must acknowledge that the Hindus have always preferred 
oral to written communications. Indeed, although a vast literature exists in Sanskrit, no word exists 
exactly corresponding to our English word ‘literature 6 ;' and even if such a word were available, true 

1 In Book viii, 168 written legal documents are mentioned. 

3 He gives the words lipi and libi in one of his rules (iii, 2, 21). 

3 The bark of the Bhoj (or Birch) tree and the leaf of the palm 
seem to have constituted the chief material used by the Hindus 
till the introduction of paper by the Muhammadans. No such 
durable materials as Egyptian papyrus or European parchment— 
the latter being prohibited on account of its impurity-—seem to 
have been employed. 

4 See note 3, p. xxv. 

5 Hindi when so transliterated is called Hindustani or Urdu. 

3 Litera , ‘a letter/ is derived from lino, ‘to smear,’ just as San¬ 
skrit lipi from lip. If a corresponding word were to be used in 
Sanskrit it would be lipi-iastra. The word akshara , which is 
the Sanskrit for a letter, properly means ‘ indelible,’ and this 
meaning seems to point to the use of letters in early times for 
inscriptions on stones and metal. Similarly the first meaning of 
lekha is * scratching with a sharp point.’ 



Indian Pandits would prefer to designate the immense series of their sacred books by such words as Veda, 
or Vidya (from vid, ‘to know’), Sruti (from sru , ‘to hear’), Sastra (from sas t ‘to teach'), Smriti (from smri, 
‘to remember’); the reason being that, like Papias, Bishop of Hierapolis ^whose date, according to Dean 
Farrar, is 140 a.d.), they consider ‘that the things from books are not so advantageous as things from 
the living and abiding voice.’ Nor must we forget that the climate of India was unfavourable to the 
preservation of such writing material as existed in ancient times. 

And besides this may it not be conjectured that the invention and general diffusion of alphabetic 
writing was to Indian learned men, gifted with prodigious powers of memory, and equipped with laboriously 
acquired stores of knowledge, very much what the invention and general use of machinery was to European 
handicraftsmen ? It seemed to deprive them of the advantage and privilege of exercising their craft. It 
had to be acquiesced in, and was no doubt prevalent for centuries before the Christian era, but it was not 
really much encouraged. And even to this day in India the man whose learning is treasured up in his 
own memory is more honoured than the man of far larger acquirements, whose knowledge is either wholly 
or partially derived from books, and dependent on their aid for its communication to others 1 . 

It seems, therefore, not unreasonable to assume that, when the idea of the necessity for inventing 
alphabetic signs began to impress itself on the minds of Semitic races, it had not taken such deep root 
among the inhabitants of India as to lead to the invention or general adoption of any one fixed system 
of writing of their own. It seems, indeed, more probable that learned men in that country viewed the art of 
writing too apathetically to make a stand against the introduction of alphabetical ideas from foreign sources. 

At all events there can be no antecedent improbability in the theory propounded by German Sanskritists 
that an early passage of phonographic symbols took place from a Phoenician centre eastward towards Mesopo¬ 
tamia and India, at about the same period as their passage westward towards Europe, namely, about 800 b. c. 

It is not asserted that the exact channel by which they were transmitted has been satisfactorily 
demonstrated. Some think — and, as it seems to me, with much plausibility — that they may have been 
introduced through contact with the Greeks 2 . Perhaps a more likely conjecture is that Hindu traders, 
passing up the Persian Gulf, had commercial dealings with Aramaean traders in Mesopotamia, and, becoming 
acquainted with their graphic methods, imported the knowledge and use of some of their phonetic signs 
into India. 

This view was first propounded in the writings of the learned Professor A. Weber of Berlin, and has 
recently been ably argued in a work on ‘ Indische Palteographie,’ by the late Professor Biihler of Vienna 
(published in 1896). If Indian Pandits will consult that most interesting standard work, they will there find 
a table exhibiting the most ancient of known Phoenician letters side by side with the kindred symbols used 
in the Moabite inscriptions of King Mesha—which, as before intimated, is known to be as old as about 
850 b.c, —while in parallel columns, and in a series of other excellent tables, are given the corresponding 
phonographic symbols from the numerous inscriptions of King Asoka scattered everywhere throughout 
Central and Northern India 3 . 

These inscription-alphabets are of two principal kinds :— 

The first kind is now called Kharoshthi (or ‘ Ass’s lip ’ form of writing, lipi being understood) 4 . This 
belongs to the North-west corner of the Panjab and Eastern Afghanistan. It was used by King Asoka for 
a few of his rock and stone inscriptions, and is a kind of writing the prototype of which was probably 
introduced into Persia about 500 b, c., and brought by Persian rulers into Northern India in the fourth 

1 Pandit Syamaji in his second paper, read at the Leyden 
Congress, said: ‘ We in India believe even at the present day 
that oral instruction i6 far superior to book-learning in maturing 
the mind and developing its powers.’ 

2 Certainly, as I think, the change of direction in the writing 
may have been due to Greek influence. Panini, who probably 
lived about 400 b.c., gives as an example of feminine nouns the 
word Yavandni , which Katyayana interprets to mean ‘ the Greek 
alphabet;’ and we know that Greek coins and imitations of Greek 
coins, unearthed in North-western India, prove the existence of 
that alphabet there before Alexander the Great’s time. Hindu 
receptivity of Greek influences is illustrated by the number of 
astronomical words derived directly from the Greeks to be found 
scattered throughout the pages of the present Dictionary. 

3 Asoka, who called himself Priya-darsin, and w’as the grand¬ 

son of Candra-gupta, did for Buddhism what Constantine did for 
Christianity, by adopting it as his own creed. Buddhism then 
became the religion of the whole kingdom of Magadha, and 
therefore of a great portion of India ; and Asoka’s edicts, inscribed 
on rocks and pillars (about the middle of the third century B. C,), 

furnish the first authentic records of Indian history. Yet the 
language of these inscriptions cannot be said to be exactly identical 
with so-called Magadhi Prakrit, nor with the Pali of the Buddhist 
sacred scriptures, although those forms of Prakrit may be loosely 
called either Magadhi or Pali. Nor was the name Pali originally 
applied to the language of the Buddhist Canon, but rather to the 
line or series of passages constituting a text (cf. the use 0 itantra). 
According to Professor Oldenberg the Vinaya portion of the texts, 
existed in its present form as early as 400 B. C. The later Buddhist 
texts were written down not long after, and commentaries have 
since been compiled in Pali and the languages of Ceylon, Siam, 
and Burma; the Pali of Ceylon being affected by intercourse with 
Kalinga (Orissa). 

4 See this Kharoshthi fully described in Professor Biihler’s book. 
The first names given to it were Ariano-Pali, Bactro-Pali, 
Indo-Bactrian, North Asoka &c. Sir A. Cunningham called it 
Gandharian. Pandit Gauri - Samkar, in his interesting work 
Praciaa-lipi-mala written in Hindi, calls it Gandhara-lipi . Some 
think that Kharoshthi is derived from the name of the in¬ 


V V- 

At all events, it is well known that the Persian monarchs of the Akhsemenian period 
employed Aramaean scribes, and that the KharoshthI writing, even if originally Indian (according to 

4 V - 


Sir A, Cunningham and others), has assumed under their hands a manifestly Aramaic character, flowing 


like all Semitic writing from right to left. Possibly, however, as it seems to me, Grecian influences (which 
penetrated into India before the time of Alexander) may have partially operated in assimilating this early 
North-western Indian script to a Phoenician type. It may be excluded from our present inquiry, because 
it never became generally current in India, and never developed into a form suitable for printing. 

The second kind of ancient Indian script is called Brahma (or Brahmi lipi), This is without doubt the 
oldest of the two principal forms 1 * . Its claim to greater antiquity is proved by its name Brahma—given 
to it by the Brahmans, because, as they assert, it was invented by their god Brahma*—an assertion which 
may be taken as indicating that, whatever its origin, it was moulded into its present form by the BrShmans, 

And undeniably it is this Brahma writing (Brahmi lipi) which has the best right to be called the true 
ndian Brahmanical script. It must have been the first kind of writing used when Sanskrit literature began 
to be written down (perhaps six centuries b. e.), and it is the script of the Asoka inscriptions of Central 
and Northern India—and even of North-western India, where it is found concurrently with the KharoshthI. 
It was employed to express the Prakrit dialect 3 of the Buddhist kings, and flowed, like its later development 
called N&gari, from left to right. Its first appearance on actually existing inscriptions—so far as at present 
discovered—cannot be placed earlier than the date of these kings in the third century b.c. 

But it is important to note that the existence of the Br 5 hmT lipi in India must be put back to 
a period sufficiently early to allow for its having once flowed from right to left like the KharoshthI, probably 
as early as the sixth century b.c. This is made clear by the direction of the letters on an ancient coin 
discovered by Sir A. Cunningham at Eran 4 5 —a place in the central provinces remarkable for its monumental 
remains. One can scarcely accept seriously the suggestion that the position of the short f i in the present 
Nag&ri is a survival of the original direction of the writing 6 . 

If then any unprejudiced Hindu scholar will examine attentively the tables io Professor Btihleris book, 
he will, I think, be constrained to admit that the Indian Brahma letters have certain features which connect 
them with the ancient Phoenician script, and therefore with the Greek and Roman. 

It should not, however, be forgotten that an interval of nearly seven centuries separates the Phoenician 
from the Brahma inscription-letters, and that to make the affinity between the two alphabets clearer the 
side-lights afforded by collateral and intermediate Semitic scripts ought to be taken into account®. Nor 
should it be forgotten that when the Hindus, like the Greeks, changed the direction of their writing, some 
of the symbols were turned round or their forms inverted, or closed up or opened out in various ways. 

The further development of the Brahma symbols into the modem Deva-nagarl and its co-ordinate 
scripts 7 is easily traceable. It must, however, be borne in mind that the later Pandits tried to improve 
the ancient graphic signs by setting them up as upright as possible and by drawing a horizontal stroke 
to serve as a line from which the letters might hang down, and so secure a system of straight writing 
often conspicuously absent in Hindustani and Persian caligraphy 8 . 

I here append a table consisting of seven columns, in which I have so arranged the letters as to 
illustrate the view that the Phoenician alphabet spread about 800 b.c. first westward towards Greece and 
Italy, and secondly eastward towards India. 

The column marked 1 gives ten Phoenician letters. That marked 2, to the left of 1, gives the ten 
corresponding Greek letters ; that marked 3 the corresponding Roman; and that marked 4 the corre¬ 
sponding English letters. Then the column marked 2, to the right of 1, gives the ten corresponding Brahma 
letters; that marked 3 shows the gradual developments of the Brahma symbols as exhibited on various 
inscriptions; and that marked 4 gives the corresponding letters in modern NSgari*. 

1 A variation of it cailed Bhaftiprolu is described by Buhler. 

8 In the same way the great Arabian Teacher Muhammad 
declared in the first Sura of the Karan (according to Rodwell, 
P- *ad Sale, p. 450 with note) that ‘ God taught the use of the 
pen/ Even some Christians may not be indisposed to agree with 
Hindus and Muhammadans in holding that the faculty of writing, 
m instrument for the expression of thought—although dormant 
through all the early ages of the world’s history—is as much a 
divine gift as language. Muhammad’s view, however, of the 
divine origin of writing consisted, in declaring that the Kuran 
led ready written from heaven. 

* For the language of the inscriptions, see p. xxv, note 3. 

' These letters are shown io Professor Buhier’s tables. 

5 Our invaluable decimal notation certainly came from India, 

stay be said to conform to Semitic methods in the direction 

of the notation, inasmuch as units are placed on the right, while 
tens and hundreds are on the left. 

* Professor Buhier’s first table in his work on Indian Palseo* 
graphy would have been more convincing had he given examples 
of collateral and intermediate Semitic forms. 

7 Such as the Bengali, the Marathi, GajarfttI &c,, some of which 
may be usefully studied as presenting forms more closely resem¬ 
bling the ancient Brahma letters. 

A similar line is often drawn in English copybooks and on 
writing paper as an aid to straight writing, but always below, not 
above the letters. 

9 Dr. Liiders, of the Indian Institute, has kindly assisted me fa 
the right formation of some of the inscription letters. The 
roughness of some is due to their being photographs from 
original impressions. 




Let any one study this Table and he must, I think, admit that it indicates an original connexion of 
family likeness between the Phoenician and earliest Indian or Brahma letters, whilst it also illustrates the 
fact that the plastic hand of the Brahmans has greatly modified and expanded the original germs, without, 
however, obliterating the evident indications of their connexion with the Phoenician. 














































i | 


0 I 





Developments op Brahma 




.V • - V • rV # 








zr - 







I • • 










■ as; 

* This is for the Greek theta , which is represented in this Dictionary, according to present usage, by th, although t or t* 
would be a more scientific symbol. 

§ According to Professor Biihler, the Brahma, Q became Nagari V dh t from which ^ d was evolved. 

And indeed the modest equipment of twenty-two letters which satisfied the Phoenicians, Greeks, and 
Romans, to whom the invention of writing was a mere human contrivance for the attainment of purely 
human ends, could not possibly have satisfied the devout Hindu, who regarded his language as of divine 
origin, and therefore not to be expressed by anything short of a perfect system of equally divine symbols. 
Even the popular Prakrit of King Asoka's edicts seems to have required nearly forty symbols 1 , and the 

1 Some of the inscriptions had not the full complement of 
vowel-signs. As a matter of fact I find that in some inscriptions 
a list of only thirty-five letters in all is given, while in others there 
are thirty-six, and in others again thirty-nine. Professor Biihler 
says (p. 82 of his latest work published in 1898) that the ordinary 
Brahma alphabet has forty-four letters traceable in the oldest 

inscriptions (including the Bhafpprolu) which with au (derived 
from 0) would make forty-five, and with the mark for Visarga 
which ‘ first occurs in the Kush&na inscriptions f forty-six. The 
common reckoning for the vowels, as taught in indigenous schools, 
makes them only twelve. 



amount needed for the full Brahmi Jipi, as used for the Sanskrit of that period, could not have been less 
than fifty (if the symbols for at, au, ri , rz, Iri, In, and la be included). 

Then, if we turn to the Brahma alphabet in its final development, called Nagari, we see at a glance 
that it is based on the scientific phonetic principle of ‘one sound one symbol'—that is, every consonantal 
sound is represented by one invariable symbol, and every shade of vowel-sound — short, long, or prolated 
has one unvarying sign (not as in English where the sound of e in be may be represented in sixteen 
different ways). Hence, for the expression of the perfectly constructed Sanskrit language there are sixteen 
vowel-signs (including am and ah and excluding the prolated vowel forms), and thirty-five simple consonants, 
as exhibited on p. xxxvi of this volume. 

Of course a system of writing so highly elaborated was only perfected by degrees 1 , and no doubt it 
is admirably adapted to the purposes it is intended to serve. Yet it is remarkable that even in its latest 

development, as employed in the present Dictionary, it has characteristics indicative of its probable original 
connexion with Semitic methods of writing, which from their exclusively consonantal character are admittedly 


For the Pandits, unlike the Greeks and Romans, cannot in my opinion be said to have adopted to 
the full the true alphabetic theory which assigns a separate independent position to all vowel-signs. And 
my reason for so thinking is that they make the commonest of all their vowels—namely short a 2 —inherent 
in every isolated consonant, and give a subordinate position above or below consonants to some of their 
vowel-signs. And this partially syllabic character of their consonantal symbols has compelled them to 
construct an immense series of intricate conjunct consonants, some of them very complicated, the necessity 
for which may be exemplified by supposing that the letters of the English word ‘ strength * were Nagari 

letters, and written This would have to be pronounced satarenagatha , unless a conjunction 

of consonantal signs were employed, to express sir and ngth, and unless the mark called Virama, ‘ stop/ 
were added to the last consonant. So that with only thirty-three simple consonants and an almost in¬ 
definite number of complex conjunct consonants the number of distinct types necessary to equip a perfect 
Sanskrit fount for printing purposes amounts to more than 500. 

Surely, then, no one will maintain that, in these days of every kind of appliance for increased facilities 
of inter-communication, any language is justified in shutting itself up behind such a complex array of 
graphic signs, however admirable when once acquired. At all events such a system ought not to have the 
monopoly for the expression of a language belonging to the same family as our own and in a country 
forming an integral part of the British Empire. The Sanskrit language, indeed, is a master-key to a know¬ 
ledge of all the Hindu vernaculars, and should moreover be studied as a kind of linguistic bond of sympathy 
and fellow-feeling between the inhabitants of the United Kingdom and their Indian fellow-subjects. But to 
this end every facility ought to be afforded for its acquirement. 

And if, as we have tried to show, the Brahmi lipi, the Nagari, and the Greek and Romanic alphabets 
are all four related to each other—at least, in so far as they are either derived from or connected with the 
same rudimentary stock—it surely cannot be opposed to the fitness of things, that both the Nagari and 
Romanic alphabets should be equally applied to the expression of Sanskrit, and both of them made to 
co-operate in facilitating its acquisition. 

Nor let it be forgotten that in the present day the use of the English language is spreading everywhere 
throughout India, and that it already co-exists with Sanskrit as a kind of lingua franca or medium of com¬ 
munication among; educated persons, just as Latin once co-existed with Greek. So much so indeed, that, 
contemporaneously with the diffusion of the English language, the Roman graphic system, adopted by all 
the English-speaking inhabitants of the British Empire, has already forced itself on the acceptance of the 
Pandits, whether they like it or not, as one vehicle for the expression of their languages; just as centuries 
ago the Arabic and Persian written characters were forced upon them by their Muhammadan conquerors 
for the expression of Hindi. 

It is on this account that I feel justified in designating the European method of transliteration employed 
in this Dictionary by the term ‘ Indo-Romanic alphabet.' 

And be it understood that such an acceptance of the Romanic alphabet involves no unscientific 

1 The oldest known inscription in Sanskrit is on a rock a 
Juna-garh in Kathiawar. It is called the Rudra-daman inscrip 
tion, and dates from the second century a.d. It is not in Nagari 
hut in old inscription letters. The Bower MS. of about 400 A.D 
shows a great advance towards the Nagari, while Danti-durga’; 

inscription of about 750 A.D. exhibits a complete set of sym¬ 
bols very similar to the Nagari now in use. It is noteworthy, 
however, that the first manuscript in really modern Nagari is not 
older than the eleventh century a. d. 

3 This a is the a of our words 'vocal organ’ (pronounced vocut 
orguri). Sanskrit does not possess the sound of a in our ‘ man/ 
nor that of 0 in our ‘ on.’ Asa consonant cannot be pronounced 
without a vowel, the Brahmans chose the commonest of their 
vowels for the important duty of enabling every consonant to be 
pronounced. Hence every consonant is named by pronouncing 
it with a (e. g. ka, kha, ga &c.). It is, I suppose, for a similar 
reason that we have used the.common vowel symbol c for naming 
many of our English letters. 



adaptation of it to the expression of Sanskrit like our chaotic adaptation of it to the expression of English ; 
or like the inaccurate use of it by native writers themselves in transliterating their own Indian words \ 
Quite the reverse. The Roman alphabet adapts itself so readily to expansion by the employment of 
diacritical points and marks, that it may be regarded as a thoroughly scientific instrument for the accurate 
expression of every Indian sound, and probably of nearly every sound, in every language of the world. 
And it may, I think, be confidently predicted that before the twentieth century has closed, man’s vision, 
overtasked by a constantly increasing output of literary matter, will peremptorily demand that the reading 
of the world’s best books be facilitated by the adoption of that graphic system which is most universally 
applicable and most easily apprehensible. Whether, however, the Roman symbols will be ultimately chosen 
in preference to other competing systems as the best basis for the construction of a world's future universal 
alphabet no one can, of course, foretell with the same confidence. 

One thing, I contend, is certain. Any ordinary scholar who consults the present work will be ready 
to admit that it derives much of its typographical clearness from certain apparently trifling, but really 
important, contrivances, possible in Romanic type, impossible in Nagari. One of these, of course, is the 
power of leaving spaces between the words of the Sanskrit examples. Surely such a sentence as 
sadhu-mitrany akusaldd vdrayanii is clearer than sadhumitranyakusaladvarayanti , Again, who will deny the 
gain in clearness resulting from the ability to make a distinction between such words as ‘ smith' and 
‘ Smith,' ‘ brown' and * Brown,’ ‘ bath ’ and ‘ Bath ? ’ not to speak of the power of using italics and other 
forms of European type. And, without doubt, the use of the hyphen for separating long compounds in 
a language where compounds prevail more than simple words 2 , will be appreciated by all. I can only 
say that, wiihout that most useful little mark, the present volume must have lost much in clearness, and 
still more in compactness; for, besides the obvious advantage of being able to indicate the difference 
between such compounds as su-tapa and suta-pa which would have been impossible in Nagari type, it is 
manifest that even the simplest compounds, like sad-asad-viveka, sv-alpa-kesin, would have required, 
without its use, an extra line to explain their analysis 3 . 

Fairness, however, demands that a few of the obvious defects of the Indo-Romanic system of 
transliteration adopted in this volume should be acknowledged. In certain cases it confessedly offends 
against scientific exactness; nor does it always consistently observe the rule that every simple vowel-sound 

should be represented by a single symbol. For instance, the Sanskrit vowels c and % are not 
represented in this Dictionary by the symbols r and r, according to the practice of some German 
scholars—a practice adopted by the Geneva Transliteration Committee—but by ri and ri. And my reason 
is that, inasmuch as in English Grammar r is not regarded as a semi-vowel, r and f are unsuitable 
representatives of vowel-sounds. Moreover, they are open to this objection, that when the dot under the r 
is accidentally dropped or broken off, as often happens in printing, especially in India, the result is worse 
than if the r were followed by i. For example, Krshna is surely worse than Krishna. 

So again in the case of aspirated consonants, the aspiration ought not to be represented by a second 

letter attached to them. Indeed, in the case of ch employed by Sir W. Jones for the palatal and chh 
for the inconvenience has been so great that in the present edition I have adopted (in common with 
many other Sanskritisis) the simple c for ^f, the pronunciation being the same as c in the Italian dolce or 
as ch in ‘ church,' the latter of which would, if a Sanskrit word, be written 1 cure.’ Similarly ch has been 
adopted for 

As to the transliteration of the palatal sibilant I have preferred i to the i employed in the first 
edition, and I much prefer it to the German and French method of using c. Experience proves that the 
cedilla is often either broken off in printing or carelessly dropped, and as a consequence important words 
such as Asoka are now often wrongly printed and pronounced Acoka. 

So also I should have preferred the symbol s for the cerebral sibilant, but have felt it desirable to 
retain sh in the present edition. There is the same objection to s as to the r mentioned above. This 

1 Take, for example, the following transliterated words in 
a recent pamphlet by a native:— Devi, puja , Durga, Purana , 
ashtami , Krshna, Savitri, Acoka, Civa &c. I have even seen 
crab written for the Hindustani kharab, ‘bad.‘ 

2 Forster gives an example of one compound word consisting of 
152 syllables. This might be matched by even longer specimens 
from what is called Campu composition. 

3 We may, at least, entertain a hope that the hyphen will not 
be denied to Sanskrit for the better understanding of the more 
complex words, such, for example, as vaidikamanvddipranita- 
smrititvdt , karmaphalarupalariradharijtvanirm it a Ivabhavamd- 
Irena , taken at haphazard from Dr. Muirs Texts. We may 
even express a hope that German scholars and other Europeans, 

rho speak forms of Aryan speech, all of them equally delighting 
1 composition, may more frequently condescend to employ the 
yphen for some of their own Sesquipedalia Verba, thereby 
uitating the practical Englishman in his Parliamentary com¬ 
ounds, such, for example, as Habeas-corpus-suspension-act-con - 

4 In the paper on transliteration, which 1 read at the Berlin 
nternational Congress, I proposed a kind of mark of accentua- 
,on to represent aspirated consonants, as, for example, P , p/. 
'o say (as at p. xxxvi) that aspirated k or p is like kh in inkhorn 
r ph in uphill is to a certain extent misleading. It is simply 

or p pronounced as in Ireland with a forcible emission of the 



will be clear if we write the important word Bishi in the way German scholars write it, namely Bsi, and 
then omit the dots thus, Bsi. 

In regard to the nasals I have in the present edition adopted h for T and n for In these 

changes I am glad to find myself in accord with the Geneva Transliteration Committee. 

As to the method of using italic k, kk for ^ ^ and italic g , gh for ^—adopted in the * Sacred Books 

of the East’—the philological advantage thought to be gained by thus exhibiting the phonetic truth of the 
interchange of gutturals and palatals, appears to me to be completely outweighed by the disadvantage 
of representing by similar symbols sounds differing so greatly in actual pronunciation. For instance, to 
represent such common words as ‘chinna’ by ‘^inna’ and ‘jaina J by ‘^aina’ seems to me as objectionable 
as to write ‘AT^ina’ for ‘China’ and ‘ £apan’ for ‘Japan.’ The plan of using Italics is no safeguard, seeing 
that in printing popular books and papers the practice of mixing up Roman and Italic letters in the same 
word is never adhered to, so that it is now common to find the important Indian sect of Jains printed 
and pronounced ‘ Gains V 

Having felt obliged by the form in which this Dictionary is printed to dwell at full length on 
a matter of the utmost importance both in its bearing on the more general cultivation of Sanskrit and 
on the diffusion of knowledge in our Eastern Empire, I must now repeat my sense of the great assistance 
the cause of the transliteration of Indian languages into Romanized letters formerly received at the hands 
of the late Sir Charles Trevelyan. He was the first (in his able minute, dated Calcutta, January, 1834 2 ) 
to clear away the confusion of ideas with which the subject was perplexed. He also was the first to 
awaken an interest in the question throughout England about forty-two years ago. His arguments 
induced me to take part in the movement, and our letters on the subject were published by the ‘Times,’ 
and supported by its advocacy. Since then, many Oriental books printed on a plan substantially agreeing 
with Sir W. Jones’ Indo-Romanic system, have been published 3 . Moreover, on more than one occasion 
I directed the attention of the Royal Asiatic Society 4 , and of the Church Missionary Society 5 , and Bible 
Society, to this important subject, and at the Congress of Orientalists held at Berlin in September, i88r, 
I read a paper, and submitted a proposal for concerted international action with a view to the fixing of 
a common scheme of transliteration. The discussion that followed led to the appointment of the first 
Commission for settling a common international system of transcription, and it may, I think, be fairly 
assumed that the agitation thus set in motion, and carried on for so many years, was one of the principal 
factors in bringing about the proposed international scheme issued by the Transliteration Committee of the 
Geneva Oriental Congress in September, 1894. 


Acknowledgment of Assistance Received. 

In the Preface to the first edition I made special mention of the name of an eminent scholar who was 
a member of the Oxford University Press Delegacy when the publication of that edition ftas undertaken— 
Dr. Robert Scott, sometime Master of Balliol, afterwards Dean of Rochester, and co-author with Dr. Liddell 
of the well-known Greek Lexicon. He had been one of my kindest friends, and wisest counsellors, ever 
since the day I went to him for advice during my first undergraduate days at Balliol, on my receiving an 
appointment in the Indian Civil Service, and I need scarcely repeat my sense of what this Dictionary, in 
its inception, owed to his support and encouragement. 

Nor need I repeat the expression of my sense of obligation to my predecessor in the Boden Chair, 
Professor H. H. Wilson, who first led me to the study of Sanskrit about sixty years ago (in 1839), and 
furnished me with my first materials for an entirely new system of Sanskrit lexicography (see p. xi). All the 
words and meanings marked W. in the following pages in the present work rest on his authority. 

1 Surely we ought to think of our Indian fellow-subjects who in 
their eagerness to learn the correct pronunciation of English would 
be greatly confused if cold that such good old English words as 
pinch) catch , chin , much, jump, jest, ought to be written pia£, 
ca£, £in, mnh, ^ump, ^est. 

2 This will be found at p. 3 of the 1 Original Papers illustrating 

the History of the Application of the Roman Alphabet to the 

Languages of India,’ edited by me in 1859. 

a Among other numberless publications a most accurate edition 

of the Rig-veda itself, edited by Professor Aufrecht, was printed 
in the Roman character, and published in two of the volumes of 
Professor Weber’s Indische Studien, 

4 See especially my paper read before the R. A.S., April 21, 

6 In 1858 I wrote strong letters to the Rev. Henry Venn, 
deprecating the system of transliteration then adopted by the 
C. M. S. It has been recently remodelled on the lines of the 
Geneva Congress report. 



Nevertheless, sincerity obliges me to confess that, during my long literary career, my mind has had to 
pass through a kind of painful discipline involving a gradual weakening of faith in the trustworthiness of 
my fellow men, not excepting that of my first venerated teacher. I began my studies, indeed, with much 
confidence in the thought that one man existed on whom I could lean as an almost infallible guide; but 
as I grew a little wiser, and my sensitiveness to error sharpened, I discovered to my surprise that I was 
compelled to reject much of his teaching as doubtful. Nay, I am constrained to confess that as I advanced 
further on the path of knowledge, my trustfulness in others, besides my old master, experienced by degrees 
a series of disagreeable and unexpected shocks; till now, that I have arrived at nearly the end of my journey, 
I find myself left with my faith in the accuracy of human beings generally—and certainly not excepting 
myself—somew'hat distressingly disturbed. Such painful feelings result, I fear, in my own case from a gradual 
and inevitable growth of the critical faculty during a long lifetime, and are quite consistent with a sense 
of gratitude for the etfective aid received from my collaborators, without which, indeed, I could not have 
brought this w'ork to a conclusion. 

In my original Preface I expressed my thanks to each and all of the scholars who aided me in the 
compilation of the first edition, and whose names in the chronological order of their services were as follow 

The late Rev. J. Wenger, of the Baptist Mission, Calcutta; Dr. Franz Kielhorn, afterwards Superintendent 
of Sanskrit Studies in Deccan College, Poona, and now Professor of Sanskrit in the University of Gottingen; 
Dr. Hermann Brunnhofer; Mr. A. E. Gough, M.A., of Lincoln College, Oxford, sometime Professor in the 
Government Colleges of Benares, Allahabad, and Calcutta; and lastly, Mr. E. L. Hogarth, M.A., of Brasenose 
College, sometime Head Master of the Government Provincial School at Calicut. 

It is now my duty to express my grateful obligations to the able and painstaking Assistants who have 
co-operated with me in producing the present greatly enlarged and improved work. 

No one but those who have taken part in similar labours can at all realize the amount of tedious toil— 
I might almost say dreary drudgery—involved in the daily routine of small lexicographical details, such as 
verifying references and meanings, making indices and lists of words, sorting and sifting an ever-increasing 
store of materials, revising old work, arranging and re-arranging new, w riting and re-writing and interlineating 
'copy/ correcting and re-correcting proofs—printed, be it remembered, in five kinds of intricate type, bristling 
with countless accents and diacritical points, and putting the eyesight, patience, and temper of author, 
collaborators, compositors, and press-readers to severe trial. I mention these matters not to magnify my own 
labours, but to show that I could not have prosecuted them without the able co-operation of others. 

The names of my new Assistants in chronological order are as follow:— 

First, Dr. Ernst Leumann (a native of Switzerland), who worked with me in Oxford from October 3, 
1882, until April 15, 1884, when he accepted a teachership in the Kantonschule of Frauenfeld in Switzerland. 
I have already acknowledged my obligations to him. 

He was succeeded by the late Dr, Schonberg (a pupil of the late Professor Btihier), who came to me 
in a condition of great physical weakness, and whose assistance only extended from May 20, 1884, to July 19, 
1885, when he left me to die. He was a good scholar, and a good worker, but impatient of supervision, 
and, despite my vigilance, I found it impossible to guard against a few' errors of omission and commission 
due to the rapid impairment of his powders. 

Then followed an interval during which my sources of aid were too fitful to be recorded. 

In September, 1886, Dr. Leumann, who had meanwhile been appointed Professor of Sanskrit in the 
University of Strassburg, renewed his co-operation, but only in an intermittent manner, and while still resident 
in Germany. Unhappily the pressure of other duties obliged him in September, 1890, to withdraw from 
all work outside that of his Professorship. He laboured with me in a scholarly way as far as p. 474; but 
his collaboration did not extend beyond 355 pages, because he took no part in pp. 137-256, which represent 
the period of Dr. Schbnberg’s collaboration. 

It was not till December, 1890, that Dr. Carl Cappeller, Professor of Sanskrit in the University of Jena, 
began his painstaking co-operation, which, starting from the word Dada (p. 474)* he has prosecuted per- 
severingly to the completion of the Dictionary. And it should be put on record that, although his 
collaboration had to be carried on contemporaneously with the discharge of his duties at Jena—involving 
the necessity for a constant interchange of communications by post—yet it resulted in the production of 
834 finished pages between March, 1891, and July, 1898. It should also be recorded that, from the beginning 
of the letter ^ /, he had a careful assistant in Dr. Blau of Berlin, who also occasionally read the proof-sheets 
and contributed a certain number of words for the Addenda. 

Furthermore, I must express my gratitude to Herr Geheirnrath Franz Kielhorn, C. L £., Ph.D., Professor 
of Sanskrit in the University of Gottingen, who was my assistant soon after the inception of the first edition, 
for his free and generous supervision of the grammatical portions of the present edition from about the 
year 1886; and his readiness to place at my disposal the experience which he gained during his labours 
for many years as Superintendent of Sanskrit Studies at the Government College, Poona. 



I have finally to record my grateful appreciation of the value of the principal works used or consulted 
by my collaborators and myself in compiling this Dictionary. Some of these, and a few important grammatical 
works—such as the Maha-bhashya (in the excellent edition of Professor Kielhorn), the Siddhanta-kaumudi 
&c.—besides many other texts, such as that of Manu, the Brihat-samhita &c., did not exist in good 
critical editions when the great Thesaurus of the two German Lexicographers was being compiled. 

Professor Ernst Leumann informs me that during the period of his collaboration he was much aided 

by Grassmann's Rig-veda, Whitney's Index Verborum to the published text of the Atharva-veda; Stenzler's 


Indices to the Grihya-sutras of Asvalayana, of Paraskara, Sankhayana, Gobhila. and the Dharma-sastra of 
Gautama; the vocabularies to Aufrecht's edition of the Aitareya Brahmana; Bidder's Apastamba Dharrna- 
sutra; Garbe’s Vaitana-sutra; Hillebrandt's Sankhayana Srauta-suira &c. He states that in his portion of 
the work his aim was rather to verify and revise the words and meanings given in the Petersburg 
Dictionaries than to add new and unverifiable matter. In regard to quotations he refers the reader to 
the Journal of the German Oriental Society, vol. xlii, pp. 161-198. 

Professor C. Cappeller states that in addition to the books enumerated above he wishes to name in 
the first place Bohtlingk's Upanishads, his Panini (2nd ed.) and Kavyadarsa as well as the valuable critical 
remarks of that honoured Nestor of Sanskritists on numerous texts, published in various journals; further 
the Jaiminlya Upanishad Brahmana edited by H. Oertel, and various Sutra works with their indices by 
F. Knauer, M. Winternitz, J. Kirste, and W. Caland. For some additions contributed from the Drahyayana 
Srauta-sutra he is indebted to Dr. J. N. Reuter of Helsingfors. He also made use of the Vaijayanti 
of Yadava-prakasa (edited by G. Oppert, London, 1893); the Unadigana-sutra of Hemacandra (edited by 
J. Kirste, Vienna, 1895); the Dictionaries of Apte (Poona, 1890), of A. A. Macdonell (London, 1893), of 
C. Cappeller (Strassburg, 1891); Whitney's Roots, Verb-forms, and Primary Derivatives of the Sanskrit 
Language (Leipzig, 1885); Lanman's Noun-inflection in the Veda (New Plaven, 1880); Jacob Wackernagel's 
Altindische Gramm itik (Gottingen, 1896); Delbruck's Akindische Syntax (Halle, 1888); Regnaud's Rh&orique 
Sanskrite (Paris, 1884); Levi's Theatre Indien (Paris, 1890); Macdonell’s Vedic Mythology (Strassburg, 
1897), &c. 

For Vedic interpretation Roth and Grassmann have been the chief authorities, but it will be seen that 
neither Sayana nor such modern interpreters as Pischel and Geldner in Vedische Studien (Stuttgart, 1889- 
1897), and Bloomfield for the Atharva-veda (in S. B. E., vol. xlii) have been neglected. 

The Buddhistic portion of the Dictionary has chiefly been enriched by the following:—Asvaghosha's 
Buddha-carita (edited and translated by Professor E. B. Cowell of Cambridge); Divyavadana (edited by Cowell 
and Neil, Cambridge, 1886); Jataka-inala (edited by H. Kern, Boston, 1891); the two Sukhavatl-vyuhas 
(S. B. E., vol. xlix) and the Dharma-samgraha (Anecdota Oxoniensia, 1885). It is evident, that until new 
and complete Pali and Prakrit Dictionaries are published, the idiomatic Sanskrit used by Buddhists and Jains 
and the authors of certain inscriptions cannot be dealt with satisfactorily. 

Of course many portions of the Indische Studien (edited by Professor A. Weber of Berlin) have been 
consulted, and valuable aid has been received from some of the translations contained in the ‘ Sacred Books 
of the East/ as well as from many other works, the names of which will be found in the List of Works 
and Authors at p. xxxiii. 

As to the books used by myself, many of them, of course, are identical with those named above. Others 
are named in the first edition, and need not be referred to again here. I ought, however, to repeat that some 
of the words marked MW. in the present edition rest on the authority of the Sabda-kalpa-druma of Radba- 
kanta-deva (published in eight volumes at Calcutta in the Bengali character). I am also, of course, responsible 
for some words and meanings taken from my own books, such as * Brahmanism and Hinduism/ ‘ Buddhism/ 

4 Indian Wisdom' (see note 1 to p. vi of Preface), my Sanskrit Grammar and Nalopakhyanam (with vocabulary, 
published by the Delegates of the Oxford University Press), text of the Sakuntala (with index and notes, 
published by the same), as well as from the notes appended to my English translation of the Sakuntala 
(published by Messrs. Harmswoith among Sir John Lubbock's hundred best books of the world), See. 

Indian Institute, Oxpord. 



[The order is ihat of the English Alphabet. The letters outside the parentheses represent the abbreviated forms 

used in the references.] 

Adi-p(arvan of the Maha- 



AlamkSras^arvasva, by Ruv- 

Alamk5ras 3 (arvasva, by Man- 

Alamkaras(ekhara, by Ke- 
AlamkSrav(imariinT, by Java- 





An(anta Sam(hita). 
Ap(astamba’s Dharma-sutra). 
Ap(astamba’s) Y(ajna-pari- 

A(pte’s Die ionary). 

Aiv’(alay ana-gfihy a) P(arisi- 

ASv(alayana-sakhokta) Man- 

A(tharva)V v eda). Paipp(aU- 

A (tharva) V(eda' .PariS(ishta). 
A (tharva-Veda) Pr (atisikh- 



Atm(a)Up(anishad), iii K’n. 
Badar(iyana*s Brahma-sutra). 
BSdar(ayana). Gov(ind2nan- 
da’s gloss). 

kara's Comm.). 
Baudh;ayana*s Dharma-s2s- 

Baudh(5yana , s)P(itrimedha- 









Bhar^ata’s NStya-sSstra). 

Bh(aratitirtha , s)pahcad(asi . 





Bh(5va'pr >> ak5sa'). 

Bhav v ishya)P x urana), ii Kh. 

(Bhavishya- Sc yottaraP.). 



B(ohtlingk &) R(oth’s) 

Brahmab^indu)Up anishad;. 





Brahm(a) Up(anishad). 
Brahmav(idy 5 )Up(anishad). 
Brahmdtt(ara)Kh^anda, from 
the Ska_ndaP.). 

Br (ihad) Aj(anyaka)Up(ani- 


Br (ihan' N 5 r; adly a; P(ur ana), 
xxxviii Adhy. 

Buddh(ist literature). 



Car (aka). 








; Daiv(ata)Br(3hmana). 
Damayanti-kathi, see Nalac. 


DevatadhySya = DaivBr. 



Dhanamj (aya-vijaya). 








Dhy5nab(indu)Up(anishad . 






Gal(anos’ Dictionary). 

Gan (£sa)P(urana . 







Gauragan (oddesa). 

Gaut ama’s Dharma-s2stnO. 

% * 


Ghat akarpara). 
Gobh(ila’s)Sr3ddh(a-ka!pa s . 

Gop atha)Br(ahmana). 

Grahay (ajna-tattva). 

Gr(ihya and) Sr(auta-Sutra). 







Hariv acSa). 



H3yan(a-ratna, by Balabha- 


H (emacandra’s)Paris(ishta- 

H (emacandra 1 s) Yog, a-! Sstra). 
H^emadri’s) cat(urvarga-cin- 

H i r (any akesin’s) Gr (i hy a -su - 





1 ndian)W isdom, by Sir M. 





Jaim^ini;Bh(3rata, S^vame- 
dhika parvan). 
Jain(a literature). 

Kaiy(ata or Kaiyyata). 








K 3 m(andakiya-nitisara). 

Kan ada’s Vai^eshika-sutra). 


: Kanth(asruty)Up(anishad). 

| Kap(ila)Samh(it3 ? from the 

I SkandaP.). 

Kap(ila’s' S( 3 mkhva-pravaca- 




Karand. 3 (metrical recension 
of the text'. 



Kas(ika Vritti). 

K5siKh(anda, from the 







Kaush(itaki) Ar(anyaka'. 

Kaush Jtaki )Up(anishad). 









Kav(ya literature;. 


Ked(3ra’s vritti-ratn^kafa). 
Ken ^a) Up (anishad). 
Kriy5y(oga-s2ra in the Padma 



Kshur(ik3)Up(anishad y . 


Kularn V ava-tantra). 

Kutl(uka’s commentary on 

Laghuj(2taka, by Varaha-mi- 


L(exicographers, esp. such as 
Amarasinha, HalSyudha, 
Hemacandra, &c.). 
LTl(5vati of BhSskara). 

; LihgaP(urina). 
M(acdonel)i(’s Dictionary, 

M2ghaMah(atmya in the 
Padma Purina). 
MahanirayanaUp. (see Nar° 



\ ♦ s 



Maitr(ayanI)S' v amhit5). 






Min(aviya)S(amhiti of the 

M ind(Ckl)S(ikshi). 

M5nd(0kya)Up(anishad), 12 


Mind(Qkya)Up(anishad Gau- 
d(ap5da’s Kariki). 

M antraBr(ahmana). 

M antram (ahfidadhi). 
M(a)n(u’s Law-book). 

Matsyas(ukta), Sabdak. 

Megh .*(15 additional verses). 
M(onier) Williams, I st edition 
of Dictionary, with mar¬ 
ginal notes). 

M(onier)W(illiams) Buddh¬ 




Mund(aKa v 'Up(anishad). 


NadTpr(akasa), Sabdak. 

Naigh(anfuka, commented on 

by Yaska). 
Nalac(ampQ or Damayanti- 





Nir(ada’s Law-book). 





N,ew) B v dhtlingk’s) D(ic- 

Nid(ina bv Madhava). 
Nid(ana),Sch. (i.e.VScaspati’s 


N (igh antu ) pr (ak aia). 





Nir(ukta, by Yaska). 

Nitis^ see Kam(andaklva-niti - 

Nris(inha-tapamya)Up (ani¬ 









Pancad. 2 (metrical recension). 
PaftcadasT, seeBh ( 2 ratitirtha’s) 

Paflcar( 5 tra). 


P 3 n(ini). 

P 5 n(inIya)S( iksha). 

P2 pabuddh id h a rm (abudd h i - 
Par 5 s(ara-smriti). 
Par(askara’s)Gr(ihya -sutra). 
Para§ur( 2ma -prak 2$a). 

Phetk( arinl-tantra). 
Ping(ala)Sch(oliast, i.e. Hala- 

Pradyumn (a-vijaya). 
Prah(asana Nataka). 
Praj§p(ati’s Dharma-sutra). 
Prln(agnihotra )Up(ani shad). 
Prasang( 2 bharana). 

Pravar(a texts). 

Pr aya$c (itta -tatt va). 
Priy(adarsik 5 ), 

Purushdtt(ama -tattva). 

RSghav(ap 2 n< 3 avTya). 


R 2 mag (It 2). 


Ramat( 2 pan!ya)Up(anishad). 


R( 2 m 2 yaija). 

R 2 sal(il 2 ). 



Rasendrac(int 2 mani). 




R(eligious) T(hought and) 
L(ife in India, also called 
‘ Br2hmanism and HindG- 
ism,' by Sir M. Monier- 


R(ig-)V(eda, referred to as 
' RV.). 

Ritus(amh 2 ra). 
R(V.)Anukr(amanik 3 ). 

Sabdak (alpa-druma). 



S2h (itya-darpana), 
Sahy(adri)Kh(anda, from the 

S 2 kat( 2 yana). 

S 5 kt£n(anda-taramgini). 




S(2ma)V (eda) Ar(anyaka). 
S 5 mav(idh 2 na)Br(§hmaiia). 
Sambh(alagr 5 ma)M 2 h( 2 t- 


Samh(it 2 )Up(anishad-br 2 h- 



S 5 mkhyak( 2 rik 2 ). 


S2nkh( 2yana)Gr (ihya-sutra). 


Sara$v(at!-kanthjlbharana, by 

Sarasv. 2 (by Kshem£ndra). 
Sarvad(ar$an a-sam graha). 

Sarv (a )Up (anishat-s2ra). 

S (atapatha) B r (2 hm ana). 
Satr(umjaya-m 2 h 2 tmya). 








Siksh 2 p(attri). 


SiohSs(ana-dv 2 trioSik 2 or Vi- 
kramSditya-caritra, Jaina 

Siohils. 3 (metrical recension of 
the Ind.Off., E.I.H. 2897). 
Siphis. 3 (recension of E.I. H. 

. 2523). 



Sivag(it2, ascribed to the 

Smritit(attva; the numbers 
xxix & xxx mark the ad¬ 
ditional texts Graha-yajha 
& Tlrtha-y2tr2). 




Srim( 2 la)M 5 h( 2 tmya). 



Subh( 2 shit 3 vali). 




Suparn(adhy 2 ya). 






S vapnac(r**t 2 mani). 

§ vet(a$vatara)Up(anishad). 

T (aittiriya) Ar( any aka). 

T (aittirTya)Br(2hmana). 

T (aittiriya) Pr 2 t(is 2 khya). 



T(2r2nStha Tarkav 2 caspati’s 

T arkas(amgraha). 
Tlrtha-y2tr2(see Smrititattva). 









U ttamac (ari tra -kath2 naka, 
prose version). 

Uttamac 3 (antra in about 700 


V 5 gbh(atalaipk 2 ra). 


V ( 2 jasaneyi)S(amhit 2 ). 

V ( 2 jasaneyi-Samh ita) Pr2t- 





V2m (ana’s KSvyalamkSra- 

V(ao^a)Br( 2 hmana). 

Var( 2 ha-mihira’s)Br(ihajj 5 - 


Var( 2 ha-mihira*s)Br(ihat) 






Vasantar(2ja’s S2kuna). 

V 2 s(avadatt 2 ). 



V 2 tsy 2 y(ana). 

Vedantap(aribh 5 sh 2 ), 

Vet( 2la-pahcavie$atik2). 
V(ikram&fikadeva)car(ita, by 




Vishn(u’s Institutes). 
Viivan(2tha, astronomer). 

Vrishabh 2 n(nj 2 -n 5 tik 2 (> byMa* 



Y 2 jn., Sch.(i.e. Mitakshari). 
Yogas(ikh2) Up(anLshad). 

Yoga v 2 s(ishiha-s 2 ra). 


= denotes f equivalent to,* * equal,’ ‘ the same as,’ 1 explained by,’ &c. 

( ) Between these parentheses stand all remarks upon meanings, and all descriptive and explanatory statements. 

[ ] Between these brackets stand all remarks within remarks, and comparisons with other languages. 

denotes that the leading word in a group of compounds is to be repeated. It is generally, but not always, equivalent to a hyphen. A shortened line 
occurs in cases like — followed by -siiAft and -tti&anA, which are for B&vyfc-sftd, havya-Bfida, havya-Bfidana. 

0 denotes that the rest of a word is to be supplied, e. g. °ri-in° after karlndra is for kari-indra. 

denotes a root 

“ denotes that a vowel or syllable is long. 

v denotes that a vowel or syllable is to be specially noted as short. 

« denotes that a vowel or syllable is either long or short. 

+ is for plus. 

& c. is for et cetera. 

a denotes the blending of two short vowels (as of a + a into a). 

A denotes the blending of a short with a long vowel (as of a + 5 into £). 

* denotes the blending of a long with a short vowel (as of 2 + a into &). 

* denotes the blending of two long vowels (as of 2 + S into £), 


[/« the progress of a work extending over many years it has been found almost impossible to preserve absolute uniformity in the use 

of abbreviations and symbols, but it is hoped that most of the inconsistencies are noticed in the following tablei\ 

A. — Atmane-pada. 

abl. — ablative case, 
above —a reference to some 

preceding word (not neces¬ 
sarily in the same page). 

acc. — accusative case, 
accord, or acc. — according, 
add. = Additions. 

Adi-p. =* Adi-parvan of the 
adj. — adjective (cf. mfn.). 
adv. =s adverb. 

/£ol. —iEolic. 
alg. = algebra, 
anat. — anatomy. 

Angl.Sax. — Anglo-Saxon, 
anom. — anomalous. 

Aor. or aor. = Aorist. 

Arab. — Arabic, 
arithm. * arithmetic. 

Arm. or Armor. * Armorica n 
or the language of Brittany. 
Armen. — Armenian, 
astrol.« astrology, 
astron. — astronomy. 

B. — Bombay edition. 

Boh. or Bohem. —Bohemian. 
Br. — BrShmana. 

Bret. — Breton. 

C. * Calcutta edition, 
c. — case. 

Cat. * catalogue or catalogues. 

Cans. — Causal. 

cf.— confer, compare, 

ch.— chapter. 


Class. «?= Classical, 
col., cols, —column, columns. 
Comm. — commentator or 
comp, — compound. 

compar.—comparative degree 
concl. — conclusion. 

Cond. — Conditional, 
conj. — conjectural, 
cons, = consonant, 
dat. — dative case, 
defect. — defective. 

Desid. — Desiderative. 
dimin.— diminutive, 
dram.—dramatic language, 
du. — dual number, 
ed. - edition. 

e. g. — exempli gratia, ‘ fo 
example. 1 

Eng. = English. 

Ep. or ep. - Epic, 
esp. — especially, 
etym. — etymology. 

f. — feminine, 
fig. — figuratively, 
ff. — from. 

Fut. or fut. — future, 
fut. p. p. - future passive par- 

g. = gapa. 

Gael. - Gaelic, 
gen. — genitive case, 
gend. — gender, 
geom. * geometry. 

Germ. = German. 

Gk. — Greek. 

Goth. — Gothic. 

Gr. — Grammar. 

Hib. — Hibernian or Irish. 
Hind. — Hindi. 

ib. — ibidem or 'in the same 
place or book or text’ as 
the preceding. 

ibc. — in the beginning of a 

I«tl. — Icelandic. 

id. — idem or * the same mean¬ 
ing as that of a preceding 
word. 1 
i. e. — id est. 

ifc. — in fine composite or ‘ at 
the end of a compound.’ 
impers. = impersonal or used 
impf. — imperfect tense. 

Impv. = imperative, 
ind. = indeclinable, 
inf. — infinitive mood. 

Inscr. — Inscriptions, 
instr. — instrumental case. 
Intens. — Intensive, 
interpol. = interpolation. 
Introd.— Introduction. 

Ion. — Ionic, 
irr. — irregular. 

L. — lexicographers (i. e. a 
word or meaning which 
although given in native 
lexicons, has not yet been 
met with in any published 

Lat. — Latin, 
lat. — latitude. 

Lett. — Lettish, 
lit. — literally. 

Lith. — Lithuanian, 
loc. — locative case, 
log. * logic, 
long. — longitude, 
m. - masculine gender, 
math. — mathematics, 
m. c. = metri causa, 
medic. — medicine, 
metron. — metronymic, 
mfn.—masculine, feminine, 
and neuter or — adjective. 
Mod. — modem. 

MS., MSS. — manuscript, 
myth. — mythology. 

N. — Name (also — title or 

n. — neuter gender, 
neg. — negative. 

Norn. — Nominal verb, 
nom, — nominative case, 
obs. — obsolete, 
onomat. — onomatopoetic (i.e. 
formed from imitation of 

opp. to — opposed to, 
opt. — optative, 
orig. — originally. 

Osset. — Ossetic. 

others — according to others. 

P. — Parasmai-pada. 

p. = page and participle (cf. 

p. p.). 

parox. — paroxytone. 
part. — participle, 
partic. — particular. 

Pass. — Passive voice, 
patr, - patronymic, 
perh. — perhaps. 

Pers. —Persian, 
pers. — person, 
pf. — perfect tense, 
phil. — philosophy, 
pi. — plural number, 
poet. — poetry or poetic. 

Pot. —Potential, 
p. p. — past participle. 

Pr. — proper. 

Prak. or Prikr. — Prikfit. 
Prec. — precative. 
prec. — preceding, 
prep, and prepos. — preposi¬ 

pres, — present tense, 
priv. — privative, 
prob. — probably, 
pron. — pronoun, 
pronom. — pronominal, 
propar. — proparoxytone. 
Pruss. — Prussian, 
q. v. — quod vide, 
redupl. — reduplicated. 

Reflex.— Reflexive or used 
rhet. — rhetoric, 
rt., rts. — root, roots. 

Russ. — Russian. 

RV. — Rig-veda. 

Sax. — Saxon. 

sc, and soil. — scilicet. 

Sch. and Schol. - Scholiast or 

Scot. — Scotch or Highland- 

seq. — sequens. 
sev. — several, 
sing. —singular. 

Slav. — Slavonic or Slavonian. 
Subj. — subjunctive, 
subst. — substantive, 
suff. — suffix. 

superl. — superlative degree, 
surg. — surgery, 
s. v. — sub voce, i. e. the word 
in the Sanskrit order. 

Vsrt. and VSrtt. — Virttika. 
vb. — verb. 

Ved. — Vedic or Veda. 

v. 1. — varia lectio, 
voc. — vocative case, 
vow. — voweL 

wk. — work. 

w. r. — wrong reading, 

Zd. = Zend. 






fnitiaL Medial. Equivalents and Pronunciation, 

Equivalents and Pronunciation. 

3T _ 

m t 

* f 

ft t 

in mica, rural. 

^ k in kill, seek. 

a „ tar, father (t’., father). ^ kh „ inkhorn 


i „ fill, lily, 

i „ police (police). 

U ,, fall, bush, 

u „ rude (rude). 

Ti ,, merrily (merrfly). 
rl „ marir>e (marine). 
In „ revelry (reve/p). 


g „ gun, get, dog. 
gh „ \oghnt. 

n „ sing, king, sink (sifrk) 
C „ dolce (in music). 

lrl ,, the above prolonged. 

® ch „ churcAAill (curcAill). 
^ j „ jet, jump. 

„ hedgehog (hejhog). 

prey, there. 



„ singe (siflj). 

V t „ true (true). 

ai „ aisle. 

3 th 

an/Aill (anMill) 

O „ go,stone. 

? d „ drum (drum). 

au „ Haus (as in German). g dh „ repaired (repaired) 

either true Anusvara n 
n Or m or the symbol of any 


h symbol called Visarga. 


none (none). 

^ t „ water (as in Ireland), 
th „ nuMook (more dental) 

Equivalents and Pronunciation. 

^ d in dice (more like th iu this) 
H. » adhere (but more dental). 

^ n , 

T p . 

, not, nut, iu. 

p „ put, sip 

^ ph „ upAill. 

^ b „ bear, rub. 
H bh ,, aftAor. 

^ m ,, map, jam. 


T . 

^ i 

^ ! 

„ yet, loyal. 

„ red, year. 

„ lull, lead. 

„ (sometimes foi S din Veda) 

oc^ lh ,, (sometimes for J^dh inVeda) 





V >* ivy (but like w after cons.) 
S ,, sure (sure), 
sh „ shun, bush. 

S „ saint, sin, hiss. 

^ h ,, hear, hit. 

* Sometimes printed in the form flf, see p. 174, col. 

The conjunct consonants are too numerous to be exhibited above, but the most common will be found at the end of * A Practical Sanskrit 
Grammar by Monier-Williams/ published by the Delegates of the Clarendon Press, fourth edition. 

For the correct pronunciation of the aspirated consonants, lch, ch, th, th, ph, &e., see p. xxix, note 4 of the foregoing Introduction. 

Observe that n represents the true Anusvara in the body of a word before the sibilants and h, as in ama , ansa, anhati : m as the 
symbol of any nasal will often be found at the end of a word, as in danam ca; but may also represent Anusvara, when final m is followed by 
initial semivowels, sibilants and h, and in words formed with preposition sam, like sam-vesa , mm-iaya, sam-hata: the word Sanskrit is now 
too Anglicized to be written Samskrit. Visarga, as a substitute for final s , is a distinctly audible aspirate, so that the A at the end of 
such a word as devah must be clearly heard. 



a, ft; i, i; ti, fi; *i, rx; lrl, Iri ; ©, ai; o, ann or m, h k, kh ; g, gh; h c, ch ; j, jh; n; $, th ; d, dh; n t, th; d, dh ; 
n 5 —Pf ph; b, bh; m *y, r, 1, 1, lh, v ;~s, sh, sh. 

3T A 

a . 

akartri-tva . 

1. a,the first letter of the alphabet; the 

first short vowel inherent in consonants. — Kara, nr. 
the letter or sound a. 

2 . a(pragrihya, q.v.), a vocative particle 
[a Atlanta, O Vishnu], T.; interjection of pity, Ah! 

W 3 - a (before a vowel an, exc. a-rinin 5 , 

a prefix corresponding to Gk. a, dv, Lat. in, Goth, 
and Germ, un, Eng. in or un, and having a nega¬ 
tive or privative or contrary sense {an-eha not one: 
an-anta endless; a-sat not good ; a-pasyat not 
seeing); rarely prefixed to Inf. ( a-svapium not to 
sleep, TandyaBr.) and even to forms of the finite 
verb {a-sprihayanti they do not desire, BhP.; Sis.) 
and to pronouns ( a-sah not he, Sis.; a-tad not that, 
BhP.); occasionally denoting comparison {a-brdh- 
mana like a Brahman, T.); sometimes disparagement 
(i a-yajila a miserable sacrifice); sometimes diminu- 
tiveness{cf. d-karna,an-udard)\ rarely an expletive 
(cf. a-kupya, a-pupu). According to Pan. vj, 2 , 

1 6 1, the accent may be optionally either on the first 
or last syllable in certain compounds formed with a 
(as d-tikshna or a-likshnd, d-siici or a-suci , dtt- 
anna or an-annd) ; the same applies to stems ending 
in tri accentuated on the first syllable before a is pre¬ 
fixed ; cf. also d-turta and a-ltirta, d-bhinna and 
a-bhinnd, &c. 

4- g, the base of some pronouns and 

pronom. forms, in asya , alra,Scc. 

5. a, the augment prefixed to the root in 

the formation of the imperfect, aorist, and conditional 
tenses (in the Veda often wanting, as in Homer, the 
fact being that originally the augment was only pre¬ 
fixed in principal sentences where it was accentuated, 
whilst it was dropped in subordinate sentences where 
the root-vowel took the accent). 

^ 6. a , as , in.,N. of Vishnu, L. (especially 
as the first of the three sounds in the sacred syl¬ 
lable 0171). 

a-rinin , mfn. free from debt, L. 

spqijr ans, cl. 10. P. ansayati, to divide, 

* distribute, L.; also occasionally A. ansa - 
yate , L.; also ansapayati , L. 

ansa , as, m. (probably fr. *J\. as, 

perf. dn-drtsa, and not from the above Vans fic¬ 
titiously formed to serve as rt.), a share, portion, 
part, party; partition, inheritance; a share of booty; 
earnest money; stake (in betting), RV. v, 86 , 5 ; 
T5ndyaBr.; a lot(cf. 2 .prds); the denominator of 
a fraction; a degree of lat. or long.; a day, L.; N. of 
an Aditya. — karana, n. act of dividing, — k&l- 
pana, f. or -prakalpana, f. or -pr&dana, n. allot¬ 
ment of a portion. — bhSgin or -bbaj, mfn. one 
who has a share, an heir, co-heir. — bbu, m. partner, 
associate, TS. — bbuta, mfn. forming part of. — vat 
(for ansumatl), m. a species of Soma plant, Susr, 
— savarnana, n. reduction of fractions. — svara, 
m. key-note or chief note in music. — bara or 
-bSrin, mfn. taking a share, a sharer. Ansansa, 
m. part of a portion (of a deity), secondary incarna¬ 
tion. Ansansi, ind. share by share. Ansavata- 
rana, n. descent of part of a deity; partial incarna¬ 
tion; title of sections 64-67 of the first book of the 
MBh. AnsI-\/ 1 . kri, to share. 

1. Ansaka, mf(fi&z)n. (ifc.) forming part. 

2 . Ansaka, as, m. a share; degree of lat. or long.; 
a co-heir, L.; {am), n. a day, L. 

Ansala. See aiisald next col. 

Ansin, mfn. having a share, Yajn. Ansi-ta, f. 
the state of a sharer or co-heir, heirship. 

us, in. a filament (especially of the 
Soma plant); a kind of Soma libation, SBr.; thread; 


end of a thread, a minute particle ; a point, end; array, 
sunbeam ; cloth, L.; N. of a Rishi, RV. viii, 5, 26; 
of an ancient Vedic teacher, son of a D ban am] ay a, 
VBr.; of a prince. — jala, n. a collection of rays, 
blaze of light. — dbara, m. ‘bearer of rays,’ the sun, 
L> — dhana, n., N. of a village, R. — dharaya, 
m. a lamp, MaitrUp. — nadi, f., N. of a river. 

— patta, n. a kind of cloth. — pati or -bhartri, 
m. ‘lord of rays,’ the sun, L. — mat, mfn. fibrous, rich 
in filaments; rich in Sonia plants or Soma juice; 
radiant, luminous; pointed; (J;L,m. the sun, the 
moon ; N. of various persons, especially of a prince 
of the solar race, son of A-samahias, grandson of 
Sagara ; {matt), f., N. of a river (Yamuna?), RV. 
viii, 96, 13-15; Hedysarum Gangeticum, Susr. 

— matpbala, f. Musa Paradisiaca. — mala, t. agar- 
land of light, halo. — malm, m. the sun. - vana, 

m. ‘having rays for arrows/the sun. — vimarda,m. 
ray-obscuration. — haBta,m. ‘having rays for hands,’ 
the sun, L. Ansudaka, n. water which has been 
exposed to the rays of the sun or the moon, Bhpr. 
Ansv-adi, a gana of Pan. (vi, 2, 193). 

Ansuka.iiw, n. cloth ; fine or white cloth, muslin 
[see dndnsuka], L.; garment, upper garment; tie 
(for binding a churning-stick). 

Ansula, as, m. radiant, T.; N. of the sage Ca- 
nakva, L. 

• 0 * 

ans (cf. Vans), L. See 

Ansa, as, m. the shoulder, shoulder-blade ; corner 
of a quadrangle; N. of a king; (au), m. du. the 
two shoulders or angles of an altar; a share (for 
ansa); [cf. Goth, amsa ; Gk. upos, aaiWa ; Lat. 
humerus , ansa. ] — kuta, m. the shoulder; a bull’s 
hump, the protuberance between an ox’s shoulders. 

— tra ( ansa -), n. armour to protect theshoulder, R V.; 
a bow, Nir.; dnsatra-kosa , mfn. having a cask for 
its tunic (probably = a Soma filter, Gmn.), RV. x, 
IOI, 7. — da# bn a, mf(a)n. up to the shoulder, 
$Br. — dbri, f. a cooking vessel, AV. — prisbtba, 

n. back of the shoulder. — phalaka, n. shoulder- 
blade, $Br.; Susr. — bbara or anse-bba*a, m. 
a burden on the shoulder, (gana bhastradi, q.v.) 

— bbarika, mf(f)n. or anse-bharika, mf(/)n. 
bearing a burden on the shoulder, ib. — mula, n. 
the acromion, L. 

Ansala, mfn. lusty, strong, SEr. &c. 

Ansya (3), mfn. belonging to the shoulder, RV. 

i, I 9 L 7 - 

^qar I. anh (cf. Vahgh), cl. 1. A. anhate , 
^ ^ to go, set out, commence, L.; to approach, 
L.; cl. 10. P. anhayati , to send, Bhatt.; to speak, 
Bhatt.; to shine, L. 

Anbri, is, m. a foot, Hpar.; root of a tree, L. ; 
[cf. ahghri'. ] —pa, m. ‘root-drinker,’ a tree, L. 

— skandha, m. or -siras, n. a part of the foot 
between the ancle and the heel, L. 

^(j'g \ 2. anh, to press together, to 
' ^ strangle (conjecturabie from Gk. ax o? » 
<7709; Lat. angustus, anxius , See.), L. 

Anbati, is, f. anxiety, distress, trouble, RV.; ill¬ 
ness, L.; [cf. Lat. ango\ ; a gift (also an hall, fi), L. 

Anbas, n. anxiety, trouble, RV. &c.; sin, L,; [cf. 
aghd, agas; Gk. agw^iai, axos, (1709.] — pati or 
anbasas-pati [VS.], m. lord of perplexity, i. e. an 
intercalary month; cf. dnhaspatya. — patya, n. 
power over calamity, TS.; ApSr. Anbo-xnuc,mfn. 
delivering from distress, RV. x, 63 , 9 ; VS. 

Anblti, is, f. a gift, donation, L. See anhatl. 
Anbn, mfn. (only in compar, anhiyas ) narrow, 
AitBr., s ztparb'nhu; (?/), n.(only in Abl. anhds) 
anxiety, distress, RV.; [cf. Gk. (771/9; Goth, ag - 
gvus ; Lat. angustus , anxius, &c.] — bbedx, f. 
having a narrow slit (pudendum muliebre), VS. 

Anhura, mfn. straitened, distressed, RV. x, 5 , 6 . 
Anhurana, mf(a;n. distressing, RV. vi, 47 , 20 ; 
{dm), n. distress, RV. i, 105 , 17 ; AV. 

Anboyii, mfn. troublesome, RV. v, 15 , 3 . 

ak, cl. 1. P. akati , to move torfcu- 

\ ously (like a snake), L. Cf. ^ag and 

V anc. 

1. aka, the suffix aka ( akac ). 

2. d-ka, am , n. unhappiness, pain, 

trouble, TS.; sin, L. 

a-kaca, mfn. hairless y bald ; cf. ut-, 
ftrdhva-, vi-; {as), m., N. ofKetu, the dragon’s tail 
or descending node (having a headless trunk), L. 

a-katuka, rnfn. not acrid, not im¬ 

petuous ; unwearied, indefatigable. 

A-katu-pbala, as, m. a kind of plant. 

a-kath ora, mfn. not hard, weak. 

akadama , am, n. a kind of Tantrik 

diagram. — cakra, n. id. 

a-kantaka , mfn. thbrnless, free 

from troubles or difficulties or enemies. 

a-kantha, mfn. having no neck ; 

having no voice, hoarse. 

a-katthana , mfn. unboastful. 

akathaha, am,n.h kind of diagram. 

vycirzij a-kathya, mfn. unspeakable ; un¬ 

utterable, unmentionable. 

a-kanishtha , as, m. pi. of whom 

none is the youngest (i. e. younger than the others), 
RV.; a class of Buddhist deities. — ga, m. a Buddha, 
L. —pa, m. a Buddhist king, T. 

a-kanya, f. not a virgin, Mn. 
akapivat, an, m., N. of a Rishi. 

akampana, as, m., N. of a prince; 

of a Rakshasa. 

a-kampita, mfn. unshaken, firm; 
(aj), m., N. of one of the 11 chief pupils {gana - 
dhara or ganddhipa) of MatUvira (the last Tir- 

A-kampya, mfn. not to be shaken. 

a-kara , mfn. handless, maimed ; ex¬ 
empt from tax or duty, privileged ; not acting; {a) t 
f. Emblic Myrobalan, Phyllanthus Emblica. 

a-karana, am, n. absence of action. 

A-karani, is, f. non-accomplishment, failure, dis¬ 
appointment (used in imprecations, e. g. tasydka- 
ranir evdstu bad luck to him !), L. 

A-karamya, mfn. not to be done. 

a-karuna, mfn. merciless, relent¬ 
less. — tva, n. harshness, cruelty, 

a-karkasa , mfn. not hard, tender. 

d-karna, mfl/ 7 )n, having diminutive 
cars, TS.; ^Br.; without ears, deaf; without helm 
or rudder ; without Karna. 

A-karnaka, mfn. without ears, TS., _&c. 

A-karnya, mfn. not fit for the ears, PSn. Sch. 

a-karnadhara, mfn. without a 

helmsman, destitute of a pilot, 

ofilTR a-kartana> as, m. a dwarf, L. 

a-kartri, td, m. not an agent, N. ap¬ 
plied to the purusha (in Sankhya phil.); not active 
(in Gr.) -tva, n. state of non-agency. 

^T3ira a-krdnta . 


-karmdn, mfn. not working; not 
performing good works, wicked, RV. x, 22, 8; in¬ 
efficient ; (in Gr.) intransitive; ( a), n. absenceofwork; 
observances; improper work, crime. Akarma- 
bhog'a, in. enjoyment of freedom from action. A- 
kar man vita, mfn. unoccupied ; disqu alined. 
A-karmaka, mfn. (in Gr.) intransitive. 
A-karmanya, mfn. improper to be done; unfit 
for work ; inefficient. 

a-kala , mfn. not in parts, entire; 
not skilled in the arts ( kalds ). 

a-kalahka, mfn. without stains or 

spots ; N. of a Jaina. 

a-kalka, mfn. free from impurity; 
(d), f. moonlight, L.‘ — ta, f. honesty, Yaj3. 

a-kalkana or a-kalkala , mfn. not 

deceitful, honourable, (T.) Bhag. 

a-kalpa, mf(c)n. not subject to rules, 

uncontrolled ; not admitting (any comparison pi-ati- 
manam ), RV. i, 102, 6 ; unable to (loc. or Inf. 
or in comp.) 

A-kalpita, mfn. not manufactured, not artificial, 
not pretended ; natural, genuine. 

a-kalmasha , mf(a)n. spotless. 
a-kalmasha, as, in., X. of a son 

of the fourth Manu, Hariv. 

^^^a-&a/yff,mf(a)n.ill,sick; true(?),L. 

A'-kalyana, mfn. not handsome, AV.; inauspi¬ 
cious; (am), n. adversity. 

a-kava,mfn. (fr. i,ku, q.v.), not con¬ 
temptible, not stingy, RV. 

A-kavari, mf(z")n. not selfish, not stingy, RV. iii, 
47, 5, & vii, 96, 3 [Say. explains by a-kava-ari , ‘ not 
contemptible as an enemy, or to his enemies; not 
having weak enemies 

season ; a useless birth. — knsuma, n. a flower 
blossoming out ot season. —ja or-jata or akalot- 
panna, mfn. born at a wrong time, unseasonable. J 

— jaladodaya or -meg'hddaya, m. unseasonable 
rising 01 clouds or mist. — vela, f. wrong or anseas< -li¬ 
able time. — saha, mfn. unable to bide one's time. 

— hlnam, ind. without losing time, immediately. 
A-kalikam, ind. immediately, MBh. 

A-kalya, mfn. unseasonable. 

a-kasara , as, m., N. of a teacher, 


mfn. without anything, 
utterly destitute ; disinterested ; (am), n. that which 
is worth nothing. — ta, f. or -tva, n. voluntary 
povertv (as practised by Jaina ascetics). 

A-kincaniman, d, m. utter destitution, (gana 
prithv-ddi, q. v.) 

a-kitava , as, m. no gambler, VS. 

- kilvishd., mfn. sinless, SBr. 

a-kirti, is, f. ill-fame, disgrace. 

— kara, mfn. causingdisgrace, disparaging, insulting. 

a-kuntha. mfn. not blunted,not worn 
out; vigorous, fixed; ever fresh, eternal. — dhi- 
shnya, n. an eternal abode, heaven. 

A-kuntkita, mfn. = a-kuntha. 

% % 9 I • 

a-kutas, ind. (usually in comp.), 

not from any quarter or cause. Akutas-cala, m. 
not movable from any cause ; N. of Siva. A-kuto- 
bhaya or a-kutascid-bhayaora-kutraca-bba- 
ya, mfn. having no fear from any quarter, secure. 

A-kutraor ^ Ved.) a-kutra, ind. nowhere, astray, 
RV. i, 1 20, S. 

^T^n^TrT a-kutsita , mfn. unreproached. 

a-kudhrydhc , ah. dhrici, ak (ku- 

d/iri for kudha for kuha — kutra \ ‘going nowhere’ 
(dk, 4), ind. objectless, aimless, RV. x, 22, 12. 

a-kavacd , mfn. having no coat of 
mail, AV. xi, 10 , 22 . 

d-kavi, mfn. unwise, RV. vii, 4,4. 

-kasmdt , ind. without a why or 

a wherefore, accidentally, suddenly. 

^RTr d-kdna, mf(a)n. not one-eyed, not 

monoculous, TS. & SBr. 

a-kanda, mfn. without a trunk,T.; 
causeless, unexpected ; (e), ind. causelessly, unex¬ 
pectedly. — pata-jata, mfn. dyingas soon as born. 
— sula, n. sudden, acute pain. 

a-kdtara, mfn. not dejected. 

a-kama, raf(a)n. without desire or 

wish ; unintentional, reluctant; (in Gr.) the Sandhi 
which causes the dropping of a final r before a 
succeeding r. — karsana (d-kama-), mfn. not dis¬ 
appointing desires, RV. i, 53 , 2 . —tas, ind. unin¬ 
tentionally, unwillingly. — ta, f. freedom from desire, 
&c. — hata (d-kama-), mfn. unaffected with desire, 
calm, SBr. xiv. 

A-kdmin, mfn. = a-kdmd . 

a-kaya, mfn. bodiless, incorporeal, 


a-kdrana , mfn. causeless ; (am), 

n. absence of a cause; (am, ena, e, at), ind. cause¬ 
lessly. A-kSranotpanna, mfn. produced spon¬ 

A-k5rin,mfn. inactive, not performing, (gana^riz- 
hddi, q. v.) 

a-karnaveshtakika, mf(I)n. 

not fit for ear-rings, not looking well with ear-rings, 
Pin. Sch. See karna-veshtaka. 

a-karya , mfn. not to be done, i 


proper ; (am), n. a criminal action. — k&rln, mfn. 
an evil-doer; neglecting duty. 

a-karshnya, am, n. absence of 


^*10 a-kala, as, m. a wrong or bad time; 
(mfn.), unseasonable ; (e) or ~tas, ind. unseasonably. 
•~kiishxuS£$a, m. a pumpkin produced out of 

a-kupya,am. n. not base metal, gold 
or silver, Kir.; any base metal (= kupya, see 3 . a). 
Akupyaka, am, n. gold or silver, L. 

d-kumara, as, ra. not a boy (said 
of Indra', RV. i, 155, 6. 

a-kula , mfn. not of good family, 
low ; (as), m., N. of Siva, L.; (a), f., N. of Parvati, 
L. — ta, i. lowness of family. 

A-kulina, mfn. not of good family, Mn. 

t 3T^ H 5Tc5 a-kusala, mffdjn. inauspicious, 
evil; not clever ; (am), n. evil, an evil word, Mn. 

a-kusida or akusida, mfn. taking 

no interest or usury, without gain. 

a-kusuma, mfn. flowerless. 

a-kuha, as, m. no deceiver, L. 

A-kuhaka, as, m. id., Susr. 

^Zd -£M/a,mf(a)n.having no prominence 

on the forehead, TS.; not deceitful, unerring (said 
of arms), Yajn.; not false (said of coins), Yajn. 

d-k upara , mfn. unbounded, RY. v, 
39 , 2 Sc x, log, I; (as), m. the sea, VS. See .; tor¬ 
toise, BhP. See., The mythical tortoise that upholds 
the world ; N. of a man, PBr.; N. of an Aditya, L.; 
(a), f., N. of an Ahgirasi, PBr. 

A-kuvara a-kupara above. 

^5?^^ a-kurca , as, m. ‘ the guileless one,’ 

a Buddha, L. 

a-kricchra, as, am, m. n. absence of 

difficulty ; freedom from trouble. 

A-kricclirin,mfn. free from difficulty or trouble. 

a-krita , mf(c)n. undone, not commit¬ 
ted ; not made, uncreated ; unprepared, incomplete; 
one who has done no works; (am), n. an act never 
before committed, AitBr.; (a), f. a daughter who 
has not been made putrika , or a sharer in the 
privileges of a son, Pan. — kSram, ind. in a wav 
not done before, Pan. — jna,mfn. not acknowledging 
benefits, ungrateful. — jfia-t5,f. ingratitude. — bud- 
dhi, mfn. having an unformed mind. — buddhi- 
tva, n. ignorance. — vrana, m., N. of a commen¬ 
tator on the PurSnas, VP.; of a companion of 
Rama Jamadagnya, MBh.; of a teacher. Akrit&t- 

man, mfn. having an unformed in ind ; not vet 
identified with the supreme Spirit. Akritartba, 
nun. having one’s obiect unaccomplished, unsucecbs- 
ful. Akritastra, mfn. unpractised in amis, MBh. 

A-kritin, mfn. unfit for work, not clever. Akri- 
ti-tva, n. unfitness for work. 

A-kritya, mfn. not to be done, criminal; (am), 
n. crime. — karin, mfn. evil-doer, MBh. 

a-hritta, mfn. uncut, unimpaired. 

— rue, mfn. possessing unimpaired splendour, RV. 
x, 84, 4. 

a-kritrima, mf(a)n. inartificial. 

-kritsna, mf(«)n. incomplete. 

a-kripa , mfn. merciless, unkind. 

a- kripana, mfn. not miserly. 

d -krisa, mfn. not emaciated, TS.; 
unimpaired. — lakshml, mfn. enjoying full pros¬ 
perity. A-krisasva, mfn., N. of a king of Ayo- 
dhya, Hariv. 

a-krishwala, mf(a)n. not agri¬ 

cultural, RV. x, 146, 6. 

d-krishta , mfn. unploughed, un¬ 
tilled ; not drawn ; (a?n), 11. unploughed land, SBr.; 
(ffir), m. plur., N. of a kind of Rishis, MBh.; Hariv. 

— pacya, mfn. ripening in unploughed land, grow¬ 
ing wild, AV.; VS.; TS.; (said ot the earth) giving 
fruits without having been ploughed, VP. 

a-krishna-karman, mfn. free 

from black deeds, guiltless, L. 


a-ketana, mfn. houseless. 

o-ketu , mfn. shapeless, unrecognis¬ 

able, RV. i, 6, 3 ; (‘ unconscious,’ Say.) 


a -kesa, mf(«, Pan.; i, R.) n. hairless. 

a-kota, as, m. ‘ without a bend/ 

the Areca or Betel-nut palm, L. 

a-kopa , as, m., N. of a minister of 

king Da^aratha, R. &c. 

a-kopana , mfn. not irascible. 

a-kovida, mfn. unwise, ignorant. 

a-kausala , am, n. unskilfulness, 
P .i n.; cf. aka us ala. 

akka, f. (Voc. akka, Pan.) a mother 
(usedcontemptuously); N.ofawoman ; [supposed to 
be a term of foreign origin ; cf. Lat. Acca. j 

1. akta, mfn .(Vaj), driven. 

2. akta, mfn. (\/ahj), smeared over; 

diffused ; bedaubed, tinged, characterized. Often ifc. 
(cf. raktdkta) ; (am), 11 . oil, ointment. 

Akta, f. night, RV. i, 62 , 8 . 

Aktu, us, m. tinge, rav, light, RV.; dark tinge, 
darkness, night, RV .; (os, ubkis), ind. at night, 

-knopana, mfn. not moistening, 

drying, Nir. 

1. d-kra, mfn. (\/kri), inactive, RV. 
i, 120, 2 . 

2. akra , as, m. a banner, RV.; a 

wall, fence (prdkdra), according to Durga on Nir. 

vi, 17 . 

a -kratu , mfn. destitute of energy or 
power [‘ofsacrifices,’ Say.], RV. x, 83 , 5 ; AV.; fool¬ 
ish, RV. vii, 6 , 3 ; free from desire, Up. 

WfFW a-krama, mfn. not happening suc¬ 
cessively, happening at once, Yogas.; (as), m. want 
of order, confusion. 

a -kravi-hasta, mfn. not having 
bloody hands [‘not having niggardly hands, not 
close-fisted,’ Say.], RV. v, 62 , 6 . 

a-kravydd , mfn. not consuming 
flesh (N. of an Agni), AV.; not carnivorous, Yajfi. 
A-kravyada, mfn. not carnivorous, Mn. 

a-krdnta, mfn. unpassed, unsur¬ 
passed, unconquered ; not doubled, RV. Prat.; (ff), 
f. the Egg plant. 

HklliMjuiMf'-:.: • 




a-kriya , mfn. without works; inac¬ 
tive; abstaining from religious rites; impious; (if), 
f. inactivity ; neglect of duty. 

d-kridat , mfn. not playing, RY. x, 

79, 6. 

^rWTQ-/rrwrG,mfn.not cruel, gentle; (as), 

m., N. of Krishna’s paternal uncle, MBh. 

a-krodha,as , m. suppression of an¬ 
ger; (mfn.), free from anger. - maya, rntn. tree 
from anger, SBr. xiv. 

A-krodhana, mfn. free from anger, Mn.; (as), 
m., N. of a prince, son of Ayutayu, VP. 

a-klama , as, m. freedom fromfatigue. 

a-klinna-vartman , a, n., X. of 

a disease of the eyes, Susr. 

A-kledya, mfn. not to be wetted. 

a-klishta, mfn. untroubled ; undis¬ 
turbed ; unwearied. — karman or -karin, mfn. 
unwearied in action, — vrata, mfn. unwearied in 
keeping religious vows. 

A-klesa, as, m. freedom from trouble, Mn. 

aksh (perhaps a kind of old Desid. 

* ^Yof Vi-as), cl. I. 5. akshati, akshnoti 
(Pan. Ill, 1, 75 ; fut. akshishyati or akshyati , L.; 
aor. dkshlt, 3. du. dkshishtdm or ask (dm. L.; perf. 
anaksha [Pan. vii, 4, 60, Comm.], but A. p. [with 
the Vedic weak stem aksh, cf. perf. ds-uh 3. pi. &c. 
fr. \dl. as] akshdna), to reach, RV. x, 22, II; 
to pass through, penetrate, pervade, embrace, L.; to 
accumulate (to form the cube?), L.: Caus .akshayati, 
acikshat , to cause to pervade, L.: Desid. acikshi- 
shati or acikshati , L. 

1. .Aksha, as, m. an axle, axis (in this sense also 
am , n., L.); a wheel, car, cart; the beam of a balance 
or string which holds the pivot of the beam ; a snake, 
L.; terrestrial latitude (cf. - karna, -bha, - bhdga ): 
the collar-bone, SBr.; the temporal bone, Yain.; N. 
of a measure ( = 104 arigula); [cf. Lat. axis; Gk. 
a£<uv ; Old Germ, ahsa; Mod. Germ. Achse; Lith. 
aw/;.] —karna, m. the hypotenuse, especially of 
the triangle formed with the gnomon of a dial and 
its shadow; (in astron.) argument of the latitude, 
-ja, m. a diamond ; a thunderbolt; N. of Vishnu. 

— drlk-karman, n. operation or calculation for 
latitude. — dvara, n. the cavity in the axle of a car, 
S 5 y. on RV. v, 30,1. — dhur, f. the pin at the end 
of an axle, pole attached to an axle. — dhurtila, 

m. a draft-ox, L. — pida, m. Chrysopogon Acicu- 
laris, Susr.; (a), f., N. of a plant. — bh£, f. shadow 
of latitude. — bh&ga, m. degree of latitude. — bha- 
ra, m. a cart-load. — sangam, ind. so that the axle 
is caught or hooked by contact with some obstruc¬ 
tion, MaitrS. Akshapsa, m. a degree of latitude. 
Akshagra, n. end of an axle, or of the pole of a 
car ; an axle. Akshagra-kila or -kilaka, m. a 
linch-pin ; the pin fastening the yoke to the pole. 
AkshS-n&h (the vowel lengthened as in upa-nah , 
&c.), mfn.tied to the axle of a car, RV. x, 53 , 7 ; (horse, 
S 3 y.; trace attached to the horse’s collar, Gmn.) 

2. Aksha, as, m. (V 1. as, Un.) a die for gam¬ 
bling ; a cube ; a seed of which rosaries are made 
(cf. indrdksha, rudrdksha ); the Eleocarpus Gani- 
trus, producing that seed ; a weight called karsha, 
equal to 16 mashas ; Beleric Myrobalan (Terminalia 
Belerica), the seed of which is used as a die ; a N. of 
the number 5 ; (am), n. sochal salt; blue vitriol (from 
its cube-like crystals), L. — kSma (aksha-), mfn. 
fond of dice, AV. — kitava, m. a gambler, MBh. 

— kusala, mfn. skilled in dice. — kshapana, m., 
N. of a gambler, Kathas. — glaha, m. gambling, 
playing at dice, MBh. — ja, m. a thunderbolt; N. 
of Vishnu, L. — tattva, n. science of dice; -vid, 
mfn. skilled in it. — daya, m. handing over the dice 
in gambling, Naish. [moving a piece on a board, BR.] 

— devana, n. gambling, dice-playing. — devin or 
-dyu, m. a gambler, a dice-player. — dyuta, n. gam¬ 
bling ; cf. akshadyutika. — dyutiidi, a gana of 
P 5 n.(iv, 4, 19). — drugdha (aksha-), mfn. hated 
by (unlucky at) dice, or injuring with dice (a sharper), 
AV. — dhara, mfn. holding dice ; (as), m. Trophis 
Aspera (see sakhota). — dhurta, m. ‘dice-rogue,’ 
gambler, L. — naipuna or -naipunya, n. skill in 
gambling. — par Sj ay a, m. defeat in gambling, AV. 

— pari, ind. with exception of a single die, Pan. 

— pata, m. throw or cast of dice. — patana, n. act 
of casting dice. — priya, mfn. fond of dice, or (per¬ 
haps) favoured by dice. — bhumi, f. gambling-place, j 

— mada, m. passion for dice. — matra, n. any¬ 
thing as big as dice ; the twinkling of an eye, a mo¬ 
ment (cf. 4. aksha), L. — m&la, f. a string or rosary 
of beads, especially of Eleocarpus seeds; N. of Arun- 
dhatt, wife of Vasishtha (from her wearing a rosary), 
Mn. ix, 23 ; N. of the mother of Vatsa. — malin, 
mfn. wearing a rosary of seeds; N. of Siva, MBh. 

— r§ja, m. ‘king of dice,’ the die called Kali, 
VS. — vat, mfn. having dice ; ( ti ), f. a game of dice, 
L. — vapa = akshdvdpd below, Kath. -vSma, 

m. an unfair gambler. — vid, mfn. skilful in gam¬ 
bling. — vritta, mfn. anything that happens in gam- | 
bling. — satrnda, mfn. fond of gambling. — sukta, 

n. dice-hymn, N. of RV. x, 34. —sutra, n. a string 
or rosary of Eleocarpus seeds. — stusha, m. Beleric 
Myrobalan. — hridaya,n. innermost nature of dice, 
perfect skill in gambling. — hridaya-jna, mfn. per- 
fectlv skilled in gambling. AkshativSpa, m.= 
aks/nh'dpd below, MBh. Akskdvapana, n. a 
dice-board. SBr. Akshdvali, f. a rosarv. Aksh&- 
vapa, m. [SBr.] (ci.aksha-Z'dpa 8 c akshdtivdpa),t he 
keeper or superintendent of a gambling-table [Comm. 

= dyuta-pati, dyu tadhy aksha, aksha-goptri ]. 

3. Aksha, am, n. an organ of sense ; sensual per¬ 
ception, L.; the soul,L.; knowledge, religious 

knowledge, L.; a lawsuit, L.; a person born blind, L.; 
N. of Garuda, L. ; of a son of Ravana ; of a son of 
Nara, &c. — darsaka or -dris, m. a judge, i. e. 
one who sees lawsuits. — patala, n. court of law ; 
depository of legal document, Raiat. — pata, m. an 
arena, a wrestlingground, place ofcontest, L. — p£ta- 
ka or -pStika,m. a judge, i.e. arranger of a lawsuit, 
L. — vfita, L. = -pata. — vid, mfn. versed in lav.’, L. 

4. Aksha, aksha-carana, &c. See col. 3. 

Akshaka,a.r,m. Dalbergia Oujeinensis; (as,am), 

m. n. the collar-bone, Susr.; (1), f., N. of a creeping j 

^TJ5ip!r a-kshana, mfn. inopportune. 

sj 1 . a-kshanvat , mfn. ( Vkshan ), not 

injuring, AsvGr. 

d-kshata , mfn. not crushed ; un¬ 
injured, unbroken, whole ; (as), m. Siva, L.; (as, 
am), m. n. a eunuch, L.; (d), f. a virgin, Yajn.; N. 
of a plant, Karkatasringj or Kankadasringl; (am), 

n. and (dir), m. pi. unhusked barley-corns; N. of the 
descendants of Surabhi, Hariv. — yoni, f. a virgin, an 
unblemished maiden. 

a-kshatra, mfn. destitute of the 

Kshatriya caste, apart from the Kshatriya caste. 

akshan. See akshi. 

fTBp a-kshama , mf(a)n. unable to endure, 
impatient; incompetent (with Loc., Inf. or ifc.), en¬ 
vious ; (a), f. or -ta, f. impatience, envy ; incompe¬ 
tence, inability (with Inf.) 

a-kshaya, mf(a)n. exempt from de¬ 
cay, undecaying; (as), m., N. of the f^ntieth year in 
the cycle of Jupiter ; N. of a mountain, Hariv.; (a), 
f. the seventh day of a lunar month, if it fall on Sun¬ 
day or Monday ; the fourth, if it fall on Wednesday. 

— jpma, mfn. possessing imperishable qualities; 
(aj - ), m. Siva. — ta, f. or -tva, n. imperishableness. 

— tritlyS, f., N. of a festival (the third day of the 
bright half of Vaisakha, w’hich is the first day of the 
Satya-yuga, and secures permanency to actions then 
performed). — nivl, f. a permanent endowment, 
Buddhist Inscr. — puruhuta, m. Siva. — mati, m., 
N. of a Buddhist. — loka, m. the undecaying world, 

A-kshayin, mfn. undecaying; (ini), f., N. of 
Siva’s wife (?), Rajat. 

A-kshayya, mfn. undecaving ; (am\ n. or ind, 
‘may thy prosperity be undecaving!’ (a form of bless¬ 
ing addressed to a Vaisya), MBh. — navami, f. the 
ninth day of the bright half of Asvina. Akshayyo- 
daka, n. inexhaustible water, Yajh. &c. 

'^’^X.a-kshdra, mfn. imperishable; unal- 
terable ; (aj'hm. a sword, L.; Siva, L.; Vishnu, L.; 
(a), f., see dkskard below ; (am), n. a syllable ; the 
syllable om, Mn.; a letter {(aY), m., RamatUp.] ; a 
vow’d ; a sound ; a word ; N. of Brahma; final beati¬ 
tude ; religious austerity, sacrifice, L. j water, RV. i, 

34, 4 & i, 164, 42; Achvranthes Aspera. — kara,m. 
a kind of religious meditation, Karand. — cancu or 
-cuncu or -cana or -cana, rn. ‘clever in writing,’ a 
scribe, L. — cyutaka, n. ‘supplying dropped (cyiita) 
syllables,’ a kind of game, Kfid. — chandas, n. metre 
regulated by the number and quality of syllables. 

— janani, f. ‘letter producer,’ a reed or pen. — 
vaka or -jlvika or -jivin, m. ‘one who lives 
by writing,’ a scribe. — tulikS, f. a reed or 
pen. — nyasa, m. array of syllables or letters; 
the alphabet. — paixkti, mfn. containing five syl¬ 
lables ; (akshdra-paiikti), f., N. of a metre of four 
lines, each containing one dactyl and one spondee, 
VS.; also called paiikti or hansa. — bh 5 j, mfn. en¬ 
titled to a share in the syllables (of a prayer), AitBr. 

— mukha, m. having the mouth full of syllables, a 
student, scholar, L. — mnshtikS, f. the art of com¬ 
municating syllables or ideas by the fingers (one of 
the 64 Kalas), VatsySy. — viny&sa = -nyasa t V ikr. 

— sas, ind. syllable by syllable, MaitrS.; AitBr. 

— sunya, mfn. inarticulate. — samstlxSsxa, n. 
scripture, writing, L. — samSjnn&ya, m. alphabet, 
Pat.; BhP. Aksharakshara, m. a kind of religious 
meditation (samadhi), Karand. Akshar&Lffa, n. 
part of a syllable (said of the anusvara), RV. Prat. 
Akshare - stha, mfn. consisting of syllables, 

• • w> 

Aksharaka, am, n. a vowel. 

A'kshara, f. (cf. a-kshdra, n. above), word, 
speech, RV. 

Aksliarya, mf (d) n. corresponding to the number 
of syllables or letters, RV. Prat.; (aksharyam revat), 

n., N. of a Saman, ArshBr. 

a-kshdnti, is, f. impatience, jea¬ 
lousy, intolerance. 

a-kshdra , mfn. free from alkali or 

factitious salt. — lavana, n. not factitious (i. e. 
natural) salt; (mfn.) not composed of artificial salt, 
[Kulluka on] Mn. iii, 257; v, 73; xi, 109; or, 
according to Goldst. and NBD., better ‘(food) nof 
containing acrid substances nor salt;’ therefore also 
akshdrdiavana in the same sense, cf. kshdra-la- 
vana. — lavanstsin, mfn. eating akshara-lavatta. 

A-kshara-madya-mansada, mfn. not eating 
acricf substances nor (drinking) spirituous liquors nor 
eating meat, VarYogay. 

akshi, d.(\/ i.fls,Un.)[instr. akshna, 

dat. akshne, 8 cc., fr. akshan, substituted for akshi 
in the weakest cases. Vedic forms are : abl. gen. 
akshnds ; loc. akshan (once aksh ini!) ; du. nom, 

acc. akshi, RV., dkshinl, dkshyau, and akshydu, 
AV. ; SBr. & AitBr.; instr. akshibhyam; gen. ak- 
shyds,\ r S., akshyos and akskds(\), AV.; plur. nom. 
acc. dkshlni, AV., akshdni, RV.; ifc. aksha is sub¬ 
stituted, see 4. aksha], the eye ; the number two; 
^t), n. du. the sun and moon, RV. i, 72,10; [cf. Gk. 
o<7<7€, oKTaAAor; Lat. oculos; A. S. aegh; Goth. 
augo ; Germ. Auge; Russ, oko ; Lith. ahi-sd) — ku- 
ta or -kutaka, n. the prominent part of the fore¬ 
head above the eye, YSjfi. &c. — g'ata, mfn. pre¬ 
sented to the eye, visible, seen ; hated, MBh. &c. 

— g'ola, m. the eyeball. — j&ha, n. the root of the 
eve. — tSr 5 , f. the pupil of the eye. — nikftnam, 
ind. with half-closed eyes, P 3 n. iii, 4, 54 Sch.; also 
nikdnam-akshi, id. — nimeaha, m. twinkling of 
an eye, a moment, Susr. — pakshman, n. the eye¬ 
lash. — patala, n. coat of the eye, L. —pat, ind. 
as much as could fall into the eyes, a little, RV. vi, 
16, 18 & x, 119, 6. — pSka, m. inflammation of the 
eyes, Susr. — bhu, mfn. visible, perceptible, mani¬ 
fest, AV. xx, r 36, 4 ; VS. — bkeskaja, n. medi¬ 
cament for the eyes, collyrium, &c. ; (as), m. a tree. 
Red Lodh. — bhruva, n. the eyes and eyebrows 
together, —mat, mfn. possessing eyes. — loman. n: 
the eyelash. — vikunita, n. a glance with the eye¬ 
lids partially closed. — samtarjana (probably n.), 
N. of a mythic weapon, MBh. Akshy-SmayA, 
m. disease of the eye, SBr.; KatySr. Akshy- 
Sjnayia, mfn. having a disease of the eye, PBr. 

4. Aksha, am, n. [only ifc. (f. t) for akshi], 
the eye. — carana or -pad or -p 5 da,m. (probably) 
‘having his eyes fixed in abstraction on his feet,’ N. 
of the philosopher Gautama; cf. akshapada. 

Akshan, n. substituted for akshi, ‘the eye,’ in the 
weakest cases. Gram. 122 [cf. Goth, augari] ; an. 
organ of sense, BhP. — 2. -vdt, mfn. having eyes, 
RV.; (for 1. see col. 2.) 

B 2 


akshika . 


Akshika or akshika, dx, m. the tree Dalbergia 
Oujeinensis, L.; see akshaka. 

’SffEpirt akshin. 1 , f, one of the eight condi¬ 

tions or privileges attached to landed property, L. 

^TETrT a-kshit, mfn. imperishable, not lost, 


A-kshita, mfn. undecayed, uninjured, undecay¬ 
ing; {am), n. water, L.; the number 100,000 mil¬ 
lions, PBr, AkshitS-vasn, m. ‘ possessed of unde¬ 
caying wealth,’ N. of Indra, KV. viii, 49,6. Akshi- 
tdti, in. ‘granting permanent help/ N. of Indra, 

A'-kshiti, is, f. imperishableness, AV. Sec.; (mfn.), 
imperishable, RV. 

vrftfsr akshiba f as, m., L<; see akshiba. 

^fEpTFf a-kshiyat, mfn. not inhabiting, 

destitute of a dwelling, unsettled (‘not decreasing in 
riches/ Say.), RV. iv, 17, 13. 

akshika , as, m., L.; see akshika . 

’WEjfaff a-kshina, mfn. not perishingor fail¬ 
ing, SBr.; not waning (the moon), SBr. ; not dimi¬ 
nishing in weight, YajiV; N.ofa son of VisvSmitra, 

akshiba and akshiba, mfn. not in¬ 
toxicated, sober, L.; (as), m. Guilandina or Hype- 
ranthera Moringa, L.; (am), n. sea salt, L. 

dkshu, us, m. a kind of net, RV. i, 180, 

5 ; AV. The NBD. suggests ‘axle of a car/ making 
dkshu — aksha. 

’STEpfT a-kshunna, mfn. unbroken, uncur¬ 
tailed; not trite, new, MalatTm.; permanent; un¬ 
conquered ; inexperienced, inexpert. —1£, f. uncur¬ 
tailed condition ; inexperience. 

'srspja -kshudra , mfn. not small; not low 

or vulgar, MBh. 

d - kshudh„ f. satiety, VS. 

A-kshudhya, mfn. not liable to hunger, AV. 
A-kshodh-uka, mfn. not hungry, MaitrS. 

d-kshetra, mfn. destitute of fields, 
uncultivated, SBr.; (am), n. a bad field, Mn. x, 71 ; 
a bad geometrical figure. — jna [Pan. vii, 3, 30] or 
-vid [dksh\ RV. v, 40, 5 & x, 32, 7], not finding 
out the way; destitute of spiritual knowledge. 

A-kshetrin, mfn. having no fields, Mn. ix, 49 

6 51. 

A-kshaitxajSya, am, n. spiritual ignorance, 
P 5 n. vii, 3, 30; see dksh 0 . 

VT^ft 3 akshota, as, m. a walnut (Pistacio 

nut?), Ragh.; the tree Pilu ; the tree Aleurites 
Triloba. Also spelt akshoda (Susr.), akshodaka, 
akshota, akshodaka, dkhota. 

WEfte a-kshobha, mfn. unagitated, un¬ 
moved ; (as), m. the post to which an elephant is 
tied, freedom from agitation, imperturbability. 

A-kshohhya, mfn. immovable, imperturbable; 
(as), m,, N. of a Buddha; of an author; an im¬ 
mense number, said by Buddhists to be 100 vivaras. 

TOjrr^rr akshauhini , f. an army consist¬ 
ing of ten anikinls, or 21,870 elephants, 21,870 
chariots, 65,610 horse, and 109,350 foot. (Since 
an anikini consists of 27 vShinis, and 27 is the cube 
of 3, akshauhini may be a compound of 2. aksha 
and vdhini; or it may possibly be connected with 
j . aksha, axle, car.) 

akshna, am, n. a-khanda, Un.Sch. 

— ySvan, mfn. going across, RV. viii, 7, 35. 

AkshnayS, instr. ind. transversely, SBr. (Sch. 
circuitously, like a wheel 1 ) ; wrongly, SBr. xiv ; 
diagonally, Sulbas. — krita (akshnayd-), mfn. done 
wrongly, SBr. — desa., m. an intermedisrte region, 
&Br. — drub, mfn. injuring wrongly or in a bad 
way, RV. i, 122, 9. — rajju, f. diagonal line, Sul- 
bas. — stomiyS, f., N. of an Ishtaka, TS.; SBr. 

akhatta , m. Buchanania Latifolia. 
akhatti, m. childish whim, L. 

a-khanda , mfn. not fragmentary? 

entire, whole; (am), n. time, L.; {a-khanda dvd- 

cfast), the twelfth day of the first half of the month 

A-khandana, am , n. not breaking. leaving entire, 
L.; non-refutation, admission, L.; (ar), m. time, L. 

A-khandita. mfn. unbroken, undivided, unim- 
paired; unrefuted. — rtu (ritu^, mfn. ‘ not break¬ 
ing the season/ bearing seasonable fruits. 

-khanaty mfa. not digging, RV. 

x, 101, 11. 

a-hharva , mfn. not shortened or 

mutilated, RV. vii, 32, 13; not small, important; 
also a-kharvan, Heat.; (a), f., N. of a plant, L. 

d-khdta, mfn. unburied, AV.; (as, 

am), m.n. a natural pond or lake, a pool before a 
temple, L. 

a-khddya, mfn. uneatable. 
d-khidra , mfi«)n. not weak,TS.&c. 

— yabnan ( dkhiara -), mfn. unwearied in course, 
RV. i, 38, 11. 

a-l :hila , mfft/jn. without a gap, 

complete, whole; (cna''-, ind. completely. Akbi- 
ldtman, m. the universal Spirit, Brahma. Akbili- 
Vl.kri, - kritya , ind. p. not having annihilated 
or rendered powerless, Sis. ii, 34. 

akhetika or dkhetika , as, m. a dog 
trained to the chase. 

*mf>rr a-khedin, mfn. not wearisome, un¬ 
wearied. Akbedi-tva, n. continuous flow (of 
speech), one of the vdg-gunas of Mahavira, Jain. 

akhkhala , ind. an exclamation of 
joy, S2y. on RV. vii. 105, 3. Akbkbali-kritya, 
Yed. iud. p. (</1. kri , uttering the exclamation 
akhkhala, RV. vii, 103, 3, 

^S^TTW a-khyata, mfn. not famous, un¬ 

A-khyati, is, f. infamy, bad repute, disgrace. 

— kara, mfn. causing infamy, disgraceful. 

f ag , cl. 1. P. agati, to move tor- 

* \ tuously, wind, L.: Caus. agayati, L.; 

cf. sf aiig. 

I. aga, as, m. a snake [in this sense perhaps 
rather a-ga), L.; the sun, L.; a water-jar, L. 

2. a-ga . mfn. (Vgam), unable to walk, 
PSn. vi, 3, 77 Sch.; (as), m. a mountain ; a tree; 
the number seven. — ja, mfn. produced on a moun¬ 
tain, or from a tree : (d), f., N. of Parvatl, daughter 
of Himalaya ; (am), n. bitumen. Agr^tma-jfi, f. 
= aga-jd Kir. Ag^vaba, m., N. of a son of 
Vasudeva, and of others, Hariv. Agaukas, m. 
‘mountain-dweller/a lion; ‘tree-dweller,’ a bird; the 
Sarabha, q. v. 

A-tfaccba, mfn. not going, L.; (oj), m. a tree, L. 

WTTTrnT a-ganita, mfn. uncounted; incon¬ 
siderable, VP. — pratiyata, mfn. returned without 
(or because of not ) having been noticed, Sis. — lajja, 
mfn. disregarding shame. 

a-gata , mfn. not gone; (am), n. not 

yet frequented, the dominion of death, AV. 

A-ffati, mfn. not going, halting; without resource, 
helpless ; (is), f. stoppage, R.; want of resort or re¬ 
source ; unsuccessfulaess, Vikr.; not cohabiting with 
a woman. 

A-gfatika, mf;i)n. without resort or resources, 
Kath2s. — grati. f. the resort of one who has no 
resort, a last resource, YajfL i, 345. 

A-gatlka, mf(d)n. not to be walked on (as an 
evil path), MBh. 

a-gadd , mfn. free from disease, 
healthy, RV. &c.; free from affliction; (ttr), m. free- ■ 
dom from disease, Mn.; a medicine, drug, (especi¬ 
ally) antidote, Mn. Agadam-kSra, m. a physician, 
Naish. Agada-veda, m. medical science. Car. 

A-gfadya, Nom. P .agadyati, to havegood health, | 
(gana kanfo-ddi, q.v.); to heal, ib. I 

a-gadita , mfn. untold. j 

a~gandha, mfn. without smell. 

a-gama, mfn. not going, unable to I 

go; (a*), m. a mountain, L.; a tree [cf. 2. a-ga'). j 
A-gamya, mfn. unfit to be walked in, or to be ! 
approached; not to be approached (sexually) ; in- j 

accessible ; unattainable ; unintelligible ; unsuitable. 

f. a woman who has illicit intercourse with a 
man, VarBr. — rupa, mfn. of unsurpassed form. 

A-gamya, f. a woman with whom cohabitation 
is forbidden. - gamana, n. illicit intercourse with 
a woman. - gamaniya, mfn. relating to it, Mn. 
xi, 169. — g-Smin, mfn. practising it, Gaut. 

a-gari, f. a kind of grass (Deotar, 

Andropogon Serratus), L.; [cf. gari.) 

agaru,us,u, m.n. Agallochunij Amy- 

ris Agallocha ; cf. aguru. 

d-garta-mit (cf. garta-mit ), mfn. 

not buried in a hole, SBr. 

A-?&rta-skaudya, mfn. ‘not having holes to be 
lept over/ not offering hindrances, SankhBr. 

a-yarva, mfn. free from pride. 

wrrfffT a-garhita, mfn. undespised, un¬ 

reproached, blameless. 

a-gavyuti, mfn. without good 

pasturage for cattle, barren, RV. vi, 47, 20. 

agdsti, is, in. (according to Un. iv, 

179 fr. 2. a-ga, a mountain, and asti, thrower, V2. 

as), N. of a Rishi (author of several Vedic hymns; 

said to have been the son of both Mitra and Varuna 


by Urvasi; to have been born in a wate~-jar; to 
have been of short stature; to have swallowed the 
ocean, and compelled the Vindhya mountains to pros¬ 
trate themselves before him ; to have conquered and 
civilized the South ; to have written on medicine, 
&c.); the star Canopus (of which Agastya is the 
regent, said to be the ‘cleanser of water/ because of 
turbid waters becoming clean at its rising, Ragh. xiii, 
36 -; Agasti Grandiflora, Susr. [also -iiru, f., L.]; 
(ayas), m. pi, the descendants of Agastya ; (/), f, a 
female descendant of Agastya, Pan. vi, 4, 149, Sch. 

Agrastlya, mfn. relating to Agasti, Pan. vi, 4, 
149, Comm. 

Agastya (3, 4), as, m. == agdsti; N. of Siva, L. 
— gita, as, i. pi. Agastya’s hymns, forming part of 
the Adi-varaha-Purana. — car a, m. the path of 
Canopus, -raarga, nr. the path of Agastya (Cano¬ 
pus), i. e. the South. — sambits, f., N. of an old 
compendium of theTantra literature. Ag“astyo- 
daya, in. the rising of Canopus; the seventh day of 
the second half of Bhadra. 

r OTTf a-ga, as , m.f. (Yed.) not going, Pan. 

iii, 2, 67 Sch. 

a-gatri,ta,m.VLb&d singer^ndyaBr. 

a-gadha, mf(«)n. not shallow, deep, 
unfathomable; (aj), m. a hole, chasm, L. ; N. of one of 
the five fires at the Svadhakara, Hariv. — Jala, mfn. 
having deepwater; (am),u. deepwater. — ru&Mra, 
n. a vast quantity of blood, Das. 

A-g^adhi-tva, am, n. depth, Comm, on Sis. i, 55. 

agar a (rarely as, m.), am, n. house, 

apartment [cf. — dahin, m. ‘house-burner/ 

an incendiary, Gaut. 

Agr 5 rin,mfn. possessing a house; (f), m. a house¬ 
holder, layman (cf. an-agdrin ), Jain. 

agira, as, m. (Vag), the sun, L.; 

fire, L.; a Rakshasa, L. 

•wtrrtfsF^ a-giraukas, mfn. (gird, instr. 

of gin, and okas), not to be kept back by hymns, N. of 
the Maruts, RV. i, 135, 9. 

d-gu, mfn. (fr. go with a), destitute of 

cows, poor, RV. viii, 2, 14; (us), m. ‘destitute of 
rays/ N, of Rahu the ascending node. 

A-gfo, f. not a cow, ParGp. ~ta (a-gd-), f. want 
of cows, RV.; AV. 

a-guna, mfn. destitute of qualities 

or attributes (said of the supreme Being, cf.nirgund); 
destitute of good qualities; (mr), m. a fault. — ta, f. 
or -tva, n. absence of qualities or of good qualities. 

— vat, mfn. destitute of qualities; without good 
qualities. — vadin, mfn, fault-finding, censorious. 

— sila, mfn. of a w’orthiess character. 

a-gupta, mfn. unhidden, uncon¬ 
cealed ; unprotected ; not keeping a secret. 

a-guru, mfn. not heavy, light; (in 
prosody) short as a short vowel alone or before a 



ogni-shvdtta . 

single consonant; (us, u), m.n. the fragrant Aloe 
Wood and tree, Aquiiaria Agallocha. 

a-qtulha , infn. unconcealed, manifest. 

— gandha, n. Asa Foetida. —bhava, mfn. having 
a transparent disposition. 

^SP^iftftrt-gribhlta, mfn. not seized or taken, 

unsubdued, RV. viii, 79, 1; TBr. — socis (dgri- 
bhita -), min. ‘ having unsubdued splendour,’ N. of 
Agni and the Maruts, RV. v, 54. 5 & 1 2 ; viii, 23, 
1; (‘having inconceivable splendour,’ BR.) 

a-griha, mfn. houseless. — ta, f. ! 
houselessness, TandvaBr. 

a-gocarn , mfn. not within range, 

unattainable, inaccessible (cf. drishty-agocara ), im¬ 
perceptible by the senses; (aw), n. anything that is 
beyond the cognizance of the senses; Brahma ; the 
not being seen, absence ; (cna), instr. iud. out of the 
sight of ail}' one (gen.), behind one’s back, Hit. 

*!TlftT 7 T a-gopa, mfn. without a cowherd, 

not tended by one, RV. 

TTifT^V d-go-rudhn, mfn. not driving away 

the cow, RV. viii, 2 20 ; (‘ not repelling or dis¬ 

daining praise,’ Say.) 

^TT1T?I d-gohyrt (4), mfn. not to be con¬ 

cealed or covered, bright, RV. 

agaukas. See 2. a-ga. 

agdhdd , mfn. (fr. a -f gdha, p-p.p. fr. 
*/ghas + ad), eating food which is not yet eaten, 
TS.; (Comm. — dagjhda.) 

ySJ*{\agna (fox agni in the following comp.) 

— marutau, m. du. Agni and Marut, Pan. vi, 3, 
28, Sch. — vislmu, voc. m. du. Agni and Vishnu, AV. 

Affnayl, f. the wife of Agni, one of the deva-pat- 
ftyah , RV. i, 22, 1 2 & v, 46, 8 ; the Treta-vuga, L. 

agni, is , m. ( jag, Un.) fire ; sacri¬ 
ficial fire (of three kinds, Garhapatya, Ahavaniya, and 
Dakshina); the number three, Suryas.; the god ot 
fire ; the fire of the stomach, digestive faculty, gastric 
fluid ; bile, L.; gold, L.; N. of various plants, Semi¬ 
carpus Anacardium, Susr., Plumbago Zeylanica and 
Rosea, Citrus Acida ; mystical substitute for the let¬ 
ter r; in the Katantra grammar N. of noun-stems 
ending in i and u [cf. Lat. Lith. ugni-s ; 

Slav, ognj], — kana, m. ‘fire-particle,’ a spark. 

— karman, n. ‘ fire-act,’ piling up the wood &c., 
SBr.; action of Agni, Nir.; cauterization, Susr. 

— kalpa {agni-), mfn. having the nature of fire, SBr. 

— karika [L. 1 , f. ai»d -karya [M11. &c.], n. kin¬ 
dling or feeding the sacrificial fire with clarified butter 
&c.; the prayers said while doing so, Kathas.; cau¬ 
terization. — kashtha, n. Agallochum, L. — kuk- 
kuta, m. a lighted wisp of straw, firebrand, L. 

— kunda, 11. a pan with live coals, R.; a hole or 
enclosed space for the consecrated fire, Kathas. 

— kumara, m. a particular preparation of various 
drugs; N. of a class of Bhavanavasin deities, Jain. 

— krita, mfn. made by fire. — ketu (agtiij, mfn. 
having fire as an emblem or characteristic mark 
(Ushas), TS.; (us), m., N. of a Rakshas, R. — kona, 
m. the south-east quarter, ruled over by Agni, L. 

— krlda, f. ‘ fire-sport,’ fire-works, illuminations,&c. 

— kb-ada, f. an infernal pan or stove, Karand. 

— gfarbha, mf(rt)n. pregnant with fire, BjArUp.; 
(aj), m. a gem supposed to contain and give out solar 
heat ( = siirya-kantd ), L.; N. of a frothy substance 
on the sea, engendered by the submarine fire, L.; N. 
of a man; (a), f. the plant Mahajyotishmatl. 

— griba, n. house or place for keeping the sacred 
fire, MBh.; a room fitted with hot-baths, Car. — gran- 
tha, m., N. of a work. — ghata, m., N. of a 
hell, Karand. — caya [Sulb.], m. or -cayana, n. 
or -citi, f. or -citya [SBr.], f. arranging or pre¬ 
paring the sacred or sacrificial fire-place; agni say a, 
a heap or mass of fire, R. — cit, mfn. arranging the 
sacrificial fire, or one who has arranged it, SBr. &c.; 
An- (neg.), SBr. — cit-vat, mfn. possessing house¬ 
holders that have prepared a sacred fire-place. Pan. 
viii, 2, 10, Sch. — ja, mfn. ‘fire-bom/ produced by 
or in fire, AV.; MaitrS.; (as), m., N. of Vishnu, 
Hariv.; of a frothy substance on the sea (cf. -garbha), 
L. — janman, m. ‘ fire-born,’ Skanda, god of war. 

— j Sr a or -jala, m., N. of a frothy substance on the 
sea (cf. - garbha and -ja), L. -jihva, mfn. ‘having 

Aeni for tongue,’ consuming the sacrifice through 

V V. ' ’ __ *- 

Agni, RV.; (a), f. tongue or name of fire, AV.; | 
MundUp.: the plant Methonica Superba Langali). ! 

— jvalita-tejana, mfn. having a point hardened 
in fire, Mil. vii, 90. — jvala, m., N. of Siva ; \d , f. 
flame of fire: a plant with red blossoms, used by dyers, 
Grislea Tomentosa ; Jalapippali. — tap, mtn. enjoy- J 
ing the warmth of fire, RV. v, 61, 4. — tapas, 
mfn. hot as fire, glowing, RV. x, 68, 6. — tapta, 
mfn. fire-heated, glowing, RV. vii, 104, 5. — ta 

(agni-), f. the state of fire, SBr. — tejas (agni-), 
mfn. having the energy of fire or ot Agni, AV.; 
(as), m. one of the seven Rishis of the eleventh Man- 
vantara, Hariv. — traya, n. or -treta [Mil. ; 
MBh.], f. the three sacred fires, called respectively 
Garhapatya, Ahavaniya, and Dakshina. — tra,mtn., 
see dn-agnitrd. —da, m. ‘fire-giver,’ incendiary, 
Mn.; Yajft.; stomachic. — i.-dagdba (agni-), mfn. 
burnt with fire, RV. x, 103, additional verses; SBr.; 
cauterized, Susr.; (am'', n. a cautery. — 2 .-dagdha, 
mfn. burnt on a funeral pile, RV. x, 15, 14 ; TBr.; 
(as), m. pi. a class of Pitris who, when on earth, main¬ 
tained a sacred fire, Mn. iii, 199. — datta, m., N. ot 
a prince; of a Brahman, Kathas. — daman!, f. a 
narcotic plant, Solanum Jacquini. — dayaka, ni. 
= -da, q. v. — daha, m. a particular disease ; a fiery 
glow ;in the sky), Hariv. — dis, f. Agni’s quarter, 
the south-east. — dapana, mf(f)n. stomachic, Susr. 

— dipta, mfn. blazing, glowing; (a), f. the plant Ma¬ 
hajyotishmatl. — dipt!, f. active state of digestion, 
Susr. — duta (agni-), mfn. having Agni for a messen¬ 
ger, brought by Agni, RV. x, 14,13; AV. — dusbita, 
mfn. ‘fire-marked,’ branded. — deva, m. Agni; (d), 
f. = -nakshatrd, q.v., L. — devata (agni-), mfn. 
having Agni for deity, SBr. — daivata, n. — -na- 
kshatrd, q.v., VarBrS. — dh (agni-ah, dh for idh; 
cf. agnidh m. the priest who kindles the sacred fire, 
RV. ii, 1, 2 ; x, 41, 3; 91, 10. -dhSna, n. recep¬ 
tacle for the sacred fire, RV. x, 163, 3; AV. — na- 
ksbatra, n. the third lunar mansion, the Pleiades 
(Krittika), SBr. — nayana, n. the act of bringing 
out the sacrificial fire. — nirySsa, m. = -jdra. 
— nunna (agni-), mfn. struck by fire or lightning, 

S V. — netra (agni-), mfn. having Agni for a guide, 
VS. — pakva, mfn. cooked on the fire, Mn. — pad a, 
m. ‘whose foot has stepped on the sacrificial fire¬ 
place,’ N. of a horse, Laty.; Vait. — parikriya, f. 
care of the sacred fire, Mn. ii, 67. — paricchada, 
m. the whole apparatus of a fire-sacrifice, M11. vi, 4. 

— paridbana, n. enclosing the sacrificial fire with 
a kind of screen. — pariksha, f. ordeal by fire. 
— parvata, m. ‘fire-mountain,’ a volcano, R. 

— puccba, n. tail or extreme point of a sacrificial 
fire (arranged in the shape of a bird), AsvSr. — pur a, 
f. the castle of Agni, SBr. — purana, n., N. of a 
Purana. — purogama, mfn. having Agni lor a 
leader. — pranayana, n. = -nayana, q. v. — pra- 
nayaniya, mfn. referring to the -pranayana. 

— pratishtha, f. consecration of fire,especially ofthe 
nuptial fire. — prabha, f. a venomous insect, Susr. 

— pravesa, m. or-pravesana, 11. entering the fire; 
self-immolation of a widow on her husband’s funeral 
pile. — prastara, m. a fire-producing stone; flint; 
L. — prSyascitta, n. or -prayascitti [SBr.], f. 
an expiatory act during the pi^paration of the sacri¬ 
ficial fire. — bahu, m. smoke [cf. -vdha], L.; N. 
of a son of the first Manu, Hariv.; of a son of Pri- 
vavrata and KamyS, VP. — blja, n. gold, L.; N. of 
the letter r, RSmatUp. — bh^, n. ‘shining like fire,’ 
gold, L. — bhu, n. ‘fire-produced,’water, L. — bhu, 

m. Skanda, L.; N. of a Vedic teacher, with the patron. 
Kasvapa, VBr.; (in arithm.) six. — bhuti, m., N. 
of one of the eleven chief pupils (ganadharas) of the 
last Tirthakara. — bhrajas (agni-), mfn. possessing 
fiery’ splendour, RV. v, 54, 11. — mani, m. the 
sun-stone ( — surya-kdnta). — mat, mfn. being near 
the fire, AV. (RV. has -vat ); having or maintain¬ 
ing a sacrificial fire, Mn. &c.; having a good diges¬ 
tion, Susr. — mantha, mfn. producing fire by fric¬ 
tion ; (as), m. Premna Spinosa, Susr. manthana, 

n. production of fire by friction, AsvSr. -man- 
thaxuya, mfn. relating to such friction, ib. — maya, 
mf(f)n. fiery, SBr.; AitBr. —xnathara, m., N. ot 
an expounder of the Rig-veda, VP. — mSndya, n. 
slowness of digestion, dyspepsia. — marutt, m., N. 
of Agastya, L.; cf. dgnimdruta. — mitra, m., N. 
of a prince of the Sunga dynasty, son of Pushyamitra, 
VP. — m-indba ( agnim-indhd), m. the priest who 
kindles the fire, RV. i, 162, 5. — mukha (agni-), 

i mfn. having Agni for the mouth, SBr.; (as), m. a 

deity, a Rrilhmana, a tonic medicine, L.; Semicar¬ 
pus Anacardium ; Plumbago Zeylanica, L,; N. ot a 
bug, Paficat. ; (f), f. Semicarpus Anacardium ; Glo- 
riosa (or Methonica) Superba. — mudha (agni-), 
mfn. made insane by Agni, RV. x, 103, additional 
verses; AV. — yuta, m., N. of the author of the 
hymn x, 116 in the Rig-veda. — yojana, n. the act 
of stirring the sacrificial fire (to make it blaze up). 

— rakshana, 11. maintenance of the sacred domestic 
fire, — raja or -rajas, m. a scarlet insect, L. — ra- 
hasya, n. ‘mystery of Agr.i,’ title of the tenth 
book of the Satapatha-Brahmana. — rajan, mfn., 
pi. ‘ having Agni as king,’ N. of the Vaslis, SankhSr. 

— rasi, m. a heap or mass of fire, a burning pile. 

— rnba, f. the plant Mansarohinl. — rupa (agni-), 
mfn. fire-shaped, RV. x, 84, 1; (agni-rupd), n. 
a shape of fire, SBr. — retasa, mfn. sprung from 
Agni’s seed, SBr. — robin!, f. a hard inflamma¬ 
tory swelling in the arm-pit, Susr. — loka, m. the 
world of Agni, KaushUp. —vat, mfn. being near 
the fire, RV. vii, 104, 2 --mat, q.v.); ‘joined to 
(another) tire,’ N. of Agni, TS. — varcas, m., N. 

t of a teacher of the Puranas, VP. —var^ia, mf(c/)n. 
having the colour of fire ; hot, fiery (said of liquors), 
Mn. xi, 90 & 91 ; (as), m., N. of a prince, son of 
Sudarsana. — vardhaka or -vardhana, mfn. pro¬ 
moting digestion, stomachic. — vallabha, rn. the 
tree Shorea Robusta ; its resinous juice. — vana, m. 
a fiery arrow. — vfidin, m/fire-asserter,’ worshipper 
of fire. — vartta, mfn. gaining a livelihood by fire 
[as a blacksmith &c.], VarBrS. — vasas (agni-), 
mfn. wearing a fiery or red garment, AV. — vaha, 
m. the vehicle of fire, i. e. smoke, L. — vidha, f. 
manner or fashion of fire, SBr. — vimocaua, 11. the 
act of lowering the sacrificial fire (by spreading it 
out). — visarpa, m. spread of inflammation (in a 
tumour). — viharana, n. removing the sacrificial 
fire from the Agnldhra to the Sadas Mandapa. 

— virya, n. gold, L. — vriddhi, f. improvement 
of digestion. — vetala, m., N. of a Vetala (con¬ 
nected with the story of kingVikramaditya). — vela, 
f. the time at which the lire is kindled, afternoon, 
AsvGr. — vesa, m., N. of an ancient medical 
authority; also of other persons. — vesman, m. the 
fourteenth day of the Karma-masa, Suryapr. — ve- 
sya, m., N. of a teacher, MBh.; N. of the 22nd 
muhurta, Suryapr. — Parana or -sSla [AV.], n. or 
-sala, f. house or place for keeping the sacrificial 
fire. — sarman. m., N. of a man. — sikba, mfn. 
having a point like fire (an arrow), R.; (tfj), m. an 
arrow; a lamp; a safflower plant, L.; saffron, L.; N. 
of Vararuci’s father, Kathas. ; of a Vetala, Kathas.; 
(am), n. saffron, L. ; gold, L. — sikha, f. a flame, 
SBr. &c. ; the plants Gloriosa Superba and Meni- 
spermum Cordifolium. — susrusba, f. attention to 
the sacrificial fire, Mn. ii, 248. — sekhara, n. saf¬ 
fron. — sesha, m. appendix to the chapter on Agni 
in the Taittirlya-SamhitS. — sri, m(nom. pi. -sri- 
jdriifn. having the brightness cf Agni, RV. iii, 26, 5 
[‘approachingthe fire (of lightning),’ Sfty.] — sroni, 
f. leg of the sacrificial altar, KatySr. — sbtut, m. 

‘ laudatory of Agni,’ the first day of the Agnishtoma 
sacrifice, one dav of the Sattra Pancadasaratra, SBr. 
&c. ; N. of a son of the sixth Manu, Cakshusha (by 
Nadvala), VP.; Hariv. [v. 1. -shhibfi]. -Bhtoma, 

m. ‘praise of Agni,’ N. of a protracted ceremony or 
sacrifice (forming one of the chief modifications 
[sanisthds] of the Jyotishtoma offered by one who 
is desirous of obtaining heaven ; the performer is a 
Brahman who maintains the sacred fire, the offering 
is the Soma, the deities to whom the offering is made 
are Indra &c., the number of priests required is 16, 
the ceremonies continue for five days); a mantra or 
kalpa connected with the Agnishtoma, L. ; (agni- 
shtoma)-ydjin, mfn. one who has performed the A.; 
-sad, mfn. performing the A.; - sddya , n. the per¬ 
formance of A., SBr.; -sdmd, m. and -sdmdn , n. the 
passage ofthe Sama-veda chanted at the A.; - hotra , 

n. title of a Vedic text. — sh$ha, mfn. placed in, or 
over, or near the fire; (as), m. a pan, fire-pan, R. 
[cf. - shthikd ] ; a vehicle carrying the fire, ApSr,; (in 
the Asvamedha sacrifice) the eleventh Yupa or sacri¬ 
ficial post which (of all the twenty-one) is nearest 
the fire, SBr.; (d), f. that comer of the sacrificial 
post which (of all the eight) is nearest the fire, SBr. 

— shtkikS, f. a fire-pan [cf. -shtha']. — shvStti. 
[in Epic and later texts -svdtta], as, in. plur. 
‘tasted by the funeral fire,’ the Manes, RV. x, 15, 
11; VS.; SBr.; in later texts N. of a class of 
Manes (who on earth neglected the sacrificial fire). 


TOKTU agha-marshana. 

n. taking the sacred fire from its usual place (previous 


MBh. Sec. - samskara, m. the consecration of 
hre; performance of any rite in which the application 
of fire is essential, as the burning of a dead body, 
Mn. ; Ragh. — sakha, rn. ‘ friend of fire,’ the wind, 
L. — saiukasa (agni-), mfn. resplendent iike fire, 
SBr. — sajjS, f. ? indigestion, Susr. » samcaya, 

m. preparing the sacrificial fire-place; see -cayana. 
- sambhava, mfn. produced from fire; (as), m. 
wild safflower, L ; = -jam ; ‘the result of digestion,’ 
chyme or chyle, L. —saras, n., N. of a Tirtha, 
VarP. - sava, m. consecration of the fire, TS.; 
SBr. — sahSya, m. ‘friend of fire,’the wind; a wild 
pigeon; L. — sakshika, mfn. taking Agni or the 
domestic or nuptial fire for a witness, R. Sec. —Sa¬ 
ks hika-maryada, mfn. one who taking Agni for 
a witness gives a solemn promise of conjugal fidelity. 

— s£da, m. weakness of digestion, Susr. — sara, ! 

n. a medicine for the eyes, a collyrium, L. — sa- 
varni, m., N. of a Manu, L. — sinha, m., N. of 
the father of the seventh black VSsudeva, Jain. 

— Sutra, n. thread of fire; a girdle of sacrificial 
grass put upon a young Brahman at his investiture; 

h. — stambha,m.or-stambliaiia,n.the(magical) 
quenchingof fire. — stoka, m. a particleof fire, spark. 

— svatta, see -shvattd. — havana, n. a sacrificial 
libation,Gaut. — hut [VS.] or -huta, mfn,sacrificed 
by fire. — hotri {agni-), m. having Agni for a 
priest, RV. x, 66, 8. — i. -hotra (agni-), mfn. 
sacrificing to Agni, AV. vi, 97, i; ( 7 ), f. the cow 
destined for the Agnihotra, SBr.; AitBr.; ( agni- 
hotriyvatsd , m. her calf, SBr. — 2. -hotra, n. A V. 
Sec. oblation to Agni (chiefiy of milk, oil, and sour 
gruel ; there are two kinds of Agnihotra, one is | 
nitva , i.e. of constant obligation, the other .I'dmy a, 

i. e. optional); the sacred fire, Mn.; YajfL &c.; (ag- 
nihotra)-devata, f. the deity of the Agnihotra ; 
-tva, n. the state of the A., MaitrS.; -sthdh, f. a 
pot used at the A.,_SBr. ; -hdvani, f. a spoon used 
at the A., SBr, ; AsvGr.; -hut, offering the A., 
AV. ; -homa , m. a libation at the A., KatvSr. ; 
agnihotrdyanin, mfn. one who offers only the A., 
KatySr. ; agni hot rdvr it, f. (see dvr if) the mere 
A. without recitation of Vedic formulas, KfltvSr. ; 
agnihqtrdhuti [SBr., cf. ahuti) and agnihotreshti 
[KatySr., cf. ishti], f. a libation or offering at the 
A.; agnihotrocchishtd [SBr.] and agnihotrocche- 
shand [TS.], n. the remains of the A. — hotrin, 
mfn. practising the Agnihotra, maintaining the sacri¬ 
ficial fire, SBr. &c. — homa, m. oblation put into 
the fire, KatySr. — hvara, mfn. ? making a mistake 
in the fire-ceremonial, MaitrS. Ag'nldh, m. the 
priest who kindles the fire, VS. ; SBr. ; AitBr. [cf. 
agnidh\ Agnidhra, m. (= agni-bahu), N. of 
two men. Agnindrau, m. du. Agni and Indra, VS. 
Agnindhana,n. kindling or feeding the fire,Mn.&c. 
Agni-parjanyau, Voc. m. du. Agni and Parjanya, 
RV. vi, 52, 16. Agnl-v&runau, m. du. Agni and 
Varuna, SBr. Agni-shomS or man, m. du. Agni 
and Soma, RV.; AV.; VS.; (agn is homa)-pranaya - 
na, n. bringing out the fire and the Soma, a ceremony 
in the Jyotishtoma sacrifice. Agmshomxya, mfn. 
related or sacred to Agni and Soma, AV. Sec. ; (ag- 
nJshomiya)-nirvdpa, m. making libations with the 
cake sacred to Agni and Soma, a ceremony in the 
Darsapurnamasa sacrifice ; -jasu, m. a victim, gene¬ 
rally a sheep or goat, sacred to Agni and Soma ; 
-pasv-anushthdna, n. the rite connected with that 
victim at the jyotishtoma sacrifice ; -puroddsa, m. 
cake sacred to Agni and Soma (baked in eleven 
bowls); -yaga, m. one of the three sacrifices of 
the Purnamasa; agnishomiyaikadasa-kapdla, m. 
cake sacred to Agni and Soma, see above. Agny- 
agara [SBr. &c.] or -ag&ra, m. house or place for 
keeping the sacred fire. Agny-abhSva, m. absence 
or want of the sacred fire ; loss of appetite. Agny- 
arcis, f. or n. flame; SBr. Agny- 5 gSra, see 
agny-agdra. Agny-Stmaka, mf(ihd)n. having 
Agni’s nature. Agny-adhSna [KaushBr.] or 
-&dh£ya [AV.; Mn. &c.], n. placing the fire on 
the sacrificial fire-place ; the-ceremony of preparing 
the three sacred fires Ahavanlya Sc c.; ( agnyddheya )- 
devata, f, the deity of the Agnyadheya ceremony, 
ParGr.; -riipa , n. form or shape of the A., SBr.; 

-iarkara, as, f. plur. (figuratively) bad performance 
of the A., SBr.; -kavis, n. an oblation at the A., 
SBr. Agny-Slaya, m. = agny-agard. Agny- 
fihlta, m. one who has performed the AgnySdhSna, 

K. &c. Agny-ntp 5 ta, m. a fiery portent, Car.; 
a conflagration, ParGf. Agny-uts&din, mfn. one 
who lets the sacred fire go out. Agny-uddharana, 

to a sacrifice). Agny-upasthana, 11. worship of 

Agni at the conclusion of the Agnihotra Sec., SBr. 
Agny-edha, m. one who kindles the fire, VS. 

Agnika, as, m. a plant, probably Semecarpus 
' Anacardium ; a kind of serpent, Susr.; an insect of 
I scarlet colour, Coccinella ; (am), 11. the Acayou-nut, 
j Susr. 

Agnisat, ind. to the state of fire (used in comp, 
with V 1. kri and V hh ft, e. g. agnisat kri, to reduce 
to fire, to consume by fire), cf. bhasmasdt. 

agman, a , n. conflict, battle, L.; 

(connected with ajman, q. v.) 

dgra,mfn. (fr. Vang , Un.), foremost, 
anterior, first, prominent, projecting, chief, best, L.; 
supernumerary, L.; (d), t. [soil, rckhd ] measure of 
amplitude (i. e. the distance from the extremity of 
the gnomon-shadow to the line of the equinoctial 
shadow', Suryas.; (am), n. foremost point or part; 
tip ; front; uppermost part, top, summit, surface ; 
point; and hence, figuratively, sharpness; the near¬ 
est end, the beginning ; the climax or best part; goal, 
aim; multitude, L. ;*a weight, equal to a pala, L.; 
a measure of food given as alms, L.; (in astron.) the 
sun’s amplitude ; (am), ind. in front, befoie, ahead 
of; (agrena), ind. in front, before (without or 
with acc.), SBr.; ( dgre), ind. in front, ahead of, 
in the beginning, first; further on, subsequently, 
below (in a book) ; from—up to (<i), SBr.; before 
(in time), AitUp. &c. [cf. Gk. a.vpoj']. — kara, 
m. the fore part of the hand, finger ; first ray ; Sis. 

— kaya, m. the fore part of the body. — ga, m. a 
leader. — ganya, mfn. to be counted or regarded as 
the foremost, principal, —gamin, mfn. preceding, 
taking the lead. — grasika, f. the claim or right to 
the first morsel, Pan. iii, 3, 111, Kas. — ja (cf. -ja), 
mfn. born first or earlier; (ajj, m. the first-boni, an 
elder brother, Mn. &c.; a Brahman, VarBrS. Sec.; (a), 
f. an elder sister. — jahgha, f. the fore part of the 
leg, the shin-bone, L. — janman, m. the first-born, 
an elder brother; a Brahman, Mn. ; YajfL Sec .; a 
member of one of the three highest castes, L.; Brah¬ 
ma. — ja, mfn. first-bom, RV. ix, 5, 9. —jataka i 
or -jati, m. a Brahman, L. —jihva, n. tip of the I 
tongue, VS. — jya, f. sine of the amplitude, Suryas. 

— m, mfn. taking the lead, foremost; N.of an Agni, 
MBh. — niti (agra-), f. the first offering, RV. ii, 11, 
14. — tas, ind.; see col. 3. — tirtha, m., N. of a 
prince, MBh. — datri, mfn. offering the best bits 
(to the gods), MBh. — dSnin, m. a degraded Brah¬ 
man who receives presents from Sudras,or takes things 
previously offered to the dead, BrahmavP. — didhi- 
shn, m. = agre-didhishu, TBr. — nakha, m. tip 
of a nail, R.; cf. ?iahiidgra. — nSsika, f. tip of the 
nose, R.; cf. ndsikagra. — nirupana, n. determin¬ 
ing beforehand, prophecy. — parni, f. cowage, Car- 
popogon Pruriens. — pa, mfn. drinking first, MBh. 

— pani, m. fore part of the hand ; the right hand, 

L. — pada, m. fore part of the foot, Sis. — puja, 
f. highest act of reverence, R. — peya, n. preced¬ 
ence in drinking, AitBr. — pradayin, mfn. offering 
first, MBh. — praslrna, mfn. broken at the top, 
SBr. — bija, mtn. (said of plants) propagated bv 
cuttings; m. a viviparous-plant. — bbaga (or 

agransa), m. fore part; (in astron.) degree of am¬ 
plitude, L._ — bhuj, mfn. having the precedence in 
eating, TAr.; N. of the sun, MBh. — bhu, mfn. 
being at the top, at the head of. — bhumi, f. a goal, 
L.; the top-floor (of *a house), Megh. — mahislu, 
f. the principal queen, R.; Jain. — mansa, n. the 
heart, L.; morbid protuberance of the liver. — yana, 

11. stepping in front to defy the enemy. — y&yin, 
mfn. going before, taking the lead ; (f), m. a leader, 
Sak. — yavam, mfn. going before, RV. x, 70, 2. 

— yodbin, m. the foremost man or leader in a fight; 
a champion. — lokitS, f. a kind of vegetable, similar 
to the spinage. — vaktra, n., N. of a surgical in¬ 
strument, Susr. —vat (agra-), mfn. being at the 
top, TS. — sas, ind. from the beginning, AV. 

— samdliani, f. the register of human actions (kept 
by Yama), L. — sandkyS, f. early down, —sara, 
mf(r)n. going in front, taking the lead. — sSn a, m. 
the front part of a table-land, L. — s 5 rS, f. a short 
method ofcountingimmense numbers. — sucl,t.point 
of a needle, Naish. — sena, m., N. of Janamejaya’s 
son. — hasta, m. «= -pani; the tip of an elephant’s 
trunk, Vikr.; finger, R. — hSyana, m. ‘commence¬ 
ment of the year,’ N. of a Hindu month (Mdrga- 
tirska, beginning about the 12th of November). 

— hara, m. royal donation of land to BrShmans; 
land or village thus given, MBh. Agransa = agra- 
bhdga. Agransu, m. the cud of a ray of light, the 

j focal point. Agrakshan, n. a side-look, R. A- 
j grang-uli, m. the finger-tip. Agradvan, mfn. 
having precedence in eating, RV. vi, 69, 6, Agra- 
nlka, n. the front of an army, vanguard, Mn. Sec. 
Agrayanlya, n. title of the second of the fourteen 
oldest (but lost) Jaina books, called Purvas, Agra- 
sana, mfn. eating before another (abl.), MarkP. 
Agr&sana, n. seat of honour. Agre-ga, Sec. ; 
see dgre below. Agretvan, mf(tf/ 7 )n. going in 
front, AV. Agropaharaxuya, mfn. that which 
has to be first or principally supplied, Susr. 

Agratas, ind. in front, before ; in the beginning, 
first, RV. x. 90, 7 ; VS.; (with gen.) before, in pre¬ 
sence of. Agratab-\/1. kri f to place in front or 
at the head, to consider most important. Agra- 
tah-sara, mf(/)n, going in front, taking the lead. 

Agrima, mfn. being in front, preceding, prior, 
furthest advanced ; occurring further on or below (in 
a book, cf. dgre) \ the foremost, RV. v, 44, 9; eldest, 
principal, L.; (d), f. the fruit Annona Reticulata. 

Agriya, mfn. foremost, principal, RV.; oldest, 
first-born, RV. i, 13, 10; (rt-sj, m. elder brother, L.; 
(dm), n. the first-fruits, the best part, RV. iv, 37, 4 
and probably ix, 71, 4. — vat, mfn.; f. vatl (scil. 
ric\ N. of the hymn Rig-veda ix, 62, 25, quoted 
in Laty. 

Agriya, mfn. best, L.; (<7j), m.elder brother, L. 
Agre,ind. (loc.), see dgra . — ga [RV.ix,86,45] 
or -ga [TBr. &c.], mfn. going in front or before. 

— gu, mfn. (said of the waters) moving forwards, 
VS.; SBr. — m, m. a leader, VS. —tana, mfn. 
occurring further on, subsequently (in a book). — da- 
dhus [MaitrS.] or -dadhishn [kapS,] or -didhi- 
shu [MBh.; Gaut.], m. a man who at his first mar¬ 
riage takes a wife that was married before; (agre-di¬ 
dhishu or - didhishu), f. a married woman whose elder 
sister is still unmarried. — pa [RV. iv, 34, 7 & lo]or 
-pu [VS.;SBr.], mfn.havingtheprecedence in drink¬ 
ing. — bhru(\/ bhram),m. wandering in front, Pan. 
vi, 4,40, Comm. — vana,n.the border ofa forest, (gana 
rajadantddi, q.v.) — vadha, m. hitting or killing 
whatever is in front, VS. — sara, mf(f)n. going in 
front, preceding ; best, L. — sarika, m. a leader, L. 

Agrya, mf(ff)n. foremost, topmost, principal, best; 
proficient, well versed in (with loc.) ; intent, closely 
attentive; (<zj), m. an elder or eldest brother, L .; 
(d), f. = tri-phald, q. v.; (am), n. a roof, L. — ta- 
pas, m., N. of a Muni, Kathas. 

a-grahhana , mfn. (Vgrahh — V 

grab), having nothing which can be grasped, RV. 
i, 116, 5. 

A-graha, mfn. = mtikhya (Comm.), MBh. iii, 
14189; BR. propose to read agra-Jia, destroying 
the best part; (as), m. non-acceptance; a houseless 
man, i. e. a Vanaprastha, a Brahman of the third 
class, L. 

A-grahln, mfn. not taking; not holding (said of 
a leech and of tools), Susr. 

A-grahya, mfn.not to be conceived or perceived 
or obtained or admitted or trusted ; to be rejected. 

A-grahyaka, mfn. not to be perceived, impal¬ 
pable, MBh. 

a-gramya , mfn. not rustic, town- 

made ; not tame, wild. 

agri, m. a word invented for the ex¬ 

planation of agni, SBr. 

dgru, us, m. unmarried, RV. v, 44, 7 & 

vii, 96, 4 ; AV.; (u), f. a virgin, RV.; AV.; nom. 
pi. agriivas, poetical N. of the ten fingers, R V.; and 
also of the seven rivers, RV. i, 191, 14 Sc iv, 19, 

7 ; cf. Zend aghru. 

agh , cl. 10. P. aghayati , to go 

wrong, sin, L. 

A gha, mfn. bad, dangerous, RV.; sinful, impure, 
BhP.; (as); m., N. of an Asura, BhP.; (dm), n. 
evil, mishap, RV.; AV.; sin, impurity, M11. Sec.; 
pain, suffering, L.; (as), f. pi. the constellation 
usually called MaghS, RV. x, 85, 13. — krit, mfn. 
doing evil or harm, an evil-doer, AV. — ghna or 
-n&saka, mfn. sin-destroying, expiatory; 
m. ‘an expiator,’ N. of Vishnu. — deva, m., N. of 
a man, Rajat. — marshana, mfn. ‘ sin-effacing^’ 
N. of a particular Vedic hymn [RV. x, 190] still used 
by Brahmans as a daily prayer, Mn.; Ysjff.; Gaut.; 



^r^TRTT ag ha-mar a. 

ahgdngi-hhava . 

(tfj), m., N. of the author of that prayer, son of Ma- 
dhucchandas; (plur.) his descendants, Hariv.; AsvSr. 
— mara, mfn. fearfully destructive, AV, — rud, 
mfii. ‘howling fearfully,’N. of certain female demons, 
AV. —vat, mfn. sinful; [voc. aghavan or aghos, 
q.v.] — visha(rt - r //d-), mf(ff)n. fearfully venomous, 
AV. — sans a (aghd-), rnih. wishing evil, wicked, 
RV.; TBr. — sansa-han, m. slaving the wicked, 
RV. — sansin, mfn. confessing sin, R.; Dak — ha- 
rana, n. removal of guilt, I-. — hara, m. an out¬ 
rageous robber, SV.; AV. Agbasva, mfn. having 
a bad or vicious horse, RV. i, 116, 6 ; (as) [accord¬ 
ing to NBD. fr. agha ■+- izv 7 .r]t ni., N. of a snake, 
AV. Agbasura.m. Agha, Kapsa’s general, BhP. 
Agbithan, n. inauspicious dav, SahkhSr. Aghau- 
gba-marsbana, mfn. destroying a whole mass of 

# * 

Agbala, mf(tf)n. fearful. AV.; SBr.; SankhBr. 

Aghaya, Nom. P. cighdyati (part/j/aV), to intend 
to injure, to threaten, RV.; AV. 

Agbayu, mfn. intending to injure, malicious, RV. 

a-ghatamana, mfn. incongruous, 


a-ghana, mfn. not dense or solid. 

a-gharma, mfn. not hot, cool. — dba- 
man, m. ‘having cool splendour,’ the moon. 

d-ghata , m. no injury, no damage, 


A-ghatin, mfn. not fatal, not injurious, harmless. 

A-gbatuka, mfn. not injurious, MaitrS. 

TPITft^ a-gkarin , mfn. not anointing, AV. 

’SHTTHoR a-ghasaka , mfn. without food or 


a-ghrina, mfn. incompassionate. 

A-gbrinin,mfn. not contemptuous, not disdainful. 

d-ghora , mfn. not terrific; (ers), m. 
a euphemistic title of Siva ; a worshipper of Siva and 
Durga ; (a), f. the fourteenth day of the dark half of 
Bhadra, which is sacred to Siva. — ghoratara, 
mfn. having a form both not terrific and terrific, 
MaitrS. — ghora-rupa,m. ‘having a form or nature 
both not terrific and terrific,’ N. of Siva, MBh. 
— caksbuB ( dghora -), mfn. not having an evil eye, 
RV. x, 85, 44. —patbin or -marga, m. a par¬ 
ticular sect of Saivas who eat loathsome food and are 
addicted to disgusting practices. — pramana, n. a 
terrific oath, L. 

’’Snifa a-ghosha, as, m. (in Gr.) ‘non-so- 

nance, absence of all sound or soft murmur,’ hard 
articulation or effort as applied to the hard conso¬ 
nants and Visarga ; (mfn.), soundless, hard (as the 
hard consonants). 

aghos , ind.,voc. of agha-vat, O sin¬ 
ner J Fan. viii, 3, I, Sch.; see also Pan. viii, 3, 1 7 seqq. 

^TITr yd-ghnat, mf (ati) n. ( Vhan ), not kill¬ 

ing, not injurious, RV. 

A-gbnya(2, 3) or a-gbny& (2, 3), m. ‘not to 
be killed,’ a bull, and (a, a), f. a cow, RV.; AV.; 
( aghnya ), said of a cloud, RV. x, 46, 3. 

a-ghreya, mfn. (Vghrd), improper to 

be smelled at, Mn. 

gq'* ahk, cl. 1. (connected with Vatic) 
* ^ A. ahkate,dnahks, ahkishy ate,anki turn, 
to move in a curve, L.; cl. 10. P. ahkayati , to move 
in a curve, L.; to mark, stamp, brand. 

A&k&, as, m. a hook, RV. i, 162, 13, See .; part 
of a chariot (used in the dual), TS.; TBr.; a curve ; 
the curve in the human, especially the female, figure 
above the hip (where infants sitting astride are 
carried by mothers, hence often =‘breast’ or ‘lap’); 
the side or flank ; the body ; proximity, place ; the 
bend in the arm; any hook or crooked instrument; 
a curved line ; a numerical figure, cipher; a figure 
or mark branded on an animal, &c.; any mark, line, 
stroke, ornament, stigma; a number ; the numbers 
one and nine ; a co-efficient; an act of a drama ; a 
drama ; a military show or sham-fight; a misdeed, 
a sin, L. [cf. Gk.ay«ds, ayfcaXrj, ay k&iv, 5y kos, and 
Lat. uncus]. — karana, n. the act of marking or 
stamping. — kara, m. a champion chosen by each 

side to decide a battle, Balar.; ankal'dri- V 1. kri, 
to choose such a champion, Balar. — tantra, n., 
N. of a book treating of magical marks or figures. 
— dhara^ia, f. manner of holding the body, figure, 
AsvSr. — pariva^tana, n. turning the body, turn¬ 
ing on the other side. — pada-vrata, n., N. of a 
chapter in the Bhavishyottara-Puraiia. — pali, f. 
or -palika, f. embracing, an embrace, L. — pall, f. 
an embrace ; a nurse, L.; the plant (Firing) Medi- 
cago Esculenta. — pasa, m. a peculiar concatenation 
of numerals or numbers. — pasa-vyavabara, m. 
the use of that concatenation. — pasadhyaya, 
m. the study of that concatenation. — bandba, m. 
branding with a mark (that resembles a headless 
body), Vaifi. — bhaj, mfn. (an infant) carried on 
the hip ; (forced fruit; nearly ripe, early ripe, Kir.; 
near one’s side, in one’s possession, close at hand, 
easy ot attainment. — mukha, n. introductory act 
of a drama giving a clue to the whole plot. — lodya, 
m. ginger, Cihcoda or Cihcotaka. — vidya, f. science 
of numbers, arithmetic. Aiikaiika, n. water, VS. 
Aiikavatara, m. the close of a dramatic act (pre¬ 
paring the audience for the following one). 

Ankati, is, m. wind, L. ; fire, L. ; Brahma, L. ; 
a Brahman who maintains the sacred fire, L, ; N. 
of a teacher of the Sama-veda. 

Ankana, am, n. the act of marking, stamping, 
branding, ciphering, writing; (mfn.), marking. 

Ankas, as, n. a curve or bend, RV. iv, 40, 4 ; cf. 

Gk. ayKos. 

Ankasa, am, n. the flanks or the trappings of a 
horse, RV. iv, 40, 3. 

Aiikita, mfn.marked,branded; numbered,counted, 

Ankin, mfn. possessing a hook, RV. iii, 45, 4; 
AV. &c.; (f), m. a small drum, L.; (ini), f. a num¬ 
ber of marks, {gana khalddi, q. v.) 

Anki, f. a small drum, L. 

Anknta and ankudaka, as, m. a key, L. 

Anknpa, am, n. water, VS. 

Ankura, as, m. a sprout, shoot, blade ; a swell¬ 
ing, a tumour, Susr.; a hair, L.; blood, L.; water, L. 

Ankuraka, as, m. a nest, L. 

Aiikurita, mfn. sprouted. 

Ankusa, as, am, m. n. a hook, especially an ele¬ 
phant-driver’s hook ; (a) or (f), f. one of the twenty- 
four Jaina goddesses, L. [cf. Gk. dyKiarpov ; Germ. 
Angef], — grab a, m. an elephant-driver. — dur- 
dhara, m. a restive elephant. 

AixkTiBita, mfn. urged on by the hook. 

Anknsin, mfn. having a hook, laying hold of with 
a hook, RV. x, 34, 7. 

Aiikuyat, mfn. (fr. a Nom. ahkuya, related to 
aitka ), moving tortuously (to escape), RV. vi, 15,1 7. 

Ankura, as, m. a sprout, L. See ankura. 

Aixkusba, as, am, m. n. an ichneumon, Un. 
Comm.; cf. ahgusha. 

Ankya, mfn. fit or proper to be marked or counted; 
(as), m. a small drum [cf. anki], L. 

Ki £{<. ankara, as, m. ? diminution in 

music, L. 

ankofa, ankotha, ankola, ahkolla , ah- 
kolaka, as, m. the plant Alangium Hexapetalum. 
AiikoUa-sara, m. ‘essence of Ankolla,’ a poison 
prepared from the plant Ankolla, &c. 

'M gf|fH5«ST ankolika, f. (a corruption of ah - 
ka-palika, q. v.), an embrace, L. 

ahk tv a, ind. p. (Vanj), having be¬ 
smeared, PSn. vii, 2, 62, Sch. 

sit* ahkh, cl. 10. P. (p. ahkhayat), to stir 

^up, mix, SBr. 

ahg, cl. 1 . P. ahgati , anahga, aiigi- 
* turn, to go (cf. a /ag) ; cl. 10. P. anga- 
yati, to mark (cf. Vahk), L. 

Aiigana, am, n. walking, L.; ‘place to walk in,’ 
yard ; see s. v. 

WJp 1. ahga, ind. a particle implying at¬ 
tention, assent or desire, and sometimes impatience; 
it may be rendered by well; indeed, true ; please; 
rather ; quick ; kim ahga, how much rather 1 

Aigfl (for ahga in comp. whU V 5 . kri and its 
derivatives). — karana, n. act of taking the side of, 
assenting, agreeing, promising. — k£ra, m. agree¬ 
ment, promise. — V* • to take the side of; to 

agree to, assent, promise, confess. — krita, mfn. 
agreed to, promised. — krlti, f. agreement, promise. 

2. ahga, am, n. (\ am, Un.), a limb of 

the body; a limb, member; the body; a subordinate 
division or department, especially of a science, as the 
six Vedangas ; hence the number six ; N. of the chief 
sacred texts of the Jainas; a limb or subdivision of 
Mantra or counsel (said to be five, viz. 1. karma- 
ndm drambhdpayah, means of commencing opera¬ 
tions ; i.purusha-dravya-sampad, providing men 
and materials; 3. dcsa-kdla-vibhoga, distribution 
of place and time ; 4. vipatti-pratikdra, counter¬ 
action of disaster ; 5. kdrya-siddhi, successful ac¬ 
complishment ; whence mantra is said to be pail- 
cahga) ; any subdivision, a supplement ; (in Gr.) the 
base of a word, but in the strong cases only, Pan. i, 
4, 13 seqq.; anything inferior or secondary, anything 
immaterial or unessential, see ahga-td ; (in rhetoric) 
an illustration ; (in the drama) the whole of the sub¬ 
ordinate characters; an expedient ; a mental organ, 
the mind, L.; (as), m. sg. or (fllr), m - pU N. of 
Bengal proper or its inhabitants; (sg.), N. of a king 
of Ahga ; (mfn.), having members or divisions, L. ; 
contiguous, L. — kartana, n. cutting off a limb. 

— karman, n. or -kriya, f. a supplementary sacri¬ 
ficial act. — kashaya, m. the essence of the body 


(said of the semen virile), SBr. — graha, m. ‘limb- 
seizure,’ spasm, Susr. —ja, mfn. produced from or 
on the body ; ornamental, L.; produced by a supple¬ 
mentary ceremony; (as), m. a son, L.; hair of the 
head, L.; the god of love, L. ; intoxicating pas¬ 
sion, L.; drunkenness, L. ; a disease, L.; (d), f. a 
daughter; (am), n. blood. — Janus, m. a son. 

— jata, mfn. produced from or on the body ; orna¬ 
mental ; produced by a supplementary ceremony. 
— Jvara, mfn. causing fever, AV. —ta, f. or -tva, 
11. a state of subordination or dependance; the 
being of secondary importance, the being unessential. 

— da, m., N. of a brother of Rama ; of a son of 
Gada ; of an ape, son of Balin ; (d), f. the female 
elephant of the south ; (am), n. a bracelet worn on 
the upper arm. — dvlpa, m. one of the six minor 
Dvipas. — nyasa, m. ceremony of touching certain 
parts of the body. — pali, f. an embrace, L.; see 
ahka-pdli. — prayascitta, n. expiation of bodily 
impurity, especially that arising from death in a family. 
— bku, m. son, Sis. — bheda, mfn. causing rheuma¬ 
tism, AV. — marda or -mardaka or -mardin, 

m. a servant who shampoos his master’s body; ahga- 
marda also rheumatism, Car. — xnarsha, m. pain in 
the limbs, rheumatism. — marsha-prasamana, 

n. alleviation of rheumatism. — m-ejayatva (ah- 
gam-ej°), n. the trembling of the body, Yogas. 

— yasbti, f. a slender form, fairv-figure. — yaga, m. 
a subordinate sacrificial act. — rakta, m. the plant 
Gundarqcanl. — raksbanl or -raksbini,f. ‘body- 
protector,’ a coat of mail, L. — r 5 ga, m. application 
of unguents or cosmetics to the body (especially after 
bathing); scented cosmetic. — r 5 j or -rSJa, m., N. 
of Karna, king of Aiiga. — rajya, n. kingdom of 
Anga. — ruha, mfn. ‘growing on the body,’ hair, 
wool, down, &c. — lipi, f. written character of Anga. 

— loka, m. the Country Aiiga. —lodya, m. a sort 
of grass; ginger, or its root. — vak-pani-mat,mfn. 
possessing mind(?), speech, and hands. — vikriti, 
f. change of bodily appearance, collapse ; fainting, 
apoplexy. — vikshepa, m. gesticulation; movement 
of the limbs and arms; a kind of dance. — vidyS, 
f. knowledge of lucky or unlucky marks on the 
body, Chiromantia, Mn. vi, 50, &c. — vaikrita, 
n. a wink, nod, sign. — sas, ind. into parts, SBr. 

— samsk 5 ra,m. or-samskrlyS, f. embellishment 
of person, bathing, perfuming and adorning the body. 

— sambati, f. compactness of limb, symmetry of 
body. — gambits, f. the Sambits or phonetic re¬ 
lation between consonants and vowels in the body 
of a word, TS. Prat. — 8anga, m. * bodily contact/ 
coition, L-. — skandha, m. a subdivision of a science. 

— sparsa, m. bodily contact. — hJSra [Kathas.] or 

-bari [L.], m. gesticulation. — bina, mfn. limbless, 
mutilated ; incorporeal; (as), m. Karnadeva. A&- 
' gang!, ind. jointly or reciprocally, related as one 
limb to another or to the body. Aiig 4 zLgi-tS, f. 
mutual relation or correlation as between the limbs, 
or a limb and the body, or between subordinate and 
the principal, or principal and accessory. Ailga&gi- 
bh&va, m. correlation between the limbs of a body; 
the mutual relation or correlation of the different 
limbs or members of anything, as in a simile or com- 


WJpTfVT? avg idhipa. 

*rfwr a-tint a. 

parison between the pnacipai parts or features of any 
object aiid those oi the thing compared to it. An- 
g-adbipa, ru. Karna, the king of At'iga. Ahganu- 
kula, mm. agreeable to the body, Megh. Anga- 
nulepana, n. anointing the body. Angfapurva, 
n. efieet m a secondary sacrificial act, L. Ang^svara, 
ni. the King of Align. An ge-slit ha, min. situated 
in a member or in the body, AV. Ahgoncka, ni. 
or ahgonchana, n. a towel, L. 

Ahg-aka, am, n. a limb, member, body; (ikd), 
f. a bodice, a jacket, L. 

Ahgin, mfn. having limbs, corporeal, having sub¬ 
ordinate parts, principal ; having expedients. 

Anglya, mfn. relating to the Ar'iga country, (gana 
gakihti, q, v.) 

Ahgya(3), mfn. belonging to the limbs, RV. i, 

I91, 7. 

angaria, am, n. See any ana, 
angati , is, in. (V ag), lire, L.; a 

Brahman who maintains a sacred tire, L.; Brahma, 
L. ; Vishnu, L.; cf. aiikati. 

angaria, am, n. ( Vaiig,<\. v.), the act 

of walking, L.; place to walk in, yard, court, area ; 
(d), f. ‘a woman with well-rounded limbs,’ any 
woman or female; (in astron.) Virgo; the female 
elephant of the north. Angrana-granafin. a number 
of women. Anffana-jana, m. a female person. 
Aiigani-priya, m. ‘dear to women,’ N. of the tree 
Jonesia Asoca. 

Ahg-ana, am, n. a yard, court, area. 

'jfK ahgabha , m. a kind of rice, L., as, m. dried fruit, L. 

ahgas, as, n.(Vahj, Un), a bird, L. 

dhgara, as,m., (rarely) am, n. ( Vag 
or ahg, Un., cf. agni), charcoal, either heated or not 
heated ; (ns), rn. the planet Mars; N. of a prince of 
the Maruts, Hariv.; the plant Hitavali ; (els), m. pi., 
N. of a people and country, VP. [cf. Lith. augli-s ; 
Russ, ft go lj ; also Germ. Ko/de ; Old Germ, col and 
colo; Ping, coal] . — karin and -krit [Hpar.], in. 
charcoal-burner. — kushthaka, m. the plant Hita- 
vali. — dhanl or -dhanika, f. a portable fire-place. 

— parip&cita, n. roasted food. — parna, m., N. 
of Citraratha, chief of the Gandharvas, MBh.; ( 7 ), 
f. Clerodendron Siphonanthus. — patri, f. a port¬ 
able fire-place, — pushpa, m. the plant Ingudi 
(Vulg. Ingua). — maiijari or -manjl, f. the shrub 
Cesalpinia Banducelia. — vallarl or -valli, f. (va¬ 
rious plants), Galcdupa Arborea; Ovieda Vcrticallata; 
Bhirgi ; Guhja. — sakatl, f. a portable fire-place 
on wheels. — setu, m., N. of a prince, father of 
Gandha^a. Axigraravak shay ana, n. an instru¬ 
ment for extinguishing coals, SBr. xiv. 

Ahgaraka ,as, m. charcoal; heated charcoal; the 
planet Mars; Tuesday ; N. of a prince of SauvTra ; 
of a Rudra ; of an A sura, Kathas.; N. of two plants, 
Eclipta (or Verbesina) Prostrata, and white or yellow 
Amaranth ; (am), 11. a medicated oil in which tur¬ 
meric and other vegetable substances have been boiled. 

— diita, m. n. a festival of Mars on the fourteenth 
of the latter half of Caitra. — xnani, m. coral (am¬ 
ber). — vara, m. Tuesday. 

Ahgarakita, mfn. charred, roasted, burnt, (gana 
lay aka (it, q. v.) 

Ahgziri, is, f. a portable fire-place,.L. 

Ahg’arikS, f. the stalk of the sugar-cane; the bud 
of she Kinsuka or Butea Frondosa. 

Angarita, mfn, charred, roasted, (gana tarakddi, 
q. v.) ; ‘ burnt,’ a kind of food not to be accepted by 
Jaina ascetics, Jain.; ( d ), f. a portable fire-place, 
L. ; a bud, L. ; N. of a creeper, L. ; of a river, L.; 
(am), n. the early blossom of the Kinsuka. 

Ajugr&rin, mfn. heated by the sun, though no longer 
exposed to its rays, VarBrS. [generally f. (iyi), soil, dis, 
the region just left by the sun] ; N. of a creeper. 

Aiigr&rlya, mfn. fit for making charcoal, Pan. v, 
1,12, Sch. 

Aiig’SryS f f. a heap ofcharcoal, (gana pdsadi, q. v.) j 

ahgiku , See ahgaka. 

othgir, w ., m. (Vang, Un.), N. of a 
Bbshi, who received the BrahmavidyS from Athar- 
van, and imparted it to Satyavaha, the teacher of 
Angiras, MundUp. 

Ahgira, as, m. — dhgiras, RV. i, 83, 48c iv, 51, 

4; MBh.; Yajfi.; (cf. Gk. ayyeKos and ayyapos .) 

Angiras, Js, m., N. of a Rishi, author of the 

hymns of RV. ix, of a code of laws, and of a 

treatise on astronomy (he is said by some to have 

been born from Brahma's mouth, and to have been 

• * 

the husband ot Smriti, of Sraddha, of two daughters 
ot Maitreva, of several daughters of Daksha, &c.; he 
is considered as one oi the seven Rishis of the first 
Manvantara, as a PrajSpati, as a teacher of the Brah- 
mavidya, which he had learnt from Satyavaha, a de¬ 
scendant of Bharadvaja, &c. Among his sons, the 
chief is Agni, others are Samvarta, Utathya, and 
Brihaspati; among his daughters are mentioned Sini- 
vfili, Kuhu, Raka, Anuinati, and Akupara ; but the 
Ricas or Vedic hymns, the manes of Havishmat, and 
mankind itself are styled his offspring. In astronomy 
he is the planet Jupiter, and a star in Ursa Major) ; 
N. of Agni, MBh.; (asas), m. pi. descendants of 
Angiras or of Agni (mostly personifications of lumi¬ 
nous objects); the hymns of the Atharva-veda, TS.; 
priests who by using the magical formulas of those 
hymns protect the sacrifice against the effects of in¬ 
auspicious accidents. — tama (angiras-), mfn. hav¬ 
ing the luminous quality of the Angirasas in the 
highest degree, said pf Agni and of Ushas, RV. 
— vat, ind. like Angiras, R V.; VS.; ( dhgiras-vat), 
mfn. connected with or accompanied by the Angi¬ 
rasas, RV.; VS. 

, Angirasa, as, m. an enemy of Vishnu in his in- 
j carnation of Parasurama. 

Angirasam-ayana, am, n. a Sattra sacrifice. 

ahgi. See 1 . aiiga. 

ariguri, is, or ahgari [L.], f. (for 

align//, q. v.), a finger, AV. ; a toe ; (cf. an-ahguri, 
pdncdhguri, sv-ahguri.) 

Angfurlya or ‘yaka, as, am, nr. n. a finger- 

ahgula, as, m . ( V ag or ahg) ,a finger; 

the thumb ; a finger s breadth, a measure equal to 
eight barley-corns, twelve angulas making a vitasti 
or span, and twenty-four a hasta or cubit; (in astron.) 
a digit, or twelfth part ; N\ of the sage Canakya, L. 

— pramana or -mana, n. the measure or length of 
an aisgula ; (mfn.), having the length of an angula. 

Angmlaka, ifc. = ahgula, i. e. so many angulas 
or fingers long. 

Axigruli, is, (or ah gull), f. a finger; a toe; the 
thumb ; the great toe ; the finger-like tip of an ele¬ 
phant’s trunk; the measure angula. — torana, n. 
a sectarial mark on the forehead consisting of three 
fingers or lines shaped like an arch or doorway (to¬ 
rana), drawn with sandal or the ashes of cow-dung. 

— tra, n. a finger-protector, a contrivance like a 
thimble (used by archers to protect the thumb or 
finger from being injured by the bowstring), R. &c.; 
-vat, mfn. provided with it. — traiia, n. - -tra, R. 

— mukha or angrull-mukha, n. the tip of the 
finger, Sis. -mudra or -mudrika, f. a seal-ring. 

— motana, n. snapping or cracking the fingers. 

— veshtaka, m. or -veshtana, n. a glove (?). 

— shangfa, m. contact of the fingers; act of finger¬ 
ing; (mfn.), sticking to the fingers. — samdesa, m. 
snapping or cracking the fingers as a sign. — spho- 
tana, n. snapping or cracking the fingers. Aii- 
gruli-pancaka, n. the five fingers. Angnll- 
parvan, n. a finger-joint. Angrull^sambhuta, 
rn. ‘produced on the finger,’ a finger nail. Angfuly- 
agrra, n. the tip of the finger, SBr. Angfuly-adi 
(ahgttli-X a gana of Pan. (v, 3, 108). 

Ang'uliya or angrnliyaka, am, n. a finger-ring; 
also ah gullka, L. 

Angnishtha, as, m. the thumb ; the great toe ; 
a thumb’s breadth, usually regarded as equal to an 
angula. — matra,mf( T)n. or -matraka, rnf(zTT)n. 
having the length or size of a thumb. 
Angushthika, f., N. of a shrub. 

Angushtliya, as, m. belonging to the thumb (the 
thumb nail). 

angusha, as, m. (Vahg or ag), ‘ mov¬ 
ing rapidly,’ an ichneumon ; an arrow. 

ahgoshin, mfn. ‘ resonant (?), 

praiseworthy (?),’ N. of the Soma, SV. 

dhgya. See col. 1 . 
r drg’ij cl. I. A. ahghate, anahgke, 

to go, set out, set about, commence, L.; 
to hasten, L.; to speak lustily, blame, L. 



Angha (not in use, but equivalent to a , 

‘ < Anghari, in. ‘an enemy to sin or . 

of a celestial guard of the Soma, VS. [blazing. 
Anghas, ». sin, Hariv. 

Anghri, is, in. a foot; foot of a seat; th 
f of a tree [cf. anhrl ]. — nSmaka, ni. or -naman, 
n. a sviionvni ot aiighri, means ahvavs foot as uv i 
as root, —pa, m. (drinking with the foot or root 
a tree. — parnl or-valli or .vallika, f. the plant 
Hedysaruni Lagopodioides. — pSna, mfn. sucking 
the foot or toes (as an infant), L. — skandha, m. 
the ancle, (connected with Vane, q.v.), 
N cl. r. P. A. dcati., a hear i, °tc, dnahea, 
°ce, to go, move, tend ; to honour ; to make round or 
curved ; to request, ask, L.; to speak indistinctly, 
L. See 2. aeila, acishtu. 

ac\ a technical term for all the 

vowels, Pan. Aj-anta, mfn. ending in a vowel. 

^T^T 3 i a-cakrd, mfn. having - no wheels ; 

not wanting wheels, i. e. moving by itself, RV. 

a-cakshus, us, n. a bad eye, no 

eye ; (mfn.), blind. A-cakshur-vishaya- mfn. not 
or no longer within reach of the eyes, invisible. 
Acakshush-tva, ji. blindness. 

A>.cakshuslika, mfn. destitute of eyes, SBr. xiv; 

a-canda, mfn. not of a hot temper, 

gentle, tractable ; (f), f. a tractable cow. 

a-catura, mfn. destitute of four, 

having less than four ; not cunning, not dexterous. 

f a-candra , mfn. moonless. 

a-capala, mfn. not oscillating, not 

wavering, not fickle ; immovable, steady. 

A-capalya, am, n. freedom from unsteadiness. 

a-cara or d-carat [RV.], mfn. im¬ 


d-carama, mfn. not last, not least; 

said of the Maruts, RV. v, 58, 5. 

a-carmdka , mfn. having no skin, 

a-cala, mf(a)n.not moving,immov¬ 
able ; (as), m. a mountain, rock ; a bolt or pin ; the 
number seven ; N. of Siva and of the first of the 
nine deified persons, called ‘white Balas 1 among the 
Jainas; of a Devarshi, VP.; (<?), f. the earth; one 
of the ten degrees which are to be ascended by a 
Bodhisattva before becoming a Buddha. — kila, f. 
the earth. — tvisb, in. the Kokila or Indian cuckoo. 
— dhriti, f. a metre of four lines, of sixteen short 
syllables each, also called Glty2rya. — pura, n., N. 
of a town, Jain. — bhratri, m., N. of a Brahman 
from Oude, who became one of the eleven heads of 
Ganas among the Jainas. — mati, m., N. of a 
M.lraputra. — sresbtlia, m. chief of mountains. 
Acaladhipa, m. ‘king of mountains,’ the Hima¬ 
laya. Acala-saptami, fi, N. of a book in the 

a-edru , mfn. not pretty, Tan. 

^srf^B -c(t, mfn. without understanding, 
RV.; irreligious, bad, RV.; (the NBD. suggests to 
take a-cit as a f. 1 not-knowledge Say. sometimes 
explains by Vci, ‘neglecting the Agnicayana, irre¬ 
ligious;’) a-cit, f. not-spirit, matter, Sarvad. 

A-cikitvas, an, uski, at, not knowing, ignorant 
of, RV. i, 164, 6. 

A-cxtta, mfn. unnoticed, unexpected ; not an ob¬ 
ject of thought; inconceivable, RV .; destitute of 
intellect or sense. — pSjas and -manas (acitta-), 
m., N. of two Rishis, MaitrS.; Kath. 

A'-citti, is, f. want of sense, infatuation, RV.; 
AV.; (figuratively said of) an infatuatedxnan, RV. 
iv, 2, II; VS. 

'STfVrT I. a-cita, mfn. not heaped up. 

2. acita, mfn. (Vac), gone, L. 

A'cislitu, mfn. moving, VS. 

a-citra, mfn. not variegated, un- 

distinguishabie; (dm), n. undistinguishableness, dark¬ 
ness, RV. iv, 51, 3 & vi, 49, II. 

a-cinta , f. thoughtlessness. 


a-cintita . 

ajana . 

A-clntit&, mfn. not thought of, Unexpected, dis¬ 

A-ointy&, mfn. inconceivable, surpassing thought, 
MaitrS. &c.; (as), m., N. of Siva. — karman, mfn. 
performing inconceivable actions. — rupa, min. hav¬ 
ing an inconceivable form. 

a-cira, mfn. not of long duration, 

brief; instantaneous, recent; (am, at, end), iud. not 
long, not for long; not long ago ; soon, speedily ; 
(a), f. the mother of the Jaina saint Santi. — dyuti 
or -prabha, f. lightning. — prasutS, f. ‘having 
recently brought forth,’a cow that has recently calved. 
— bhas, f. lightning, Sale. — mrita, mfn. recently 
deceased. — rods, f. or aciransu, m. or acirdbba, 
f. lightning. 

•srftn? dcishtu. See 2. acita. 

a-cetana , mfn. without conscious¬ 
ness, inanimate; unconscious, insensible, senseless, 
fainting, &c. 

A-cetas, mfn. imprudent, RV.; unconscious, in¬ 

A'-cetana, mfn. thoughtless, infatuated, RV. vii, 

4> 7- 

A-caitanya, am, n. unconsciousness; insensi¬ 
bility ; senselessness, want of spirituality; that which 
is destitute of consciousness, matter. 

a-ceshta, mfn. effortless, motionless. 

— ta, f. loss of motion from fainting, &c. 

-coddt, mfn. (\/cud), not driving 

or impelling, RV. v, 44, 2. 

A-codas, mfn. free from compulsion or external 
stimulus, spontaneous, RV. ix, 79, 1. 

i.a-ccha , mfn. (fr. a + cha for chad 

or chciya, */chad), ‘not shaded,’ ‘not dark,’ pel¬ 
lucid, transparent, clear; (as), m. a crystal, L. Ac- 
cboda, mfn. having clear water; (d), f., N. of a 
river; (am), 11., N. of a lake in the Himalaya 
formed by the river Acchoda. 

A-ccbaya, mfn. without shadow, casting no sha¬ 
dow, RV. x, 27, 14; SBr. xiv. 

tsS 2 ,accha,as, m. (corruptionof riksha), 
a bear. — bballa, m. a bear, Balar. (cf. bhalla). 

3 . dccha (so at the end of a pada), or 

usually dccha, ind., Ved. to, towards (governing acc. 
and rarely the locative). It is a kind of separable 
preposition or prefix to verbs and verbal derivatives, 
as in the following. 

Accbg,- \j i or accba-gam or accba-Vcar, 

to attain, go towards, RV. &c. 

Accba- ^2. dm, to run near, RV. iii, 14, 3. 
Accba--v/dbanv, to run towards, RV. iii, 53, 4. 
Accba- \l naksb, to go towards, approach, RV. 
vi, 22, 5. 

Accba-1. nas, to come near, RV. 

Accba- V ni , to lead towards or to, RV. 

Accba--\/4- to call out to, to cheer, RV. 
A'ccba-Vpat [SBr.] and Caus. P. - patayati 
[RV. v, 45, 9], to fly towards. 

Accba-\/hru, to invite to come noar, PBr. 
Accba- ya. or accba- ya, to approach, RV.; 

Accba-4/vac, to invite, RV. 
Accba-vak&,m.‘the in viter,* title of a particular 
priest or Ritvij, one of the sixteen required to per¬ 
form the great sacrifices with the Soma juice. 

Accbavakxya, mfn. referring to the acchavaka; 
containing the word acchavaka, Pin. v, 2, 59, Sch.; 
(am), n. the state or work of the acchavaka, Pan. 
v, I, 135, Sch. 

A'ccb 5 r-\/vanc, Pass. - vacyate , to extend itself 
towards, to go towards, RV. i, 142, 4. 

Accba- v vad, to salute, RV. &c. 

Accba- V vrit (Opt. A. 1. sg. -vavritTya), to 
cause to come near, RV. i, 186, 10. 

Accb&-\/sri, to flow near, RV. ix, 92, 2. 
A'ccba-Vsyand, Caus. to flow near (aor. -asi- 
shyadat), RV. ix, 81, 2: cause to flow near 
(part. nom. sg. m .-sdnishyadat), RV. ix, 110, 4. 
Accbeta, mfn. approached, attained, VS. 
Accbetya, mfn. to be approached, ApSr. 
Acchokti, is, f. invitation, RV, 

d-cchidra , mfn. free from clefts or 

flaws, unbroken, uninterrupted, uninjured; (am), 
n. unbroken or uninjured condition, an action free 
from defect or flaw; (ena), ind. uninterruptedly, 

[ without break from first to last. — kanda, n., N. 
of a chapter of the Taittirlya-Brahmana. Accbi- 
droti, mfn. affording perfect protection, RV. i, 145, 
3. Accbidrodhnl, f. (a cow) having a faultless 

udder, RV. x, 133, 7. 

A-cchidyam&na, mfn. uncut, uncurtailed, AV.; 
not fragile (a needle), RV. ii, 32* 4. 

A-ccbinna, mfn. uncut, uncurtailed, uninjured ; 
undivided, inseparable. — pattra (dcchinna-), 
mf(/?)n. (said of goddesses, of a bird, of an altar shaped 
like a bird), having the wings uncurtailed, uninjured, 
RV. i, 22, 11 ; VS.; having uninjured leaves, VS. 
— pazna, mfn. having uninjured leaves, AV. 

A-ccbedika, mfn. not lit or needing to be cut, 
Pan. vi, 2, 155, Sch. 

A-ccbedya, mfn. improper or impossible to be 
cut, indivisible. 

a-cchuptd, N. of one of the six¬ 

teen Vidyadevls of the Jamas. 

acchurikd or acchuri, f. discus, 


wheel, BhP. 

'.n^TT d-cyuta or a-cyuta, mfn. not fallen; 

firm, solid ; imperishable, permanent; not leaking 
or dripping ; (<w), m., N. of Vishnu : of Krishna ; 
of a physician ; the plant Morinda Tinctoria ; N. of 
a gift to Agni, SBr. — kshit, m. ‘having solid 
ground,’ N. of Soma, VS. — cyut, mfn. shaking firm 
objects (said of the thunderer Indra), RV. ; (said 
of a drum), AV. — ja, as, m. pi. a class of Jaina 
deities. — jallakin, m., N. of a commentator of the 
Amara-Kosha. — danta or acyutanta, m., N. of 
the ancestor of a warrior tribe called Acyutadanti 
or Acyutanti (though possibly these refer to two 
distinct tribes). — pSjas and -manas (deyuta-), 
m., N. of two Maharshis, TAr. — murti, m., N. of 
Vishnu. — rush, f. inveterate hatred. — vasa, m. 
the sacred fig-tree, Ficus Religiosa; acyutdvdsa, 
id., T. — stbala, n., N. of a place in the Panjab, 
MBh. Acyutagraja, m. (Vishnu’s elder brother), 
BalarSma; Indra. A'cyutopadbyaya, m. = 
acyuta-jallakin, q.v. 

■jq a aj , cl. 1. P. (defect., supplemented 

* \ fr. */vt), djati, djlt, ajitum , to drive, 

propel, throw, cast: Desid. ajijishati , to be desirous 
of driving [cf. Gk. dyo) ; Lat. ago]. 

I. Aj*, as, m. a drove, troop (of Maruts), AV.; 
a driver, mover, instigator, leader ; N. of Indra, of 
Rudra, of one of the Maruts [ajd eka-pdd, RV., 
and ajd ika-pdda, AV.], of Agni, of the sun, of 
Brahma, cf Vishnu, of Siva, of Kama (cf. 2. a-ja ); 
the leader of a flock; a he-goat, ram [cf. Gk. af£, 
aiyos ; Lith. ozys ] ; the sign Aries ; the vehicle of 
Agni; beam of the sun (Pushan); N. of a descendant 
of Visvamitra, and of Dasaratha’s or Dlrghabahu’s 
father; N. of a mineral substance ; of a kind of rice; 
of the moon ; (cw), m. pi., N. of a people, RV. vii, 
18, 19 ; of a class of Rishis, MBh. ; (d), f., N. of 
Prakriti, of Maya or Illusion, see a-jd (s. v. 2. a-ja ); 
a she-goat ; N. of a plant whose bulbs resemble the 
udder of a goat, Susr. — karna, m. a goat’s ear ; 
the tree Terminalia Alata Tomentosa. — karnaka, 
m. the Sal-tree, Shorea Robusta. — kula, f., N. of 
a town of the Bodhis. — ksbira, n. goat’s milk, 
MaitrS.; cf. Pan. vi, 3, 63, Sch. — gandba or 
-gandbika, f. ‘smelling like a he-goat,’ shrubby 
basil, Ocymum Gratissimum. — gandbinl, f. a 
plant, = aja-sritigi, q. v. — gara, m. (‘ goat-swal¬ 
lower ’), a huge serpent, boa constrictor, AV. &c.; 
N. of an Asura; (1), f., N. ol a plant. — gallika, 
f. 4 ‘goat’s cheek,’ an infantile disease. — jlvana or 
-jxvika, m . 1 who lives by goats,’ a goat-herd. — ta, 
f. a multitude of goats; the being a goat. — tva 
[TS.; cf. Pin. vi, 3, 64, Sch.J or aja^-tva, n. the 
being a goat, —dandi, f. a plant, =brahmadandi 

— devata, as, f. pi. the 23th lunar mansion. 

— xxfLxnaka, m. ‘named Aja or Vishnu,’ a mineral 
substance, —pa, m. a goat-herd. — patba, m. 
‘goat’s road,’ probably — aja-vithl, q.v. —pada 
or -p&da, mfn. goat-footed, —pad, m., N. of the 
divinity called Aja 4kapad. — pSrsva, m. ‘having 
black sides like a goat,’ N. of Svetakarna’s son Ra- 
jivalocana. — p&la, m. a goat-herd, VS. ; N. of 
Dasaratha’s father. — babbru (dja-), n. said to be. 
the father or origin of a medical plant, AV. v, 5, 8. 

— bbaksba, m. ‘goat’s food,’ the plant Varvura. 

— maytL (aja~), m. bleating like a goat (a frog), 
RV. vii, 103, 6 Sc 10. — rn&ra, m., N. of a tribe 

or prince, (gana Jurv-ddi, q.v.) — midha or 

-milha, m., N. of a son of Suhotra (author of some 
Vcdic hymns, RV. iv, 43 & 44); of a grandson of 
Suhotra; of Yudhishthira. — xnukha, mfn. goat¬ 
faced ; _(z“), f., N. of a Rakshasi. — xneru, N. of a 
place, Ajmlr (?). — moda, m. or -nioda or -modi- 
ka, f. ‘goat’s delight,’ N. of various plants, common 
Carroway, the species called Ajwaen (Ligusticum 
Ajwaen), a species of Parsley, Apium Involucratum. 
— rsbabba (rish), m. a he-goat, SBr. — laxn- 
bana, n. antimony. — lomaxx, m. or -lomi, f. 
Cowage, Carpopogon Pruriens; (a), 11. goat’s hair, 
SBr. &c. — vasti, m., N. of atribe,(gana grishty-ddi 
and subhrddi, q.v.); (ayas), m. pi. the members 
of that tribe, (gana yashldi, q.v.) — vaha, m., 
N. of a district. — vitbi, f. ‘goat’s road,’ N. of one 
of the three divisions of the southern path, or one of 
the three paths in which the sun, moon, and planets 
move, comprehending the aster is ms inula, purvd- 
shddha, and nttardshddha. — sringx, f. ‘goat’s 
horn,’ the shrub Odina Wodier, used as a charm and 
as a remedy for sore eyes, AV. (its fruit resembles a 
goat s horn). — stunda, n., N. of a town, Pan. vi, 

l. 153. — ba, f. =a-jajd, q. v. ; the plant Alkusi, 
T. Aja-kripaniya, mfn. like the goat and shears 
in the fable, Pan. v, 3, 106, Sch. Aja-ksblra, n. 
goat’s milk, SBr. &c.; cf. aja-kshird. AjS-gala, 

m. goat’s neck. Ajag‘al&-stana, m. nipple or 
fleshy protuberance on the neck of goats, an emblem 
of any useless or worthless object or person. AjS- 
jiva, m. ‘ who lives by goats,’ a goat-herd. AjS- 
tanlvali, rru, N. of a Muni who lived on the milk 
of goats (an example of compounds in which the 
middle term is left out, gana SdJcapdrthivcLdi, 
q. v.) Ajada, m. ‘ goat-eater,’ the ancestor of 
a warrior tribe, Pan. iv, 1, 171. Ajadaxu, f. a 
species of prickly night-shade. Aj&di, a gana of 
Pan. (iv, 1,4). Ajantri, f. the pot-herb Convol- 
vulusArgenteus. Aja-payas, n. goat’s milk. Ajfi- 
palaka, mfn. tending goats; (as), m. a goat-herd. 
L. Ajavi, m. pi. (ajdvdyas, SBr.) or ajavika, 

n. sg. goats and sheep, small cattle. Ajasva, n. 
goats and horses, Yajft. ; (as), m. Pflshan or the Sun 
(having goats for horses), RV. Ajaxkapad, m., N. 
of Vishnu ; of one of the eleven Rudras; cf. 1. ajd. 
Ajaxdaka, n. goats ana rams, (gana gavdsvddi, 

Ajaka, as, m., N. of a descendant of Pururavas; 
of a king of Magadha ; ( aka or il'd) , f. a young 
she-goat; a disease of the pupil of the eye (small 
reddish tumours compared to kids, protruding 
through the transparent cornea and discharging pus). 
Ajaka-jata, n. the above disease. 

Ajana, ajani, ajxna, &c. See s. v. 

2. a-ja, mfn. not horn, existing from 
all eternity; (as), m., N. of the first uncreated being, 
RV. ; AV. ; Brahma, Vishnu, Siva, Kama ; (d), f., 
N. of Prakyiti, Maya or Illusion (see also I. ajd and 

l. ajana). 

ajakava, as, m. Siva’s bow, L. 

Ajakava, mfn., N. of a sacrificial vessel dedicated 
to Mitra and Varuna and (according to the Comm.) 
having an ornament similar to the fleshy protuber¬ 
ance called aja -gala-s tana, q.v., SBr.; (as or dm), 

m. or n. a species of venomous vermin,.centipede or 
scorpion, RV. vii, 50,1 ; (as, am), m. n.Siva’s bow, L. 

Ajagava, as, m. Siva’s bow, L. ; the southern 
portion of the path of the sun, moon, and planets; 
(as), m., N. of a snake priest, PBr. 

Ajag^va, m., N. of a snake demon, TandyaBr.; 
cf. djogdva; (am), n. Siva’s bow, L.; N. of the 
sacrificial vessel also called ajakdraa (q.v.), ApSr. 

a-jaghanya , mfn. not last; not 


d-jaghnivas, mf(d-jagknusM)n. 

(*/han), "not having killed, RV. viii, 56, 15. 

a-jajd , f. Flacourtia Cataphracta, 

= ajajd and ajjhatd. 

a-jada , mfn. not inanimate, not tor¬ 
pid, not stupid ; (a), f. the plants Ajata and Kapi- 
kacchu (Carpopogon Pruriens). — dbl, mfn. of a 
vigorous mind, energetic. 

ajaihyd, f. yellow jasmin. 

1. ajana , as, m. (Vaj), ‘the insti¬ 
gator,’ Brahma ; (am), n. act of instigating or 



^rrpnfTfTST ajana-yoni-ja. 

moving. — yoni-ja, m. 'bom from Ajana/ N. of 

Ajani, is, f. a path, road, Nir. 

wrc 2 .a-j and, mfn. destitute of men; 

desert; (as'', m. an insignificant person. 

A-janani, is, f. (generally used in cursing), non- 
birth, cessation of existence ; ajananir astu tasya, 
‘mav he cease to exist!’ Pancat. ; cf. Pan. iii, 3, 112. 

A-janya, mfn. improper to be produced or born ; 
unht for mankind ; (a?n), n. any portent unfavour¬ 
able to mankind, as an earthquake. 

aj-anta, mfn. See 2. ac. 

1 . a-japa, as, m. [Vjap), one who 
does not repeat prayers; a reciter of heterodox 
works, L. ; Of), f- the mantra or formula called 
hansa (which consists only of a number of inhalations 
and exhalations). 

2. aja-pa, m. See 1. aja. 

a-jambha, as, m.' toothless/ a frog. 

?T 5 pT a-jaya, as, m. non-victory, defeat ; 

(mfn.), unconquered, unsurpassed, invincible ; (as), 
m., N. of Vishnu ; of a lexicographer ; of a river ; 
( a ), f. hemp ; N. of a friend of Durga ; Maya or 

A-j&yya, mfn. invincible; improper to be won 
at play. 

a-jdra , mfn. (Vjri), not subject to 

old age, undecaying, ever young ; (ff), f. the plants 
Aloe Perfoliata and JirnapahjhT; the river Sarasvati. 
Ajaramara, mfn. undecaying and immortal, MBh. 
A-jaraka, as, am, m.n. indigestion. 

A-jarat, mfn. not decaying, VS. 

A-jarayii, mfn. not subject to old age, RV. i, 
116, 20. 

A-jaras, another form for a-jara, used only in 
some cases, L. 

A-jarya, mfn. not subject to old age or decay, 
SBr.; not friable, not digestible; (am), n. friendship. 

a-javds, mfn. not quick, inactive, 
RV. ii, 15, 6. 

W 3 T€T d-jasra, mfn. [Vjas), not to be ob¬ 
structed, perpetual, RV. &c\; (am [gana svar-adi , 
&c.] or ena [RV. vi, 16, 45] ), ind. perpetually, for 
ever, ever. 

^T*nn \^a-jahat, mfn. (pr. p. V3-ha), not 
dropping or losing (in comp.) — svartha, f. a rhe¬ 
torical figure (using a word which involves the mean¬ 
ing of another word previously used, as ‘ white ones’ 
for ‘white horses,’ ‘lances’ fob ‘men with lances’). 
Ajahal-lingra, rri. (in Gr.) a noun which does not 
drop its original gender, when used as an adjective. 

aja, f. a slie-goat. See 1. aja. 

a-j agar a, mfn. not awake, not 
wakeful, L.; (as), m. the plant Eclipta orVerbesina 

wwrfir ajoji, is, or ajajt, f. Cuminum Cy- 

minum ; Ficus Oppositifolia ; Nigella Indica. 

a-j at a, mfn. unborn, not yet born, 
not yet developed. — kakud, m. a young bull whose 
hump is yet undeveloped, Pan. v, 4, 146, Sch. 
— paksha, mfn. having undeveloped wings. — Io¬ 
nian, m((mnt)n. or -vyanjana, mfn. whose 
signs of puberty are not yet developed, — vyava- 
h&ra, m. having no experience of business, a minor, 
a youth under fifteen, — satru (djdta-), mfn. 
having no enemy ; having no adversary or equal 
(Indra), RV.; (us), m., N. of Siva, of Yudhishthira, 
of a king of Kasi, of a -son of Samika, of a son of 
VidmisSra or Bimbisara (contemporary of S2kya- 
muni). Ajatanusaya, mfn. having no regret. 
Ajat&ri, m. having no enemy, Yudhishthira, Sis. 

a-janat , mfn. (pr. p. Vjnd), not 
knowing, unaware. 

'win nr a-j ant, is [AY.], or a-janika [L.], 

as, m. having no wife. 

a-jami, mfn. not of kin, not related, 
RV.; (in Gr.) not corresponding, Nir.; (i), n. ‘(co¬ 
habitation) not allowed between relations/ incest, 
RV. —1& (< djami ’-) [SBr.], f. or -tva [TBr.], n. 
not uniformity, variation. 

a-jdyamdna , mfn. (Vjan), not 

being born, not subject to birth, VS. 

ajika, f. See ajaka. 

'WfUTT a-jita, mfn. not conquered, unsub¬ 
dued, unsurpassed, invincible, irresistible; (as), m. 
a particular antidote ; a kind of venomous rat; N. 
ot Vishnu ; Siva ; one of the Saptarshis of the four¬ 
teenth Manvantara ; Maitreya or a future Buddha ; 
the second of the Arhats or saints of the present 
(Jaina) Avasarpini, a descendant of Ikshvaku ; the 
attendant of Suvidhi (who is the ninth of those Arhats 1; 
(ff>), m - ph a class of deified beings in the first Man¬ 
vantara. — kesa-kambala, m., N. of one of the 
six chief heretical teachers (mentioned in Buddhist 
texts as contemporaries of Buddha). — bal 5 , f., N. 
of a Jaina deity who acts under the direction of the 
Arhat Ajita. — vikrama, as, m. ‘ having invincible 
power,’ N. of king Candragupta the second. Aji- 
tdtman, mfn. having an unsubdued self or spirit. 
Ajitdpida, m. having an unsurpassed crown ; N, 
of a king, Raj at. Ajitendriya, mfn. having un¬ 
subdued passions. 

ajina, am, n. (probably at first the 
skin of a goat, aja) ; the hairy skin of an antelope, 
especially a black antelope (which serves the religious 
student for a couch, seat, covering, &c.); the hairy 
skin of a tiger, Sec. ; (as), m., N. of a descendant 
of Prithu, VP. — pattra or -pattri or -pattrika, 
f. a bat. — phala, f., N. of a plant, (gana ajddi, 
q. v.) — yoni, in. ‘origin of skin,' an antelope, deer. 
— vasin, mfn. clad in a skin, SBr. — sandha, ni. 
one who prepares skins, a furrier, VS. 

wfirt ajira, mfn. (Vaj), agile, quick,rapid; 
(dm), ind. quickly; RV.; AV.; VS.; (as), m., 
N. of a Naga priest, PBr. ; (a), f., N. of Durga ; 
of a river ; (am), n. place to run or fight in, area, 
court, R. &c. ; the body ; any object of sense, air, 
wind; a frog; L. — vatl, f., N. of the river on 
which the town Sravasti was situated, Pan. vi, 3, 119 
Sc vi, 1, 220. Sch. — sods (ajira-), m. having 
a quick light, glittering, N. of Agni, of Soma, RV. 
Ajir^di, a gana of Pan. (vi, 3, 119). AjiradM- 
raja, in. ‘an agile emperor/ death, AV. 

Ajiraya, Noin. A. aj inly ate, to be agile or quick, 
RV. vi ii, 14, 10. 

Ajiriya, mfn. connected with a court See., (gana 
utkarddi, q.v.) 

a-jihma , mfn . not crooked, straight; 

honest, upright, Mn. &c. ; (as), m. a frog (perhaps 
for a-jihva),h. ; a fish, L. — ga,mfn. going straight; 
(as), m. an arrow. Ajilunag’ra, mfn. having a 
straight point. 

a-jihva, mfn. tongueless ; (as), m. 

a frog, L. 

ajikava, am, n. Siva’s bow, L. 

See ajakava . 

a-jig art a, as, m / that has nothing 

to swallow,’ N. of a Rishi, Sunahsepha’s father. 

a-jita, mfn. (Vjyd, usually jina), 
not faded, not faint, AV. ; TS., &c. »punarva- 
nya, n. ‘asking the restitution of an object which 
has in fact not been lost,’ N. of a twofold rite to be 
performed by Kshatriyas, AitBr. 

A-jiti, is, f. the state of being uninjured, RV. ; 
TS. &c. ,* cf. a-jyani. 

a-jjirna, mfn. (Vjri), not decom¬ 
posed ; unimpaired; undigested; (am), n. indigestion. 

A-jirni, is, f. indigestion, L. 

A-jlrnin, mfn. suffering from indigestion. 

A-jirti, is, f. indigestibieness. 

a-jiva, mfn. lifeless. 

A-jivat, mfn. not living, destitute of a liveli¬ 
hood, Mn. 

A-jivana, mfn. destitute of a livelihood, AV. 

A-jlvani, is, f. non-existence, death ; ajlvanis 
tasya bhuyat, ‘may death befall him!’ Pan. iii, 3, 

1 12, Sch. 

A-jivlta, am, n. non-existence, death. 

a-jugupsita, mfn. not disliked. 

*%%a-jur,mfn. (Vjur), not subject to old 

age or decay, RV. viii, I, 2. 

A-jury 4 (3 ; once 4, RV. vi, 17, 13), id., RV. 

A-juryat, mfn. not subject to old age, RV. iii, 
46, 1 & v, 42, 6. 

d-jushta, mfn. not enjoyed, unsatis¬ 
factory, RV. 

A'-jusliti, is, F. non-enjoyment, feeling of dis¬ 
appointment, RV. 

a-jetavya, mfn. invincible. 
A-jeya, mfn. invincible ; N. of a prince, MBh.; 
(am), n., N. of a kind of antidote. 

a-josha , mf(d)n. not gratified, in¬ 
satiable, RV. i, 9, 4. 

A-joshya (4), mfn. not liked, not welcome, 
RV. i, 38, 5. 

ajjukd , f. (in the drama) a cour¬ 


ajjhata , f. the plant Flacourtia 

Cataphracta (—ajata and ajaja ). 

^T**?*^ ajjhala, as, m. a burning coal. 

a-jna, mfn. (\/jnd), not knowing; 

ignorant, inexperienced ; unconscious; unwise, stupid. 

— ta, i. or -tva, n. ignorance. 

Ajnaka or ajnika, f. an ignorant woman, Pan. 

v ». 3 ^ 47 - 

A-jnata, mfn. unknown; unexpected ; unaware; 
(am), ind. without the knowledgeof, MBh. — kula- 
slla, mfn. whose lineage and character are unknown. 

— keta (djiiata-), mfn. having unknown or secret 
designs, RV. v, 3, 11. -bhukta, mfn. eaten un- 

‘awares, Mu. — yaks lima, m. an unkn'own or hidden 
disease, RV. x, 161, I ; AV. -vasa, mfn. whose 
dwelling is unknown. — sxla, mfn. whose character 
is unknown. 

Ajnataka, mfn. unknown, (gana yavcldi, q.v.) 
A-jnSti, is, m. not a kinsman, not related, M11. 
A-jnatva, ind. not having known or ascertained. 

A-jnana, tfw, n. non-cognizance ; ignorance, (in 
philosophy) spiritual ignorance (or a power which, 
consisting of the three Gunas sattva, rajas , and 
tamas, and preventing the soul from realizing its 
identity with Brahma, causes self to appear a distinct 
personality, and matter to appear a reality); Prakriti, 
M 5 yS, Illusion ; (mfn.), ignorant, unwise ; (at), ind. 
unawares, ignorantly. — krita, mfn. done inadver¬ 
tently. — tas, ind. unawares, inadvertently. — ta, 
f. or -tva, n. ignorance. — bandhana, n. the bond 
of ignorance. 

A-jnanin, mfn. ignorant, unwise. 

A-jnas, mfn. having no kindred, RV. x, 39, 6. 
A-jneya, mfn. unknowable, unfit to be known. 

djma, as, m. (Vaj), career, march, 
RV. [cf. Gk. 6 ypios]. 

Ajman, a, n. career, passage, battle, RV.; AV. 
[Lat. agmcn\ 

Ajra, as, m. a field, a plain, RV. [Lat. ager; 
Gk. ay pus : cf. ajira ]. 

Ajry4 (3), mfn. being in or connected with a 
field or plain, RV. x, 69, 6. 

Ajvin, mfn. (Vaj), active, agile, used in a sacri¬ 
ficial formula, AsvSr. 

^rirrftT d-jyani, is, f. the state of being 
uninjured, AV. (cf. d-jiti)\ (ajyanayas), nom. ph, 
N. of certain offerings, TBr., ApSr. 

A-jyeya-ta, f. state of anything which is not to 
be hurt or overpowered, SBr. 

a-jyeshtha, mfn. not the oldest or 

best; (as), nom. pi. of which none is the eldest (the 
Maruts), RV. v, 59, 6 & 60, 5 ; cf. d-kanishtha> 
— vyltti, mfn. not behaving as the eldest brother 
[Mn. ix, no], or (ajyeshtha-vritti) behaving like 
one who has no elder brother. 

i. anc (connected with Vac, q.v.), 
* n cl. I. P. A. a neati, °te, ana tie a, °ce, and- 
shyati, °te, aHeitum, to bend, curve, incline, curl; 
to reverence (with inclined body), to honour; to 
tend, move, go, wander about ; to request, L.: cl. IO. 
or Caus. apeayati, to unfold, make clear, produce: 
Desid. P. A. aflcicishati, °tej to be desirous of bend¬ 
ing : Pass, aflcyate or acyate, to be bent. 

2. Anc, only ifc., turned to, going or directed 
towards; see akudhrydne, avanc, udaile, deva - 
drydtie, See. 

Anca, ‘curling’ (of the hairs of the body, thrill cf 
rapture), only at the end of romdttca, q. v. 

ancati . 



Ancati, is, m. or ancati, f. wind, L. ; fire, L. 

Ancana, am, n. act of bending or curving. 

Ancala, as, m. (perhaps also am), n. the border 
or end of a garment, especially of a woman’s gar¬ 
ment, of a veil, shawl. (In Bengali, a strip of country, 

Ancita, mfn. bent, curved, curled, arched, hand¬ 
some ; gone, walked in ; reverenced, honoured ; dis¬ 
tinguished. — pattra, m. a kind of lotus with curved 
leaves. — pattraksba, mfn. having lotus eyes. 

— bbru, f. a woman with arched or handsome eye¬ 
brows. — laiigilla, mfn. having a curved tail (as a 

^ anj, cl. 7 P. A. andkti, ahkie, a- 
\ nanja, afljishyati or ahkshyati, dfi/It, 
afijitum or aiiktum , to apply an ointment or pig¬ 
ment, smear with, anoint ; to decorate, prepare ; to 
honour, celebrate ; to cause to appear, make clear, 
RV. i, 92, 1 ; to be beautiful, L,; to go, L.: Caus.a;?- 
jayati, dfijijat. to smear with ; to speak; to shine ; 
to cause to go, L. [cf. Lat. ungo]. 

Anjaka, as, m., N. of a son of Vipracitti, VP. 

Anjana, as, m. a kind of domestic lizard, L. ; 
N. of a fabulous serpent; of a tree, Pancat. ; of a 
mountain ; of a king of Mithila ; of the elephant of 
the west or south-west quarter ; (a), fi, N. of Hanu- 
mat’s mother; of Pravarasena’s mother; {am), n. act 
of applying an ointment or pigment, ernbellishing.&c.; 
black pigment or collyrium applied to the eyelashes 
or the inner coat of the eyelids; a special kind of 
this pigment, as lamp-black, Antimony, extract of 
Ammonium, Xanthorrhiza, &c.; paint, especially as 
a cosmetic; magic ointment; ink,L.; night, L.; fire, 
L. (In rhetoric) making clear the meaning of an 
equivocal expression, double entendre or pun, &c. 
—kesa, mf (f)n. whose hair (or mane) is as black 
as pigment; (i), fi, N. of a vegetable perfume. 

— n&mika, fi a swelling of the eyelid, stye. — vat, 
ind. like collyrium. Anjana-glri, m., N. of a 
mountain. Anjanadbika, fi a species of lizard, L. 
Anj anamb lias, n. eye-water. Anjana-vatl, fi 
the female elephant of the north-east (or the west?) 

Anjanaka, as, m. portion of a text containing 
the word art]ana, (gana goshad-adi, q.v.); (fi), fi, 
N. of a medicinal plant. 

Anjanika, fi a species of lizard,L.; a small mouse, 
L.; efi anjalikd. 

Anjanl , fi a woman (fit for the application of 
ointments, pigments, sandal, &c.), L. ; N. of two 
medicinal plants. 

Anjala, anjali. See s. v. below. 

A 2 jas,rtJ', n. ointment, a mixture, RV. i, 132, 2 ; 
N. of a Saman, ArshBr .; (as), ind. quickly, instantly, 
RV.; BhP. ; see dtljasd. Anjab-sava, m. rapid 
preparation (of Soma), SBr. ; AitBr. Anjas-pa, 
mfn. drinking instantly, RV. x, 92, 2 & 94, 13. 

Anjasa, mfn. straight, straightforward, honest, 
L. ; (/), fi, N. of a heavenly river, RV. i, 104, 4. 

Anjasa, ind. straight on, right, truly, justly ; 
quickly, soon, instantly. Anjasfiyana, mf(fi)n. 
having a straight course, going straight on, TS. ; 

Anjasina, mfn. going straight on, straightfor¬ 
ward, RV. x, 32, 7. 

Anji, mfn. applying an ointment or pigment, 
RV.; ointment, brilliancy, RV.; unctuous, smooth, 
sleek (membrum virile), VS.; (is), m. a sender, com¬ 
mander, Un. — mat, mfn. coloured, bright, adorned, 
RV. v, 57, 5. — saktba, mfn. having coloured 
thighs (a victim), VS.; efi Pan. vi, 2, 199, Sch. 
Anjy-eta, mfn. black and white coloured, TS. 

Anjiva, mfn. slippery, smooth, AV. 

Afijisbtba, as, or anjishnu, us, m. * highly 
brilliant,’ the sun, L. 

^ST 5 fo 5 anjala only ifc. for anjali, q. v. 

dbana, n. salutation with the afljati raised to the 
torehcad. Anjall-krita, mfn. placed together to 
form the ailjali salutation. 

Anjalika, as, am,, m. n., N. of one of Arjuna’s 
arrows, MBh.; (a), fi a young mouse, L. 

^ anj aIt, is, m. ( Vanj), the open hands 

placed side by side and slightly hollowed (as if by 
a beggar to receive food; hence when raised to the 
forehead, a mark of supplication), reverence, saluta¬ 
tion, benediction; a libation to the Manes (twohands 
full of water, udak&njali), VP. &c.; a measure of 
com, sufficient to fill both hands when placed side 
by side, equal to a kudava. — karman, n. making 
the above respectful salutation. — kSrikS, fi an 
earthen figure (with the hands joined for salutation); 
the plant Mimosa Natans. — pute, m. n. cavity 
produced in making the ahjaii salutation. — ban- 

anjika,as , m., N. of a son of Yadu. 

See anjaka. 

^ ft m a njihisha, f. (fr. D esid. of y/ i-onh), 

desire of going, [jshdin cakre (V 1. kri)~\, Bhatt. 

anji, f. a blessing (?), T. 

anjira, am, n. (a Persian word), a 
species of fig-tree (Ficus Oppositifolia) ; a fig. (In 
Bengali) a guava. 

at, el. 1. P. A. atati,°te, at a,atishyati, 

\ at it, atitum, to roam, wander about (some¬ 
times with acc. ; frequently used of religious mendi¬ 
cants) ; linens, at aty ate , to roam or wander about 
zealously or habitually, especially as a religious mendi¬ 
cant : Desid. atitishati, to be desirous of roaming. 

Ataka, mfn. roaming, L. 

Atana, mfn. roaming about, VarBr.; (am), n. 
act or habit of wandering about 

Atani, is, f. or atani, fi the notched extremity 
of a bow. 

Atamana, as, m., N. of a prince, BhP. 

Atavi, is, or usually atavi, f. * place to roam in,’ 
a forest. Atavl-sikbara, as, m. ph, N. of a people, 
M Bh. 

Atavika, better atavika, as, m. a woodman, 

Ata, fi the act or habit of roaming or wandering 
about (especially as a religious mendicant). 

Atata, fi (habit of) roaming or wandering about, L. 

Atatyamana, mfn. roaming excessively. 

Atatya, fi (habit of) roaming, L. 

Ataya, Nom. A. atdyate , to enter upon a roam¬ 
ing life, to become a religious mendicant, L. 

Atya, fi roaming about, one of the ten faults re¬ 
sulting from an excessive fondness for pleasure, Mn. 
vii, 47. 

atani. See J at. 

atarusha or atarusha or atarushaka, 
as, m. the shrub Justicia Adhatoda. 

a-tala, mfn. not shaky, firm, L. 

a t T aft, cl. 1. A. attate , anatte , attitum , 
^ to exceed, L.; to kill, L.: P .attayati, 
to contemn, L.; to lessen, diminish, L. 

Atta, ind. high, lofty, L.; loud, L. ; {as), m. a 
watch-tower; a market, a market-place (corruption 
of hatta ); N. of a Yaksha, Rajat.; over-measure, 
L.; (a), fi overbearing conduct (?), Pan. iii, 1, 17, 
Comm.; (am), n.boiled rice, food, L.; (mfn.), dried, 
dry, L. — pati-bhagjtkbya-griba-kritya, n. 
business of the house called the market-master’s de¬ 
partment (an office in Kashmir), Rajat. — stball, 
fi site of an atta (V), (gana dhum&di, q. v.) — ba- 
sita, n. loud laughter, a horse-laugh. — basa, m. 
id.; a name of Siva ; of a Yaksha, Kathas.; of a 
mountain. — basaka, m. the shrub Jasminum Mul- 
tiflorum or Hirsutuin. — basin, m., N. of Siva. 
— basya, n. loud laughter; a horse-laugh. At- 
tatta-basa, m. very loud laughter. 

Attaka, d.r, m. an apartment on the roof; tower. 

Attatta, ind. very high, L.; very loud, L. 

Attana, am, n. a weapon_shaped like a discus, L. 

Attaya (Nom. fr. atta), A. attayatc, to be over¬ 
bearing^?), Pan. iii, 1, 17, Comm. 

^Cglttattala, as, or attalaka , as, m. a watch- 
tower ; (ika), fi a palace, L.; N. of a country, Rajat. 

Att&lika-k&ra, as, m. a bricklayer (son of a 
painter and a lascivious Sudra woman), BrahmavP. 

AttaHka-bandbam, ind. (in the way that atta- 
likas are formed), Pan. iii, 4, 42, Sch. 

attilika, {., N. of a town, Rajat. 


atriara, as, m. a king of Kosala, SBr.' 
atya , f. See Vat. 

ath , cl. 1. P. A. athati , °te, to go, L. 
athida , as, m. pi., N. of a people, 


athilld, f., N. of a Prakrit metre. 

1. ad, cl. 1. P. adati , to endeavour, L. 

adakavati, N. of a fabulous palace 

on Meru ; also oi a city. 

add, cl. t . P. addati,anadda, additum, 

\ to join, L.; to infer, argue, L.; to meditate, 
discern, L. ; to attack, L. 

Addana, am, n. a shield, L. 

yj ni an, cl. 1. P. anati, ana , anitum, to 

* sound, L.: cl. 4. A. any ate, to breathe, 
(another form of Van, q. v.; in this sense regarded 
in the DhStu-patha as a distinct rt.), L. 

Anaka, mfn. insignificant, small, contemptible, 
(gana utkarddi, q. v.) 

Auaklya, mfn. connected with what is insignifi¬ 
cant, &c., ib. 

Anavya, am, n. a field of (anu) Panicum Milia- 
ceuin, Pan. v, 2, 4 ; see anil. 

Ani, is, m. or ani, fi the point of a needle or of 
a sharp stake, L.; linch-pin, L.; the pin or bolt at the 
end of the pole of a carriage, L.; the corner or part 
of a house, L.; a boundary, L. Ani-mandavya, 
m., N. of a Brahman ascetic (said to have been im¬ 
paled on an ani or point of a stake), MBh. 

Animan, d, m. (fr. anu, q. v.), minuteness, fine¬ 
ness, thinness, SBr.&c.; meagreness; atomic nature; 
the superhuman power of becoming as small as an 
atom ; (animan), n. the smallest particle, SBr. 

Anisbtba, mfn. (fr. anu, q. v.), most minute. 

Aniyas, an, asT, as(i r. anu, q.v.), or aniyaska 
[AV.], mfn. more minute than usual. 

Anu, mf(z’fi)n. fine, minute, atomic ; (us), m. an 
atom of matter; ‘an atom of time,’ the 54,675,000th 
part of a muhfirta (of 48 minutes) ; Panicum Milia- 
ceum,VS.; SBr. xiv; MundUp.; N. of Siva ; (dnvT), 
f. ‘the subtle one,’ N. of the fingers preparing the 
Soma juice, RV.; (u), n. (in prosody) the fourth 
part of a matra ; (and), ind. minutely, SBr. — tara, 
mfn. very fine or minute, gentle. — taila, 11., N. of 
a medical oil. — tva, n. or -ta, f. minuteness, atomic 
nature. — bba,f.lightning. — madbya-bija, n.,N.of 
a hymn. — matra, mfn. having the size of an atom. 

— matrika, mfn. having the size of an atom ; con¬ 
taining the atomic elements (matra) of the body, 
Mn. i, 56. — renu, m. fi atomic dust (as seen in 
sun-beams). — renu-jala, n. an aggregate of such 
atomic dust. — revatl, f. the plant Croton Polyan- 
drum. — vadin, mfn. one who believes in and 
teaches atomism, —vedanta, m. title of a book. 
«—vrata, ani, n. pi., N. of the twelve small duties 
or vows of the laymen adhering to the Jaina faith. 

— vrlbi, m. a fine sort of rice, L. — sas, ind. into 
or in minute particles. Anu (with V bhri, Sec.), see 
s. v. Auv-anta, m. a hair-splitting question, SBr. 

Anuka, mfn. fine, minute, atomic ; clever, (gana 
yavetdi, q. V.) ; (am), n. an atom. 

Anu (for anu in comp, with V bhu and its deri¬ 
vatives). — bbava, m. the becoming an atom, Nir. 

— \Zbbu, to become minute or atomic. 

Anva, am, n. fine interstice or hole in the strainer 
used for the Soma juice, RV. 

anuha, as, m., N. of a son of Vi- 

bhraja, MBh. 

-u t b anth or ath, cl. 1. A. anthate, dnan - 

* \the, anthitum, to go, move, tend, L. 

Antbita, mfn. pained (?), Susr. 

’SUJS anda, am, n. (also as. m., L.) [Vam, 

Un.], an egg, a testicle; the scrotum; the musk 
bag; semen virile, L.; N. of Siva (from his being 
identified with the BrahmSnda or mundane egg). 

— kat&ba, m. the shell of the mundane egg, VP. 

— kotara-pusbpl, fi the plant Convolvulus Ar- 
genteus (?). — ko^a or -kosba or -kosbaka, m. 
the scrotum; the mundane egg. — ja, mfn. egg-born; 
(tfj - ), m. a bird, L.; a fish, L.; a snake, L.; a lizard, 
L.; (d), fi musk. — jdsvara, m. ‘king of birds,’ 
Garuda. — dala, n. egg-shell. — dbara, m. f N. of 
Siva. — vardbana, n. or -vriddbi, fi swelling of 
the scrotum, hydrocele. — su, fi oviparous. Andd- 
karsb&na, n. castration. Auddkara, mfn. egg- 
shaped, oval, elliptical; (as), m. an ellipsis. AndiU 
kriti, mfn. egg-shaped, oval, elliptical; (is), fi an 

Andaka, as, m. the scrotum; (am), n. an egg. 




Andara, mf(f, gana gaurddi, q.v.)n., N. of a 
tribe, (gana bhriiddi, q.v.) 

Andaraya, Nom. A, an da ray ate, to behave 5 ike 
an Andara, (gana bhrisddi, q, v.) 

And&lu, us, m. Mull of eggs,’ a fish, L. 

Andika, t., N. of a weight ( = 4 yava), Car. 

Andxra, as, m. a full male, a man, L.; strong, L. 

.at, ind. a prefix said to imply ‘sur¬ 
prise,’ probably a contraction of ati, meaning ‘extra¬ 
ordinary/(gana ury-adi, q.v.) Ad-bhuta, mfn. 
extraordinary ; see s. v. 

2. at , cl. I. P. A. at ati (Naigh.; 

^ xp. diat or dtamana), to go constantly, 
walk, run, RV.; to obtain, L. 

Ataxia, as, m. a passer on, Nir.; (am), n. act of 
passing on, Nir. — vat, m. one who wanders, Nir. 

Atasi, atka. See s. v. 

a-taj-jna (for a-tad-jna), mfn. not 

knowing that, i. e. Brahma and the soul’s identity. 

Z a-tata, mfn. having no beach or shore, 

precipitous, Sak.; (as), m. a precipice; the third 
hell; cf. at a la, 

’snr^rfa? a-tattva-vid , mfn. not knowing 

the truth, i. e. the soul’s identity with Brahma. 

A-tattvartha-vat, mfn. not conformable with 
the nature of truth. 

^TrlMl a-tatha, mfn. not saying tathd (yes), 

giving a negative answer, RV. i, 82, I. A-tatho- 
cita, mfn. not deserving of such (a fate) ; not used 
to this (with gen.) 

A-tathya, mfn. untrue, unreal, not really so. 

rt<5. a-tad, not that, RhP. (ef. a-sa). 
— arha, mfn. not deserving that; (am), ind. un¬ 
deservedly, unjustly. — gmna, m. (in rhetoric) the 
use of predicates not descriptive of the essential 
nature of the object. 

^i.« -tanu, mfn. not thin, not small. 
2. A-tanu, us, m. — an-ahga, N. of Kama. 

a-tantra , mfn. having no cords; 
having no (musical) strings; unrestrained ; (am), n. 
not the object of a rule or of the rule under con¬ 

d-tandra , mfn. free from lassitude, 

alert, unwearied, RV.; AV. 

A-tandrita or a-tandrin, mfn. id., Mn, See. 

, 5 TrPT a-tapu (Vtop), us, rn. pi. a class of 

deities among the Buddhists. 

A-tapas or a-tapaska or a-tapasya, mfn. one 
who neglects tapas or the practice of ascetic austeri¬ 
ties ; au irreligious character. 

A-tapta, mfn. not heated, cool. — tanu (dtap/a-), 
mfn. whose body or mass is not prepared in fire, raw, 
RV. ix, 83, I. —tapas, m. whose ascetic austerity 
has not been (fully) endured. 

A'-tapyamana, mfn. not suffering, RV. i, 185,4. 

a-tumds, mfn. without darkness, 
SBr, xiv. A-tam&vishta (irregular contraction of 
a-tama-dvishta ), mfn. not enveloped in darkness, 

A-tamisra, mfn. not dark, not benighted. 

a -tameru, mfn. not languid, VS. 

^Trr«h a-tarka , as, m. an illogical reasoner; 

bad logic. 

A-tarkita, mfn. unconsidered, unthought of; un¬ 
expected ; (am), ind. unexpectedly. 

A-tarkya, mfn. incomprehensible, surpassing 
thought or reasoning. — sahasra-s&kti, m. en¬ 
dowed with a thousand incomprehensible powers. 

a-tala , am, n. bottomless; N. of a 
hell beneath the earth; (as), m., N. of Siva. 
— sparia or -sprls, mfn. whose bottom cannot be 
reached, bottomless. 

xi'fimk^a-tavyas, an, asi, as, not stronger, 

not very strong, RV. v, 33, r & vii, 100, 5. 

at as, ind. (ablative of the pronom. 

base a, equivalent to as mat), from this, than this; 
hence; henceforth, from that time; from this or 
that cause or reason. AtaHdrdhvam, ind. hence¬ 
forth, afterwards. Ata-eva, ind. for this very reason; 
therefore. Ata&-param, ind. henceforth, further 

1 on. Ato-nimittam, ind. on this ground, for this 
reason. Ato-’nya, mfn. differing from this. Ato- 
’rthani, ind. for this object. 

atasa, as, m.( Vat), wind, air, L.; the 
soul, L.; a (missile) weapon, L.; a garment made 
of the fibre of (atasi) fiax, L.; (dm), 11. shrubs, 
RV.; (//, 1. common flax, Linum Idsitatissimum; 
Sana, Bengal sun used as hemp, Crotolaria Juncea. 

■'STrTftr atasi, is, m. (Vat), a wandering 

mendicant, RV. viii, 3, 13. 

Atasayya (5), mfn. to be got by begging, RV. 
i, 63, 6 &e ii, icj, 4. 

\S riiH a-tasthana ( Vsthd), mfn.not suit¬ 

ing or fitting, SBr. 

WHT'TO a-br/}flsa,mfn.not an ascetic, SBr. 

ati, ind. [probably neut. of an obsolete 
adi. a tin, passing, going, beyond ; see Vat, and cf. 
Old Germ, anti, unti, inti, unde, ituii, &c.; Kug. 
and; Germ, und; Gk. in, durl ; Lat. ante ; loth. 
ant; Arm. ti ; Zend aitf ]. As a prefix to verbs and 
their derivatives, ex passes beyond, over, and, if not 
standing by itself, leaves the accent on the verb or 
its derivative; as, ati-kram (Vkram), to overstep, 
Ved, Inf. ati-krdme, (fit) to be walked on, to be 
passed, RV. i, 105, 16 ; ati-krdmana, n., see s. v. 

When prefixed to nouns, not derived from verbs, 
it expresses beyond, surpassing; as, ati-kasa, past the 
whip ; ati-mdnusha, superhuman, Sec ,; see s. v. 

As a separable adverb or preposition (with acc.), 
Ved. beyond;(with gen.)over, at the top of, RV.; AV. 

Ati is often prefixed to nouns and adjectives, and 
rarely to verbs, in the sense excessive, extraordinary, 
intense ; excessively, too ; exceedingly, very ; in such 
compounds the accent is generally on ati. — ka- 
thora, mfn. very hard, too hard. — katha, mfn. 
exaggerated; (a), f. an exaggerated tale; see also s. v. 

— karshaga (ior -karsana ?), n. excessive exer¬ 
tion. — kalyam, ind. very early, too early. — kanta, 
mfn. excessively beloved. — kaya, mfn. of extra¬ 
ordinary body or size, gigantic; (<7/), m., N. of a 
Rakshasa, R. - kirita (ati-) or -kirita [Comm.], 
mfn. having too small teeth, TBr. — kutsita, mfn. 
greatly despised. — kulva (ati-), mfn. too bald, VS. 

— kricckra, m. extraordinary pain or penance last¬ 
ing twelve days, Mil.; Yajh. — krita, mfn. over¬ 
done, exaggerated. — krisa (dti-), mfn. very thin, 
emaciated. — krishna (ati-), mfn. very or too dark, 
very or too deep blue. — kruddha, mfn. exces¬ 
sively angry. — krudh, f. excessive anger, Kathas. 

— krushtafnVf- ),n. extraordinary cry or wailing, VS. 

— khara, mfn. very pungent or piercing. — ganda, 
mfn. having large cheeks or temples; (at), m., N, 
of the yaga (or index), star of the 6th lunar mansion. 

— gaxtdha, mfn. having an overpowering smell; 

(as) , m. sulphur; lemon-grass (Andropogon Schge- 
mmthes); the Champac flower (MicheliaChampaca); 
a kind of jasmin. — g-andhalu, m., N. of the creeper 
rutradati*i. — garxyas, n. (conipar. of ati-guru), a 
higher or too high price; ati-gariyasd (instr.) VkrT, 
to buy too dear, Das. — garvita, mfn. very conceited. 

— gahana, mfn. very deep; very impenetrable. 

— g'adha, mfn. very important; very intensive; 
(am), ind. exceedingly ; excessively. — gtma, mfn. 
havingextraordinaryqualities. — ffiipta, mfn. closely 
concealed, very mysterious. — £uru,mfu. very heavy. 

— go, f. an excellent cow, Pan. v, 4, 69, Sch. 

— canda, mfn. very violent. — carana, n. exces¬ 
sive practice. — capalya, n. extraordinary mobility 
or unsteadiness. — cira, mfn. very long ; (am), ind. 
a very long time ; (asya), ind. for a very long time; 

(at) , ind. at last. — chattra or -chattraka, rn. a 
mushroom; (a), f. Anise (Anisum or Anethum Sowa); 
the plant Barleria Longifolia. —jara or -jaras, 
mfn. very aged, Pan. vii, 2, 1 oi, Sch.— jala, mfn. 
well watered. —java,m. extraordinary speed; (mfn.), 
very fleet. — jagrara, mfn. very wakeful; (as), m. 
the black curlew, —jlrp.a, mfn. very aged. — jirna- 
ta, f. extreme old age. — jlva, mfn. quite alive, very 
lively, AV. — dlna, n. extraordinary flight (of birds), 
MBh. — tapasvin, mfn. very ascetic. — tikshna, 
mfn. very sharp. — tivra, mfn. very sharp, pungent 
or acid ; («), £ dub grass. — triniia, mfn. seriously 
hurt. — tripti, f. too great satiety. — trishna, 
mfn. excessively thirsty, rapacious; (a), f. excessive 
thirst. — trasnu, mfn. over timid. — dag’dha, mfn. 
badly burnt; (am), n., N. of a bad kind of burn. 

— dantura (ati-), mfn. whose teeth are too promi¬ 

nent, TBr. — darpa, m. excessive conceit; N, cf 
a buake ; (mfn.), excessively conceited. — d&raln 
mfn. very far-sighted. — datyi, m. a very or too 
liberal man. — dana, n. munificence; excessive 
munificence. — darupa, mfn. very terrible. — dftb .4 

m. great heat; violent inflammation, TS. &c 

— dir glia (dti-), mfn. very long, too long. — dnh- 
khita (or -dushkhitd), mfn. greatly afflicted, very 
sad. — dubs aha, nitu. very hard to bear, quite un¬ 
bearable. — durgata, mfn. very badly off. — dur- 
dharsha, mfn. verv hard to approach, very haughty. 

— durlambka, mfn. very barn to attain. — dush- 
kara, mfn. veiy difficult, —dura, mfn. very dis¬ 
tant ; (am), n. a great distance, —dosha, m. a 
great fault. — dhavaXa, mfn. very white. — dhenu 
mfn. distinguished for his cows, Pan. i, 4, 3, Comm. 

— nidra, mtn. given to excessive sleep; (a), f. ex¬ 
cessive sleep; (am), ind., see s.v. (p. 14, col. 2). 

— nipuna, mtn. very skilful, — nica, mfn. exces¬ 
sively low. — pathih (nom. -/ant/ids), m. a better 
road than common, L. — pada, mfn. (in prosody) 
too long by one pada or foot. — paroksha, mfn. 
far out of sight, no longer discernible. — paroksha« 
vritti, mfn. (in Gr.j having a nature that is no 
longer discernible, i. e. obsolete, —pataka, n. a 
very heinous sin. — purusha or -purusha (dti-) 
[SBr.], in. a first-rate man, hero. — puta, mfn. quite 
purified, over-refined. — pesala, mfn. very dexter¬ 
ous. — prakasa, mfn. very notorious. — pragr©,ind. 
very early, Mn. — prauaya, m. excessive kindness, 
partiality. — pranudya, ind. having pushed far for¬ 
ward, — praba-ndha, m. complete continuity, 

— pxavarapa,n. excess in choosing. — pravritti, 
f. issuing abundantly. — pravriddha, mfn. enlarged 
to excess, overbearing, Mil. — prasna, m. an extra¬ 
vagant question, a question regarding transcendental 
objects. prasnya, mfn. to be asked such a ques¬ 
tion, BrArUp. — prasakti, f. or-prasaiig-a, rn. ex¬ 
cessive attachment; unwarrantable stretch of a rule. 

— prasiddha, mfn. very notorious. — praudha, 
mfn. full-grown. — praudha-yauvana, mfn. being 
in the full enjoyment of youth. — bala, mfn. very 
strong or powerful ; (as), m. an active soldier; N. 
of a king ; (ff), f. a medicinal plant (Sidonia Cordi- 
folia and Rhombifolia, or Annona Squamosa) ; N. 
of a powerful charm ; of one of Daksba’s daughters. 

— bahu (dti-), mfn. very much ; too much, MaitrS. 

— balaka, m. an infant; (mfn.), infantine. — balm, 
in. 1 having extraordinary arms,’ N. of a Rishi of the 
fourteenth Manvantara, Hariv.; N. of a Gandharvn, 
MBh, — blbhatsa, mfn. excessively disagreeable. 

— brahmacarya, 11. excessive abstinence or con¬ 
tinence. — bhara, rn. an excessive burden; excessive 
obscurity (of a sentence); N. of a king. — bhaTa- 
gra, m. ‘heavy-burden-bearer/ a mule. — bhl, m, 

‘ very terrific/ lightning, L. - bhlshana, mfn. very 
terrific. — bhrita, mfn. well filled. — bbojana, 

n. eating too much; morbid voracity. — bhru, 
mfn. having extraordinary eyebrows. — mahgalya, 
mfn. very auspicious; (as ), in, /Egle or Crataeva 
Marmelos. — mati (dti-), f. haughtiness, RV. i, 
129, 5; (mfn.), exceedingly wise, MBh, -ma- 
dhyandina, n. high noon, -marsa, m. close 
contact, —mana, m. great haughtiness. — mania, 
mfn. very haughty. — mani-ta, f. great haughti¬ 
ness. — rn.aru.ta, mfn. very windy ; (as), m. a hur¬ 
ricane, Yajh. — mirmira (dti-), mfn. twinkling 
exceedingly,TBr. — mukta, mfn. entirely liberated; 
quite free from sensual or worldly desire ; seedless, 
barren ; (as), in. the tree Dalbergta Oujemensis; 
Gyrtnera Racemosa. — mnktaka, m. —the pre¬ 
ceding; mountain ebony; the tree Harimantha. 

— mukti (ati-), f. final liberation (from death), 
TS.; SBr. xiv. — mBrti, f. ‘highest shape/ N. of 
a ceremony. — memisha(n 7 f-),mfn.(y'I. wish), 
opening the eyes too much, staring, TBr. — mai- 
thuna, n. excess of sexual intercourse. — moksha, 
m.; see ati-Vmuc. — znod 5 , f. extraordinary fra¬ 
grance ; the tree Jasminum Arboreum. — yava, m. 
a sort of barley. — yasa [MBh,] or ~yasas, mfn. 
very illustrious. — ySja, m. ‘great sacrificer/ very 
pious, RV. vi, 52, 1. — yuvaxx, mfn. very youth¬ 
ful, L, — yoga, m. excessive union, excess. — rag- 
has, mfn. extremely rapid, SSk. — rakta, mfn. 
very red; (a), f, one of Agni’s seven tongues. 

— ratha, m, a great warrior (fighting from a car), 
R. — rabhasa, m. extraordinary speed. — rasS., f. 
‘very succulent/ N. of various plants (Murva, Rasna, 
Klitanaka). — raj an, m, an extraordinary king. 
Pan. v, 4, 69, Sch.; one who surpasses a king [cf. 


a ti-tar am. 


also s,v.] — rucira, mfn. very lovely; (6), f., N. 
of two metres (a variety of the AtijagatZ ; another 
called Cudikd or Cttlikd). — rush, mfn. very 
angry. — rupa, mfn. very beautiful; (aw\ n. extra- j 
ordinary beauty. — roga, m. consumption, L. — ro- 
masa. mfn. very hairy, too hairy ; (oj), m. a wild 
goat, a kind of monkey. — lakskml, mfn. very 
prosperous; (fir), f. extraordinary prosperity. — lan- 
gkana, n. excessive fasting, Susr. — lamba, mfn. 
very extensive. — lubdha or ati-lobha, mfn. very 
greedy or covetous. — lulita, mfn. closely attached 
or adhering, — lobha, m. or -lobha-ta, f. exces¬ 
sive greediness or covetousness, -loma or -loma- 
ia (a/i-) [VS.], mfn. very hairy, too hairy. —lo~ 
masa, f. Convolvulus Argenteus. — lohita, mfn. 
very red. — laulya, n, excessive eagerness or desire. 

— vaktri, mfn. very loquacious. — vakra, mfn. 
very crooked or curved; (d), f. one of the eight 
descriptions of planetary motion. — vartula, mfn. 
very round ; (as), ni. a kind of grain or pot-herb. 

— v&ta, m. high wind, a storm. — vada, m. abusive 
language ; reproof; N. of a Yedic verse, AitBr. 

— vadin, mfn. very talkative. — valaka, see -bd- 
laka above. — vSkana, n. excessive toiling. — vi- 
kata, mfn. very fierce ; (flr), m. a vicious elephant. 

— vipina, mfn. having many forests, very impene¬ 
trable, Kir. v, 18. — vilambin, mfn. very dila¬ 
tory. — visrabdka-navddka, f. a fond but pert 
young wife. — visha, mfn. exceedingly poisonous; 
counteracting poison ; (d), f. the plant Aconitum 
Ferox. — vriddki, f. extraordinary growth. — vri- 
skti.f. excessive rain. — vriskti-kata,mfn. injured 
by heavy rain. — vepathu, m. excessive tremor ; 
(mfn.), or ativepathu-mat, mfn. trembling ex¬ 
cessively. — vaicakskanya, n. great proficiency. 
«* vaisasa, mfn. very adverse or destructive. 

— vyathana, n. infliction of (or giving) excessive 
pain, Pan. v, 4, 61. — vyatha, f. excessive pain. 

— vyaya, m. lavish expenditure. — vySpta, mfn. 
stretched too far (as a rule or principle). — vy5pti, 
f. unwarrantable stretch (of a rule or principle), Pan. 
vi, 3, 35, Sch. — sakta or -sakti, mfn. very power¬ 
ful ; (is), f. or atisakti-ta, f. great power or valour. 

— sakti-bkaj,mfn. possessing great power. — sah- 
kS, f. excessive timidity. — Harvard, n. the dead 
of night, AV. ~*sasta, mfn. very excellent. — sn- 
kra (dti-), mfn. too bright. — sukla, mfn. very 
white, too white. — sobkana, mfn. very handsome. 

— sri, mfn. very prosperous, Pan. i, 2, 48, Sch. 

— slakshna (dti-), mfn. too tender, TBr. -sam- 
Skrita, mfn. highly finished. — sakti, f. excessive 
attachment. — sakti-mat, mfn.excessively attached. 

— s am cay a, m. excessive accumulation. •» sam- 
tapta, mfn. greatly afflicted. — samdkeya, mfn. 
easy to be settled or conciliated. — s&martha, mfn. 
very competent. — samipa, mfn. very near. — Bam- 
parka, m. excessive (sexual) intercourse. — sarva, 
mfn. too complete, AitBr.; superior to all, see s. v. 
*- s&dkvasa, n. excessive fear. — sin tap ana, n. 
a kind of severe penance (inflicted especially for 
eating unclean animal food). —sSyam, ind. very 
late in the evening. «• siddhl, f. great perfection. | 

— sajana, mfn. very moral, very friendly, ~6un- 
dara, mfn. very handsome ; (ar, a), m. f. a metre 
belonging to the class Ashti (also called Citra or 
Caflcald). — eulabka, mfn. very easily obtain¬ 
able. — suhita, mfn. excessively kind, over-kind. 

— sriskti (dti-), f. an extraordinary or excellent 
creation, SBr. xiv. — sevS, f. excessive addiction (to 
a habit). — saurabka, mfn. very fragrant; (am), n. 
extraordinary fragrance. — saukitya, n. excessive 
satiety, e.g. being spoiled, stuffed with food, Sec., Mn. 
iv. 62. — stuti, f. excessive praise, Nir. — sthira, 
mfn. very stable. — sthula (ati-), mfn. excessively 
b’g or clumsy, VS. &c.; excessively stupid. — snig~ 
dta, mfn. very smooth, very nice, very affection¬ 
ate. -• sparsa, m. too marked contact (of the tongue 
ar.i palate) in pronunciation. — sphira, mfn. very 
tremulous. — svapna,m. excessive sleep ; {am), n. 
excessive tendency to dreaming. ~svastha, mfn. 
emc-vina: excellent health. — kasita, n. or -k&sa, 
m. excessive laughter. '•krasva (ati-), mfn. ex¬ 
cessively short, VS. &c. Aty-a^ni, m. morbidly 

digestion. Aty-anu, mfn. very thin, MaitrS. 
Aty-adbhuta, mfn. very wonderful; (as), m., N. 
ct’tr.e Indra in the ninth Manvantara, VP.; (am), 
r s rreat wonder. Aty-adkvan, m. a long way 
■; - : crr.ey. excessive travelling. Aty-amarskana 
c* -amarshin, mfn. quite out of temper. Aty- 
la, rrffr.. very acid; (as), m. the tree Spondias j 

Mangifera ; (J), f. a species of citron. Atyamla- 
parp. 1 , f. ‘ having very acid leaves,’ N. of a medicinal 
plant. Aty-alpa, mfn. very little. Aty-asana, 
n. immoderate eating. Aty-asnat, mfn. eating too 
much'. Aty-asama, mfn. very uneven, very rough. 
Aty-adara, m. excessive deference. Aty-adana, 
n. taking away too much. Aty-auanda, m. exces¬ 
sive wantonness, SBr.; (mfn.), excessively wanton, 
Susr, Aty-apti, f. complete attainment, AV. 
xi, 7, 22. Aty-arudhl, f. or -aroha, m. mount¬ 
ing too high, insolence, arrogance. Aty-SsSL, f. 
extravagant hope. A'ty-asita, mfn. (V2. as), too 
satiate, MaitrS. Aty-as&rin, mfn. excessively 
flowing towards, TS. Aty-ahara, m. excess in 
eating. Aty-akarin, mfn. eating immoderately, 
gluttonous. Aty-ahita, n. great calamity ; great 
danger; facing great danger ; a daring action. 
Aty-ukti, f. excessive talking; exaggeration ; hy¬ 
perbole. Aty-ugra, mfn. very fierce ; very pun¬ 
gent-; (am), n. Asa Fcetida. Aty-uccais, ind. 
very loudly. Atyuccair-dkvani, m. a very loud 
sound ; a very high note. Aty-utkata, mfn. very 
imposing or immense. Aty-utsaha, m. excessive 
vigour. Aty-udara, mfn. very liberal Aty-nl- 
bana or -ulvana, mfn. very conspicuous, excessive. 
Aty-uskna, mfn. very hot. Aty-tidhaa, f. hav¬ 
ing an exceedingly large udder, Pan. Sch. 

’SrfdcfcVJ ati-katha , mfn. transgressing tra¬ 
dition or law', deviating from the rules of caste ; (see 
also s. v. a/i.) 

ati-kandaka, as, m. the plant 


dti-kalydna, mf(2)n.‘past or 

beyond beauty/ not beautiful, SBr. 

ati-kasa, mfn. beyond the whip, 

unmanageable, Pan. vi, 2 , 191, Sch. 

^fn^^atiWkup, to become very angry. 
’Wffl r* ati-Vkurd , to jump about. 
^TffT^fW ati-kriti or better abhi-kriti , q. v. 

Vkrish,to drag over or beyond. 
ari-keserra, qs, m. the plantTrapa 


ati-Vkram , to step or go beyond 
or over or across, (Ved. Inf. ati-krdme, to be walked 
on, RV, i, 105, 16); to pass, cross; to pass time; 
to surpass, excel, overcome ; to pass by, neglect; to 
overstep, transgress, violate ; to pass on or away; to 
step out; to part from, lose : Caus. -krdmayati or 
-frramayati, to allow to pass (as time); to leave un¬ 

Atl-krama, as, m, passing over, overstepping; 
lapse (of time); overcoming, surpassing, conquering; 
excess, imposition, transgression, violation; neglect; 
determined onset. 

Ati-kramana, am, n. the act of passing over, 
SBr., surpassing, overstepping; excess; passing, 
spending (time). 

Ati-kras&aiuya, mfn. to be passed beyond or 
over ; generally negative an-atikramantya, q. v. 

Ati-kr&min, mfn. (ifc.) exceeding, violating, &c. 

Ati-kramya, ind. having passed beyond or over. 

Ati-kranta, mfn. having passed or transgressed ; 
exceeded, surpassed, overcome. — nishecUxa, mfn. 
one who has neglected a prohibition. 

Ati-kranti, is, f. transgression, Kir. 

Ati-krSmaka, mfn. exceeding, transgressing, L. 

ati-Vk$har, to overflow or flow 
through, RV. See. (3. sg. aor. dhhar a/i, RV. ix, 
43 » 5 )* 

ati- s/kship, to throw beyond. 

Ati-kskipta, mfn. thrown beyond; (am), m 
(in med.) sprain or dislocation of a particular kind, 

^rfjTTfJ ati-khatva, mfn. beyond the bed¬ 

stead, able to do without a bedstead, P 5 n. Sch. 

ati-y/khyd , to survey, overlook 
(3. sg. impf. dty-akhyaf), AV.; to neglect, pass 
over, abandon (2. sg. Conj. dti-khyas, 2. du. Conj. 
ati-khyaiam ), RV. 

ati-y'gam or gd , to pass 

t by or over ; to surpass, overcome ; to escape ; neg¬ 
lect ; to pass away, die. 

Ati-g'a, mfn. (ifc.) exceeding, overcoming, sur¬ 
passing (cf. iok&iiga ); transgressing, violating. 
Ati-gata, mfn. having passed ; being past. 

^rrTmrT ati- vgarj , to speak loudly or pro- 
vokingly or in a threatening voice, MBh. 

^Tfrin^ ati-gava , mfn. (a bull) covering 
the cow, L. 

ati- \/ yah, ‘to emerge over,’ to 
rise upon, RV. 

Ati-gadka, mfn. See p. 12, col. 2. 


ati - \/gur , (Pot. dti juguryat ) , to cry 

out, give a shriek, RV. i, 173, 2. 

ati-guha , f. the plant Hemionites 

Cordi folia. 

ati-Vgrah, to take beyond or over 

the usual measure, SBr. ; TBr.; SankhSr. ; to sur¬ 
pass, Pan. v, 4, 46, Sch. 

Ati-graka, as, m. act of taking over or beyond, 
surpassing ; one who takes or seizes to an extraordi¬ 
nary extent; (in phil) = atigrdha. 

Ati-graka, as, m. the object of a graha (q. v.) 
or organ of apprehension (these are eight, and their 
corresponding ati-grdhas or objects are apdna, 
* fragrant substance naman, ‘ name rasa, ‘ fla¬ 
vour rupa, ‘form \ sabda, ‘sound kdina, ‘de¬ 
sire barman, ‘action / sparsa, ‘touch *), SBr. xiv. 

Ati-grahyjt, as, m., N. of three successive liba¬ 
tions made (or cups filled) at the Jyotishtoma sacri¬ 
fice, TS.; SBr. See. 

ati-gha, as, m. ( */han), ‘very de¬ 

structive/ a weapon, bludgeon ; wrath. 

Ati-gkm, f. utter oblivion or profound sleep 
(obliterating all that is disagreeable in the past, and 
regarded as the highest condition of bliss), SBr. xiv. 

Ati-ghny&. (4), mfn. one who is in the con¬ 
dition ati-ghni, AV. 

ati-camu , mfn. (victorious) over 

armies, L. 

ati-s /1 car, to pass by; to overtake, 

surpass; to transgress, offend, be unfaithful to. 

Ati-cara, mfn. transient, changeable ; (d), f. the 
shrub Hibiscus Mutabilis. 

Ati-carana. See p. 1 2, col. 2. 

Ati-cSra, as, m. passing by, overtaking, sur¬ 
passing ; accelerated motion, especially of planets; 

Ati-carin, mfn. surpassing, transgressing. 

Vcrit, to stick on, fasten, AY. 
ati-Vcesht, to make extraordinary 

or excessive efforts. 

dti-cchandas, mfn. past worldly 
desires, free from them, SBr. xiv; (as, as), f. n., 
N, of two large classes of metres; (as), n., N. of a 
particular brick in the sacrificial fire-place. 

’5rffT3T jr nft‘ ati-jagati , f., N. of a class of 

metres (belonging to those called Aticchandas, and 
consisting of four lines, each containing thirteen 

ati-jana, mfn. ‘beyond men/ un¬ 


ati-jdta, mfn. superior to parent¬ 


FlfwfjT ati->/ji (aor. aty-ajaishit), to con¬ 

quer, AV. 

’Srfrf ati-y/jiv, to survive; to surpass 

in the mode of living. 

’’SrnnnT ati-tata , mfn. (y/tan), stretching 

far, making one’s self big, conceited, Si$. 

^HTfT? Vtap, to be very hot, AY. xviii, 
2, 36, &c.; to heat, AV. xiii, 2,40; BhP.; to affect 
greatly : Caus. - tdpayati, to heat much. 

ati Aar am, ind. (compar. of dti), 
above in rank (with acc.), KenaUp.; better, higher, 
more (with abl), SBr, &c.; very much, exceedingly, 




’Srfifipf ati~Vtrid, to cleave, split, VS. ; to 
pierce through, penetrate, AV. 

ati-V trip , to be satiated. 

’sfrTi^ ati-Vtri, to pass through or by or 
over, cross, overcome, escape : Desid. -titirshati, 
to be desirous of crossing or overcoming, BhP. 
Ati-tarin, mfn. crossing, AitBr. 

Ati-tSry&, mf(rt)n. to be crossed or passed over 
or overcome, AV. 

wfirwg ati-tyad, surpassing that. Pan. vii, 
2, 102, Sch. 

ati-tvam, surpassing thee, Pan. 
vii, 2, 97, Sch. ; atitvdm, atitvdn, acc. sing, and 
pi. him that surpasses thee, them that surpass thee; 
(fictitious forms coined by grammarians.) 

frTr^T ati-Vtvar, to hasten overmuch, 
’srfirfa at it hi, is, m. (Vat, or said to be from 

a-tithi , 'one who has no fixed day for coming’), a 
guest, a person entitled to hospitality; N. of Agni; of 
an attendant on Soma ; N. of Suhotra (king of Ayo- 
dhya, and grandson of Rama). — kriya, f. hospitality. 
— g^va^m/to whom guests should go,’N. of Divodasa 
and of another mythical hero, RV. — tva, n. state 
of a guest, hospitality. — deva, mfn. one to whom a 
guest is as a divinity, TUp. — dvesha, m. hatred 
of guests, inhospitality. — dharma, m. rights of 
hospitality, Mn. iii, m,&'c. — dharmin, mfn. 
entitled tohospitality. Mil.iii, 11 2. — pati(<??/////-), 

m. a host, entertainer of a guest, AV. — pujana, 

n. or -puja, f. showing honour to a guest, —vat, 
ind. like a guest. — satkara, m. honourable treat¬ 
ment of a guest. — seva, f. attention to a guest. 

Atithin, mfn. {Vat'), travelling, RV. x, 68, 3; 
(j), m., N. of a king (also Suhotra and Atithi, q. v.) 

ati-Vdagh, to go beyond, to pass 
(3. sg. ati-dhak , 2. du. dti-dJiaktam ), RV. 

ati-datta , as, m., N. of a brother 

of Datta and sou of Rajudhideva, Hariv. 

afi-Vdah, to burn or blaze across, 

SBr. ; to burn or distress greatly. 

ati-Vi.dd, to surpass in giving, 
RV. viii, 1, 38 ; to pass over in giving, KatySr. 

^TfrT^T 7 fT ati-ddnta, as, m., N. of a prince. 

ati-Vdas, to favour with a gift, 

present, RV. 

-\/2.div(\r\([.p.divya[-=: 0 vya~§), 
to play higher, RV. x, 42, 9; to risk (in playing), 
MBh. ii, 2041. 

to make over, transfer, 
assign: Pass, -dispute, (in Gr.) to be overruled or 
attracted or assimilated. 

Ati-dishta, mfn. overruled, attracted, influenced, 
inferred, sub.tituted. 

Atl-desa, as, m. transfer, extended application, 
inference, analogy, overruling influence, assimilation; 
a rule providing for more than the usual rule; putting 
one thing instead of another, substitution ; rupdti- 
desa , such a rule as affecting the form of a word ; 
(mfn.), overruling, previously stated. 

ati-dipya, as, m. ‘very brilliant,’ 

the plant Plumbago Rosea. 

Ixfti^^ati-Vdrip, to be excessively con¬ 


wfirT^T ati-deva, as, m. a superior god; 

surpassing the gods. 

srfjrf ati-Vi-dru, to run by, pass hastily, 

RV.; AV.; to pass over, SBr. 

"V[fnxn^*{ati-dhanvan s a, m., N. of a Vedic 

teacher, a descendant of Sunaka, VBr. 

^rfirvT ati-Vdha , to put away. 

Ati-hita, mfn. put away or aside, AV. 

ati-V 1 . dhdv, to run or rush over. 
ati-dhriti , is, f., N. of a class of 

metres (belonging to those called Aticchakdas, and 
consisting of four lines, each containing nineteen 
syllables); (in arithm.) nineteen. 

^frTvl ati- v / dhyai , to meditate deeply, VP. 

’SrfrTSci^ ati-Vdhvans, to raise the dust in 
running through or over (3. pi. Conj. aor. ati-dhva- 
sdn), RV. viii, 55, 5. 

ati-Vnam, to bend aside, keep on 

one side. 

ati-naman, d, m., N. of a 

Saptarshi of the sixth Manvantara. 

^srffPTTT? ati-ndshtru , mfn. beyond danger, 

out of danger, SBr. 

ati-nih-Vsvas , to breathe or 

sigh violently. 

^rfrTnr^TT ati-nicrit (or wrongly written 

aii-nivrif), f., N. of a Vedic metre of three padas 
(containing respectively seven, six and seven syl¬ 
lables), RV. Prat. &c. 

•S-frTPT-Jg ati-nidram, ind. beyond sleep¬ 
ing time. Pan. ii, 1, 6, Sch. See also ati-nidra 
s. v. ati. 

ati-nish-tan ( Vtan), (perf. Pot. 
3. pi. ati nish-tat any uh), to penetrate (with rays), 
RV. i, 141, 13.' 

TsrfiTfFf|w ati-ni-hnutya , ind. p. ( y/hnu), 

denying obstinately. 

TXTdtft ati-Vrii, to lead over or beyond, 

to help a person over anything, RV. &c. ; to allow 
to pass away : Intens. A. - nenJydte , to bring for¬ 
ward, RV. vi, 47, 16. 

^fTrT'g ati-V 3. nu, Caus. to turn away, TS. 

ati-Vnud, to drive by, AV. 
ati-Vned, to stream or flow over, 

foam over, TS. &c. 

dti-pitri, ta, m. surpassing his 

own father, SBr. xiv. 

Ati-pitamaka, as, m, surpassing his own pater¬ 
nal grandfather, SBr. xiv. 

ati-Vpu, P. to clarify or purify 
through (3. pi. aor. ati apdvishuh), RV. ix, 60, 2 : 
A. -pavate, to purify or purge by flowing through 
(especiallyused of the Soma juice, which is considered 
to be a purgative), SBr. &c. 

ati-Vi-pvh to convey across, to 

help over, R V. ; to cross, pass over, R V. i, 174, 9 & 
vi, 20, 12; to keep (a promise): Caus. -pa ray ati, 
to lead or convey over, RV. &c. 

'wfrT^ ati-Vpri, cl. 4. P. - puryati , to be¬ 

come full or overflowing, MBh. 

ati-pra-^/cit, -cekite (=.--cikite, 
BR. ; = Intens. -cekitte, Gmn.), to be clearly dis¬ 
tinct or distinguishable, RV. i, 55, 3. 

ati-pra-Vcyu , to pass by, TBr. : 

Caus. -cydvayati, to cause to pass by, SBr. 

^rnnm ati-^prach, to go on asking, 

SBr. &c. 

i d ati-pra-Vjval, to flame or blaze 

exceedingly, MBh. 

ati-pra-nas (\ /2. nas), to be en¬ 

tirely deprived of (acc.), SBr. 

’SrffTIJTrft ati-pra-ni {Vni), to lead by or 

beyond, Laty.; AsvSr. 

’SrfdJUjJJ ati-pra-nud ( \/nud), to press or 

incite very strongly. 

ati-pra-Vpad , Caus. -pddayati, 

to help to pass into the other world (Comm.), MBh. 
iv, 1717. 

■^■frr^TofhjzoUjmfn.disembarked^an.Sch. w frf 

’STnrq^T ati-panca , f. a girl who is past five. 

ati-patikshepa, v. 1 . for a-pa- 

tikshcpa, as, m. omitting to remove or non-removal 
of the theatrical curtain. 

ati-Vpath , Pass. - pathyate , to be 

greatly proclaimed or celebrated, MBh. 

WfrPTrJ ati-V 2. pat , to fall or fly by or past 

or beyond or over ; to neglect, miss : Caus. -pdta- 
yati, to cause to fly by; to drag away ; to make 

Ati-patana, am, n. act of falling or flying be¬ 
yond, passing, missing, transgressing. 

Ati-patita, mfn. passed beyond, transgressed, 

Ati-pata, as, m. passing away, lapse; neglect, 
transgression ; ill-usage, opposition, contrariety. 

Ati-p£tita, mfn. completely displaced or broken; 
{am), n. (in med.) complete fracture of a bone. 

Ati-p5tin, mfn. overtaking, exce’ling in speed ; 
(in med.) running a rapid course, acute ; neglecting. 
Atl-patya, mfn. to be passed over, to be neglected. 

^TTd^^T ati-pattra, as, m. the Teak tree ; 

the tree Rastikanda. 

ati-Vpad, to go beyond (acc.), 

jump over ; to neglect, transgress : Caus. -padayati, 
to allow to pass by. 

Ati-patti, is, f. going beyond, passing, lapse; 
kriyatipatti, the passing by of an action unaccom¬ 
plished, Pan. iii, 3, 139. 

Ati-panna, mfn. gone beyond, transgressed, 
missed ; past. 

^fTTtrr ati-para, mfn. one who has over¬ 

come his enemies; (<?r), rn. a great enemy. 

ati-pari (pari-\Zi), to pass round, 


^rfdtTST ati-Vpas, to look beyond, look 

through, RV. i, 94, 7; AV. 

ati-Vi. pa, Caus. P. - payayati , to 

give to drink in great quantity, Kathas. 

ati-pdda-nicrit , f., N. of a 
Vedic metre of three pSdas (containing respectively 
six, efght and seven syllables). 

sure, immense. 

ati-pra-Vyam , to give or hand 

over, TS. ; TBr. 

ati-pra-Vyuj, to separate from 

(with instr.), TS. 

ati-pra-Vvah, to extend or carry 


^rnFTT ati-pra-V2.vd, cl. 4. P. -vayati, 

to blow violently, MBh. 

ati-pra-viddha , mfn .{Vvyadh), 

frightened away, scared, R. 

ati-pra-Vvrit, to issue violently 

(as blood from a wound), Susr.; to have an intense 
effect (as venom), Susr. 

ati-pra-Vve, to add in weaving, 

weave on an additional piece, SSnkhBr. 

'wfTnrsi^ ati-pra-Vsans , to praise highly. 
VjfrflFSJ ati-pra-Vsru, cl.5. A. -irj'm?e(Ved. 

3. sg.), to become known or famous more than others, 
RV. x, 11, 7. 

^rfrTTTF^ ati-pra-Vsad, P. -sidati, to be¬ 

come completely cheerful. 

ati-pra-Vsri, Intens. -sarsrite, to 

outstrip, surpass, RV. ii, 25, 1. 

Ati-pra-srita, mfn. issued violently. 

ati-pra-\/sthd, to have an ad¬ 

vantage over, RV. i, 64, 13 & viii, 60, 16. 

ati-pra-V2.ha, cl. 3. A .-jihite, to 

give or hand over, SBr. 

wfn I ati-pranam, ind. exceeding life. 

Ati-prSna-prlya, mfn. dearer than life. 

^rfiTlJ G^--v/prM,tojump over,to escape,TS. 

^rfinifaTT ati-preshita, am, n. the time 


following the Praisha ceremony, KatySr. 

ati-\/bddh, to molest or annoy 





ati-Vi.brih , to push out intensely 

(scil. retas; used only for the etym. ofvrishabJia \ 

ati-brahman, a, m., X. of a king. 

ati-Vbru or abhi-y^bru, to insuit, 
abuse, MBh. iii, 15640. 

’wfimT ati-y/bhd,-bkati , to blaze or be very 

bright, AV. x, 3, 17 ; R. 

Gti-Vbhu (perf. -babh&va), to origi¬ 
nate or take rise in an excessive way, MBh. viii, 
4541; P. (once A., TAr.), to excel, surpass, PBr.; 
MBh. See.: Desid. to intend to surpass, AsvSr. 
Atl-bhava, m. superiority, overcoming. 

ati-bhumi , is, f. extensive land; 

culmination, eminence, superiority; excess. 

ctti-\/2. bhush, to adorn one's self 

before (another); to adorn richly. 

ati-x / bhri, A. to pass or extend over 
(perf. 2. sg. -jabhrishe), RV. ix, 86, 29 & loo, 9. 
Ati-bhara, as, m. See s.v. ati. 

ati-y/man , -manyate (1. pi. -mand- 
mahi ' ti ), to disdain, despise, RV. &c. ; to value 
less than one’s self, SBr. ; to pride one’s self, SBr. 

Ati-manita, mfn. honoured highly; cf. ati- 
mdna s. v. ati. 

ati-manuskya-buddhi, mfn. 

having a superhuman, intellect. 

ati-martya, mfn. superhuman. 

’fTfiprilT? ati-maryada , mfn. exceeding the 
proper limit; (aw), ind. beyond bounds. 

ati-marsam, ind. (y/mris), so as 

to encroach, AitBr. 

ati-matrd, mfn. exceeding the 
proper measure, AV. &c.; (dm), ind. or -sas ; ind. 
beyond measure. 

^TfrTHTrJfJ ati-mdnusha, mfn. superhuman, 

divine, MBh. &c. 

ati-mam (acc. of aty-aham , q.v.), 

surpassing me, Pan. vii, 2, 97, Sch. 

ati-maya , mfn. emancipated from 

Maya or Illusion ; finally liberated. 

’Wfinnt ati-mdra or ati-bhara, as, m., N. 

of a prince. 

^frrftnr 1. ati-mita, mfn. over measured, 

beyond measure, exceeding. 

VrfrnHTT 2. a-timita , mfn. not moistened. 

y/ muc, Pass, -mucy ate,to avoid, 

eserpe, SBr. &c. 

Ati-mukta or ati-muktaka, as, m. 'surpass¬ 
ing pearls in whiteness,’ N. of certain shrubs. 
Ati-mukti, is, f. final liberation. See ati. 
Ati-mucya, ind. p. having dismissed or given up. 
Ati-moksha, as, m. final liberation, SBr. xiv. 
Atl-moksbin, mfn. escaping, TS.; Kath. 

TSf&^ati-mrityu, mfn. overcoming death, 


ati-Vyaj, to neglect or pass in 

offering a sacrifice, TS. 

^Tfipn ati-V yd, to pass over or before; to 
surpass, RV. &c.; to pass by, RV. i, 135, 7; to 
transgress, BhP. 

ati-yuyam (nom. pi. of ati-tvam , 

q, v.), surpassing thee. 

ati-Vrcj, to shine over (aor. Subj. 

3. sg. ati rat), RV. vi, 12, 5. 

Ati-rajan, d, m. a supreme king ; superior to a 
k:r.g. Psn. iv, 1, 12, Sch.; (- rajnt), f. (a woman) 
superior to a king, ib. Ati-rSjakumarl, mfn. 
f_ re nor to a princess, PSn. i, 2, 48, Sch. 

AtirSjaya, Nom. P. atirdjayati , to surpass a 
kir.r. Pan. vii, 4, 2, Sch. 

ati-ratra, mfn. prepared or per- 

:;nr.-vi over-night, RV. vii, 103, 7; (as), m. an 

par. of the Jyotishtoma sacrifice; com- 
and conclusion of certain sacrificial acts; 

the concluding Vedic v'erse chanted on such occa¬ 
sions, AV, &c. ; N. of a son of Cakshusha the sixth 
Manu. *-savanlya-pasu, m. the victim sacrificed 
I at the Atiratra. 

’S’frfft ati-ri , neut. of ati-rai, q. v. 

ati-x/ric, Pass. - ricyatc , to be left 

with a surplus, to surpass (in a good or bad sense 
with abl. or acc.); to be superior, predominate, pre¬ 
vail : Cans, -r sc ay ati, to do superfluously, to do too j 
much, SBr. &c. 

Ati-rikta, mfn. left with or as a surplus, left 
apart; redundant, unequalled ; different from (with 
abl.) — ta, f. redundancy, &c. Atiriktaiig'a, 
mfn. having a redundant limb or finger or toe; (am), 
n. a redundant limb or finger or toe. 

Ati-reka or atl-reka [only once, SBr.], as, m. 
surplus, excess ; redundancy ; difference. 

Ati-rekin, mfn. surpassing. 

r. ati-x'ruc, to shine over or 
along, RV. &c. ; to surpass in shining. 

2. Ati-rue, m. a horse’s fetlock or knee, VS. 

ati-x'ruh, to climb or ascend over, 

RV. ix, 17, 5; to grow higher, RV. x, 90, 2. 

ati-rai, as, as, i, exceeding one s in¬ 

come, extravagant, Pan. Sch. 

ati-\/lahgh, Caus. -lahghayati, to 

transgress, Kathas. 

■wtlrra?! atilihd or athilia , f., N. of a 

Prakrit metre (of four lines, each containing sixteen 

*rffnr^ ati- >Jvac, to blame ; to speak too 


loudly either in blaming or praising. 

’STfHsnj ati-Vvad , to speak louder or bet¬ 
ter ; to surpass or overpower in disputing, TBr. See.; 
to ask for too much, AV. 

ati-vayam (nom. pi. of aty-aham , 

q. v.), surpassing me. 

ati-yjvak , to carry over or across ; 
to pass by ; to pass (time), Das.; Caus. -vd hay ati, 
to let pass, get over or through, endure ; to let time 
pass, spend. 

Ati-vahana, am, n. excessive toiling or enduring. 
Ati-vahika, mfn. 'swifter than the wind,* N. of 
the linga-sarira (but see dtivdhika) ; (as), m. an 
inhabitant of the lower world. 

Ati-vahya, mfn. to be passed (as time, &c.); 
(am), n. the passing of time. 

Ati-vodhri, dhd, m. one who carries over or 
across, SBr. 

^rfinn ati-y/ 2. va, cl. 2. P. -vati, to blow be¬ 
yond, AV.: cl. 4. P. -vayati, to blow violently; (ati- 
vdyati), pr.p.loc. ind. the wind blowing strongly, MBh. 

■ssrfiraw ati-vasa , as, m. a fast on the day 

before performing the Sraddha. 

vfirftlVT ati-vi-\/dhd, cl. 3. A. - dhatte , to 

distribute too much, SBr. 

^rffTnrn^ ati-vi-Vriij, to shine or be bril¬ 
liant exceedingly, MBh. &c. 

at\-vi-y/lahgh, Caus. - lahgha¬ 
yati, to pass by without taking notice of, BhP. 

ati-vi-Vlud, Caus. -today ati, to 

disturb, destroy, MBh. 

ati-vi- vrit , Caus. - v art ay ati, 

to separate too far, to make too great distinction be¬ 
tween, RV. Prat. 

91 **? ati-vi - Vsrambh, Caus. - sram- 

bhayati, to make too familiar or too intimate, Car. 

Ati-vi-Brabdlia, mfn. entirely trusting or con¬ 
fiding in ; (am), ind. quite confidently. 

ati-visva, as, m. ‘ superior to all 
or to the universe,’ N. of a Muni, Hariv. 

^frrfrorc? ati-vi - y/svas, to confide or trust 
too much (generally with na, neg.) 

ati-*/vi, to outstrip, RV. v, 44, *]. 

wf?q%fr ati-vrinhita, mfn. ( •/ vrinh), 
strengthened, MBh, v, 499. 

ati-vrit, to pass beyond, surpass, 

cross ; to get over, overcome ; to transgress, violate, 
offend, especially by unfaithfulness; to pass away ; 
to delay. 

Ati-vartana, am, ». a pardonable offence or 

Ati-vartin, mfn. passing beyond, crossing, pass¬ 
ing by, surpassing ; guilty of a pardonable offence. 

Ati-vritti, is, f. surpassing ; hyperbolical mean¬ 
ing ; (in med.) excessive action. 

ati-y/vridh , to surpass in growing, 

grow beyond, SBr. 

Ati-vriddha, mfn. very large ; ,very old. 

ati-\/vfish, to rain violently. 

ati-vela , mfn. passing the proper 
boundary, excessive; (am), ind. excessively. 

ati-x'vyadh (Ved. Inf. ati-vidhe, 
RV. v, 62, 9), to pierce through, RV.; AV. 

Ati-viddba, mfn. pierced through, wounded. 
Ati-vyadkin, mfn. piercing through, wounding, 
VS.; SBr. xiv. 

Ati-vyadhya, mfn. vulnerable. 

^?nT 3 " 3 T ati- >/vraj , to pass by; to fly over, 

RV. i, 116, 4; to pass or wander through. 

ati-Vsans, to recite bevond mea- 

\ v 

sure, to continue reciting ; to omit in reciting, AitBr. 

ati-sakkari or ati-sakvari , f. a 
class of metres of four lines, each containing fifteen 
syllables. It has eighteen varieties. 

ati-sakra, mfn. superior to Indra. 

^TfcT^ ati-Vsank, to suspect strongly, 

Lsty.; to suspect falsely ; to be concerned about. 

ati-saya, &c. See 1. ati-Vi. si. 
'sfiiW ati-sastra, mfn. superior to 


trfir^inK atisdkvara , mfn. written in or 

connected with the Ati-sakvari metre, 

ati-\ / si , cl. 3. A. - sisite , to sharpen 

up (a weapon) for attacking, RV. i, 36, 16. 

ati-- s/2, sish, to leave remaining: 

Pass, -sishyatc, to remain. 

Ati-sishta, mfn. remaining, TS. &c. 
Ati-se,sha, as, m. remainder, remnant (especially 
of time), ChUp. 

1 . ati-y/ 1 . si, -sete, to precede in 
lying down, MBh. ; to surpass, excel; to act as an 
incubus, annoy, L.; Pass, -sayyate, to be excelled 
or surpassed. 

Ati-saya, as, m. pre-eminence, eminence; supe¬ 
riority in quality or quantity or numbers; advan¬ 
tageous result; one of the superhuman qualities attri¬ 
buted to Jaina Arhats; (mfn.), pre-eminent, superior, 
abundant, SankhBr. &c. ; (am or end), ind. emi¬ 
nently, very. Atisayokti, f. hyperbolical language ; 
Extreme assertion ; verbosity. 

Ati-sayana, mf(/)n. eminent, abundant; (am), 
ind. excessively ; (i), f, N. of a metre of four lines, 
also called Citralekhd. 

Ati-sayita, mfn. surpassing, superior. 
Ati-sayin, mfn. excelling, abounding. 
Ati-sayana, am, n. excelling ; excessiveness. 
Ati-sayin, mfn. excelling, abounding; excessive. 

2. ati-y/ 3. si, to fall or drop beyond, 

Kath.; to get out from (acc.), leave, ChUp. 

ati-sitam, ind. past or beyond 

the cold, after the winter. 

ati-silaya , Nom. P. °yati, to 

practise or use excessively. 

'sfrrqjH ati-x/subh , to be brilliant; to 
please : Caus. -sob hay ati, to make brilliant, adorn. 

ati-sreshtha, mfn. superior to the 

best, best of all. —tva, n. pre-eminence. 

Ati-sreyasi, is, m. a man superior to the most 
excellent woman. 

ati- y/slish, to fasten or tie over. 
^fcTOT ati-sva, mf(f)n. superior to, or worse 


ati-shakta . 

atyanta-vasin * 

than, a dog, Pan. v, 4, 96 ; (<d), m., N. of a tribe (?), 
(gana fahshdJi. q. v.) 

dti-shakta or (in later texts) ati- 
sakta, mfn. (*/sanj), connected with, AV. Sec. 

^ fir faff dti-shita, mfn. tied or bound 
round (so as to prevent the How of any liquid), RV. 
X; 73 > 9- 

ati-shkand (Vskand), to cover 

(said of a bull), RV. v, 52, 34 to leap or jump over, 
Ved. Inf. (dat.) ali-shkddc, RV. viii, 67, 19 ; Ved. 
Inf. (abl.) -shkddas, RV. x, 108, 2 ; to omit, dn-ati- 
skandat, mfn. not omitting anything,uniform, TBr. 

Ati-shkadvan, mf(a/7)n. jumping over, trans¬ 

ati-shtigham (Vstigh), ind. so 

as to overwhelm, MailrS. 

*fir§ ati-shtu (Vstu), to go on too far in 
reciting hymns of praise, TBr.; Laty. 

wfaS (I d - tishthat, mfn. not standing, un¬ 
stable, RV. 

. a t i-sh t h d ( Vsth a ), to be at the hea d 

of, govern, RV.; AV.; to jut over or out, TBr 
2. Ati-shtha, f. precedence, superiority, Sttr.&c.; 
(or), m. f. or aii-shthavan, m. or at isht ha-vat 
[AV.], mfn. superior in standing, surpassing. 

ff?fff*hrr ati-sam-Vdhd, to overreach, de- 

ceive, Silk. ; t<» wrong or injure, VarBrS. 

Ati-eandham, ind. so as to violate an agreement 
or any fixed order, SBr. 

Ati-sam-dhana, am, n. overreaching, cheating. 
Ati-sandRita, mfn. overreached, cheated. 
Ati-sam-dheya, mfn. easy to be conciliated, 
easy to be settled. 

ati-sarva, mfn. superior to all, 
P 5 n. Sch.; (as), m. the Supreme. 

SSfffffiffrffT ati'Samvatsara , mfn. extend¬ 
ing over more than a year, Mn. 

’StfiraPHU ati-sdrnyu , f. the sweet juice of 
the Bengal Madder, Rubia Manjlth. 

ati-Vsri, Caus. to cause to pass 

through : Pass, -sdryatc; to be purged, Suir. 
Ati-sara, as, m. effort, exertion, AV. 
Ati-saraor ati-sara,aj, m. purging, dysentery. 

Ati-sarakin or ati-sarakin or ati-sarin or, mfn. afflicted with purging or dysentery. 

ati- Vsrij, to glide over or along, 

RV. ; to send away, dismiss, abandon ; to leave as 
a remnant; to remit, forgive; to give away, present.; 
to create in a higher degree, SBr. xiv. 

Ati-sarga, as, m. act of parting with, dismissal, 
giving away; granting permission, leave; atisargdm 
Vi . da, to bid anyone farewell, MaitrS. 

Ati-sarjana, am, n. the act of giving away, 
granting ; liberality; a gift; sending out of the 
world, killing. 

Ati-srijya, mfn. to be dismissed, SBr. 
Ati-srisRti, is, f. a higher creation, SBr. xiv. 

ati-Vsrip, to glide or creep over, 
get over, RV. Sec. 

ati-sena, as, m., N. of a prince. 

ati-Vsev, to use or enjoy immode¬ 
rately, to practise excessively; cf. ati-sevd s.v. ati. 

^frrafajrf ati-sauparna, mfn. superior to 
(the powers of) Suparna or Garuda. 

ati~stri , mf(is or i)n. surpassing 
a woman, L.; see Gram. 123. b. 

ati-Vsrans , to drop or turn away 
from, to escape, RV. vi. II, 6. 

’Srfwsr ati-Vsru, to flow over or flow ex¬ 

Atl-sr£vita, mfn. caused to flow excessively 
(as a wound), Susr. 

Ati-sruta, mfn. that which has been flowing 
over (N. of Soma), VS. 

ati-Vsvri, to hold or sustain a note, 

PBr.; ChUp. 

Ati-s vary a, mfn. the last of the seven notes, 

WrTffrf ati-Vhan, Desid. -jighdiisati (for 

-jighdsati fr. V2. ha ?), to try to escape, AitBr. 

Ati-Rata, mfn. firmly fixed, SBr. ; utterly de¬ 
stroyed, Car. 


^TTrfF^T Mati-hastaya, Nom.(fr .ati-hasta), 

P. atihastayati, to stretch out the hands; (fr. ati- 
hast in), to overtake on an elephant. 

ati-V2. ha, to jump over, RV. &c\; 

to pass jumping from one place to another. 

ati-himam, ind. after the frost; 

past the cald. 

ati-Vhri, to hold over; to reach 

over ; to cause to jut over ; to add. 

^TfrT^F ati-Vhve (1. sg. A. ,-hvaye), to call 

over to one’s side, TBr. 

’Hfft ati (vi), el. 2. P. aty-eti, - etum, to 

pass by, elapse, pass over, overflow ; to pass on ; to 
get over ; (Ved. Inf. dty-ctavai), to pass through, 
RV. v, S3, 10; to defer ; to enter; to overcome, 
overtake, outdo; to pass by, neglect; to overstep, 
violate ; to be redundant; to die : Intens. aiiyatc, 
to overcome, 

Atita, mfn. gone by, past, passed away, dead ; 
one who has gone through or got over or beyond, 
one who has passed by or neglected ; negligent; 
passed, left behind ; excessive; (as), m., N. of a 
particular Saiva sect; (am), 11. the past. — kala, 
m. the past time or tense. — nauka, mfn. passed 
out of a ship, landed. 

Atitvari, f. a female transgressor, bad woman, VS. 

Aty-aya, aty-aya, see s. v. 

d-tikshm, mfn. not sharp, blunt; 

not severe or rigid. 

atiadriya, mfn. beyond the (cog¬ 
nizance of the) senses; (as), m. (in Sankhya phil.) 
the soul; (am), n., N. of PradhSna; the mind. 

ati-rekd. See ati-Vric . 

?j?rfa atica , ind. exceedingly, very; ex¬ 
cessively, too; quite ; surpassing (with acc.): Corn- 
par. ativa-taram, ind. exceedingly, excessively, Sis. 
iv. 25. 

- tivra, mfn. not sharp, blunt; not 


^jftVatish ( v'ish), to pass by (acc.).MaitrS. 

ati-sdra. See aii-\/sri. 

* 31 ? a-tuhya, mfn. not tall,short, dwarfish. 
* 3 ^ a-tunda, mfn. not stout, thin. 

* 3 ^ d-tura, mfn. not liberal, not rich, AV. 
* 3 ^ a-tula , mfn. unequalled ; (as), m. 

(destitute of weight), the Sesamum seed and plant. 
A-tulya, mfn. unequalled. 

* 3 ^« - tusha , mfn. without husks, SBr. 

a-tushara-kara , as, m, 4 having 

not coH rays,’ the sun. 

'Hjfy a-tushti, is, f. displeasure,discontent. 

a-tuhina, not cold. — dhoman or 

-rasmi or -ruci, m. ‘having not cold light,' the 
sun, VarBrS. 

^TffHfff d-tutuji, mfn. not quick, slow, 

RV. vii, 28, 3. 

d-turta [RV. viii, 99, 7] or a-turta 

[RV.], mfn. not outrun, not outdone, not obstructed, 
unhurt; (a-tiirtam), n. illimited space, RV. x, 149, 
1. — daksha, m. ‘having designs that cannot be 
obstructed,’ N. of the Asvins, RV. viii, 26, 1. — pa- 
thin (. dtiirta -), m(nom. -panthas)in. having a 
path that cannot be obstructed, RV. 

d-trindda , as, m. * not an eater of 

grass,’ a newly-born calf, SBr. xiv. 

A-trinya, f. a small quantity or short supply of 
grass, Pan. vi, 2, 156, Sch. 

SHfric? d- tridila, mfn. ‘ having no inter¬ 

stices/ solid, RV. x, 94,11. 

-tripd, mfn.not satisfied, RV, iv,5, t 4. 

Atripnuvat, mfn. insatiable, RV. iv, 19, 3. 
A-tripta, mfn. unsatisfied, insatiable, eager. 
— dria, mfn. looking with eagerness. 

A-tripti, is, f. unsatisfied condition, insatiability, 

^Hijfaff d-triskit a, mfn. not thirsty, not 

greedy, RV. x, 94, n. 

A'-trishnaj , mfn. not thirsty, RV. x, 94, 11. 
A-txisRya, mfn. beyond the reach of thirst, AV. 
A-trisRyat, mfn. not thirsting after, not greedy, 
not eager, RV. i, 71, 3. 

a-tejas, as, n. absence of bright¬ 
ness or vigour ; dimness, shade, shadow ; feebleness, 
dulness, insignificance; (a-tejds), mfn. [AV.] or 
a-tejdska [SBr. xiv] or a-ttjasvin, mfn. not bright, 
dim, not vigorous. A-tejo-maya, mfn. not con¬ 
sisting of light or brightness, SBr. xiv. 

a-toshaniya, mfn. not to be 

pleased or appeased. 

dtka, as, (Vat), m. a traveller, L.; a 
limb or member, L. ; armour, mail, garment, RV.; 
N. of an Asura, RV. 

atkila, as, m., N. of an ancient 

Rishi (uiktla, q.v.), AsvSr. 

^raf ?5 attali , is, m., N. of a man. 

attavya, mfn. (Vad), fit or proper 

to be eaten, M11. 

A'tti, is, m. an eater, SBr. xiv. 

Attri, td . m. an eater, AV. Sec.; f. attri, TS. 

atta , f. (probably a colloquialism 

borrowed from the Deccan, said to occur chiefly in 
dramas), a mother, L.; mother’s sister, L.; elder sister, 
L.; (in Prakrit) a mother-in-law, L. See ah ha. 
Atti, is, or attika, f. elder sister, L. 

attra. See 3. & 4. alra, p.17, col. 2. 
attri. See dtri, p. 17, col. 2. 
atna, as, or atnu, us, m. (Vat), the 

sun, L. 

Atya (2, 3), as, m. a courser, steed, RV. 

dty-anhas, mfn. beyond the reach 

of evil or distress, VS. 

Aty-anRa, as, in., N. of a man, TBr. 

aty-agni , is, m. too rapid digestion; 

(mfn.), surpassing fire. — somarka, mfn. brighter 
than fire or the moon or the sun. 

aty-agnishtoma , as, in., N. of 

the second of the seven modifications of the Jyo- 
tishtoma sacrifice; the Vedic verse chanted at the 
close of that ceremony. 

aty-agra, mfn. whose point is jutting 

over, TS. 

aty-ahkusa, mfn. past or beyond 

the (elephant-driver’s) hook, unmanageable. 

aty-angula, mfn. exceeding an 

angula (finger’s breadth). 

VTrd f n "3^^ aty-ati - Vkram , to approach for 

sexual intercourse, MBh. 

aty-ati-Vric, Pass, -r icy ate, to 

surpass exceedingly. 

aty-anila, mfn. surpassing the 


aty-anu-Vsri, Caus. - sdrayati, to 

pursue excessively, MBh. 

^?r?fTa/y-a«^a,mfn.beyond the proper end 

or limit; excessive, very great, very strong ; endless, 
unbroken, perpetual; absolute, perfect; (am), ind. 
excessively, exceedingly; in perpetuity ; absolutely, 
completely; to the end ; (aya), dat. ind. for ever, 
perpetually, Pat.; quite, Pat. — kopana, mfn. very 
passionate. — gu, mfn. going very much or very fast, 
Pan. iii, 2, 48. — gata, mfn. completely pertinent; 
always applicable, Nir.; gone forever, Ragh. — gfati, 
f. complete accomplishment; (in Gr.) the sense of 
‘ completely.’ — gamin, mfn. = -ga above. — gu- 
nin, mfn. having extraordinary qualities, -tiras- 
krita-vacya-dhvani, f. (in rhetoric) a meta¬ 
phoric or hyperbolical use of depreciatory language. 
— pidana, n. act of giving excessive pain, —vasin, 
m. a student who perpetually resides with his teacher. 


trtn atyanto-smnyago. 

[f a-dakViVia* 

-samyogfa, m, (in Gr.) immediate proximity. ^TTSTH aty-ala , as, in. Plumbago Rosea, j a-lvard.* t freedom from tete. 

— samparka, m. excessive sexual intercourse. .. . J .... „ 

- suiumara, mfn. very tender; (&*•), m. a kind aty-a$t (irnuu i, in. superior to j x-. at to ft (or V OGu aiJio,}, .out. ^prooabiV If. 

of grain, Panicum Italicum. Atyant&fckava, in, f - e (four) Asraraas,' an asceu: of the highest degree. ; pronom. Pas.' a ), an auspicious and inceptive parn-oie 

absolute non-existence. j aty-a- Jsad, Caus. inti. it...*«<><:. 1 ' "' A nC ". ! ‘ x F vesw '* }'•) Eu?ii*>, now; then, n-o'-e- 

Aty-antika, mfn. too close ; (am), n. too great I r , ,, n t n r k, !T >. " * I ° Vtr . r -i;c , .;e<amiv ; but; else: what ? how 

nearness SBr j « . ’' ~ .« ♦ - . e-<e ? vc. ** ind. now else i wnat else / ecr- 

’ . _ Aty-a-sanna, mm. oeing too c;ose ; , ■ , „ . ... 

Atyantma, mtn. going far. Pan. v, 2, 11. ° { ^mly, assuredly, sure enough. « kmvn , mo. In yv 

•sxr-rr^rTTrr * ». • •. c ( ' t aiy-a- x'sn, to run near, K&il% I much more: so much the mere — ea. ind. utoreovw, 

c * • ’ v Aty-a~san.n, mtv; hewing near vir.lcnov, * e *. floe -mewuc. — *n, mn, but, on toe contiarv. «*•*&, 

mg approached too much, having come *oo close, | \ „ , . '1 v j ind. Iwhcn ^peaKd) either o, - or -athcr; ,«■ 

MBh i a8c4 ofy-ukinot-uxtha .1.. IN. vfaoiass ot ' , » i '/ / 

11D * *» d° 54 - i •», - , , ' perhaps; wnat ' is it not so ? &c, — v&pi, md. or, 

^TRPI aty-aya, as, m. (fr. Vi with oft, see j h,t ' !es \ <H t0dl two s>«ui.ies), j rather. Athataf*, ind. now. Atlxasant-^rajss., 
ait), passing, lapse, passage; passing away, perishing. | aty-V‘2 . (perl- X Sg -WvaHhV | now. At hay i, ind. so much the more ; 

death; danger, risk, evil, suffering; transgression, j tha) to surpass, RA ? . \ ov«n ; thereu-re ; miss. 

gmlt, vice ; getting at, attacking, Yajh. u, 12 ; over^ | aiy-^Vhr am, to surpass, excel. ! ^ f md.( -atk* above), now; like wise ; next; 

coming, mastering (mentally); a class, Chi;p, I y N 1 i ^nereiore. md. — aina-va, Wlw 203 * 

Atyayika. Set atyayika. | aty-ud-ihi (* 3 ). to snq.^s, { es^fT C it. or athnri t. , S8 id to b*- fr. 

Atyayin, mfn. passing, PSn. hi, 2, IJ ? . | SBr. xiv. ! -/ai. M ? c. or ■>. an V-M 1 . [f? 17 .u.; 

^WTTflT afy-arati, is, ra., N. of a son of j aty-upadha, nda. supeiio 1 * to gr«y I ' ; the j:oint of an r<rrow or of «*> lanc^.’NBD ; ‘imfy-rd 

Jauantapa, AitBr. j test, tried, trustworthy. I.„ j Raigh.i. R V, jv, 6. 8. 

. - <, , x , x a ^ ti fw a- , • . • i i, Atlxarya [ and [PAb v«i. 1. 1‘|. 

aty-artha, mfn. beyond the proper aty-upa-y uaj* to coutnvue o.n-er- rnfh. fiickehng, lambent. * 

worth,’ exorbitant, excessive; {am), ind. excessively, h“g sacrifices, SBr, 2 Atharya, Nom. ?. afkaryati, to move, tremu- 

exceedingly. ^ 5 ? aty-Viih. See aty~ Vi * c/f. ! flicker, Nrbgh, 

'swf aty-vard, to press hard, distress ^n^ety-5»«*«,ind. a particle ol abuse ! dtharvan, a, in. (sMd to be fr. an 

greaily, Bhatt. (used'in comp with y'l. as, hhu, t. kri: g«w i obsolete word aMiw, foe), * prirst who has to do 

«wt aty- y/arh (Subj. -urhat), to excel in ury-a<H, q.v.) ' ' | with tire and Soma; N. of the priest who is said to 

^ r .. * " -C y i !’uv/e been Use tirst to )nsiunte the worship of nre 

worth, R .n, 23, 15. ^ j n oty-urmi, rnnh oversowing, boo* i and c-ier Soma and prayers (he is represented as a 

aty-ava~ */srij, to let loose* let go. hlmg over, R V. »x, J 7 , -p ! Iffaiipnti. v- Brahma’s eidesi. son, as the first Warner 

/, . • ■ •so-aTvr r , r ■*> r c,,,'>*. ! sed earlier, teacher uf the Brshma-vidyS, a:; the 

^n«rm «, in. passing over or ^i.«A,totA ; Ae> aeross. Spelt | , Ath „ va . ve( j» , s idr/tsii with 

through the strainer (consisting of sheep’s woo! or a aty-uh m some forms, poss b- belonging to \•* vai Ahgiras as the father of A «nii V vc. '> • H. of Siva 

sheep’s tail; said of the Soma), RV. ^ ^*§2. aty- V2.vh r ohaie,io contflTnn.RV. VasWha [Kir. x,io], ^ma>rSn a ; '(^^‘ya. n. the 

V 2 .fli,to precede in eating, SBv.j viii, 69/14. j fourth or Atharva-veda t>;aid to have been composed 

MBh.; to eat too much, Bhag. Aty-uha, as. m, excessive deliberation : a galli- ! ‘'• 1 .^ t : uirvaii -* ant * consisting ctutny cu lomiulas and 

atv-askti is f a metre (of fouri»nes nule « a Peacock, Car,; (a ), f. the plant Jasmitium j >p , d ! J ^counteract diseases and calanntn-s;; 

^ fM! KGft/ iM.a iotr, Vil Nv-tamhes Triads I \Mtharvanas), pi. m. aesceimantsat Atharvan, otter. 

each containing seventeen syllables); the number ‘ “ J coupled with those of Ahgiras and .Bhrign ; the 

seventeen. — samagri, f., N. of a work. cfy-v't to convey across (towards j hvmns of the Atharva-veda. 

I.a/y-\/l. as(Trnper. -astu )to excel, » ?! obiect), admit to, AitBr, j 1. Ataarva (in comp, for atharvan ). -fehiHa, 

surpass, RV.vii, 1, 14; AV. ' w/i (Subj. 2. ag. ^-tol to f ’ f 11 ' P;. ‘ who have become Atharvans/ N. of the 

/ n . , J ' twelve Maharsms. — vat, mo. like Atharvan or his 

^ ^ 2 * Qty*-v 2, «$, to snoot beyond, gnde over, A\. ix, 5, 9. descendants, RV. m. one versed in the 

overwhelm, overpower (as with arrows). T d-trv (or Ved. d-tra), ind. (fr pro- (a quaiiheation essential to the special 

Aty-asta, mfn. one who has shot or cast beyond, nominill base a . often 7 sed 

in sense of l<>c. case as- | 

fif. a. 1, 24, min), in this matter, in this respect; in this place. ! ' ;r ' ' 0l;r ^ i ^ °' :1a '.see above . «, pikha, N. of a.ti 

Aty-Ksam, ind. ifc. after the lapse of (e. g. dyya- here; at this time; the re; then. _ dagbna, n.hfl'm. i VpantfhaJ. ~ straa, n. id.; N. of a kind of brick, 

r.styasam, after the lapse of two days), P 5 n. m, 4, relch i„ g s0 far tip. having this (or that) stature, SBr. i N of Mahipurosha. -hriflaya, 

^ 7 . Sen. i^‘u«—4. u:. u~ _ _ u_-a,- 1’. AtliBrTaBsrir&8« rn, a mem- 

! VH'i e.v.j^ express^i uow; 

. ./ > 

j ov t r ; rub-.o , •reUu.dv ; hut; else : what 1 bow 
| eke? 'Vc. -"*kiTU, ind. how else'? what elseV cer- 

| tainlv, assuredly, sure enough. ^ kmvt?» ind. hc.w 

* - > •* 

f much more ; so much the mere •«* ca. :u-'. moreover, 
| m-o -ikewhe. a*. ind. Kit, on the contrary. 

’ T J' ..’.'a > X • /.> 


V •-! : 



i ? f' »> 

j * /v 

oty-u~ x sn, to run near, Kao^, 
Aty~sUsarf.n, mfn flowing near viokmH. TS 

- 4 - v r« -tr - r tv • : when repeated; either or: or rather : or 
v* aty-uk: >r or 'Uatka. 1., >., ‘A ac'i&isS ot i , „ 0 ‘ ( M . , 

r .- - . . ' ,, . . perhaps ; wnatis it not so ? &c, —Tapi, :nd. or* 

metres ,of,om Lues, each containing two syllabiej). i Athatan, ind. now. AthtewHwirSM, 

aty-V 2. uksh{\)ftvi. 2. sg »c a v ah ski- 

the) to surpass, R*’. 

aty -ut-vIrani, to surpass, excel 

^Huin aty-ud-dhd i V2 hd) . to s , *n?asf> 

• O * N 

§Br. xiv. 

S tod. u v, Atha-pi, ind, so much the niore , more- 

I OV<u ; there lore ; vhi(5. 

1 Atho.iud.f « ath<* aboveV now; likewise ; next ; 

* 2 * y f 

i theretore. in d.~aiha--va. Me. id, 202, 

j p 

i at hast* is, or atharl t f, (said to be t>. 

• 2'a;. to sc. or fr. an '-b'-oiehT Vaih ). ffame f;?ms.<.; 

r w- u 

C l -yc-i: .; 

: ‘ iinm-rd 

^r?t fl#y-\/flrA(Subj. •arhat), to excel 

Aty-Uha, at. m. Missive deliberation : a K al!i- i K v Atharvuu, and conastmg cmefly ot formulas and 
nule, a peacock; Car.; (a\ f. the plan; la-minu--i j sp«b ‘Blended h>counteractdiseuaesandcalaimnes); 

Viliosum Tristis. * ! ufianwias), pi, m. descendants q' Atharvan, often 

" »’ coupied with those or Ahgiras and Bhrigii ; the 

atu-x 1 i?\ to convex across (towards i ht pit'c r»f Ath'jrVQ-v^.dii 

vi afy-aftam, surpassing me; surpass- 

ing self-consciousness, NrisUp.; cf. Pan.vii, 2, 97, Sch. 

aty-ahna, mfn. exceeding a day in 

duration, Pan, v, 4, 88, Sch. 

’STFn^iK aty-a-kara, as, m. (\/i - kri), con¬ 
tempt, blame, P 5 n, v, I, 134. 

’GTRITII^ aty-a-x'kram (ind. p. - hvdmya) to 
walk past, TS,; SBr. 

^nqr^TT aty-dcara , as, m. performance of 

works of supererogation ; (mfn.), negligent of or 
departing from the established customs. 

v nj, to convey across i towarus | hymns of the Atharva-veda. 
an object), admit to, AitBr, ! J. Atharva (in conip, for atharvan).*-' bh^ta» 

-drt-rt * 1/0 i* l \ x j rt.r, nt. p*. 4 who have beco»ne Atharvans/N. of the 

m atv-\ esh (bun . 2. sg. -eshas) to ' , *., * , . 

, n J ^ ' twelve Maharsms. -** vat, ma. like Atharvan or nis 

glide over, A\. ix, 5, 9. desctmdants, RV. ~vid, n\ one versed in the 

I. a-tra (or Ved. d-trd), ind, (fr, pro- Atharva-veda (a qualification essential to the special 
nominal base a; often used in sense of loc. case <?.f- (illSs . Ci called Branmans.)^ — veda, m.. N, ot 

min), in this matter, in this respect; in this place, j * 0l,r *^ ^ e< ^ a l see R?)0 '’ e b iHkhi., j., N. of an 
here; at this time; there; then. — daglvna, nif««)n. 1 ^pamshad. *- siras, n. id.; N, of a mnd of brick, 
reaching so far up, having this (.or that) stature, SBr. ^ hr ;’ (f ■ * ri ;> ^ MahSpurusha. — ferifiaya., 

— bhavat f mfn. his Honour, your Honour, Sec. N. ot a Kcnsrsuta. AtliBrT&nffir&fii, ra. a .mem- 
(used honorificaliy in dramatic language) Atr^iva, ! * J * T ‘be sacerdotal race ot class (.ailed j-iiaar- 
ind on this very spot | z\rhf;i?-.itas, m. pi, i. e. the descendants of Atharvan 

ind. on this very spot. 

Atratya, mfn. connected with this place, pro- ! aiUl dhstuav; the hvmns of the Atharva-veda. 
duced or found here L. : AtUarva.nglrRse,» mtn. connected with the sacer- 

’ . dotal class called Atharv&ngiras; (twi), n. the work 

2. a-tra* mfn. (v trai), (only for the j or office of the AtharvJlhgiras; (ffy), m. pi. the byrnns 
etym. of kshattra ), 'not enjoying or affording pro- of the Atharva-veda. 

tection,’ BrArUp. 2. Athaxva, as, m., N. of Brahma’s eldest son ( to 

WIT 3. atrd, as. m. (for at-tra, fr. v'ad). a whom he revealed the Brahma-vidyJ), MuinlUp, 

devourer, demon, RV. , AW; a Rakshasa. Atbarvana, as m„ N. ot Siva 

4. Atra, am. n. (for at-tra i, food, RV. x, 79. 2. AtHarvani, u, better Stharvarai, m. a Bran- 

Atri, is, m. (for at-tri, ft. Cad), a devourer, I 1,1 ,he ^va-veda. L.; a femny 

RV.ii, 8, ; N. of a great Rishi, author of a number u>t ’ . . . , , . , 

p _ . . of Vedic hvmns; (in astron.) one of the seven stars of j 

aty-aditya, mtn. surpassing the the Great Beat; \atraym), pi. m. the descendants ! 

c n 

m ^ i 1 # 

«i«n^ aty-d-s/dri, to take great care of, 

be anxious about. 

of Atri. — catur&ha, m. ‘the four days of Atri, | V 

N. of a sacrifice. — jata, m. ‘produced by Atrif the i - v r< ^. p ° J .‘ / 2t [ 'V 3,1 “ 
moon, —dricr-ia or -netra-ia or -netra-pta-* ‘ )0 ’ Cl ’ a ‘‘ iari - 

AtiiarvEna, am, n. the Atharva-veda or the riiual 
j ot it. MBh. —vid, m. one versed in that ritual, 
i Atharvi, f. [‘ female priest,,' Chun.; BR ] pierced 
! hv the point (of an arrow or of a lance), RY. i, % 12, 

be anxious about. moon. - dri^-ja or -netra-ja or -netrft-pt*- ; ‘ _* r> .. , .. 

. . . , sut-a or - netra-prabhava or -n«trn-«uta ; sarsr t . ad, cl.2.1. nth, aaa, atsyun, tu -stem, 

^fMVF\a.ty-a- V dham^dhamati, to Oi-eathe or, rn. ‘produced bv Atrfs !/•< -■./ tie ' A- to eat. consume, devout; Ved. I uf.Jtrtave, 

violently, Susr. moon; (in arithm.) the number one. «* bhSradt?&- ) Ji ■ fhos. add rati Sc : 'fc ( a day ah' [AcSr.j), 

VW TVT aty-a-Vdha, to place in a higher 1 ** 5 , f- marriage of descendants ot Atri with ‘hose ; t,> h- e d ;a Lith. SRv./«;/// for Gk. 

rank SBr of BharadvSja. —vat, ind, like Atri, RV, -Bfa> 1 |5 & -; Bar. ,.V?; Goth, rf ^ 7 , ;re«. ?/a; Germ, 

‘ Aty-S-aUSna, aw, n. act of imposing or placing **S or '• the c&d<: ! ‘C At , ri i «>vm ; Eng. A> cat: Atm. tofu, 

upon, Pin.; imposition, deception, L. Atria,*, m. a devourer, demon, RV.; a Rsicshasa, ; belong to the second class o! tOoU oiled ad, 

Aty-a-hlta,mfn. disagreeable, Mbh.&c.; (am), a-trapa. mfn. destitute of sliame. j if. dan, n, 4, /2, 

n. disagreeableness, Ssk. &c. (Prakrit accdhidd). a - . / r ., 3 j At-t&vya, atti, attri, 4- a«*xa &c. r see s, 1. 

0 / / 1 a-trapu or a-trapus, mtn. not turned, j 2. Ad, mfn., ifc.‘eating.’ as mahydd, eatmg nsh, 

vTimH aty-aya, as, m. (vt), the act ot j MaitrS.: Kiith.; KapS. Ada or adaka, mfn,, chiefly ifc,, eating, 

going beyond, transgression, excess, Pan. iii, I, j 4 i, j , r _ R , . , ,. Adat, mfiti. eating, RV. x, 4, 4, Sc. 

(am, 4), ind. going beyond. RV. viii, 101, 14. j a-tramu ^Ht., Kngh. x.v. 4 ,j or Adana, am, n. xct of eating ; food. RV. vi, 50, 3. 

wwnm atf-a-Cyat, A. to make extra- T™, . . . . I Adwiy, tnfo. to be eiten, what **y be eaten. 

A % „ . WT^ITIIT a-in-iata* mfn. not born thrice I Adman, adya, advaxu see s> v. 

c.amarv efforts for (loc.), Das, i ,, . 

. , Dr (hut twice 1, a man oeiongmg to one ot tne nm tmec a-daksha, mfn. not dexterous, 

^n^niT aty-a-s/ya, to pass by, Rv, I classes; [for sec under ain. \ i -tc i ' i a 

J J 1 ^ I ' 7 skilful, awkward. 

atydyu, n., N* of a ssuxrificia! vessel, Wi*Hp a 4 vdkka [TS.] or [SBr.]. A-dakshind., mfn. not dexterous, not handy; 

PBt mm, skUihis?. 1 not light, left, i«.‘experienced, simpk rmnded ; not 

upon, P2n.; imposition, deception, L. 

Aty-S-hita,mfn. disagreeable, Mbh,&c.; (rt«), 
n. disagreeableness, S 3 k. &c, (Prakrit accdhidd ). 

oArapa. mfn. destitute of shame.- | tt. dan, n. 4, 72, 

r ’ j Att&vya, atti, attr i f 4. &c. F see s. v, 

or a-irapus , in In. not tinned, j 2, Ad, mfn., ifc. * eating/ as matsy&d, eating fish, 

laitrS,; Hath.; KapS. Ada. or eida&a, mfn,, chiefly itc«, eating. 

W* d-trasnn [SBr.; Ragb. xiv. 47] or rafn - ea, , in f’ ^ . 

' f , L - 9 b Adana, am, n. act of eatmg ; food, hv. vj, 59> V 

-trasa, mtn. ^aness, ^ J Adaalya, mfn, to be eaten, what may be eaten, 

a-tri- idta, mfn. not born thrice' ! Adman, adya, fedm, see s.v. 

>ut twice), a man belonging to one ot the first tluec j a .daksha f mfn. not dexterooH, un¬ 
asses; [for atri -iata. sec under <zr>>..] , . tJ -, » , 

' l - •• 7 J skilful, awkward. 

ymW a4vdk ha [TS.1 or a-ivdc [SBr.]. A-daksfcing., mfn. not dexterous, not handy; 

! ni»s» 

? r. 5 *-- / w r “ • 

1 not tight, left, mexDenenced, simple ■■ minded j aot 


'ST? fpW adakshina-tva. 

a-daiva . 

r '•t b--r:Dg in a dakshinS or present to the 
z ?.'• . x. f j i. 10, Sec, — tva, n. awkwardness; 

b:.:: if ini’ in a dakshinS. 

• • ^ • 

Adakshiruyamifn, not entitled to a dakshinS,SBr. 
A dak shiny a, mfn. not fit to be used as a da- 

kshir.a, T 5 . 

a-dagdha, mfn. not burnt. 

a-danda , mfn. exempt from punish¬ 
ment ; {am), n. impunity. 

A-dandamya, mfn. = a-dandyd. 

A-dandya, rnfn. not deserving punishment, PBr.; 
Mn. See.: exempt from it, SBr.; Mn.viii,335. 

2 .a-ddi [ RV. ] or adatka [ ChU p.] , m fn. 
toothless. (For i.addt, see above.) 

d-datta, mfn. not given ; given un¬ 
justly; not given in marriage; one who has given 
nothing, AV,; {a), f. an unmarried girl; {am ), n. a 
donation which is null and void, Comm, on Yijh. 
A~dattv£, ind.not having given, AV. xii,4,19,&c. 
A-datraylk, ind. not through a present, RV. v, 

49 > 3 - 

adadry-anc, ah, 1 ct, ak (fr. adas -}- 

a He), inclining or going to that, L. 

ddana , adaniya . See Vad. 

i. a-danta, mfn. toothless; (as), m. 

a leech, L. 

A-dautaka [TS.] or a-d&ntaka [SBr.], mfn. 


A-dantya, mfn. not suitable for the teeth; not 
dental; {am), n. toothlessness. 

rf^fT 2. ad-anta , mfn. (in Gr.) ending in 

at, i. e. in the short inherent vowel a. 

’STcfaj a-dabdha , mfn. (Vdambh or dabh), 

not deceived or tampered with, unimpaired, un¬ 
broken, pure, RV. — dhlti ( adabdha -), mfn. whose 
works are unimpaired, RV. vi, 51, 3. — vrata- 
pramati {ddabdha-), mfn. of unbroken observances 
and superior mind (or ‘of superior mind from having 
unbroken observances’), RV. ii, 9,1. Adabdh&yu, 
m. having unimpaired vigour (or ‘ leaving uninjured 
the man who sacrifices ’), VS. Adabdhasu, mfn. 
having a pure life, AV. v, I, I. 

A-dabha, mfn. not injuring, benevolent, RV. v, 

86, 3. 

A'-dabhra, mfn. not scanty, plentiful, RV. viii, 
47, 6 ; strong. 

A-dambtia, mfn. free from deceit, straightfor¬ 
ward ; {as), m., N. of Siva ; absence of deceit; 

A-dambhi-tva, am, n. sincerity. 

adamudry-anc , ah , lei, ak , going 

to that, L. 

Adamuy-anc or adanmy-anc, id., L. 
a-damya , mfn. untamable. 

a-dayd , mfn. (\/day), merciless, un¬ 
kind, RV. x, 103, 7; ( am ), ind. ardently. 

A-day&lu, mfn. unkind. 

a-dara , mfn. not little, much. 

Adaraka, as, m,, N. of a man, 

^Ts . a~darsa(ior d-darsa),as,m. a mirror. 

writ*. a-darsa, as, m. day of new moon. 

A-darsana, am, n. non-vision, not seeing; dis¬ 
regard, neglect; non-appearance, latent condition, 
disappearance ; (mfn,), invisible, latent. « pat ha, 
n. a path beyond the reach of vision. 

A-darsaiuya, mfn. invisible ; {am), n. invisible 

’SHfeS a~dala , mfn. leafless; (as), ra. the 
plant Eugenia (or Barringtonia) Acutangula; (a), 
f. Socotorine Aloe (Perfoliata or Indica). 

a-dasan, a, not ten, SBr. A-dasa- 
m&sya. rnfn. not ten months old, SBr. 

adds , nom. m. f. asau (voc. dsau , 
MaitrS.), n, adds, (opposed to iddm, q.v,), that; 
a certain; {adas), ind. thus, so; there. Adah- 
kritya, having done that, Ado-bhavati, he be¬ 
comes that. Ado-m&ya, mfn. made of that, con¬ 
taining that, SBr. xiv. A&o-mula, mfn. rooted in 

Adaylya, mf (if) n. belonging to that or those, 

Adasya, Nom. P. adasyati, to become that. 

a-dakshinya, am, n. incivility. 

^TlJ a-ddtri , mfn. not giving; not liberal, 

miserly ; not giving (a daughter) in marriage ; not 
paying, not liable to payment. 

^T?T»T d-dana , am, n. ( x / l. da), not giving, 
act of withholding, AV, &c.; (mfn.), not giving. 
A-danya, mfn. not giving, miserly. AV. 
A-d&man, mfn. not liberal, miserly, RV. 
A-dayin, mfn. not giving, Nir. 

A-dasu [RV. i, 174, 6] or a-dasuri [RV. viii, 
45,15] or a-dasvas [RV.; Compar. ddasushtara, 
RV. viii, 81, 7], mfn. not worshipping the deities, 

I. A'-diti, is, f. having nothing to give, desti¬ 
tution, RV.; for 2. aditi, 3. d-diti, see below. 

a-ddnta, mfn. unsubdued. 

d-dabhya (3, 4), mfn. free from 
deceit, trusty ; not to be trifled with, RV.; {as), m., 
N. of a libation ( graha ) in the Jyotishtoma sacrifice. 

a-ddyadd , mf(I, in later texts a) n. 
not entitled to be an heir; destitute of heirs. 
A-dayika, mfn. unclaimed from want of persons 
| entitled to inherit; not relating to inheritance. 

a - ddra , as, m. having no wife. 

^r^TT^d-ddra-srit, mfn. not falling into 

a crack or rent, AV.; N. of a Saman, PBr. 

-dasa, as, m/not a slave, ’a free man. 

d - dahuka , mfn. not consuming by 

fire, MaitrS. 

A-d&hya, mfn. incombustible. 

a-dikka, mfn. having no share in 

the horizon, banished from beneath the sky, SBr. 

■*rf?f?r 2. aditi , is, m. (v'ad), devourer, 

i. e. death, BrArUp. 

.d-diti, mfn. {V 4. da or do, dyati; 
for 1. d-diti , see above), not tied, free, RV. vii, 52, 

I; boundless; unbroken, entire, unimpaired, happy, 
RV.; VS.; {is), f. freedom, security, safety-; bound¬ 
lessness, immensity; inexhaustible abundance; unim¬ 
paired condition, perfection ; creative power; N. of 
one of the most ancient of the Indian goddesses (‘In¬ 
finity’ or the ‘Eternal and Infinite Expanse,’ often 
mentioned in RV., daughter of Daksha and wife of 
Kasyapa, mother of the Adityas and of the gods); a 
cow, milk, RV.; the earth, Naigh.; speech, Naigh. 
(cf. RV. viii, 101, 15); {t), f. du. heaven and earth, 
Naigh. — Ja, m. a son of Aditi, an Aditya, a divine 
being, —tva, n. the condition of Aditi, or of free¬ 
dom, unbrokenness, RV. vii, 51, 1; the state of the 
goddess Aditi, BrArUp. — nandana, m. = -ja, q.v. 

wfVrWfl a-ditsat [RV. vi, 53, 3, &c.] or a- 

ditsu, mfn. (Desid. fr. 1. da), not inclined to give. 

adi-prabhrit i—ad-ddi . SeeyW* 

d-dikshita, mfn. one who has not 
performed the initiatory ceremony {diksha) con¬ 
nected with the Soma sacrifice ; one who is not 
concerned in that ceremony; one who has not re¬ 
ceived BrShmanical consecration. 

d-dina, mfn. not depressed ; noble- 
minded ; {as), m.,N. of a prince (also called Ahina). 
— sat tva, mfn. possessing unimpaired goodness. 
Adin&tman, mfn. undepressed in spirit. 

a-dipita, mfn. unilluminated. 

d-dirgha, mfn. not long. — sfxtra, 

mfn. not tedious, prompt, L. 

a-duhkha, mfn. free from evil or 

trouble, propitious. — navami, f. the propitious ninth 
day in the-first fortnight of Bh&drapada (when women 
worship Devi to avert evil for the ensuing year). 

a-dugdha, mfn. not milked out, 

RV. vii, 32, 22 ; not sucked out, Su$r. 

^ . a-ducchuna, mfn. free from evil, 

propitious, RV. ix, 6i, 17. 

-durga , mfn. not difficult of access; I 

destitute of a strong hold or fort. —, m. an 
unlortified country. 

d-durmakha, mfn. not reluctant, 

unremitting, cheerful, RV. viii, 75, 14. 

if d-dur manga la, mf(noin.^)n. not 

inauspicious, RV. x, 85, 43. 

a-durvritta , mfn. not of a bad cha- 



vj i 

racter or disposition. 

a-dusk-krit, mfn. not doing evil, 

RV. ih, 33) 13. 

a-ditshta, mfn. not vitiated, not bad, 
not guilty, Mn. viii, 388 ; innocent, -tva, n. the 
being not vitiated ; innocence. 

a-du, rnfn. dilatory, without zeal, not 

worshipping, RV. vii, 4, 6. 

d-duna, mfn. (\2. du), uninjured. 

a-dura, mfn. not distant, near; {am), 

n. vicinity; (e), {at), {atas), ind. (with abl. or gen.) 
not far, near; soon. — bhava, mfn. situated at no 
great distance. 

WtffaH a-dushita, mfn. unvitiated; 11 n- 

C\ ' 7 

spotted, irreproachable. — dhl, mfn. possessing an 
uncorrupted mind. 

a-dridha, mfn. not firm; not decided. 
Wtjfcnta' - dripita, mfn. not infatuated, not 

vain, RV. 

A-drlpta, mfn. id., RV. — kratu {ddripta-), 
mfn. sober-minded, RV. 

Adripyat, mfn. not being infatuated,RV. i, 151,8. 

a-dris , mfn. (Vdris), blind, L. 

A-drisya, mfn. invisible, latent ; not fit to be 
seen; (cf. a-dresya.) — karaaa, n. act of rendering 
invisible ; N. of a part of a treatise on magic. 

A-drisyat, mfn. invisible, L. ; {att), f., N. of 
Vasishtha’s daughter-in-law. 

A-drishta or a-drishta [SBr.], mfn. unseen, 
unforeseen ; invisible; not experienced; unobserved, 
unknown; unsanefioned; (a.f), m., N. of a par¬ 
ticular venomous substance or of a species of vermin, 
AV.; (am), n. unforeseen danger or calamity; that 
which is beyond the reach of observation or con¬ 
sciousness (especially the merit or demerit attaching 
to a man’s conduct in one state of existence and the 
corresponding reward or punishment with which he 
is visited in another); destiny, fate : luck, bad luck. 

— karman, mfn. one who has not seen practice. 

— kfima, m. passionate attachment to an object 
that has never been seen. — ja, mfn. produced or 
resulting from fate. — nara or -purusha, m. a 
treaty concluded by the parties personally (in which 
no third mediator is seen). — par a-samar thy a, 
m. one who has not experienced the power of an 
enemy, —purva, mfn. never seen before. — phala, 
mfn. having consequences that are not yet visible ; 
{am), n. a result or consequence which is not yet 
visible of hidden in the future. — rupa, mfn. hav¬ 
ing an invisible shape, —vat, mfn. connected with 
or arising from destiny ; lucky or unlucky; fortu¬ 
nate. — ban, m. destroyer of venomous vermin, 
RV. i, 19 e, 8 & 9. Adrishtartba, mfn. having 
an object not evident to the senses (as a science), 
transcendental. Adrlsbtasrutapurvatva, n. the 
state of never having been seen or heard before. 

A-drishti, is, or a-d£ishtik&, f. a displeased 
or malicious look, an evil eye, L. 

a-deya , mfn. improper or unfit to be 

given; ( am ) or -d&na, n. an illegal gift. 

a-dec a, mfn. not divine, not of divine 
origin, not referring to any deity, RV.; godless, impious, 
RV.; {as), m. one who is not a god, SBr. xiv ; Mn. 

— matrika, mfn. ‘not having the gods or clouds as 
mothers, not suckled by any deity,’ not rained upon. 

A-d6vaka, mf(o)n. not referring to or intended 
for any deity, SBr. 

A-devat&, f. one who is not a deity, Nir. 

A-devatra, mfn. not devoted to the gods, RV. v, 

61, 6. 

A-devayat [RV. ii, 26, 1] or &devayn [RV.], 
mfn. indifferent to the gods, irreligious. 

A-daiva, mfn. not referring to or connected with 
the gods or with their action; not predetermined by 
them or by fate. 


a-devri-ghni . 


d-devri-ghrii, f. not killing her 

brother-in-law, AV. xiv, 2, 18. 


^si a-desa, as, m. a wrong place, an 
improper place. — kala, n. wrong place and time. 

— ja, mfn. produced in a wrong place. — stha, 
nun, out of place, in the wrong place ; one absent 
from his country, an absentee. 

A-desya, mfn. not on the spot, not present on the 
occasion referred to, Mn. viii, 53(v.l. a-dt’sa); not 
to be ordered or advised. 

a-doma-dd or a-doma-dhd , mfn. not 
occasioning inconvenience, AV. 

ado-may a, &c. See adds. 

’STcft? a~doha, as, m. (\ / duh), the season 


when milking is impracticable, KatySr. 

A-dogdhri, mfn. not milking ; not exacting ; 
not caring for, BhP. 

adya, as, m. (Vad), a sacrificial cake 
(Jmrodasa) made of rice, Un.; acanev?). AV.i, 27, 3. 

ad-dha , ind. (fr. ad or a, this), ed. 

in this way ; manifestly ; certainly, truly. — tarn a, 
mfn.quite manifest, AitAr.; (dni), ind.most certainly, 
SBr. — purusha,m., see an-addhdpurusha. — bo- 
dheya, as, m. pi. adherents of a particular Sakha or 

recension of the white Yajur-veda. 


Addkati, is, m. a sage, RV. x, 85, 16; AV. 

addhyri - loha-knrna , mfn. 
having ears quite red, VS.; cf. adhinidiid-hd>-na. 

ddbhuta [once adbhutd, RY.i, 120,4], 

mfn. (see l, supernatural, wonderful, marvel¬ 
lous; {as), m. the marvellous (in style); surprise; 
N. of the Indra of the ninth Manvantara ; (<?«), n. 
a marvel, a wonder, a prodigy. — karman, mfn. 
performing wonderful works; exhibiting wonderful 
workmanship. — kratu (adbhula-), mfn. possess¬ 
ing wonderful intelligence, RV. — gandha, mtn. 
having a wonderful stuell, -tama, 11 an extra¬ 
ordinary wonder. — tva, n. wonderfulncss, — dar- 
sana, mfn. having a wonderful aspect, -dharma, 
m. ‘a system or series of marvelsor prodigies,’N. of one 
of the nine atigas of the Buddhists, -brahmana, 
it, N of a portion of a Brahmana belonging to the 
Sama-veda. — bklma-karman, mfn. performing 
wonderful and fearful works, —rasa, m. the mar¬ 
vellous style (of poetry). -ramayana, m, N. of 
a work ascribed to Valmiki. — rupa, mfn having a 
wonderful shape. — santi, m. or f., N. of the sixty- 
seventh Parisishta of the Atharva-veda. — sam- 

S • • 

kasa, mfn. resembling a wonder, — sara, ni. ‘ won¬ 
derful resin’of the Khadira tree (Mimosa Catechu); 
N. of a book on the essence of prodigies. — svana, 
m.'having a wonderful voice,’ N. of Siva. Adbhu- 
talnas, mfn. one in whom no fault is visible, RV. 
Adbkutottarakanda, m, N. of a work, an ap¬ 
pendix to or imitation of the Ramayana. Adbku- 
topama, mfn. resembling a wonder. 

adman, a , n. ( Vad), eating, a meal, 
RV. i, 58, 2. 

Adma (in comp, for adman), —sad, in. seated 
(with others) at a meal, companion at table, RV. 

— sadya, n. commeusality. RV. viii, 43, 1 9. — sad- 
van, mfn. companion at a meal, RV. vi, 4, 4. 

Admani, is, 111. fire, U11. 

Admara, mfn. gluttonous, Pan. iii, 2, 160. 
l. Adya, mfn. fit or proper to be eaten ; {am), ifc. 

(cf. amitidya, havir-adya ), n. food. 

__ / 

2. a-dyd (Ved. adya), ind. (fr. pronom. 
base a, this, with dya for dyu, q.v., Lat. hc-dic), 
to-day; now-a~days; now. — dilia or -divasa, 
m. m the present day. — purvam, ind. before now. 

— prabkriti, ind. from and after to-day. — sva, 
mfn. comprising the present and the following day, 
PBr. — avlna, mfn. likely to happen to-day oi(s 7 >as) 
to-morrow, Pan. v, 2, 13; (a), f. a female near 
delivery, ib. — sutya, f. preparation and consecration 
of the Soma on the same day, SBr. &c. Adyapi, 
ind. even now, just now ; to this day ; down to 
the present time ; henceforth. Adyavadki, mfn. 
beginning or ending to-day ; from or till to-day. 
Adya-sva, n. the present and the following day, TS. 
Adyaiva, ind. this very day. 

Adyatana, nu 7 a. extending over or referring to 
:.ow-a-days, modern ; (as), m. the period 
ev. day. other from midnight to midnight, 

or from dawn to dark ; (i), f. (in Gi.) the aorist 
tense (from its relating what has occurred on the 
same day). — bhuta, m. the aorist. 

Adyatanlya, mfn. extending over or referring 
to to-day ; current now-a-davs. 

a-dyu, mfn. not burning or not sharp, 

RV. vii, 34, 1 2. 

A-dyut, mfn. destitute of brightness,, 39,3. 

a-dyutya (4), am, n. unlucky gam¬ 
bling, RV. i, 112, 24; (mfn.), not derived from 

L'-dvayavin [RV. j or 4 -dva.yn [RV. viii, 18, 
15], mfn. free from double-dealing or duplicity. 

d-dviir, f, not a door, SBr.; MBh. 

A'-dvara, am, n. a place without a door ; an en¬ 
trance which is not the proper door, SBr. xiv;, See. 

a-dvija, mfn. destitute of Brahmans, 

Mn. viii, 22. 

gambling, honestly obtained. 

a-draca, mfn. not liquid. 

J A 

n 1 ^ a-dvitrya, mfn. without a second, 
sole, unique ; matchless. 

a-dvishenyd (5), mfn. (y'dznsh). 
not malevolent, RV. 

, A-dvesha, mfn. not malevolent fnont. dm f. V), 
a dracya, am, n. a nothing, a worth- | RV Vlii( 6 S, ic & *, 45( 12. -rSgin, mfn. ir<w 

less thing ; (mtn,), having no possessions. from malevolence and passionate desire, 

ridri, is, m. (\ ad.V n.),a stone, a rock, Adveshis, ind. without malevolence, RV. 

a mountain; a stone for pounding Soma with, or grind- I Adveshin, mtn. free from malevolence, 
mg it on; a stone for a sling, a thunderbolt: a moun- I Adveshtri, to, m. not an enemy, a tnend. 

tain-'hnped may* of clouds ; a cloud i the mountains j d-dr ait a, mfn. destitute of duality, 

are the ciouds personified, and regarded as the t.uc- • having no duplicate, SBr. xiv, See .; peerless; sole, 
mies or Indra); a tree, L.; the sun, L.; N. ot a mea- j U :iique ; epithet of Vishnu ; (am), n. non-duality ; 
sure; the number seven ; N. ot a gtanuN >n <■; 1 i identity of Brahma or of the Paramatman or supreme 

— karnl, t. the plant ClitoriaTernatca Lm. — kila, , with the JivStman or human soul; identity of 
t. the earth, L. — krita-stkall, t., N .<4 an c.p'aras. ! an( j matter; the ultimate truth; title of an 
-ja, mfn. produced from or found among o.cks or | p pams h ad ; i„d, solely. - vHdin, i, m. one 

mountains; id), i. the plant Sain had ; N. ot 1 .irvati ; w ho asserts the doctrine of non-duality. A rival- 


ya, f. ‘ moimt.'iin-d.aiiirhter, ’ N. oi P.'irvati ; N. ot 
a metre (of four lines, each containing twentv -three 
syllables). — dtigdha :yb/n'-),niin. not pressed out or 

ddha or ddhd, ind.,Ved. (~atha; used 

extracted with stones, RV. - dvisfc, rn. the enemy j chiefly as an inceptive particle), now ; then, there¬ 
of mountains or clouds, i. e. Indra, L. -nandini, i fore; moreover, so much the more; and, partly, 
f., N. of Parvati. -pati, m. ' lord of mountains,* Adka— adha, as well as, partly partly. Adha- 
the Himalaya. - barhas (ddn ■). mfn. nut as priya, mfn. (you who are) now pleased (voc. du. 
a rock, RV. x, 63, 3; TBr. — biadhna (ddri-), | 'ya , RV. viii, 8, 4. 
mfn. rooted in or produced on a rock or mountain, 

RV. x, 108, 7; VS. —bhid, Tiifn. splitting moun¬ 
tains or clouds, RV. vi, 73, 1; (/}, in., N. ot indra, L. 

— bhu, mfn. mountain-born, found or living among 
mountains; (us), *’. the plant Saivinia Cucniiata. 

— matri adri- \ mfn. havinga rock or mountain tor 
a mother, RV. ix, 86, 3. — tnurdhan, m. the head 
or summit of a mountain. — raj or -raja, rn. 'king 
of mountains,’ the Himalaya, —vat .voc. vas), 111. 
armed with stones or thunderbolts. RV. — vahni, 

m. fire on or in a mountain or ro<_k. — sayya. ni. 

‘having the mountain fora couch.,’Siva, L. — srihga, 

n. a mountain-peak. — shuta (adri-), mfn. pre¬ 
pared with stones, RV. - samhata mtn. i 

expressed with stones, RV. ix, 98, 6. — santi, mfn. 
lingering on the mountains, RV. vi, 63, 5. —sara, 
m. *’ essence of stones,’ iron. — sara-maya, mfn. 
made of iron. Adrindra or adrisa, in. ‘ lord ot 
mountains,’ the Himalaya. 

Adrika, f., N. of an Apsaras. 

o.-druh (110m. a-dhruk ), mfn. free 

from malice or treachery, RV. 

A-druhana [RV.v,70, 2] or a-drubvan[SV.], 

mfn. id. 

A-drogrha, mfn. free from falsehood, true, RV.; 

(a-drogham), ind. without ialsehood, RV. viii, 60, 4. 

— vac (ddrogha-), mtn. tree trommahee or treachery 

in speech, RV.; AV. A'droghavita, mm. loving 

freedom front malice or treachery, AV. 

A-droka, m. freedom from malice or treachery. 

7 # 

— vritti f f. conduct free from malice <a rvenei.crv. 

A-drokin, mfn. free from malice or ; • eachery, 


l cdho/t, &c. See 


a-dhana , mfn. destitute of wealth. 

A-dhanya, mfn. not richly supplied with com 
or other produce ; not prosperous; unhappy. 

adharna , mfn. (see adhara), lowest, 

vilest, worst ; very low or vile or bad (often ifc., as 

in varddhama, the vilest or worst of men); (as), in. 

an unblushing paramour; (J), f. a low or bad mistress 

[cf. Lat. infunus\ — bhrita or -bhritaka, rn, a 

servant of the lowest class, a porter, -rna (ri) or 

-rxxika \ri). m. one reduced to inferiority bv debt, a 
# > • * * * 

1 debtor. — sakha ( v ?\. N. of a region, (guua yahadi, 
q.v.) Adhamanga, n. ‘the lowest member,’ the 
foot. Adhamtic&ra, mfn. guilty of vile conduct. 
Adkamardha, n. the lower half, the lower part. 
Adkamardkya, mfn. connected with or referring 
to the lower part, Pin. iv, 3, 5. 

adhama-rna , &c. See adhama. 

adhara , mfn. (connected with adhds ), 

lower, inferior; tending downwards ; low, vile ; 
worsted, silenced ; (as), m. the lower lip, the lip ; 
(at), abl. ind., see s. v. below ; (asmat), abl. ind. 
below,.L, ; (a), f. the lower region, nadir; (am), 
n. the low r er part; a reply ; Pudendum Muliebre, 
L. [Lat. inferus], — kantha, m. n. the lower 
neck, lower part of the throat, VS. — kaya, m. 
the lower part of the body. — tas, md. below, 

3, 35, Scb. — pana, n. ‘drinking the 
iip, Kissing. — madku, n. the moisture ot the lips. 
— sapatna (adhara-), mfn, whose enemies are 
worsted or silenced, MaitrS. — sv&stika, n, the 
-dresya , mfn. invisible, Murid Up. j nadir. - aanu, f. the lower jaw-bone, AV. Adka- 
, , ci! i\ . - 1 ramrita, n. the nectar of the lips. Adkararani, 

, adran, mfn. {Sad), itc. (e.g. mjra- | , , h ; !owcf ot the two pieces J t - wood uie d iu pro - 

Pan. v, 
1 . 

dvan), eating. 

a-dvaya , mfn. not twu. without a 

second, only, unique ; (as), m„ N. ot a Buddha ; 
(am), n. non-duality, unity; identity (especially the 
identity of Brahma with the human soul or with the 
universe, or of spirit and matter); the ultimate truth. 
— vadin, m. one who teaches advaya or identity, 
a Buddha; a Jaina; (cf advaita-vadin. ) Advayd- 
nanda, in., N. of an author, and of a founder ot the 
Vaishuava sect in Bengal (who lived at the dose of 
the fifteenth century). 

A-dvayat [RV. iii, 29, 5] or a-dvayas [RV. i, 
187, 3 & viii, 18, 6], mfn. free from duplicity. 

dneing file by friction, SBr. &<:. Adhar&valopa, 

m. biting the iip. Adkari-krita, mfn. worsted, 

eclipsed, excelled, (v. 1 .) Adkarx-nbkuta, mfn. 

worsted (as in a process), Yajii. ii, 17. Adkare- 

dyus, imL the day before yesterday, P/in. v, 3, 22. 

Adkarottara, mfn. lower and higher ; worse and 

better ; question and tmswer; nearer and further; 

sooner and later; upside down, topsy-turvv. Adliar’- 

osktka or adkarausktka, in. the lower lip; 
♦ * 

(am), n. the lower and upper iip. 

Adkaraya, Norn. P. adharayati, to make in¬ 
ferior, put under; eclipse, excel. 

Adkarastat, ind. below, L. 

C 2 




^fvns? adhi-gama. 


AdfcarEk, -nd. beneath, in the lower region, i.e. 
ir. ::.e fouth. VS. 

Adh&racina [RV. ii,i a] oradhasacy&J (5); 
AV._, m:n. or adhar&sc, ah, act, < 3 ^,Ved. tending 
«- -".vaward', to the nadit or the lower legion, tending 
tawards the south. 

Ad bar at. ind. below, beneath, RV. & AV,; ir* the 
sonrh, AV — tat (adhardt-), ind. below, beneath, 
RV. x, 36, 14. 

Adharipa, mfn, vilified, L. 

a dharma, as. m. unrighteousness, 
injustice, irreligion, wickedness ; demerit, guilt; N. 
of a Prajapati (son of Brahma, husband of Hlnsa or 
Mrisha); N. of an attendant of the sun.; (<7), f. un¬ 
righteousness (personified and represented as the bride 
of death). — csirin, mfn, practising wickedness. 
— tas, ind. unrighteously, unjustly. — dan&ana, 
n. unjust punishment, Mn. viii, 1^7. -maya, mfn. 
made up of wickedness, SBr. xiv. Adhanjdtman, 
mfn. having a wicked spirit or disposition. Adbar- 
mastikaya, m.the category (astikdya) of adharma 
(one of the five categories of the jama ontology). 

Adharmin, rnfn. unrighteous, wicked, impious. 

Adharmishtha, min. most wicked, impious. 

Adh&rmyn, min, unlawful, contrary to law or 
religion, wicked. 

WV^T a-dham, f, one who has no husband, I 
a widow (usually vi-dhavd , q. v.), L. 

adhds , ind. (see adhara ), below, 

down ; in the lower region ; beneath, under ; from 
under (with acc., gen., and abl.) ; also applied to the 
lower region and to the Pudendum Muliebre [cf. 
Lat. infra], Adha~ttp&sana, n. sexual inter¬ 
course, Comm, on BfArUp. Adhah-kara, m. the 
iower part of the hand, Adba^-k&ya, m. the lower 
part of the body. Adhab-krita, mfn. cast down. 
Adhfth-krlshp&jlnam. ind. under the black skin, 
KatySr. Adbab-krlyft, f. (— apamana), disgrace, 
humiliation. Adha^-khanana, n. undermining. 
Adha^-padma, n. (in architecture) a part of a 
cupola. Adbab»p&ta, m. a downfall. Adbah- 
ptxsbpl, f. 1 having flowers looking downwards,’ 
two plants, Pimpinella Anisum and Elephantopus 
Scaber (or Hieracium?). Adbab-pravftba, in. a 
downward current. Adbab-prastara, m. seat or 
bed of turf or grass (for persons in a state of impurity). 
Adbab-praii-s&yin, mfn. sleeping on the ground 
towards the east. Adbab-sa-ya* mfn. sleeping on 
the ground, SBr. A&hali-sayya, mfn. having 
a peculiar couch on the ground ; (a), f. act of sleep¬ 
ing on the ground and on a peculiar couch. Adba^- 
Biras, mfn. holding the head downward ; head fore¬ 
most ; (as), nu, N T . of a hell, VP. Adhab-atha, mfn. 
placed low 01 below ; inferior. Adbab-stblta, 
mfn. standing below; situated below. Adbab- 
svastika, n. the nadir. Afihaa-cara, m. 'creep- 
ing on the ground,’ a thief. Adhas-taxlim, ind. 
very far down, &Br. Ad has-tala, n. the room 
below anything. Adb&n-pada, mfn., Ved. placed 
under the feet, under foot; {dm), n. the place under 
the feet; {dm), ind. under foot. Adbo-aksb&, 
mfn. being below (or not coming up to) the axle, 
RV. iii, 33, 9. Adho-’ksham [KatySr.] or adho- 
’ksbena [AsvSr.j, ind. under the axle, Adho- 
’ksba-Ja, m.. N, of Vishnu or Krishna; the sign | 
Sravani. Adho-grata, mfn. gone down, descended. 
Adho-gati, f. or >gama, in. or -g-amana, n. de¬ 
scent, downward movement, degradation, Adho- j 
gati and -gSmin, mfn. going downwards, descend¬ 
ing. Adbo-gbantE < f. the plant Achyranthes 
Aspera, Adbo-’nga, n. the anus ; Pudendum Mu¬ 
liebre. Adho-j&mi, ind. below the knee, SBr. 
Adho-jihvlkft, f. the uvula. Adho-dftra, n. the 
under timber. Adho*dls, (. the lower region, the 
nadir. Adho-drishti, f. a downcast look ; (mfn.), 
having a downcast look, Adho-desa, m. the lower 
or lowest part (especially of the body). Adho- 
dvEra, n. the anus; Pudendum Muliebre. Adho- 
xx&bham of -nEbhi [MaitrS.], ind. below the navel. 
Adho-nil&ya, m. ‘ lower abode, 1 the lower regions, 
hell. Adho-'para, n. the anus. Adbdpab&sa 
(1 dh&s-up ), m. sexual intercourse, §Br. xiv. Adho- 
bandhana, n. an under girth. Adbo-bbakta, 
u. a dose of medicine to be taken after eating. 
Adho-bhava, mfn. lower. Adho-bh&ga, m. the 
lower or lowest part, especially of the body. Adho- 
bhSga-dOBha-haxa, mfn. curing or strengthening 
the lower part of the body. Adbo^bbu^asta, n. 

the lower world. Adho-bhumi, f. lower ground ; 

land at the foot of a hill. Adho-marman, n. the 


anus. Adho-mukha, mf {a [Sis.] or t) n. having 
the face downwards ; headlong ; upside down; (as), 

m. Vishnu ; a division of hell, VP.; (a), f. the plant 
Premna Esculenta. Adbo-yantra, n. the lower 
part of an apparatus ; a still. Adho-rakta-pitta, 

n. discharge of blood from the anus and the urethra. 
Adh6-rama, m. (a goat) having peculiar white or 
black marks on the lower part (of the body), VS.; SBr. 
Adho-lamba, in. a plummet; the perpendicular. 
Adho-loka, m. the lower world. Adho-vadana, 
mfn, — adho-mukha. Adh6-varcaa,mfn.tumbling 
downwards, AV. v, 11, 6. Adbo-vasa, in. Puden¬ 
dum Muliebre. Adho-vEyu, m. vital air passing 
downwards; breaking wind. Adho-’vekshin, 
rnfn. looking down. Adho-’svam, ind. under 
the horse, KatySr. Adbo- ? Bra-pitta, n. ~ adho- 
rakta-pitta , q. v, 

Adhastana, mfn, lower, being underneath; pre¬ 
ceding (in a book). 

Adhast&t, ind. — adhds , q. v. AdhastSd-dis, 

f. the lower region, the nadir. Adha&t&l-laksh- 
man, mfn. having a mark at the lower part (of the 
body), MaitrS. 

WIT adhd, Ved. See ddha. 

Wiwftff adkamargavo , as, m, the plant 

Achyranthes Aspera. j 

WJTIRHofi a-dhdranaka , mfn. unable to 

support, unremunerative. 

a-dharmika , mfn. unjust, un¬ 
righteous, wicked. 

a-dharya, mfn. unfit or improper 

to be held or carried or kept up. 

I. adhi, is, m. (better adhi, q. v,\ 

anxiety; (is), f. a woman in her courses ( = avi, 

q- v *)> h. 

^rfv 2 . adhi, ind., as a prefix to verbs and 
nouns, expresses above, over and above, besides. 

As a separable adverb or preposition ; (with abl.) 
Ved. over; from above ; from ; from the presence 
of; after, AitUp.; for ; instead of, RV. i, 140, 11; 
(with loc.) Ved. over ; on ; at; in comparison with ; 
(with acc.) over, upon, concerning. Adby-adhi, 
ind. on high, just above, KatySr. 

Adblka, mfn. additional; subsequent, later; sur¬ 
passing (in number or quantity or quality), superior, 
more numerous; abundant; excellent; supernume¬ 
rary, redundant; secondary, inferior ; intercalated ; 
(am), n. surplus ; abundance ; redundancy ; hyper¬ 
bole ; ind. exceedingly; too much; more. — kshaya- 
k&rln, mfn. causing excessive waste. — t 5 ,f. addition, 
excess, redundancy, preponderance. •» tit hi, m. f. an 
intercalary lunar day. — tva, n. — -td, q. v. — danta, 
m. a redundant tooth which grows over another, 
Susr. ; (cf. adhi-danta.) — dina, n. a redundant, 
i. e. an intercalated day; (cf. adhi-dina.) — m2tns&r- 
man, n. proud flesh in the eye ; (cf. adhimansa.) 

— m&sa, m. an intercalated month. — rddhi (rid), \ 
mfn. abundantly prosperous. — vftkyokti, f. exag¬ 
geration, hyperbole. — shEshtika,mfn. (containing 
or costing) more than sixty. — samvatsara, m. an 
intercalated month. — sftptatika, mfn. (containing 
or costing) more than seventy. Adhlkangra, 
mf(f)n. having some redundant member or members, 
Mn. iii, 8 ; (am), n. belt worn over the coat of 
mail, L. Adhik&dhika, mfn. outdoing one another. 
Adhlk&rtha. mfn. exaggerated. Adhik&rt&a- 
v&cana, rt, exaggeration, hyperbole, Pan. ii, I, 33. 

adhi-kandharam, ind. upon or 
as far as the neck, Sis. 

adhi -karna , as, m., N. of a snake 

demon, Hariv. 

ssfvrgraoirT: adhi-karmakara , as, m. and 
adhi-karmakrit, t, m. See adhi-*/ 1. kri below. 

adhi-halpin, i, m, a sharp 

gambler, VS. 

adhi-karma , am, n., N. of some 

place unknown, Pan. vi, 3, 91. 

adhi--/ 1. kyi, to place at the head, 
appoint; to aim at, regard; to refer or allude to; 
to superintend, be at the head of (loc.), MBh, iv, j 

! 241 : A. - kurute , to be or become entitled to (acc.), 
MBh. iii, 1345 ; to be or become superior to, over¬ 
come, Pan. i, 3, 33. 

| Adhi-karana, am, m the act of piacing at the 
head or of subordinating government, supremacy, 
i magistracy, court of justice ; a receptacle, support; 
a claim ; a topic, subject ; (in philosophy) a sub¬ 
stratum ; a subject (e. g. at man is the adhi-karana 
of knowledge); a category; a relation; (in Gr.) 
government; location, the sense of the locative case; 
: relationship of words in a sentence (which agree to- 
; getber, either as adjective and substantive, or as sub- 
i ject and predicate, or as two substantives in apposi¬ 
tion); (in rhetoric) a topic; a paragraph or minor 
section; (mfn.), having to superintend, —bhojaka, 
m. a judge. — mandapa, in. n. the hall of justice, 
j —mala, f. a compendium of the topics of the Ve¬ 
danta by Bharati-tiitha. — siddhanta, m. a syllo¬ 
gism or conclusion which involves others, Nyayad. 
&c. Adhikaranaitavattva, n. fixed quantity of 
a substratum. 

AdMkaraxdka or better fidhikaranika, as, 

m. a government official; a judge or magistrate. 

Adhi~karanya, am, n. authority, power. 

Adhi-karman, a, n. superintendence. Adhi- 
karmakara or -karmakrit, m. an overseer, 
superintendent. AdM-karma-krita, m. person 
appointed to superintend an establishment. 

Adhikarmika, as, m. overseer of a market, L, 

Adhi-k&ra, as, m. authority ; government, rule, 
administration, jurisdiction ; royalty, prerogative ; 
title ; rank ; office ; claim, right, especially to per¬ 
form sacrifices with benefit; privilege ; ownership ; 
property ; reference, relation ; a topic, subject; a 
paragraph or minor section ; (in Gr.) government; 
a governing-rule (the influence of which over any 
number of succeeding rules is called anu-vritti, q. v.) 
— stha, mfn. established in an office. Adblkird- 
dhya, mfn. invested with rights or privileges. 

Adlii'k&rln, mfn. possessing authority ; untitled 
to; fit for; (f), m. a superintendent, governor; 
an official ; a rightful claimant; a man, L. Adhi- 
kSri-ta, f. or -tva, 11. authority; rightful claim; 
j ownership, &c. 

Adhl-krita, mfn. placed at the head of; ap¬ 
pointed ; ruled, administered; claimed; (as), m. a 
superintendent (especially a comptroller of public 
accounts), —tva, n. the being engaged in or occu¬ 
pied with. 

Adhi-kriti, is, f. a right, privilege; possession. 
Adhi-kritya, ind. p. having placed at the head, 
having made the chief subject; regarding ; concern¬ 
ing ; with reference to. 

^ffvjW*T adhi-Vkram, to ascend, mount 

up to. 

Adhi-krama, as, m. an invasion, attack, L. 
Adhl-krama^a, am, n. act of invading, L. 

adki-Vkrid, to play or dance 

over (acc.), MaitrS.; TBr. 

adhi - s/ 1. kshi (3. du. - kshitdh; 
3. pi. -kshiy&nti) to be settled in or over, be ex¬ 
tended over or along (acc. or loc.), RV.; MBh. i, 
723 & 730 ; to rest upon, SBr. 

’WT'vmn adhi-ksMt, t, m. (-/*. kshi), a 

lord, ruler, RV. x, 92; 14, 

adhi- */kship, to throw upon ; to 

bespatter; to insult, scold ; to superinduce (disease). 

Adhikshlpad-abja-netra, mfn. having eyes 
which eclipse the lotus. 

Adhi-kshipta, mfn. insulted ; scolded ; thrown 
down ; placed, fixed ; despatched. 

Adhi-kshepa, as, m. abuse, contempt ; dismissal. 

adhi-Vgan, to enumerate; to 

value highly, BhP. 

*rfkm*r adhi- \/gam, to go up to, approach, 

overtake ; to approach for sexual intercourse ; to fall 
in with ; to meet, find, discover, obtain ; to accom¬ 
plish ; to study, read: Desid, P. adhi-jigamishati, 
to seek ; A. adhi-jigdtisate, to be desirous of study¬ 
ing or reading. 

AdM-ffftta, mfn.found, obtained, acquired; gone 
over, studied, learnt. 

Adhi-antavya , mfn. attainable, to be studied. 
Adhl~g > antrl v td, m. one who attains or acquires. 
Adbi*g > axp,a f as, m. the act of attaining, acquisi- 

cidhi-vacam , 

adhi-gamanct . 


tion; acquirement, mastery, study, knowledge; mer- ! ^TVVT adhi-y'dhd (Pass. 3. sg. -dhdyi , tiating influence of the Supreme Spirit; the Supreme 
cantile return, profit, &c. j RVY)Ved. to place upon; to give, share between Spirit itself; nature; {dm), ind. on .material objects 

AdM-gamana, am, n. acquisition ; finding ; ac- ^at.' or loc.), RV.; A. (aor. -adhit a; perf. -dadhe, ( treaied of m the Upanishads), SBr. xiv ; TUp. 

quirement, reading, study ; marriage, copulation. p v . dddhdnd) to acquire additionally, RV. adhi-^ man to esteem highly 

AdM-gamaniya or -gamya, min. attainable; r- # ^ ~ ' 

practicable to be learnt. 1 CnW| adht- \ dkri, Uaus. r. -- dharayaU, j adhi-mantha or adhi-mantha, as. 

practicable to be learnt. ^11 aam- v anri, u 

wfw* ddhi-gartya (5), mfn. being on VeA to ^ 0 ™ or across - 
the driver's seat, RV'. v, 62, 7. adhi-\ nctm, I 

adhi-gava, mfn. being on or in a ,0 inc _ line over - RV * H°. 

cow, derived from a cow, AV. ix, 6, 39. adhi-natha , 

«rfV>n, P. to obtain; P. (aor. !?"»■ chieftain ! N ' of the al 
Subi. 2. pi. -gdta or -gdiana) to remember, notice, ' ’ > . t , 

RV, Sc AV. ; P, or generally A. (-jage, - agishta , adhi-ni- y c 

-agishyata. Pan.) to go over, learn, read, study; upon; to impart, grant. 

to attempt, resolve : Cam. P. -gafayati, to cause to Mhi-ntrni 

go over or teach ; Desid. Uaus. -jigapayt shall, to be 

desirous of teaching, Pan. ii, 4, 51. veiled, PA. vm, 41, IO. 

Ved, to carry over or across. m. ‘great irritation of the eyes.’ severe ophthalmia. 

<*fVnW adki-Vnam, Intens. A. -ndmnate, . ?«. «• for producing 

to incline over, RV. i, ! 4 o, 6. f=• RV , '"’A* 1; su,table for such frictlo “ 

* ’ * (as wood), J>Br. 

adhi-natfia , as* in. a supreme j AdM-m&iitMta, mfn, suffering from ophthalmia. 

lord, chieftain; N. of the author of the Kalayoga- adhi-mdnsa or -mdnsuka, as, m. 

sa^ra. . ^ proud flesh or cancer (especially in the eyes or the 

’WNIRVT adhi-ni- V dhd, Ved. to place back part of the gums). AdhimanHarman, rs. 
upon ; to impart, grant. ophthalmic disease produced by proud flesh or cancer. 

adhi-nirnij , mfn. covered over, ! adhi-matra, mfn. above measure. 

^f^rpS adhi-cjana , mfn. possessing su 

perior qualities, Megh. 

veiled, RV. viii, 41, 10. 

adki-nir-ymuc, Pass. - mucyate , 

>3 \ 

to escape from, PBr. 

adhi-gupta , mfn, protected. j adhi-nir-yhan (perf. 2. sg. -]u- 0 r intercalary month, 

adhi-gnham, ind. in the house, * han L ha ) to destroy ’ root out from > RV *' 8o ' * .«<***' adki-mukia , mfn. (y muc), in- 

in the houses. Sis. iii, 45. adhi-ni-V§.vas, to dwell in. clined, prepense, Buddh.; confident, ib. 

v d ^ .,, _ . ^ 1 1 *.. . > > . 3. du. | Adhi-mnktika,m,,N.ofMah 5 -kala,Buddlu 

neck, up to the neck. -vidhyatdrn) to pierce through, AV. vm, 0, 24. ... x T . a., 

. y , . ri rr- p - j. , , , adhi-mufiva, as, m., fs. of bakya- 

adhi-cankrama, mtn. ( Vkram), adhum-shadi v sad), (pert.3. pi. munj in * onc of hifc tilifty . four former births. 

walking or creeping over, AV. xi. 9, 16. - sheduh) to settle m a place, RV. 1, 164, 39. u • ,, , ,> 

* 5 A , . , , . aahi-uaina , as, rn. the chief or 

adhi-x/car, to walk or move on or ^Tt « i-v ni (aor. 2. p . nuis ttu) u pnneipai sacrifice, Bhag.; influence or agency affect- 

over, RV. vii, 88, 3, &c.; to be superior to (acc.), lead away from (abl.;, Rv. viu, 30, 3; to raise above JUJ , a $ac ,jfii:c; ( 4l ifn.), relating to a sacrifice, Mu,; 

AitAr. the ordluar y measure, enhance, RV. x, 89, 6. ( dm), ind. on the subject of sacrifice, SBr.; Nir. 

Adhi-carana, r/m. n. the act of walking or mov- irfma adhi-Vnrit (Imper. -nrityatu) to adhi-yyat , to fasten, RV. i, 64,4 ; 

mg or being on or over. ^ dance upon (acc.), AV. Cans A. -ydtdyaie, to reach, join, RV. vi, 6, 4. 

^arfVt^ adhi-y, to pile upon, A\ SBr. a dhi-ny-y 2 . as, to throw upon, a dhiw yam (Imper. 2.pi ,-yaccha- 

adhi- v jan, to be born. KapS. | ta) to erect or stretch out over, RV. i, 85, 11; A. 

A&lii-ja, mfn. bom, superior by birth, Pan. iii, ^ adhi-pa, as, m. a ruler, commander, ! ( ™ r - 3 ; P 1 * ~ a >' a ) tc strive up to (loc.), RV. 

2, iox, Sell. .. f. regent, king. X> 2 - 

AdUi-janana, am, n. irti, . u, 1 9. ^ Adhi-pati, is, m. * adhi-pa; (in med.) a par- j ^ifvrm adhi-\ f yd, to escape, Bhatt. 

^ffV*TV*i adhi-janu, ind. on the knees, Sis. j ticular part of the head (where a wound proves a , l . , . A , 

^ c* JL . . . - . w instantly fatal), -vatl iddhit>ati -), f. containing adhi-yyuj, to put on, load. 

adhi-Vji (oubj. 2. sg. -jayasi) to the lord" in herself MaitrUo ‘ /jl- 

, • • s u it ; nn rv vi oc ? h. e - r r , * • 1 adhi-rajju,. mfn. carrying a rope. 

win m addition, Kv. vi, 35, 2. Adhl-patai, f. a female sovereign or ruler. . . ftt ‘ AV J & r 

«Nftrar adhi-jihva, as, m. or -jihvika, f. Adhi-pd, as, m„ Ved. a ruler, king, sovereign. * '" U& / 

a peculiar swelling of the tongue or epiglottis, Su&r. ^TTVll^fl^tfa^fl/n, ind. over or across adki-ralhu , mfn. being upon or 

-_ . ... . . . . . _ r „, j CD- over a car; (<7.r), m. a charioteer; N. of a charioteer 

adht-jya , mtn. having the bow- A . " who was a prince of Anga and Kama’s foster-father; 

string (;>a) up or stretched, strung, SBr. &c. adhi-pansula or - pansula , mfri. n# H cart-load, RV. 

adhi-jyotisham, ind. on the bei '« dust y ab °" ! dust y- Adhl-eatftyaiu, ind. on the high road, 

luminaries (treated of in the Upanishads), TUp. Wry^TrHt adhi-purandhri, ind. towards a ^SfVPtm udhi-roj, t, m. a supreme king. 

WfvftWfH adhi-tishthaU. Steadhi-shtha. w " e ’ Si >- v *, 3 *. AdM-rSja, as, or -rajan, d, m. an emperor. 

' ' . WTWCT adhi-purusha or -ourt£sAa[\P.l Adhi-rfijya, tfwr.n, supremacy, imperial dignity; 

adhityaka,i. {it. adhi-tya, a den- , » ^ • • " an empire; N. of a country, -bbaj, m. possessor of 

vatiori oxadhi; cf. Pan. v, 2, 34), land on the upper | ' * 1 tipa ne P - _ imperial dignity. 

part of a mountain, table land, Sis.; Rag’n. See . adhi-puta-hhritam, ind. over AdM-raahtra, n.~ adhi-rdjya t 

'BfV&KkH adhi-danda-netri , /a, m. ‘ pre- tne ( ve ^ el ). ful1 of purified Soma, KatySr. ddhi-rukma , mfn. wearing gold, 

siding over punishment,’ N, of Varna, BhP. 1 adhi-peshana, mfn. serving to RV* v “h 4 ^ 33 - 

excessive * {am), ind. on the subject of prosody. 
— k&ruaika, m. ‘ exceedingly merciful,’ N. of a 
Maha-brahmana, Buddh. 


adhi-masa , as, m. an additional 
or intercalary month, 

adki-mukia , mfn. (v / mttc), in¬ 
clined, prepense, Buddh.; confident, ib. 

Adhi-mnkti, A, f. propensity; confidence. 

Adhi-maktika, as, m., N. of MahS-kala, Buddh, 


adhi-muhya , 05, m., N, of Sakya- 

uni in one of his thirty-four former births. 


adhi-y\ xi, to pile upon, AY.; SBr. 

’Stftjyfrf adhi-vjan, to be born. 

Adlii-ja, mfn. bom, superior by birth, Pan. iii, 
2, 101, Sdi. 

Adbi-jaxuma, am, n. birth, Mn, ii, 169. 

adhi-janu , ind. on the knees, Sis. 
adhi-y/ji (Subj. 2. sg. - jayasi) to 

vin in addition, RV. vi, 35, 2. 

TffvfrTdf' adhi-jihva, as, m. or - jihvika , f. 

a peculiar swelling of the tongue or epiglottis, Susr. 

ddhi-jya, mfn. having the bow¬ 
string ( /yd) up or stretched, strung, SBr. &c. 

luminaries (treated of in the Upanishads), TUp. 
fvfrTSrfrT adhi-tishthati. Steadhi-shtha. 

adhityaka, f. (fr. adhi-tya, a deri¬ 
vation of adhi; cf. Pan. v, 2, 34), land on the upper 
part of a mountain, table land, Sis.; Rag’n. See. 

adhi-danda-netri, td, m. ‘ pre¬ 
siding over punishment,’ N, of Varna, BhP. 

adhi-danta, as, in. a redundant P ound or S rind u P on > SKr - 

adhi’y'ruk, cl. 1. P. or poet. A. 

tooth, P 5 n. vi, 2, 188. Sch.; Susr. 


adhi-dina, am, n. an intercalated 


adhi-prajarn, ind. on procrea- | to rise above, ascend, mount; Caus. - ropayati, 
tion as a means of preserving the world (treated of in to raise, place above. 

the Upanishads"), TUp. Adhi-rudha, mm. ascended, mounted, ** sa- 

'Wftnrot^ adhi-praWt.dkav, to approach ^ e,, ^ ed m P«f>^n>«Htation. 

^ r j rr, tam. -= adahya-toha-karna, 

* « « rt' ■* • / * 


q. v., MaitrS.; cf. adhiioha-kdrna. 
Adhi-ropana, am, u. the act of raising or caus- 

- ’ ^ _ ___ ^ hastily from, 1 Br. q. v., MaitrS.; cf. cuLhiioha-kiirna. 

’WTVT^ adhi - ydis (aor. Subj. A. ,3. sg. ddhl-prashti-yuqa, am, n. yoke . AdUi-ropaaa, am, ». the act of raising < 

-uidis id) to bestow, RV. x, 03, 15. f or attaching a fourth horse laid upon the prashti • .. . ■ 1 . 

adhi-didhiti, mfn. having ex- or foremost of three horses (used on sacrificial occa- m!n ‘ ra ‘ se ‘ 1 P iacea a>ove - 

ssive lustre. Sis. i, 34. «ons), SBr. .. * .. 6 ’ 

cessive lustre, Sis. i, 3 4 - 

adhi-deva, as, m. or -devaid, f. a 

presiding or tutelary deity. AdM-devam or -de- 
vatam [SBr.], ind. concerning the gods or the deity. 

^HTVtppT adhi-devana, am, n. a table or 


poard for gambling, AV.; SBr, 

adki-daiva or -daw at a, am, n. a 

presiding or tutelary deity ; the supreme deity ; the 
c.vme agent operating in material objects ; (am), 
i. on the subject of the deity or the divine agent. 
Adhi-daivika., mfn. spiritual. 

adhi-pra-y/i su, to send away 

from, Kath. 

tfTTV^ft^ adhi-s'badh, to vex, annoy. 

mfVTet adhi- vbru,Xe&, to speak in favour 

of (dat.) or favourably to (dat.), intercede for. 

adhi-V3. bhuj, to enjoy. 

Adhi-btLojana, am, n. an additional gift, RV r , vi, 

47 > 23 

AdM-roha, as, m. ascent, niounting, overtop¬ 
ping; imfii,), riding, mounted, Sis. 

Adbi-rob.aua, am, n. act of ascending or mount¬ 
ing or rising above ; ( i), f. a ladder, flight of steps, L, 
Adki-roMn, mfn. rising above, ascending, See .; 
(int), fi a ladder, flight of steps. 

adhi-lokam. , ind. on the uni¬ 
verse (treated of in the Upanishads), SBr.; TUp. 
AdM-loka-iifi-tna, rn. lord of the universe. 

^C^adhi- yvac (aor. Imper. 2. sg.-f oca, 

, j 2. du. -vocatam, 2. pi. -vacate/) to speak in favour 

WHI ^adhi-bhu, us, tn. ( g'bhu), a master, j of, advocate, RV.; VS, 

p f , c - . - superior, L. i m, da *tuviAiuc 7 wm 

^Tiv^aarrt-v 2. dru ,to eoverf said ot a.bull), Adhl-bbuta, am, n. the spiritual or fine sub- I forter, RV t ; VS. 

: Caus. -drdvayati, to cause to cover, SBr* stratum of material or gross objects; the all-pene- i Adlti-vacan&j am, n. an appellation, epithet. 

Adbi-vaktyi, td, m. an advocate, protector, com- 

? /Z> ’ 


adhi-vaka . 

ad him a. 


» r 


Adhi-v£k&. as, m. advocacy, protection, RV. 
viii, 16, 5 ; AV. 

wfVcq* adhi-\/vad, to speak, pronounc 

over or at, SBr. ; TBr. 

Adhi-v£da, as, in. offensive words, MaitrS. 

'S'ftRTq, ad hi- v 7 2 . vap, A. - vapate, to put 

on, fasten, RV. i, 92, 4 ; to scatter, TS. 

1. adhi-\ 4* vas, A. -vaste, to put 

on or over (as clothes, &c.), RV. x , 75, 8. 

A'dM-vastra, mfn. clothed, RV, viii, 26, 13. 

1. AdM-vSsd [SBr.] or adhU v§,sa [RV.; SBr, 
&c.], as, m. or 1. adhl-v&sas [Vait.], as, n. an 
upper gannent, man tie. 

2 . adhi-V 5. vas, to inhabit ; to 

settle or perch upon. 

2. Adhi-vasa, as, rn. an inhabitant; a neigh¬ 
bour ; one who dwells above ; a habitation, abode, 
settlement, site ; sitting before a person's house with¬ 
out taking food till he ceases to oppose or refuse a 
demand (commonly called ''sitting in dharna') ; per¬ 
tinacity. — bliuxni, f. a dwelling-place, settlement. 

1. Adhi-vasana, am, n. causing a divinity to 
dwell in an image ; sitting in dharnS (see above). 

Adhi-vasin, mfn. inhabiting, settled in. Adhi- 
vEsi-ta, f. settled residence. 

A&hy-ushita, see s. v. 

vsrfvj^t adhi- y/vye, to envelop, 

Adhi-vlta, mfn. wrapped up, enveloped in. 

adhi-sasta, mfn.( x / $afts},(-~abhi- 

Sasta), notorious, MBit, xiii, 3139. 

1 adhivajya-kuladya, m.,N. 

of a country, MBh. 

< 5 rfWT^ adhi-vvds, to scent, perfume. 

3. Adhi-vSaa, as, ni. perfume, fragrance; appli¬ 
cation of perfumes or fragrant cosmetics. 

*« . adhi- \ si, to lie down upon, to lie 
upon, to sleep upon (loc., but generally acc.) 

A dm-say a, as, m, addition, anything added or 
given extra, Latv. 

Adhi-sayana, mfn. lying on, sleeping on.- 

Adhi^sayita, mfn. recumbent upon ; used for 
lying or sleeping upon. 

adhi-v'sri (Ved. Inf. ddhi-srayi- 

tavai , SBr.) to put in the fire ; to spread over, AV. 

A&hi-sraya, as, rn. a receptacle. 

Adfci-srayana, am, n. the act or ceremony of 
putting on the fire ; ( 7 ), f. a fire-place, oven. 

Adhi-srayaniya, mfn, relating to or connected 
with the Arihi-sravana. 

mi • 

Adhi-sr it a, mfn. put on the tire fas a pot); re¬ 
sided in, dwelt in ; occupied by. 

_ r* ___ 

adhi-shu ( v 3. su), to extract or pre¬ 
pare the Soma juice, RV. ix, 91, 2. 

Adhi-shavana, am, n. (generally used in the 
dual), hand-press for extracting and straining the 
Soma juice ; (mfn.), used for extracting and strain¬ 
ing the Soma juice. 

Adhi-ehavanyd (6), m. du. the two parts of 
the hand-press fur extracting and straining the Soma 

juice, RV. i, 28, 2. 


^ adhi-shkand( v'skand),( 

-skkdn) to cover in copulation, RV. x, 61, 7; AV. 

A'dlii-shka.tma, f. (a cow) covered (by the bull}, 

2.,#;’/*, n. application of perfumes, | TS. 

1 / 

WWT adhi-shthd ( Vstha), to stand upon, 

depend upon ; to inhabit, abide ; to stand over; to 
superintend, govern ; to step over or across; to over¬ 
come ; to ascend, mount; to attain, arrive at. 

Adhi-shtliatri, mfn. superintending, presiding, 
governing, tutelary ; (a), rn. a ruler : the Supreme 
Ruler (or Providence personified and identified with 
one or other of the Hindu gods) ; a ehiet; a protector. 

Adlii-shthdna, am, n. standing by, being at 
hand, approach ; standing or resting upon ; a basis, 
base ; the standing-place of the warrior upon the car, 
SSmavBr.; a position, site, residence, abode, seat; a 
settlement, town ; standing over; government, au¬ 
thority, power; a precedent, rule ; a benediction, 
Buddh. — deha or -sarlra, n. the intermediate 
body which served to clothe and support the departed 
spirit during its several residences in the Pitri-loka or 
world of spirits (also called the Preta-sanra). 

Adhi-shthayaka, mfn. governing, superintend- 

&c.; the ceremony of touching a vessel containing 
fragrant objects (that have been presented to an idol); 
pidiminary purification of an image. 

Adhi-vasita, mfn. scented, perfumed. 

adhi-vahana, as, rn., N. of a 

man (said to be a son of Anga). 

adhi -vi-kdrtanu, am, n, the ac 

of cutting off or cutting asunder, RV, x, 85, 35. 

T SrT*?fV«W adhi-vi-Vkr am, A,to come forth 


on behalf of (bat.), KatySr. 

wfyf^sTTrf adhi-vijhdna, am, n. the high¬ 
est knowledge. 

adhiW 3. vid, cl. 6. P. -vindaii, 


to obtain ; to marry in addition to. 

Adhi- f- a wife whose husband has mar¬ 

ried again , a neglected or superseded wife. 

A&hi-vettavyfi, f. a wife in addition to whom 
it is proper to marry another. 

A&M-vettri, td, rn. a husband who marries an 
additional wife. 

Adhi-ve&ana.^tfr, 11. marrying.m additional wife. 

Adhi-vedanlyS or -vedya, f. -- -vettavyd. 

adhi-tndycm , ind. on the sub- 


ject of science (treated of in the Upanishads), TUp. 

adhi-vi-V dhu , to distribute or 

scatter over, SBr. &c= 

adhi-vi- Vyat, Caus. - ydtayati , 

to subjoin, annex, Kath. 

adhi-vi-\/raj, to surpass in 

brightness, RV. 

adhi-v vis, Caus. - vesayati, to 

cause to sit down ; to place upon. 

cdhi-^vrij, cl. 7. F. -nrindkti, to 

place near or over (the fire), SBr. 

adhi-Vvrit (Pot, 3. pi. - vavrityuh) 

to move or pass along or over (loc.), RV. x, 27, 6 : j adhi- vspardh (3. pi. p. -spdr- 

Cans, ^'® r * j Jhun.te S: pert". - paspridhre ) to compete for an aim, 

adhi-\, P, (Sabj. -vardhat) j str ' ve at 'J oc -h 

adhi- v spris , to touch lightly or 

slightly, SBr. : Cans. (Pot. - sparsdyd) to cause to 
reach to, to extend to, TS. 

adh i- v'sru ,to trickle or drop off, SBr. 

adhi-hari, ind. concerning Ilari, 

1 Pan. ii, i, 6, Sen. 

mg, guarding. 

Adhi-shthita, mfn. settled ; inhabited ; super¬ 
intended ; regulated ; appointed ; superintending. 

Adhi-shtheya, mfn. to be superintended or 

adhi-shvan ( Vsvan), to roar along 
or over (3. sg. aor. Pass, in the sense of P. adhi- 
shvdni), RV. ix, 66, 9. 

^ adhi-sam- V%. vas (3. pi .-vasante) 

to dwell or reside together, TS. (quoted in TBr.) 

wfw$ i ^T{^adhi-sa?/(- \/vrit (impf. sdm-avar- 
taliidhi) to originate from, RV. x, 129, 4. 

adhi-sam- v dhd (perf. 3. pi. - da - 

dhuh) to put or join together, RV. iii, 3, 3. 

adhi - Vsrip, to glide along, 


adhi-stri , ind. concerning a wo¬ 

man or a wife, Pan. ii, I. 6, Sell. 

Adhi-stri, f, a superior woman, Ilariv. 

to refresh, gladden, RV. vi, 38, 3; A. - vdrdhate, to 
prosper through or by (loc.), RV. ix, 75, 1. 

adki-veddm , ind. concerning the 
Veda, SBr. xiv. 

adhi-velam, ind, on the shore, 

Sik iii, 71. 

T adhi-kasti, ind. on an elephant, 


adhi-Vhu (impf. 3. pi. -djuhvata) to 

make an oblation upon or over, RV. 1, 51, 5. 

_ /•» ^ . 

adhi-vhri, to procure, furnish, 

VTt|f adhi ( vi), adhy-dti or ddhy-eti (ex¬ 
ceptionally adhfyati, RV. x, 32, 3), to turn the mind 
towards, observe, understand, RV. & AV.; chiefly 
Ved. (with gen. [cf. PSn. ii, 3, 72] or acc.) to mind, 
remember, care for, long for, RV. &c.; to know, 
know by heart, TS.; SBr.; Up. &c.; to go over, 
study. MBh. iii, 13689; to learn from (a teacher’s 
mouth, abb), MBh. iii, 10713; to declare, teach, SBr. 
1 x ; Up.: A. ad kite or (more rarely) adhiy ate (M». 
iv, 1 25 ; Pot. 3. pi. adhiyiran, Kaus.; Mn. x, 1) to 
study. learn bv heart, read, recite : Caus. adhy-apa - 
yati (aor. -dpi pat, Pan. ii, 4, 51) to cause to read 
or study, teach, instruct: Caus. Desid. adhy-apipa - 
yiihati, to be desirous of teaching Pan. ii, 4, 51 : 
De.-1 d. adhishiskati, to be desirous of studying, Pan. 
viii, 3, 61, Sell. 

Adhita, mfn. attained; studied, read ; well read, 
learned. — v6da, m. one who has studied the Vedas 
or whose studies are finished, SBr. xiv. 

Adhiti, is, f. perusal, study, TAr.; desire, recol¬ 
lection, RV. ii, 4, 8 ; AV. 

Adhitin, mfn. well read, proficient,(gana ishi&di, 
q.v.)&c.; occupied with the st udy of the Vedas, Xum. 
Adhitya, ind. p. having gone over, having studied. 
Adhiyat, mfn. rcmemheiiug, proficient. 
Adhiyana, mfn. reading, studying ; («j-), rn. a 
student; one who goes over the Veda either as a 
student or a teacher. 

Adhy-ayana, am, n. reading, studying, especially 
the Vedas (one of the six duties of a Brahman). 

— tapasi, n. du. study and penance. — punya, n, 
religious merit acquired by studying. 

Adhy-ayaniya, mfn. fit to be read or studied. 
Adhy-apaka, mfn. a teacher (especially of sacred 
know ledge). Adhyapakodita, m. styled a teacher. 
Adhy-apana. am, n. instruction, lecturing. 
Adhy*apayitri, Id, m. a teacher, 
Adhy-apita, mfn. instructed, Mn.; Kum. iii, 6. 
Adhy-apya, mfn. fit or proper to be iirstructed. 
Adhy-aya, as, m. a lesson, lecture, chapter; 
reading ; proper time for reading or for a lesson ; 
ifc. a leader (see vedddhydya), Pan. iii, 2, 1, Sch. 

— sata-patka, m. ‘Index of One Hundred Chap¬ 
ters,’ N. of a work. 

Adhy-ayin, mfn. engaged in reading, a student. 
Adhy-etavya or -eya, mfn. to be read. 
Adhy-etri, td, m. a student, reader. 
Adiiy-eshyamana, mf(^)n. (fut. p.) intending 
to study, about to read, Mn. 

adhi-kara (= adhi-kdra), as, rn. 

superintendence over (loc.), Mn. xi, 63; authoriza¬ 
tion, capability, MBh. 

adhiksh ( Viksh ), to expect. 


adhina, infn.(fr. adhi), ifc.resting on 

or in, situated; depending on, subject to, subservient 
to. — ta, f. or -tva, n. subjection, dependence. 

adhd-mantha — adhi-mantha, q.v 

d-dhira , mfn. imprudent, RV. i, 179. 
4 ; AV,; not fixed, movable ; confused ; deficient ir. 
calm self-command; excitable; capricious; querulous; 
weak-minded, foolish ; (a), f, lightning; a capricious 
or bellicose mistress. — ta, f. want of confidence. 

adhiloha-kdrna, mfn. = acf- 

dhydioha-kdrna, q. v., TS. 

*r*fhnsj adhi-vasd ~ 1. adhi-vasd, q.v. 

2. Adhi-vasas, ind. over the garment, KatySr. 

adhisa, as, m. a lord or master over 


Adh.isvB.ra, as, rn. a supreme lord or king, an 
emperor; an A that, Jain. 

adhishta, mfn. (V3.solicited, 

asked for instruction (as a teacher), Pan.; (as? or 
am), in, n. instruction given by a teacher solicited 
for it, Pan. Sch. 

Adhy-eshana, am, d, m. f. solicitation, asking 
for instruction. 

adhund , ind. at this time, now. 

a dhun at ana. 


Adlmnatana, mf(f)n. belonging to or extending 
over the present time, SBr, 

-dhura, mfn. not laden. 

a-dhumaka, mfn. smokeless. 

WffTa -dhriia, mfn. not held, unrestrained, 
uncontrolled; unquiet, restless, TSg {as), m., N. of 

A-dhriti, is. f. want of firmness or fortitude ; 
laxity, absence of control or restraint; incontinence; 
(mfn.), unsteady. 

d-dhrishta, mfri.(y / rf hrish), not bold, 
modest; not overcome, invincible, irresistible. 

A-dhrishya, mfn. unassailable, invincible ; un¬ 
approachable ; proud ; (<I), f., N. of a river. 

a-dhenu , mfn. yielding no milk, RV. 
i, 117, 20; AV.; not nourishing, RV. x, 71, 5, 

wtfi? a-dhairya, am , n. want of self-com¬ 
mand ; excitement; excitability; (mfn.), without 
self-command ; excitable. 

_ « 

adhy-ansa, mfn. being on the 
shoulder, AsvGr. 

WflfR adhy-akta, mfn. { ^anj), equipped, 


ddhy-aksha, mf(^)n. perceptible to 

the senses, observable ; exercising supervision ; {as), 
m, an eye-witness; an inspector, superintendent; 
the plant Mimusops Kauki (Kshirika). 

^adhy-aksharam, inch on the sub¬ 
ject of syllables; above all syllables (as the mystic cm). 

adhy-agni , ind. over or by the 
nuptial fire (property given to the bride). Adhy- 
ag'ni-krita, n. property given to the wife at the 
wedding. Adhyagny-upagata, n. property re¬ 
ceived by a wife at the wedding. 

adfiy-anc , an, ici , ak, tending up¬ 
wards, eminent, superior, Pan. vi, 2, 53, 

adhy-anda, f. the plants Carpopo- 

gon Pruriens (cowage) and Flacourtia Cataphracta. 

adhy-adhikshepa , as, m. exces¬ 
sive censure, Yajn. iii, 228 ; gross abuse. 

'STUnrfa! adhy-adhina, mfn. completely 

subject to or dependent on (as a slave), Mil. 

adhy-ant ena, ind. close to, SBr. 

WTOfiPI adhy-opa-V vie, - vinakti , to put 

ii\to by singling out from, SBr. 

WUnr?J adky-ayana, &c. See adhi. 

ddhy-ardha, mf(d)n. ‘having an ad¬ 
ditional half,' one and a half. — Itausa, m. n. one 
and a half kansa ; (mt\f)n.), amounting to or worth 
one and a half kansa. — kakinlkn , mfn. amounting 
to or worth one and a half hakim. — karshapana 
or -karshapanika, mfn. amounting to or worth 
one and a half karshapana. — kharika, mfn. 
amounting to or worth one and a half khari. 
— panya, mfn. amounting to or worth one and a 
half pana. — p5dya, mfn. amounting to one foot 
and a half. — pratika, mfn. amounting to one and 
a half karshapana. — xn&shya, mfn. amounting to 
or worth one and a half masha, — vinsatikrna, 
mfn. amounting to or worth one and a half score or 
thirty. — sata or -satya, mfn. amounting to or 
bought with one hundred and fifty — satamana or 
-s&tamana, mfn, amounting to or worth one and 
a half satamana. — 8 an a or -sanya, mfn. amount¬ 
ing to or worth one and a half s 5 na. — surpa, mfn. 
amounting to or worth one and a halt surpa. — saha- 
sra or -sahasra, mfn. amounting to or worth one 
thousand five hundred. — suvarna or -sauvarni- 
ka, mfn.amounting to or worth one arid a half suvarua. 

Adhy-ar&haka, mfn. amounting to or worth 
one and a half. 

congenital tumour, goitre. 

or - arvuda, am, n, a 

adhy-ava-Jruh, to step down¬ 
wards upon, TBr. 

adhy-ava-\/so, cl. 4. P. - syati , 

to undertake, attempt, accomplish; to determine, 
consider, ascertain. 

j Adhy-ava-sana, am, n. attempt, effort, exer- 1 
] tion ; energy, perseverance ; determining ; (in rhe¬ 
toric) concise and forcible language. 

Adhy-ava-saya, as, nr. id.; (in phil.) mental 
effort, apprehension. — yukta, min. resolute. 
Adhy-a va-sayita, mfn. attempted. 
Adhy-ava-sayin, mfn. resolute. 
Adhy-ava-sita, mfn. ascertained, determined, 

Adhy-ava-siti, is, f. exertion, effort. 

adhy-ava- Vhan, to thrash upon, 


Adhy-avahanana, mfn. serving as an imple¬ 
ment on which anything is thrashed, SBr. 

WEIGHT adhy-asana , am, n. eating too soon 

after a meal (before the last meal is digested). 

adky-\' 2. as, to throw or place over 

or upon ; \in phil.) to attribute or impute wrongly. 

A&hy-asta, mfn. placed over; disguised ; sup¬ 

Adhy-asa, as, m. See s. v. 

^TUTPg adhy-asthd , am, n. the upper part 

of a bone, TS. 

Adhy-asthi, i, n. a bone growing over another, 

^STUffT adhy-\ / ah, perf. -aha, to speak on 

v . 

| behalf of (dat.), AV. i, 16. 2, 

adhy-a-x/kram , to attack ; to 

choose, Sak. 

adhy-a-v gam, to meet with. 

mOT^T: adhy-a-x'car , to use, Mn. &c. 


^TUrntTT adhy-anda, —adhy-anda, SBr. | 

’STlflTW adhy-dtma, am, n. the Supreme 

Spirit; (mfn.), own, belonging to self; {am), ind. 
concerning self or individual personality. — cetas, 
111. one who meditates on the Supreme Spirit. 

— jiiana, n. knowledge of the Supreme Spirit or 
of dtman. — dris, mfn. knowing the Supreme 
Spirit, —rati, m. a man delighting in the contem¬ 
plation of the Supreme Spirit, -ramayana, a. a 
Rarnayana, in which R 3 ma is identified with the 
universal spirit (it forms part of the Brahman da- j 
Pur.ina). — vid,mfn. = -dris. — vidyaff. - -jnana. 

— sastra, n., N. of a work. Adhyatmottara- 
kanda.n.the last book of the Adhyatma-rSmSyana. 

Adhy-atmika or better adhyatmika, mt(J)n. 
relating to the soul or the Supreme Spirit. 

wsawn adhy-d-Vdha , to place upon. 

adhy-apaka, &c. See adhi. 

SHTXTfiJ adhy-a- x bhri{nnp{.adhy-dbkarat) 

to bring near from, VS. 

adhy-d-Vruh, to ascend up on 

high, mount; Caus. - ropayati , to cause to mount. 

Adhy-arudlia, mfn. mounted up, ascended; 
above, superior to (instr.); below, inferior to (abi.) 

Adhy-aropa, as, m. (in Vedanta phil.) wrong 
attribution, erroneous transferring of a statement 
from one thing to another. 

Adhy-&ropana, am, a, n. f. id. 

Adhy-aropita, mfn. (in Vedanta phil.) erro¬ 
neously transferred from one thing to another. 

* 3 rmT ^adhy-a- \ / 2.vap,-d-vapati, to scat- 

ter upon, SBr. 

Adhy-a-vapa, as, m. the act of sowing or 
scattering upon, KatySr. 

adhy-d-V5 - vas , to inhabit, dwell 

in face, or loc.) 

adky - d-vdhanika , am, n. that 

j part of a wife’s property which she receives when 
led in procession from her father’s to her husband s 

’BTUlTCf adhy-Vas, to sit down or lie down 
upon, to settle upon ; to occupy as one’s seat or 
habitation ; to get into, enter upon ; to be directed j 
to or upon ; to affect, concern ; to preside over, in- | 
ftuence, rule ; to cohabit with : Caus. P. adhy-asa- 
yati , to cause to sit down, Bhap Uesid. (p. adhy- 
dsisishamdna) to be about to rise up to (acc.), Bhatt. ; 

Adhy-asana, am, n. act of sitting down upon, 
L.; presiding over, L,; a seat, settlement, BhP. 

Adhy-asita, mfn. seated down upon ; seated in 
a presidential chair; settled, inhabited; {am), n. 
sitting upon, Ragh. ii, 52. 

Adhy-asin, mfn. sitting down or seated upon. 
Adliy-asina, mfn. seated upon. 

adhy -asa, as, m. (\/2.«s), impKis- 

ing (as of a foot), Yajn.; (in phil.) =* adhy~aropa; 
an appendage. RPrSt. 

adhy-d-Vsanj (1.9 g.-sajami) to 

hang up, suspend, AV. xiv, 2, 48. 

adhy-a-x'sad, to sit upon (acc.), 

Kaus.: Caus. (1. sg. ddhy-a-sadayami) to set upon 
(loc.), TBr. 

adhy-d-harana, am, n. (x^hri), 
act of supplying (elliptical language); supplement; 
act of inferring, inference. 

Adhy-aharamya or -Shartavya, mfn. to be 
supplied ; to be inferred. 

Adhy-ahSra, as, m. act of supplying (elliptical 
language). Pan. vi, 1, 139, &c. 

Adhy-ahrita, mfn. supplied, argued. 

adhy-ut-thd ( y^sthd), to turn away 

from, PBr. 

adhy-ud-dki, f. See ddky-udhni. 

adky-ud-dhri (\Shri), (Imper. 2. sg. 

ddhy-tfd-dhara)\Qdrzvt (water) from, AV. xii,3,3 6. 

adhy~ud-\/bhri, to take or carry 
away from, AV. 

adhy-ushita, mfn.i ( y/2.vas),(°te), 
loc. ind. at daybreak, MBh.; 3 . (V$• vas) inha¬ 
bited ; occupied. 

adhy-ushta, mfn. (invented as the 
Sanskrit representative of the Prakrit add hut t ha, 
which is derived from ardha-caturtha ), three and 
a half, — valaya, m. forming a ring coiled up three 
and a half times (as a snake). 

^**5^ adhy-ushtra, as, in. a conveyance 

drawn bv camels. 


adhy-udha, mfn. {^vah), raised, 

exalted ; affluent; abundant; (tfJ - ), m. the son of a 
woman pregnant before marriage [cf. I. sahodha)\ 
Siva; (J), f. a wife whose husband has married an 
additional wife. — ja, m. the son of a woman preg¬ 
nant before marriage. 

ddhy-udhm, f. (fr. udhan) [MaitrS.; 

KatySr.] or adhy-ud-dhi, f. (Vdha) [ApSr.], a 
tubular vessel above the udder, or above the scrotum. 

ndhy-ushivas , dn, ushi. at (perf. p. 

x/ 5. vas), one who has dwelt in, Pan. iii, 2,108, Sch. 

adhy-x'i.vh, to lay on, overlay; to 

place upon ; to raise above, 

Adlay-ukana ,am, n. putting on a layer (of ashes). 


adhy-Vridh, to expand, SBr. xiv. 

adhy-etavya , &c. See adhi. 

*Z ?Vpi adky-Vedk, to increase, prosper. 

adky-eshana . See adMskta . 

^frl d-dhri, .mfn. ( x^dhri), unrestrained, 
irresistible, AV. v, 20, IO. — ga (dd/iri*), mfn. 
(m. pi. avas\ irresistible, RV.; (us), m., N. of a 
heavenly killer of victims, RV.; N. of a formula 
concluding with an invocation of Agni, SBr. &c. 

— ja (adh)d-), mfn. irresistible, RV. v, 7, to. 

— pusiipalika, f. a species of the Pan plant, Piper 

A-dhriyamana, mfn. (pr. Pass. p. x/dhri), not 
he'd ; not to be got hold of, not forthcoming, not sur¬ 
viving or existing, dead, (gana edrv-adi , q.v.) 

a- dhruva, mf(a)n. not fixed, not per¬ 

manent; uncertain, doubtful; separable. 

adhrusha, as, m. (etymology doubt- 


iul), quinsy, sore throat, Susr. 

adhvan, a, m. a road, way, orbit; 
a journey, course ; distance; time, Buddh. Sc Jain.; 
means, method, resource; the zodiac (?h sky, air, 
L.; a place ; a recension of the Vedas and the school 
upholding it; assault (?); ifc. adhva, as. 

.v* J 5 . 


•i x '--. 

* ; * ft -•? ' >• .- 




3 n 

- ^ 

• awuHia 

1 rs t >»b •» 

i. • v.. “ 

> . *r 

►-v < 

r / 

4 * 



♦ - * 

*‘“ Cl l O/ •: 

is), n't. a traveler , ;i camel, 

*. » A 

1 -‘ u/i j -&£**«*», mm. eyelet i :v ; kv. v m , 90, 3. Aii-atineda, m. not foaming 

. „ _ i ^Wtaft-a^^«r'i ; ?nn?.uiiifittobeiitteredi ! 9 ™i MamS - A'ja-atirikta, mfn. not abundant, 

s ..,.. l ,! ; | „.,*kK „ s „‘?~kK i SBi An-atireca, n. not abundance, MaitrS, 

a. a ,i -gttiuav/A, m. i I AsL-ativritti, f. congmitv. An-ativyadliy&, 


\.-i .! 


* -./« 

ne plan;, — pati, m, | 

m. a iraveUim: car. i 


** A . 

1* . 1 
* •- ii 

Wfmt tm-agora, as. m. ‘houseless,’ s j (nm '- ) ' ™penshable, unbroken An-atyudya, 

v ~ 1 mm. ( ~ aty-an-udya), quite unfit to be mentioned. 

Si-anrne-i Aapera. Adfiva- j *“?.*“••*«• 2^^, 

A n-ag ax-i ka, f. tee houseless life of such: 

I far above any expression, AV. x, 7, 28. 

di«C T j 

J * « ✓ T >- 

»/ -. . i Vi i 

| an-ad at , mfn. not eating, not eon 

dUiltf* t-i* adlive£-a m. jo officer ».* tLarge of tbc | 
public loads, pobci-otfic:-.;, K. ijar. j a traveller. Pan. :Yajrt.i, 11 .1. | d-nagna, niff din, not naked, «-t# I Mi5nm & RV * 1U » ! » 6 » AV - &c - 

(<z- nayna-), f. the not being naked, SBr. i dn-addhd or (with particle tt) rfn~ 

j addho, ind. not truly, not really, not definitely, not 

purnsbA, m. one who is not a true 

t as, in. id.* Pin. v, 2, 16. 

'* 7 ? 

*.. (t-ahvara. imn 


v,; TS.; (as', m, a sacrifice 




v\ ,tn 

o.cih saenhee), N of a Vasa ; or tl 
family ; {am}, n. sk y or a»r, L. -* k&rmaxx 

foimancc t>t the Adhvara ot aav act coimecu-d ...... . .. . .. * , 

•. , , ... .. . . . i pensme witu tire; * navmsr no nre sn the stomach; 

it. bbr. «-kadp&.« i. 4 M. ar» optiouai saennee ! j fi'- ^ / w * v , * 

..: x , .... . * dvs->ei>tu:. *>tr& lan-aFniA. min. not rnamtammg 

(.Kamvesfltn. *~kaniU., .n. ot the book in the ; 4 ■ , ot f ,t; ^ mA -.„ , ■- - - .« 

X =; >v ’ • . ’ - , ! rhe sacied me, K\ . i, 189, 3. — aa^dhatsw -a^n-), j a^nm ./ w ndhntt iml not hulnur TRr 

^upatna- eralimana winch reiers to Adhvaras. j m q ; _ uot burnt with f not burnt on the funeral j ^ an~adnas t tnd. not below, 1 Br. 

A ^: ar ?’ V '^7 ,fim ‘ I pile (but buried), R V. x, 15, j 4 ; yd-), m. pi. N. ! ^^TVi^mn-adhika, mfn having nosuperior, 

irneime xor «n . u.^aia. — 1 saaaiy % 1. cons..- J q; - a c j ass 0 { manes, Mu. ni, 109. — shvattfc, as, ] not to be enlarged or excelled; boundless; perfect, 
cratiost connected with the Adhvara. — dhiskxtya, • - ‘ 0 ’ r 

of no use either to gods or men or 
AitBr.; KatySr. 

an-adyatana , as, m. a tense (either 

past or future) not applicable to the current day, P 5 n. 

m. a second altar at the s-»tw sacri* e, SBr -irS- i ro y v 1 !UC a K m-shvatla,. ( an-adhikdra, as, to. absence of 

yaiiSoit.ti, f. expiation connected with the Ad! it Asa. | an-agnu, r.Hi a )il. isinless; faultless; j authority cr right or claim. — carca. f. unjustifiable 

, ! 

-voro i mnmnred 

uanasome, S- : in?;, m. wlv-te mustard, | mterfereme, intermeddling, officiousness. 

a . 

'SftTfV^TfT an-adhigata , mfn. not obtained. 

an-adhina or an-adhmaka, mfn. 

— vat ((Ulhvard-X min. containing the 

Adhvara,SBr. *■»3rl»rnffi.emt*eilish}-ug the Adl'.vau, ! L., N of Siva and otb.ers. AsiaghishtamV i., j An-adhikarin, mfn. not entitled to. 

RV, •»* samiyht&-yfc.j - a«s, n., N. of an .t-s. legate J b. or an tight h day (spuken of in the titty-fifth j Atr-adhikiita, mfn. not placed at the head of, 

of nine libations connected with theAdhvai* utha I Admiva ot ti.e Bhav ish y ott ara * Pura ua). ] not appointed. 

<:.r [RV. x. 7 ], mb,, .uudiug | lta .aiiHusa', unrestrained. | 

at ur engaged u* aa A an di a i *4 ' I 

Adkvariyv., Norn. P. (2, ^g '>!ydn : v / : n)of \ WKff an-ahgn, bodiless, ineorpu- j r *^ acquired ; not studied. — aianoratha, mfn. one 

u> wform 3vs »•£» ' v- / . -. ,, , ! who nas uot obtained his wish, disappointed. —»&»•• 

..<■ penorrn a,* j\un. aia., kv. ; iv.n ; in.. 7 S. 01 Kama (g on ot love, so caned , , . ... a- 

AAhvary*. No,,. P. (p. V r ,V) so In, caused ai ; he ^ „« de sodifeCbv . ,u,'. from the ! *"• mh >, l ! n " c< ' uam£ed w!th ^ e , S ^ - 

*>’ A invars, RV i, i8i, , , fvt „ti,„ bav,,a ,t,„, P ,,i to d«tu.b his lit,, 1 A *^* M “»* or “i-nAhlffamanaya, mfn - 

Ailhvmyix,tu, m. oue who m.sTiiutes a;* Adhvava 4 . 0 f ;;U c le rity by filling him with love for i^rvati); \ liUatt ^ ,aD,c - 

v 7 j^v sg pneSi y prteit of a parbcu.Ai da>s j ( ; »^y n , the ethei, air, sky, L ; the mind, 1. ; that I an-adhishthana , H. want of 

v,as o^anguished uom ttijd/ofri, the c d^a-ift. and . which i- not the anya. —kriclHi, i anu•fous p!av j < 

the hr an man classes. 1 he Adhvatyu pticsis ‘had \ of a me tic {ol tv-o verses, the first containing vis. i Ati-adlviuhtAita, mfn. not placed over, not ap- 
to measure the ground, to build the altm, to prepare ; tr-n long syllables, the second thirty-two short ones), j pointed; not present, 

ax? sacrine ial vessels, to fetch wood and v- a ter, to , i., N. of a queen of Kashmir. pala, rn , 

light ibe fire, to bring the animal and irn-nola»c it, j ,;t a king's char.meriatn at Kashmir «- ra-«ja.ya . .. . , , . . . , 

whilst engaged in these duties, they hat 1 to rqveat j mfn not shaking the !v>dv {?). (gana j subject to, independent; (as), m. an independent 

the hymns of the Yaiur-vcda ; heme that Veda itself i edrr-adi, q. v.) - r&iktfa, m., N. of an erotic work. ! carpenter who works on his own account ^see kauta- 

is yuso called ^ Adh vary u); (odh vary aval), pi. the j •* lekka.- f. a love letter; N. of a queen cf Kashmir, j ^ksna). 

adherents cl the \ ajur-veda ; - uf), t. the wne or an | —sekharii, rn., K. of a metre (of four verses, each j ' 3 )<rP 4 $$ an-adhyalcska, mfn. not percep- 
Adh vary u prielt, i’&n, iv, i,66,Sch. — kanda. u . h. j containing fifteen ian:bih -* sen.S, f., K of a dramatic j hble bv the senses, not observable ; without a super- 
of a book ouruntrasor prayers intended ffir Adhvaryu | personage. Anaagrdpida.m., N r . of a king ofKash- 1 iutendcut. 

priests. —kr&tti, m, sacrificial act pertovmed by the { niir. Anangasuhrid, in. ‘Kama’s enemy.’ Siva. I 7 , , , 

Adhraryu, Pin. ii, 4 , 4 . ~ y#da, m. thcYajur-^d*. | A a -aig tt ka,.. t), e rainj. 1 . ' i «« a*,adhyayaw, am, n. not read- 

KuearrKv j * / . rj _ t ^ r p. . * , „ „ } <ng or studying; intermission of study, Mn. &c. 

a-dnvasman, mm, unveiled, Rv. ; W^XX an-angun, mtn. destitute of fin- j An-adhySya, as, m. id.; a time when there is 

^Wtf a-dkvanta, am, a. (not positive j AV - | intennission of study, Mn. - divas*, m. a vacation 

darkness}, twilight, gloom, siiade. - sStrava, m. j fm-accha . mfn. unclear, turbid. j bonda)'. 

•li lvY-i^ hSde; the Pk! " C “"* F “ ,Uta “ WlWr an-ajaka or an-ajika, f. a miser- j 1 WWJp«’n» an-unahgarnejaya, mfn. not 
* 1 ". - „ nf able little ^»t. Pin. vii, 3, 47 . ' kaviog the t^y unshaken (?); cf .an-ahgamejaya. 

a sowei) the substitute for R-t, 0, „ privative. ! mfn. free from colly- an-anukhyah, ts, f. not per- 

iium or pigment or paint; (am), n. the sky, atmo- 

. / t t • . _ | AlUUi C/r kUCiUvliL VI pivuil f \ )• * 1 . UK -Mh I i OUHV~ 

2. t7n. cl. 2. P. iinxti or anati, ana, «- | sr>he , c L 

^ k nishyati, dnttlKV.x, 1 20, i\ to breathe, 1 , z , 

respire, gaspr to lire. L.; to move, gofUcf. Ok. Svt- ! «*Mf-uk, dvan , m. (tr. anas, a cart. 

reiving, MaitrS. 

an-anujndta , infn. not agreed to, 

not permitted ; denied. 

• • ** ^ 1 

^s.Lva.afn 7 nus):Cs\^.ayiayGti:\Jt^d.a?iifitshati. j and J van, to drag), an ox, bull; the sign Taurus. | W^Ww^cf»-anttrfAyaym,mfn.not miss- 
Au& } oj, m. breath, respiration, SBr.; ChUp. : AnadnJ-jihv* f f. the plant GojihvS, Elephantopus ] ing, not missing anything, AitBr.; not insidious, TBr. 

- vaMm, n. the state of being endowed with | Scaber. Anadud-da, as, m. donor of a bull or ox. | an-anubkavaka, mfn. unable to 

breath or life, Nir. Aaadutka, mfn. itc. tor anaduh. (gana ura-acn \ ? , „ f , 

, s ...... j ..,.1 f.y,- , v \ S comprenena. -»t 5 , f. non-comprehension; unm- 

A’aaaa, am. n. oreitumg, living, Nir. i * ud g dl . u r^yaat, q.v.j | r 

^^4.^ , _ .. , . | Anaduha, i7v, m. ifc. tot anaduh; N. of the ; lelhgmu-ty. 

G'^vnua uv un - iiitn. portion- ; c hief of a certain Gotra y?), (gana sarad-ddi. q v.; | an-anubhashana, am, nd not re- 

ioL entitled to a share in an inheritance. j Anna uM [SBr.] or &n&dv£iii iPan.j, f. a cow. j plating (tor the sake of challenging) a proposition,’ 

*$^ 1 %rtmian-aniumat -phuia, f. the plati 

- . 

j WTQ izn-anu, mfn, not minute or line, i tacit assent. 

iron (--- ansumyd-phala). 

j coarse, SBr.; {us), in. coarse grain, peas. See. j an-anubhutct, lllfil. not perceived, 

anaka-dundubka , es, m., N. of ! a Asa-aaiyas, miu. not at all nunute; vast, mighty, j no t experienced, unknown. 

A 1 ishna s granusather . . | ‘ t ! WffHHW an-anumata, mfn. not approved 

Am^s^ansidabiti nr better &&akada2tdul>M> ! Wfi! a*n-u.ta< mfn. not betit. not bowed 1 ^ ‘ - 

ff, m,, N. of Krishna’s father (Vendera • 

' - ** - V > 

derived from the beating of drums at his birth) 

s a 1 ij. y \' *>f" 

I down : changed into a linffuai constmarit, RPrat,; 

i erect; lull: baughtv. 


it'ii-akasmdt, md- not without a 


an object; accident ally, r*ot suddenly. 

* K.:h 


<?/t. -mama-mara , m 1 a. no 

big undesuedly, AitAr, 

V l-li A 

an-dksh fuom, m-ak)* xuin» blind. 

! 9 

RV. i it j 

C’< / 

Att-akslirru(<2)n,idRV.ix.,73, 6& x, 27,. 11, 

Aa-aksiii, ts. a bad eve, L. 

j or honoured, not liked, disagreeable, unfit. 

an-anuyaja or an-anuyajd [TS. j, 

.. . . i mfn. without a subsequent or final sacrifice. 

m».zti-, not very- not too -* not j ^ . 

pi.a-. ;Wor-1.commencing vnih an-ati tire so e «uy | , f rf ^ S,r W S t an-anushangm, nun. not at- 
• analysed by retelling to an, &c<, that lew need be ! ta-chea to, indifferent to, 

s cuumerated.) AA-atikrama, m. not transgress- j an-anushthana , am, n. non-ob- 

; iiiy VRr\ ? moderation, propriety. Aa-atlirama, I s . rvancet neglect; impropriety. 

: axya, mfn not to be avouied, not to be trans- i . ", ,, r •’ . _ 

1 gre-ssed, invioiabk Aa-atidrisya, mm. not trans- I an-anuKta [oBr. xiVj or an- 

1 % * « ► 

I patent, opaque, SBr.; (or « aty-adrisya), quite j anukti [KatySr.], mfn, not recited or studied ; uot 
i indiscernible, A.a~&ti&bkut& f mm, unsurpassed, ! responded to. 

an-anrita . 



Arhat, &c., 

{m-sranVa, mfn. not false, true, 

SU. vi, 39 

WfTOT an-antd , mf(«)n, endless, bound¬ 
less, eternal, infinite ; (as),_ rn., N. of Vishnu ; of 
Scsha (the snake-god) ; of Sesha’s brother Vasuki ; 
of Krishna ; of his brother Baladeva ; of Siva ; of 
Rudra : of one of the V.isva-devas; of the 14th 

the plant SinduvSra, Vitex Trifolia’; 
Talc; the 23rd lunar asterism, Sravana ; a silken 
cord (tied round the right arm at a particular festi¬ 
val); the letter d ; a periodic decimal fraction? (a), 
f. the earth; the number one ; N. of Parvati and 
of various females, the plant Sirivi; Periploca 
Indica or Asclepias Pseudosarsa or Asthjnatica (the 
root of which supplies a valuable medicine) ; (am), 
n. the sky, atmosphere; Talc. — kara, mfn. ren¬ 
dering endless, magnifying indefinitely, Pan. hi, 2, 
21 ; R. v, 20, 26. — ga, mfn. going or moving for 
ever or indefinitely, Pan. iii, 2, 48. — guna, mfu. 
having boundless excellencies. -*caturdasi, t. the 
fourteenth lunar day (or full moon) of Bhadra, when 
Ananta is worshipped, — c&ritra, m., N. 0} a Bodhi- 
sattva. — jit, m., N. of the fourteenth Jaina Arhat of 
the present Avasarpini. — ta {ananta-'), fi eternity, 
infinity, SBr. xiv. — tana, mfn. extensive. — tirtka, 
m., N. of an author. — tirtka-kril, m.» Anantajit. 
«- tritiya, f. tire third day of Bhadra (said to be sacred 
to Vishnu). — tritiyR-vrata, N. of the twenty- 
fourth Adhyaya of the Bhavishyottara - Purana. 

— tva, n. q. v. — driskti, m., N. of Siva. 

— dova, m., N. of various persons, especially of a 
king of Kashmir, -nerni, m., N, of a king of 
M&lava, a contemporary of Sakyamuni. —para, 
mfn. of boundless width. — p&la, m., N. of a war¬ 
rior chief in Kashmir. — bkatta, m., N. of a man. 

— mat!, m., N. of a Bodhisattva. — mayin, rnfn. 
endlessly illusory or delusive or deceitful. — muia, 
m. the medicinal plant SarivS. — ram a, m., N. of 
a man. — rasi, in. (in arithm.) an infinite quantity ; 
a periodic decimal fraction (?). — rupa, mfn. having 
innumerable forms or shapes, —vat, mfn. eternal, 
infinite ; {an), m. (in the Upanishads) one of Brah- 
mi’s four feet (earth, intermediate space, heaven, 
and ocean). — varinan, m , N. of a king, — v&ta, 
m. a disease of the head (like tetanus). — vikra- 
min, m., N. of a Bodhisattva. — vijaya, m., N. 
of Yudhishthira’s conch-shell. — virya, in., N. of 
the twenty-third jaina Arhat of a future age. 

— vrata, n. ceremony or festival in honour of 
Ananta or Vishnu (on the dav of the full moon in 
Bhadra); N. of the 102nd Adhyaya of the Bha- 
vishyottara-Purana. — sakti, mfn. omnipotent; (is), 
m., N. of a king. — aayana, n. Travancore. — sir- 
ska, f.,N. of the snake king VSsuki’s wife. — susk- 
ma ( anantd -), rnfn. possessing boundless strength 
or endlessly roaring -;?), RV. i, 64, 10. Anantdt- 
mau, m. the infirite spirit. Anantasrama, 
anantesvara, &c., names of persons unknown. 

Anantaka, mfn, endless, boundless, eternal, infi¬ 
nite ; {am), n, the infinite (i.e. infinite space). 

Asiantya, mfn. infinite, eternal; {ain) i n. infi¬ 
nity, eternity. 

an-antara, mf(d)n. having no in¬ 
terior ; having no interstice or interval or pause ; 
uninterrupted, unbroken ; continuous; immediately 
adjoining, contiguous; next of kin, &c.; compact, 
close; (tzj), m. a neighbouring rival, a rival neigh¬ 
bour ; {am), n. contiguousness; Brahma or the 
supreme soul (as being of one entire essence); (am), 
ind. immediately after; after ; afterwards. — ja, m. 

‘ next-born,’ the son of a Kshatriya or Vaisya mother 
by a father belonging to the caste immediately above 
the mother’s, Mn. x, 41. — jata, m. id., Mn. x, 6; 
also the son of a Sudra mother by a Vaisya father. 

A'n-antaraya, as, m. non-interruption, SBr. Sc 
PJBr.; (cf. antaraya.) 

Au-aatarayam, ind. without a break, SBr. Sc 
Ait Br. 

An-antarita, mfn. not separated by any inter¬ 
stice ; unbroken. 

An-antarlti, is, f. not excluding 01 passing 
over, TS.; AitBr. 

Anantarlya, mfn. concerning or belonging to 
the next of kin, &c„ (gana gahadi, q. v.) 

'Wrl'fi’ffhf an - an tar - hit a, mfn. f '/dhd), not 

concealed, manifest; not separated by a break. 

a-nanda , mfn. joyless, cheerless; 
(as), m. pi., N. of a purgatory, Up. 


an-apadesa, as , m. an invalid ar¬ 


■^r^tdn-andha, mfn. not blind, TBr. &c. 

an-anna > am, n. rice or food unde¬ 
serving of its name, SBr. xiv. an- apadhriskya, ind. p. not hay* 

an-anyd , mf(a)n. no other, not an- over P ov ^ ere ^.- AitBr. 
other, not different, identical; self; not having a j an-apanihitam, ind. Without 

second, unique ; not more than one, sole ; having i leaving out anything, SBr. 

no other (object), undistracted ; not attached or de¬ 
voted to any one else, TS. — gati, f. sole resort or 
resource. <— gati or -gatika, mfn. having only one j 
(or no other) resort or resource left. ~ garniu, [ 
mfn. going to no other. — gtiru, m. ‘having no j 
other as a Guru,’ N. of Krishna, Sis, i, 35. — citta, J SBr. xiv. 
mf(«j)n. or -cetas, mfn. giving one’s undivided J 
thought to (with loc.) — codita, mfn. self-impelled. 

—ja, nr., N. of Kama or Love. «*t&, f. or -tva, 
n. identity. — driskti. mfn. gazing intently, j 
— deva, mm. having no other god. — niskpadya, 
mfn. to be accomplished by no other. =— pnrva, f. 
a female who never belonged to another, a virgin, 

Ragh. — pratikriya, rnfn. having no other means j 

^ ♦TO*? fifa«-flpffyii«,iDd.('*witli 

apa ?), 1 before the sun makes a start,’ very early, L. 

OTTO* an-apard , mfn. without another; 

ingle, sole (as N. of Brahma), 

having no follower ; s 

WTTOS dn-apardddha, mfn, one who has 
not injured anybody, MBh ; faultless, SBr.; (dm), 
ind. without injury, SBr. xiv, 

An-aparadka, as, rn. innocence, innocuousness; 
| (mfn.), innocent, faultless; free from defects. — tva* 
n. freedom from fault. 

Anapar&dkln, mfn. innocent. 

of resistance or redress. — bkava, mfn. originating j WZWftllpfianrapalashuka, mfn. not thirsty, 

in or with no other. — bkava, mfn. thinking oi j p - ■ . - c.u 

the only one, i.e. of the Supreme Spirit. — manas j w / 

or ^niAiiaaka or -m&nasa, mtn. exercising un- j an-Q-pavacana, mtn. inipossible 

divided attention, —yoga, m. not suitable to any I to be talked away or wished away, AV. viii, 8, 9, 

others; (am), ind. not in consequence of any other j ^^53 an-apavrijyd, mfn. not to be 
(word), RPrit. —viskay a, min. exclusively appii- . , : * c . 

cable. _vi,h*yitman. mfn. having the mind ! Wished (as a way; tree from objects that should be 

^ t \ % • . A r 1 chunnpil ur.ntirff S^V V KV. I. T Au. 2 . 

nxed upon one ^or the sole) ooject. — vritti, mtn. 
closely attentive. — s&dkarana, mfn. not com- 
rnon to any one else, not belonging to any other. 

— krita, mtn. not carried off by another, safe. 

Ananyanubkava, m., N. ot the teacher of Pra- 
kasatman. Anauyartka, mfn. not subservient to 
another object; principal. Jknany&srita, mfn. not 
having resorted to another; independent; (am), n. 

(ia law) unencumbered property. 

An-anyadrisa, mf(z)n.not like others, Katb:as. 

an-unvaya, as, rn. want of con¬ 
nexion ; (in rhetoric) comparison of an object with 
its own ideal, (as, 'a lady-like lady,’) 

An-anvita, mfn. unconnected, inconsecutive, 
desultory, incoherent, irrelevant, irregular; not at¬ 
tended with, destitute of. 

dn-anvavaedra [SBr.] or an - 

anvavdya [MaitrS.], as, in. or dn-unvavdyana 
[SBr.], am, n. (\/'car and x'i with anu and ava), j 
not following or going after any one (in a sneaking j 
manner). j 

dn-anvdbhakta, mfn. (x / hhaj) % j 
not receiving a share, not interested in (ioc.), SBr. 

'KrtTO an-apa , mfn destitute of water, L, 

i shunned as impure,’ Say,), RV. i, 146, 3. 

an-apavyayat (apa-vy-ayat ), 


mfn. unremitting, RV. vi, 75, 7. 

an-apasara, rnfn. ‘having no hole 
to creep out of,’ inexcusable, unjustifiable ; (as), m. 
a usurper, Mn. viii, 198. 

An-apasarana, am, n. not leaving a place or 
withdrawing from it, SBr. 

dri-apaspris , mfn. not refusing, 

not obstinate, AV. 

dn-apasphur [RV. viii, 69, 10] 

or dn-apasphura [RV. vi, 48,11], mf(6)n. or an - 
apasphurai [RV. iv, 42,10; AV.], mfn. ‘ not with¬ 
drawing,’ not refusing to be milked (said of a cow). 

an-apahata-papman , mfn. 
j (said of the Pitris to distinguish them from the 
Dcvas> not freed from evil, SBr. 

An-apakanana, am, a. not repelling from, PBr. 

an-apdkarana, am, n. (in law) 

non-payment, non-delivery. 

An-apffkarman, a, n. id. 

an-a pay a, mfn. without obstacles, 

prosperous; fhz.n, rn. freedom from mischief; (in 

an-apakarana . am, n. (in law) | phil.) the state of not being abridged or deprived of 

non-payment, non-delivery. 

An-apa£arman, a, n. id., M11. viii, 4. 

An-apak5ra, as, m. harmlessness. 

An-apakSrin, mfn. not harming, innocuous. 

An-apakrita, mfn. unharmed; (am), n. 110 of¬ 
fence, MBh. 

An-apakriya, f.» an-apakarana, Mn. 

(abi.); N. of Siva. 

' Anapayin, mfn. not going or passing away; 
| constant in the same state ; invariable. 

dn-apdvrit, ind. without turning 

away, unremittingly, RV. vi, 32, 5 & x, 89, 3. 

'S*W^ a n-ap a s r a y a , t n f n. n 01 d e p e n d e it t. 

a-napunsaka , am, n. (in Gr.) not 

a neuter. 

an-apupiya or an-apdpya, mfn. 

unfit for cakes. See a pupa. 

an-apakursha, as, m. ( krisk ), 

m. non-degradation, superiority. 

dn-apak, m . not goi 1 1 ga way. 

An-apakramin, mfn. not departing from ; de¬ 
voted, attached to. 

An-apakrama, as, m, not retreating or with¬ 
drawing from, AitBr. 

An-apakramuka, mf(<?)n. not running away, 

MaitrS. ; PBr. 

du-upagu [T'S.] or an-apaga ! SBr j. j having no reference to, since (it) lias no reference to. 


• ^Trft^ an-apekshu , mfn. regardless, care¬ 

less; indifferent; impartial; irrespective of; irrele- 
j vant; ( d ), f. disregard, carelessness; (dn-apeksham), 
j ind. irrespectively, carelessly, SBr. —tva, n. dis¬ 
regard; irrelevance; irrespectiveness; {at), ind. from 

mf(<z)n. not depamog bom (abl. or in comp.) 

Au-apekskita, mfn. disregarded ; unheeded ; 
j unexpected. 

-apekskin, mfn. regardless of; indifferent to. 
- ap dksky a, i nd. p. disrega r ding, i t re spec t i v e.o f. 

wrfxnzpr dn-apacyuta , mfn. not falling 
off, holding fast (a yoke), RV. x, 93, 12 ; never j 

! dropping off, keeping to or faithful for ever, RV. c , 

1 b ’ r “ . j an apeta, mfn, not gone off, not 

an-apa jay yam, ind. {v'ji), ho j p2St . not separated, faithful to, possessed of. 
that its victorious character cannot be reversed, SBr. 

^5'form an-apatyd, mf(a)n*childless; [dm), 

a. childlessness, RV. iii, 54, 18. — ta, i. childless- j 
ness, Sak. See. - vat (anapatyn -), rnfn, childless, AV. j 
Anap&tyaka, mfn. childless. | 


WW an-apatrapa, mfn. shameless. I 

an-apoddkdryd , mfn. of which 


! nothing is to be taken off, SBr 

an-apt a, m f n .not watery, R V. i x, 16,3. 

Winra an-apnds, rnfn. destitute of means, 

RV, ii, 23, 9, [cf Lab mops, j 




an-apsaras , as, f. unlike an Apsa* j WTfRft**?^ an-amitam - 

ras, unworthy of an Apsaras. cooking what has not rust been 

anapha, f. a particular configuration j n,1 “ eri - v ( nntam-fu< a, a. v.) 

- paea , mfn. ‘ not j -sada, m. dyspepsia. Anal&nanda, m., N. of a 
measured, niggardly, i ^cddiitu. wiiter, author oi the \edSuta-kalpataru. 

) I an-alarnkarishnu , mfn. not 

* V ^ - * 

of the planets. [Gk. dua<pr}. 

j **iw an-arnitrd, mfn. having no ene- ; given to the use of ornaments; unornamented. 

an-abkijna, mfn. unacquainted I A V ^ n ; the having 110 enc ‘ I " lt ‘ s ’ l A , V * ; ! ind. not enough; in- 

,v ^. J . ... 1 j \s.; (as), m. f N. oi various persons, particulariy a | sufficiently> 

with, ignorant. Comm, on Mn. ii, 125. kijig of Ayodhy3j I-" v ’ 

dn-abkidruk, mfn. not malicious, ssepfcc an-arnivd , mf(fl)n.,Ved. free from | an ~ aIosa * mfn ‘ not laz >’» actlve ‘ 

RV. ii, 41, 5. disease,well,comfortable; salubrious,salutary; (<jV), (Mali, is, in. the tree Sesb&na 

tt-3- li • it. good health, happv state. RV. x, 14, IJ . Gmidi flora. 

'sTnTMTTn an-aohipreta , am, n. an occur- 6 ’ T ^ 

rence different from what was intended. an-ambara, mfn. wearing no cloth- an-alpa , mfn. not a little, much, 

WTftlWK an-abhibhuta, mfn. not overcome, naked; <**>• m ' a mendicam ; ct •*& | num ' !10us - -* hosha " "«»• ™7 clamorous, very 

V , . i amour a. . noisy. — raanyu, min. great lv enraged, 

unsurpassed; not beset, unobstructed. ! 0 ' b 

ambara. j noisy, —raanyu, min. greatly enraged. 

***** an-abhimata, mfn, not to one’s [ . ^*■ «*». bad management; ***** an-avakaia, mf(«)n. having no 

mind disliked H : t ^ conduct (, &c.) opportunity or occasion; uncalled tor, inapplicable, 

.. , , - . , , . 2 .an-aita, as, m. evil course, ill luck; P* 1 . 1 * h 4 > C Seh. 

vTJiTHhi*1*1 an-aOhimanuka, mfn. not hav- . x - , . __ 

v *. . .. .. Tl misfortune, adversity; {ct.ayonaya s.v. ay a.) Ana- an-acakrdmam ind not aten- 

mg evil intentions against face.), Ma,«rt>.; AitBr. yam . g ^ t mfli . [ a n e!i h ' c H dio mine. ^ * ?“ ’ lna - not ste P 

^Hm^TfT an-abhi-mlata , mfn. unladed. mi-nr any a, as, m., N. of a king of ! p _ . , , _ . 

- varna ( auabhimlala -), mfn. of unladed colour AyodhvJ; aid bv somt . t „ tol . c ^ p r , thu ’ 5 f athc r. mfn. ( v>A), not 

or brightness, RV. ii, 35, 13. ‘ dipping into, not studying. 

An-abhimlaua, ar, m. * non-fading,’ N. of the , ^Trf^^an-an^, mfn. not sore or wounded, | An-avagahya, mfn. unfathomable. 

chief of a Gotra, (gana UvddL q. v.) SBr, J , 

r c tm-aeaqita , mfn. not made an 

an-abhirupa , mfn. not eorre- an-argala, min. without bars or object of contemptuous song, uncensured. 

sponding; not handsome, not pleasing.« checks, free, licentious. 

_r' r_ v t , , , . > , ,, Ttf^man-avayraha, mfn. resistless; not 

^mBTKpr an-abhilak&hita , a&\ rn. desti- ^•fMan-ar^Aa, min. priceless, invaluable; tQ ^ interr led 

tute of (right) marks or symbols,* an impostor. m. wrong value. — ragrbava, n.,N. oi a drama , 

WwtfT .. , r , (by Murari, treating of Ranu). \*K\an-avaglayat, mfn. not growing 

an-abrnlasha , as, m, non-relish; j An-arghya, mm. priceless, invaluable, Kum. i, remiss, AV. iv, 4, 7. 

want of appetite ; want of desire. ! 50 .See .; not valuable, L. —' tva, 11. pricelessness, Hit. j „ . . 

An-abMlSshin, mfn. not desirous. ^ _ y . . _ . an-avacc/tmna, mfn. not inter- 

- T 2 ? + + an-arjuna, mfn. without Arjuna, i seeled, uninterrupted; not marked off, unbounded, 

vinTHq \^an-uonivaduka, mfn. not greet- 0 • 4 . Y • . t v.- - 

o ’ b .»lDh. inmuxierate; uudiscriimnated. —liaBa, m. conti- 

>ng* GopBu; * ait. _ nHln n* rr non-valnp • r* w«»rth- nuous or immoderate laughter. 

An-abhivadya, mm. not to be greeted. an anna,as , m, non value, a worm & 

vrafirans «» nhkinmktn mfn in.lUtim-f i less or uselcsf nt.iect; di»ap(«-iiiting occwrcoce, j ***HW an-avatapta, at, m., N. of a ser- 

«»- a nuy°“«> m1n ' indistinct. , rcverse , ; u ,hO, worthy useless, pen, king, Buddl,.; of a lake (- Ra«i,a-h«da), ib. 

dn-abhisastu [RV. ix, 88, 7* or I bad; untortuiute ; having no meaning ; having not 7 

An-abhisasti [VS.] or an-abhisastenya [VS.] or | that (hut another] meaning; nonsensical, -kara, amwat-tva. feee v «». 

dn-abhisastya [Naigli.], mfn. blameless, faultless. | nitn. doing what is useless or worthless; unprofitable; an-avadyd , mf(o)n. irreproachable, 

an-abhishanqa or an-ab his hv ah- ! £ ru '' liai J£ t . v, l or nustortune. — tva, n. uselessness, | f au j t j ess . unobjectionable; (a), h, N. of an Apsaras. 
^ ^ u " VJI an uunism in j -aarsin, nun. nmiduur useless or worthless j f .„ Q T , u\' ’ 

S a,as^n. absence of connection or attachment. | thing,, -nasin, m. KnUlestroyer, -bud- : , m({d)n of faultless foinl or beaut KV _ 

an-abhisandhiinu, am. n. ab- ! "»»• ha ; m ^ * wor,llless m " ,!<:ct - ”' ,llava ’ I x, 68, 3 , &c. Anavadyihga., mf(f)n. having 

sence of desietl: disinterestedness. mm ha,-mg a uad nature, man emus. - lupta, mm. I ( ^ ^ 0 , limbs . 

song, uncensured. 

^rflW^Y^an-abhivaduka, mfn. not greet- ^ q ^ a 

ing, GopBr.; Vait. , , 

An-abhivadya, mfn. not to be greeted. an-artha, as, in, non-value; a wort h- 

... ,, .. > s • .1 less or useless object ; disappointing occurrence, 

an-abhwyaktu, mtn. indistinct. Tt . vw . evil . n( , n , Mw: in L 

m - absence of connection or attachment. i things, -nasin, m. ‘ Kvil-destroyer,’ Siva, -bud- 

an-abhisandhana , am, n. ab- j *hi, inrn. having a worthless intellect. — bliava, 

. r . . t ' mtn. having a bad nature, mancious. —lupta, mm. 

sence ot design; disinterestedness. , • 

.. . ° . .. ;• , treed trorn ah that is worthless. — samsaya, m, 

An-abhisandlii, 2j, m. id. — krita, min. done ! . , J 

, . * I non-risk ot money or wealth. 

an ava dr ana, mfn. (\/ dr a), not 

j • i > uvu-ii;r\ vi inonv.) vi rruiun, j ■ ^ — , ' - \ » "' — /y — 

1 Y ' An-artbaka, mfn. useless, vain, worthless; going to sleep, not sleepy, AV. viii, I, 13. 

an-abhisambandha, mfn. un* meaningless, nonsensical. -Tj-=rrr\rm j; 1 " (a\ a . 

connected; (as), m. no connection. An-arthya, mtn. worthless, useless, bBi. ... 

’ v n y , be defied, AV vm, 2, 10. 

an-abhisneha, mfn. without af- . ^ uni > n ; "on-surrender- an . avadhina> am< n . inatt ention, 

fection, cold, ummpassioned, Bhag. in & n ' d " P ' A ’ * i3 ‘ , inadvertence ; (mfn.), imttentive, careless. - tS, f. 

dn-abhihita , mfn. not named; fl!MGrmaw » — an-arvan 9 q. v., inadvertency. 

not fastened, SBr. ; (<M), m., N. of the chief of a AV,v "’ 7, I- , ***f* an-avadhi, mfn. unlimited. 

Gotra, (gana upakadt , q.v.) an-arva , mtlnln. or an-arvart , mfn. 

***W mfn. without bridles, not tolw limited,„r>, tobe cdistructed, irresistible, RV. ***£!, mfn.unpossible 

* 5 An-arvana, mfn. id., RV, vm. 31,12; {as ■, m., to be put down or injured, SBr. 

havrng no bn es, R ^ _ j N- of the god POshan, RV. v, 51, .1 & x, 92. 1 4 . m f (J,, 3 7 )n.‘afford- 

( w-obhyanujhd , f. non-permis- j v? r\ fq dnar-vis , m. seated on the car j ing no help or protection,* causing distress; {am), n, 
s * on ' I (anas), a driver, RV. i, I 21, 7. j non-protection, P 5 n. i, 3, 66. 

an-abhyavacaruka , mf(c)n. | dn-arsani , is, rn., X. of a demon 

not attacking, MaitrS. s lain by Indra, RV. viii, 32, 2. /‘a, aj, in. ‘having victorious banners unlowered,* 

dn-nbh.yarv.dha, mfn. not as- dn-arsa-rati, mfn. giving un- ‘ «er glonous,’a future universe, Buddh. 

cended, not mounted, AV.; not attained, bSr. • 1 1 > .... 1 . nr ^*13TU14ii f/B-f/i'/innfjnrt tTifn (\ r n r?c] tint 

cn injurious tmngs, one whose gilts do not hurt, KV. •iniT'li an-uiupTiymi, unu. \\pru), not 

An-ahhyarohya, mfn. not to be ascended, SBr. Vm > ^ 9 ; 4 - closely umtea, but spreadmg aU around, -RV. ., 

***** an-abhyasa or an-abhydsa, mfn. an-arha, mf(i)n. or nn-arhat. mfn. . 

* j* * * *' _ vv, - ^ ,. - j undeserving oi punish meat or ot reward ; unworthy; T M an-uvabudnyamanct. mtn. de- 

not near, distant. An-abhyasam-itya, min. mi- . ° h • , . « J ’ 

proper to be approached. Pan. vi, 3, 70, Comm. inadequate, smsuitabie. ranged, L. 

’ Anar’aya-ta, t. the not being properly estimated; _____ / . 

an-abhydsa, as, m. want of prac- unworthiness; inadequacy, unsiiitableuess. dd an-avaorava, mfn. (vorit), irre- 

tice or skill. , r / \ a 1 i proachabie, RV'. x, 84, 

anoliu as, m. { v an), fire; the god ^ v *> 

an-abhra, mf(a)n. cloudless, -vri- 0 f fire; digestive power, gastric juice; bile, L.; wind, * 3=1 an- avabhrd-radhas, mfn. 

sbti, f. ‘'cloudless rain/ any unexpected acquisition L.; N. ofVasudeva : of a Muni; of one of the eight. | (i/bhri), having or giving undiminished (or durable) 

or advantage, Kir. in, 5. Vasus; of a monkey ; of various plants (Plumbago I wealth, RV. 

An-abhraka, as, m. pi. ‘cloudless.’ N. of a class Zeylanica and Ros'ea ; Semicarpus Anacrdium); | *^ „a- a „ ama ,mf(a)n.notl(XW; exalted, 

ot divinities, Buddh. the letter r; tne number three; (in astron.) the k y 

an-abhri mfn not dug out with a 1 fittieth >' ear of Brihaspati’s cycle; the third lunar dn-acamarsam, ind. without 

spade (said „f rain-waterl. AV. ’ ' I “ Kpttika C?). -da (fr 3 - da), mfn. toucfa j ng , SBr.' 

* x ' r t -'^hmrr fira / i'nd nr nnitPr i Kir 1 ^ A 

mansion or Kfittika (?), « da (fr 3. da), mtn, ! touching SBr. 

^ * r / * f \ T ^ ^ ^ -1 ~ I 

„„ ■ a a a . | quenching hre (said m water), Km v, 2 n . - dipana, An-avamrisya, mfn. not fit to be touched, SBr. 

vr^Mi a-nama, as, m. one who makes no ; mfn, exciting the digestion, stomachic. — prahhii, 

Salutation to others/ a Brahman, L, f, the plant Halicacaburn Cardiospeniium. —priya, (ill-UV(ITa, mtn. not inferior; ex- 

A-aamasytt { mfn. not bowing, RV. x, 48,6. f. Agra’s wife. m., K. of ancient Pattana. j cellent. 

*r?TTO an-ax aval a. 



an-avarata, mfn. incessant; (am), 

inch incessantly. 

an-avaratha, as, in., N. of a son 

of Madhu and father of Kuruvatsa, VP. 

*«TCTU| an-avarardhya , mfn. chief, prin¬ 
cipal, L. 

an^avalamba, mfn. having no 

support, not propped up. 

An-avai&mbana, am, n. independence. 
An-avalambita, mfn. not supported or propped 

up, not dependent 


TOW an-avalepa, mfn. free from ve¬ 
neer, unvarnished, plain, unassuming. 

_ V 

TOTOWT an-avalobkana , am, n. (for 
°lopana , ‘ cutting off/ Comm.), N. of a ceremony 
observed by a pregnant woman to prevent miscarriage 
(treated of in an Upanishad), AsvGf. 

an-avasa, mfn. (probably fr. vso 

with <zz>a), not making to halt, not stopping, RV. vi, 

66, 7. 

^STtT^X an-avasara, mfn. having no inter¬ 
val of leisure, busy; coming when there is no such 
interval, inopportune; (as), m. absence of leisure ; 

an-avasddya , ind, p. (Cans, of 

ava-Vsact), not discouraging, not annoying, 

an-avasdna, mfn. ( x'so), having 

no termination, free from death ; endless. 

An-avasita, mfn. not set, not terminated ; (a), 
f., N. ot’ a species of the Trishtubh metre (consisting 
of four lines with eleven feet in each). 

A'n-avasyat, mfn. unceasing, RV. iv, 13, 3. 

444 «hT an-avaskara , mfn. free from dirt, 

clean, cleansed. 

an-avast ha , mfn. unsettled, un¬ 
stable ; (d), f. unsettled condition or character ; in¬ 
stability, unsteady or loose conduct; (in phil.) non- 
finality (of a proposition), endless series of statements. 

Au-avasthana, min. unstable, fickle, BhP.; 
(as), m. wind ; (am), n. instability; unsteadiness 
or looseness of conduct. 

An-avasihayin, mfn. transient. 

An-avasthita, mfn. unsettled, unsteady, loose in 
conduct. — citta, mfn. unsteady-minded — citta- 
tva, n. unsteadiness of mind. — tva, n. unsteadiness, 

An-avasthiti, is, f. instability ; unsteadiness; 
looseness of character. 

an-ava-syat. See an-avasdna. 
an-avahita, mfn. heedless, in¬ 


dn-avahvara , mfn. not crooked, 

Straightforward, RV. ii, 41, 6. 

an-avdc, mfn. not speechless. 

^•T^T^an-avanc, ah, del, ah, not inclining 
downwards, looking up or straightforward. 

dn-avanat, mfu, (\ an), not 
taking breath, not respiring, SBr. 

An-av&nam, iud. without breathing between, 
m one breath, without interruption, uno tenore, 
AitBr. Anav&na-ta, f. uninterruptedness, con¬ 

an-avdpta, mfn. not obtained. 
An*avfipti, is, f. non-attainment. 

an-avdyd, mfn. uninterrupted,un¬ 
yielding, RV. vii, 104, 2. 

an-amthya t mfn. (fr. avi , q. v,), 
not suited to sheep. 

an-avtksha, mfn. regardless ; (am), 

ind. irrespectively; without regard to; (a), for 
asi-avekskaim, n. regardlessness. 

an-avrata , mfn. not destitute of 
ascetic exercises; Uzs), rn. a jaina devotee of that 

dn-asana , am, n. abstinence from 
io-jd. fasting (especially as a form of suicide adopted ( 

! from vindictive motives); (mfn.), fasting. —15 
(anasana-), f. not eating, SBr. 

An-asanaya, mfn. not hungry, SBr. 

An-aszta, am, n. condition of not having eaten, 

An-asnat, mfu. not eating, RV, i, 164, 20. &c. 
An -asnan~t-san£pama:n.a, in. the sacrificial fire in 
the Sabh 5 (which is approached be fore breakfast), SBr. 
An -asnana, mf(<z)n_ not eating. 

an-asru, mfn. tearless, RV. x, 18, 

7; VS. 

an-asvd , mfn having no horse or 
horses, RV. fcf. dwinros]; (as), m. something that 
| is not a horse, Pa neat, —da (dn-asva-), mfn. one 
who does not give horses, RV. v, 54, 5. 

wpsrcr an-asvan, a , m., N. of Parlkshit s 
father, MBh. 1, 3793 seqq. 

nasvara, mfn. imperishable. 

A-nasbta, mfn. undestroyed,un impaired. — pasu 
i (iinashta-), mfn. having one's cattle unimpaired, 
j RV. x, 1 7, 3. —ved&s (dnashia-), rum. having 
one's property unimpaired, RV. vi, 54, 8. 

anas, ns, n, ( s' a n , Un.), a cart, RV. 

&c.; a mother, L.; birth, L.; offspring, living creature, 
L.; boiled rice, L. —vat (anas-), mfu. yoked to a 
cart, RV.; AY. 

Anad-tth, anar-vis, ano-ratha, &c. Sees.v, 

un-asuya , mfn. not spiteful, not 
envious; (a), f. freedom from spite ; absence of ill- 
| will or envy; N. of a daughter of Daksha ; of one 
of Sakuntala’s friends. 

An-asuyaka or an-asuyu, mfn. not spiteful or 

an-a-suri , is, m. not unwise, in¬ 
telligent, ChUp. 

’STTOfarT dn-astam-ita, mfn. not gone 

down; not subject to setting or declining. 

an-asthd f RV. viii. 1, 34 ; AV.] or 

an-dsthaka [MaitrS.] or an-asthdn [RV. i, 164, 4; 
Mn.] or an-as t hi [KatySr.) or an as! hika [TS.] 
or an-dsthika [SBr.; Yajn.] or anasthi-mat, mfn. 



an-ahamkara,a$, m. non-egotism, 

I absence of self-conceit or of the tendency to regard 
self as something distinct from the Supreme Spirit; 
freedom from pride; (mfn.), free from self-conceit. 
An-ahasnkrita, mfn. free from self-conceit. 

* P 9 

An-ahamkriti, is, f. -an-ahamkdra ; (mfn.), 
free from self-conceit 01 pride. 

An-altazn-vadin , mfn. — an-ahamkrita. 


F an-ahan , as. n. a non-day, no day, 

an evil or unlucky day, L. 


^■^FT and, ind. (fr. pronom. base a), hereby, 
thus, indeed, RV. 

an-dkara , mfn. shapeless. 
an-dkdrita, mfn. not claimed, 

not exacted. 

dn-akdla, as, m. unseasonable 

time, SBr.; (in law-books' 1 ! famine, — bhrita, m. 

a slave who became so voluntarily to avoid starvation 


in a time of scarcity (also spelt anndkdla-bhrita). 

an-dkasd , rnfn. having no ether 

cr transparent atmosphere, differing from ether, SBr, J 
xiv; opaque, dark; (am), n. non-ether, 

an-dkula, mf(d)n. not beset; not 

confused ; unperplexed, calm, consistent, regular. 

WTTfiT an-akrita , mfn. unreclaimed, un- 

reclaimable. RV. j, 141, 7; not taken care of, PBr. J 

an-akrdnta, mfn. unassailed, un- 1 
assailable; (d), f. the Prickly Nightshade (Solatium 

an- dkshdrita, mfn. 


an-dkshit, mfn. not resic 

•esting, SBr. 

k Z* 



’5TRT 3 Tff 

See dn-dgas . 

not arrived ; future ; not attained, not learnt.; un¬ 
known ; (am), n. the future, — vat, mfn. connected 
•with or relating to the future. — vidbatri, m. ‘dis¬ 
poser of the future,’ provident; N, of a fish, Pa neat, 
Anagfat^badha, m. future trouble. Anag^atiir- 
tava, i. a girl who has not yet attained to puberty. 
Anagatavekshana, n. act of looking at that which 
is not yet come or the future. 

An-agati, is, f. non-arrival; non-attainment; 
( non-accession. 

An-agama, as, m. non-arrival; non-attainment; 
(mfn.), not come, not present; (in law) not con¬ 
stituting an accession to previous property, but pos¬ 
sessed from time immemorial, and therefore without 
documentary proof. Auagamopablioga, m. en¬ 
joyment of such property. 

A'n-agamisbyat, rnfn. one who will not ap¬ 
proach, AV. 

Aa-agamya, mfu. unapproachable, unattainable. 

An-agamin, rnfn. not coming, not arriving ; not 
future, not subject to returning ; (I), m., N. of the 
third among the four Buddhist orders 

Att-affamuka, min. not in the habit of coming, 
i not likely to come, Pan. vi, 2, 160, Sch. 

I ^snTPT$( dn-dgas, mfn. sinless, blameless, 
j RV. &c.; (an-dgds), mfn. not injuring, P.V. x, 165, 2, 
i Anaffas-tva, n. sinlessness, RV. Anago-hatya, 
j f. murder of an innocent person, AV. x, I, 29. 

! A-u-a^a, mf(<z)n. sinless, RV.; (a), t, N. of a river. 

dn-agurtin, mfn. one who has 

not recited the Agur, SBr. 

^ 7 *TT^T)?IT an-dcarana , am, n. non-perform¬ 
ance of what is right or customary, improper be¬ 
haviour ; misconduct. 

An-acara, as, m. id.; (mfn.), improper in beha¬ 
viour ; regardless of custom or propriety or law; 
unprincipled ; uncommon, curious, Kaus. 

Anacariu, mfn. not acting properly. 

an- deary a-bhogina , mfn. 

unfit or improper fora spiritual teacher toeat or enjoy. 

dn-achrinna , mfn. not poured 

upon, TS. 



^rsn 3 Trr?[ dn-djdnat, mfn. (VjnS), not 

learning or perceiving, AV. 

An-ajnapta, mfn. not commanded. — karin, 
mfn. doing what has not been commanded. 

An-ajhata, mfn. unknown, surpassing all that 
has ever been known ; (dn-ajnatam), ind. in an 
unknown, 1. e. inexplicable way or manner, TS. 

! an-adhya , rnfn. not wealthy, poor, 

SBr. See. An-adbyam-bbavisliELU, mfn. not 
becoming wealthy, becoming poor (?), Pan. vi, 2, 
j6o, Sch. 

WtTTrT dn-dtata, mfn. not stretched or 

strung, VS. 

an-dfapa , as, in. freedom from the 

blaze of the sun ; shade ; (mfn.), shady. 

an-atura [once dn-atura , AV. xii, 

2, 49], mfu. free from suffering or weariness, RV. 
&c.; well. 

an-dfman, a, m. not self, another; 

something different from spirit or soul; ( an-dtmdn ), 
mfn. not spiritual, corporeal; destitute of spirit or 
mind, SBr. 

An-atma (in comp, for cm-at man). — jna, mfn. 
destitute of spiritual knowledge or true wisdom. 
— pratyaveksha, f. reflection that there is no 
spirit or self, Buddh. — vat, mfn. not self-possessed ; 
(vat''', ind. unlike one’s self. 

An-Stmaka, mfn. unreal, Buddh. 
An-atmanxna, mfu. not adapted to self; dis¬ 

An-atmya, mfn. impersonal, TUp.; (am), n. 
want of affection for one's own fimily, BhP. 

^rfTfPT»tf an-dtyantika , mfn. not per¬ 
petual, not final; intermittent, recurrent. 

TO a-ndtha, mf(a)n. having no master 

or protector ; widowed ; fatherless; helpless, poor ; 
(dm), n. want of a protector, helplessness, RV, x, 
10, 11. — pinda-da or -pindika, m. ‘giver of 
cakes o” foc>d to the poor,’ N. of a merchant (in 
whose garden Sakvaniuni used to instruct his dis¬ 
ciples). *■ sabita, f. a poor-house. 


Win? a ndda. 

WTsrigs (ih-dvraska. 

a-nada. as. rn, absence of sound (in ) ^tHTSfW anap/uta, lufu. unoattied, un 

' j V 

pronouncing aspirated letters), RPrat. washed. Au-aplutanga, min,having anunwashe- 

. f 

an - aramband, m fn . (for andlarn- 

, miii. not sounding. 

pronouncing aspirated letters), RPrat. washed. Au-aplutaitga,min,having anunwashed ! band), having no support, SBr, xiv ; ChUp. 

A-nadin, mm. not sounding. I body, MBh. j ^RTT***T an-dm mb hand, rnfn. intangible, 

an-adaddna, inf n. not accepting, j anabayu , in., N. of a plant, AV. j giving no support, RV.,; SBr.; BrArUp. 


^T*fT^C an-ddara , as, rn, disrespect, eon- ^Tf^TTV au-dbddha . mtu. free from ob- ^ •dT^iSr an-anihyu/uux. p. not having sur- 

temptuous neglect; {ati-ddard), mfn. indifferent, j stades or troubles. mounted. 

SBr.; Chop, j an-abhayin, mfn. fearless (N. of ! an-drcgya , am, n. sickness; 

An-Sdara^ta, am, n. disrespectful behaviour, Indra), RV. viii, 2, I. | (mfn.), unhealthy. —kara, mfn. unwholesome, un- 

^An-adarin, mfn. disrespectful, irreverent. WH^dn-abhu, mfn. neglectful, disoblig- j bcait;i>^earning ^kness. 

An-adrita, mfn. not respected, disrespected. ing, RV, i, 51, 9; MaitiS. * 1 ^ an-drjava, am, n. crookedness, 

An-adritya,ind.p,without respecting,regardless. an-dbhyuikyika, mfn. in- | “‘oral or physical; disease, L. 

an-ddi, mfn. having no beginning, auspicious, ill-omened, unlucky. I dn-drta , mfn. not sick, well. 

existing from eternity. - tva, n. state of having no d-naman, mfn nameless, S lit . xiv; A'n-Srti, is, f. painlessness. 

beginning, —nidhana, mfn. having neither begin- i . , )• ^ , c . u , 

—..-.-i _ .. L. i infamous, ( t 7),m. tlie rmg-hnger, Heat. Auarna* VRTfTC an-urtapa. rnf'n. unseasonable. 

’srttt dn-drta, mfn. not sick, well. 

An-arti, is, f. painlessness. 

ning nor end, eternal, — mat, mfn. having no be- | 

; tva, n. namelessuess. 

>Sf?TfT^ an-drtava, mfn. unseasonable. 

ginning. -madhyinta,mfn.having no beginning, ; ‘’Xaamaka/mfn.’nameless, infamous; (as), rn. j ^ an-artvijina, mfn, unfit or 
middle or end. Auady-ananta, mfn. without be- j the : ritercalary riiomh ; (am)tpi | es , hemorrhoids. ! unsuitable for a priest. 

ginningan witiouten > _P- , n “ mtn - A'-n&mikS, L the ring-huger, SBr. xiv, &c. I on-drua mfn not honourable or 

without beginning and end; {as), m., N. ot Siva. j 0 j -in' an ary a , mm. nor, iron oura rue 01 

a,~,c* w / - 7 ■ c , * •• , j i anatnand. as or am, m. or n., N. 1 respectable, vulgar, inferior; destitute of Aryas: 

an-adtskta, mfn. not indicated; - . Atr ’ ’ * i ,* , * 5 t . * . 

M , , . * ’ ,, , ot a disease, A V. {as), m. not an Arya. — karmin, m. doing work 

not commanded or instructed J not allowed. . .. ,,i, . unbecoming a.t Arv'a or becoming only a non-Arva. 

j- ? c ui . c: • wThThh an-amaya, tiihajn, not pernicious, ' • . 6 . 3 . , N 7 

an-adinavas mfn. faultless, ois. • v ! —ja, mtn. ot vile or unworthy origin ; (am), 11. 

c AV ; ’ ,ree ,rum d, f a *> ,,e » lth -'' **"“»»**; (<‘ 0 » j Agallnchum, being a produce'of the country of 

WIT^W un-adnta. See an-adara. m. ; { am), n. he*th. .... or barbarians -JusHta, mtn. practised, 

an-ddeya, mtn. unfit oc improper ! ^ ^ b * vik " 

to be received, unacceptable, inadnustble. An-amayttnu, min. saiubnous, curative, RV , d|W , lant Uetrti.uaCheravta. -tva, n. -id, q. v. 

WfT^ , ' 9 l^liTa«ttrfestt-^flrfl,rnfn.doingwhat x> * 3 '*./* An-aryaka, n. Agallochum or Aloe wood 

is not commanded or not allowed, BhR XTtTTfRf^ d-ndrain, mfn. unbending, RV. (Aqtdla Agallocha). 

WTT«r i. an-ddya , rnfn. == q.vy 1 A ‘ n5my& ' ,aln - inav ’ SSible t0 ht beat - ! un-dr aha , mfn. not belonging to a 

-j a />.- — > / , . , an-dmisku. mfn. without flesh; j Rishi or to a Vedic hymn; not belonging to the 

WTTO 2 . an,ady« mfta)n. (= a «-<t<Vl.not profitIe . t Samh.tS text (e.*. the word Hi, added" for gnun- 

eataole, AV btir., Mn. . , , matical purposes in the Pada-patha to certain words, 

W 1 W dn-ddhrish, in fa. («, not a*-.«yw, rntn. noenemy KI . ri0; I10t appiied to a Rishi, no. added to his 

checking, AV. vi, .1,3. ' ' that ran nnure, R\ . 1, 33, t, j name (as an affix), I>. iv, 78. 

A'n-adt l-ishta, mtn. unchecked, unimpaired, un-umnta, mfn. not struck by j A'n-arsieya, mfn. not connected with the Ftishis, 

invincible, perfect, RV.; VS. | death, TS. j ^ ‘ 

An-adiirish^i, is, m. ‘ superior to any check,’ j not handed down I an-dlamba , rnfn. unsupported, 

N. of a son of Sura ; of a son of Ugrasena (general | * n sacre .^ texts j without stay or support ; {as), in, want of support; 

of the Yadavas). . ! despondency; (D, f. Siva’s lute. 

An-adhriskya, mfn. invincible, not to be a-nayaka , ml(a)n. having no An-£lambana, rnfn. unsupported; desponding, 

meddled with, RV. &c, leader or ruler, disorderly. An-alambuka [Kath.] or better an-alam- 

^TfTTHd dn-anata , rnfn. unbent, not hum- dn-dyata, mfn. not tied or fasten- bhuka [FBr. ; KapS.], f. ‘intangible,’ a woman 

bled, RV.; (as), rn., N. of a Rishi of the SV. ed, RV. iv, 13, 5 Sc 14, 5 ; close, continuous, un- dur,u g menstruation. 

*rrmfn an-anuhityd,mtn.(anu Unarm), se P* iated » ^extended, having no length. an-dldpa, mfn. not talkative, re- 

inimitable, unparalleled,' RV. a, 68. ro & ill, 5. VWto* or an-iujntand. am, wm; {as), m. reserve, taciturnity. 

-n'-rY-2f=*T . a ^ _ „ 1 r.. that which is not really a resting-place or an Altar, 'H« 1 TF 5 Tr^W an-dlocita, mfn. unseen, un- 

. an-anuja, . (bei g) no yoii g r • SBr. ; , an-ayatand\, mfn. having no resting-place beheld ; unweighed, unconsidered, rash, imprudent. 

c.ctoe TG * w _ a \r _a. .. i . a : - r».. » _ . . 7 . r 

not commanded or instructed; not allowed. ' _ I .. », unbecoming an Arvi 

- i- ecu, i , c:« ^TtfT*i h an-Gi/iova, nift a ;n . not pernicious, I . . b 

an-admava, mfn. faultle 3 s, ois. . „ . . .. y ' . / ' i -ja, mm. of vile ■ 

e AV.; free from disease, healthy, salubrious; ; Agallnchum, being 

wi»T*Hr an-adnta. oee an-adara. 1 ^>vo • ..mA n h^nb • « • - -• 

WfT^IT {in-adrita* oee an-adara. | m. Siva; {ant), n. heauh. 

. . % . i Au-amayat, rnfn. 4 not causing pain' ( J yata) } 

an-adeya, rnfn. unfit or impioper , lls , r ilK j. good health, VS. 

to be received, unacceptable, inadmissible. An-aniayitnu v mfn. salubrious, curative, RV 

Wtfl^ ,, '3i^liTa«ttrfestt-^flrfl,rnfn.doingwhat x> i ^7» 7- 

is not commanded or not allowed, BhP. d-ndrain, mfn. unbending, R\. 

WTO i. an-orfya, an-adi, q.v. i wfn - ,0 bt bcr,t - 

« m a • r 

j name (as an affix), P 5 n_ iv, r, 78. 

I A'n-arslieya, mfn. not connected with theRishis, 
I AV. 

sister, TS, ; or altar, av. —vat, mtn. — the last, Attbr. An-alocya, ind. p. not having considered. 

an-dnuda, rnfn. (Vi. dd with dnu vtf^TT^ an-dijntta , mfn. independent, un- dn-dmyas, rnfn. (cf. drayd Ss d- 

for unu), not giving way., obstinate, RV. controlled, -vritti, rnfn. having an independent pravita), not having the’power of causing ccncep- 

msrafvT/ / •• j. , c ; / • •,» livelihood. -vritti-tS, t. independence. tion AV vii 00 x 

ctn-anudishfa, nun. ( pdis with ■ r non, . \u, 90, 3. 

dnu for anu), unsolicited, RV. x, 160 , 4. j . an-dyasdyra, mfn. having no | ’ 9 Rratfin?r.a»-a»arat««» > i»c«,m.pi.‘with- 

WIR?^ an-anupweya, am, n. separation I ... . out cover or clothes,’ N. of . religious •«*,(?-«*- 

. . an-ayasa, as, m. absence of ex'- am dam, q.v.). 

ot the dine rent parts 01 a compound word by the . * ... . . . „ . _ , 

intervention of others; the not coming 111 regular " r aci * )> vase, iu oies^neg v_ct, rntn.), easy, ^TrTfr^^ an-dmadha , mfn. not wounded, 
order, tmesis, RPrst. -samhltS, f. the manner of ”»%*»*)• ««.!>• -krite.rnfn.uor.e readny unhurt> RV . vi, 75, I, &c. 

constructing^a sentence with tire above tmesis. j extemf „ raueously , ‘ 1 ! ^nlf^ an-avila, tnfn. not turbid, clear, 

dn-dnubhuti, is, f. * inattention, j rnfn. weaponless-hav- I pure ' not marsh >'- 

neglect (tayas), pi. neglectful or irreligious people, ,., 0 im lenients (for sacrifice) RV . iv> . & WPjH dn-avrit, mfn. not returning, RV. 

^ l ViJi, 96 , 9 , X > 95^ r 4- 

an-dpad , f. absence of rnisfor- ! vsr^yrrm i - c - i- x v An-avritta, mfn. not turned about or round ; 

1 un-ayvsna, t. or an-ayus, f., JN. ot . * c. 4 * 

tune or calamity, Mn. L, . f . n ^ not retreating; not frequented or approached, AV.; 

* w . r.w* Bata and Vritra.. not chosen. 

; or altar, AV. — vat, mfn.—the last, AitBr. 


constructing a sentence with the above tmesis.. 

An-£panna y mfn. not realised, unattairicd; not 
fallen into distress. 

An-Syushya, mfn. not imparting long life, fatal j An-Svritti, is, f. non-return to a body, final 

m - - XT e • I to ,on ^ ( emancipation. 

vTnTMsn an-apana, as. in., IN. oi a prince j mrr-x , - ^ . i _, . . „ , * _ 

fson of An ■’a) 1 an-arata, rnfn. without interrupt ; dn-avrita , mfn. uncovered, SBr. 


(son of Anga). j 

dn-dpi , mf(nom. having no j 

tion, continual; {am ), ind, continually. 

j xiv, undressed ; un inclosed, open. 

MHiiy u/i-api. mi imm. in i u. tla-MUi/ no » - n r • t - 

friends RV x m V.- •'In.'r,' RV . ,i. „ , ! ^ ,mWI 1 a ^ubhya f mfu. improper or j an-ivrishti, is, f. want of rain, 

inends, K\. x, 39, o, , lnura„ Kv, .in, .1, i-j. ; impracticable to be commenced or undertaken, I 

. I * j uroiij'ni. 

dn-dpuyitu, li-fri. not stinking, i “tva, n. impossibility of being commenced, j „ -s . 

jQ r “ c j 2. Aa-arabhya f md. p, without commenring j n an-aveditti inin. not notified, 

, % ! 0 -ssed ih comp, in the sense ‘detached", — v£d&, I not made known. 

ta^Rv”i a C’ T &c '"‘the I m fcn T k(U[ T ““f c) Ae£ ' an-avyidha, mtn. impossible to 

enort to attain or obtain ; not apt, unfit, Mn. viii, j detached subject (not as part of a regular or anihori- 1>tr brokeu or ^ orced open > AV * x,v » ^ 6 4 * 

294 > ( a ‘ ; ] - rn - J* stranger. j tative treatise). j dn-dvraska, as, m. ( ^vrciic), not 

Amapti, is, t. non-attaimnent. | Axi-arambha, as, m. absence ot beginning, non- j failing or dropping oft, TS. ; uninjured condition, 

Au-£pya (4), min. unattainable, RV. vii, 66, i i ; j commencement, not attempting or undertaking ; j KaushBr.; {an-dvraskd^ mfn. not falling or drop- 

AitBr, j (mfn.), having no commencement. j ping off, AV. xii, 4,47. 

1. an-asa i, mfn. (fr. asa ), hopeless. 


2. a-ndsa , mfn. (v / 2. nas), unde- 

stroyed, living. 

1. A-nasin, mfn. imperishable. 

A~nasya, rnfn. indestructible. 

wnsra an-dsaka, owi, n. fasting, ab¬ 
staining from food even to death. — nlvritta, m. 
one who has abandoned the practice of fasting. 
Anasakayana, n. a course of fasting (as a pen¬ 
ance), ChUp. 

2 . An -asin, mfn. not eating. 

A'n-asvas, van, us hi, vat , not having eaten, 
fasting, TS. ; TBr. (without an the form would be 
asivas , see Pan. iii, 2, 109). 

an - asastd, mfn, not praised 
[Ginn.; ‘not to be trusted,’ NBD.] t RV. i, 29, 1. 

an*dsis t info, not desirable, not 
agreeable, Rajat. An-a sir-da, mfn. not giving a 
blessing, RV. x, 27, 1. 

An-asir-ka, mfn. not containing a prayer or 
blessing, TS. 

an-asu , mfn. not quick, slow, RV.; 

superl. an-dsishta , mfn., AitBr.; not having quick 
horses, RV. i, 135, 9 (Say. derives the word in the 
last sense from y 2. nas or VJ, as : a-ndsii or an¬ 
as u). 

an-ascarya, mfn. not wonderful. 

an-dsrarnin, 1, m. one who 
does not belong to or follow any of the four Asramas 
or religious orders to which Brahmans at different 
periods of life are bound to attach themselves. or an-asrame-vasa, as, m. 

one who does not belong to the Asramas; non¬ 
residence in a religious retreat. 

^trfraxi an~asraya, as, m. non-support, 
absence of any person or thing to depend upon ; 
defencelessness, self-dependence, isolation; (mfn.), 
defenceless; ui 1 protected ; isolated. 

An-Esrita, mfn. not supported, detached; dis¬ 
engaged, independent; non-inherent. 

’WRT? a-nashtrd, mfn. free from dangers 
or dangerous opponents, SBr.; (cf, aii-ndshtra.) 

an-ds , mfn. having no mouth or 
face (N. of demons), RV. v, 29, 10. 

a-ndsa , mfn. noseless. 

A-nasika, mfn, noseless, TS. 

TOmTTW an-dsddita , mfn. not met with, 
not found or obtained, not encountered or attacked; 
not occurred ; not having happened ; non-existent. 
— vigraba, mfn. unused to war. 

An'-5.s£5ya. mfn. not attainable. 

WTOT an-dstha , f. unfixedness, want of 

confidence ; disrespect; want of consideration; want 
of faith or devotedness; unconcern, indifference. 

An-SsthSua, mfn. having or yielding no basis 
or fulcrum (as the sea:, RV. i, 116, 5. 

an-asmaka, mfn. not belonging 

to us, AV. xix, 57, 5. 

an-asravd, mfn.not causing pain, 

AV. :i, 3, 2. 

an-dsvada , as, m, want of taste, 

(mfn.), without taste, insipid. 

An-isvRdita, mfn. untasted. 

an-dhata, mfn. unbeaten, un- 

w: .r.ded, intact; new and unbleached (as doth) ; 
r':-;_:ed otherwise than by beating; not multiplied; 
; — . n. the fourth of the mystical cakras or circles 
:." f r-ody. *»n&da, m. a sound produced other- 
v by beating ; the sound om. 

'*» an-ahavaniya, as, m. no Aha- 
v i J * if. SBr. 


. *_ 

rt an-ahara , as, m. not taking food, 

:f : r.on-seizure ; non-production ; (mfn.), 
r:stams from food, 

hArta, irifn. not taking (food); fasting. 
iArya. mfn. not to be seized or taken, not 
f y. - 302; not to be bribed, Vishnus,; 

dn-dhitagni , is, m. one who 
has not performed the Agnyadhana. 

^T?f 7 T dn-dhuti, is, f. non-sacrificing, 

RV, x, 37, 4 & 63, 12 ; a sacrifice unworthy of 


its name, SBr. 

an-dhuta, mfn. uncalled, unin¬ 
vited. Analiutopajalpin, m. an uncalled-for 
boaster, Analmtopavislita, mfn.. seated as an 
uninvited guest. 

an-dhldda , as, m. absence of joy ; 
(mfn.), gloomy, not cheerful. 

An-akladita, mfn. not exhilarated. 

a - nlhsasta, mfn. blameless 
[Ginn. ; ‘not repelled or refused," NBD.p RV. iv, 
34 , II. 

o-nikdmatas [BhP."i or a-ni- 

£ « v k- -J 

kamam [SBr.J, ind. involuntarily, unintentionally. 

'R\*TW1ta-niketa or a-niketa na, mfn, house¬ 

-nikshipta-dhvra, as, in., N- 

of a Bodhisattva or deihed Buddhist saint. 

an-ikshu us, m. (see 3. #)> * not 

an-indra, mf(«)n. dispensing with 
or disregarding lndra, RV. 

an-indriya, am, n. that which 
is not the senses, the soul, the reason, L, 

^TfrJTnSWTH [ a-nipadya - 
7 Hana , AV.], mfn. not falling down (to sleep), un¬ 
tiring, RV/i, 164, 31 & x, 177, 3. 

a-nipdta, as, m. (not a fall), con¬ 
tinuance of life. 

a-nipuna , mf(d)n. unskilled, not 

clever or conversant. 

d nibaddho, mfn. not tied down, 
not bound. RV. iv, .3. 3; unattached, incoherent, 
unconnected, — pralapin, mfn. chattering inco¬ 
herently, talking at random, Yam. 

a-nibudha, mfn. unobstructed, 
unlimited; {as), m. liberty, RV, 

a-nibhrita, mfn. not private, not 
reserved, immodest, bold, public. 

d-nibkrishta, mfn, unabated, un- 

t • • 7 ’ 

defeated. RV. x, 116, 6. — tavishi ( dnihhrishta -), 
mfn. having unabated power, RV. 

(true) sugar-cane,’ a sort of long grass or reed, Sac- 
charum Spontaneum. 

a-niyirna, mfn- not swallowed, 

not suppressed (as an ellipsis), S 3 h. 

a-uigraha, mfn. unrestrained; 

(rt.r\ m. non-restraint; non-refutation ; not owning 
one’s self refuted. — sthana, n. (in pbil.) occa¬ 
sion of non-refutation. 

a-nighdteshu, us, m. ‘having 
arrows that strike no one,’ N. of a man. 

an-inga [AFrat.J or an-ihgya 
[RPrit.], mfn. not divisible (said of words). 

An-iiig‘ayat, mfn. not dividing, RPr&t, 

*Rfc\*£an-icchaov an-icchaka or an-icchat. 

mfn. undesirou.s, averse, unwilling ; not intending. 

An-iocha, f. absence of wish or design, indif¬ 

An-icchu, mfn . — an-iccha, Vishnus. 

a-nijaka, mfn. not or^’s own, 

belonging to another. 

art-ita , mfn. not gone to, not hav¬ 
ing obtained, Ragh. ix, 37 ; destitute of; {am), n. 
not deviating from (abl.), KaushBr. — hilg. {dn- 
ita-), f., N. of a river, RV. v, 53, 9. 

a -nitya, mfn. not everlasting, tran¬ 
sient ; occasional, incidental; irregular, unusual; 
unstable; uncertain ; {am), ind. occasionally, •• kar- 
man, n. or -kriya, f. an occasional act of worship, 
sacrifice for a special purpose. — tSL, f. or -tva, n. 
transient or limited existence. ■■ datta or -dat- 
taka or -datrima, m. a 5011 surrendered by his 
parents to another for temporary or preliminary 
adoption. — pratyav^kshS, f. consciousness that 
all is passing away, Buddh. — tohSva, m. transitori¬ 
ness. -fiama, m. sophism, consisting in generaliz¬ 
ing what is exceptional (as perishableness). — sama- 
prakarana, n. a section in the NySya discussing 
that sophism. — samasa, m. a compound, the sense 
of which may be equally expressed by resolving it 
into its constituent parts. 

a-niddna, mfn. causeless, ground¬ 

-nidra , mf( 5 )n. sleepless, awake; j 

(cf), f. sleeplessness. 

A-nidrita, mm. not asleep, awake. 

a-nidhrishta, mfn. unchecked, un¬ 

subdued, L. 

^nru? an-idhmd, mfn. having or requiring j 
no fuel, RV. ii, 35, 4 Sc x, 30, 4. 

’Sffcra an~ina, mfn, strengthless, feeble, 

RV. i, 150, 2. 

-nindd,i. no reproach, AV. xi,8,22. | 

A-nindanlya, mfn, unblamable, faultless. 

A-nlndita, mfn. irreproachable, virtuous. 

A-ninety & (3, 4), mfn, id., RV.; SBr. Sc c. 

j an-ibhya , mfn. not wealthy. 

onimait —animan, q. v., L. 
j .. T . , . 

j a-nimantrita, mfn. uninvited, 


; — bhojin, mfn. eating without being invited. 

a-nimdnd , mfn. unbounded, RV, 

• a-nimitta, mf(a)n. having no 

| adequate occasion, causeless, groundless; {am), n. 
j absence of an adequate cause or occasion, ground¬ 
lessness. — tas, ind. groundlessly, Mn.iv, 144. — niiv 
Skrita, mfn, groundlessly rejected, Sak. — Hngu- 
:, in. ‘unaccountable loss of distinct vision,’ N. 
of an ophthalmic disejise ending in total blindness 
(perhaps amaurosis). 

a-nimish, m. ‘ without winking,’ 

N. of a god, BhP.; {dnimiskam or dnimisha), ace. 
or instr, ind. without winking, i. e. vigilantly or inces¬ 
santly, RV. 

A-nimisha, mfn. not winking, looking steadily, 
vigilant, RV. dec .; open (as eyes or flowers); (a.r), 
m. not winking; a god, BhP.; a fish, L.; {dm), ind. 
vigilantly, RV. j, 24, 6. Animiskaksha, mf(f)ru 
one whose eyes are fixed. Animish&c&rya, m., 
j N. of Brihaspati. 

A-nimishat. mfn. not winking, vigilant, RV. 
A-nimeska, rnfn. - animishd; {dnimesham\ 
ind. vigilantly, RV. i, 31, 12 Sc 164, 2J. 

a-niyata, mfn. not regulated, un¬ 
controlled, not fixed, uncertain, unrestricted, irregu¬ 
lar, casual; not unaccentuated, RPrSt. —puftskfc, 
f. ‘ having no fixed husband,’ a woman unchaste in 
conduct. — vritti, mfn. having no fixed or regular 
employment or income. Aniyatfuika, m. (in 
arithm. ) an indeterminate digit. A-ulyat&tiuan, 
m. one whose self or spirit is not regulated or under 
proper control. 

A-niyama, as, m. absence of control or rule or 
fixed order or obligation, unsettledness; indecorous 
or improper conduct; uncertainty, doubt ; (mfn.), 
having no rule, irregular. 

A-nlyamita, mfn. having no rule ; irregular. 


mfn. not appointed, not 

authoritative; (izr), m. an assessor at a court who has 
not been formally appointed and is not entitled to vote. 

A-nlyog'a, as, m. non-application, Laty,; an 
unfitting employment or commission. 

A-niyogin, mfn, not attached or clinging to. 

*rf^TT an-ird, mfn. destitute of vigour, 

RV. iv, 5, 14; (dn-ira), f. want of vigour, languor, 

RV.; VS. 

a-nirdkarishnu, mfn. not ob¬ 
structive, not censorious. Pan. vi, 2, 160, Sch. 
A-nirSkrita, mfn. unobstructed. 

wfaTTf?* d - niruhita , mfn. not to be kept 

off from (abl.), AV. xii, 2, 35. 

a -nirukta , mfn. unuttered, not 
articulated ; not explained (because of being dear by 




\ unspeakable. TUp. — gana, n. indistinct 
; humming (of hymns), a particular mode of 
counting the Slma-veda. 

a-niruddha , nifn. unobstructed, 

ungovernable, self-willed ; (at), m. a spy, a secret 

emissary ,?) : the son of Pradyumna (a form of 

Kima. and husband of Usha) ; Si v r a ; N. of an Arhat 

(contemporary of Sakyamuni); of a descendant of 

v rishni ; {am}, n. the rope for fastening cattle, L. 

—■ patha, n. ‘an unobstructed path,’ the atmosphere, 

ether, L. — b bavin! , f. Aniruddha’s wife. 

_ ^ 

a-nirupta, mfn. ( y'2. vap), not dis¬ 

tributed, not shared. 

vf^reftni a-nirupita, mfn. notdetermined, 


a-nirghdta , as, m. not wresting 

or tearing from, TS.; TBr. 

a-nirjita , mfn. unconquered. 
a-nirnaya,as, m. uncertainty, want 

of decision. 

A-birnita, mfn. unascertained, undetermined. 
A-nirneya, mfn. not to be decided. 

a-nirdasaoT a-nir-dasdha , mf(a)n. 

within the ten days of impurity after childbirth or a 
death, Mu. &c.; (am), ind. id. (used adverbially). 

a-nirdishta, mfn. ( vdiijj, unex¬ 
plained, undefined. 

A-nirdisya, mfn. undefinable, inexplicable. 
A-nirdesa, as, m, absence of rule or direction. 
A-nirdesya, mfn. undefinable, inexplicable, 

^favTftri a-nirdhdrita, mfn. undeter¬ 

mined, unascertained, undefined. 

A-nirdbarya, mfn. undeterminable, not to be 
agreed upon. 

a-nirbhara , mfn. not excessive, 

little, slight, light. 

a-nirbheda, as, m. not blurting 

out,’ not revealing. 

’Srf'FfWrS a-nirmala , mfn. dirty, foul, turbid. 

A-nirmalya, f. the plant Mendicago Esculenta. 

^JTHo^TT^fT a-nirlocita , mfn. not carefully 

looked at, not considered. 

a-nirlodita, mfn. not examined 

thoroughly, Sis. ii, 27. 

a-nirvacanvja, mfn. unutter¬ 

able, indescribable ; not to be mentioned. 

Anirvacya, mfn. id. 

a-nirvariyamana, mfn. not 

being brought to a close. 

a-nirvdna, mfn. unextinguished. 

a-nirvaha, as, m. non-accom¬ 
plishment, non-completion; inconclusiveness; insuf¬ 
ficiency of income. 

A-nirvahya, mfn. difficult to be managed. 

a-nirvinna , mfn. not downcast. 

A-nirvid, mfn. free from causes of depression, 
undesponding, unwearied. 

A-nirveda, as, m. non-depression, self-reliance. 

a-nirvrita, mfn. discontented; un¬ 

happy ; discomposed. 

A-nirvriti, is, f. discontent. 

a-nirvritta, mfn. unaccomplished, 


A-nirvritti, is, f. incompleteness. 

'srfVfircr a-virvesa (= akrita-nirvesa), mfn. 

not having expiated one’s sins, BhP. 

dnila, as, m. {van, cf. Irish anal), 

air or wind ; the god of wind ; one of the forty- 
nine Anilas or winds; one of the eight demi-gods, 
called Vasus; wind as one of the humors or rasas 
of the body ; rheumatism, paralysis, or any affection 
referred to disorder of the wind ; N. of a Rishi and 
other persons-; the letter y; the number forty-nine. 
—'kumSra,-i.5-, m pi.‘wind-princes,’a class of deities, 

Jain. — ghna, mfn. curing disorders arising from 
wind. — ghnaka, m.the large treeTerminalia Bele- 
rica. — paryaya or-paryaya, m. pain and swelling 
of the eyelids and outer parts of the eye. — prakriti, 
mfn.‘having an airy or windy nature,’N.of the planet 
Saturn. — vyadhi, m. derangement of the (internal) 
w'ind. — sakba or -saratbi [MBh.], m. ‘the 
friend of wind,’ N. of fire, —ban or -brit, mfn. = 
-ghna. Anildtmaja, m. the son of the wind, 
Hanumat or Bhlma. Anilantaka, m. ‘wind- 
destroving,’ the plant Ingudi or Aiigara-pushpia. 
Anilapaba, mfn. = anila-ghna. Anildmaya, 
m. morbid affection of the wind, flatulence, rheuma¬ 
tism, Anilayana, n. way or course of the wind, 
Susr. Anildsin, mfn. ‘feeding on the wind,’ fast¬ 
ing ; (f), m. a snake, L., cf. vdyu-bhaksha, 

^TT ciWHHTftj a-nilambha-samddhi,is, m. 

‘ unsupported meditation,’ N. of a peculiar kind of 
meditation, Buddh. 

a-nilaya, mffajn. having no rest¬ 
ing-place, restless, AitBr.; AsvSr. 

A-nilayana, a?n, n. no home or refuge, TUp. 

a-nivartana, mfn. not turning 
back or aw f ay, steadfast; inf)>roper to be abandoned, 

A-uivartin, mfn. not turning back, brave, not 
returning. Anivarti-tva, n. not turning back, 
brave resistance. 

A-nivritta, mfn. not turning back, brave. 

a-nivarita , mfn. unhindered, 

unimpeded, unopposed, unforbidden, unchecked. 

A-nivarya, mfn. not to be warded off, maver- 
tible, unavoidable, irresistible. 

d-nivisamana , mf(o)n, not 

retiring to rest, restless, RV. vii, 49, 1. 

a-nivrita, mfn. (v'l. vri), un¬ 

checked, not impeded, RV. iii, 29, 6. 

a-nivedita, mfn. untold, unmen¬ 
tioned. — vijnata, mfn. known without being told. 
A-nivedya, ind. p. not having announced. 

a-nivesand , mf(n)n. affording no 

place of rest, RV. i, 32, 10. 

a-nisa, mfn. ‘ nightless,’ sleepless; 

uninterrupted, incessant (only in comp.;; {am), 
ind. incessantly, continually. 

A'-nisita, mfn. incessant, VS.; SBr.; {am), ind. 
incessantly, RV. ii, 38, 8 & ix, 96, 2. - sarga (dni- 
sita-), mfn. having an incessant flow, RV. x, 89, 4. 

a-niscita , mfn. unascertained, 

not certain. 

A-niscitya, ind. p. not having ascertained. 

a-niscintya , mfn. not to be 

thought of, inconceivable, incomprehensible. 

\'a-nishahyd, mfn. having no quiver, 

unarmed, RV. i, 31, 13. 

an-ishavyd , mf(«)n. not to be 

wounded or killed with arrows, RV. x, 108, 6. 

a-nishiddha , mfn. unprohibited, 


A-nisbeddbra, mf(tf)n. unimpeded, SBr. 

an-ishu , mfn. having no arrows, 

having bad arrows. — dbanva, mfn. without arrows 
and a bow, TAr. 

^f^rfrrw a-nishkdsita or a-nishkdsin, 

mfn. without remains of food, ApSr. 

^fVjKJirT a-nishkrita or dn-ishkrita , mfn. 
not done with, unfinished, not settled, RV. Anisb- 
kritainas, mfn. having one’s guilt not settled, i.e. 
unexpiated, L. 

1 . an-ishta, infn.f \/3 Ash), unwished, 
undesirable, disadvantageous, unfavourable; bad, 
wrong, evil, ominous; id), f. the plant Sida Alba; 
(am), !i. evil, disadvantage, — graba, ni. an evil 
planet, — dusbta-dbi, mfn. having an evil and 
corrupt mind. — prasanga, m. connection with a 
wrong object or a wrong argument or a wrong rule. 
— pbala, n. evil result. — sankS, f. foreboding or 
fear of evil or misfortune. — sneaka, mfn. fore¬ 
boding evil, ominous. — betu, m. an evil omen. 

An-ishtfipadana, n. not obtaining what is desired 
or (fr. anishta and apadana) obtaining what is not 
desired. An~ishtdpti, An-isbtd,sansin,mfn. 
indicating or boding evil. Anisbt6tpreksbana, 
n. expectation of evil. 

2, an-ishta, mfn. (Vyaj), not offered 

in sacrifice ; not honoured with a sacrifice. 

1 s ^ ^ ^ ^ i, m. one who does not sacrifice or 
has not sacrificed, KatySr. 

a-nishtrita , mfn. unhurt, uncheck¬ 
ed, RV. viii, 33, 9; VS. 

^rf»TT 7 T a-nishthd , f. unsteadfastness, un¬ 

a-nishthura , mfn. not harsh. 

a-nishna or a-nishndta , mfn. un¬ 

a-nishpatti, is, f. non-accom¬ 
plishment, incompletion. 

A-nishpanna, mfn. imperfect, incomplete. 

a-nish-pattram, ind. so that the 

arrow does not come out (on the other side), i. e, 
not with excessive force, KatySr. 

a-nisarga , mfn. unnatural, un¬ 
naturally affected. 

a-nistabdha , mfn. not rendered 

immovable or stiff’; not paralysed; not fixed. 

a-nistirna , mfn. not crossed 
over; not set aside; not rid of; unanswered, un- 
retuted. Anistirnabbiyoga, m, (a defendant) 
who has not yet (by refutation) got rid of a charge. 

anika , as, am, m. n. (Van), face; 

appearance, splendour; edge, point ; front, row, 
array, march; army, forces; war, combat, —vat 
( dnika -), mfn. having a face, or constituting the 
face, or occupying the front or foremost rank (N.of 
Agni),VS.&c. — vidarana, m. ‘shatterer of armies,’ 
N. of a man. — sas, ind. in rows or marching 
columns, AV. — stba, m. a warrior or combatant; 
an armed or royal guard, a sentinel, L.; the trainer of 
an elephant, an elephant-driver, L.; a mark, a sign, 
signal, L.; a military drum, L. 

AnxkinI, f. an army, a host, forces; a certain 
force ; three Camus or one-tenth of an Akshauhinf 
(or of a complete army; 2187 elephants and as many 
cars, 6561 horses, and 10935 foot); a lotus. 

an-ikshana, am, n. not seeing or 

looking at. 

a-nlca, mf(fl)n. not low, decent, 

respectable ; not pronounced with the Anudatta 
accent. — darsin, m., N.of a Buddha. A-nlca- 
nuvartin, mfn. not keeping low company ; (/), 
m. a faithful lover or husband. 

A-nlcais, ind. not in a low voice, loudly. 

a-nida , mfn. having no nest, RV. 

x > 55; 6; having no settled abode, i.e. incorporeal, 
Up.; (as), m., N. of Agni or fire, L. 

is, f. impropriety, im¬ 
morality, injustice ; impolicy, foolish conduct, indis¬ 
cretion. — jna or -vid, mfn. clever in immoral 
conduct or (fr. a and nitijna) ignorant of morality 
or policy, not politic or discreet. 

’S-jftfiT 2. an-iti, is, f. freedom from a 

calamitous season. 

an-idrisa, mfn. unlike, dissimilar. 
an-ipsita, mfn. undesired. 

a-nirasana ( a-nir-rasana ), mfn. 
not destitute ot a waistband, having zones or girdles. 

amla-vdjin , mfn. ‘ white- 

horsed,’ Arjuna, Kir. xiv, 26. 

an-isa, mfn. one who has not a lord 

or superior, paramount; powerless, unable; (as), 
m. Vishnu ; (</), f. powerlessness, helplessness, Up. 

— tva, n. poweriessness. 

A'n-Isvara, mf(J)n. without a superior, AV. ; 
unchecked, paramount ; without power, unable ; 
not belonging to the Deity; atheistical. —t&, f. or 
-tva, n. absence of a supreme ruler. ~>v§Ldin, m. 


vrrtir art-lha . 

arm-gar jit a. 

* one who denies a supreme ruler of the universe,’ 
an atheist. 

an-iha, mfn. listless, indifferent; 
(as), m., N. of a king of Ayodhya ; (d), f. indiffer¬ 
ence, apathy, disinclination. 

An-Ihita, mfn. disagreeable, displeasing, un¬ 
wished ; (am), n. disinclination, apathy. 

-nila [RV. x, 55. 6 ] = d-nida , q. v. 

1. amt, infn.= anu , q. v., L. 

.dnu, us, m. a non-Aryan man, RV.; 

N. of a king (one of Yayati's sons) ; of a non-Aryan 
tribe, MBh. &c. 

^3 . anu, ind. (as a prefix to verbs and 
nouns, expresses) after, along, alongside, lengthwise, 
near to, under, subordinate to, with. 

(When prefixed to nouns, especially in adverbial 
compounds), according to, severally, each by each, 
orderly, methodically, one after another, repeatedly. 

(As a separable preposition, with accusative) after, 
along, over, near to, through, to, towards, at, ac¬ 
cording to, in order, agreeably to, in regard to, in¬ 
ferior to, Pan. i, 4, 86. 

(As a separable adverb) after, afterwards, there¬ 
upon, again, further, then, next. 

Anu-ka, mf(#)n. subordinate, dependent. TS. ; 
SBr.; ‘being after,’ lustful, Pan. v, 2, 74. 
Anu-tamam, (superb) ind. most, SBr. 

anu-v'kath, to relate after (some 

one or something else); to repeat (what has been 

Anu-kathana, am, n. orderly narration, dis¬ 
course, conversation. 

Anu-kathita,mfn. related after (somethingelse), 
Pan. vi, 2, 190, Scb.; repeated. 

anu-kaniyas , an , asi, as, the 

next youngest, Pan. vi, 2, 1 89. 

anu-kapolam , ind, along the 

cheek, Sis. v, 35. 

anu-Vkam , Caus. (impf. -akama- 

yata) to desire (with Inf.), AitRr, 

Anu-kama, as, m. desire, VS.; (mfn.'), accord¬ 
ing to one’s desire, agreeable, RV.; (dm), ind. as 
desired, at pleasure, RV. — krxt, mfn. fulfilling one’s 
desire, RV. ix, 11, 7. 

Anukamin, mfn. desirous, TS. 

Anukaxnlna, mfn. one who acts as he pleases, 
Pan. v, 2, 11. 

anu-\ / kamp , to sympathize with, 

compassionate: Caus. P. (impf. -akampayat) id., 

Anu-kampaka, as, m. ‘ sympathizer,’ N, of a 
king ; (mfn.), ifc. sympathizing with, compassion¬ 

Anu-kampana, am, n. sympathy, compassion. 
Anu-kampaniya, mfn. pitiable. 

Anu-kampS, f. id. 

Anu-kampayin, mfn. condoling. 

Ann-kamp it a, mfn. compassionated. Ann- 
kampit&tman, mfn. having a compassionate spirit. 
Anu-kampin, mfn. sympathizing with. 
Anu-kampya, mfn. pitiable, worthy of sympathy; 
(a.y), m. ail ascetic, L.; expeditious (explained by 
tarasvin, perhaps for tapasvin), L. 

anu-karsha . See anu- y^krish* 
anu-kalpa, See anu-y/klrip. 

^^anu-v'kdhksh, to long for, desire. 

Ann-kSiikslia, f. desire after. 

Anu-kSiikshin, mfn. longing for. 

anu-kala , mfn. opportune, occa¬ 
sional ; (am), ind, opportunely, occasionally. 

anu-Vkirt , to relate after or in 

order; to narrate. 

Anu-kirtana, am, n. the act of narrating or 
proclaiming or publishing. 

anu-kuncita, mfn. bent, made 


anu-Vkush, to drag along, Pan. 

iii, I, 25, Sch. 

anu-Vkuj, to follow in cooing or 

singing or groaning. 


anu-kula , mf(a)n. following the j 

bank ( hula) or slope or declivity ; according to the ' 
current, AV.; favourable, agreeable; conformable j 
to ; friendly, kind, well-disposed; (as), m. a faith- j 
ful or kind and obliging husband ; («), f. Croton ; 
Polyandrum ; N. of a metre; (am), n. (in poetry) j 
narrative of calamity leading finally to happiness, j 
— ta, f. concord, good-will, favour, conformity, con- ! 
sent; prosperity. — nayaka, m. a kind husband or 
lover. - vayu, m. a favourable wind. 

Anukulaya, Norn. P. anukulayati, to act in a 
friendly way towards, favour. 

anu- \ kri, to do afterwards, to follow | 
in doing ; to imitate, copy ; to equal; to requite ; 
to adopt: Caus. - kdrayati , to cause to imitate. 

Anu-kara, mfn. imitating, SBr.; (as), m. an 
assistant, AV. xii, 2, 2. 

Anu-karana, am, n. the act of imitation ur of 
following an example resemblance, similarity. 

Auu-kartri, mfn. an imitator, imitating ; (fa), 
m. a mimic, actor, performer. 

Anu-karman, a, n. imitation ; a subsequent rite 
or ceremony ; (a), m., N. of one of the Visvedevas, 

Anu-kara, as, m. imitation, resemblance. ] 

Anu-karin, mfn. imitating, acting, mimicking. | 

Auu-karya, mfn. to be imitated or copied, to i 
be acted (dramatically); (am), n. subsequent bus.i- { 
ness, R. 

Anu-krita, mfn. imitated, made like. 

Anu-kriti, is, f. imitation, a copy, compliance. 

Anu-kritya, mfn. fit to be imitated, Pahcat. 

Anu-kriya, f. imitation, doing anything in like 
manner or subsequently ; a subsequent rite. 

2. krit (p. -kriutot) to go on 

destroying, MBh, xiii, 2906. 

anu-Vkrip, -kripete, to mourn for, 
long for, RV. i, 113, 10; Nom. A. -kyipdyate, to 
compassionate, condole with, MBh. 

Anu-krama, as, m. succession, arrangement, 
order, method ; an index showing the successive 
contents of a book ; (am) or (end) or (at), ind. in 
due order. 

Anu-kramana, am, n. proceeding methodically 
or in order ; following. 

Anu-kramanika or anu-kramanl, f. a table 

♦ t y 

or chapter of contents, index to a collection of Vedic 
hymns (giving the first word of each hymn, the 
number of verses, name and family of poets, names 
ot deities and metres). 


Anu-kr ant a, mfn. gone over, read, or done in 

due order ; enumerated, mentioned in the Auu- 



'Srgctf anu-kri, mfn. (y/krt), bought sub¬ 
sequently (i. e. not early on the first day), PBr.; 
Lity. &c.; (cf. pari-kn, sata-kri.) 

anu-y/krid, to play, Pan, i, 3, 21. 

anu-y'krus , to shout at, RV. iv, 

38, 5: Caus. (ind. p. -krosya\ to join in lamenting, 
show sympathy for, MBh. xiii, 2S5. 

Anu-krosa, as, in. tenderness, compassion. 

anu-kshanam, ind. momentarily 

perpetually, every instant. 

anu-kshattri , ta, m. a door¬ 

keeper's or charioteer’s mate or attendant, VS, 

'■Nrjftf anu-kshapam, ind. night after 

night. Kir. 

anu- y/kshar($. pi. -ksharanti; Tm- 

pcr. 2. sg. -. kshara ) to flow into or upon, RV. 


t . anu- v 2. kshi,-kshvyati (Imper. 2. 

sg. -kskiya) to settle along, AV. 

2. anu-\/ 4. kshi, Pass. (p. - kshiya- 

mana) to decay or vanish gradually, BhP. 

anu-kshetra, am, 11. stipend given 
to temple-servants in Orissa (in commutation pro¬ 
bably of the proceeds of an endowment). 

kris, Caus. *-karsayati , to \ anu-khanja, as, m., N. of a 

emaciate. j 

anu-y/krish , to drair or draw after, 

attract: Caus. -karshayati, to cause to drag after, 
draw, attract; to subject. 

Anu-karsha, as, m. attraction, drawing ; in¬ 
voking, summoning by incantation; the bottom or 
the axle-tree of a carriage; grammatical attraction 
(including a subsequent in a preceding rule); lagging 
behind in a ceremony ; delayed performance of a 

Anu-karshan.a, am, 11. = anu-karsha. 
Anu-karsban, d, in. the bottom ot a carriage, L. 
Anu-krishta, mfn. drawn after, attracted; in¬ 
cluded or implied in a subsequent rule. 


anu-y'i. kri ( 1. sg . -kirfimi) to scatter j 

along, AV.; to strew, fill with, crowd : Pa ss.-kiryate, 
to become crowded or filled 
Ann-kirn a, mfn. crowded, crammed full. I 

anu-y'klrip, to follow in order, j 

TS.: Caus. -kalpayati, to cause to follow or imitate 
in order. } 

Anu-kalpa, as, m. permission, to adopt an alter- 1 
native or substitute (e. g. instead of Kusa grass you 
may use Diirbi), Mn. &c. 

Anu-kalpita, mfn. followed by (instr.), MBh. i 
Anu-klripti, is, (. (in Vaiseshika phii.) agree- 
me nt. 

an-ukta , mfn. (v'rac), unuttered, 
unsaid, unheard of, extraordinary. — nimitta, n. 
a reason which is unuttered or unheard of or extra¬ 
ordinary ; (mfn.), having such a reason. 

An-ukti, is. f.the not speaking, improper speech, j 
An-uktha. mfn. hvmnless, not singing hymns. 

9 » ut v.- J • 

RV. v, 2, 3; not followed by an uklha, AitBr. 


anu-krakaca., mfn. dentated like j 

a saw, serrated. 

anu-y/krand (perf. A. -cokrade) | 

to shout or cry after one, RV, viii, 3. 10. 


anu-y/'kram, to go on. go after, j 

follow; to go through in order, enumerate, supply 
with an abstract or index. 


anu‘\ / khyd (perf. 2. du. - cakhya - 

thuh) to descry, RV. vii, 70, 4, &c. 

A'nu-khy&ti, is, f. aa of descrying or revealing, 
TS.; AitBr. 

Anu-kkyatri, td , m. a discoverer, revealer, 

^5 T n5 r H anu-gahgam , ibd. along the 

Ganges, Pat. 

’Sgnur anu-y/gan , to count over. 

Anu-ganita, mfn. counted over. 

Anu-ganitin, mfn. one who has counted over, 
(gana ishtddi, q.v.) 

anu- y'gam , cl. 1 . P. - gacchati, -gan- 

tum, to go after, follow, seek, approach, visit, ar¬ 
rive ; to practise, observe, obey, imitate ; to enter 
into; to die out, be extinguished : Caus. -gamayati, 
to imitate, cause to die out. 

Anu-ga, mf(a)n. going after, following, cor¬ 
responding with, adapted to ; a companion ; a tol- 
lower, a servant; (ifc.) followed by ; (i), {., N. of 
an Apsaras. 

Anu-gata, mfn. followed by ; having anything 
(as a skin) hanging behind ; following ; a follower ; 
acquired ; extinguished ; talking with ; (am), n, 
moderate time (in music). Auugatartha, mfn. 
having a corresponding meaning. 

Anu-gati, is, f. following, imitation, dying out. 

Anu-gatika, as, in. a follower, an imitator. 

Anu-gantavya, mfn. to be followed (as a hus¬ 
band by a wife in death); worthy of being imitated ; 
to be looked for or discovered, Pan. vi, 1, 7, Sch. 

Anu-gama, as, m. or anu-gamana, am, n. 
fVilowing, going after in life or death; postcremation 
of a widow i mutating, approaching. 

Aun-gauiya, mfn. to be followed or imitated. 

Anu-gamin, mfn. following, a companion. 

Anu-g&mnka, mfn. habitually cr constantly 
following or attending. 

anu-garj, to shout or roar after, 

A»u-garjita, am, n. roaring after, echo, Kum. 

* “i*l!: * * 

•• i «i : - • • 

~ * i »IT I* 1 
- - I Til |* " * 
. • • •• «|« • •• •• 


ami-gavam . 

an u-trip 


: vi-gomm, ind. so as to suit (or j 


% i ^ 

. P ‘ V• v i 4, S 3 . 

anu-gov in a, as, m. a cowherd 


2 . T s. 

1, go., to go after, follow ; to 
act : r . conformity to, or according to the wishes of, RV. 

^nrr^ anu-addin, mfn. repeating an¬ 
other's words. Pan. v, 4, 13. 

(inn-gayas , mfn.( \/gai), followed 

by shouts or hymns, RV. viii, 5, 34 ; ('to be praised 

in hymns,’ Say,) 

+ + * 

' 5 T'^ T TT| r anu-^/g ah, to plunge after, be 
immersed in. 

Anu-gadha, mfn. plunged or immersed in. 

anu-giram . ind. on the moun¬ 
tain, Ragh, 

anu-gu, ind. behind the cows, Pan. 

V, 2, I5. 

r anu-guna , mf(c)n. having similar 

qualities, congenial to ; according or suitable to ; 
(am), ind, according to one’s merits, Kathas.; (ai), 
m. natural peculiarity. 

Anu-g’unaya, Nom. P. -gunny ati, to favour, 

anu-gupta, mfn, protected, shel¬ 
tered, concealed. 

any- vgridh (pr. p. - gridhyat) to be 
reedy after (loc.), MBh. xii, 372. 

anu-\/\. gri, - grindti, to join in 
praising, RV. i, 147 ,2 ; to rejoin, answer, SahkhSr.; 
to repeat, BhP. 

* 3 * anu-\/gai, to sing after or to (a per¬ 
son or tune); to celebrate in song ; Caus. -gapayati, 
to make one sing after or to. 

Anu-git£, f. 'an after-song,’ N. of part of the 
fourteenth book of the MahSbhSrata (chaps. 16-92). 

Anu-giti, is, f., N. of a metre (of two verses, the 
first containing twenty-seven, the second thirty-two 

anu-godam , ind. near the Goda¬ 

*33 dn-ugra, or an-ugrd , mf(d)n. not 

harsh or violent, mild, gentle, RV. &c. 

anu-Vgrah , to follow in taking or 
plundering, MBh. iv, 996 ; to support; to uphold ; 
to receive, welcome ; to treat with kindness, favour, 
oblige; to foster. 

Anu-grihita, mfn. favoured, obliged. 
Anu-grraha, as, m. favour, kindness, showing 
favour, conferring benefits, promoting or furthering 
a good object; assistance ; facilitating by incanta¬ 
tions ; rear-guard ; N. of the eighth or fifth creation, 
VP. — kfitara, mfn, anxious to please or for favour. 
— sargu, m. (in SSnkhya phil.) creation of the 
e dings or mental conditions. 

Amx-grahana, am, n.= anu-graha. 
Azui-grahita, mfn. occupied, engaged, R. i, 7, 


Anu-graMn, t, m. proficient in magic skill. 
Anu-grahaka,mf(fi/£d)n. favouring, furthering, 
facilitating; favourable, kind, gracious. 
Anu-grahin, mfn. gracious, favourable. 
Anu-grSUiya, mfn. to be favoured or furthered. 
Axm-jigh^ikshS, fi desire to show favour or 
kindness; intention to include, NySyam. 

anu-grdmam, ind. village after 
village, Pan. iv, 3, 61; into, a village, Lsty. 

anu-grasaka, as, m, a mouthful 
(of boiled rice, Sec.); the equivalent of a mouthful. 

WJW anu-vghatt . to stroke, rub length¬ 

anu-\ ; car, to walk or move after or 

along ; to follow, pursue, seek after; to follow out, 
adhere to, attend ; to behave : Caus. - carayati , to 
let or cause to traverse ; Intern, p. - carcuryamdna , 
continuing following, RV. x, 124, 9, 

Anu-cara, mf(J)n. following, attending ; (as), 
m. companion, follower, servant; (t, rarely a), f. a 
female attendant. 

Anu-caraka, as, m. a follower, attendant, (gana 
mahishy-adi, q. v,); ( ika ), f. a female follower or 

Anu-carin, mfn. following, attending. 

wjfirs anu-jigkrd. See anu-Vgkrd . 

TSCrpftm anu-jirna, mfn. grown old or de¬ 
cayed after or in consequence of, Pan, iii, 4, 72, Sch. 


anu-carci, mfn. reciting or repeat- 

ing (in a chorus), AsvSr. 

* 3 ^ anu-x / 2. ci (Imper. A. -cihitdm) to 
remember, AV. vi, 53, 1. 

1 .anu-cita, mfn. (v'i.ei), set or 

placed along or lengthwise or in rows, AitBr. 

Tnjftnia .an-ucita, mfn.improper, wrong, 

unusual, strange. Anucitartha, m. an unusual 

^TrjHSRT anu-Vcint , to meditate, consider, 

recal to mind : Caus. to make to consider. 

Anu-cintana, am, n. or anu-cinta, f. thinking 
of, meditating upon, recalling, recollecting ; anxiety. 

Anu-cintita, mfn, recollected, recalled, thought i 2. Anu-jna, f. assent, assenting, permission ; 
°f leave to depart; allowance made for faults; an order 

an- urea, mfn. not high, low.humble: j or command. — prartfcana or anujSAtshanS, L 

asking permission, taking leave. 

Anu-jnata, mfn. assented to, permitted, allowed ; 

ordered, directed, instructed ; accepted ; authorized, 

honoured ; allowed to depart, dismissed. 

Anu-jnana, am, n.-— 2. anu-jna. 

Anu-jSapaka, as, m, one who commands or 

anu-Vjw, to follow or imitate in 
living ; to jive for any one ; to live by or upon 
something ; to live submissively under, be dependent 
on : Caus. -jTvayati, to restore to life, Das. 

Anu-jlvin, mfn. living by or upon ; dependent ; 
( 1), ni. a dependent, follower ; N. of a crow, Pancat, 
Azrujlvisat-krita, mfn. made wholly subservient, 

Ann-jlvya, mfn. to be followed in living. 

anu-x'i. jusk, to seek, SaftkhGf.; 

to devote one’s self to, indulge in, BhP, 

an-ujjkat, mfn. not quitting. 

An-ujjbita, mfn. uudiminished, unimpaired, not 
left c>r lost. 

. anu- \/jna , to permit, grant, allow, 

consent : to excuse, forgive ; to authorize ; to allow 
one to depart, dismiss, bid farewell to ; to entreat; 
to behave kindly : Caus. - jndpayati , to request, 
ask permission, ask for leave to depart, to take leave : 
Desid. -jijhasati or -te, to wish to allow or permit, 
Pan. i, 3 ,j>8 . 

.-jnapti, is, f. authorization, permission. 

( — an-udatta), accentless, APrat 
An -nccais, ind. not aloud, in a low voice. 

an-uccara, as, m. or an-uccarana, 
am, n. non-pronunciation, skipping words (in re- j 
citing hymns). See ur-Vcar. 

? anu-cchdda . as, m. (\ chad ), a I 

..... . . , ., . - Anu-jnapana, am, n. = anu-jilapti. 

garment which hangs down (probably that part of 1 

% t 

the lower garment which hangs down in front from 
the waist to the feet), SBr. 

an-uc-chitti, is, f. (-s /chid), not 
cutting off, non-extirpation, non-destruction, inde¬ 
structibility. — dharman (dnucchitii-), mfn. pos¬ 
sessing the virtue (ot faculty) of being indestructible, 
SBr. xiv. 

1. An-uc-cMndat, mfn. not destroying. 

An-uc-chinna, mfn. not cut off, unextirpated. 

An-nc-cheda, as, m. = an-uc-chitti. 

An -uc-chedya, mfn. indestructible, not sever¬ 

ami-cchid (\/ chid), to cut along 

or lengthwise. 

2, Anu-ccMndat, mfn. cutting lengthwise. 

an-ucchishta, mfn. (Vsish with 
ud), without remains or leavings of food, pure ; not 
mere remains, Ragh. 

WrpBTt anu-ccko (v'cho), cl. 4. P. (Imper. -cSiya) to cut open or cut up, AV. ix, 5, 4. 

anu-v'jan, cl. 4. A. -jayate, to fol¬ 
low in being bom or produced or arising; to take 
after (one’s parents), Ragh. 

Acu-ja, mfn. born after, later, younger ; (^r), 
m. a younger brother, a cadet; the plant Traya- 
m 5 na; (am), 11. the plant Prapaundarika ; (a), f. a i 
younger sister, TS. 

Anu-janman, d, m. a younger brother, younger. 


anu-jyeshtha . mfn. next eldest, 

P 5 n. vi, 2, 189, Sch.; (dm), ind. after the eldest, 
according to seniority, MaitrS.; MBh. 

anv-Vtaksh (impf. 2.pi. -a'taks ka¬ 
ta) to create or procure for the help of (dat.), RV. i, 

86, 3; TS, 

anu-ta/am , ind. along the shore, 


anu-x/tan, to extend along, to carry 

on, continue, develop. 

anu-Vtap. to heat, Susr.; to vex, 

annoy. AV. xix, 49,7 : Pass. -iapyaJc (rarely -tapyati 
[MBh. i, 5055]), to suffer afterwards, repent; to 
desiderate, miss: Caus. -tdpayati, to distress. 

Ann-tapta, mfn. heated; filled with regret; 
(a), f., N. of a river, VP. 

Anu-tSpa, as, m. repentance, heat. 
Axm»tfipana, mfn, occasioning remorse, repent¬ 
ance or sorrow. 

Anu-tapin, mfn. penitent, regretting. 

anu-tara. See anu-Vtri below. 
anu-y/tark, to follow in thought, 

to regard as or take for. 

anu-tarsha , as, m, thirst, wish, 

desire, L.; a drinking vessd (used for drinking 
spirituous liquors), L. 

Anu-tarskazia, am, n. a vessel from which spi- 

-w- ^ j « ^ 

-jgta, rntn. after-born, later, younger ; tak- j rituous liquor is drunk, L a ; distributing liquor, L. 

. >. - \ T) - - . 1 _ . • — 1 - . r - 1 • • *«%» 

ing after (one s parents), Pancat.; bom again, re¬ 
generated by the sacred cord ; (as), m. a younger 
brother; (a), f. a younger sister. 

n H anu-janam, ind. according to 

people, popularly. 

^C^\\anu-\/iapf to follow or imitate in j s hthd. 


anu-Vjalp, to follow in talking; 

Anu-tarshmla, mfn. causing desire, MBh. 

anu-tilam, ind. grain after grain 
(of Sesamum), by grains, very minutely, (gana pari- 
mukkddi, q.v.) 

anu-tishthamdna. See i.anu- 

anu-tunna . mfn. (vtud), depressed 

or repressed (in sound), muffled, PBr. 

anu-Vghush (Ved.ind.p. -ghushya) j -J^dpate, to entertain by conversation 

to name aloud, RV.i, 162, 18. 


anu-x/ghra, ‘to smell at/ kiss, 


Anu-jigfcra, mfn. snuffling at, AV. viii, 8, 8. 

anu-\/cak$h (perf. - cacdksha ; j 
impf A. -acashta) to look at or up to, RV, 

anu-vjdgri , to watch as an at¬ 

- i 

anu-vji , to subdue: Desid. -jigi- 

sh.ate , to be desirous of subduing. 

ami - jighrikshd . See anu 

V grah. 

anu-tulaya, Nom. P. - tfilayati , 

to rub lengthwise (with a brush or cotton). 

anu- vtrid (Imper. 2. sg. -triadhi; 

impf. 2. du, -atr in tam ; perl. - tatarda) to split 
open, RV. 

anu- \ f trip, to take one’s fill (or 

refreshment) after or later than another. 



*33 anu-tn. 


*33 anu-s/tri (3. pi. -taranti ) to follow 

across or to the end, AV. vi, 122, 2. 

Anu-tara, am, n. fare, freight, L. 

* 3 ** an-ulka , mfn. free from regret, not 

regretting, self-complacent, not repenting of. 

an-utkarsha, as, m. non-elevation, 


P 1 

a-nutta , mfn. not cast down, invin¬ 
cible, RV. — manyu {d-nutta-), m. ‘of invincible 
wrath,’ liidra, RV. vii, 31, 12 ; viii, 6, 35 & 96,19. 

an-uttama, inf (a) 11. unsurpassed, 
incomparably the best or chief, excellent ; excessive ; 
not the best; (in Gr.) not used in the uttama or 
first person. An-uttamambbas , n. (in Sankhya 
phil.) itulilVerencc to and consequent abstinence from 
sensual enjoyment (as fatiguing). An-uttamam- 
bhasika, n. indifference to and abstinence front 
sensual enjoyment (as involving injury to external 

an-uttara , mfn. chief, principal; 

best, excellent ; without a reply, unable to answer, 
silent; fixed, firm ; low, inferior, base; south, south¬ 
ern ; {am), n, a reply which is coherent or evasive 
and therefore held to be no answer ; (mr), in. pi. 
a class of gods among the Jainas. — yoga-tantra, 
n. title of the last of the four Bauddhatantras. An- 
uttaropapatika, as, m. pi. a class of gods, Jain. 
Anuttaropapatika-dasa, as, f. pi. title of the 
ninth anga of the Jainas treating of those gods. 

an-uttdna, mfn.lying with the face 

towards, the ground ; not supine ; not flat, Susr. 

an-utthdna, am, n. ( Vsthd), the 

not rising, want of exertion or of energy, Rajat. 

An-uttbita, mfn. not risen, not grown up (as 

an-utpatti, is, f. failure, non-pro¬ 
duction; (mfn.), not (yet) produced, Buddh. — sa- 
ma, as, a, m. f. (in Nyaya phil.) arguing against a 
thing by trying to show that nothing exists from 
which it could spring. 

Anutpattika-dharma-ksbanti, is, f. acqui¬ 
escence in the state which is still future, preparation 
for a future state, Buddh. 

An-utpanna, mfn. unborn, unproduced ; un¬ 
effected, unaccomplished. 

Axuutpada, as, m. non-production, not coming 
into existence ; not taking effect. — ksbanti, f. ac¬ 
quiescence in not having to undergo another birth. 

An>utp§.dana, am, n. not producing, non-pro¬ 

An-utp 5 dya, mfn. not to be created, eternal. 

dn-utsanna, mfn. not lost, SBr. vii. 
an-utsdha , as, m. non-exertion, 

want of effort; want of energy or determination; 
listlessness : (mfn.), deficient in determination. —t&, 
f. want of determination, Sfih. 

an-uisuka, mfn. not eager, calm, 

retiring; moderate. — tS* f. moderateness, Vikr. 

an-utsutra, mfn. not anomalous. 

an-utseka, as, m. absence of arro¬ 
gance or highmindedness. 

An-utBekin, mfn, not arrogant or puffed up, Sdk. 

an-udakd, mf(d)n, waterless, RV. 

vii, 50, 4, &c.; {am), ind. without touching water, 
KatySr.; without adding water, ib. 

* 3*3 an-udagra, mfn. not lofty, low; 

not projecting. 

anu-dandi, is, f. back-bone, MBh. 

an-udaya, as, m. non-rising, the 

not rising (of a luminary). 

1. An-udita, mfn. not risen, not appeared. 

* 3 ** an-udara, xnf(d)n. (see 3. a) thin, 
lank, Pat. 

* 3^3 anu-\/dah, to burn up, RV. &c.; 

to take fire (aor. Subj. -dakshi\_ !for dhakshi]), 
RV. ii, 1, 10; to be consumed by fire subsequently 
after (acc.), MBh. xii, 8107. 

* 3 * T anu-s /1. da (Pass, -ddyi) to permit, 

restore, RV.; to give way, yield, RV.; AV.; to remit, 
AV.; to pay one out (?), MBh. vii, 9499. 

Anu-da. See andnuda . 

Anu-datta, mfn. granted, remitted, given back. 
Pan. vii, 4, 4", Comm. 

Anu-ddya, am, n. a present, RV. vi, 20, 11 ; 
{anu-deyi), f. a bride’s maid (Gnm. & Say.), RV. x, 
85,6; * 35 . 5 & 6 ; [‘gift,’ NBD.J 

an-uddtta , mfn. not raised, not 
elevated, not pronounced with the Udatta accent, 
grave ; accentless, having the neutral general tone 
neither high nor low (i.e. both the grave or 11011- 
elevated accent explained by Panini as sauna(ara, 
q. v.—which immediately precedes the Udatta, and 
also the general accentless, neutral tone, neither high 
nor low, explained as cka-'sruti) ; having the one 
monotonous ordinary intonation which belongs to 
the generality of syllables in a sentence ; {as), m. 
one of the three accents to be observed in reading 
the Vedas, the grave accent. — tara, m. ‘more than 
Anudatta, still lower in sound than Amidatta,’ i. e. 
the very Anudatta accent ^or a syllable having this 
accent which immediately precedes a syllable hav¬ 
ing the Udatta or Svarita accent, and is therefore 
more depressed than the ordinary Anudatta, Pan. i, 
2, 31, Sch.), Pan. i, 2, 40. Seh. Anudattddi, n. 
(in Gr.) a nominal base of which the first syllable is 
Anudatta. Anudattet, m. a verbal root having for 
its Anuhandha the Anudatta accent to indicate that 
it takes the Atmane-pada terminations only ; also 
anuddt(6padesa. Anudattodaya, n. a syllable 
immediately preceding the Anudatta accent. 

*3* T *1 . an-udara, mfn. niggardly, mean. 

anu-dara, mfn. adhered to or 

followed by a wife. 

anu-digdha, mfn .{Vdih), covered 

(ifc.), Car. 

2. an-udita , mfn. unsaid, unutter¬ 
ed ; unutterable, blamable (cf. a-vadyd), RV. x, 95, 

I; AV. v, 1, 2 (see 1 .dn-udita s. v. an-udaya), 

anu-dinam, ind. every day. 
anu-dicasam , ind. id. 
y/dis, to point out for, assign. 

Anu-disam, ind. in every quarter. 

Anu-desa, as, m. a rule or injunction pointing 
back to a previous rule; reference to something prior. 

Anu-desin, mfn. pointing back, referring back ; 
being the object of an Anudesa; residing at the 
same place, AsvGr. 

*353 anu-\/dush, to become demoralized 

as a result of, MBh. v, 4543. 

anu- y/dribh, to make into bundles 

or chains, KaushBr. 

* 33 *, anu-y/dris (ind. p ,-dnsya, RV. x, 

130, 7) to survey, behold; to keep in view or in 
mind, to foresee : Caus. P. -darsayati, to show, tell, 
teach ; Pass. - driiyatc (also perf. A. -dadrise, RV. 
viii, 1, 34), to become or be visible. 
Anu-dargana, am, n. consideration, regard. 
Anu-darsin, mfn. considering, foreseeing._ 
Anu-drisbtl, is, f., N. of the ancestress of Anu- 
drishtineya, (gana subhrddi and kalyany-adi.) 
Anu-drasbtavya, mfn. to be observed, visible. 

*33 anu- y/dri, Pass. - diryate , to break 

through after (another); to be scattered or contused 
in consequence of the confusion of others. 

anu-deham, ind. behind the body, 

Sis. ix, 73. 

* 3 ^ anu-dairghya, mfn. longitudinal. 
OTjrftt an-udgirna , mfn. not vomited 

forth, not disdained ; not spurned. 

dn-uddhata , mfn. (y/han), not lifted 

up, humble ; unsurpassed ; unopposed ; (tfj), in. not 
a high place, TBr. 

an-uddharana,am,]\. ( vhri), non- 

removal ; not offering, not establishing or proving. 

An-uddbara, as, m. non-partition, not taking a 
share; non-removal. 

An-uddhrita, mfn. non-removed, not taken 
away ; uninjured, undestroyed ; unoffered ; undi¬ 
vided, unpartitioned; unestablished, unproved. An- 
uddbritabhyastamaya, ni. sunset UiO/iy-astam- 
aya) taking place whilst the Ahavaniva lire con¬ 
tinues unremoved from the Garhapa’ya, KiitySr. 

an-udbhata, mfn. not exalted, un¬ 


^ 3 ® an-udya, mfn. unutterable, Pan. iii, 

1, 101, Sch. 

An-udyamaua, mfn. not being spoken, SBr. 

an-udyata, mfn. {\/yam), inactive, 

idle, destitute of perseverance. 

* 3 *P> anu-dyuta, am, n. continuation of 

the play at dice, N. of the chapters 7 ° "79 * n the 
second book of the MBh. 

’^rgsrtn an-udyoga , as, in. absence of ex¬ 
ertion or effort, inactivity, laziness. 

An-udyogln, mfn. inactive, lazy, indifferent. 

^33 an-udra, mfn. waterless, RV. x, 
nf, 6. 

*33 anu- v // 2. dru, to run after, follow; to 

accompany; to pursue; to run over in reciting, AitBr. 

Anu-druta, mfn. followed, pursued; having 
followed or pursued ; accompanied ; {am), n. a mea¬ 
sure of time in music (half a Druta, or one-fourth of 
a M.itrJ or of the time taken to articulate a short 

'*«? *j^TTfT an-udraha, as, m. non-marriage, 


an-udviyna , mfn. free from ap¬ 

prehension or perplexity, easy in mind, Mricch. &c. 

An-udvegfa, mfn. free from anxiety; {as), m. 
freedom from uneasiness. — kara, mfn. not causing 
apprehension, not overawing. 

Pg^anu- >/ dvish, to wreak one's anger 
upon, BhP. 

* 3 ^ anu - s'dhanv (perf. A. 3. sg. -da- 

dhanvc) to run near, RV. ii, 5, 3. 

anu-y/dham (3. pi. dhdmanty anu) 

to sprinkle over, RV. viii, 7, 16. 

anu-Vdhd, to add in placing upon, 
Laty. ; to stimulate to, RV. vi, 36, 2 ; to concede, 
allow, (Pass. aor. -dhayi) RV. vi, 20, 3 . 

^VP* 1 .anu-Vi.dhdv, to run after, run 

up to ; to follow ; to pursue. 

1. Anu-dbfivana, am, n. chasing, pursuing, run¬ 
ning after; close pursuit of any object, going after 
a mistress. 

Anu-dhSvita, mfn. pursued, run after (literally 
or figuratively). 

anu-y/2. dhdv, to cleanse. 

2. Anu-db&vana, am, n. cleansifig, purification 

*3* anu-y/dhi (p. A. -didhydna ; impf. 
P. 3. pi. -dulhiyuh) to think of, RV. iii, 4, 7 & x, 
40, IO; AV. 

'Cppgfxnr anu- dhiipita,min*{ y/ dhup), puffed 

up, proud, RV. ii, 30, to. 

\/dhe, Caus. - dhdpayati , to cause 

to suck, to put to the breast, SBr. xiv. 

anu - \/dhyai , to consider attentively, 

think of, muse ; to miss, Kfith,; to bear a grudge, TS. 

Ami-dnya, f. sorrow, AV. vii, 114. 2. 
Ami-dbyana, am, n. meditation religious con¬ 
templation, solicitude. 

Anu-dbyayin, mfn. contemplating, meditating; 
missing. MaitrS. 

anu- v'dhvans , A. (perf. - dcidhvasi ) 

to fall or drop upon, TS. 

anu - y/nad, to sound towards (acc,); 

Cans. P. -nddayati, to make resonant or musical. 

Ann-nada, as, m. sound, vibration, Sis.; rever¬ 
beration, echo. 

Aivu-jietdita, mfn. made to resound. 
Anu-n&din, mfn. resounding, echoing, resonant. 

anu-y/nand, to enjoy. 



'erg^ anu-nam. 

*3^ ami-par i . 

anu-s ‘nam . A. to incline to, RV. v, 
3:. id. Caus. P. -namayati, to cause to bow, BhP. 

anu-naya, &c. See anu-^/ni. 

'a 'j'i anu-nasika, mfn. nasal, uttered 
through the nose v as one of the five nasal consonants, 
or a vowel, or the three semivowels^/, v, l, under 
certain circumstances; in the case of vowels and 
semivowels, the mark ^ is used to denote this nasal¬ 
ization ; the nasal mark & ; (am), n. a nasal twang; 
speaking through the nose (a fault in pronunciation). 
— tva, n. nasality. — lopa, m. dropping of a nasal 
sound or letter. Anun 3 .sikddi, m. a compound 
letter commencing with a nasal. AnunS.sika.nta, 
rn. a radical ending in a nasal. Anunasikopa- 
dha, mfn. having a nasal penultimate; succeeding 
a syllable with a nasal sound. 

anu-ni-/kram , -krdmati (Subj. 
- krdmdt ) to follow in the steps, TS.; SBr. 

anu-/niksk , to pierce along, AV. 

anu-ni-s/tud (impf. 3. pi. -atu- 
dari) to wound with a stab, goad, PBr. 

anu-ni-Zpad, -padyate , to lie 
down by the side of, SBr.; Kaus. 

anu-ni-Zyvj , to attach to, place 

under the authority of, AitBr.; PBr.; Kath. 

^RTrT^TH anu-nir-jih ana, min.(ptp. A. 
V2. ha), proceeding out of, BhP. 

anu-nir - /dah (Imper. 2. sg. 

- daha ) to burn down in succession, AV. ix, 2, 9. 

anu-nir desa , as , m. description 

or relation following a previous model. 

anu-nir-/2. rap, to take out 

from for scattering or sharing subsequently,TS.; SBr. 

Anu-nirvapy A, mfn. to be taken out and shared 
subsequently,TS.; (d), f., N. of a ceremony, KaushBr. 

anu-nir-/2. vii, -vdti, to become 

extinct, go out after. 

anu-ni-/vrij (impf. 3. sg. -vri- 
nak) to plunge into (loc.), RV. vii, 18, 12. 

anu-ni-/ vrit, Caus. -vartayati, 
to bring back, AitBr. 

. anu-ni-/sam (ind. p .-samya) 
to hear, perceive, BhP.; to consider, MBh. xii, 6680. 

2. anu-nisam, ind. every night, 

Kathas, &c. 

anu-nisitham, ind. at mid¬ 
night, Kir. 

anu-/ni (Subj. 2. s g.-nayas; aor. 

Subj. 2.s g.-neshi, 2 p!. -neshatha) to bring near, 
lead to, RV.; to induce, win over, conciliate, pacify, 

Anu-naya, as, m. conciliation, salutation, cour¬ 
tesy, civility, showing respect or adoration to a guest 
or a deity ; humble entreaty or supplication, reve¬ 
rential deportment; regulation of conduct, discipline, 
tuition ; (mfn.), conciliatory, kind ; (am), ind. fitly, 
becomingly. — pratigha-prahana, n. abandoning 
the obstacles to conciliatory behaviour, Buddh. 
Anunay&mantrapa, n. conciliatory address. 

Ann-nayamana, mfn. conciliating, honouring. 

Ann-nayin, mfn. courteous, supplicating. 

Anu-nayaka, m((ikd)n. submissive, humble. 

Anu-n&ylka, f. a female character subordinate to 
a nayikd or leading female character in a drama. 

Anu-nixughu, mfn. desirous of conciliating. 

Anu-nita, mfn. disciplined, taught; obtained ; 
respected ; pleased, pacified ; humbly entreated. 

Anu-niti, is, {.conciliation,courtesy,supplication. 

Anu-neya, mfn. to be conciliated, Mricch. 

ami- v f nu, Interns, (impf. 3 pi. -no- 

ftavur ; pr. p. nom. pi. m. -nSnuvatas) to follow 
with acclamations of praise, RV. i, 80,9&viii, 92,33. 

anu-/nrit , to dance after (acc.), 
R, ; Kathas.; to dance before (acc.), MBh. 

n-nnnata , mfn. not elevated, not 
hrted up, — g&tra, mfn. having limbs that are not 

too stout, prominent or protuberant, Buddh. An- 
unnatdnata, mfn. not raised nor lowered, level. 

an-unmatta, mfn. not mad, sane, 
sober, not wild. 

An-unmadita, mfn. id., AV. vi, m, 1-4. 
An-unmada, as, m. not being mad, soberness, 
MaitrS.; (mfn.) = an-unmatta. 

an-upakarin , mfn. not assist¬ 
ing, disobliging, ungrateful, not making a return for 
benefits received ; unserviceable, useless. 
An-upakrtta, mfn. unassisted. 

dn-upakshita, mfn. uninjured, 
undecaying, RV. iii, 13, 7 & x, 101, 5; AV. vi, 78, 2. 

an-upagitam , ind. so that no 
other person accompanies in singing, SBr. 

■^WFKTMfT an-upaghatdrjita, mfn. ac¬ 
quired without detriment (to the paternal estate). 

An-upaghnat, mfn. not detrimental, M11.; not 
touching, Laty. 

anu- 4/pac, to make ripe by degrees, 
BhP.: Pass, to become ripe by degrees,MBh.xiv } q97. 

an-upajivamyd , mfn. yield¬ 
ing no livelihood, (Compar. - tara, ‘yielding no live¬ 
lihood at all’) SBr. vi; having no livelihood, SBr. vi. 

anu-^path, to say after, read 
through, repeat, BhP. ; Susr. 

Anu-pathita, mfn. read through (aloud), recited. 
Anu-pathltin, l, m. (one who has read through 
or recited), proficient, (gana ishtadi, q.v.) 

anu - /pat, to pass by (acc.) Hying, 

AsvGr.; to fly after, run after, go after, follow: Caus. 
(Imper. 2. sg. -pdtaya) to fly along, AV. vi, 134, 3 ; 
to throw (a person) down together with oneself, R. 

Anu-patana, am, n. falling on or upon ; fol¬ 
lowing; (in mathem.) proportion. 

Anu-patita, mfn. fallen, descended ; followed. 
Anu-pata. See s. v. 

anu-pati, ind. after the husband, 


^*^^7 dnu-patha , mfn. following the road, 
RV. v, 52, 10; (as), m. a road followed after an¬ 
other, BhP.; a servant, BhP.; (am), ind. along the 

.anu-s/pad, to follow, attend, be j 
fond of; to enter ; to enter upon ; to notice, under¬ 
stand ; to handle. 

| 2. Anu-pad, mfn. coming to pass, VS. xv, 8. 

Anu-pada, mfn. following closely, L.; («j), m., 
N. of a man or tribe, (gana upakddi, q.v.); (am), 
n. a chorus, refrain, burden of a song or words sung 
again after regular intervals; N. of an Upiinga be¬ 
longing to the Sama-veda ; (am), ind. step by step ; 
word for word ; on the heels of, close behind or 
after, —sutra, n. a commentary explaining the 
text (of a Brahmana) word for word. 

Ann-padavi, f. a road followed after another, 

Anu-padin, 1, m. a searcher, an inquirer, one 
who follows or seeks for, Pan. v, 2, 90. 

AnupadinS, f. a boot, buskin. Pan. v, 2, 9. I 

an-vpadasta [Kaus.] or an-upa- 

dasya [SankhSr.] or dn-upadasyat [TS.] or an¬ 
il pad a sv at [AV.] or dn-upaddsuka [TS.], mfn. not 
drying up, not decaying. 

an-upadishta , mfn. untaught, 


An-upadeshtri, td, m. one who does not teach. 

an-upadha , as, m. 'having no pe¬ 
nultimate,’ a letter or syllable (as a sibilant or k) not 
preceded by another. 

an-upadhi-sesha. mfn. in whom 

there is no longer a condition of individuality, 

an-upandka, as, m. want of close 
attachment or adherence (?), Buddh. 

an-upanyasta, mfn. not laid 

down clearly, not established, Yajfi. 

^ qqfn an-vpapatti, is, f. non-accom¬ 
plishment ; failure of proof; inconclusive argumei>- 
tation ; irrelevancy, inapplicability; insufficiency of 
means, adversity. 

An-upapanna, mfn. not done, unaccomplished, 
uneflected ; unproved ; irrelevant, inconclusive, in¬ 
applicable ; impossible ; inadequately supported. 

An-upapadaka, qs, m. pi. 1 having no material 
parent,’ N. of a class of Buddhas, called Dhyani- 

an-upaplava, mfn. free from dis¬ 

aster or overwhelming calamity. 

An-upaplnta, mfn. not overwhelmed (with 

an-upabadha, mf(a)n. unob¬ 

structed, SBr. 

an-upabhukta, mfn. unenjoyed, 


An-upabfcujyam£na, mfn. not being enjoyed, 

an-vpama, mf(a)n. incomparable, 

matchless ; excellent, best ; (d), f. the female ele¬ 
phant of the south-east or of the north-east. — mati, 
m., N. of a contemporary of Sskya-muni. 
An-upamita, mfn. uncompared, matchless. 
An-upameya, mfn. incomparable. 

an-upamardana, am, n. non- 

demolition or refutation of a charge. 

an-upayukta, mfn. unsuited, un¬ 

suitable, improper; useless, unserviceable. 

An-upayoga, as, m. unserviceableness, useless¬ 

An-upayogin, mfn. unsuitable, useless. 

an-uparata, mfn. uninterrupted, 

not stopped. 

anu-para-4/gam, to follow one 

who is escaping, MaitrS. 

/pat, to fly or hasten 
by the side of another, AitBr. 

anu-para-/bhu, to spoit or de¬ 
stroy after another, TS.; AitBr.: Caus. - bhdvayati, 
id., TS. 

an'u-pard-/mris, to seize, SBr. 
anu-pard- /s'. «•, (said of a leaky 

vessel) to flow with water subsequently, Kath. 

anu-pari- /l. kri, to scatter 
alongside, to bestrew, Kaus. 

^ *3< 4 i onu-pari - vkram, to walk 

round in order, to make the circuit of, visit in a 
regular round. 

A nil-par ikramana, am, n. walking round in 
order, AitAr. 

Anu-parikr&tnam, ind. while walking round in 
order, TS.; SBr.; PSrGr. 

anu-pari-/ 1. gd, to make the 

round of, traverse, MBh. 

anu-pariedram, ind. = anu - 
Parikramam , KapS. 

■^^qfrirft anu-pari-ni (/ni), to lead or 

carry about, Kaus. 

^T^RflTV anu-paridhi, ind. along or at the 

three Taridhis of the sacrificial fire, K2tySr. 

anu-paripdti-krama, as, m. 

regular order, VarBrS. 

anu-pari- /yd, to pass through 

in order, AsvGr. 

anu-pari- /vrit, to return, be 

repeated, SBr. xiv. 

anu-parisrit, ind. along or at 

the surrounding fence, KatySr. 

anu-pari- \'sru, to run after, BhP. 

anu-pari-haram, ind. sur¬ 
rounding, TS. 

anu-pari (/i ), -pary-et 1(3.pi. -pari - 

An-upanySsa, as, m. failure of proof or deter- | yanti, AV. xv, 17, 8, irreg. -paryanti, Kaus.), to 

ruination, uncertainty, doubt. 

1 lollow iii going round, to make the round of. 


■srgxK anu-pare 


anu-pare (-para-^i), (Imper. 2. sg. 

-pdrehi ; impf. -parait) to follow in walking off, 

RV.x, 18, 1 ; TS. 

^^TTTT anu-pary-d-\/i. ga (aor. 3. pi. 
-ag.ur) to revolve, return to, AitBr. 

anu-pary-a-v'dha (Pot. -dadh- 
yat ) to place round in order, AitBr. 

anu-pory-d- \/'vrit, to follow in 
going off, to follow, TS.; SBr.; AitBr. 

anu-pary-s/i.uksh , to sprinkle 
round, Gobh.; Gant. 

anu-pary-e (-d-\/i), -pary-diti, to 
make the whole round of, SBr. &c. 

an-vpalakshita, mfn. untraced, 
unperceived, unmarked, indiscriminated. 

An-upalaksbya, mfn. not to be traced, imper¬ 
ceptible. -vartman, mfn. having ways that can¬ 
not be traced. 

an-vpalabdha, mfn. unobtained, 
unperceived, unascertained. 

An-upalabdbi, is, f. non-perception, non-re¬ 
cognition. - sama, as, a, m. f. trying to establish 

Anu-pana, am, n. a fluid vehicle in medicine; 
drink taken with or after medicine ; drink after 
eating; drink to be had near at hand, (Comm, on) 
ChUp. i, 10, 3. 

Ann-paniya, am, n. drink to be had near at 
hand, Comm, on ChUp. i, 10, 3; (mfn.), fit to be 
drunk after ; serving ai a liquid vehicle of medicine. 

2. anu-s/i. pa, Caus. P. A. - paid - 

yati,°te, to preserve, keep, cherish; to wait for, expect. 

Anu-palana, am, n. preserving, keeping up. 

Ann-palayat, mfn. keeping, maintaining. 

Anu-palin, mfn. preserving, keeping up. 

Ann-pSlu, n., N. of a plant, wild Calladium (?). 

an-upakrita , mfn. not rendered 

fit for sacrificial purposes, Mn.v, 7; Yajn. — m&nsa, 
n. flesh of an animal not prepared for sacrifice. 

an-updkhya , mfn. not clearly 

discernible. Pan. vi, 3, 80. 

anu-pata , as, ns. falling subse¬ 
quently upon, alighting or descending upon in suc¬ 
cession ; following ; going, proceeding in order, or 
as a consequence ; a degree of latitude opposite to 
one given, the Antaeci (?); proportion (in arithm.); 
arithmetical progression, rule of three. 

Anu-p&taka, am, n. a crime similar to a maha- 

a tact (e.g. the reality and eternity of sound) from pataka, q.v. (falsehood, fraud, theft, adultery, &c.) 
the impossibility of perceiving the non-perception of A nu-patam, ind. in regular succession. 

Anu-patin, mfn. following as a consequence or 
An-upalabhyamana, mhi. not being perceived, resu | t 

Pan. vi, 3, 80, Sch. ‘_ no - o , - 

An-upalambba, as, m. non-perception. anu-pana . See I. anu- vi. pa., 

An-upalambbana, am, n. want of apprehen- an-updnatka , mfn. shoeless, 

sion or knowledge. ? 

An-upal&bba, as, m. not catching, TS. Katyhr. ^ 

anvpaldla, as, m., N. of a demon an-updyin, mfn. not usiftg 

aprons to rhildrpn. AV viii. 6 2 means or expedients. 

the impossibility of perceiving the non-perception of 
it, sophistical argument, Nvayad. 

An-upalabhyam&na, mfn. not being perceived, 
Pan. vi, 3, 8o, Sch. 

An-upalambba, as, m. non-perception. 
An-upalambbana, am, n. want of apprehen¬ 
sion or knowledge. 

An-upalSbba, as, m. not catching, TS. 

anvpaldla, as, m.,N.ofademon 

dangerous to children, AV. viii, 6, 2. 

an-vpavitin, i, m. one unin¬ 

vested with the sacred thread. 

1 WrJTJ 31 anu-\ pas , P. A. - pasyati , °te, to 

look at, perceive, notice, discover, RV. frc .; to con¬ 
sider, reflect upon (acc.\ MBh. See. ; to look upon 
as, take as, ib.; (perf. A. p. - paspasdnd ) to show 
(as the path), RV. x, 14,1; AV. vi, 28, 3; (Nir. x, 20.) 
Anu-pasya, mfn. perceiving, seeing, Yogas. 
A'nu-apasbta, mfn. noticed, RV. x, 160, 4. 

* 3*94 an-npasaya , as, m. any aggra¬ 

vating circumstance (in a disease). 

an-upasanta, mfn. not calm ; 

(as), m., N. of a Buddhist mendicant. 

an-upasarga , as, m. a word that 
is not an Upasarga, q. v., or destitute of one ; that 
which needs no additions (as a divine being). 

an-vpasecand, mfn. having no¬ 

thing that mdistens (e.g. no sauce), AV. xi, 3, 24. 

an-upaskrita, mfn. unfinished, 

unpolished ; not cooked ; genuine ; blameless; un¬ 

4 WITH an-vpasthdna,am, n. not coming 

near, Laty.,' not being at hand, absence. 

An-upastbfLpana, am, n. not placing near, not 
producing, not offering ; not having ready or at hand. 

An-upasth£payat, mfn. not presenting, not 
having at hand. 

An-upastbapita, mfn. not placed near, not 
ready, not at hand, not offered or produced. 
An-upastbayin, mfn. absent, distant. 
An-upastbita, mfn. not come near, not present, 
not at hand: not complete, SBr.; (am), n. a word 
not upas t hit a, q, v. 

An-upastbiti, is, f. absence, not being at hand ; 
incompleteness, SBr. 

an-vpahata, mfn. unimpaired, un¬ 
vitiated; not rendered inquire. — krusbta, mfn, 

whose organs of hearing are unimpaired, Buddh. 


dn-upahuta , mfn. not called upon 

or invited, SBr.; not accompanied with invitations,ib. 

An-upahuyam&na, mfn. not being invited, 

i. anu- */ 1. pa, to drink after or 

thereupon, follow in drinking, drink at : Cans. 
(Pot. - pdydyet) to cause to drink afterwards, SBr. 

^3^1^ anu-parsva, mfn. along or by the 

side ; lateral. 

anu-\/pdl. See 2 .anu-s/2.pd, 
an-updvritta, as, m. pi., N. of a 

people, MBh. 

an-vpasana, am, n. want of at¬ 
tention to. 

An-updsita, mfn. not attended to, neglected. 

anu- Vpis (perf. -pipesa) to fasten 

along, AV. 

y/pish(\nd.p.“pishya) to strike 

against, to touch, KatySr. 

anu-purusha, as, m. the before- 
mentioned man,, 2, 190; a follower, ib. Sch. 

anu-v'push, to go on prospering, 
VS.; to prosper after another (acc.), ShadvBr. 

Anu-pusbpa, as, m. a kind of reed (Saccharum 
Sara Roxb.) 

'W^ x j < a7iu-Vpu, A. (anu-pavate) to purify 

in passing along, SBr. 

anu-purva, mf(o)n. regular, orderly, 
in successive order from the preceding; (dm), ind. 
in regular order, from the first, RV. &c.; (cna), ind. 

an-vpta , mfn. (\/2 vap), unsown (as 
seed). — sasya,nifn.fallow,meadow{ground,&c.),L„ 
An-uptrima, mfn. grown without being sown, L. 

'STrJinRWT anu-pra- v kamp, Caus. (Pot. 

-kampayet, 3. pi. °ycyur) to follow in shaking or 
agitating, AitBr.; ApSr. 

anu- v prach (with acc. of the per¬ 

son and thing), to ask, to inquire after. 

Anuprasna. See s. v. 

anu-pra-\ jan, to he born after; 

(with prajam ) to propagate again and again, BhP.: 
Caus. -janayati, to cause to be born subsequently. 

anu-pra-v j nil (pr. p. -jdndt) to 

track, trace, discover, RV. iii, 26, 8, &c. 
Anu-prajn&na, am, 11. tracking, tracing. 

anu-pra-nud (\ nud ), to push 
away from one’s self; to frighten away, put to flight. 

ami - prati - kramam, ind. 
(Vkram), returning, TS. v. 

anu-prati- \ddhd, to offer after 
another (acc.), AitBr. (Pass. - dhiyate ). 

ann-prati-shthd ( s/sthd), to fol¬ 
low in getting a firm footing or in prospering, TS.; 
ChUp.: Desid. -tishthasati, to wish to get a firm 
footing after, Gobh. 

anu- \ 'pratk, A. -prathate , to ex¬ 
tend or spread along (acc.), TS.; to praise, (Comm, 
on) VS. viii, 30. 

anu-pra- \/1. da, to surrender, 

make over, Buddh.; to add. 

Anu-pradUna, am, n. a gift, donation, Buddh.; 
addition, increase, 

anu-pra- \/i. dhdv, to rush after, 

RV. x, 145, 6, &c.: Caus. (perf. -dhavayam ca- 
kiira) to drive after, SBr. 

Anu-pradhavita, mfn. hurried, eager, DaS. 

anu-pra- pat (aor. 3. p\*-pap- 

tan) to fly towards, RV. vi, 63, 6. 

Anu-prapatam, ind. going in succession, Pan. 
iv, 3, 56, Sch. 

anu-pra-Vpad, to enter or ap 

proach or arrive after; to follow, act in conform 
ance to. 

Antx-p rap anna, mfn. following after, con 
formed to. 

Anu-prap&dam, ind. going in succession, Pin 
iv, 3 > 5 6 » Sch. 

anu-pra-\ii.pd, P. (3. pi. - pibanti) 

to drink one after the other, AitBr.; A. (3. pi. -pi- 
pate [sic) & -pibate) to drink after another (acc.), 

TS.; Kith. 

anu-pra-\ bhd, to shine upon,TBr. 

anu-pra-bhnta , mfn. passing 
through, penetrating, ( anu prd-bhuta) RV. viii, 
58, 2 ; penetrated, ChUp. 

anu-pra-bhush (p. - bhushat ) to 

in regular order or succe.-sion, from the first, irom serve, attend, offer, RV. ix, 29, 1. 

the beginning, from above downwards. — kesa, 
-gfLtra, -dansbtra, -nabbl, -p§ni-lekba, mfn. 
having regular hair, regularly shaped limbs, regular 
teeth, a regularly shaped navel, regular lines in the 

anu-pramanu, mfn. having a 

suitable size or length. 

anu-pra- x'rnuc, to let loose or go 

hands (all these are epithets given to Buddha, some successively, RV. iv, 22, 7, 

of them also to Mahivira), Buddh. & Jam. -Ja, anu-pra- v mud, Caus. -moduyati, 

mfn. descended m a regular line, KltySr. — vatsa ^ , 

(r mupurvd -), f. a cow which calves regularly, AV. to con;,t ‘ n? -’ 1 l' irR ^- 

ix, 5, 29. — sas, ind. = anu-purvdm. anu-pra- >■' yam, to offer, T»S. 

Anupurvya, mfn. regular, orderly, KatySr. anu-pra s /yd, to foUowafter,TBr.; 

r mff%anu-prikta, mfn. mixed with, MBh. t0 start after, accompany. 

anu-prishfhya, mf(«)n. (held or anu-pra- \ yuj, to employ after, 

extended) lengthwise, KatySr. add after (abl.), P.I11.; to join, follow, AV. <&c. 

anu-Vpri, Caus. (Imper. -purayatu) Ann-praynjyam*na, mfn. being employed in 

^ v addition or after or afterwards, 

to fill, Git. ^ Anu-prayoktavya, mfn. to be joined or em~ 

^frjRef dn-upfta [SBr.] or anvpcta-purva ployed in addition or after. 

[AsvGr.], mfn. not yet entered at a teacher’s (for Anu-prayoffa, as, m. additional use. 

ns 1 c j • anu-pra-^/ruh, to grow in ac« 

an-vposhana, am, n. not fasting, cordance with, SBr. 

D 2 

ann-praroha . 

a n u- m a. 

rr.fti. coming up or growing in 

anu-pra-vacana, am, n. study 
c:' tr.e Yria a teacher. Anupravacan&cLi, 
i n i v. 1. ill . 

Anupravacanlya, mm. belonging to, or neces- 
Sirv ::: cr.uprei'iacana, AsvGr.; Gobh. 

anu-pra- ad,to repeal another’s 

T 5 .; AitBr.; to speak of, Nir.: Caus. -vd- 
d.a:i. to cause to resound, to play (an instrument), 

anu-pra-\^vah, to drag (or carry) 
about; to go or get forward, RV. x, 2, 3. 

^^TT^T^anM-pra-v/rti', to follow in en¬ 

tering. enter; to attack. 

Anu-pravisya, ind. p. having entered into. 
Anu-pravesa, as, m. or anu-pravesana 

[gana anupravacanddi , q. v.], am, 11. entrance 
into ; imitation, L. 

Anu-pravesanlya, mfn. connected with enter¬ 
ing, (gana anupravacaneldi , q. v.) 

anu-pra-y/vrij, - prd-vrinakti , to 
send or throw after, SBr. 

w 3 Uffiariu-pra-y/vrit (imp f.-pravartataj 

perf. - vdvrite ) to proceed along or after, RV. 
Anu-pravritta,mfn. followingafter(acc.), BhP. 

’srgira^ anu-pra- y/vraj, to follow into 

exile, R. v, 36, 61. 

anu-pra-y/ 1 . sue, - socate , to re¬ 

gret or mourn deeply, MBh. 

anu-prasna, as, m. a subsequent 

question (having reference to what has been pre¬ 
viously said by the teacher). 

anu-pra-y/safij, to adhere to, 

fasten, SBr. 

Anu-prasakta, mfn. strongly attached, Sis. 
Auu-prasakti, is, f. close connection with. 

anu-pra- y/sad, to be content or 

satisfied with (acc.) 

anu-prasuta, mfn.( V 4 .su), created 
afterwards, MBh. xiii, 7361. 

"3*3 anu-pra-y/sri, Caus. (impf. 3 . pi. 

-/rtfj-aro>/a»/<z)toextend over, RV. x, 56, 5 : Intens. 
part. - sdrsrana , moving along (acc.), RV. v, 44, 3. 

anu-pra-y/sr ip, to creep towards 

or after, TS.; SBr.: Caus. (Opt. 3. pi. - sarpayeyuh ) 
to cause to pass round (acc.), AsvSr. 

"3**3 anu-pra- y/stri, to scatter along or 

upon, Kaus. 

anu-pra-y/sf ha, to start after an- 
o.her: Caus. - sthapayati , to cause to follow, BhP. 

Anu-prastlxa, mfn. latitudinal; according to 
width, following the breadth or latitude. 

"3*^* anu-pra-hita, mfn. (y/hi), sent 

after, Uttarar. 

^ an u-pra-y/hri, to throw into the 
fire, TS.; SBr. Sec. 

Anu-praharapa, am, n. throwing into the fire, 
$Br Sec. 

WUtf anu-prdn ( y/an), cl. 2. P. -prdniti, 

to breathe after, TUp. 

m ^ anu-prap (y/ap), to come or go up 

to, reach, attain ; to arrive ; to get; to get back ; 
to get by imitating. 

Anu-pr&pta, mfn. arrived, returned ; obtained ; 
having reached, having got. 

"3 ff, 3 anu-prds (y/2, as), -prdsyati , to 

throw after, §Br., KatySr. 

Anu-prasa, as, m. alliteration, repetition of 
similar letters, syllables, and words, Kpr. Sec. 

"3* anu-pre (\ t), cl. 2 . P. - praiti, to j 

follow, RV. &c.; to follow in death, §Br.; to seek 
after, AV.; AitBr. 

"3**3 anu-prdksh (y/tksh), to follow with 

the eves. 

*njjnrw anu-presh ( y/ish ), Caus. P. -pre- 

shayati, to send forth after, 

Anu-prdiislia,^^, m. a subsequent invitation,SBr. 

'■H H 111 f anu-proh ( y/i. uh ), to insert, ApSr. 
anu-y/plu , to float (as clouds) after; 

to follgw, 

Anu-pl&va, as, in. acompanion or follower, Ragh. 

anu-y/bandh , to attach, tie; to 

bind (by an obligation) ; to stick, adhere, follow, 
endure ; to be followed by, BhP. 

Anu-baddba, mfn. bound to, obliged to, con¬ 
nected with, related to, belonging to ; followed by. 
Anu-badhnat, mfn. following, seeking, Kir. 
Anu-bandha, rt.r, m. binding, connection, attach¬ 
ment; encumbrance ; clog; uninterrupted succession; 
sequence, consequence, result; intention, design; 
motive, cause ; obstacle ; inseparable adjunct or sign 
of anything, secondary or symptomatic affection 
(supervening on the principal disease); an indicatory 
letter or syllable attached to roots, Kc. (marking some 
peculiarity in their inflection ; e.g. an i attached to 
roots, denotes the insertion of a nasal before their 
final consonant) ; a child or pupil who imitates an 
example set by a parent or preceptor; commence¬ 
ment, beginning ; anything small or little, a part, a 
small part; (in arithm.) the junction of fractions; 
(in phil.) an indispensable element of the Vedanta ; 
(f), f hickup, L.; thirst, L. 

Antl-bandliaka, mf(i&S)n. connected, allied; 

Anu-bandhana, am, n. binding, connection, 
succession, unbroken series. 

Anu-bandhin, mfn. connected with, attached.; 
having in its train or as a consequence, resulting; con¬ 
tinuous, lasting,permanent. Anubandhi-tva, n. the 
state of being accompanied or attended or followed. 

Anu-bandhya, mlh. principal, primary, liable 
to receive an adjunct (as a root, a disease) ; (cf. anii- 
bdndhya .) 

anu-hala, am, n. rear-guard, an 

auxiliary army following another. 

" 3 *"H anu-s/badh, Pass, (p -bddhyamd- 

na ) to be oppressed or tormented, Raiat.; KathSs. 

"333 anu-y/budh, to awake; to recol¬ 
lect ; to learn (by information): Caus. - bodhayati , 
to communicate ; to remind, Sak. 

Anu-bodha, m. recollection; an after-thought, 
L.; reviving the scent of a faded perfume, replacing 

Anu-bodhana, am, n. recollecting, reminding. 
Anu-bodlilta, mfti. reminded; convinced by 

Ki anu-brahmana, am, n. a work 

resembling a Brahmana, Pan. iv, 2, 62 ; (am), ind. 

according to the Brahmana, Laty. 

Anu-brShmanika [Comm, on Laty.], as, or 

ann-brSbinanlii [AsvSr.; Vait.J, f, m. a knower 

of an anu-brahmana. 


anu-y/bru, cl. 2» V. -bravifi, to pro¬ 
nounce, recite; to utter; to address, invite (with dat.), 
SBr. &c.; to repeat another’s words, learn by heart 
(by repeating another’s words), RV. v, 44, 13 ; SBr. 

anu-y/bhaj, to worship, BhP 

anu-y/bha. , to shine after another 
(acc.), RV. iii, 6, 7 ; Up. 

Wg^T 5 Ta«M-'v/ 64 a 5 A, to speak to, address; 
to confess. 

Anu-bhS8liana, am. See an-anubhdshana. 
Anu-bh&shltri, mfn. speaking to, saying, Ragh. 

anu-bhasa, as, m. a kind of crow. 
anu-y/bhid, to split or break 

along, SBr. 

Anu-bhltti, ind. along a mat, KatySr. 

anu-\/bhuj, to suffer the conse¬ 
quence of one’s actions; to enjoy successively, Kum.; 
to enjoy, participate ; to pass (an asterism), BhP. 

Anu-bhoga, as, m. (in law) enjoyment, a grant 
of hereditary land in return foi service. 

anu-y/bhu, to enclose, embrace, | 
ChUp.; to be after, attain, equal, RV. &c.; to be 
useful, to help; SBr.; SankhSr.; to turn or incline 

to, RV. x, 147, 1 ; to notice, perceive, understand; 
to experience, to attempt. 

Anu-bhava, as, m. perception, apprehension, fru¬ 
ition ; understanding ; impression on the mind not 
derived from memory ; experience, knowledge de¬ 
rived from personal observation or experiment ; 
result, consequence. — siddlia, mfn. established by 
experience or perception. Anubhavzirudha, mfn. 
subjected to trial or experiment. 

Anu-bhava, as, m. sign or indication of a feeling 
(bhdva) by look or gesture, Kpr. Sec .: dignity, 
authority, consequence ; linn opinion, ascertainment, 
good resolution, belief. 

Anu-bhavaka, mf( ikd' n. causing to apprehend, 
making to understand. — ta, f. understanding. 

Anu-bhavana, am, n. the act of indicating 
feelings by sign or gesture, S.lh. 

Anu-bhavin, mfn. perceiving, knowing; being 
an eye-witness, M11. viii, 69 ; Ap.; showing signs 
of feeling. 

Anu-bhu, mfn. perceiving, understanding (ifc.) 

Anu-bhuta, mfn. perceived, understood, appre¬ 
hended ; resulted, followed as a consequence ; that 
has experienced, tasted, tried or enjoyed. 

Anu-bhuti, is, f. perception ; knowledge from 
any source but memory ; (in phil.) knowledge gained 
by means of the four Pram anas (perception bv the 
senses, inference, comparison, and verbal authority); 
dignity, consequence. — prakasa, in., N. of a me¬ 
trical paraphrase of the twelve principal Upanishads 
by Vidvaranya-muni. — svarupdearya, m., N. of 
the author of the grammar Sarasvatl-prakriya. 

Anu-bhuya, ind. having experienced. 

Anu-bhuyamana, infn. being under trial; being 
experienced or enjoyed. 

anu-s'bhri, to support, Kath.; to 
insert, enter, RV. x, 61, 5 ; AV. 

Anu-bhartri, mf(/r^)n. supporting, strengthen¬ 
ing (Gmn.), penetrating (NBD.), RV. i, 88, 6. 

anu-y/bhraj, to illuminate. 

anu-bhratri, td, m. a younger 


" 3 ^ anu- \/mud , to rejoice over, to 

gladden, to praise, RV. &c. 

Anu-madya (4, 5), mfn. to be praised in suc¬ 
cession, to be granted with acclamation or praise, 
RV.; AV. 


to the middle, Pan. vi, 2, 189, Sch. 

" 3 ^ anu- v man, to approve, assent to, 
permit, grant: Caus. P. -mdnayati, to ask for per¬ 
mission or leave, ask for (acc.), Yajn.; to honour. 

Anu-mata, mfn. approved, assented to, per¬ 
mitted, allowed ; agreeable, pleasant; loved, be¬ 
loved ; concurred w ith, being of one opinion ; (am), 
n. consent, permission, approbation; (e), loc. ind. 
with consent of. — karma-karin, mfn. doing what 
is allowed, acting according to an agreement. 

Anu-mati, is, f. assent, permission, approbation ; 
personified as a goddess, RV.; AV. Sec. ; the fif¬ 
teenth day of the moon’s age (on which it rises one 
digit less than full, when the gods or manes receive 
oblations with favour); also personified as a goddess, 
VP.; oblation made to this goddess. <-pattra, 11. 
(in law) a deed expressing assent. 

Anti-manana, am, n. assenting, Nir, 

Anu-mantri, mfn. consenting to, permitting, 
TBr. &c. 

Ann-many am Ana, mfn. minding, assenting. 

l. Anu-mana, as, m.‘permission, consent, TBr.; 

anu-y/mantr, to accompany with 
or consecrate by magic formulas; to dismiss with a 

Anu-mantrana, am, n. consecration by hymns 
and prayers, —mantra, m. a hymn used in con¬ 

Anu-mantrita, mfn. so consecrated. 

anu-marana. See anu-y/mri. 
ann-maru, us, m. (used in the pi.) 

a country next to a desert, R. iv, 43, 19. 

" 3 m 1 . anu-\^, Intens. (impf. ami ,- 

med Anu ) to roar or bleat towards, RV. i, 164, 28. 
" 3” 1 2 - anu-y/^- ma, to be behind in 



measure, to be unable to equal, RV.; to infer, con¬ 
clude, guess, conjecture : Pass, -miyate, to be in¬ 
ferred or supposed. 

3. Anu-ma, f. inference, a conclusion from given 

anu-ma . 

’STR75T anu-Id. 

anu-\ ; yat, A. -y at ate , to strive to 

attain to ot to reach, RV. ix, 93, 3. 

anu- v yam (3. pi. -yaechanti ; Im- j 

per. -yacchatu ; p. fern. -ydcchamana) to direct, 

2. Anu-mana, am, n. the act of inferring or guide, give a direction to, RV. i, 123, 13; iv, 57, 7 
drawing a conclusion from given premises; inference,_ & v i, 75, 6; (pert. 3. pi. -yemuh, A. 3. du. -yemat c.’) 

consideration, reflection ; guess, conjecture ; one of j to follow, RV. 

the means of obtaining true knowledge see pra- 

man a >. — kkanda, n. or -cintamani, m. or-pra- 
kasa, rn. works on anumana. — mani-didkiti, 

f. a similar work written by Kaghunatha. Anu- 
manokti, f. inferential argument, reasoning. 

Anu-mapaka, 11. causing an inference 

(as an effect). 

Anu-mita, mfn. inferred, conjectured. 
Anu-miti, is, f. conclusion from given premises. 
Anu-mimana, mfn. p. A. concluding, inferring. 
Anu-mlyamana, mfn. Pass, p, being inferred. 
Anu-meya, mfn. to be measured, AV. vi, 137, 
2 ; inferable, to be inferred, proved or conjectured. 

anu-madya . See anu-^/mad. 

anu-masham, ind. like a kidney 
bean, (gana parimukhddi , q.v.) 

cinu-\f 2 . mid, -medyati , to become 

fat after another, TBr. 

anu-\ mud, to join in rejoicing, 

RV. viii, 1, 14, &c.; to sympathize with, to re¬ 
joice ; to allow with pleasure, express approval, ap¬ 
plaud, permit; Cans ,-modayati, to express approval, 

Anu-moda, as, m. a subsequent pleasure, the 
feeling of pleasure from sympathy. 

Axm-modaka, n. assenting, showing 

sympathetic joy. 

Anu-modana, am, n. pleasing, causing pleasure, 
applauding; assent, acceptance; sympathetic joy. 

Anu-modita, mfn. pleased, delighted, applauded; 
agreeable, acceptable. 

anu-\ muh , to feel distressed at, to 
be troubled about or after another, MBh. i, 143. 

’WgjJ anu- y'mri, to follow in death, TBr. Mn . t0 be eni ; ; , 

& c - _ # vant, agent, delei 

Anu-marana, am, n. following in death ; post- j / 

cremation or concremation of a widow ; the burning *n$\,vm-yu 

of a widow with (her husband’s corpse or with part pendent, SBr. xi. 

of his dress when his body is not on the spot; cf. (lU) 

saha-maraud), '»(? .A 

Anu-mariskyat, mfn. about to follow in death. (>r sacr i ncia P 0> t 

Ann-mritS, f. the woman who burns with a part 

of her husband s dress. Winer SinkhSr 

Anu-yata, mfn. followed (in hostile maimer), 
RV. v, 41, 13. 

anu-yavam, ind. like barley, (gana 
parimukhddi , q.v.) 

'snjm 1. anu- v'ya, to go towards or after, 

follow ; to imitate, equal. 

2. Anii-yS, mfn. following, VS. xv, 6. 
Anu-yata, mfn. following ; followed ; practised. 
Anu-yatavya, mfn. to be followed. 
Anu-yatri, m. a follower, companion. 
Anu-yatra, am, a, n. f. retinue, attendance; that 
which is required for a journey. 

Anu-yatrika, mfn. following, attendant, Sak. 
Anu-yana, am, 11. going after, following. 
Anu-yayin, mfn. going after; a follower, a 
dependant, attendant; following, consequent upon. 
Anuyayi-ta, f. or -tva, n. succession. 

anu-\/yvj , to join again, SBr.; 

AitBr.; to question, examine ; to order; to enioin ; 
Caus. - yojayati , to place upon; to add, Kaus.; 
Desid. - ynynkshati, to intend to question, MBh, 

Anu-yukta, mfn. ordered, enjoined ; asked, in¬ 
quired ; examined, questioned ; reprehended. 

Anu-yuktin, i, m. one who has enjoined, ex¬ 
amined, (gana ishtadi, q.v.) 

Anu-yugaxn, ind. according to the Yugas or four 
ages, Mn. i, 84. 

Anu-yoktri, ta, m. an examiner, inquirer,teacher. 
Anu-yoffa, as, m. a question, examination; cen¬ 
sure, reproof, NySyad.; religious meditation, spiritual 
union. — krit, m. an AcArya or spiritual teacher. 

Anu-yoffin, mfn. ifc. combining, uniting; con¬ 
nected with ; questioning. 

Anu-yojana, am, n. question, questioning. 
Anu-yojya, mfn. to be examined or questioned, 
Mn.; to be enjoined or ordered; censurable ; a ser¬ 
vant, agent, delegate, SSk. 

n u-yti , mfn. (\ '2. yu), depending, de- 

vt <At anu-yupam, ind. along the Y'upa 
or sacrificial post, (gana parimukhddi, q.v.) 

wyp-q anumrigya , mfn. ( vmrig), to be 

sought after, BhP. — d 5 .su, mfn. granting all that 
is sought. 

anu-\ ‘mri ), to rub lengthways for 

polishing or cleaning, AV.; SBr. &c.: Intens. part. 
-mdrmrijdna, stretching (the arms) repeatedly to¬ 
wards, RV. x, 14 2, 5. 

. raksh, to guard while fol¬ 
lowing, SankhSr.; to guard, take care of. 
Anu-rakshana, am, n. the act of guarding. 

onu-rajju, ind. along the rope, 

Kitty Sr. 

anu-\ ranj, to become red in imi¬ 
tation of; to be attached or devoted : Caus. P. - raft- 
jayati, to win, conciliate, gratify. 

, ^ . .. . . n . y Anu-rakta, mfn. fond of, attached, pleased ; be- 

anu-xmris, to grasp, seize, R . j loved. — praja, mfn. beloved by his subjects. — loka, 

&c.; to consider, think of, reflect: Caus. -marsa- m. a person to w hom every one is attached. 
yati, to touch or take hold ot lor the sake ot examin- Anu-rakti, is, f. affection, love, devotion, 
ing, Kath. Anu-ranj aka, mPf&fjn. attaching, conciliating. 

A-nu-marsam, ind. so as to seize or take hold Anu-raiijana, am, n. the act of attaching or 
of, SBr.; KatySr. conciliating affection, love ; pleasing. 

anu-x'mluc (only used for the Anu-ranjita, mfn. conciliated, delighted. 

„ ,•/ _ , 1 \ 4 . r . 1 Anu-raffa, as, m. attachment, affection, love, 

etvmol. ot anu-mlacanti below), to rise from the . , , a.. ■ 0 e / 

' . | . passion; red colour, Sis. ix, 8, &c. — vat, mfn. af- 

res mg p ace ^ r. i fectionate, attached, in love with; red, Sis. ix, 10, &c. 

Anu-ml6canti [VS-j or anu-mloca [Hariv.], AnVLTStg ^ hgit&t n . gesture expressive of passion. 

f., N. of an Apsaras. . . . f _ , , 

_ r Anu-ragm, nun. impassioned, attached; caus- 

^ ^ (inu-yajus, ind. according to the ing love ; \ini), f. personification of a musical note. 
Yaius-formula, KatySr. Anuragi-ta, f. the state of being in love with. 

Ann-yaga, as, m. a subsequent or after-sacrifice, anu-ranana, am, 11. sounding con- 

Pan. vii. 3, 62, Sch. c 'f, , • c ., 

0 ’ r tormablv to, echoing, Sah. 

Anu-yaja, as, m. a secondary or final sacrifice, _ 

RV x, 51. 8 & 9 and 182, 2; SBr. &c. — prasava, anu-ratha , as, m., N. of a son of 

m. permission to perform an Anuyfija, KatySr. Kuruvatsa and father of Puruhotra, VP.; \a?n\ md. 
— pra'iska, d.j m. pi. the formulas belonging to the behind the carriage, Pan. ii, I, 6, Sch. 

ArmyPa. KatySr. -vat anuyajd-), mfn. having Anu-ratky 5 ; f. a path along the margin of a 
sr: m.:--V sacrifices, MaitrS.; AitBr. Anuyajanu- road, side road, R. ii, 6, 17. 
mantrana, r.. redtir.2 these formulas, KatySr. , 

AzuyAjartha, r.t ::t. belonging to or used at an | anu- x ram, Y. - ramati , to cease to 

Anu-rakti, is, f. affection, love, devotion. 

Anu-ranj aka , mf(fit<7}n. attaching, conciliating. 

Anu-rahjana, am, n. the act of attaching or 
conciliating affection, love ; pleasing. 

Anu-rahjita, mfn. conciliated, delighted. 

Anu-raffa, as, m. attachment, affection, love, 
passion ; red colour, Sis. ix, 8, &c. — vat, mfn. af- 
! fectionate, attached, in love with; red, Sis. ix, 10, See. 
Anuraffenglta, n. gesture expressive of passion. 

Anu-raffin, mfn. impassioned, attached; caus¬ 
ing love ; \itiT), f. personification of a musical note. 
Anuraffi-ta, f. the state of being in love with. 

anu-ranana , am, n. sounding con¬ 

formably to, echoing, Sah. 

anu-ratha , as, m., N. of a son of 
Kuruvatsa and father of Puruhotra, VP.; {am\ md. 
behind the carriage, Pan. ii, I, 6, Sch. 

Anu-ratkyS; f. a path along the margin of a 
road, side road, R. ii, 6, 17. 

anu-\ 'ram, P. -ramati , to cease to 
go or continue, stop, SankhSr.: A. to be fond of 

Auu-rata, mfn. fond of, attached to. 
Anu-rati, is, f. love, affection ; attachment. 

ras , to answer to a cry or 

to a sound. 

Anu-rasita, am, n. echo, Malatim.; Uttarar. 

unu-rasa, as, m.(in poetry) a sub¬ 
ordinate feeling or passion ; a secondary flavour (as 
a little sweetness in a sour fruit, &c.), Susr. &c. 

anu-rahasam t ind. in secret, 

apart, Pan. v, 4, Si. 

anu- ^ raj , to be brilliant or shine in 
accordance with (said of corresponding metres), RV. 

anu-rdtram, ind. in the night, 


’BTJTTV anu- \/radh, to carry to an end; to 

finish w r ith (gen.), TBr. 

Anu-raddha, mfn. effected, accomplished ; ob¬ 
tained. BhP. 

Anu-rddka, mfn., see anuradha ; born under 
the asterism Anuradha, Pan. iv, 3, 34 ; m., N. 

of a Buddhist; (<ir), m. pi. and {a) [AV. &c.], f. 
the seventeenth of the twenty-eight Nakshatras or 
lunar mansions (a constellation described as a line 
of oblations). — ffr 5 ,ma, m. or-pura, n. the ancient 
capital of Ceylon founded by the above-named Auu- 

anu-^/ric, Pass. - ricyate , to be 

emptied after, TS. 

Wjf t^anu-v'rish, cl. 4. P. -rishyati, to be 

injured after (acc.), ChUp. 

anu-\'ri, cl. 4. A. - riyate , to flow 
after, RV. i, 85, 3 ; (p. -riyamdna) VS. x, 19. 

1. anu-Vru, to imitate the cry or 

answer to the cry of (acc.) 

Anu-ruta, mfn. resounding with, VarBrS. 

an-uru, mf(ws or tu)n. not great. 

anu-\ 'rue, Caus. P. -rocayati, to 

choose, prefer, MBh. 

anu-\ rud , to lament, bewail. 

1. anu-^rudh, to bar (as a way), 

MBh. xiii, 1649^ to surround, confine, overcome, 
BhP. &c.; cl. 4. A. -rudhyate or ep. P. -rudhyati 
(2. sg. - f udhyase , RV. viii, 43, 9, &c.), to adhere 
to, be fond of, love ; to coax, soothe, entreat. 

Anu-ruddka, mfn. checked, opposed ; soothed, 
pacified ; (rt.r), m., N. of a cousin of Ssky.imuni. 

2. Ann-rudh, mfn. adhering to, loving, VS. xxx, 
9 ; (cf. anii-rildh.) 

Anu-rodha, as, m. obliging or fulfilling the 
wishes (of any one); obligingness, compliance ; con¬ 
sideration, respect; reference or bearing of a rule. 

Anu-rodkana, am, n. obliging or fulfilling the 
wishes of; means for winning the affection of. AV. 

Anu-rodkin, mfn. complying with, compliant, 
obliging, having respect or regard to. Anuxodki- 
ta, t. the state of being so, Kathas. 

anu-\ 'ruh, P. to ascend, mount, 

RV. x, 13, 3 : A. to grow, RV. 

Anu-ruka, f. a grass (Cyperns Pertenius). 
Anu-roka, as, m. mourning or growing up to, 
MaitrS.; 1 ‘Br. 

a'nu-rupa , mfn. following the form, 

conformable, corresponding, like, fit, suitable ; 
adapted to, according to ; {as), m. the Antistrophe 
which has the same metre as the Stotriya or Strophe; 
the second of three verses recited together; {am\ 
n. conformity, suitability ; {am, cna ind. ifc. con¬ 
formably, according. — ceskta, mfn. endeavouring 
to act becomingly. — tas, ind. conformably. 

anu -retail, f., X. of a plant. 

anu-lakshya, ind.p.conforming to. 

mi-lagna, mfn. attached to ; fol¬ 
lowed; intent on, pursuing after. 

\/labh, to grasp or take bold 

of (from behind':, SBr.; KStvSr.: Desid. -lipsate, 
to intend to grasp, ib. 

anuld, f., N. of a female Arhat or 

Buddhist saint; also of a queen of Ceylon. 


'cnjcSTTJ anu-ldpa. 

anu-vi-s hie. 

^( 55 T v cnu-lapa , as, m. (^ /lap), repetition 
of what has been said, tautology. 

anu-lasa or - lasya, as, m. a pea- 

^ ^ 1 ■ 


v'Hp, P. to anoint, besmear; 

A. to anoint one’s self after (bathing): Caus. -lepa- 
yati, to cause to he anointed. 

Anu-lipta, mfn. smeared, anointed. Anulip- 
tang^a, mfn. having the limbs anointed. 

Anu-lepa, as, m. unction, anointing, bedaubing. 

Auu-lepaka, mfn. anointing the body with un¬ 
guents, L,; (ikd), f. vgana mahishy-adi, q.v.) 

Anu-lepana, am, n. anointing the body; un¬ 
guent so used ; oily or emollient application. 

anu-yjli, to disappear after, BhP. 
anu-Vlubh, Caus. - lobkayati , to 

long for, desire, R. 

anu-loma , mf(a)n. * with the hair 
or grain’ (opposed to prati-loma , q.v.), in a natural 
direction, in order, regular, successive ; conformable; 
(d), f. a woman of a lower caste than that of the 
mail’s with whom she is connected, Yajn.; ids), m. 
'descendants of an anulomS,’ mixed castes, (gana 
upakddi , q.v.); {dm), ind. in regular order, SBr. 
8 cc, — kalpa, m. the thirty-fourth of the Atharva- 
parisishtas. — kriskta, mfn. ploughed in the 
regular direction (with the grain). — ja, tnfn. off¬ 
spring of a mother inferior in caste to the father 
[Mn.; Yajn.], (as the Murdhavasikta of a Brahman 
father and Kshatriya mother, and so on with the 
Ambashtha Nishada or Parasava, Mahishya, Ugra, 
Karana.) — parinita, f. married in regular grada¬ 
tion. Auulomaya, mfn. having fortune favour¬ 
able. Anulomartka, mfn. one who holds favour¬ 
able views on any question. 

Anu-lomana, am, n. due regulation, sending or 
putting in the right direction, Susr.; carrying off 
by the right channels, purging, Susr. 

Anu-lomaya, Nom. P. anu-lonuiyati, to stroke 
or rub with the hair, Pan.iii, I, 25, Sch.; to send in 
the right direction or so as to carry off by the right 
channels, Susr. 

an-ulband , mf(a)n. not excessive, 

not prominent, keeping the regular measure, RV.&c. 

^ • 

anu-vansa, as, m. a genealogical 

list or table ; collateral branch of a family, Hariv.; 
(am), ind. according to race or family; (mf(a)n.), 
of a corresponding family, of equal birth. 

An.uvag.sya, mfn. relating to a genealogical list. 

anu-vakra, mfn. somewhat crooked 

or oblique. — g’a, mfn. having a somewhat oblique 
course (as a planet, &c.), Susr. 

^ ^ anu-v vac, to recite the formulas 

inviting to the sacrificial ceremony ; to repeat, re¬ 
iterate, recite; to communicate ; to study : Caus. 
-vac ay at i, to cause to recite the inviting formulas, 
to cause to invite for some sacrificial act, KttvSr. 

Anu-vaktavya, mfn. to be repeated, SBr. 

Anu-vaktri, mfn. speaking after; replying. 

Ann-vacana, am, n. speaking after, repetition, 
reciting, reading; lecture; a chapter, a section; 
recitation of certain texts in conformity with injunc¬ 
tions ( ' prats ha ) spoken by other priests. 

Anii-vacaniya, mfn. referring to the anava- 
cana , (gana anupra vac a n ctdi, q.v.) 

Anu-v£k&, as, m. saying after, reciting, repeat¬ 
ing, reading ; a chapter of the Vedas, a subdivision 
or section. — sankkyS, f. the fourth of the eigh¬ 
teen Parisishtas of the Yajur-veda. Aauv&ka- 
jaukramani, f. a work referring to the Rig-veda, 
attributed to Saunaka. 

Anu-vSkyd, mfn. to be recited, TBr.; to be re¬ 
peated, reiterated, Gobh.; (a), f. the verse to be 
recited by the Hotri or MaitrSvaruna priest, in which 
the god is invoked to partake of the offering in¬ 
tended for him, SBr. AnuVakya-vat [SBr.] or 
aauvflkyS-vat | AsvSr.], mfn. furnished or accom¬ 
panied with an Anuvakyl. 

Anu-vSc, k, f. = anu-vdkyh, SBr. ; AitBr. 

Anu-vacana, am, n. the act of causing the Hotri 
to recite the passages of the Rig-veda in obedience 
to the injunction ( prtftsha) of the Adhvaryu priest, 
KatySr. — praiska, m. an injunction to recite as 
above, KatySr. 

Anukta, &c. See s.v., p. 42. 

anu-vatsara, as, m. the fourth 

year in the Vedic cycle of five years, TBr. &c.; a 
year, L.; (am), ind. every year, yearly. 

Anuvatsariga [TBr. &c.] or anuvatsariya 

[ManSr.j, mfn. referring to the anuvatsard. 

anu-^vad, P. (with acc.) to repeat 

the words of; to imitate (in speaking) ; to resound ; 
to repeat, insist upon ; (according to Pan. i, 3, 49, 
also A. if without object or followed by a Gen.) 
Pass. ( anftdyate ) to be expressed correspondingly; 
cf. an {idit a s. v. 

Anu-vada, as, m. saying after or again, repeat¬ 
ing by way of explanation, explanatory repetition or 
reiteration with corroboration or illustration, explana¬ 
tory reference to anything already said ; translation ; 
a passage of the Brahmanas which explains or illus¬ 
trates a. rule ( vidhi) previously propounded (such a 
passage is sometimes called anuvada-vacana ); con¬ 
firmation, Nir.; slander, reviling, L. 

Anu-v 5 daka or anu-vadln, mfn. repeating 
with comment and explanation, corroborative, con¬ 
current, conformable, in harmony with; (the mascu¬ 
line of the last is also the name of any one of the 
three notes of the gamut.) 

Anu-vadita, mfn. translated. 

Anu-vadya, mfn. to be explained by an anuv5da, 
to be made the subject of one ; (am), n. the subject 
of a predicate. — tva, n. the state of requiring to be 
explained by an anuvada. 

Anudita. See s. v. 

anu-vanam , ind. along side of a 
wood, Kir.; (cf. Pan. ii, 1, 15.) 

anu-y/2. vap, P. to scatter over, 

Nir.; A. to scatter as dust, AV.: Pass, dmi up)'ate, 
to be scattered as dust, RV. i, 176, 2. 

w anu- \/varn, to mention, describe, 

recount ; to praise. 

anu-vartana , &c. See anu-\/vrit. 

anu-vasa , as, m. obedience to the 
will of; (mfn.), obedient to the will of. 

anu-vashat-kri (Vl.kri), -karoti 

(Pot. -kuryat) to make a secondary exclamation of 
vashat, SBr.; AitBr.; KaushBr.; SaiikhSr. 

Anu-vashatkara, as, m. or -vaskatkrita, 

am, n. a secondary exclamation of vashat. 

*3^ 1. anu-y/4. vas, to clothe, cover, 
RV. vi, 75, 18; AV. Sec. 

Anu-vasita, mfn. dressed up, wrapped. 

2 .anu-^5. vas, to settle after an¬ 
other (acc.) ; to dwell near to; to inhabit along with: 
Caus. -vdsayati, to leave(the calf) with( the cow),TBr. 

Amx-vasin, mfn. residing, resident. 

anu- y/vah, to convey or carry along; 

to take after, Comm, on Mn. iii, 7. 

Anu-vaka, as, m. ‘bearing after,’ one of the 
seven tongues of fire. 

. anu-y/va , cl. 2. P. -vdti, to blow 
upon, blow along or after, RV. Sec. 

2. Ann-va, f. blowing after, TS.; (cf. anvd.) 
Anu-vate, ind. with the wind blowing in the 
same direction, to windward, Mn. ii, 203. 

anu-vaka. See anu-y/vac. 
anu-varam , ind. time after time. 
Was, to roar in reply to (acc.), 


anu-y/vas , to perfume. 

Anu-vasa, as, m. perfuming (especially the 
clothes); an oily enema; administering oily enemata. 
Anu-vSrsana, am, n. id. 

Anu-vasita, mfn scented, perfumed, fumigated; 
prepared or administered as an enema. 

Anu-vasya or -v&saniya, mfn. to be scented 
or fumigated ; requiring an enema. 

anu-vi-y/kas, to blow, expand, 

as a flower. 

onu-vi- \/kas, Tntens. -cak asiti, 

to penetrate with one’s vision, AV. 

anu-vi-y/i. kri, to shape after, 


anu-vi-\S 1. kri, to bestrew, SBr.; 

to scatter separately, ApSr. 

anu-vi-y/kram, A. to step or walk 

after, follow', AV. &c. 

anu-vi- y/car, to walk or pass 
through, RV. vi, 28, 4 ; to w'alk up to, RV. viii, 

3 2 > 19 - 

'S VJf^T ^75 anu-vi- y/cal, to follow in chang¬ 
ing place, AV. 

anu-vi- y/cint, to recal to mind, 
Bnddh.; to meditate upon, ib. 

■** anu-vi-y/tan , to extend all along 

or all over, SBr. 

1. anu-Vi.vid,c\. 2. P., Ved.-i ietti f 

to know thoroughly, RV. &c. 

.anu-s/^.vid, cl. 6. P. A. -r in- 

dati, °te, to find, obtain, discover, RV. Sec .; to 
marry, MBh.; to deem, Git. 

Anu-vitta, mfn. found, obtained, at hand, SBr. 
xiv, &c. 

Anu-vitti, is, f. finding, SBr. 

Ann-viuvas, mfn. perf. p. having found, AV. 

’srgfsrtn anu-vi-Vdha, to assign to in 

order ; to regulate, lay down a rule : Pass. -dJnyatc, 
to be trained to follow rules; to yield or conform 
to (gen.) 

Anu-vidli 5 tavya t mfn. to be performed accord¬ 
ing to an order. 

Anu-vidh 5 na, am, n. acting conformably to 
order, obedience. 

Anu-vidkayin, mfn. conforming to, compliant; 
imitating, Sis. vi, 23. 

anu-vi- \/ 1. dhdv, to flow or run 
along (acc. or loc.), Kath.; KathUp.; to flow through, 
RV. viii, 17, 5. 

anu-vi-y/nad. Cans. P. - nada - 

yati, to make resonant or musical. 

anu-vi-y/nard, to answer with 

roars, Hariv. 

anu-vi- \/2. nas, to disappear, 

perish, vanish after or with another (acc.), AV. See. 
Anu-vi-nasa, as, m. perishing after. 

srgfafJT.g anu-vi-ni/i- \/ sri, to go or come 

out in order, MarkP. 

anu-vinda, as, m., N. of a king 

of Oujein. 

y/pas, -vi-pasy ati, to look 

at, view, SBr.; PBr. 

anu-vi-\/blin, to equal, correspond 

to, SBr. 

anu-vi-y/mris, to consider, Das. 

anu-vi-y/raj, to be bright after 
or along, RV. v, 81, 2. 

anu-vi-\/lit to dissolve (as salt 

in water), SBr. xiv. 

anu-vi- to blow while passing 

through, TBr. 

anu-vi-y/vis, to settle along 

separately, TS. 

anu-vi-y/vrit , to run along, RV. 

viii, 103, 2 : Caus. A, -vartayate, to follow hastily, 

\ f vis, to enter after; to enter; 

to follow. 

Anu-vesa, as, m. or -vesana, am, n. entering 
after, following. 

anu-visva, as, m. pi., N. of a 

people in the north-east, VarBrS. 

anu-vi-shanna, mfn. ( v / sad), 
fixed upon, ChUp. 

anu-vi-shic (\ / sic ), to pour in 

addition to (acc.), AV. 


anu-shanga . 

WjfarnW anu-vishtambha , as, m. the being 

impeded in consequence of, Nir. 

^rgf^T anu-vi-shtha {Vstha), to extend 

over, RV, &c. 

anu-visknu , ind. after Vishnu. 

anu-vi-shy and (y/syand), to 

flow over or along or upon, SBr. 

anu-vi-Vsri , to extend or stream 

over, TBr. 

anu-vi-Vsrij, to shoot at or 

towards; to send along (acc.), RV. v, 53, 6. 

anu-vistrita, mfn. (y/stri), ‘ex¬ 
tended, spread out,’ large, roomy, R. 

anu-vismita , mfn. one who is 

astonished after another, R. 

anu-vi-Vsrajis , Caus. -sransa- 
yati , to separate, loose, SBr. 

anu-vi- Vhan, to interrupt, de¬ 
range, MBh. 

anu-vi (Vi), cl. 2. P. - vyeti , to fol¬ 
low or join in going off or separating, VS.; SBr.; 
to extend along, TBr. 

anu-viksh (V tksh ), to survey, 


anu-Vvij, to fan. 

anu-Vvri, to cover, KaushBr. &c.; 

to surround: Caus. A. - varayate , to hinder, prevent. 

anu ~ vV*. A.- £° a ^ er J to fol- 

low, pursue ; to follow from a previous rule, be sup¬ 
plied from a previous sentence ; to attend ; to obev, 
respect, imitate ; to resemble ; to assent; to expect: 
Caus. P. -vartayati, to roll after or forward; to 
follow up, carry out; to supply. 

Auu-vartana, am, n. obliging, serving or grati¬ 
fying another; compliance, obedience ; following, 
attending ; concurring ; consequence, result; con¬ 
tinuance ; supplying from a previous rule. 

Anu-vartanlya, mfn. to be followed; to be 
supplied from a previous rule. 

Anu-vartin, mfn. following, compliant, obe¬ 
dient, resembling. Anuvarti-tva, n. the state of 
being so. 

Anu-vartman, mfn. following attending, AV. 
&c.; (a), n. a path previously walked by another, 


Anu-vrit, mfn. walking after, following, MaitrS.; 

Anu-vritta, mfn. following, obeying, comply¬ 
ing ; rounded off; (am), n. obedience, conformity, 

Anu-vritti, is, f. following, acting suitably to, 
having regard or respect to, complying with, the act 
of continuance ; (in Panini’s Gr.) continued course 
or influence of a preceding rule on what follows; 
reverting to; imitating, doing or acting in like 

anu-x'vridh, to grow, increase. 

anu-vedi , ind. along the ground 

prepared for sacrifice, KatySr. Anu-vedy-antam, 
ind. along the edge of the sacrificial ground, SBr. 

anu-Vven, to allure, entice, RV. 

anu-velam, ind. now and then. 
anu-vellita, am, n. ( Vvell), 

bandaging, securing with bandages (in surgery) ; a 
kind of bandage applied to the extremities, Susr. ; 
x m:n. . bent in conformity with, bent under. 

anu-Vvssht, to be fixed to, cling 

: Caus. P. -veshtayati, to wind round, 

^ anuvaineya , N. of a country. 

anu-vyanjana, am, n. a secon- 

di'v mark or token, Buddh. 

anu- Vvyadh, cl. 4. P. - vidhyati, to 

strike afterwards, Mn.; to penetrate, pierce through, 

Anu-viddha, mfn. pierced, penetrated ; inter¬ 
mixed, lull of, abounding in ; set (as a jewel). 

Anu-vedha or anu-vyadha, as, m. piercing ; 
obstructing ; blending, intermixture. 

anu-vydin, ind. (Vvi), behind, 

after, inferior to, SBr.; PBr. 

anu-vy-ava- V1. ga, cl. 3. P. -ji- 

gdti, to come between in succession to another, SBr. 

anu-vy-ava- V so, to perceive. 

anu-vy-ave {Vi), cl. 2. P. - avaiti , 

to follow in intervening or coming between, SBr. 

anu-vy-Vi-as, to overtake, reach, 


anu-vy-a-Vkhyd, to explain 

further, ShaqvBr.; ChUp. 

Anu-vyakhy^na, am, n. that portion of a Brah- 
mana which explains or illustrates difficult Sutras, 
texts or obscure statements occurring in another 
portion, SBr. xiv. 

*f*J*nW anu-vy-a-Vstha, Caus. - stha- 
payati, to send away in different directions, TBr. 

*44 *^1(5 anu-vy-a-y/hri, to utter in order 
or repeatedly, MaitrUp.; to curse, SBr. &c. 
Anu-vyaharana, am, n. repeated utterance, R. 
Anu-vyah&ra, as, :n. cursing, execration,KatySr. 
Anu-vy&h&rin, mfn. execrating, cursing, SBr. 

anu-vy-uc-Vcar , to follow in 

going forth, SBr. 

anu-vy- V* . nh, to move apart 

after, PBr .; to distribute, SBr. 

anu-Vvraj, to go along, AsvSr.; 

to follow (especially a departing guest, as a mark of 
respect); to visit seriatim; to obey, do homage. 
Axm-vrajana, am, n. following as above, Heat. 
Anu-vrajya, mfn. to be followed (as by the 

relatives of a dead person to the cemetery), Yajn. 

• • • 

m, 1. 

Anu-vrajya, f. = anu-vrajana, Mn. &c. 

dnu-vrata, mfn. devoted to. faith¬ 

ful to, ardently attached to (with gen. or acc.) 

anu- Vsays, to recite or praise after 

another,TS. &c.; (Ved. Inf. (dat.) anu-sdse) to join 
in praising, RV. v, 50, 2. 

anu-Vsak, to he able to imitate 

or come up with, RV. x, 43, 5: Desid. Caus. P. 
-sikshayati, to teach, instruct. 

Anu-siksliin, mfn. exercising one’s self in, 
practising, Das. &c. 

’srrjSTfiT^r anu-satika 
with or bought for a hundred. Anusatiktldi, a 
gana of Pan. (vii, 3, 20) containing the compounds 
the derivatives of which have Vriddhi in both parts, 
as anusatika, See. 

, mfn. accompanied 

'^^\\anu-Vsap, to curse, MBh. 

anu-sabdita , mfn. verbally com¬ 

municated ; spoken of. 

Anu-sa'bdya, ind. p. having communicated, 

anu-Vsnm, to become calm after 

or in consequence of, BhP. 

wgsre anu-say a , &c. See anu--J\. si. 

anu-sara, as, m. (VsjT), N. of a 


anu-sastra , am, n. any subsidiary 
weapon or instrument, anything used in place of a 
regular surgical instrument (as a finger-nail), Susr. 

anu-Vsas , to rule, govern; to 

order; to teach, direct, advise, address; to punish, 
chastise, correct. 

Anu-sasaka, mfn. on* who governs, instructs, 
directs or punishes. 

Ann- s&s at , m fn. sh o w i ng (th e w ay \ R V . i, 13 9, 4 . 

Anu-sasana, am, n. instruction, direction, com¬ 
mand, precept, RV. x, 32, 7, &c. — para, mfn. obe¬ 

Anu-sasanlya or -sasya, mfn. to be instructed. 
Anu-sasita, mfn. directed; defined by rule. 
Anu-sasitri, mfn. governing, instructing, Bhag. 
Anu-sasin, mfn. punishing, Vikr. 
Anu-sishta, mfn. taught, revealed; adjudged, 
done conformably to law. 

Anu-sisliti, is, f. instruction, teaching, ordering. 
Axm-sishya, ind. part, having ruled or ordered. 

anu-siksh, &c. See anu-Vsak. 

anu-sikha, as, m., N. of a Naga 

or snake priest, PBr. 

anu-sivam , ind. after Siva. 

anu-sisu, us, f. followed by its 
young (as by a foal, &c.), SBr.; KatySr. 

anu-V 1. st, cl. 2. A. -sete, to sleep 

with, lie along or close, adhere closely to. 

Anu-saya, as, m. close connection as with a 
consequence, close attachment to any object; (in 
phil.) the consequence or result of an act (which 
clings to it and causes the soul after enjoying the 
temporary freedom from transmigration to enter other 
bodies); repentance, regret; hatred ; ancient or in¬ 
tense enmity ; (f), f. a' disease of the feet, a boil or 
abscess on the upper part; a boil on the head. 
— vat, mfn. = anu-say in. 

Anu-say&na, mfn. repenting, regretting ; (a), 
f. a heroine or female character who regrets the loss 
of her lover (in dramas). 

Axm-eayitavya, mfn. to be regretted. 
Anu-sayin, mfn. having the consequence of an 
act, connected as with a consequence ; devotedly 
attached to, faithful; repentant, penitent, regretful, 
sorry for ; hating deeply. 

Anu-sayin, mfn. lying or extending along, Nir. 

anu-silaya , Nom. P. - silayati , 

to practise in imitation of, BhP. 

Anu-silana, am, n. constant practice or study 
(of a science, &c.), repeated and devoted service. 

Anu-silita, mfn. studied carefully, attended to. 

anu-V 1. sue , to mourn over, re¬ 
gret, bewail: Caus. P. - socayati , to mourn over. 
Anu-soka, as, m. sorrow, repentance, regret, L. 
Anu-socaka, mfn. grieving, one who repents; 
occasioning repentance. 

Anu-socana, am, n. sorrow, repentance. 
Anu-socita, mfn. regretted, repented of. 
Anu-socia, mfn. regretful, sorrowfuL 

anu- v sush, to dry up gradually, 

SBr. xiv, See. ; to become emaciated by gradual 
practice of religious austerity, Kaus .; to languish 
after another. 

anu-sobhin , mfn. shining. 

anu- Vsrath, cl. 6. P. -srinthati, to 

untie, TS.: Caus. P. (aor. Subj. 2. sg. -iisraihaK) 
to frighten [BR.; ‘to abolish,’ Say.], RV. iv, 32, 22 : 
A. - srathayate , to annihilate or soften the effect of, 
RV. v, 59, 1. 

anu-Vsru, cl. 5. P. -srinoti, to hear 

repeatedly (especially what is handed down in the 
Veda); Desid. A. -susrushate. to obev. 

Auu-srava, as. m., Vedic tradition (acquired by 
repeated hearing), L. 

Anu-sruta, mfn. handed down by Vedic tradition. 

anu- Vsvas, to breathe continually. 
anu-shac(Vsac), to adhere to, keep 

at the side of, RV. &c. 

anu-shanj (Vsavj ), cl. I. A. or 

Pass, -shajjatc, -shajyatc, to cling to, adhere, be at¬ 
tached to. 

Anu-shak or anu-sliat, ind. in continuous 
order, one after the other, (gana svar-adi, q. v.) ; cf. 
an uskdk. 

Anu-shakta, mfn. closely connected with, sup¬ 
plied from something preceding. 

Anu-shaftjfa, as, m. close adherence, connec¬ 
tion, association, conjunction, coalition, commixture; 
connection of word with word, or effect with cause ; 



anu-sawpr dpt a. 

necessary consequence, the connection of a subse¬ 
quent with a previous act; (in the Dhatupatha) the 
nasals connected with certain roots ending in con¬ 
sonants as in trimph'■ ; tenderness, compassion, L. 

Anu-shangika, mfn. consequent, following as 
a necessary result ; connected with, adhering to, in- 
herent, concomitaut. 

Anu-shahgin, mfn. addicted or attached to, con¬ 
tacted with, or * common, prevailing,’ Mr. vii, 52. 

Anu-skanjana, am, n. connection with what 
follows, concord ; grammatical relation. 

Anu-shanjanlya,mfn. tobe connected, supplied. 

'G'wm anushanda , as or am, m. or n.. N. 

accomplished; to be observed ; to be proved or es- J anu-sam-\^car, to walk along 

tablkhed. _ \ side, to follow, join ; to visit ; to pursue, seek after 

Anu-shthya. See anu-shtni. \ to penetrate, traverse, cross ; to become assimilated : 

Cans. P. -carayati, to join, become identified or as- 

an-ushna , mf(«}n. not hot, cold; 

apathetic ; lazv, L.; (am), n. the blue lotus, Nyrn- 
phsea Ca-rulea; \d), f., N, of a river. — gu, m/hav- 
ing cold rays,’ the moon. — vallika, f. the plant Nila- 
dOrba. Anushnasita, mfn. neither hot nor cold. 
An-ushnaka, mfn. not hot, cold; chilly, Si c. 

a an -shy and ( y/syand }, Ved. Inf. 

-shydde [RV. ii, 13, 2] and Caus. -syandayddhyai 

similated with. 

Anu-sam-cara, mfn. following or accompany¬ 
ing 1 with acc.), TBr. 

OS ' 7 

anu-sam.-\ cint, to meditate. 

anu-sam- y jrar, to feel distressed 

after .'another'', BrArUp. ( anu-sani-car , SBr. xiv) ; 
to be troubled, become envious. 



of a place or country, (g2na kacchddi, q. v. 

anu-shatyd , mfn. being conform¬ 
able to truth (yatya), RV. iii, 26, 1. 

anu-shic (/sic), Ved. to pour 

upon or into ; to drip upon. 

Anu-shikta, mfn. dripped upon. TS. 
Anu-sheka, as, rn. or -shecana, am, n. re¬ 
watering or sprinkling over again, L. 

anu-shidh ( /sidh), Intens. (p. - se - 

shidhat) to bring back along the. path, RV. i, 23,1 =. 

anu-shtabdha, mfn. ( /stamb/i), 
(used for an etymology) raised, KaushBr. 

anu-shtu (/stu), to praise, RV. 
Anu-shtuti, is, f. praise, RV. 

I-anu -shtubh (/stubh), to praise 

after, to follow in praising, Nir. 

2. Anu-shtubh,/ nom. shtiik, TS.), f. follow¬ 
ing in praise or invocation; a. kind of metre con¬ 
sisting of four Padas or quarter-verses of eight 
syllables each (according to the DaivBr., quoted in 
Nir. vii, 12, so called because it anushiobhati , i.e. 
follows with its praise the Gavatri, which consists of 
three Padas), RV. x, 130, 4, See .; (in later metrical 
systems, the Anushtubh constitutes a whole class of 
metres, consisting of four times eight syllables); 
hence the number eight; speech, Sarasvati, L.; 
(mfn.), praising, RV. x, I 24, 9. Anushtup-kar- 
mina, mfn. being performed with an anushtubh 
verse, SBr. Anushtup-chandas, mfn. having 
anushtubh for metre, MaitrS. Anushtup-siras 
or -sirsban [AitBr.], mfn. having an anushtubh 
verse at the head. Anuahtub-g , arbh&, f. a metre 
(like that m RV. i, 187, 1) of the class Ushnih, 

Ami-ohtobhana, am, n. praising after, DaivBr. 
an-ushtra , as, m. no cameL, i.e. a 

bad camel. 

anu-shtha ( /stha\, to stand near or 
by ; to follow out; to carry out, attend to ; to per¬ 
form, do, practise ; to govern, rule, superintend ; to 
appoint: Pass. - shthiyatc , to be done ; to be fol¬ 
lowed out: Desid. -tishtkasaii, to be desirous of 
doing, &c. 

Atm-tlshthamana, mfn. following out, carry¬ 
ing out, performing, attending to. 

Anu-shtha, mfn. standing after, i.e. in suc¬ 
cession, RV. i, 54, 10. 

Anu-ahthStavya, mfn. to be accompli>hed. 
Asm-shthStri, id, m. the undertaker of any 
work, AV. See. 

Anu-shth 5 na, am, n. carrying out, undertak¬ 
ing ; doing, performance ; religious practice ; acting 
in conformity to ; f. performance, action, Kaus. 
«krama, m. the order of performing religious 
ceremonies. —sarlra, u. (in Sarikhya phi!.) the 
body which is intermediate between the lihga- or 
sukshma- and the sthula-sarira (generally called 
the adhishthdna-sarJni, q. v.) « smaraka, 
mfu&ibn. reminding of religious ceremonies. 
Ann-shthSpaka, mf(ihd)n. causing to perform. 
Ann-shthEpana, am, n. the causing to perform 
an act. 

Anu-shthayin, mfn. doing, performing an act. 
Anu-shthi, is, f. ^being near, present, at hand/ 
only inst. anu-shthya, ind. immediately, SBr. &c. 

Anu-shthita, mfn. done, practised; effected, 
executed, accomplished ; followed, observed ; done 

Anu-shtheya, mfn. to be effected, done or 

[RV. iv, 2 2, 7j, to run along: -sy an date & -shy an- I _ 

date with a differentiation in meaning like that in j anu-sam-/tan , to overspread, 

abiii-shyand, q.v., Pan. viii, 3, 7 2 - 
Anu-shyanda, as, m. a hind-wheel, SBr. 

anu-shvadkam (fr. sra-dhn), ind. 

I according to one’s will, voluntary, RV. 

anu-shrapam , ind. ( /svap), 

continuing to sleep, RV. viii, 97, 3. 


anu-sam - /yd , to go up and down 

(as guards' ; to go to or towards. 

anu-samrakta , rnfn. attached or 

devoted to. 

anu-sam-/rat)h, A. to catch hold 

0 \ 

of, RV. x, 103, 6 ; to catch hold of mutually, AV. 

anu-samvatsaram, ind. year 

alter vear. 


anu-sam-/v ah, to draw or run 

by the side of, AV. ; to convey along, TBr. 


anu-sam-\ / 2. va, to blow towards 

in order, TBr. 

anu-Sam-vi- \/car, to visit suc¬ 

cessively, make the round of, MBh. 

anu-sam-^i. vid, to know to- 


j gether with, or in consequence of (something else), 
AV. x, 7, 17 & 26. 

anu-sam-\/vis, to retire for sleep 

| after, AV.; TBr. See. 

anu-sam-vita , mfn. ( \ 1'ye), 

wrapped up, covered, MBh. 

^ anu-sam-y/vraj, to go after, fol¬ 

low, A'vSr. Sec. 

anu-sam-^sn, Cans. P. -sarayati, 

to cause to follow, to pass or go on before, MBh. 

an 11 -sam-Vsrip , to creep or crawl 

after, SBr.; TBr. 

Anu-sam-sarpam, ind. creeping after, KatySr. 


'X anu-sam-srishta, mfn. joined to 

(instr.', BhP. 


anu-sam-^stha, P. to follow (a 
road^, BhP.: A. to become finished after, SBr.; 
AitBr. : Caus. P. - sthdpayati , to encourage, R. 

Anu-sam-sthita, mfn. following; dead or de¬ 
ceased after (another), Ragh. 

anu-sam-y/spris, Caus to cause 

to touch after, SBr. 

anu-sam-y/smri, to remember, to 

long for (the dead or absent). 


anu-sam-\/syand , Intens. (p. 

nom.m. dnu sum-sanishyadat) to run after, VS. ix, 

14 ; (tf. Pan. vii, 4, 65.) 

_ ♦ 

anu-samhitam, ind. according 

to the Sarnhiti text, RPrSt. 

• _ 

anu-sam-Vhri, to drag (the foot), 

Kaus. ; to compress, reduce a subject, L 2 ty. 

anu-sam-*/2. kal , to drive or 

convey along or after, AsvGr. 

anu-sam-Vkram, to walk or go 

up to, to reach, AV. 

_ # 

^TfFr^TT anu-sam-\/khya. Caus. V.-khya- 

payati, to cause to observe, show, SBr. 

• _ 

a nu-sam - \-g ra h, to ob lige, fa vour; 

to salute by laying hold of the feet. 

diffuse, extend everywhere ; to join on, continue. 
Anu-sam-tati, is, f. continuation, MaitrS. 

anu-sam-y/tri, to carry to the end, 
go on (in spinning), AV. vi, 122, I ; AsvSr. 

-sam- \'dah, to burn up along 

the whole length, AV. 

anu-sam-\/dis, to assign, to 

make over. 

anu-sam- v'dris (ind. p. - drisya ) 
to consider successively, MBh. xii, 12024. 

anu-sam- s'dha, to explore, ascer¬ 
tain., inspect, plan, arrange ; to calm, compose, set 
in order ; to aim at. 

Anu-samdhatavya, mfn. to be explored, to be 

investigated, to be looked after, &rc. 

Anu-saindhana, am, n. investigation, inquiry, 
searching into, close inspection, setting in order, ar¬ 
ranging, planning ; aiming at ; plan, scheme, con¬ 
gruous or suitable connection ; (in the Vaiscshika 
phiI.) the fourth step in a syllogism (i. e. the appli¬ 

Anu-samdhanin, mfn. investigating, searching, 
skilful at concerting or carrying out schemes. 

Anu-samdhayin, mm. id. 
Anu-samdheya,mm. to be investigated, worthy 
of inquiry or scrutiny, Sic. 

anu-sandhyam, ind. evening 

after evening, every twilight. 

anu-samaya. See anu-sam-y/i, 
^ anu-sam- */ 1, as, to overtake, 

reach, SBr. 

anu-sam-\/2, as, -sam-asyati , to 

add further, SBr. 

anu-sam-a-*/car, to carry out, 

accomplish, BhP. 

anu-sam-d- ■/dha , to calm, com¬ 


"%r^ x f\\anu-sam-\bap. Caus. P. to com¬ 

plete or accomplish further or subsequently, KatySr. 

Anu-samapana, am, n. regular completion, 

anu-sam-d-y/rabh, A. to place 

one’s self in order after, cling to (acc.), TS.: TBr.: 
Caus. A. (inipf. - arambhayata ) to cause to cling 
to oije’s seif (loc.), TS. 

anu-sam-d-*/ ruh, to rise after, 


anu-sam-d- ^hri,to join orbring 

in order again, ChUp. 

' 5 ? rjTfUI anu-sam-\/i, cl. 2. P. -eti, to visit 

conjointly or successively ; to join in following or 
being guided by ; to join, become assimilated with. 

Anu-samaya, as, m. regular connection (as of 
words), Nyayad. &c. 

anu-sam- y/iksh, to keep in view, 

have in view, SBr. 

anu-samudram, ind. along the 

sea, Pan. iv, 3, io. 

anu-sam-pra-^yd, to go to¬ 

wards, AV. xi, I, 36, 

( vdp), to arrive, 

reach, get. 

Anu-samprapta, mfn. arrived, come. 




anu-sambaddha , mfn. ( Vbandh), 

connected with, accompanied by. 

^rg?rf*nS anu-sam-v bhid , to bring into 

contact; combine, Kath. 

anu-sam-s/ bhu, to be produced 

after, proceed after, SBr. 

anu-sam-y/man, to approve, 


anu-savandm, ind. at every 

sacrifice, TBr. &c.; constantly, BhP. 

anv-sdtam , ind. according to 


anu-sanu, ind. along a table-land 

or summit, from ridge to ridge. 

anu-sdma, mfn, at every Saman- 
verse(?), Pin. v, 4, 75. 

anu-sdyam , ind. evening after 
evening, every evening, (gana fiarimukhddi, q.v.) 

anu-sdra, anu-sdrin , &c. See 
under anu-\isri below. 

anu-y/sic. S ze anu-Vshic. 

’'SnjffTS anu-siddha, mfn. (v^. sicM), 

gradually effected or realized, BhP. 

ind. along the furrow, 

TS. ; (gana parimnkh&di, q. v.) 

ind.alongthe plough, 

(gana paritnukh&di, q. v.) 

anu-su^ us, m., N. of a work, Pan 


ana-sucaka, mf(t 7 ca)n. ( sue), 

indicative of, pointing out. 

Anu-sucana, am, n. pointing out, indication. 

anu-svpam, ind. in every con- 


anu-Vsri, to go after: Caus. P. -sa- 

rayati , to pursue. 

Anu-sara, mf(*)n. following, a companion. 
Anu-sarana, aw, n. following, going after; 
tracking, conformity to, consequence of; custom, 
habit, usage. 

Anu-sara, as, m. going after, following; custom, 
usage; nature, natural state or condition of any¬ 
thing ; prevalence, currency ; received or established 
authority, especially of codes of law ; accordance, 
conformity to usage; consequence, result; {ena), 
or -tas, ind. conformably to. 

Anu-saraka or anu-s&rin, mfn. following, 
attendant on, according or conformable to; pene¬ 
trating, scrutinizing, investigating. 

Auu-saryaka, am, n. a fragrant substance. 
Anu-srita, mfn. followed, conformed to. 
Auu-sriti, is, f. going after, following, conform¬ 
ing to; N. of a woman, (gana kalydny-ddi, q. v.) 

anu-Vsrij , to dismiss, let go, RV. 

x, 66, 8, &c.: P. A. srijati , °te, to create suc¬ 
cessively, SBr. &c.: Pass, to be created in succession 
to, TS. 

Anu-srishta, mfn. created in succession, VS. 

anu-Vsrip, to glide after or to¬ 

wards, to approach. 

Ami-sarpa, as, m. a serpent-like being, AV. 

anu-Vsen, to practise, observe. 

Anu-sevin, mfn. practising, observing, habitu¬ 
ally addicted to, 

anu-sainya, am, n. the rear of an 

army, L. 

anu-somam, ind,according to the 

(practice with the) Soma, as with the Soma, KatySr. 

anu-skandam, ind. having gone 

into in succession, Pan. iii, 4, 56, Sch. 

anu-starana, as, m. ( y/stri ), an 

animal which is fit to be chosen as a secondary victim; 
anu-stdranT, f. the cow sacrificed at the funeral 
ceremony, TS. &c. 

anu-stotra, am, n.‘ praising after,’ 

N. of a treatise relating to the Sama-veda. 

anu-sneham , ind. after (adding) 

oil, Susr. 

anu-spashta . See anu-y/pas. 

anu-x/spris, to touch, extend to, 

RV. iv, 4, 2. 

^ anu-\/sphur, to whizz towards, 

RV. vi, 67, 11. 

Anu-sphura, mfn. whizzing (as an arrow), AV. 

? anu-\/smri, to remember, recollect: 

Caus. P. -smdrayati or - smarayati , to remind 
(with acc.), Kir. v, 14. 

Anu-smarana, am, n. remembering, repeated 

Anu-sxnrita, mfn. remembered. 

Anu-smriti, is, f. cherished recollection, recall¬ 
ing some idea to the exclusion of all others. 

anu-syuta, mfn. ( \ / si*'), sewed 

consecutively, strung together or connected regularly 
and uninterruptedly. 

dn-usra-ydman,a, m. not going 

out during daylight, RV. iv, 32, 24. 

anu-svdna, as, m. sounding con¬ 

formably, S.'th. 

anu-svura, as, m. (vsvri), after¬ 
sound, the nasal sound which is marked by a dot 
above the line, and which always belongs to a pre¬ 
ceding vowel, — vat, mfn. having the Anusvara. 
— vyavaya, m. separation between, two sounds 
caused by an Anusvara. Anusvarfigama, m. an 
augment consisting in the addition of an Anusvara. 

anuha , as, m., N. of a son of 

Vibhratra and father of Brahma-datta, VS. 

anu-hava. See anu-xhve. 

anu->J2. ha, cl. 3. A. - jihite , to run 

after, catch, AV. &c.; to follow, join, RV. 

vi anu-hum - \/kri, to roar in imitation 


anu-Vhurch , to fall down after 

another, Kath. 

anu-x/hri, to imitate; to resemble : 

A. - karate, to take after (one’s parents). 

Anu~haraaa, am, n. or -h&ra, as, m. imita¬ 
tion ; resemblance. 

Ann-harat, mfn. imitating; {an), m., N. of a 
man, (gana anusatikddi, q. v.) 

AntL-KararnSna, mfn. imitating. 
Axm-fc&raka, mf(f&z)n. imitating. 
Anu-harya, mfn. to be imitated; {as), m.— 
anv-d-hdrya , L. 

anu-hoda, as, m. a cart(?), (gana 

anusatikddi , q.v.) 

anu-hrdda or - hlada , as, m., N, of 
a son of Hiranya-kasipu, Hariv. 

anu-y/hve, to call again, call after, 
call back, RV.; AV.: Intern, -johaviti, to call 
repeatedly, AV. 

Anu-hava, as, m. inviting, stirring up, AV. 

anuka, as, am, m.n.(v / cnc with auu), 

the backbone, spine ; the hack part of the altar; a 
former state of existence ; {am), n. race, family, L.; 
peculiarity of race, disposition, character, VarBrS. 
&c.; (d), f., N. of an Apsaras, Hariv. 

AuukyA (3, 4), mfn. belonging to the backbone, 
§Br.; backbone, RV. x, 163, 2 ; AV. 

anu-kasa, as, m. ( \/kd$), reflection 

(of light), clearness, VS.; TS. &c.; regard, refer¬ 
ence, AitBr. 

anuksh (y/i. uksh ), (p. A. dnu . . . 

uJishamana ; perf. dnu ., . vavdksha) to sprinkle, 
bedew, RV. iii, 7, 6 8c vi, 66, 4. 

anucbid , mfn. (fr. anv-anc), com¬ 
ing after, successive, RV. iv, 54, 2 ; Sulb. — grar- 

bha, mfn. born in successive order, SBr. Auu- 


clnkham, ind. on successive days, SBr. 

1. AnucyA, am, n. elbow-piece of a seat, AV. &c. 

anucyate, Pass, of anu-y/vac, q. v., 

p. 38, col. I. 

Anukta, mfn. spoken after, recited after ; occur¬ 
ring in the (sacred) text; studied ; (am), n. study. 

Anukti, is, f. mentioning after, repeated men¬ 
tion, repetition by way of explanation ; study of the 
Veda. — tva, n. state of requiring repetition or ex¬ 

Anticana, mfn. one so well versed in the Vedas 
arid Vedangas as to be able to repeat them ; one 
who repeats his lesson after his master; devoted to 
learning; well-behaved ( */uc). 

2. Anucya, mfn. to be repeated or learnt; (cf. 
aranyc-n ucya .) 

anuj-ji ( anu-ud-%/ji ), (aor. Subj. 1. 

sg. Anitj-jcsham) to be victorious after, VS. ii, 15; 



an-iidha, mfn. {y/vah), not borne, 

not carried ; (d), f. an unmarried woman. — m&na, 
mfn. bashful. Anudha-gamana, n. ‘going after 
an unmarried woman,’fornication. Anudh&-bhr 5 - 
tri, m. the brother of an unmarried woman ; the 
brother of the concubine of a king. 

■ 5 Trjf?T an-uti , is, f. no help, RV. vi, 29, 6. 

yjkram, to go up or out after, 


anutthd {y/sthd), anuttishthati , to 

rise after, VS. &c. 

fl anut-y/pat, to fly up after another 

(acc.), raise one’s self into the air, jump up afterwards. 

1. anut-y/i.pd, - pibati, to drink 

up or empty by drinking after another, SBr. 

2. anut-\/$. pa (3. pL -pipate) to 
rise along, TBr.; (cf. ut-y/$.pd.) 

anut-saram , ind. while leaving a 

place or retiring successively, AitBr. 

antk-y/srij, to dismiss toward?, 


anudix/ud), (impf. 3. pi. anv-aundan) 

to wet along, K 5 th. 

an-udaka, am, 11. (metri causa for 
an-ndaka), want of water, aridity, R. i, 20,16. 

anud-y/, -asyati, to toss up 

behind or after, SBr. 

anud-y/i , to go up or out after 

(another), AV. &c. 

anudita, mfn. ( x/vad), spoken 
after, spoken according to. See also anu-y/vad . 

1. Anudya, mfn. to be spoken to afterwards. 

2. Anudya, ind. having said afterwards or in 

Anudy&m&na, mfn. spoken in reply to or accord¬ 
ing to. 

anud-e (-a~y/i), cl. 2. P. andd-aiti , 

to rise or come up after, SBr. &c. 

* _ 

anud-Vdrinh (Pot. 3. pi. antfd- 

drinhcyuJd "to fix or fasten during,’ keep waiting 
until (d), SBr. 

nuddesa , as, m. ( x/dis), describing, 

mentioning according to or conformably with, SSh. 

aniid-x/2. dru, to run after (acc.). 


anud-dhd {V2. hd), to set off or 

start after, TBr. 

anud-dhri {yhri), to take out from 

subsequently', TS. 

amid-x'2. vd, -vati , to disperse or 
dissipate by following (the wind vdyum ), SBr. 

an-udhds, as, f. udderless, RV. x, 

n 5. 1 * 

dn-iina, mf(d)n. or an-vnaka [L.], 

mfn. not less, not inferior to (abl.), Ragh.; whole, 
entire; having full power; (d), f., N. of an 
Apsaras, Hariv. -’guru, mfn. of undiminished 



WfTcfrt anta-lopa. 

weight, very heavy, —varcas ( dnuna -), mfn. 
having t'ull splendour, RV. x, 140, 2. 

anu a- \ ni, cl. I. P. -nay ati , to take 

out and nil after another, TBr.; SBr. 

^" nupa, mfn.(fr. 2.dp, q.v., with anu), 

situated near the water, watery, L.; (ds), m. a 
watery country, Mn. &c.; pond, RV.; bank of a 
river; a buffalo (cf. aniipd), L.; N. of a Rishi, 
teacher of the Sarna-veda. —ja, n. growing near the 
water, VarBrS.; ginger. — desa, m. a marshy 
country. —praya, mfn. marshy. — vll£sa f m., 
N. of a work. 

AnupyA (4), mfn. being in ponds or bogs (as 
water), AV. 

anilpa- v das , to fail (or become 

extinct) after (acc.), PBr. 

anupa-\/dha (generally P.), to 

place upon, pile up after or in addition to, TS.; SBr. 

anupa-\/dhri, Caus. - dharayati , to 

hold towards in addition to, Laty. 

anupa-i/vis, to sit down in 

order, AsvSr.; Latv.; to lie down} or incline the 
body (said of a parturient animal), SBr. 

anupasadam, ind. at every Upa- 

sad (q. v.), KatySr. 

anupa-*Jstha, A. to approach in 
order, SBr.; AitBr. 

anu-bdndhya , mfn. to be fastened 

(as a sacrificial animal) for slaughtering, SBr. &c. 

anu-yajd = anu-yajd, q.v., TS. 

anu-rddha , mfn. causing welfare, 

happiness, AV.; (as), m. f. plur. = anu-rddhas, 
q. v., TS.; TBr.; Kath. 

an-uru , mfn. thighless ; (us), m. the 

charioteer of the sun, the dawn, R 5 jat. &c. — sara- 
tki, m. whose charioteer is Anuru, i.e. the sun, Sis. 

anu-rudh, mfn .=anu-rudh, q. v., 

pv. iii, 55,5. 

^TrjfVhr an-urjita, mfn. not strong, weak ; 

not proud. 

an-urdhva , mfn. not high, low. 

— bkas ( dn-urdhva -), mfn. one whose splendour 
does not rise, who lights no sacred fires, RV. v, 77, 4. 

An-urdhvam-bkavuka, n. not rising upwards, 
not reaching the heaven, TS. 

"Snjfrr dn-urmi , mfn. ‘ not waving or fluc¬ 

tuating,’ inviolable, RV. viii, 24, 22. 

^TfJcST anula, f., N.of a river in Kasmlra. 
’WfJ^tT v flw«-??r^;,onlydu. -vrijau, m. f. apart 

of the body near the ribs, AV. ix, 4, 12. 

an-ushara, mf(a)n. not salted, not 

saline, AsvGr.; Heat. 

anushita , mfn. (y/f y vas with anu), 

living near another, Pan. iii, 4, 72, Sch. 

an-ushma-para, mfn. (in Gr.) 

not followed by a sibilant. 

an-uha, mfn. thoughtless, careless. 
An-ukya, mfn. inconceivable, MaitrUp. 

an-rik-ka. See an-ric below. 

an-rikshard, mfn. thornless (as a 

path or a couch), RV. 

an-ric [RV. x, 105, 8, &c.] or an- 

riert [Mm], mfn. not containing a verse from the 
Rig-veda, hymnless, not conversant with the Rig- 
veda ; ( an-ricant), ind. not in conformity with the 
Ric, MaitrS, 

4 J 

An-rik-ka (or an-ric-ka), mfn. containing no 
Ric, Pan. v, 4, 74, Kas. 

dn-riju , mfn. not straight, crooked, 
perverse, wicked, RV. iv, 3, 13, &c. 

an - rind , mf(a)n. free from debt. 

— t &, f. or -tva, n. freedom from debt. 
An-rinln, mfn. unindebted, free from debt. 
An-rinya-t&, f. freedom from debt, R. 

dn-rita,mf(d)n. not true, false; (am), 
n. falsehood, lying, cheating; agriculture, L. — deva 
(. dnrita -), m. one w'hose gods are not true, R V. vii, 
104, 14. — dvish, mfn. persecuting untruth, RV. 
vii,66,13. — maya, mfn.full of untruth, false. -va- 
dana, 11. speaking falsehood, lying. — vac [AV. &c.], 
~v£din, mfn. speaking untruth. — vrata, mfn. false 
to vows or engagements. AnritAkkyana, n. telling 
a falsehood. Anritabkisandka,, ChUp. 

Anritin, mfn. telling untruths, lying, a liar. 

an-ritu, ns , m. unfit season ; (u ), ind. 

unseasonably, MaitrS. — kanyS, f.a girl before men¬ 
struation . — pa (an-ritu-), mfn. not drinking in time, 
RV. iii, 53, 8. 


'’SnpTR a-nrisanso,m{[d)n. not cruel,nnId. 
— ta, f. mildness, kindness. 

an-eka, mfn. not one, many, much; 
separated. — kama ( ancka -), mfn. having many 
wishes, SBr. — kalam, ind. a long time, for a long 
time. — kalavadki, ind. long since. — krit, m. 
‘doing much,’ N. of Siva. — gotra, m. having 
more families than one, i.e. two, belonging to two 
families (01 to one as an adopted son). — cara, 
mfn. gregarious. — citta-mantra, m. one whose 
counsels are many-minded. — ja, mfn. bom more 
than once ; (as), m. a bird, L. — ta, f. or -tva, n. 
muchness, manifold condition. — tra, ind. in many 
places. — dkarma-katka, f. different exposition 
of the law. — dka, ind. in various ways, often. 

— dka-prayoga, ni. using repeatedly, — pa, mfn. 
‘drinking oftener than ouce,’ an elephant (because 
he drinks with his trunk and with his mouth), 
Ragh. — bkarya, mfn. having more wives than 
one. — mukha, mfn. having several faces, having 
different ways. — yuddka-vijayin, m. victorious 
in many battles. — randkra, mfn. having many 
holes or weaknesses or troubles. — rupa, mf(«)n. 
multiform ; of various kinds or sorts; fickle, of 
variable mind. — locana, m. ‘having several (three) 
eyes,’ N.of Siva. — vacana, n. the plural number. 

— varna, (in algebra compounded with various 
words to denote) many unknown quantities (colours 
representing x, y, z, &c., e.g. aneka-varna-gu- 
nana , multiplication of many unknown quantities). 

— varam, ind. many times, repeatedly. — vidka, 
mfn. of many kinds, in different ways, various. 

— sapka, mfn. cloven-hoofed, Pan. i, 2, 73,Comm. 

— sabda, mfn. expressed by several words, synony¬ 
mous. — sas, ind. in great numbers, several times, 
repeatedly. AnekAk&ra, mfn. multiform. Ane* 
kakskara, mfn. polysyllabic, having more than one 
syllable. Anekagra, mfn. engaged in various pur¬ 
suits. Anekac, mfn. having more than one vowel or 
syllable (fff in Gr. being the technical term for vowel). 
Anekartka, mfn. having more than one meaning 
(as a word). Anek&rtka-dkvani-manjari, f. 
and anekaitka-samgraka, m., N. of two works 
on words. Anekal, mfn. consisting of more than 
one letter (,al being the technical term for letter). 
AnekAsraya or anekAsrita, mfn. (in Vaiseshika 
phil.) dwelling •or abiding in more than one. 

A'n-ek&kin , mfn.not alone, accompanied by, SBr. 
An-ekanta, mfn. not alone and excluding every 
other, uncertain, —tva, n. uncertainty. — vada, 
m. scepticism. — v&din, m. a sceptic; a Jaina, an 
Arhat of the Jainas. 

Aneki-karana, am, n. making manifold. 
Aneki-bkavat, mfn. being manifold, i.e. di¬ 
vided in two. 

Anekiya, mfn. having several, (gana utkarcLdi, 

an-ejat, mfn. (Vej), not moving, 


an-eda , as, m. (an being an expletive 
or denoting comparison), stupid, foolish, L. 

An-eda-muka, mfii, deaf and dumb, L.; blind, 
L.; wicked, fraudulent, L. 

^Std- nedya (4), mfn. (Vnid), not to be 

blamed, RV. 

i . an-end, mfn. without stags, RV. 

vi, 66, 7; (cf. eni.) 

an-ends , mfn. blameless, sinless, 

not liable to error, RV. &c.; N. of various per¬ 

An-enaaya, am, n. freedom from fault, sin, SBr. 

a-neman , mfn. = prasasya (to be 

praised), Naigh. 

au-eva , ind. otherwise, AV. xvi, 7, 4. 

an-eh as, mfn. (\ih), without a 
rival, incomparable, unattainable ; unmenaced, un¬ 
obstructed ; RV.; (a), m. time, Balar. ; BhP. 


an-aikauta, mfn. (fr. ekdnta), 
variable, unsteady ; (in logic) occasional, as a cause 

not invariably attended by the same effects. 

» * 

An-aikantika, mfn. unsteady, variable, having 
many objects or purposes ; (am), n. (in Vaiseshika 
phil.) the fallacy of undistributed middle, — tva, n. 
unsteadiness, uncertainty, Nyayad. 

An-aikya, am, ». (eka), want of oneness, plu¬ 
rality, the existence of many; want of union, anarchy. 

n a- naipuna or a-naipvnya , am, n. 
unskilfulness, Pan. vii, 3, 30 ; (see dnaipuna.) 

'-MH^ an-aisvarya , am, n/non-power,’ 
weakness, Pan. vii, 3, 30 ; (see dnaisvarya.) 

ano , ind. no, not, L. 

m. not sleep¬ 
ing in a house (as a beggar), L. 

An-oka-ka, as, m. ‘ not quitting his home or his 

place,’ a tree, Ragh. Sec. 


^Tcf rT an-om-krita, mfn. not accompa¬ 
nied by the holy syllable om, Mn. ii, 74. 

ano-ratha , as, m. pi. waggon (anas) 

and chariot, AitBr. 

Ano-vaka, mfn. driving a waggon or carriage, 
TS.; SBr. 

Ano-vaky&, mfn. to be driven on a carriage, 
TS.; (am), ind. in waggon-loads, KatySr. 

- aucitya , am, n. unfitness, Sail. 

an-uujasya , am, n. want of 

vigour, Sah. 

'SMlUrq an-auddhatya, am, n. freedom 
from haughtiness, Sah.; not standing high (said of 
the water of a river), Kir. 

'SVtfawj an-aupamya , mfn. unparalleled. 

an-aurasa, as, m. not one’s own 

son, adopted. 

ant, cl. r .P .antati, to bind,L.; (cf. 

\ V and, int.) 

anta , as, m. end, limit, boundary, 
term ; end of a texture ; end, conclusion ; end of 
life, death, destruction (in these latter senses some¬ 
times neut.); a final syllable, termination ; last word 
of a compound ; pause, settlement, definite ascer¬ 
tainment, certainty; whole amount; border, out- 
skirt (e.g.grdmdn/c, in the outskirts of the village); 
nearness, proximity, presence ; inner part, inside ; 
condition, nature ; (, e ), loc. c. in the end, at last; 
in the inside; (am), ind. as far as (ifc., e.g. uda - 
kdntam, as far as the water); (mfn.), near, hand¬ 
some, agreeable, L. [cf. Goth, andcis , Theme andja; 
Germ. Ende; Eng. end: with anta are also com¬ 
pared the Gk. dvr a, avri ; Lat. ante; the Goth. 
anda in anda-vaurd, &c.; and the Germ, ent, 
e.g. in entsagen J. — kara, -karana, -karin, 
mfn. causing death, mortal, destructive. — k£la, ni. 
time of death, death. — krit, mfn. making an end; 
(1 1 ), m. death. — krid-dasS, as, f. pi., N. of the 
eighth of the twelve sacred Aiiga texts of the Jainas 
(containing ten chapters). — gfa, mfn. going to the 
end, thoroughly conversant with. — gata ( dnta -), 
mfn. gone to the end ; being at the end of; 
thoroughly penetrating, TS. — gati (dnta-) [SBr.] 
or -gamin, mfn. going to the end, perishing. 

— gamana, n. the act of going to the end, finish¬ 
ing; going to the end of life, dying, —cara, 
mfn. going to the frontiers, walking about the fron¬ 
tiers, R. —ja, mfn. last born. — jati, see antya- 
jdti. — tas, ind. from the end, from the term; 
lastly, finally ; in the lowest way ; in part; within. 

— dipaka, n. a figure in rhetoric. — pala, m. a 
frontier-guard. — bkava, mfn. being at the end, 
last. — bkSj, mfn. standing at the end (of a word), 
RPrSt. —rata, mfn. delighting in destruction. 

— llna, mfn. hidden, concealed. — lopa, m. (in 


aniara-puruska . 

Gr.) the dropping of the final of a word, —vat 

{an/a-), mfn. having an end or term, limited, 

perishable, AV. &c. ; containing a word which has 

the meaning of anla, AitBr. ; {-vat), ind. like tire 

end; like the final of a word, Pat. — vahni, nj. 

the fire of the end (bv which the world is to be 

* * 

burnt). Ant a-vasin — ante-vasin, L. Anta- 
veia, f. hour of death, ChUp. — sayya, f. a bed 
or mat on the ground ; death ; the place for burial 
or burning ; bier; L. — satkriya, f. the funeral 
ceremonies, Raj at. — sad, 'm. a pupil (who dwells 
near his teacher). — stka, mfn. standing at the end ; 
see also antah-sthd. — svarita, m. the Svarita 
accent on the last syllable of a word ; {am), n. a 
word thus accentuated. Ant&di, l , du. m. end 
and begiiming, (gana rajadantddi, q. v.) An- 
tavasayin (or antavasSyin), m. a barber, L.; 
a Candala, MarkP. &c., cf. ante-vasdym ; N. of a 
Muni, L. Ante-’vasayin, m. a man living at 
the end of a town or village, a man belonging to 
the lowest caste, MBh. See. Ante-vasa, m. a 
neighbour, companion, AitBr. Ante-vasin, nifu. 
dwelling near the boundaries, dwelling close bv, L.; 
(r), m. a pupil who dwells near or in the house of 
his teacher, SBr. &c.; = ante- vasdyin , q. v., L.; (/), 
ind. in statu pupillari, (gana dvidati/y-adi, q. v.) 
Antodatta, m. the acute accent on the last syllable; 
(min.), having the acute accent on the last syllable. 

1. Antaka, as, m. border, boundary, SBr. 

2. Antaka, mfn. making an end, causing death ; 
(as), m. death ; Yama, king or lord of death, AV. 
Sec .; N. of a man favoured by the Asvins, RV. i, 
112, 6; N. of a king, —drub, Nom. dhritk , f. 
demon of death, RV. x, 132, 4. 

1. Antama [once anlamd, RV. i, 165, 5], mfn. 
next, nearest, RV.; intimate (as a friend), RV. 

2. Antama, mfn. the last, TS. ; SBr. See. 
Antaya, Nom. P .antayati, to make an end of, L. 

Antika, antlma, antya, Sec. See antika, 

P- 45 - 

^ 5 P? V.antdh (iorantdr, see col.2). — karana, 

n. the internal organ, the seat of thought and feel¬ 
ing, the mind, the thinking faculty, the heart, the 
conscience, the soul. — kalpa, m. a certain number 
of years, Buddh. — kutila, mfn. internally crooked ; 
fraudulent; (as), m. a couch, L. — krimi, m. a 
disease caused by worms in the body. — kotara- 
pushpl = an/a-kotara-pus hp q.v., Car. — kona, 
in. the inner corner. — kopa, m. inward wrath. 

— kosa,n.the interior of a store-room, AV. — pata, 
ni, n. a cloth held between two persons who are to 
be united (as bride and bridegroom, or pupil and 
teacher) until the right moment of union is arrived. 

— padam or -pade, ind. in the middle of an in¬ 
flected word, Prat. — paridhana, n. the innermost 
garment. — paridlu, ind. in the inside of the pieces 
of wood forming the paridhi, KstySr. — parsa- 
vyd, n. flesh between the ribs, VS. — pavitra, the 

Soma when in the straining-vessel, SBr. — pasu, 
ind. from evening till morning (while the cattle are 
in the stables), KfitySr. —pata [SBr.] or -p&tya 
[KatySr.j, as, m. a post fixed in the middle of the 
place of sacrifice ; (in Gr.) insertion of a letter, 
RPrat. — pStita or -patin, mfn. inserted, included 
in. — p&tra, n. the interior of a vessel, AV. — pit- 
dam, ind. within the Pada of a verse, RPrat.; 
Pan. — parsvya, n. flesh between or at both sides, 
VS. — pala, m, one who watches the inner apart¬ 
ments of a palace, R. — pura, n. the king’s palace, 
the female apartments, gynasceum; those who live 
,in the female apartments; a queen. — pura-cara, 
m, guardian of the women’s apartments. — pura- 
jana, m. the women of the palace. — para-pro- 
car a, m. the gossip of the women’s apartments. 

— pura-rakshaka or -pura-vartin or -pnr&- 
dhyaksha, m. superintendent of the women’s apart¬ 
ments, chamberlain. — pura-sakaya, as, m. be¬ 
longing to the women’s apartments (as a eunuch, 
&c.) — purika, m. superintendent of the gynae- 
ceum or harem; (a), f. a woman in the harem. 

— puya, mfn. ulcerous. — p 6 ya, n. supping up, 
drinking, RV. x, 107, 9. — prakriti, f. the heart, 
the soul, the interna! nature or constitution of a man. 

— prajiia, mfn. internally wise, knowing one’s self. 

— pratiskthana, u. residence in the interior. 

— pratishthita, mfn. residing inside. — Sara, 
ni. interior reed or cane, TS.; an internal arrow or 
i <ease. — aarlra, n. the interna! and spiritual part 
*-■{ man. — *alya antdh* , mfn. having a pin or ( 

extraneous body sticking inside, SBr. — sila, f. j 
antra-si Ip. — slesha [MaitrS. ; VS.], m. or-816- j 
shana [SBr.; AitBr.], 11. internal support, -sam- ' 
jna, mfn. internally conscious, M». i, 49, Ac. | 

— sattva, f. a pregnant woman ; the marking nut 
(Seinecarpus Anacardium ;. — sadasam, md. in the 
middle of the assembly, SBr. — sara, mfn. having 
internal essence ; (as), m. internal treasure, inner 
store or contents. — suKha, mfn. internally happy. 

— senam, ind, into the midst of the armies. — stha 
(generally written antastha), mfn. being in the 
midst or between, SBr. See .; (as, a), m. f. a term 
applied to the semivowels, as standing between the 
consonants and vowels, Prat. &c.; (a), f. interim, 
meantime, PBr. — stha-mudgara, m. (in anatomy) 
the malleus of the ear. — stka-ckaudas, n., N. of 
a class of metres. — sveda, m. ‘ sweating internally,’ 
an elephant, L. 

Antak" Vkkya, to deprive of, conceal from, RV. 

Antah-\/pas, to look between, look into, RV. 

Antak-v^atka, to stand in the way of, stop, RV. 

antama and antama. See s.v. dnta. 
'rTT a utdr , i nd. ivi t hi u, bet wee j t, amongst, 

in the middle or interior. 

(As a prep, with loc.) in the middle, in, between, 
into ; (with acc.) between; (with gen.) in, in the 

(Ifc.) in, into, in the middle of, between, out of 
the midst of [cf. Zend ant arc ; Lat. inter ; Goth, 

Antar is sometimes compounded with a following 
word like an adjective, meaning interior, internal, 
intermediate. — ag’ni, tu. the interior tire, digestive 
force, Susr.; (mfn.), being in the tire, Kaus. — anjfa, 
mfn. interior, proximate, related, being essential to, 
or having reference to the essential part of the ahga 
or base of a word ; (am), n. any interior part of 
the body, VarBrS. — anga-tva, n. the state or con¬ 
dition of an Antarahga. —avayava, ni. an inner 
limb or part. — akasa, m. intermediate place, 
KaushBr.; the sacred ether or Brahma in the interior 
part or soul of man. — akuta, n. hidden intention. 

— agrama, m. (in Gr.) an additional augment be¬ 
tween two letters. — agara, m. the interior of a 
house, Yajn. — atmaka, mf(/)n. interior, MaitrUp. 

— at man, m.the soul; the internal feelings, the heart 
or mind, MaitrS. Sec. — atmeshtakam, ind. in 
the space between one’s self and the (sacrificial) 
bricks, KstySr. — adkSna [antar-), mfn. ‘ having a 
bit inside,’ bridled, TBr. — apana, m. a market in¬ 
side (a town], R. — aya.see antar-*/i, — drama, 
mfn. rejoicing in one’s self(not in the exterior world), 
Bhag. — 5 . 1 a or -alaka [L.], 11. intermediate space ; 
(e), loc. ind. in the midst, in midway (ala is pro¬ 
bably for alaya). — indriya, n. (in Vedanta phil.) 
an internal organ (of which there are four,vi z.manas, 
buddki , ahamkdra, and citta'. — ipa, n.(fr. 2.ap), 
an island, Pan. vi, 3, 97. — uskya, m .(\Sf.vas), 
an intermediate resting-place, KaushBr.; ct.dasAn- 
fnrushya. — gariga, f. the under-ground Ganges 
(as supposed to communicate under-ground with 
a sacred spring in Mysore). — gadu, mfn. 'hav¬ 
ing worms within,’ unprofitable, useless. — gata, 
Sec., see antar- 4 /gam. — garbha, mfn. inclosing 
young, pregnant, KatySr. — giri, m. ‘situated 
among the mountains,’ N. of a country, MBh. 

— gnda-valaya, m.(in anat.)the sphincter muscle. 

— gudha-vislia, mfn. having hidden poison with¬ 
in. — griha or -geha, n. interior of the house, 
inner apartment; (am), ind. in the interior of a 
house. — goshtka (antar-), mfn. being inside of 
the stable, MaitrS.; (as'}, m. inside ot a stahle, 
ManGr. — ghana or -ghana or -ghSta, m. a 
place between the entrance-door and the house ; N. 
of a village, Pan. ni, 3, 78, Sch. — ja, mfn. bred in 
the interior (of the body, as a worm). — jathara, 
n. the stomach, L. — janman, n. inward birth. 

—jambha, in. the inner part of the jaws, SBr. 

—jala-cara, mfn. going in the water. — j&ta, 
mfn. inborn, inbred, innate. — janu, ind. between 
the knees; holding the hands between the knees, 
Heat.; (mfn.), holding the hands between the knees. 

—JnSna, n.inward knowledge. — jyotis (antar-), 
mfn. having the soul enlightened, illuminated, SBr. 
xiv; Bhag. — jvalana, a, internal heat, inflam¬ 
mation. — dagdha, mfn. burnt inwardly. — da- 
dhana, n. the distillation of spirituous liquor (or a 
substance used to cause fermentation), L. — dadhfi- 
na, mfn. vanishing, disappearing, hiding one’s self; 

(cf. antar-*/dhd.) — dasa, f. (in astrol.) inter¬ 
mediate period. — dasafia, n. an interval of ten 
days; (at), ind. before the end of ten days, Mn. 

— dava, m. the middle of a fire, AV. — daha, m. 
internal heat, or fever, —die, f. = -desa below, 
ManGr. — duhkha, mfn. alflicted in mind, sad. 

— duslita, mfn. internally bad, wicked, vile. 

— drishti, mfn. looking into one’s own soul. 

— desa, m. an intermediate region of the compass, 
AV. — dvara, ». a private or secret door within 
the house, L. — dha, &c., see s.v. antar-*/dha, 
p. 44. — dhyana, 11. profound inward meditation. 

— nagara, n. the palace of a king, R. — ni visit ta, 
mfn. gone within, being within, — nisixtlxa, mfn. 
engaged in internal reflection. — basbpa, m. sup¬ 
pressed tears; (mfn. \ containing tears. — bbavana, 
n. the interior of a house. — bbava, &c., see 
antar-hhu, p. 44, col. 2. — bkavana, f. inward 
meditation or anxietv ; fin arithm.) rectification of 

J • \ * 

numbers by thediflerencesof the products. — bbumi, 
f. the inner part of the earth. — bhauma, mfn. 
being in the interior of the earth, subterranean, R. 

— manas, mfn. sad, perplexed, L. — mukha, mfn. 
going into the mouth ; (am), n. a kind of scissors 
used in surgery, Susr. — znadra, m. ‘sealed inside,’ 
N. of a form of devotion. — mrita, mfn. still-born, 
Susr. —yama, m. a Soma libation performed with 
suppression of the breath and voice, VS.; SBr. 8 cc. 

— yama-graha, m. id. — yamin, m. ‘checking 
or regulating the internal feelings,’ the soul, SBr. 
xiv; MundOp. — yog"a, m. deep thought, abstrac¬ 
tion. — lamba, mfn. acute-angular ; (aj), m. a tri¬ 
angle in which the perpendicular falls within, an 
acute-angled triangle. — lina, mfn. inherent. — lo- 
ma {antar-), mfn. (said of anything) the hairy side 
of which is turned inwards, MaitrS. ; covered with 
hair on the inner side. — vansa, m. —antah-pura. 

— vansika, m. superintendent of the women’s apart¬ 
ments. — v&xxa, mfn. situated in a forest, Pin.; 
( am), ind. within a forest, Pan. Sch. — vat (antar-), 
mf(zw//[R V.] oTvalnt)n. pregnant, RV, Sec. — va- 
mi, ni. flatulence, indigestion. — vart&, m.the act of 
filling up gaps with grass, TS. — vartin or -va«at f 
mfn. internal, included, dwelling in. — vosu, m., 
N. of a Soma sacrifice, KatySr. — vaatra, n. an 
under garment, Kathas. — vSni, mfn. skilled in 
sacred sciences. — vavat, ind. inwardly, RV. — vS- 
aas, n. an inner or under garment, Kath 3 s. —vi- 
gahaua, n. entering within, L. — vidvaa, mfn. 
(perf. p. V'l. vid), knowing exactly, RV. i f 7. 

— vegra, m. internal uneasiness or anxiety ; inward 
fever. — vedi, ind. within the sacrificial ground, 

SBr. &c.; (f), f. the Doab or district between the 
Gang2 and Yamuna rivers; (ayas), m. pi., N. of 
the people living there, R. - vesman, n. the inner 
apartments, the interior of a building. — vesmlka, 

m. superintendent of the women’s apartments, — hak~ 
nana, n. abolishing, P 5 n. viii, 4, 24, Sch. — ba¬ 
nana, m., N. of a village, Pin. viii, 4, 24, Sch. 

— ka8tam, ind. in the hand, within reach of the 
hand, AV. — hastina, mfn. being in the hand or 
within reach, AitBr. — h&sa, m. laughing inwardly; 
suppressed laughter; (am), ind. with suppressed 
laugh. — hita, Sec., see antar-*/dha, p. 44. — kyi- 
daya, mfn. turned inwards in mind, MaitrUp. 

antar a, mf(a)n. being in the interior, 
interior; near, proximate, related, intimate; lying 
j adjacent to; distant; different from; exterior; (am), 

n. the interior; a hole, opening; the interior part 
of a thing, the contents ; soul, heart, supreme soul; 
interval, intermediate space or time ; period ; term ; 
opportunity, occasion ; place ; distance, absence ; 
difference, remainder ; property, peculiarity ; weak¬ 
ness, weak side ; representation ; surety, guaranty ; 
respect, regard; (ifc.), different, other, another, 
e. g. disdntaram, another country ; (am), or -tds, 
ind. in the interior, within [cf. Goth, anthar, 
Theme anthara ; Lith. antra-s, ‘the second ; * 
Lat. alter). — cakra, n. the whole of the thirty-two 
intermediate regions of the compass, VarBrS.; a 
technical term in augury, —jna, mfn. knowing the 
interior, prudent, provident, foreseeing, —tuna, 
mfn. nearest; immediate, intimate, internal; like, 
analogous; (as), m. a congenial letter, one of the 
same class. — tara (dntara-), mfn. nearer; very 
intimate, TS.; SBr. —da, mfn. (*/ 3. da), cutting 

or hurting the interior or heart. — disf£ [VS.], f. an 
intermediate region or quarter of the compass; (cf. 
antard-dis and antar-desd.) — puruska, m. the 


antar a-pvahhava. 

andha-tdmasa . 

interna: man, the sou!, Mn. viii, 85. — prabhava, 
nirn. ■•!'mixed origin or caste, M11. i, 2. — prasna, 
rn. an iv.nv: question ; a question which is contained 
i.. and arises from what has been previously stated. 

— stha, -sthayin, -sthita, mfn. interposed, in¬ 
terna':, situated inside, inward ; separate, apart. An* 
tarapatya, f. a pregnant woman, L. AntarS- 

bhara, see antara. 

Antara, the middle, inside, within, among, 
between; on the wav, bv the way; near, nearly, 
almost ; in the meantime, now and then ; for some 
time ; with acc. and loc.) between, during, without. 
Antar&nsa, m. the part of the body between the 
shoulders, the breast,SBr. Antara-dis, f. = antar- 
disa, q.v. AntarS-bhara, mfn. bringing dose to, 
procuring, RV. viii, 32, 12. Antara-bhava- 
deha, m. or -bhava-sattva, n. the soul in its 
middle existence between death and regeneration. 
Antara-vedi, f. a veranda resting on columns, 
L. Antara-sringum, ind. between the horns, 

Antariya, am, n. an under or lower garment, L. 

Antare, ind. amidst, among, between; with 
regard to, for the sake of, on account of. 

A'ntarena, ind. amidst, between ; (with acc.) 
within, between, amidst, during; except, without, 
with regard to, with reference to, on account of. 

Antarya, mfn. interior, (gana dig-ddi , q. v.) 

antar-*/anj, to assume, take up 

into one’s self, VS. 

WRtTX antar-aya , &c. See antar-*/i . 

^TtTTTMT antar-d-x^dha, A. -dhatte, to re¬ 
ceive into one’s self, contain, RV. ix, 73, 8; SBr. 

^TmT^PT antaraya. See antar-*/i. 

antar-ala. See s.v. antar . 

^ 'ft antar-*/as, to sit down into (acc.), 

RV. ix, 78, 3. 

antar-\i , -ayati, to come between, 
Mricch.; (perf. -ayam cakara) to conceal, came to 
disappear, Sis. iii, 24; -cti, to stand in any one’s 
way, separate; to exclude from (abb, rarely gen.); 
to pass over omit; to disappear : Intens. - Jyate, to 
walk to and fro between (as a mediator), RV. 

_ I. Antar-aya, as, m. impediment, hindrance, 
ApSr.; (of. dn-antaraya.) 

2. Antar-aya, Nom. P. - ayati , see antar-*/i. 

Antar-ayana, am, n. going under, disappearing, 
Pan. viii, 4, 25. 

Antar-ayana, as, m., N, of a country, Pan. 
viii, 4, 25. 

Antar-aya, as, m. intervention, obstacle. 

Antar-ita, mfn. gone within, interior, bidden, 
concealed, screened, shielded ; departed, retired, 
withdrawn, disappeared, perished ; separated, ex¬ 
cluded ; impeded; (am), 11. (?) remainder (in arith¬ 
metic) ; a technical term in architecture. 

Antar-iti, is, f. exclusion, MaitrS. 

antdriksha , am , 11. the inter¬ 
mediate space between heaven and earth; (in the 
Veda) the middle of the three spheres or regions of 
life ; the atmosphere or sky ; the air ; talc. — kshit, 
mfn. dwelling in the atmosphere, ChUp. — g*a or 
-cara, mfn. passing through the atmosphere ; 
m. a bird. — pr£, mfn. (*/1 .pri), travelling through 
the atmosphere, RV. —prut, mfn. (*/pru), float¬ 
ing over the atmosphere, RV. i, 116, 3. — yani, 
f., N. of a brick, 'I'S. — loka, m. the intermediate 
region or sky as a peculiar world, SBr. — samsita 
(antdriksha-), mfn. sharpened in the atmosphere, 
AV. —sad, mfn.dwelling in the atmosphere, RV. 
iv, 40, 5, &c. — sadya, n. residence in the atmo¬ 
sphere, SBr. Antar ikshdyatana, mfn. having its 
abode in the atmosphere, SBr. Antarikshodara, 
mfn. having an interior as comprehensive as the 

Antarikshya (5), mfn. atmospheric, RV. 

Antarlksha, am, n. = antdriksha. 

/V . 

■^PfTTtT? antar-/-]. ish (3. pi. -icchanti) to 
wish, long for, RV. viii, 72, 3. 

antar-updlt ( v 4 ‘), -updtycti, to 

enter over a threshold or boundary, Kaus. 

-•Rni antdr-x'(jam, to go between (so as 

to exclude from [abl.]), SBr. 

Antar-gata or -g^iniin, mfn. gone between or 

into, being in, included in ; being in the interior, 
internal, hidden, secret ; disappeared, perished; 
slipped out of the memory, forgotten, -manas, 
mfn. whose mind is turned inwards, engaged in deep 
thought, sad, perplexed. Antargratopama, f. a 
concealed simile (the particle of comparison being 

out fir- xi . go, to go between, RV.; 


to separate, exclude from (with abb), SBr. 

*ravT 1 antar-x / dhd, A. - dhatte , to place 
within, deposit ; to receive within ; to hide, conceal, 
obscure ; to hide one’s self: Pass, -dhiyale, to be 
received within, to be absorbed ; to be rendered in¬ 
visible ; to disappear, vanish ; to cease : Caus. -dhd- 
payati, to render invisible, to cause to disappear. 

2. Antar-dhS, f. concealment, covering, Pan. 

Antar-dh£na,<7W, n.disappearance, invisibility; 
antardhanam */i or */gam, to disappear ; (<?,n, 
m., N. of a son of Prithu. — g-ata, mfn. disappeared. 

— cara, mfn. going invisibly. 

Antar-dbapita, mfn. rendered invisible. 
Antar-dhayaka, mf(f&f)n. rendering invisible. 
Antar-dhi, is, m. concealment, covering, AV.; 

disappearance ; interim, meantime, ShadvBr. 

Antar-hita, mfn. placed between, separated ; 
covered, concealed, hidden, made invisible, vanished, 
invisible; hidden from (with abl.) Antarhitdt- 
man, m. ‘of concealed mind,’ N. of Siva. 

antar-\/bhu, to be (contained or 

inherent or implied) in, RV. vii, 86, 2, &c. 

Antar-bhava, mfn. being within, inward, in¬ 
ternal, generated internally. 

Antar-bhavana. See s.v. anfdr. 
Antar-bhava, as, in. the being included by 
(loc.b internal or inherent nature or disposition. 
Antar-bhavana. See s. v. ant dr. 
Antar-bhavita, mfn. included. involved. 
Antar-bhuta, mfn. being within, internal, inner. 

— tva, n. ; see antar-hiuiva . 

Antar-bhumi. See s. v. antar. 

anfdr-\ 'yam (Imper. 2 . sg.-yf/ccha) 

to hinder, stop, RV. x, J02, 3 ; VS.; TS.; (Imper. 
-yarchatu) to keep inside, AsvGr. 

antar-ras , to dwell inside, 

abide in the interior, Sis. ; to stop in the midst of, 
MBh.; (<-f. antar ushya s.v. antdr.) 

f antar-v han, forms the ind. p. 

-hatya. Pan. i, 4. 65, Sch., and the Pass. - hanyatc , 
Pan. viii, 4, 24, Sch. 

antds-/car , to move between, to 

move within, RV. &c. 

antds-\Schid, to cut off, inter- 

cept, SBr. 

antas for antdr , see p. 43, col. 2 . 

— tapta, mfn. internally heated or harn-M-d. — tapa, 
m. inward heat, Silk.; Malatlm. — tushara, mtn. 
having dew in the interior. — toya, mfn. containing 
water inside, Megh. — patha dntas-', nun. being 
on the way, RV. v, 52, 10. 

Antastya, am, n. intestines, AitBr. 

WfnT 1 anti , ind. before, in the presence 

of, near, RV.; AV.; (with gen.) within the proxi¬ 
mity of, to [cf. Lat. ante; Gk. dvri]. — ffriha 
i.dnti-), m. neighbour, RV. x, 95, 4. — tama, 
mfn. very near, Pan. Comm. — tas (dnti-), ind. 
from near, RV. — deva (anti-), mfn. being in the 
presence of the gods, near the gods, RV. i, 180, 7. 

— mitra (dnti-), mfn. having friends near one’s 
self, VS. — vama (dnti-), mt\rf)n, at hand with 
wraith or loveliness, RV. vii, 77, 4. —shad, mfn. 
sitting near, Pat. - sumna (dnti-), mfn. at hand 
with kindness, AV. Anty-uti (4), mfn. at hand 
with help, RV. i, 138, I. 

I. Antika, mfn. (with gen. or abi.) near, prox¬ 
imate, L. (compar. nediyas, super!, ncdishlha ); 
(am), n. vicinity, proximity, near, e. g . antika- 
stha, remaining near ; (dm), ind. (with gen. or ifc.) 
until, near to, into the presence of; (at), ind. from 
the proximity ; near, close by ; within the presence 
of; (e), ind. (with gen. or ifc.] near, close bv, in 
the proximity or presence of; (cna), ind. (with gen.) 
near. — gati, f. going near. — ta, f. nearness, 

vicinity, contiguity. Antikffcsraya, m. comiguotrt 
support (as that given by a tree to a creeper), L. 

1. Antima, mfn. ifc. immediately following ye.g. 
dasdntima, ‘the eleventh’); very near, L. 

^rn?r 2. anti , is, f. an elder sister (in 
theatrical language), L. For i.dnti, see col. 2. 

Antika, f. an elder sister (in theatrical language ; 
perhaps a corruption of attika), L.; a fire-place, 
L. ; the plant Echites Scholaris. 

Anti, f. an oven, L. 

^TPtTSF 2. antika , mfn. (fr. anta), only ifc. 
reaching to the end of, reaching to (e. g. nas&ntika , 
reaching to the nose), lasting till, until. 

2. Antima, mfn. final, ultimate, last. Anti- 
mahka, m. the last unit, nine. 

Antya, mfn. last in place, in time, or in order ; 
ifc. immediately following, e.g. ashtamdntya, the 
ninth; lowest in place or condition, undermost, 
inferior, belonging to the lowest caste ; (as), m. the 
plant Cyperus Hexastachyus Communis ; (am), n. 
the number 1000 billions; the twelfth sign of the 
zodiac ; the last member of a mathematical series. 

— karman, n. or -kriya, f. funeral rites. — ja, 
mfn. of the lowest caste ; (as), m. a Siidra ; a man 
of one of seven inferior tribes (a washerman, currier, 
mimic, Varuda, fisherman, Meda or attendant on 
women,and mountaineerorforester). — ja-gfamana, 
n. intercourse (between a woman of the higher caste) 
with a mail of the lowest caste. — janman or -jati 
or -jatlya, mfn. of the lowest caste. — ja-tfamana, 
11. intercourse (between a man of the higher caste) 
with a woman of the lowest caste. — dhana, n. last 
member of an arithmetical series. — pada or -mula, 
11. (in arithm.) the last or greatest root (in the 
square). — bha, n. the last Nakshatra (Rcvati); the 
last sign of the zodiac, the sign Pisces. — yugra, in. 
the last or Kali age. — yoni, f. the lowest origin, 
Mn. viii, 6S ; (mfn.), of the lowest origin. - varua, 
as, a. m. f. a man or woman of the last tribe, a 
8 f:dra. — vipula, f., N. of a metre. Antyava- 
sayin, i, ini, in. f. a man or woman of low caste 
• the son of a Cand.lJa by a NishadT, especially a 
C’indflla, Svapaca, Kshattri, Suta, Vaidehaka, M.l- 
gadlia, and Ayogava), Mn. &c. Antydhati, f. 
funeral oblation or sacrifice. Antyeshti, f. funeral 
sacrifice. Antyeshti-kriya, f. funeral ceremonies. 

Antyaka, as, m. a man of the lowest tribe, I,. 

ante-vasi'n . See p.43, col. r. 

antra, am, n. (contr. of antara ; Gk. 
tvTtpov'', entrail, intestine (cf. antra) ; (J), f. the 
plant Convolvulus Argenteus or Ipomoea I’esCapne 
Roth. — kuja, m. or-kujana, n. or -viknjaua, u. 
rumbling of the bowels. — m-dhami (antram-), f. 
indigestion, inflation of the bowels from wind. 

— pr.caka, m. the plant TEschynomene Grandiflora. 

— maya, mfn. consisting of entrails. — vardhman, 
n. or -vriddhi, f. inguinal hernia, rupture. — sil£, 
t., N. of a river. — sraj, f. a kind of garland worn by 
Nara-siuha. Antrada, m. worms in the intes¬ 

and, cl. r. P. andati, to bind, L. 

Andu, us, or andu, us, f. the chain for an 
elephant’s feet; a ring or chain worn on the ancle, 

Anduka or anduka, as, m. id., L. 

andikd, f. (for antika, q.v.), fire¬ 


andolaya, Nom. P. andolayati , 

to agitate, to swing. 

Atadolaaa, am, n. swinging, oscillating. 
Andollta, mfn. agitated, swung. 

^ andraka=drdraka, q.v. 

an( 1 h, cl. 10. P. andhayati, to make 

^ \ blind. Sis. 

Andha, mf(J)n. blind ; dark ; (am), n. darkness; 
turbid water, water ; (as), m. pi., N. of a people. 

— kara, m. n. darkness. — kara-maya, mfn. dark. 

— k£ra-samcaya, m. intensity of darkness. 

— karita, mfn. made dark, dark, Kful.; (cf. gana 
tdrakadi .) — kupa, m. a well of which the mouth 
is hidden ; a well over-grown with plants, tkc. ; a 
particular hell. — m-karana (andham-\ nilY/)n. 

* * - » / r \ ' m 

making blind. — tamasa, u. great, thick', or intense 
darkness, Pan. v, 4, 79 ; Ragh. - ta, f. or -tva, 
n. blindness, —tamasa, n. — -tamasa, L. — 13 - 


ctndha-dhi . 


misra, m. complete darkness of the soul; (am], n. 
the second or eighteenth of the twenty-one hells, 
Mn. &c. ; doctrine of annihilation after death. 

— dhl, mfn. mentally blind. — putana, f. a female 
demon causing diseases in children, Susr. — musha, 
f. a small covered crucible with a hole in the side. 

— musbika, f. the grass Lepeocercis Serrata. 

— nx-bhavishnti(<z«f//i<i/«-),mfn.becomingblind, 

Pan. iii, 2, 5 7. — m-bhavuka (andhatn-), mfn. id., 
ib.; Kaus. — ratrl, f. dark night (?), AV. Andha- 
lajl, f. a blind boil, one that does not suppurate, Susr. 
Andhahi (or andhdhika), m. a ‘blind,’ i.e. not poi¬ 
sonous snake ; (is, is), m. f. the fish called kucika. 
Andhl-x/ J.kri, to make blind, to blind. Andbl- 
krita, mfn. made blind. Andhikritdtman, mfn. 
blinded in mind. Andbl-gu, us, m., N. of a Rishi, 
PBr. Andhi-\/bhu, to become blind. Andhl- 
bhuta, mfn. become blind. 

Andhaka, mfn. blind ; (as), m., N. of an Asura 
(son of Kasyapa and Diti); of a descendant of Yadu 
and ancestor of Krishna and his descendants; N. of 
a Muni. — ghatin or -ripu, ni.'the slayer or enemy 
of the Asura Andhaka,’ N. of Siva. — varta, m., N. 
of a mountain, Pan. iv, 3, 91, Sch. — vrishni, 
ayas , m. pi. descendants of Andhaka and Vrishni. 
Andhakari or andhakasuhrid, m.‘enemy of the 
Asura Audhaka,’ N. of Siva. 

I. A'ndhas, as, n. darkness, obscurity, RV. 

AndhikS, f. night, L.; a kind of game (blindman’s 
buff), L. ; a woman of a particular character (one of 
the classes of women), L.; a disease of the eye, L.; 
another disease, L.; = sarshapi, L. 

as, n. (Gk. m/$of),a herb; 

the Soma plant; Soma juice, RV. ; VS. ; juice, SBr.; 
grassy grodnd, RV. vii, 96, 2 ; food, MBh. iii, 13244; 


andhu, us, m. a well, Rajat. 

, SP*Tc 5 andhula, as, m. the tree Acacia 


andhra, as, m., N. of a people (pro¬ 
bably modern Telingana) ; of a dynasty ; a man of 
a low caste (the offspring of a Vaideha father and 
Kara vara mother, who lives by killing game), M11. 
x, 36. — jati, f. the Andhra tribe, -jatiya, mfn. 
belonging to the Andhra tribe. — bhritya, as, m. 
pi. a dynasty of the Andhras. 

^CSanna, mfn. ( Vad), eaten, L.; ( dnnam ), 

n. food or victuals, especially boiled rice ; bread corn ; 
food in a mystical sense (or the lowest form in which 
the supreme soul is manifested, the coarsest envelope 
of the Supreme Spirit) ; water, Naigh.; Vishnu ; 
earth, L. — ktoa (Anna-), mfn. desirous of food, 
RV. x, 117, 3. — k£la, m. meal-time, proper hour 
for eating ; time at which a convalescent patient 
begins to take food, Bhpr. -koshthaka, m. cup¬ 
board, granary ; Vishnu, the sun, L. -gati, f. the 
oesophagus, gullet* — gandhi, m. dysentery, diar¬ 
rhoea. -ja or -jata, mfn. springing from or occa¬ 
sioned by food as the primitive substance. — jala, n. 
food and water, bare subsistence, —jit, mfn. ob¬ 
taining food by conquest (explanation of vaja-jit), 
SBr. — jivana (anna-), mfn. living by food, SBr. 

— tejas (anna-), mfn. having the vigour of food, 
AV. —da or -d&tri, mfn. giving food ; N. of Siva 
and DurgS, L. — d£na, n. the giving of food, —da- 
yin, mfn. = -da above. -devatS, f. the divinity 
supposed to preside over articles of food, —dosha, 
m. a fault committed by eating prohibited food, Mn. 
v, 4. — dvesha, as, m. want of appetite, dislike of 
food. — pati (anna-), m. the lord of food, N. of 
Savitri, Agni, Siva, -patni, f. a goddess presiding 

over food, AitBr. ; AsvSr. -patya (Anna-), n. 
the lordship over food, MaitrS. — pu, mfn. (expla¬ 
nation of keta-pu ), purifying food, SBr. — purna, 
mfn. filled with or possessed of food ; (a), f., N. of 
a goddess, a form of Durga. — p6ya, n. explains the 
word vdja-peya, q.v., SBr. — prada, mfn. = - da 
above,SBr. — pralaya, mfn. being resolved into food 
or the primitive substance after death, L. — prasa, 
m. or-pr&sana, n. putting rice into a child’s mouth 
for the first time (one of the SamskSras; see sam- 
skdrad, Mn. ii, 34; Ysjfl.i, 12. - bubhukshu, mfn. 
desirous of eating food, — brahman, n. Brahma as 
represented by food. — bhaksha, m. or -bhaksha- 
na, n. eating of food, -bh&ga, m. a share of 
food, AV. iii, 30, 6. — bhnj, mfn. eating food ; 
(k), m. a N. of Siva, MBh. xii, 10382. -maya, 

mf f)n. made from food, composed of food or of 
boiled rice. — maya-kosa, m. the gross material 
body (which is sustained by food = stkiila-sartra). 

— mala, n. excrement; spirituous liquor, cf. Mn. 
xi, 93. — rakshS, f. caution in eating food. — rasa, 
m. essence of food, chyle ; meat and drink, nutri¬ 
ment, taste in distinguishing food. — lipsS, f. desire 
for food, appetite. - vat (anna-), mfn.Ved. possessed 
of food, RV. x, 117, 2, &c. — vastra, n. food and 
clothing, the necessaries of life. — vShi-srotas, n. 
the oesophagus, gullet. — vikara, m. transformation 
of food ; disorder of the stomach from indigestion ; 
the seminal secretion. — vid, mfn. (*/2. vid), ac¬ 
quiring food, AV. vi, 116, 1; (V I. vid), knowing 

I food. — sesha, m. leavings, offal. — saxnskara, m. 
consecrating of food. — hartri, mfn. taking away 
food. — homa, m. a sacrifice connected with the Asva- 
medha, SBr. Ann&kala,seetf«ff£ff/<7. AnnicchS- 
dana, n. food and clothing. Annattri or ann&din 
[Mn.ii, 188], mfn. eating food. Annada, mt\/,<z)n. 
eating food ; Super!, of the fern, annddi-tanid, ‘eat¬ 
ing the most,’ N. of the fore-finger, SBr. Anna- 
dazxa, n. eating of food. Annadya, n. tood in 
general, proper food. Annadya-kama, mtn. de¬ 
sirous of food. Anndyn, m. (coined for the ety¬ 
mology of vdyu), ‘ living by food, desirous of food,’ 1 
A it Up. Annarthin, mfn. asking for food. An- 
na-vridh (final a lengthened), mfn. prospering by 
food, RV. x, 1, 4. AnndhSrin, mfn. eating food. 

Anniyat, mfn. being desirous of food, RV.iv, 2, 7. 

annambhatta, as, m., N. of the 

author of the Tarka-samgraha, q. v. 

1 .anya (3), am, n. inexhaustibleness 

(as of the milk of cows), AV. xii, I, 4 ; (cf. Anya.), 

2. any a, as, a, at, other, different; other 

than, different from, opposed to (abl. or in comp.); 
another ; another person ; one of a number; anya 
anya or eka anya, the one, the other; anyac ca, 
and another, besides, moreover [cf. Zend anya; 
Armen, ail; Lat. alius ; Goth, aljis, Theme rjja; 
Gk.dA.Aos for aAyo-s; cf. also moi]. — kfima, mfn. 
loving another. - karuk&, f. a worm bred in excre¬ 
ment, L. -krita (anya-), mfn. done by another, 
RV. — kshetra, n. another territory or sphere, 
AV. — gu or -gamin, mfn. going to another, adul- j 
terous. — gotra, mfn. of a different family. — citta, 
mf(ff)n. whose mind is fixed on some one or some¬ 
thing else. — codita, mfn. moved by another. 
-Ja or -jSta (anyA-) [RV.], mfn. bom of another 
(family, &c.), of a different origin. —janman, n. 
another birth, being bom again. — tas, see s. v. 

— t &, f. difference. — dnrvaha, mfn. difficult to be 
borne by another. — devata or -devatyfe [MaitrS.; 
SBr.] or -daivata, mfn. having another divinity, 
i.e. addressed to another divinity. — dharma, m. 
different characteristic ; characteristic of another ; 
(mfn.), having different characteristics. — dhi, mfn. 
one whose mind is alienated, L. — nabhi (anyA-), 
mfn. of another family, AV. i, 29, I. — para, mfn. j 
devoted to something else, zealous in something else, j 
-pushta, as, m. or a, f. [Kum. i, 46] ‘reared by 1 
another,’ the kokila or Indian cuckoo (supposed to be 
reared by the crow). — purvS, f. a woman previously 
betrothed to one and married to another. — bija-ja j 
or -bya-samndbhava or -bijotpanna,’ m. * bom ; 
from the seed of another,’ an adopted son. — bhrit, ! 
m. ‘ nourishing another,’ a crow (supposed to sit upon : 
the eggs of the kokila). — bhrita, as, m.or ff,f.[Ragh. . 
viii, 58] = -pushta above. - xuanas or -manaska, ! 
mfn. whose mind is fixed on something else, absent, 
versatile ; having another mind in one’s self, pos¬ 
sessed by a demon. — xndtri-ja, m. a half-brother 
(who has the same father but another mother), YJjn. 

— r&jan, mfn. having another for king, subject to 
another, ChUp. — r&shtriya, mfn. from another 
kingdom, belonging to another kingdom, SBr. 

— rupa, n. another form ; (ena), in another form, 
disguised; (anyA-riipa), mf(J)n. having another 
form, changed, altered, RV. &c. -rupln, mfn. 
having another shape. — liiiga or-lihgaka, mfn. 
having the gender of another (word, viz. of the sub¬ 
stantive), an adjective, —varna (anya-), mf(tz)n. 
having another colour. — vap&, m. ‘sowing for 
others,’ i.e. ‘leaving his eggs in the nests of other 
birds,’ the kokila or Indian cuckoo, VS. — vrata 
(anyA-), m. devoted to others, infidel, RV.; VS. 

— sfikhaka, m. a Br 5 hman who has left his school, 
L.; an apostate, L. — samgama, m. intercourse with j 

another, adulterous intercourse. — s 5 .dh 5 .rana,mfn. 
common to others. — strx-ga,m. going to another's 
wife, an adulterer, Mn. Anya-drikslia [L.] or 
anya-dri8 [ VS. &c.], mfn. or anya-drisa,mf( 1 )n. 
of another kind, like another. Anyadblna, mfn. 
subject to others, dependent. Any&srayana, n. 
going to another (as an inheritance). Any&srita, 
mfn. gone to another. Anydsakta, mfn. intent 
on something else. AuyasadhSrana, mfn. not 
common to another, peculiar. Any8dhS, f. mar¬ 
ried to another, another’s wife, Sah. Anyotpanna, 
mfn. begotten by another. Anyodarya, mfn. bom 
from another womb, RV. vii, 4, 8 ; (as), m. a step¬ 
mother’s son, Yajii. 

Anyaka, mfn. another, other, RV. 

Anya-tama, mfn. any one of many, either, any. 

Anya-tara, as, a, at, either of two, other, dif¬ 
ferent ; anyatara anyatara, the one, the other ; 

anyatarasyam, loc.f. either way, Pan. — tas (anya- 


tarA-), ind. on one of two sides, SBr.; KatySr.; 
either way ( = anyatarasyam), VPrat. Anyata- 
rato-danta, mf(ff)n. having teeth' on one side 
(only), SBr. Anyatare-dyus, ind. on either of 
two days, Pan. v, 3, 22. 

Anya-tas, ind. from another; from another 
motive ; on one side (anyatah anyatah, on the 
one, on the other side); elsewhere ; on the other 
side, on the contrary, in one direction ; towards some 
other place. Anyata-eta, mf(-e»i*)n. variegated 
on one side, VS. xxx, 19. Anyatah-kshnut, mfn. 
sharp on one side, SBr. Anyatak-plakslxS., f., N. 
of a lotus pond in Kurukshetra, SBr. Anyato- 
ghatin, mfn. striking in one direction, SBr. An- 
yato-dat, m(n. — anyatarAto-danta, q.v., TS. 
Anyato-'ranya, n. a land which is woody only 
on one side, VS. xxx, 19. Anyato-vata, m. a 
disease of the eye, Susr. 

Anyataotya, as, m. ‘opponent, adversary,’ in 
comp, with -jiyin, mfn. overwhelming adversaries, 
SBr. xiv. 

Anyat-karaka, mfn. making mistakes, Pan. vi, 
3, 99 (the neut. form appears to be used in comp, 
when error of any kind is implied ; other examples 
besides the following are given). Anyat -\d 1. kri, 
to make a mistake, Pat. Anyad-asa or -asls, 
f. a bad desire or hope (?), Pan. vi, 3, 99. 

Anya-tra, ind. ( = anyasmin, loc. of 2. anya), 
elsewhere, in another place (with abl.); on another 
occasion ; (ifc.) at another time than ; otherwise, 
in another manner; to another place ; except, with¬ 
out, MSnGr.; Jain. [cf. Goth, aljathro ]. — manas 
(anyAtra-), mfn. having the mind directed to some¬ 
thing else, inattentive, SBr. xiv. 

Anyathaya, P. anyat hay ati, to alter, Sah. 

Anya-tka, ind. otherwise, in a different manner 
(with atas, itas, or tat as — in a manner different 
from this; any at ha anyat ha, in one way, in another 
way); inaccurately, untruly, falsely, erroneously; 
from another motive ; in the contrary case, other¬ 
wise [cf. Lat . aliuta], — kSra, m. doing other¬ 
wise, changing ; (am), ind. otherwise, in a different 
manner, Pan. iii, 4, 27. -Vi-kri, to act otherwise, 
alter, violate (a law), destroy (a hope), &c. — krita, 
mfn. changed. — kkySti, f. (in Sankhya phil.) the 
assertion that something is not really what it appears 
to be according to sensual perception ; N. of a philo¬ 
sophical work. — tva, n. an opposite state of the 
case, difference. — bk&va, m. alteration, difference. 

— bhnta, mfn. changed. — v&din (or anya-vadin ), 
mfn. speaking differently ; (f), m. speaking incon¬ 
sistently ; (in law) prevaricating or a prevaricator. 

— vritti, mfn. altered, disturbed by strong emo¬ 
tion. — siddka, mfn. wrongly defined, wrongly 
proved or established; effected otherwise, unessen¬ 
tial. — siddka-tva, n. or-siddki, f. wrong argu¬ 
ing, wrong demonstration ; that demonstration in 
which arguments are referred to untrue causes. 

— stotra, n. irony, Yajh. ii, 204. 

Anya-dS, ind. at another time ; sometimes ; one 
day, once; in another case- [cf. Old Slav, inogda , 
iniidd \. 

Anyad-Si£, -asis, See. See anyat-kdraka . 

Anyadiya, mfn. (Pan. vi, 3, 99) belonging to 
another, Das. 

Anyarbl, ind. at another time, L. 

Anyedynka [Car.] or anyedynsbka [Susr.], 
mfn. occurring on another day; (as), m. a chronic 

Anye-dyns, ind. on the other day, on the fol¬ 
lowing day, AV. &c.; the other day, once, Pancat. 

aMamBmnaftmi ; r 1 ' 1: 1 1. 

.,^ T Ttt MS tf * «fcWai^. 


anyonya . 


Anyonya or anyo-’nya (said to be fr. any as, 
nom. sing, m., and rtwjvz / ct'. par as para ; in most 
cases the first any a may be regarded as the subject 
of the sentence, while the latter assumes the acc., 
inst., gen., or Loc. cases as required by the verb ; 
but there are many instances in which the first any a, 
originally a nominative, is equivalent to an oblique 
case); one another, mutual; (am), or -/as, iud. 
mutually. — kalaha, m. mutual quarrel, — ghata, 
m. mutual conflict, killing one another. — paksha- 
nay ana, n. transposing (of numbers) from one side 
to another. — bheda, m. mutual division or enmity. 
— mithuna, n. mutual union; (as), ni. united 
mutually. — vibhaga, in. mutual partition (of an 
inheritance). — vritti, m. mutual effect of one upon 
another. — vyatikara, m. reciprocal action, rela¬ 
tion or influence. - samsraya, m. reciprocal re¬ 
lation (of cause and effect). — sapeksha, mfn. 
mutually relating. — harabhihata, mfn. (two 
quantities) mutually multiplied by their denomina¬ 
tors. Anyonyapahrita, mfn. taken or secreted 
from one another, taken secretly. Anyonyabhava, 
m. mutual non-existence, mutual negation, relative 
difference. Anyonyifcsraya, in. mutual or reci¬ 
procal support or connection or dependance ; mutually 
depending. Anyonytisrita, mfn. mutually sup¬ 
ported or depending. Anyonyokti, f. conversation. 

Waftf a-nyahya, mfn. ‘ spotless/ in comp, 
with -sveta, mfn. white and without spot (as a 
sacrificial animal), AitBr. 

anya-tas , &c. See s.v. 2. any a. 

Anya-tha, anya-da, &c. See ib. 

’ST'WT dnyd (3), f. inexhaustible (as the milk 
of a cow), RV. viii, 1, 10 & 27, 11 ; SV. 

a-nydya, os, m. unjust or unlawful 
action; impropriety, indecorum; irregularity, dis¬ 
order. — vartin or -vritta, mfn. acting unjustly ; 
following evil courses. 

A-nyayin or a-ny 5 yya, mfn. unjust, improper, 
indecorous, unbecoming. 

-nyuna, mf(f<)n. not defective, not 
less than (with abJ.); entire, complete. A'-nyu- 
natt ikta [SBr.] or a-nyunadhika, mfn. not too 
little and not too much; neither deficient nor ex¬ 

a-ny-okas, mfn. not remaining in 

one’s habitation (okas), AV. 

anv-aksha , mfn. (fr. 4. aksha ), fol¬ 
lowing, L.; (am), ind. afterwards, immediately after, 
R. &c., cf. gana sarad-adi. 

anv-akshara-sandhi, is, m. 

a kind of Sandhi in the Vedas, RPrat, 

*-4 anv-ahgdm, ind. after every 

member or part, SBr. 

anvdhc, ah, net and uci, ak (Vahe), 

following the direction of another, going after, fol¬ 
lowing ; lying lengthwise; (anftci), loc. ind. in the 
rear, behind ; (ak), ind. afterwards ; behind (with 
acc.) Anvag-bhavam, ind. afterwards, L.; 
friendly disposed, Pan. iii, 4, 64. Anvag-bhuya, 
ind. becoming friendly disposed, ib. 

anv-Vahj, to anoint, SBr.; Kaus. 
anv-ati-Vsic, to pour out over 

or along, TBr. 

^ rft anv-ati {Vi), cl. 2. P. -atyeti, to 

pass over to, follow, SBr. 

anv-adhi-Vruh, to ascend after 

another, Laty. 

anv-adhy-V 2. as, to throw upon 

after another, ManSr. 

anv-adhydyam , ind. according 

io the chapters (of the Veda), according to the 
sacred texts, Nir. 

arv-apa-V kram, to run away 

after another, TBr. 

anv-abhi-shic (Vsic ), A. -sih- 

cate, to have one’s self anointed by another (with 
acc.), MBh. xii, 2803 (both editions). 

anv-aya, as, m. (Vi, see anv-V *)» 

following, succession ; connection, association, being 
linked to or concerned with ; the natural order or 
connection of words in a sentence, syntax, constru¬ 
ing ; logical connection of words ; logical connection 
of cause and effect, or proposition and conclusion ; 
drift, tenor, purport; descendants, race, lineage, 
family. — jna, m. a genealogist, —vat, mfn. hav¬ 
ing a connection (as a consequence), following, 
agreeing with ; belonging to race or family; (vat), 
ind. in connection with, in the sight of, Mn. viii, 
332. — vyatireka, n. agreement and contrariety; 
a positive and negative proposition ; species and 
difference; rule and exception ; logical connection 
and disconnection. — vyatirekin, mfn. (in phil.) 
affirmative and negative. — vySpti, f. an affirma¬ 
tive argument. 

Anvayin, mfn. connected (as a consequence) ; 
belonging to the same family, Rajat. Anvayi-tva, 
11. the state of being a necessary consequence. 

anv-V arc, to honour with shouts 

or songs of jubilee, RV. v, 29, 2. 

C . • 

ano-Varj, to let go, SBr. 

(according to NBD.) short¬ 
ened for anu-vart ( \ f vrit), to go after, demand 
(a girl in marriageAV. xiv, 1, 56. For the abbre¬ 
viation, cf. anvd, apva, a-bhva. 

Anvartitri for anu-vartitri, td, m. a wooer, 
RV. x, 109, 2. 

_ C 

anv-artha, mf(a)n. conformable to 

the meaning, agreeing with the true meaning, Ragh. 
iv, 12; having the meaning obvious, intelligible, 
clear. — grahana, n. the literal acceptation of the 
meaning of a word (as opposed to the conventional). 
— samjna, f. a term whose meaning is intelligible 
in itself (opposed to such technical terms as bha, 
ghu , &c.) 

anv-V av, to encourage, RV. viii, 

7, 24. 

anv-ava-V 1. kri, to despise, re¬ 

fuse, MaitrS. 

anv-ava-V I . kri, to scatter or 

strew about (with instr.), Yajfi. 

Anv-avakirana, am, n. scattering about succes¬ 
sively, L. 

anv-ava-Vkram, to descend or 

enter in succession, SBr. xiv. 

anv-ava-tVi- ya, to go and join 

another, SBr. 

^r^^^ajiv-ava-Vcar, to insinuate one’s 

self into, enter stealthily, TS. &c. 

Anv-avacSra, as, m. See dn-anvavaedra. 


anv-ava-Vdha, to place into sue- 

^ • 

cessively, ApSr. 

anv-ava-V 1 .pa, Ved. In L-patch, 

to drink after others, SSnkhBr. 

anv-ava-Vplu, -plavate , to dive 

after, TBr. 

anv-ava-Vmris, to touch or 

come in contact with or along, Gobh. 

anv-ava-Vruh, to ascend or 

enter upon after another, MBh. 

anv-ava-Vlup, Pass, -lupyate, 

to drop off after another, PBr. 

anv-ava-Vsrii, to let go along 

or towards, TS.; TBr. 

Anv-avasarga, as, m. letting down, slackening, 
TPrat. ; Pat.; permission to do as one likes. Pan. 
i, 4, 96. 

anv-ava- Vso, -syati , to adhere to, 

cling to, TBr. &c\; to long for, desire, SBr. &c. 

Anv-ava-say in, mfn. adhering to, depending 
on (gen.), TS. ; SBr. 

Anv-ava-sita, mfn. seized by, SankhBr. 

anv-ava-Vstkd, to descend after 


another, SBr. 

-srdvayati, to 

cause to flow down upon or along, TS.; TBr.; SBr. 

anv-ava- Vhan, to throw down 

by striking, SBr. 

anv-ava-Vhri, to lower (the 

shoulder). SankhGr. 

// • 

anv-avdrj (Varj), to cause to go 

after or in a particular direction, SBr.; to afflict with 
(instr.), AitUp. 

anv-avds (V2. as), to place upon 

(dat.), TS. 

anv-ave (Vi), cl. 2. P. - avaiti, to 

follow, walk up to or get into. 

Anv-avaya, as, m. race, lineage, MBh. 
Anv-avayana, am, 11. See dn-anvavdyana. 

anv-aveksh (Viksh), to look at, 


Anv-aveksba, f. regard, consideration. 

anv-V 1. as, cl. 5. P. A. -asnoti, 

-nutc, to reach, come up to, equal, RV.; AV. 

anv-ashtaka, f. the ninth day in 

the latter half of the three (or four) months following 
the full moon in Agrahayana, Pausha, Magha ( 8 c 
Phalguna), Mu. iv, 150. 

Anvashtakya, am, n. a Sraddha or funeral 
ceremony performed on the 

anv-V T. as, to be near, Laty.; to 

be at hand, RV.; AitBr.; to reach, RV. 

anv-asta, mfn.( V2. as), shot along, 

shot; interwoven (as in silk), chequered, SBr. 

anv-V ak, perf. -dha, to pronounce 

(especially a ceremonial formula, SBr. &c.) 

anv-ahdrn, ind. day after day, 

every day. 

anvd (for 2. anu-vd, q. v.), blowing 

after, TandyaBr. ; GopBr. 

^T^^T^ anv-a-Vi. kri, to give to any one 

to take with him, to give a portion to a daughter, 

Anv-a-kriti, is, f. shaping after, imitation, 

anv-d-Vkram , A. to ascend to¬ 

wards or to, TS. : P.‘to visit in succession, BhP. 

anv-a-ksayam, ind. (ksa for 

khyd), reciting successively, MaitrS. 

anv-d-Vkhyd, to enumerate, Laty. 

Anv-Skhyana, m aw, n. an explanation keeping 
close to the text, SBr.; a minute account or state¬ 
ment, Pat. 

anv-d-V yam, to follow, come 

after, VS.; SBr. &c.: Dcsid. -jigdnsati, to wish or 
intend to follow,.SBr. 

anv-d-V r. yd, to follow, RV. i, 

126, 3. 

anv-d-Vcaksh, to name after, 


anv-d-V cam, to follow in rinsing 

the mouth, AsvGr. 

anv-dcaya, as, m. (Vci), laying 

down a rule of secondary importance (after that 
which is pradhdna or primary) ; connecting of a 
secondary action with the main action (e.g. the con¬ 
junction ca is sometimes used anvdeaye ). — sish- 
ta, mfn. propounded as a rule or matter of secon¬ 
dary importance. 

Anv-acita, mfn. secondary, inferior. 

anv-d- Vcar, to follow or imitate 

in doing, BhP. 

_ ^ # A 

1 ?T? ; Tr 5 r anvdje ( Vaj?), only used in con¬ 
nection with V I .kri, e.g. anvdje kri, to support, 
aid, assist, Pan. i, 4, 73. 

anv-d-V tan, to extend, spread, 

RV. viii, 48, 13, See. ; to overspread, extend over, 


anv-d-Vi* da, A. to resume, SBr. 




'•« ** 7 Hf 37 [ anv-d- v'dts, to name or mention 

afresh, Pan. 

Anv-adishta, mfn. mentioned again, referring 
to a previous rule, Pan. vi, 2, J90. 

Anv-adesa, as, ni. mentioning after, a repeated 
mention, referring to what has been stated pre¬ 
viously, re-employment of the same word in a sub¬ 
sequent part of a sentence, the employment again of 
the same thing to perform a subsequent operation. 

Auv-adesaka, mfn. referring to a previous 
statement, TPrat, 

anv-a-w dha, to add in placing 
upon, place upon : A. & P. to add fuel (to the tire'), 
AitBr. &c.; to deliver over to a third person (in 

Anv-adhana, am, n. adding or putting fuel (on 
the three sacred tires) ; depositing. 

1. Anv-5,dhi, is, m. a bail or deposit given to 
any one for being delivered to a third person, Gaut. 

Anv-adheya or -Sdbeyaka, am, n. property 
presented after marriage to the wife by her husband’s 
family, Mn. See. 

Anv-&hita, mfn. deposited with a person to be 
delivered ultimately to the right owner. 

anv-a- v^I . d/tau,to run after, Kath. 

anv-a-\/dhi, to recollect, remem¬ 

ber, think of, AV.; TAr. 

2. Anv-5&bi, is, m. repentance, remorse, L, 

Anv-Sdbya, as, m. pi. a kind of divinity, SBr. 

^ ^ 1dl anv-a-\Jni, to lead to or along. 

anv-a-Vnu, Intens. - ndnaviti , to 
sound through, RV. x, 68, 12. 

dnv-dntrya , mfn. being in the 

entrails, AV. 

"^%V^anv- ^ dp, to attain, reach, AitBr.: 

Desid. anv-ipsati , to harmonize in opinion, agree, 

anv-a-\^bhnj, P. and A. to cause 

' • 

to take a share after or with another, SBr. See. 

Anv-a-bbakta, mfn. entitled to take a share 
after or with another. 

anv-a-x^bhu, to imitate, equal, 

TS. &c. 

^ anv-a- Jyat, Caus. -ydtayati, to 

dispose or add in regular sequence, bring into con¬ 
nection with (loc. or abl.), SBr. Sec. 

Anv-iUyatta, mfn. (with loc. or acc.) connected 
with, being in accordance with, being entitled to, 
TS. &c. 

Anv-ayStya, mfn. to be brought in connection 
with, to be added, to be supplied, AsvSr. 

anv-dyatana , mfn. latitudinal. 
anv-a-\/rabh, to catch or seize or 

\i «• 

touch from behind; to place one’s self behind or at the 
side of, keep at the side of, AV. &c.; Caus. - rambha - 
yati, to place behind another (with loc.), TS. 

Anv-Srabhya, mfn. to be touched from behind, 

Anv-Srambhh, as, m. touching from behind, 
TBr.; KatySr. 

Anv-Srambhana, am, n. id., KstySr. 
Anv-SrambbanlyS, t. an initiatory ceremony, 

anv-a- ruh, to follow or join by 

ascending; to ascend : Caus. - rohayati, to place 

Anv-S.rob&, as, m. pi., N. of certain Japas ut¬ 
tered at the Soma-libations, TS. 

Anv- 3 robana, am, n. {z widow’s) ascending the 
funeral pile after or with the body of a husband, 
(gana anupravacanddi, q.v.) 

Anv-Srohanlya, mfn. belonging to the Anv- 
Srohana, or rite of cremation, ibid. 

anv-a- s/labh, to lay hold of, 

grasp, handle, take in the hand or with the hand, 

RV. x, 130, 7, &c. 

Anv-alabhana or anv-Slambbana, am, n. 

a handle (?), MBh. iii, 17156. 

Caus. - locayari , to 

consider attentively. 

1 anv-d- v 2. vap, * to scatter in ad¬ 

dition,’ to add, Kaus. 

anv-d- \^vah, to convey to or in 

the proximity of, RV. x, 29, 2. 

anv-d- \/ vis, to enter, occupy, 
possess; to follow, act according to, ChUp. Sec. 

anv-a- y/vrit, to roll near or along, 

RV. v, 62, 2 ; to revolve or move after, follow', VS. 
&c.: Intens. -varivartti (impf. 3. pi. dnv dvarlvuh 
for °vrituh \ to drive or move after or alone, RV. 
x, 51, 6 ; TS. 

anv-d-\ si, to lie along, be ex¬ 

tended over, AV. 

anv-a-sriia, mfn. (v^sri), one 

who has gone along ; placed or situated along. 

anv-d as, to take a seat subse¬ 
quently ; to be seated at or near or round (with acc.j ; 
to live in the proximity of (with gen.), Heat.; to 
be engaged in (especially in a religious acO. 

Anv-asana, am, n. sitting down after (another); 
service; regret, affliction, L.; a place where work 
is done, manufactory, house of industry, L.; an 
unctuous or cooling enema, L. 

Anv-asina, mfn. sitting down after, seated 
alongside of. 

Anv-Ssyam&na, mfn. being accompanied by, 
attended by. 

anv-d-Vsthd, to go towards, to 

meet, attain, VS. Sec. 

W? 7 Tf?H anv-a-hita. See anv-d- y/dhd. 

anv-d- y/hri, to make up, supply, 

SBr. &c. 

Anv-a-barana, am, n. making up, supplying, 
Comm, on Laty. 

Anv-S-hata, as, m. id., Laty. 

Auv- 5 bary&, as, m. a gift, consisting of food 
prepared with rice, presented to the Ritvij priest at 
the Darsapurnam 5 sa ceremonies, TS. Sec. ; (am or 
akam n. the monthly Sr.iddha q. v.) held on the 
day of new moon (according to Mn. iii, 1 23 it should 
be of meat eaten after the presentation of a Pinda or 
ball of rice). — pacana, m. the southern sacrificial 
tire, used in the Anvftharya sacrifice, SBr. See. 

anv-d- v fire, to call to one’s side 

in order or after another, Kaus. 

anv-\/i , to go after or alongside, to 
follow ; to seek ; to be guided by ; to fall to one’s 
share, RV. iv, 4, 11 ; Ved. Inf. dnv-etave, to reach 
or join [BR.] f to imitate [Gmn.], RV. vii, 33, 8; 
dnv-etavai, to go along (with acc.), RV. i, 24, 8 ; 

vii, 44, 5 « 

Anv-aya. See p. 46, col. 7 . 

Anv-ita, mfn. gone along with; joined, attended, 
accompanied by, connected with, linked to ; having 
as an essential or inherent part, endowed with, pos¬ 
sessed of, possessing ; acquired ; reached by the mind, 
understood ; following ; connected as in grammar or 
construction. Anvitartha, mfn. having a clear 
meaning understood from the context, perspicuous. 
Anv-iti, is, ft following after, VS. 
Anv-Iyamana, mfn. being followed. 

d’idh or auv-^indh, to kindle, 


anv- v/3. ish, cl. 1. P. -icchati, to 

desire, seek, seek after, search, aim at, AV. &c.; 
cl. 4. P. - ishyati, id., R. &t\, Caus. - eshayati, id., 
Mricch. &c. 

Anv-i«bta or anv-isbyam&na, mfn. sought, 

Anv-esha, as, m. [Sak.] or anv-ashana, am, 

d, n. f. seeking for, searching, investigating. 

Anv-esbaka, mf(i&i)n. or anv-esbin or anv- 
eshtri [Pan. v, 2, 90, &e.}, mfn. searching, in¬ 

Anv-eshtavya or anv-esbya, mfn. to be 
searched, to be investigated. 

' V. / 

VST^t^ anv-dtksh, to follow with one’s 

looks, to keep looking or gazing, AV. See. ; to keep 
in view, SBr. 

Anv-Ikfcbana, am, n. or anv-Iksb. 5 , f. exa¬ 

mining, inquiry, Comm, on NySyad.; meditation, 

Anv-iksbitavya, mfn. to be kept in view or in 
mind, SBr. 

anv-ita anv-ita, q.v,, Balar.; Kir. 

anv-iparn, inch (fr. 2.ap ), along 

the water, along the river, MaitrS.; cf. P2n. vi, 3, 
98, Sch. 

anv-y/ri (cl. 3. P. - iyarti ), aor. A. -arta, 

to follow in rising, RV, v/52, 6 . 

anv-riedm , ind. verse after verse, 


anv-riju, mfn. moving straightfor- 

wards or in the right way (N. of Indra), MaitrS. 

anv->/ridh , cl. 6. P. -ridhdti, to 

carry out, accomplish, RV. vii; 87, 7. 

anv-e (a-\/i), cl. 2. P. -aiii, to coma 

after, to follow as an adherent or attendant, RV. i, 
1 61, 3, See. 

dnv-etave , See. See anv-s/i. 

^1. dp, n. (gen. apas), work (according 

to NBD.), RV. i, 151, 4. 

^2. dp (in Ved. used in sing, and plur., 

but in the classical language only in plur., dpas), f. 
water; air, the intermediate region, Naigh. ; the 
star 5 Virginia ; the Waters considered as divinities. 
Ifc. ap may become apa or ipa, it pa after i- and u- 
stems respectively. [Cf. Lat. aqua; Goth, ahva, 1 a 
river ;' Old Germ, aha, and off a at the end of com¬ 
pounds ; Lith. uppe, 1 a river;’ perhaps Lat. amnis, 
‘a river,’ for apnis ; cf. also a^pos.] Apa-vat, 
mfn. watery, AV. xviii, 4, 24. Apab-samvarta, 
m. destruction (of the world) by water, Buddh. 
Apazn-vatsa, m. ‘calf of the waters,’ N. of a star. 
Apaxn-napat (RV.; VS.] or apSm-naptri [P 5 n. 
iv, 2, 27] or apim-g-arbha [VS.] or apo-naptri 
[Pan. iv, 2, 27], m. ‘grandson of the waters.’ N. 
of Agni or tire as sprung from water. Apain- 
naptriya [Pan. iv, 2 , 27] or apam-naptrlya 
[Kath.] or apo-aaptriya [PBr.jorapo-naptriya 

[MaitrS. ; TS. ; AitBr. Sec.], mfn. relating to Agni. 
Apam-natba, m. the ocean, L. Apam-nidbl, 
m. the ocean, L.; N. of a SSman. Ap5m-pati or 
ap-pati [Mn.], m. the ocean; N. of Varuna. 
Ap5m-pitta or ap-pitta, n. fire ; a plant; L. 
Ap-kritsna, n. deep njeditation performed by 
means of water, Buddh. Ap-cara, m. an aquatic 
animal, Mn. vii, 72. Ap-saras, see s.v. 

Apty& (3^, mfn. watery, RV. i, 124, 5. 

Apya (2,3), mdapyd; once dpi, RV. vi, 67,9)n. 
being in water, coming from water, connected with 
water, RV. (cf. 3 .apya). 

Apsava, apsavyd., ape£. See s. v. 

Apsu, for words beginning thus, see s. v. apsu. 
Ab-, for words beginningthus,see s.v. ab-indhana, 
ab-ja, &c. 

dp a, ind. (as a prefix to nouns and 
verbs, expresses) away, off, back (opposed to tipa, 
dnu, sam,prd)\ down (opposed to ted), — taram, 
ind. farther off, MaitrS. 

When prefixed to nouns, it may sometimes = the 
neg. particle a, e. g. apa-bhi, fearless; or may ex¬ 
press deterioration, inferiority, &c. (cf. apa-pdtha ). 

(As a separable particle or adverb in Ved., with 
abl.) away from, on the outside of, without, with the 
exception of [cf. Gk. ebrd ; Lat. ab; Goth, af; 
Eng. of]. 

apa-karttna, mfn. cruel. 
apa-kalahka, as, m. a deep stain 

or mark of disgrace, L. 

apa-kalmaska, mf{«)n. stainless, 


apa-^kash, to scrape off, AV. 
apa-kashaya, mfn sinless, 


tKpjcRrq apa-kdma, as, m. aversion, abhor¬ 
rence, RV. vi, 75, 2 ; AV.; abominableness, AV.; 
(dm), ind. against one’s liking, unwillingly, AV. 



apa-kirti, is, f, infamy, disgrace. 

^PTSjnjJ apa-kukshi, is, m. a bad or ill- 

sr.-pei belly ? , Pin. vi, 2, 187; (also used as a 
/> h u -z r lhi and Avyayi-bhdva .) 



opa-kurtja , as, m., N. of a younger 
of the serpent-king Sesha, Hariv. 

opa-\ / 1. kri , to carry away, remove, 
drag away ; ( with gen. or acc.) to hurt, wrong, in¬ 
jure : Caus. -kdrayati, to hurt, wrong. 

Apa-karana, am, n. acting improperly; doing 
wrong, L.; ill-treating, offending, injuring, L. 

Apa-kartri, mfti. injurious, offensive. 

Apa-karman, a, n. discharge (of a debt), Mn. 
via, 4 ; evil doing, L.; violence, L.; any impure or 
degrading act, L. 

Apa-kSra, as, m. wrong, offence, injury, hurt; 
despise, disdain. — gir [L.], f. or -sabda [Pan. viii, 
1.8, Sch.], m. an offending or menacing speech. 
— ta, f. wrong, offence. Apakararthin, mfn. 
malicious, malevolent. 


Apa-karaka or apa-karin, mfn. acting wrong, 

doing ill to (with gen.); offending, injuring. 

Apa-krita, mfn. done wrongly or maliciously, 
offensively or wickedly committed ; practised as a 
degrading or impure act (e.g. menial work, funeral 
rites, Sec.) ; {am), n. injury, offence. 

Apa-kriti, is, f. oppression, wrong, injury. 

Apa-kritya, am, n. damage, hurt, Paficat. 

Apa-kriya, f. a wrong or improper act; delivery, 
clearing off (debts), Yajfi. iii, 234; offence. 

apa- / 2. krit, cl. 6. P. - krintati, to 

cut off, Kaus. 

apa-Vkrish, cl. I. P. -karshati, to 

draw off or aside, drag down, carry away, take away, 
remove ; to omit, diminish ; to put away; to antici¬ 
pate a word &c. which occurs later (in a sentence); 
to bend (a bow); to detract, debase, dishonour: 
Caus. - karshayati, to remove, diminish, detract. 

Apa-k&rsha, as, m. drawing or dragging off or 
down, detraction, diminution, decay; lowering, de¬ 
pression ; decline, inferiority, infamy ; anticipation, 
Nyayari .; (in poetry) anticipation of a word occur¬ 
ring later. — sama, as, a, in. f. a sophism in the 
Ny.iya (e.g. ‘sound has not the quality of shape as 
a jar has, therefore sound and a jar have no qualities 
in common ’). 

Apa-karshaka, mf(f£ff)n. drawing down, de¬ 
tracting (with gen.), Sah. 

Apa-karshana, mfn. taking away, forcing away, 
removing, diminishing; {am), n. taking away, de¬ 
priving of; drawing down; abolishing, denying; 
anticipation, Nyayarn. 

Apa-krishta, mfn. drawn away, taken away, 
removed, lost; dragged down, brought down, de¬ 
pressed ; low, vile, inferior; (ax’), m. a crow, L. 
— cetana, mfn. mentally debased. — j£ti, mfn. of 
a low tribe. — 1£, f. or -tva, n. inferiority, vileness. 

apa-\/i.kri, A. apa-s-kirate (Pan. 

yi, I, 142) to scrape with the feet, Uttarar.; (cf. 
ava-y/s-kri) \ P. apa-kirati, to spout out, spurt, 
scatter, Pan. i, 3, 21, Comm.; to throw down, L. 

a-pakti, is, f. (y/pac), immaturity; 


A-pakva, mf(<?)n. unripe, immature; undigested. 
— tfi, f. immaturity; incompleteness. — buddhi, 
mfn. of immature understanding. Apakvftsln, 
mfn. eating raw, uncooked food. 

apa-Vkram, to go away, retreat, 

retire from, RV. x, 164, I, &c.; to glide away; to 
measure off by steps, Kaus.: Caus. - kramayati, to 
cause to run away, PBr.: Desid. -cikramishati, 
to intend to run away or escape (with abl.), SBr. 

Apa-krama, as, m. going away, SBr. &c.; 
flight, retreat, L.; (mfn.), not being in the regular 
order (a fault in poetry). 

Apa-kramana, am, n. or apa-kr&ma, as, m. 
passing off or away, retiring. 

Apa-kramin, mfn. going away, retiring. 
Apa-kr&nta, mtn. gone away; {am), n. ( = ait- 
tam) that which is past, Balar. 

A'pa-krftnti, is, f .= apn-krdmana, MaitrS. 
Apa-kr^muka, mfn. = apa-kramin, TS.; PBr. 

apa->/krt, to buy, AV.; SBr. (see 


^*1 apa-\/lcrus, to revile. 
Apa-krosa, as, m. reviling, abusing, L. 

a-pakshd, mfn. without wings, AV. 
&c.; without followers or partisans, MBh.; not on 
the same side or party; adverse, opposed to. —ta, 
f. opposition, hostility. — pata, m. impartiality. 
— puccha, mfn. without wings and tail, SBr. Sec. 

apa- / kshi, Pass, -kshtyate, to 

decline, wane (as the moon), TS.; SBr. 
Apa-kshaya, as, m. decline, decay, wane, VP. 
Apa-kshita, mfn. waned, BhP. 

Apa-kshlna, mfn. declined, decayed, L. 

apa-y/kship, to throw away or 

down, take away, remove. 

Apa-kshipta, mfn. thrown down or away. 
Apa-kshepana, am, n. throwing down, Sec. 

apa-/gam, to go away, depart; 

to give way, vanish. 

Apa-ga, mf(ff)n. ■going away, turning away from 
(abl.), AV. i, 34, 5 ; (cf. dn-apaga ); {a), i.^dpa- 
gd, L. 

Apa-gata, mfn. gone, departed, remote, gone 
oft ; dead, diseased. — vy&dhl, mfn. one who has 

recovered from a disease. 

Apa-gama, as, m. going away; giving way; 
departure, death. 

Apa-gamana, am, n. id. 

apa-gara, as, m. (y/i. grt), reviler 
(special function of a priest at a sacrifice), PBr.; 
Laty. &c.; (cf. abhigard.) 

apa-garjita , mfn. thunderless 

(as a cloud), Kathas. 

apa-galbhd, mfn. wanting in bold¬ 

ness, embarrassed, perplexed, VS.; TS. 

apa- /i . gd, to go away, vanish, 

retire (with abl.), VS. See. 

apa-\Zgur, to reject, disapprove, 

threaten, RV. v, 32, 6, &c.; to inveigh against any 
one : Intens. part, apa-jdrgurdna (see s. v. apa- 
V2 .gri). 

Apa-g£ram or apa-goraxn, ind. disapproving, 
threatening (?), Pan. vi, I, 53. 

Apa-gorana, am, n. threatening, Comm, on TS. 

apa-Vguh (Subj. 2. sg. P. -gvhas, 

A. -guhathds; impf. 3. pi. dp&guhan; aor. - aghu - 
kshat) to conceal, hide, RV.; AV. 

Apa-gudlxa, mfn. hidden, concealed, RV. 
Apa-gruliamSna, mfn. hiding, AV. xix, 56, 2 ; 
{apaguh 0 ) RV. vii, 104, 17. 

Apa-goha, as,m. hiding place, secret, RV. ii, 15,7. 

v2.gri, Intens. part, -jargurana^ 

mfn. (Gmn. & NBD.) devouring, RV. v, 29, 4. 

apa-gopura, mfn. without gates 

(as a town). 

’■srqn apa-s/gai , to break offsinging, cease 

to sing, GopBr.; Vait. 

WHZTf apa-/grab, to take away, disjoin, 

tear off. 

TRVVZ apa-s/ghat, Caus. - ghatayati, to 

shut up. 

WnPT i.apa-gkana, as, m. ( y/han ), (Pan. 

hi, 3,81) a limb or member (as a hand or foot), Naish. 

Apa-gh^ta, as, m. striking off, warding off, 
SBr.; (cf. Pan. iii, 3, 81, Sch.) 

Apa-gh&taka, mf(ika)n. (ifc.) warding off. 

Apa-ghStin, mfn. id. See apa-^han. 

2 .apa-ghana, mfn. cloudless. 

^ny^r a-paca , mfn. not able to cook, a bad 

cook, Pan. vi, 2, 157 seq., Sch. 

apa - \/ car, to depart; to act 


Apa-carita, mfn. gone away, departed, dead; 
{am), 11. fault, offence, Sak. 

Apa-cai*a, as, m. want, absence; defect; fault, 
improper conduct, offence; unwholesome or im¬ 
proper regimen. 

Apa-carin, mfn. departing from, disbelieving 
in, infidel, Mn.; doing wrong, wicked. 

apa-cuy, to fear, TBr. ; to respect, 
honour, SBr. ; TBr. 

Apa-cayita, mfn. honoured, respected. Pan. vii, 
2, 30, Sch. 

Apa-cayin, mfn. not rendering due respect, 
showing want of respect, MBh.; vriddhdpacdyi- 
tva, n. the not rendering due respect to old men, 
MBh. xiii, 6705. 

1 . apa -/2 . ci (Imper. 2. sg. - cikihi ) 
to pay attention to, to respect, AV. i, 10, 4. 

1. Apa-cita, mfn. (Pan. vii, 2, 30) honoured, 
respected, SBr. &c.; respectfully invited, BhP,; {am), 
n. honouring, esteeming. 

X.Apa-citi, is, f. honouring, reverence, Sis. 
— mat [dpaciti -), mfn. honoured, TS.; SBr.; 

2. apa-\'i. ci, -cinoti, to gather, 

collect: Pass, -ciyate, to be injured in health or 
prosperity; to grow less; to wane; (with abl.) to 
lose anything, MBh. 

Apa-caya, as, m. diminution, decay, decrease, 
decline; N. of several planetary mansions. 

2. Apa-cita, mfn. diminished, expended, wasted ; 
emaciated, thin, Sak. &c. 

2. Apa-citi, is, f. loss, L.; expense, L.; N. of a 
daughter of Marid,VP.; (for 3. dpa-citi ,see below.) 

Apa-ci, f. a disease consisting in an enlargement 
of the glands of the neck, Susr. 

Apa-cetri, td, m. a spendthrift, L. 

apa-eikirshd, f. {y/l. kri 

Desid.), desire of hurting any one. 

1 . apa-\^cit, Caus. A. (Subj. -cc- 

tdydtai) to abandon, turn off from (abl.), VS. ii, 17: 
Desid. -cikitsati, to wish to leave or to abandon any 
one (abl.), AV. xiii, 2, 15. 

2. Apa-cit, t, f. a noxious flying insect, AV. 
Apa-cetas, mfn. not favourable to (with abl.), 

’snif^frr 3. apa-citi, is, f. (—anoTicns, 
V 3. ci), compensation, either recompense [TS. &c.] 
or retaliation, revenge, punishing, RV. iv, 28, 4, &c. 

apa-cchad (Vchad), Caus. - ccha- 

dayati, to take off a cover, ApSr. 

Apa-cchattra, mfn. not having a parasol, 

^nr^ 3 Tni apa-cchd’ya, mfn. shadowless, 

having no shadow (as a deity or celestial being) ; 
having a bad or unlucky shadow ; {a), f. an unlucky 
shadow, a phantom, apparition. 

'frufar^i . apa-cchid [Vchid ),to cut off or 

away, SBr. See. 

2. Apa-cchid,/, f.a cutting, shred, chip, SBr.; 

Apa-ccheda, as, am, m. n. cuttting off or away; 

Apa-cchedaxxa, am, n. id. 

apa- v / cyu{ aor. A. 2. sg. - cyoshthah ) 

to fall off, go off, desert, RV. x, 173, 2 : Caus. (aor. 
-cucyavat) to expel, RV. ii, 4!, 10. 

Apa-cyava, as, m. pushing away, RV. i, 28, 3. 

apa-jata, as, m. a bad son who 

has turned out ill, Pahcat. 

apa-y/ji, to ward off, keep off op 

out, SBr.; Kath.; PBr. 

Apa-jaya, as, m. defeat, discomfiture, L. 
Apa-jayya, mfn. See an-apajayydm. 

apa -jighansu, mfn. (y/han 
Desid.), desirous of keeping off, wishing to avert, 

^^f^^^apa-ji htrsku, mfn. (y/hri Desid.), 

wishing to carry off or take away, Rajat. 

^refsn apa-/jna, -janite, to dissemble, 

conceal, Pan. i, 3, 44. 

Apa-jnana, am, n. denying, concealing, L. 

apa-jya, mfn. without a bowstring, 


rT a-panci-krita, am, n. (inVedanta 

phil.) ‘not compounded of the five gross elements,’ 
the five subtle elements. 


*PT?P?rT a-pafantara. 


r^TT^tTT a-p at datura, mfn/not separated 
i curtain,’ adjoining (v.l. a-paddntara , q.v.), L. 

nrft apati, f. a screen or wall of doth 
jecially surrounding a tent), L, — ksbepa, m. 
.sing aside the curtain ( ena), ind. with a toss of 
curtain, precipitate entrance on the stage (indi- 
ing huiry and agitation); (cf. patlkshepa.) 

a-patu , mfn. not clever, awkward, 

;outh ; ineloquent; sick, diseased, L. — t5, f. or 
ra, n. awkwardness. 

5 HT£ a-patha , as, m. unable to read, Pan. 
2, 157 seq., Sch. 

a-pandita, mfn. unlearned, il- 


a-panya , mfn. unfit for sale ; (am), 

an unsaleable article, Gaut, 

pi. -takshnuvanti & 
ipf. apdtakshan ) to chip off, AV. x, 7, 20; SBr. 

apa-tantra, as, m. spasmodic con- 
iction (of the body cr stomach), emprosthotonos, 

Apa-tan tr aba, as, m. id., Susr. 

Apa-tanaka, as, in. id., Susr. 

Apa-tEnakin, mfn. affected with spasmodic con- 
action, Susr. 

a-pati , is, m. not a husband or mas- 

:r, AV.viii, 6,16; (is), f. ‘without a husband or master,’ 
.ther an unmarried person or a widow. — ghnx 
i-pati-), f. not killing a husband, RV. x, 85, 44 ; 
(V. «*t£, f. state of being without a husband. 

- pntrS, f. without a husband and children. — vra- 
5, f. an unfaithful or unchaste wife. 

A-patik5, - a-pati, f., Nir. 

apa-tirtha , as, am, m. n. a bad or 

mproper Tirtha, q.v. 

NSHUJoS dpa-tula, mf(a)n. without a tuft, 
vithout a panicle, TS. 

apa-\/tfip, Caus, - tarpayati , to 
itarve, cause to fast, Car.; Susr. 

Apa-tarpana, am, n. fasting (in sickness), Su£r. 

a-pattra, mfn. leafless ; (a), f., N. 
)f a plant. 

a-patnika, mfn. not having a wife, 
XitBr.; KlttySr.; where the wife is not present, 
\ Sty Sr. 

apatya, am, n. (fr. dpa), offspring, 
:hild, descendant; a patronymical affix, Sah. — k&- 
na, mfn. desirous of offspring. — Jiva, m., N. of a 
ilant, —IS, f. state of childhood, Mn. iii, 16. —da, 
nfn. giving offspring ; ( d ), f,, N. of various plants, 
-patba, m. ‘path of offspring,’ the vulva, Susr. 

- pratyaya, m. a patronymical affix, Sah. — vat 
apatya-), mfn. possessed of offspring, AV. xii, 4, 1. 

- vikrayin, m. ‘seller of his offspring,’a father who 
eceives a gratuity from his son-in-law. — satm, rn. 
having his descendants for enemies,’ a crab (said to 
Perish in producing young), — sac, m(acc. sg. - sa- 

accompanied with offspring, RV. —Apa- 
tyartba-sab&a, m. a patronymic. 

^ 'J trap, to be ashamed or bash- 

iil, turn away the face. 

Apa-trapana, am, n. or -traps, f. bashfulness; 

Apa-trap is bnn, mfn. bashful, Pan. iii, 2, 136. 

apa-extras (impf. 3. pi. - atcasan ) 
:o flee from in terror, RV. x, 95, 8, MBh. 

Apa-trasta, mfn. (ifc. or with abl.)afraid of, flee- 
,ng or retiring from in terror, Pan. ii, 1, 38. 

d-patha, am, n. not a way, absence 
:f a road, pathless state, AV. &c.; wrong way, de¬ 
viation ; heresy, heterodoxy, L.; (mf(djn.), path- 
less, roadless, Pan, ii, 4, 30, Sch.; (a), f., N. of 
various plants. — g&min, mfn. going by a wrong 
road, pursuing bad practices, heretical. — prapaxma, 
mfn. out of place, in the wrong place, misapplied. 
A-patbin,°«Mdj, m. absence of road, Pan. v, 4,72. 
A-patbya, mfn. unfit; unsuitable ; inconsistent; 
.71 med,) unwholesome as food or drink in particu¬ 
lar complaints. — nimitta, mfn. caused by unfit food 
or drink. «- bbtaj, mfn. eating what is forbidden. 

a-pdd or u-pad [ordy SBr. xiv], mfn. 

nom. m. a-pdd , f. a-pdd [RV. i, 152, 3 & vi, 59, 6] 
or a-pddi [RV.x, 22, 14!, footless.RV.; AV.; SBr. 

A-pada, am, n. no place, no abode, AV.; the 
wrong place or time, Kathas. &c.; (mfn.), footless, 
Paficat. — rubs, or -robiiu, f. the parasitical plant 
Epidendron Tesselloides. — stba, mfn. not being in 
its place; out of office. A-padantara, mfn. ‘ not se¬ 
parated by a foot,’ adjoining, contiguous (v.l. a-pa- 
tdntara, q.v.), L.; (am), ind. without delay, imme¬ 
diately, MBh. 

a-daksh in am, ind. away from 
the right, to the left side, Kilty Sr. 

apa-dama, mfn. without self-re¬ 
straint ; of Wavering fortune. 

apa-dava, mfn. free from forest-fire. 

Apa-dav&pad, mfn. free from the calamity of fire. 

apa-dasa, mfn. (fr. dasan), (any 
number) off or beyond ten, L.j (fr. dasa), without 
a fringe (as a garment), MBh. 

apa-\/das (3. pi. - dasyanti ) to fail, 

i. e. become dry, RV. i, 135, 8. 

apa-vdah , to burn up, to burn 

out so as to drive out, RV. vii, 1, 7, See. 

apa-ddna, am, n. (s'dai}), a great 
or noble work, R. ii, 65, 4; Ssk. (v. 1 .); (in Pali 
for ava-ddna , q.v.) a legend treating of former and 
future births of men and exhibiting the consequences 
of their good and evil actions. 

a-padartha, as, m. nonentity. 

^mf^\apa- \/dis( ind. p. - disya) to assign, 

KatySr.; to point out, indicate ; to betray, pretend, 
hold out as a pretext or disguise, Ragh. &c. 

Apa-disam, ind. in an intermediate region (of 
the compass), half a point, L. 

Apa-disbta, mfn. assigned as a reason or pretext. 

Apa-desa, as, m. assigning, pointing out, 
KatySr.; pretence, feint, pretext, disguise, contriv¬ 
ance ; the second step in a syllogism (i. e. statement 
of the reason); a butt or mark, L.; place, quarter, L. 

Apa-desin, mfn. assuming the appearance or 
semblance of; pretending, feigning, Das, 

Apa-desya, mfn. to be indicated, to be stated, 
Mn. viii, 54 ; Das. 

apa-dushpad, * not a failing step,’ 

a firm or safe step, RV. x, 99, 3. 

apa-y/dri , Intens. p. apa-dardrat , 

mfn. tearing open, RV. vi, 1 7, 5. 

apa-devata, f. an evil demon. 

apa-dosha , mfn. faultless. 

apa-dravya, am, n. a bad thing. 

apa-\ddra (Imper. 3. pi. - drdntu , 2. 
sg. -drahi) to run away, RV. x, 85, 32 ; AV. 

apa-V2. dru, id., SBr. See. 

,S 5 ?'^TT 1 apa-dvara, am, n. a side-entrance 

(not the regular door), Susr. 

apa- \/dham (3. pi. -dharnauti, impf. 

dpddhamat, 2. sg. -adhamas) to blow a wav or off, 

RV. ' i 

1 .apa-\/dha (Imper. -dudhdlv : aor 
Pass. - dhayi ) to take off, place aside, RV :v, 28, 2; j ^tTrj apa-y^ 3. ?ru, to put aside, SaukhGr. 

vi, 20 5 & x, 164, 3 . j upa- x^iiud, to remove. H\. &c. 

2. Apa-dba, f. hiding, shutting up, R\ . n, 12, 3. i ^ r x . 

apa- vdhdv, to run away, AV.; j av * a> ; expiation, Mn. Sc Ysjfi. 

SBr.; to depart (from a previous statement), pre- { Apa-nuda. mtn. fire. e. g. sokdpanuda, q.v.) 
varicate, Mn. viii, 54. 

'*'*i*K apa-dhuram, away from the yoke, 

Apa-dbySna, am, n. envy, jealousy, MBh. &e.; 
meditation upon things which are not to be thought 
of, Jain. 

apa- s^dhvarjs, -dhvansati, to scold, 
revile, [Comm, on] MBh.i, 5396 (‘to chive or turn 
away,’ NBD.) ; to fall away, be degraded (NBD,)» 
Hariv. 720. 

Apa-d^vansa, as, m. concealment, A V.; * falling 
away, degradation,’ in comp, with -ja, mfn. * born 
from it,’ a child ot a mixed or impure caste ;whose 
father belongs to a lower [M11. x, 41, 46] or higher 
[MBh. xiii, 2617] caste than its mother’s). 

Apa-dbvanain, mfn. causing to fall, destroying, 

Apa-dbvasta, mfn. degraded; reviled; aban¬ 
doned, destroyed; {as), m. a vile wrcuh lost to ail 
sense of right, L. 

apa - dhrdnta, mfn. (ddhvan), 
sounding wrong, ChUp. 

apa- \'u<nn. (with abl. jbend away 
from, give way to [NBD.J, to bow down before 
[Gmn.], RV. vi, 1 7, 9. 

Apa-nata, mfn, bent outwards, bulging out, 
SBr.; KaushBr. 

Apa-nSma, as, rn. curve, flexion, Suib. 

\ // 2. nas,' to disappear/ Imper* 
•nasya, be off, KaushBr. 

apa-nasa, mfn. without a nose, L. 

•*>i4 ^apa-v'nah ,tobindback, A V.j (ind. 
p. -nahyd) to loosen, MBh. iii, 13309. 

apa-ndbhi, mfn.‘without a navel/ 
without a focal centre (as the Vedr, TS. 

apa-vuman, a, n. a bad name, 
Pan. vi, 2, 187 ; (mfn.', having a bad name, ib. 

I . apa-nidra, mfn. sleejiless. 

.apa-ni-dra, mfn. (vV/rd), open¬ 
ing (as a flown}, Sis. ; Kir 

Apa-ni-drat, mfn. id., Naish. 

^BT^fHVT apa-ni-vdha, to place aside, hide, 
conceal, TBr. Sec.; to take off, AV. 

apa-nirvana, mfn. not yet ex¬ 
tinct, Sak. 

apa-ni- ^li, A. (Imper. 3. pi. - la - 

yantdm) to hide one’s self, disappear, RV. x, 84, 7 ; 

upa-ni- x 'hnu, to deny, conceal, 

ChUp. Sec. 

apa-s^nt, to lead away or off; to 
rob, steal, take or drag away; to remove, frighten 
away ; to put off or away (as garments, ornaments, 
or fetters) ; to extract, take from ; to deny, Comm, 
on Mn. viii, 53. 59 ; to except, exclude from a rule, 
Comm, on RPrat.: Desid -n inis kali, to wish to 
remove, Comm, on Mn. i, 27. 

Apa-naya, as, m. leading away, taking away ; 
bad policy, bad or wicked conduct. 

Apa-nayana, am, n. taking away, withdrawing; 
destroying, healing; acquittance of a debt. 

Apa-nita, mfn. led away from ; taken away, re¬ 
moved ; paid, discharged ; contradictory ; badly exe¬ 
cuted, spoiled ; (am), n. imprudent or bad behaviour. 

Apa-niti. is, t. taking away from (abb), Ny&yam. 

Apa-netri, td, rn. a remover, taking away. 

| removing, driving a wav. 


Apa-nunutsu, mfn. desirous of removing, ex¬ 
piating (with acc.), Mil. xi, IO!. 

Apa-noda, as, m . — apa-nutti. 

</dhu (l. Sg.- dhu norn i) to shake j Apa-nodana, mfn. removing, driving away, 

Mn.; ( am ), n. removing, driving away, Kaub ; Mn. 

off, SShkhGr. 

Apa-dbuma, mfn. free from smoke, Ragh. 

apa - y/dhrish , -dhris noti, to over¬ 
come, subdue, KaushBr.; (cf. an- apadhr ishy a .) 

apa-\ / dhyai, to have a bad opinion 
of, curse mentally, MBh. &c. 

Apa-nodya, mfn. to be removed, 

VWJ* d-panna-griha , mfn. whose house 

has not fallen in, VS. vi, 24. 

A-panna-da, mfn. =- d-fanna-dat, q.v., Gaut. 
A-panna-dat, mi(atf)n, whose teeth have not 
fallen out, TS.; TBr. 



op a-pad. 

^nTtjBTC aparas-para . 

apa-\ pad, to escape, run away 

a pa-pare ( Vi), (perf. I. sg. dpa pa¬ 
rt::, as mi; Apa as mi may also be taken by itself as 
fr. i. j/<ir; to go off, RV, x, 83, 5. 

apa-pary-d->/vrit , to turn (the 
face ; a wav from, Gobh. 

^n?tn 3 apa-patha, as, m, a mistake in 

reading, Pin, iv, 4, 64, Sch.; a wrong reading (in a 
text). VPrat. 

apa-patra, mfn.‘not allowed to use 
vessels (for food),’ people of low caste, Mn.x, 51; Ap, 

Apa-p&trita, mfn. id. 

apa-pddatra, mfn. having no 
protection for the feet, shoeless, Raj at. 

apa-pdna, am, n. a bad or im¬ 
proper drink. 

apa-pitva, am, n. (probably for 
-pit tv a fr. V 2. pat; cf. abhi-pitvd , a-pitvd,pra- 
pitvd; but cf also api-tvd, s. v. a^f), turning away, 
separation, RV. iii, 53, 24. 

- papivas , m (ge n. a-pup ush as) fn. 

(perf. p.), who has not drunk, AV. vi, 139, 4. 

apa-puta , aw, in. du. badly formed 

buttocks, Pan. vi, 2, 187; (mfn.), having badly 
formed buttocks, ib. 

*nr*j apa-\ /1. pri (aor. Subj. 2. sg.^ars/zi) 

to drive or scare away from (abb), RV. i, 129, 5. 

apa-pra-s /\. go. (aor. - prdgat ) to 
go away from, yield to, RV. i, 113, 16. 

apa-prajata, f. a female that 

has had a miscarriage, Susr. 

apa-pradana, am, n. a bribe. 

apa- vpru, dpa-pravate , leap 
or jump down, SBr. See. 

apa-Vpruth (Imper. 2. sg. -protka ; 
p. * prdthat) to blow off, RV. vi, 47, 30 & ix, 98,11. 

^T^Tir apa-prd ( Vi ), (3 .pi. -pra-ydnti or - pra- 
yanti; Opt. -preydt) to go away, withdraw, RV. x, 
II7, 4; SBr. 

’snurffarr apa-proshita, am, n. (y/fcvas), 

the having departed, a wrong departure or evil caused 
thereby, (neg. dn-) SBr. 

apa-Vplu, to spring down, MBh.: 
Caus. - plavayati , to wash off, TS. See. 

r « 

dpa-barhis, mfn. not having the 
portion constituting the Barhis, SBr.; KatySr. 

apa-Vbadh , A. to drive away, re¬ 
pel, remove, RV. Sec.: Caus. P. id., AV. xii, 1, 49: 
Desid. A.-bibhatsate , to abhor from (abb), AitBr. 

apa-bahuka, as, m. a bad arm, 

stiffness in the arm, L. 

apa-Vbru (impf. - bravat ) to speak 
some mysterious or evil words upon, AV. vi, 57, 1. 

apa-vbhaj , P. (Subj. 1. pi. - bha- 

jama) to cede or transfer a share to, RV. x, 108, 9 ; 
SBr.; to satisfy the claims of(acc.), KatySr .; to divide 
into parts, PBr.; SankhSr. 

apa-bhaya , mf(d)n. fearless, un¬ 

Apa-bhi, mfn. id. 

apa-bharani, f. pi. (V'bhri), the 
last lunar mansion, TS.; TBr. 

Apa-bbartavai, Inf. to take away, RV. x, T4, 2. 
Apa-bhartri, mfn. taking away, RV. ii, 33, 7; 

apa-\/bhdsh, to revile, Kum. v, 83. 

Apa-bhSshaiia, am, n. abuse, bad words, L. 

apa-Vbhid (Imper. 2. sg. -bhindhi 
tor - bhinddhi) to drive away, RV, viii, 45, 40. 

^^^apa-Vbhu (Imper. -bhavatuk -bhutu 
[RV. i, 131, 7]; aor. Subj. 2. sg. -bhus, 2. pi. -bhu- 
tand) to be absent, be deficient, RV.; AV.; TS. 

is, 1. defect, damage, AV. v, 8, 5. 

apa-bhrayjsd (or apa-bhraysa), as, 

m. falling down, a fall, TS. &c.; a corrupted form 
of a word, corruption ; ungrammatical language ; 
the most corrupt of the Prakrit dialects. 

Apa-bhrashta, mfn. corrupted (as a Prakrit 
dialect), Kathas. 

apama , mfn. (fr. a'pa ), the most dis¬ 
tant, the last, R V. x, 39, 3 ; AV. x, 4, 1; (ar), m. (in 
astron.) the declination of a planet. — kshetra, see 
kranti-kshetra. — jya, f. the sine of the declina¬ 
tion. — mandala (or apa-matidala) or -vritta, 

n. the ecliptic. 

WP*J apa-manyu, mfn. free from grief. 

apa-marda, as, m. (vmrid), what 

is swept away, dirt. 

_C . 

apa-marsa , as, m. ( Vmris) , touch¬ 
ing, grazing, S 5 k. (v. 1 . for abhi-marsa). 

apa- v^.ma (ind. p. -maya ; cf. Pan. 
vi, 4, 69) to measure off, measure, AV. xix, 57, 6. 

^ apa-mana, as, m. (ol* am, n.), 
(V’man), disrespect, contempt, disgrace. 
Apa-manita, mfn. dishonoured, disgraced, 

SaiikhGr. &c. 


Apa-manln, mfn. dishonouring, despising. 
Apa-m&nya, mfn. disreputable, dishonourable. 

'Hymn i . apa-marga, as, in. a by-way, 


apa-mttya. See apa-Vme. 

apa-mukha, mfn. having the face 
averted, Pin. vi, 2, 186 ; having an ill-formed face 
or mouth, ib.; (am), ind. except the face, &c., ib. 


apa-murdhan, mfn. headless. 

wpr apa-x/mrij, cl. 2. P. A. - rndrshti 

(1. pi. -mrijmahc; Imper. 2. du. -mrijetham) to 
wipe off, remove, AV.; SBr. Sec. 

2. Apa-marga, as, m. wiping off, cleansing, Sis. 

Apa-marjana, am, n. cleansing;' a cleansing 
remedy, detergent, Susr. ; (mfn.) wiping off, mov¬ 
ing away, destroying, BhP. 

Apa-mrishta, mfn. wiped off, cleansed, VS. Sec. 

apa-mrityu, us, m. sudden or ac¬ 
cidental death ; a great danger or illness (from which 
a person recovers). 

’arpjfVn apa-mrishita , unintelligible (as a 
speech), Pan. i, 2, 20, Sch. 

apa- Vme, cl. r. A. -mayate (ind. p. 
- rnitya or -mdya.) to be in debt to, owe, Pan. iii, 4, 
19, Sch. 

Apa-mitya, am, n. debt, AV. vi, 117,1; AsvSr. 

SHm* '■H’Qlapa-V'myaksh (Imper. 2. sg. - my a - 
ksha) to keep off from (abl.), RV. ii, 28, 6. 

Wftg^apa-mlukta, mfn. (\/ rnluc), retired, 
hidden, RV. x, 52, 4. 

^ M M^apa-Vyaj (1. pi. -yajdmasi) to drive 

off by means of a sacrifice, Kaus. 

^P^J^apa-yasas, as, n. disgrace, infamy. 

— kara, mfn. occasioning infamy, disgraceful. 

apa-Vya, to go away, depart, re¬ 
tire from (abl.).; to fall off: Caus. -ydpayati, to carry 
away by violence, BhP. 

Apa-ySta, mfn. gone away, having retired. 
Apa-y§.tavya, am, n. impers. to be gone away, 
Kathis. j 

Apa-y&na, am, n. retreat, flight; (in astron.) 
declination. ; 

apa-Vi.yu, -yuyoti (Imper. 2. sg. ! 
-yuyodhl, 2. pi. -yuyotana) to repel, disjoin, RV. 

^1 *13 *{apa-Vyvj, A.-yunkte, to loose one’s 

self or be loosened from (abl.), SBr. 

1. a-para , mfn. having nothing be¬ 
yond or after, having no rival or superior, wm v&t, 
mfn. having nothing following, SBr. — 1. -s-para, 
mfn. ‘not reciprocal, not one (by) the other/ only 
in comp, with -j ambhuta, mfn. not produced one 
by the other, Bhag. A-par&dhina, mfn. not do- 
pendent on another, SBr. A-parardhya, mfn. 
without a maximum, unlimited in number, AivSr. ' 

2 .apara, mf(d)n. (fr. apa), posterior, 

later, latter (opposed to purva; often in comp.); 
following; western; inferior, lower (opposed topdra); 
other, another (opposed to svd ); different (with 
abl.) ; being in the west of; distant, opposite. Some¬ 
times apara is used as a conjunction to connect 
words or sentences, e. g. aparain-ca, moreover; 
(as), m. the hind foot of an elephant, Sis.; (a), f. 
the west, L,; the hind quarter of an elephant, L. ; 
the womb, L.; (f), f. (used in the pi.) or (dm) [RV. 
v h 33 , 5 ]> n - the future, RV.; SBr.; (dpar am 
[AV .J or apardm [RV.]), ind. in future, for the 
future; (apara m , ind. again, moreover, PSrGr. ; 
Pancat.; in the west of (abl.), KatySr.; (ena), ind. 
(with acc.) behind, west, to the west of, KatySr. [cf. 
Goth, and Old Germ, afar, and the Mod. Germ. 
aber, in such words as Aber-mal, Aber-untz\. 

— kanyaknbja, m., N. of a village in the western 
part of Kanyakubja, PSn. vii, 3, 14, Sch. -kSya, 

j m. the hind part of the body. — kala, m. a later 
. period, KatySr. — godana, n. (in Buddhist cosmo¬ 
gony) a country west of the Maha-meru. — ja, mfn. 
born later, VS. — jana, sg.or pi. m. inhabitants of the 
west,GopBr.; KatySr. — ta,f.distance; posteriority 
(in place or time) ; opposition, contrariety, relative¬ 
ness; nearness. — tra, ind. in another place ; (eka- 
tra, aparatra, in one place, in the other place, P 3 n. 
vi, I, 194, Sch.) — tva, n. = -td, q. v. — dakshi- 
nam, ind. south-west, (gana tishthadgv-adi, q.v.) 

— nldagrha, m. the latter part of the summer. 

— paksha, m. the latter half of the month, SBr.; 
the other or opposing side, the defendant. - pa- 
kshiya, mfn. belonging to the latter half of the 
month, (gana gahddi, q. v.) -p&ncaia, m. pi. the 
western Panalas, Pan. vi, 2, 103, Sch. —para, 

or e)fn. pi. one and the other, various, Pan. 
v:, I, 144, Sch. — pnrusha, m. a descendant, SBr. 
x. — praneya, mfn. easily led by others, tractable. 

— bhava, m. alter-existence, succession, continua¬ 
tion, Nir. — ratra, m. the latter half of the night, 
the end of the night, the last watch. — loka, m.'an- 
other world, paradise. — vaktra, f. a kind of metre 
of four lines (having every two lines the same). 

— vat, see I .a-para. — varsha, as, f. pi. the 
latter part of the rains. — sarad, f. the latter part 
ot the autumn. — svas, ind. the day after to-morrow, 
Gobh. — saktha, n. the hind thigh, SBr. —sad, 
mfn. being seated behind, PBr. —2. -s-para, 
mfn. pi. one after the other, Pan. vi, 1,144, — sva- 
stika, n. the western point in the horizon. — he- 
manta, rn. n. the latter part of winter. — -hai- 
mana, mfn. belonging to the latter half of the winter 
season, Pan. vii,3,11, Sch. Aparag-ni, t, m. du. the 
southern and the western fire (of a sacrifice), KatySr. 
Aparanta, mfn. living at the western border; (as), 
m. the western extremity, the country or the inhabi¬ 
tants of the western border ; the extreme end or 
term; ‘ the latter end,’ death. Apar&ntaka, 

n\((ika)n. living at the western border, VarBrS. &c.; 
(ikd), f. a metre consisting of four times sixteen 
mStrSs ; (am), n., N. of a song, Yajh, Aparanta- 
jnana, n. prescience of one’s latter end. Apara- 
para,m(aj or <f) another and another, various, 
L. Apararka, m. the oldest known commentator 
ofYsjhavaikya^s law-book. Apar&rka-candrikd, 
f. the name of his comment. Aparardha, m. 
the latter, the second half. Apar&hna, rn. after¬ 
noon, the last watch of the day. Apar&hnaka, 
mfn. ‘born in the afternoon/ a proper name, PSn. 

3 > 28. Apar&hna-tana [L.] or aparakn#- 
tana [Pan. iv, 3, 24], mfn. belonging to or pro¬ 
duced at the close of the day. AparfetarS, f. op¬ 
posite to or other than the west, the east, L. Apar?- 
dydi, ind. on the following day, MaitrS. &c. 

apa-VraHj, - rajyate , to become 

unfavourable to, MBh.; Kir. ii, 49. 

Apa-vakta, mfn, having a changed colour, grown 
pale, Sak.; unfavourable, VarBrS. 

Apa-rfiga, as, m. aversion, antipathy, Mn. vii, 
x 54- 

WRIT apa-rata, mfn. (x/ram), turned off 

from, unfavourable to (abl.), Nir.; resting, BhP. 

apa-rava , as , m. contest, dispute ; 

discord. Aparavojjhita , mfn. free from dispute, 
undisturbed, undisputed. 

1. a-paraspara. See 1 . a-para. 

2. Apara*- para, it; ; 




a-paran-muJcha, mfn. with un¬ 
averted face, not turned away from (gen -), Ragh. 

d-pardjayin , mfn. never losing 

(at. play), TBr. 

A-par&jita, mf(<z)n. unconquered, unsurpassed, 
RV. &c.; (<2>r), m. a poisonous insect, Susr,; Vishnu; 
Siva ; one of the eleven Rudras, Hariv.; a class of 

^PTfe^rrf'T a-parijyani, is, f. ‘ not falling a-partkshita, mfn. untried, un- 

into decay, ’ ishtdpurtasyiiparijyani, N. of a proved ; not considered, inconsiderate. 

sacrificial 'ceremony, AitBr. vqrtiT d-parita, mfn. unobstructed, irre- 

’wvftrrnm a-parinayana, am, n. (y / ni), sistible, RV.; (<ri), m., N. of a people (v. 1 .) 

non-marriage, celibacy. ^ fOrfai T a'n/rrTnritn mfn f t/i rrA tin. 

A-pariiutS, f. an unmarried woman. 

a-parinama,as, m .(\/nam), un- 

divinities (constituting one portion of the so-called changeableness. — darsin, mfn. not providing for 
Anuttara divinities of the Jainas) ; N. of a serpent- a change, improvident. 

demon, MBh.; of a son oi Krishna, BhP.; of a A-pariiULoLLu, mfn, unchanging, 
mythical sword, KathSs.; (d), f. (with dis) the north- _ r J 

east quarter, AitBr. &c.; DurgS; several plants, ^HTlTfTT^T a-paritosha, mfn. unsatisfied, 
Clitoria Tematea, Marsilea Quadrifolia, Sesbania discontented, SSk. 
iEgyptiaca: a species of the Sarkari metre (of four wnfrim i 

lines, each contdning fourteen syllables). , a-panpakva, mfn. not quite npe 

_ A'-parSdi*li*u, mfn. unconquerable, invincible, ( as fruits > or a tumour [Susr.]); not quite mature. 

SBr. xiv. TOTjfrUT d-nnrinnrn mfn. nnt crointr Ev « 

a-parivrita , mfn. (v^i. vri), un- 

surrounded, RV. ii, io, 3; (cf. a-parivrita .) 

*nrsv apa-*/2. rudh, to expel, drive out 
(from possession or dominion), RV. x, 34, 2 & 3 ; 
AV. & c .: Desid. Pass. p. apa-rurutsyamana , 
wished or intended to be expelled, Kith. 

Apa-roddhri, a, m. one who keeps another off, 
a repeller, TS. 

P _ Apa-rodha, as, in. exclusion, prohibition {an-, 

a-paripakva, mfn. not quite ripe neg.), KatySr. 

A-par6jish?u ( mfn. unconquerable, invincible, ( as fruits > or a tumour [Susr.]); not quite mature, 
fr- xiv. a-paripara , mfn. not going by a 

apa- s/rddh,-rddhyati or-radhnoti, tortuous course, AV. xviii, 2, 46; MaitrS. 

Apa-r6dKo.ka,mm. detaining, hindering, MaitrS. 

^5^ a-parusha, mf(a)n. not harsh. 

to miss (one’s aim, &c.), AV. &c.; to wrong, offend 
against (gen. or loc.); to offend, sin. 

Apa-r&ddha, mfn. having missed; having of¬ 
fended, sinned; criminal, guilty ; erring. — prl- 
sbatka or apar&ddhdsliti, m. an archer whose 

arrows miss the mark, L. 

* • 

Apa-r&ddM, is, f. wrong, mistake, SBr. 
Apa-r&ddhrl, mfn. offending, an offender. 
Apa-r&dha, as, m. offence, transgression, fault; 
mistake; aparadham V 1 . kri, to offend any one 
(gen.) — btranjana, m. ‘sin-destroyer/ N. of Siva. 

rortuous course, n v. xvm, 2 , 4 o; mamo. dpa-rdpa, am, n. monstrosity, de- 

d-paribhinna , mfn. not broken formity, AV. xii, 4,9; (mfn.), deformed, ill-looking, 
into small pieces, not crumbled, SBr. odd-shaped, L. 

'emfbmn a-parimana , mfn. without mea- apare-dyils . See 2. dpara . 

sure, immeasurable, immense; (am), n. immeasur- , , » , . • 

9 9 9 \ /j wTTTTW sw rt m « at 1 n in at nln • 

apare-dyiis . See 2 .dpara. 
’STOTTS? a-parokskn , mfn. not invisible; 

ableness limia nun 

A-parimita, mfn. unmeasured, either indefinite perceptible ; (am), ind. (with gen.) in the sight of; 
or unlimited, AV.; SBr. &c. - gu na-gana, mfn. (dparokshdt), ind. perceptibly, manifestly, aBr. xiv. 
of unbounded excellences. — dh.&. ind. into an un- Aparokshaya, Nom.P. yah, to make percepti- 

or unlimited, AV.; SBr. &c. - guna-gana, mfn. \flparonsnat), ma. percepiimy, mamiesu. 
of unbounded excellences. -dhS, ind. into an un- Aparokshaya, Nom. P. yati, to nial 
limited number of pieces or parts, MaitrUp. — vi- ^ e » ta * e a Vlew °* ( acc -)> MBh* 

dba (<iparimita -), mfn. indefinitely multiplied, a-uarna, mfn. leafless, TS. 

•»bkaiij ana-stotr a, n. a poem of Sankar 2 .c 3 rya SBr. Aparimit A li khl ta, mfn. having an indefi- 

(in praise of Siva). 

Apa-r&dhin, mfn. offending ; criminal; guilty. 
Apar&dM-t&, f. or -tva, n. criminality, guilt.. 

WTOTOJT a-paraparand , as, m. not having 

descendants or offspring, AV. xii, 5, 45. 

nite number of lines, SBr.; KitySr. 

A-parlmeya, mfn. immeasurable, illimitable. 

d-parimosha, as, m. not stealing, 


a-pariid, mfn. leafless, TS .; (a), f., 

* not having even leaves (for food during her religious 
austerities),’ N. of DurgS or PSrvatl, Kum. v, 28. 

*rqf apa-rtu (ritu), mfn. .untimely, un¬ 

seasonable, AV. iii, 28, 1; not corresponding to the 

• „ ( season (as rain), BhP.; (us), m. not the right time, not 

^ P un r a-parimldna, as, m. not wither- the season, Gaut.; Ap.; (u), ind. not in.conespond- 

d-pardbhdva, as, m. the state of ing, not decaying,’ the plant Gomphrena Globosa. ence with the season, Gaut. 

not succumbing or not breaking down. TBr. f.inability to walk 

AVparSbMta, mfn. not succumbing, not break- about ( d in execrltio „;) Pin . viii, 4, iq, Kis. 
ing down, SBr. " ' ” ' 

a-paramrishta, mfn. untouched. a-parilopa, as, m. non-loss; 

* ‘ non-damage, RPrat. 

TnTTTfW^i d-parasikta , mfn. not poured „- L . n ^ . 

> f x a d a-parivargam, ind. without 

on one s side, not spilled (as the semen virile), SBr. \ r ? 

. leaving out,uninterruptedly, completely,TS.; TBr.; 

WJTHfW d-pardhata, mfn. not driven off, ApSr. 

AV. xviii, 4, 38. a-parivartaniya , mfn. not to 

a-parikalita , mfn. unknown, be exchanged. 

u nseen^ a-parivddya, mfn. (y/vad), not 

^srcrfmW a-parikrama , mfn. not walking to be reprimanded, Gaut. 

about, unable to walk round, R ii, 63, 42. d-parivishta, mfn. not enclosed, 

A-parikr&mam, ind. without going about, unbounded) RV . ii, I3> s! 
standing still, KatySr. ^ * 

rwfTfm a-pariklinna, mfn. not moist, ^P artvUu ’ mfn - Ww), not 

, covered, SBr. 

not liquid, dry. 1 

a-pariganya, mfn. incalculable. mfn - not hed 8 ed in 

’ ^ or fenced, Mn. & Gaut.; (cf. d-pardvnta.) 

WlfbnT a-parigata, mfn. unobtained, un- a -parisesha, mfn. not leaving a 

nown^ ^ . remainder, all-surrounding, all-enclosing, Sankhyak. 

WT 5 T? a-parigraha, as, m. not includ- a riHatha ind . not i oose l y) 

mg, Comm, on IPr 5 t.; non-acceptance, renounc- c , TT X ^ 

^TT^nT a-paryanta , mfn. unbounded, un¬ 
limited, SBr. x, xiv, &c. 

'Snjftrita a-parilopa, as, m. non-loss; a-parydpta, mfn. (-/op), incom- 

non-damage, RPrat. plete; unable, incompetent, insufficient; not enough; 

^ < , . , . , unlimited, unbounded, L. — vat, mfn. not compe- 

d-parwargam, ind. without tent to (Inf.), Ragh. xvi, 28. 

leaving out,unintenuptedly, completely,TS.; TBr.; ^ ^ c , 

^pg r b * v v a-paryaya, as, m. want of order or 

a-parivartaniya, mfn. not to mC c r 

be exchanged. ^rTOTTH'iT a-paryasita, mfn. (Caus. perf. 

r- . _ 7 . f .. Pass. p. V 2. a s), not thrown down or annihilated. 

a-panvadya , min. ( Vvaa ), not ^ ^ 

to be reprimanded, Gaut. c. , 

r r , a-parvdn , a, n. not a point of 

a-parivishta, mfn. not enclosed, junctionj RV , 1V , 19,3; a day which is not a 
unbounded, R\. ii, 1$, 8. van da y j n i unar month, as the full and 

WtfryiU d-parivita, mfn. (Vvye), not change of the moon, and the eighth and fourteenth 

, a r * of each half month) ; (mfn.), without a joint, 

covered, jdi« - _ 1 ■ i r* a 

Aparva-danda, m. a kmd of sugar-cane. A- 

a-parivrita, mfn. not hedged in jiarva-bliahga-iiipxma, mfn. skilled in breaking 

or fenced, Mn. & Gaut.; (cf. a-parivrita.) 

a-parisesha, mfn. not leaving a 

remainder, all-surrounding, all-enclosing, Sankhyak. 

'HTTfTSnm a-parislatham, ind. not loosely, 

ing (of any possession besides the necessary utensils ver ^ ml )> 1 arar 

of ascetics), Jain.; deprivation, destitution, poverty; a-parishkdra, as, m. want of 

(mm.), destitute of possession ; destitute ot attend- polish or finish ; coarseness, rudeness. 

ants or of a wife, Kum. i, 54. A-parisKkrita, mfn. unpolished, unadorned, 

A-parigr&liya, mfn. unfit or improper to be cuar6c 

^ takCn ' • , , . a-parisamaptik 

^nTTT^nT^ a-pancayin t mfn, (v 2. ci ), ending, endless, Comm, on BrArUp. 
having no acquaintances, misanthiopic. . „ . - 

A -parlclta.mfn .unacquainted with, unknown to, ^^ta-pansara, mfn. non- 

A-pariceya, mfn. unsociable. istant. 

a passage where there is no joint (i. e. where there 
is no possibility of bending), K 3 m. 

A-parvaka, mfn. jointless, SBr. 

a-parhana—a-parihdna, q. v. 

Wra 1. apala , am, n. a pin or bolt, L. 

2. a-pala , mfn. fieshless. 

dish or finish ; coarseness, rudeness. a pa- V lap, to explain away, to 

A-parlahkrita, mfn. unpolished, unadorned, denyi conceal . Clus . A. -Idfayate, to outwit, Bhatt. 
coar6e ' | Aoa-lapaaia, am, n. denial or concealment of 

vrtTfTWTfjnS a-parisamaptika, mfn. not I knowledge, evasion, turning off the truth, detraction; 

“ _ • I «■ 1 > 1* i-r- . • t f . 1 . 

a-pancchada , mfn. (v'chad), 

retinue, unprovided with necessaries, Mn, t0 jump or kap about, Bhatt. 


lua,, uncovered, unclothed. 

it*, rr.fn. id. 

:-c :ricchinna.. mfn. without 

tding, endless, Comm, on BrArUp. concealing, hiding; affection, regard, L.; the part 

r. , . between the shoulder and the ribs, Su£r. 

kyi^ia-parisara, mfn. non-contiguous, Apa-lapita, min. denied, concealed; suppressed, 

distant. embezzled, Comm, on Mn. viii, 400. 

r . - -y • ? j • j j. Apa-ISpa, as, m. = apa-lapana. — danda, m. a 

a-panskandam, md. so as not fine imposeJ on one w J deni { s or evades [ in law) . 

jump or leap about, Bhatt. Apa-lSpin, mfn. one who denies, evades or con- 

a-pariharaniya, mfn, not to cea ^ 5 C w ^ o en -) 

be avoided, inevitable ; not tG be abandoned or lost; 
not to be degraded. 

A-parih&rya, mfn. id., Gaut. &c. 

, fn?fr?nH a-parihana or a-parhana, am, n. 
the state of not being deprived of anything, KaushBr. 

- r- :: ;... _ru:.:trr-rtea, continuous; con- ^ qi a-parihana or a-parnana, am, n. 

:rr-t: . ~ z: . r r.u.r.r.g’u-.sned, the state of not being deprived of anything, KaushBr. 

A-panc-ched*, r;. r.. want of distinction or _ , r- - , » m . , , , 

c.v o r-; U-1-: :: U f-rr.rvinaticn Ssk. • want of ^H a-panhvnta, mfn.unaftticted,not 

; -dgr'.crt; cor.rmuar.ce, endangered, RV.; (cf. P 3 n. vii, 2, 32.) 

f a-palala, as, m., N. of a Rakshas. 
a-palasa, mfn. leafless, RV. x, 

27, 14. 

apa-lashikd (or apa-lasikd), f. 

thirst, L. 

Apa-lAsUn, mfn. free from desire, P 5 n. iii, i t 


E 2 


inranpi apa-lashuka. 


Apa-l&ghuka, mfn. free from desire, Pan. vi, 2, 

T f,-- V 

/t # A( S ubj. - lik hdt)t o scrape 


[ apa-\ 
v. 2, 65- 

a-palita, mfn. not grey, AY. 

ffpa-/^am,ind.(accordingto Pan. 
. 4, 1 2, Sch,^ Yed. Inf. of apa-*/ iup, to cut off. 

d-palpulana-krita, mfn. not 

soaked or macerated, SBr. 

apa-vaktri, ta, m. ‘speaking away,’ 
warding of% averting, RV. i, 24, 8 ; AV. v, 15, 1. 
Apo-vacana, am, n. See an-apavacand. 

apa-vat. See s.v. 2 .dp. 
apa- s/'vad, P. to revile, abuse, TBr. 

&c. ; to distract, divert, console by tales, ParGr.; 
Vain.; (in Gr.) to except, RPrat.; (A. only) to 
disown, deny, contradict, PSn.i, 3, 77, Sch.: Caus, 
- vddayati , to oppose as unadvisable ; to revile ; (in 
Gr.) to except, RPr2t. 

Apa-vadamfina, mfn. reviling, speaking ill of 
(dat.), Bhatt. 

Apa-vkda, as, m. evil speaking, reviling, blam¬ 
ing, speaking ill of (gen.) ; denial, refutation, con¬ 
tradiction ; a special rule setting aside a genera! one, 
exception (opposed to utsarga, Pan. iii, 1,94, Sch.), 
RPrat. ; Pan. Sch.; order, command, Kir. ; a pecu¬ 
liar noise made by hunters to entice deer, Sis. vi, 9. 
— pratyaya, m. an exceptional affix, Pan. iii, 1,94, 
Sch. — sthala, n. case for a special rule or exception, 
Pan. Sch. 

Api-v&daka, mfn. reviling, blaming, defaming; 
opposing, objecting to; excepting, excluding, Comm, 
on TPrat. 

Apa-v&dita, mfn. blamed ; opposed, objected to. 
Apa-v&din, mfn. blaming, Sak. 

Ap3.-v5.dy a, mfn. to be censured ; to be excepted, 
Comrn. on TPrat; 

apa-Vvadh (aor. - avadhit ) to cut 

off, split, RV. x, 146, 4; to repel, avert, VS.; SBr. 

1. a-pavana, mfn. without air, 

sheltered from wind. 

2 .apa-vana, am, n. a grove, L. 

WT^ apa- V 2. vap (Subj. 2. sg. -vapas 
[Padap. -vapa] ; impf. 2. sg. - dvapas , 3. sg. - dva - 
pat) to disperse, drive oil, destroy, RV.; AV.; TS. 

&c. S eeapa-Vi.vri. 

apa-varga , &c. See apa-s/vrij. 

apa-varta, &c. See apa-Vvrit. 

G^a-v^.^aA^Subj. - ucchat , Itnper. 

- ucchatu) to drive off by excessive brightness, RV.; 
AV.; to become extinct, AV. iii, 7, 7. 

Apa- vSsh. as, m. extinction, disappearance, AV. 
iii, 7, 7; N. of a plant, L. 

apa-y/vah, to carry off; to deduct; 
to give up: Caus.-vakayati,\o have (something) car¬ 
ried off or taken away; to drive away, Das.; Pancat. 

Apa-v&h 4 , as, in. ‘carrying off (water),’ a chan¬ 
nel, TS.; ‘carrying off,’ see Vasishthdpavdha; de¬ 
duction, subtraction ; N, of a metre ; of a people. 
Apa-v&haka, as, m. deduction, subtraction. 
Apa-v&hana, am, n. carrying off, Hit.; Dai.; 

Apa-v&hya, mfn. to be carried av ay, R. 
Apbdlia. See s.v., p. 56, col. 3. 

apa-/vd, -vati, to exhale, perspire, 

RV. i, 162, 10; (Imper. -vatu) to blow off, RV. 
viii, 18, 10. 

apa-vada, &, c. See apa- \/ vad. 
apa-vikskaia, mfn. unwounded, 

Sak. (v. 1 .) 

apa-vighna , mfn. unobstructed, 

unimpeded; {am), n. freedom from obstniction, 
MBh. i, 6875. 

***** apa-Vvic , cl. 7. -vinakti (impf. 

dpdvinak) to single out from, select, AV.; SBr.; 
d. 3. -vevekti, id., Kaus. 

a-pavitra, mf(a)n. impure. 
apa-viddha. See apa-s/vyaih . 

WTTfaST apa-/vis, Caus. (Imper. 2. sg. 

-vesaya) to send away, AV. ix, 2, 25. 

^nmn?T apa-vishd , f. ‘free from poison,’ 
the grass Kyllingia Monocephala. 

apa-vishnu, ind. except or with¬ 
out Vishnu. 

apa - V vi, - veti , to turn away from, 
be unfavourable to, RV. v, 61, 18 & x, 43, 2. 

apa-vlna, mfn. having a bad or 
no lute, Pan. vi, 2,187; (a), f. a bad lute, ib.; {am), 
ind. without a lute, ib. 

a-pavira-vat, mfn. not armed 


with a lance, RV. x, 60, 3. 

apa- / 1. vri (impf. 2. sg. apavrinos, 

3. sg. apdvrinot; Subj. -varat; aor. 2. & 3. sg. 
-avar [Padap. -avar), 3. sg. A. -avrita ; aor. Subj. 
I. sg. -vam [for varm, RV. x, 28, 7], 3. sg. - var, 
3. pi. - vran, Imper. 2. sg. [in RV.J once dpavri- 
dhi and five times dpd vridhi [cf. apa- / 1 . vri 
and ib‘. dpd-vrita) ; perf. 2. sg. -vavdrtha, 3. sg. 
-vavdra) to open, uncover, exhibit, RV. ; (ind. p. 

-vrltya) §Br.xiv; (cf. apd-*/ 1 . vri) : Caus.-z-'ffrG- 
yati, ‘to hide, conceal,’ see apa-vdrita. 

Apa-varaka, as, m. an inner apartment, lying- 
in chamber, KathSs. 

Apa-varaaa, am, n. covering, L.; garment, L. 
Apa-vartri, ta, m. one who opens, RV. iv, 20,8. 
Apa-vSrana, am, n. covering, concealment, L. 
Apa-v&rita, mfn. covered, concealed, Mricch. 
&c . ; {am), ind. (in theatrical language)secretly, apart, 
aside (speaking so that only the addressed person 
may hear, opposed to prakasam), S 5 h. 
Apa-v&ritakena, ind. = apa-vdritam . 

Apa-varya, ind. p. = apa-vdritam. 

apa- v/ vrij, A.-vrinkte{Imper. 

-vrinkshva; Subj. I. sg. -vrindjai; aor. P. 3. sg. 
dpdvrik) to turn off, drive off. Ay.; SBr. ; to tear 
off, AV.; (w'ith Jtf^J«rt/«)carpere viam[BR.], RV. 
x, 117, 7 ; to leave off, determine, fulfil, SBr. &c.: 
Caus. - varjayaU, to quit, get rid of; to sever, turn 
off from ; to transmit, bestow, grant, MBh. &c. 

Apa-varga, as, m. completion, end (e. g. pan- 
c&pavarga , coming to an end in five days), KatySr. 
&c.; the emancipation of the soul from bodily ex¬ 
istence, exemption from further transmigration; final 
beatitude ; BhP. &c.; gift, donation, AsvSr.; re¬ 
striction (of a rule), Su$r.; Sulb. — da, mf( t f)n. con¬ 
ferring final beatitude. 

Apa-varjana, am, n. completion, discharging a 
debt or obligation, Hariv.; transmitting, giving in 
marriage (a daughter), MBh.; final emancipation or 
beatitude, L.; abandoning, L. 

Apa-varjaniya, mfn. to be avoided. 
Apa-yarjita, mfn. abandoned, quitted, got rid 
of, given or cast away ; made good (as a promise), 
discharged (as a debt). 

Apa-varjya, ind. p. excepting, except. 
Apa-vrikta, mfn. finished, completed. 
Apa-vxikti, is, f. fulfilment, completion. 

apa-\/vrit , to turn away, depart; 

to move out from, get out of the way, slip off: 
Caus. P. (Ved. Imper. 2. sg. -vartaya) to turn or 
drive away from, RV. ii, 23, 7 &c.; (in arithm.) to 
divide; to reduce to a common measure. 

Apa-varta, as, m. (in arithm. or alg.) reduction 
to a common measure; the divisor (which is applied 
to both or either of the quantities of an equation). 
Apa-vartaka, as, m. a common measure, L. 
Apa-vartana,G//z, n. taking away, removal, Su$r.; 
ademption, Mn. ix, 79 ; reduction of a fraction to its 
lowest terms; division without remainder; divisor. 

Apa-vartita, mfn. taken away; removed;di vided 
by a common measure without remainder. 

Apa-vfitta, mfn. reversed, inverted, overturned; 
finished, carried to the end (perhaps for apa-vrikta), 
SankhSr.; KatySr. &c.; {am), n.(in astron.) ecliptic. 

Apa-vritti, is, f. slipping off; end, L. 

apa-\/ve (Imper. 2. sg. - vaya) to 

unweave what has been woven, RV. x, 130, 1. 

apa-\/ven (Subj. 2. sg. -penas) to 

turn away from, be unfavourable to, AV. iv, 8, 2. 

apa-^vesht, Caus. - veshtayaii , to 

strip off, PBr. 

apa- s/vyadh (Subj. 3. du. -vidhya- 
tdm) to drive away, throw away, RV. vii, 75, 4, 
&c.; to pierce (with arrows), MBh.; to reject, neglect. 

Apa-vlddha, mfn. pierced ; thrown away, re¬ 
jected, dismissed, removed. — putra, m. a son 
rejected by his natural parents and adopted by a 
stranger, Mn.; Yajh. ; one of the twelve objects of 
filiation in law. — loka, mfn. ‘who has given up 
the world,’ dead, BhP. 

Apa-vedha, as, m. piercing anything in the wrong 
direction or manner (spoiling a jewel by so piercing 
it), Mn. xi, 286. 

apa-vyaya, as, m. {Vi), prodi¬ 

gality, L. 

Apa-vyayam&na, mfn. See apa-*Jvye. 

apa-vy-d- V 1. da (see vy-a-V 1. 
da), to open (the lips), SBr. 

apa-vy-d-Vhri (Pot. -haret) to 

speak wrongly or unsuitably, SBr.; KatySr. 

JS . __ 

apa- vvye, P. A ,-vyayati (1. sg. -vya- 
ye) to uncover, RV.vii,8l,l; AV.: A. (pr. p. -vya- 
yamdna) to extricate one’s self, deny, Mn. 

^ apa-Vvraj, to go away, AsvSr. 

’STWH apa-vrata, mfn. disobedient, un¬ 
faithful, RV.; perverse, RV. v, 40, 6; (x, 103, ad¬ 
ditional verse, =) AV. iii, 2, 6 = VS. xvii, 47. 

_ 9 

apa-sakuna , am, n. a bad omen. 

apa-sanka, mfn. fearless, having 
no fear or hesitation ; {am), ind. fearlessly, Sis. 

apa-sabda , as, m. bad or vulgar 
speech; any form of language not Sanskrit; un¬ 
grammatical language; {apa-bhransa .) 

apa-sama , as, m. cessation, L. 
a-pasavya. See a-pasu. 

WJ^rnni apa-sataya (cf. Vsa.d), Nom. P. 

(Imper. 2. sg. -satay a) to throw or shoot off (an 
arrow), AV. 

apa-siras [§Br. xiv] or apa-sir- 

sha or dpa-iirshan [SBr. xiv], mfn. headless. 

apa-y/sish, to leave out, SBr. 

1 - d-pasu, us, m. not cattle, i. e. 

cattle not fit to be sacrificed, TS.; §Br. — h&n {d- 
pasu-), \ni\ghm) n. not killing cattle, A V. xiv, I, 62. 

2. A-pasu, mfn. deprived of cattle, poor, TS.; 
SBr. ; having no victim, AsvGr. -1& {< apasii -), f. 
want of cattle, MaitrS. 

A-pasavya, mfn.not fit or useful for cattle,TBr.; 
SBr.; SankhGr. 

i . apa-suc , k,m.(y/i. sue), ‘with¬ 
out sorrow,’ the soul, L. 

Apa-soka, mfn. sorrowless, Ragh.; (gj), m. the 
tree Jonesia Asoka. 

2 .apa-V2.sue, Intens. p, -sdsucat, 

mfn. driving oft'by flames, RV. i, 97, i. 

d-pased-daghvan [SY.; AY. 

xix, 55, 5] or better d-pakad-dagkvan [RV. vi, 42, 
l; MaitrS.], mfn. not staying behind, not coming 
short of, not being a loser. 

a-pascima, mfn. not having an¬ 

other in the rear, last; not the last. 

apa- Vsnath (aor. Imper. 2. pi. 
-inaihishtana) to push away, repel, RV. ix, 101,1. 

a-pasyd, mfn. not seeing, RY. i, 

*48, 5. ^ 

A'-pasyat, mfn. id., RV. x, 135, 3 ; (in astron.) 
not being in view of, VarBr.; not noticing; not 
considering, not caring for, Y&jn. ii, 3. 

A-pasyanft, f. not seeing, Buddh. 

apa-Vsri, to retire from, Laty. 

Apa-s ray A, as, m. a bolster, AV. xv, 3, 8. 
Apa-srita, mfn. retired from, retreated, ab¬ 
sconded, RV.; AV.; §Br. 

apa-srt, mfn. deprived of beauty, 

apa-Vsvas cl. 2. P. -svasiti, used 
to explain apdniti (cf. apdn), Comm, on ChUp. 


apa-svdsa . 

UTOCT apd-karana. 

Apa-sv 5 sa, j, m. one of the five vital airs (see 
apdna), L. 

apa-shtha , as, am, m. n. (x/sMa), the 

end or point of the hook for driving an elephant, 
Fan. viii, 3, 97 ; (cl. apd-s ht ha.) 

Apa-shthu,mfn. contrary,opposite,L.; perverse, 
L.; left, L.; («), ind. perversely, badly,Sis. xv, 1 7 (v. 1. 
um)\ properly, L.; handsomely, L.; (ax), in. time,L. 

Apa-shthura or -slithula, mfn. opposite, con¬ 
trary, L. 

. dpas , os, n. (fr. i.dp), work, action, 

especially sacred act, sacrificial act, RV. [Lat. opus.] 
2. Apas, mfn. active, skilful in any art, RV.; 
(dsas), f. pi., N. of the brands and fingers (when 
employed in kindling the sacred fire and in per¬ 
forming the sacrifices), RV. ; of the three goddesses 
of sacred speech, RV.; VS.; of the active or running 
waters, RV.; AV. -tama (, apds-) f mfn. (superb), 
most active, RV .; most rapid, RV. x, 75, 7. —pati, 
in., N. of a son of Utt&napSda, VP. 

1 . Apasya, Nom. P. (Subj dsyat) to be active,RV. 

i, 121, 7. 

1. Apas 

(cf. sv-apasya ; for 2 .apasyd, see 2 .apasyd below.) 
Apasyu, mfn. active, RV. 

^3. apas , mfn. (fr. 2. dp), watery. (So 

some passages of the Rig-veda [i, 95, 4, &c.] may 
(according to NBD. and others) be translated where 
the word is applied to the running waters, see 2. apds 
at end & apds-tamai) 

2. Apasyd., mf(,o)n. watery, melting, dispersing, 
RV.x, 89, 2 ; VS. x, 7 ; (2. apasya), f. a kind of brick 
(twenty are used in building the sacrificial altar), 
SBr.; KatySr. 

WW apa-/sac (perf. A. 3. pi- -sascire, 
1. p\.?.-saseima) to escape, evade (with ace.), RV. 
v, 20, 2 ; VS. xxxviii, 20. 

apa-sada, as, m. the children of six 

degrading marriages (of a Brahman with the women 
of the three lower classes, of a Kshatriya with women 
of the two lower, and of a Vaisya with one of the 
Sudra, Mn. x, 10 seqq., but cf. MBh. xiii, 2620 
seqq, and apadhvansa-ja ); an outcast (often ifc. ; 
see brahman&pasadd). 

WI>W^a/)a-samam, ind. last year (? gana 

tishthadgv-ddi, q. v.) . 

^mVllifiapa-sarjana,a 7 n,r\. (/srij), aban¬ 
donment, L.; gift or donation, L.; final emancipa¬ 
tion of the soul, L.; (cf. apa- x/vrij.) 

1 3 nrac?rf : q apa-salavt ind. to the left (op¬ 
posed to pra-salavl; cf. ava-salcan ), SBr. ; the 
space between the thumb and the forefinger (sacred 
to the Manes). 

Apa-salaih, ind. to the left, ASvGr. 

apa-savya , mfn. not on the left 

side, right, Mn. iii, 214; (with auguries) from the 
right to the left, moving to the left, MBh. ; VarBrS. 
&c.; (am, end), ind. to the left, from the right to 
the left, KatySr. &c., Apasavyam V I. kri pra- 
dakshinam kri, to circumambulate a person keep¬ 
ing the right side towards him, Kaus. &c. ; to put 
the sacred thread over the right shoulder, Ysjfi.i, 232. 
Apasavya-vat, mfn. having the sacred thread over 
the right shoulder, Yajn. i, 250. 

apa-siddhanta , as, m. an asser¬ 
tion or statement opposed to orthodox teaching or 
to settled dogma, Nyayad. Sic. 

’STTrftrV apa-/ 2. sidh (Imper. 2. sg. - se - 

dha or -sedha, 3. sg. -sedhatu, 3. pi. -sedhantu ; pr. 
p. -sedhat) to ward off, remove, drive away, RV. &c. 

apa-x / 1. sfi (r. sg. -suvdmi ; Imper. 

1. sg. -suva; aor. Subj. - sdvishat ) to drive off, 
RV. x, 37, 4 & 100, 8; AV.; VS. 

apa-Zsri (itnpf. - sarat ) to slip off j 
from (abb), RV. iv, 30, 10; to go away, retreat: 
Cans, -sdrayati, to make or let go away, remove. 

Apa-sara, as, m. (in geoni.) distance ; see an- 

Apa-sarana, am, n. going away, retreating. 
Apa-sSra, as, ni. a way for going out, escape, 
Mricch.; Pancat. 

Apa-sSraua, am, n. removing to a distance; 
dismissing; banishment, Mcar, 

y&, f. activity, RV. v, 44, 8 ; vif, 4^, 2 ; 

Apa-s&rita, mfn. removed, put away. 
Apa-sriti, is, f. = apa-sara. 

apa - /srip, to glide or move off; 

to retreat. 

Apa-sarpa, as, m. a secret emissary or agent, 
spy, Balar. 

Apa-sarpana, am, n. going back, retreating. 
Apa-sripti, is, f. going away from (abb) 

apa-skambhd, as, m. fastening, 

making firm. AV. iv, 6, 4. 

apa- / sk ri. See apa-x/ 3. kri. 

Apa-skara, as, rn. any part of a carriage, a 
wheel, &c., Pin. vi, J, 149 ; faeces (cf. avaskara), 
Vet.; anus, L.; vulva, L. 

Apa-sk&ra, as, m. under part of the knee, L. 

apa-skhala , as, m. slipping [‘ out¬ 

side of a threshing-floor,’ S 3 y.], SBr. 

opds-tama. See 2. apds. 

apa-stamba, as, m. a vessel inside 
or on one side of the chest containing vital air, 

Apa-stambha, as, m. id., Susr. 
Apa-stambhiux, f., N. of a plant. 

’Strait! apa-sndta, mfn. bathing during 
mourning or upon the death of a relation, R. ii, 
42, 22. 

Apa-snana, am, n. funeral bathing (upon the 
death of a relative, &c.), L. ; impure water in which 
a person has previously washed, Mn. iv, 132. 

apas-pati. See 2 .apas. 

’Siqw apa-/ spri, A. (impf. 3. pi. - sprin- 
vat a) to extricate from, deliver from, KaushBr.; 
(3. pi. sprinvati) to refresh [Gmn.; ‘to alienate,’ 
BR.], RV. viii, 2, 5. 

apa-spris. See dn-apaspris. 

apa-sphiga, mfn. one who has 
badly formed buttocks, P 5 n. vi, 2, 1S7; (am), ind. 
except the buttocks, ib. 

1. apa-/sphur (aor. Subj. 2. sg. 

- spharis ) to move suddenly aside or to lash out (as a 
cow during milking), RV. vi, 61, 14. 

2. Apa-sphfir, mfn. bounding or bursting forth, 
(or figuratively) splashing out (said of the Soma),RV. 
viii, 69, 10; (cf. an-apasphur , &c.) 

*<NRIT apa-smdra , as, m. epilepsy, falling 
sickness, Susr. &c. 

Apa-smarin, mfn. epileptic, convulsed, Mn. &c. 
Apa-snxriti, mfn. forgetful, BhP. ; absent in 
mind, confused, ib. 

apasya , apasyu. See 
( apa-svara, as, m. an unmusical 

note or sound, L. 

apa-svana, as, m. a hurricane, Ap. 

apa-x / ban (Subj. 3»sg .-han; Imper. 

2. sg. -jahl, 2. du. -hatam ; 2 . pi. -hata or -ha/a; 
perf. -jaghana ; pr. p. -ghndt ; Intens. p. nom. m. 
-jdhghanat ) to beat off, ward off, repel, destroy, 
RV. &c. 

Apa-g^bi.ta, apa-jiffhSssu. See s. v. 
Apa-ha, mfn. ifc. keeping back, repelling, remov¬ 
ing, destroying (e. g. sokdpaha, q. v.) 

Apa- hata, mfn. destroyed, warded off, killed. 
— pap man (dpa hat a-),m\w. having the evil warded 
off, free from evil, SBr. 

Apa-hatl, is, f. removing, destroying, AitBr. &c. 
Apa-hanana, am, n. warding off; (cf. apa-gha- 
ta, s. v.) 

Apa-hantri, mf (trt, Ragh.)n. beating off, de¬ 
stroying, SBr. &c. 

apa-hara , &c. See apa-x/hri, 

mfn.having abad plough, 

Pan. vi, 2, 187, Sch. 

apa-/has, to deride: Cans, -hasa- | 

yati, to deride, ridicule. 

Apa-basita, am, n. silly or causeless laughter, 

Apa-hasa, as, m. id., L.; a mocking laugh, R. j 
Apa-h&sya, mfn. to be laughed at, R. j 

| apa-hast a, am, n. striking or throw¬ 

ing away or off, MBh. iii, 545 [‘the back of the 
hand,’ Comm.] 

Apa-hastaya, Nom. P. °yati, to throw away, 
push aside, repel, (generally used in the perf. Pass, p.) 

Apa-hastita, mfn. thrown away, repelled, M 5 - 
latim. &c. 

1 apa-x/ 2. ha, A. -jihite (aor. 3. pi, 
- ahdsata, Subj. x. pi. -hdsmahi), to run away from 
(abb) or off, RV. 

2 . 

apa-x/ 3. ha, A. (aor. Subj. 2. sg. 

- hdsthdh ) to remain behind, fall short, not reach 
the desired end, AV. xviii, 3, 73 : Pass. - hiyaie, to 
grow less, decrease (in strength, balatn), Susr. 

Apa-h 5 .nl, is, f. diminishing, vanishing, Up. 
Apa-h 5 ya, ind. p. quitting, MBh, &c. ; leaving, 
avoiding, Hariv. ; leaving out of view, Sak. &c.; 
excepting, except, Ragh. 

apa-\'hi, to throw off, disengage 

or deliver one’s self from (acc.), BhP. 

apa-him-kara , mfn, without the 

syllable him (which is pronounced in singing the 
Sima verses), SBr. 

apa-x/hri, to snatch away, carry off, 

plunder; to remove, throw away: Caus. -hdrayali, 
see apa-hdrita below. 

Apa-hara, mfn. (ifc.) carrying off, Bham. 

Apa-harana, am, n. taking away, carrying off; 
stealing, Mn. 

Apa-baranlya, mfn. to be taken away, carried 

off, stolen, Sic. 

Apa-haras, mfn. not pernicious, PBr. 
Apa-hartri, td, m. (with gen. [Mn. viii, 190* 
192] or acc. [Pan. iii, 2, 135, Sch.] or ifc.) taking 
away, carrying off, stealing, Mn. Sic. ; removing 
(faults), expiating, Mn. xi, 161. 

Apa-hara, as, m. taking away, stealing ; spend¬ 
ing another person's property; secreting, conceal¬ 
ment, e. g. dttndpaadrarn \/1. kri , to conceal one's 
real character, Sak. 

Apa-h 5 raka, mfn. one who takes away, seizes, 
steals, &c.; a plunderer, a thief; (cf. dtmdpahdraka, 

Apa-harana, am, n. causing to take away. 
Apa-harita, mfn. carried off, R.; Ragh. iii, 50. 
Apa-harin, mfn. - apa-hdraka. 

Apa-hrita, mfn. taken away, carried off, stolen, 
&c. —vijnSna, mfn. bereft of sense. 

Apa-hritl, is, f. carrying off. 

apa-held , f. contempt, L. 

apa-/h nu, A . ( 1 - hnuv/) to ref use, 

RV. i, 138, 4 ; toconceal, disguise, deny, Kath. Sic.; 
to excuse one’s self, give satisfaction to, SBr.; TBr. 

Apa-hnava, as, m. concealment, denial of or 
turning off of the truth ; dissimulation ; appeasing, 
satisfying, SBr.; affection, love, R.; ^ apa-hnuti, 

Apa-hnuta, mfn. concealed, denied. 

Apa-hnutl, is, f. 'denial, concealment of truth,’ 
using a simile in other than its true or obvious appli¬ 
cation, Kpr.; Sah., mfn. pr. p. A. concealing, deny¬ 
ing (any one, dat.\ Naish. 

Apa-hnotri, mfn. one who conceals or denies or 
disowns, Comm, on Mn. viii, 190. 

’SPjjjrUR apa-hrasa, as, m. diminishing, re¬ 
ducing, Susr. 

dp ak & 1. dpdka. See dpanc. 

WnToR 2. a-pdka, mfn. (\ 7 poc), immature, 
raw, unripe (said of fruits and of sores) ; (as), rn. 
immaturity; indigestion, Su'r. —ja, mfn. not pro¬ 
duced by cooking or ripening; original; natural. 
— s 5 ka, n. ginger. 

A-p 5 kln, mfn. unripe; undigested. 

apil-x/J.kri, to remove, drive away, 

(Ved. Inf. apdkartok) MaitrS.; to cast off, reject, 
desist from, MBh. See. ; to select for a present, PBr .; 
K 5 ty$r. ; to reject (an opinion), 

Apet-karaaa, am, n. driving away, removal, 
KatySr. ; payment, liquidation. 


’^rqrerft®} apa-karishnu. 

vqiCT apdsya. 

‘shim,rr.rVi. /with zee.) ‘outdoing,’sur- 

ApsUrarman, a, n. payment, liquidation, 
Ap£«yrita,*. taken away, removed, destroyed. 

pa-kriti, is, t. taking away, removal, RV. 
a;. : : evt; conduct, rebelling (Comm. vi- 

Z' ‘ ’ 2 

... — ^ • 

apd-Vkrish (Inf. - krashturn ) to 

turn off or away, avert, remove, R. &c. 

apd-y/i. kri, to throw any one off; 

to abandon, to contemn. 

qnTTCSf apdksha , m(n.=:adhy-aksha or pra- 

ty-aksha, L. 

a-pdhkteya, mfn/not in a line or 

row,’ not in the same class, inadmissible into society, 
elected from caste, Mn. &c. 

A«p£hktya, mfn. id., Mn.; Gaut. Ap&hktyd- 
pahata, mfn. defiled or contaminated by the pre¬ 
sence of impure or improper persons, Mn. iii, 183. 

WTTTg* apdhga, mfn. without limbs or with¬ 
out a body, L.; {as), m. (ifc. f. a or t) the outer 
corner of the eye,S 5 k.&c.; a sectarial mark or circlet 
on the forehead, R.; N. of Kama (the god of love), 
L.; = a pci marga, L. —darsana, n. or -drishtl, 
f. a side glance, a leer. — desa, m. the place round 
the outer comer of the eye. —netra, mf(<z)n. cast¬ 
ing side glances, Vikr. 

Apahgaka, as, m. = ap&margd. 

apac (Vac), (Imper. -aca) to drive 

away, RV. ix, 97, 54. 

apdj (Vaj), (impf. -djai; p. apajat; 
Imper. 2. sg. -aja) to drive away, RV.; AitBr. 

*5T<TT^ dpanc, ah, dci , ak (fr. 2. ahe ), going 

or situated backwards, behind, RV. & AV.; western 
(opposed to prdhc), ib.; southern, L. 

A'pak, ind. westward, RV. ; VS. — t&s [AV. viii, 
4. 19 ; cf. RV, vii, 104, 19] or -tat (dpak-) [RV. 
vii, 104, 19], ind. from behind. 

1. AT aka, mfn. coming from a distant place, 
distant, RV.; VS.; (at), ind. from a distant place, 
RV. viii, 2, 35. — cakshas (dpdka-), mfn. shining 
far, RV. viii,75,7. For 2. a-pdka, see p. 53, col. 3. 

Apaka (an old instr. case of 1. dpdric), ind. far, 
RV. i, 129, 1. 

ApacI, f.the south, L. Ap&citarS, f. ‘other than 
the south/ the north, L. 

ApScina, mfn. situated backwards, behind, 
western, RV. vii, 6, 4 & 78, 3; AV. vi, 91,1; turned 
back, L.; southern, L. 

Apacy6.(4),mfn. western,RV.viii, 28, 3; AitBr.; 
southern, L. 

apahjas (?), Pan. vi, 2, 187. 

a-patava, am, n. awkwardness, in¬ 

elegance, L.; sickness, disease, L. 

WHILST a-pathya, mfn. illegible. 

a-pdnigrahana, am, n. ce¬ 

A-pSni-pada, mfn. without hands and feet, Up. 

apati (Vi), to escape (with acc.), 


Wnc? a-patra, am , n. a worthless or 

common utensil; an undeserving or worthless object, 
unfit recipient, unw'orthy to receive gifts, Bhag.; 
Kathls. ~krity 5 , f. acting unbecomingly, doing 
degrading offices (as for a Brahman to receive wealth 
improperly acquired, to trade, to serve a Sudra, and 
to utter an untruth), Mn. xi, 125. — d&yin, mfn. 
giving to the undeserving, — bhyit, mfn. support¬ 
ing the unworthy, cherishing the undeserving. 

A-patri-karana,£w,n. — a^patra-kritya, Mn. 
xi, 69. 

a-pad. See a-pad, p. 49, col. 2. 

A-p£da, mfn. not divided into Padas, not metri¬ 
cal. A-p&dadi, m. not the beginning of a Piida, A-p&drtdi-bhSj, mfn. not standing at the 
beginning of a Pada, RPrat. A-p&dantlya, mfn. 
not standing at the end of a Pada. 

A-y&daka, mfn. footless, TS. 

A«p&dya,mf (ff)n.(or dpddya ?), N. of certain Ish- 
tis (perfonned with the Cavan a vaisvasrija ),TBr. 

’’frqTffT apd-V 1 ‘dd, A. to take off or away, 

SBr. ; Kaus. 

! Ap&-datri, id, m. one who takes off, TBr. 

Apd-dana, am, n. taking away, removal, abla¬ 
tion ; a thing from which another thing is removed; 
hence the sense of the fifth or ablative case, Pan. 

S 5 PJTVT apa-Vdhd (Subj. 1. sg. - dadhdni ) 

to take off, loosen from, KaushBr. 

apddhvan, a, m. a bad road, Pan. 

vi, 2, 187. 

'XTCl^ apdn (Van), apdniti or apdnati 
[AV. xi, 4, 14], to breathe out, expire, SBr. xiv; 
ChUp.; pr. p. apdndt, mf(//)n. breathing out, RV. 
x, 189, 2; AV. 

Ap&n&, as, m. (opposed to pr&nd ), that of the 
five vital airs which goes downwards and out at the 
anus; the anus, MBh. (in this sense also (am), n., 
L.) ; N.of a Saman,PBr.; ventris crepitus, L. — da, 
mfn. giving the vital air ApSna, VS. xvii, 15. — drill, 
m(nom. -dhrik)in. strengthening the vital air 
Apana, TS. — dv&ra, n, the anus. — pavana, m. 
the vital air Ap*na, I*. -p£, mfn. protecting the 
Ap2na, VS. — bhrit, f. ‘cherishing the vital air/ a 
sacrificial brick, SBr. -»vayu, m. the air Apana, 
L. ; ventris crepitus, L. ApSnodg&ra, m. ventris 

apa-Vnud (the a of apd always in 

the antepenultimate of a sloka, therefore apd metri¬ 
cally for apa ; see apa- Vmid), to remove, repel, 
repudiate, MBh. ; Mn. 

^qr^rT apdnrita, mfn. free from falsehood, 
true, R. ii, 34, 38. 

^VX^^XWH^apdntara-tamas, as, m., N. of 

an ancient sage (who is identified with Krishna Dvai- 
piyana), MBh.; Hariv. 

am-napat, &e. See 2. dp. 

^nTTq a-papa, mf(d)n. sinless, virtuous, 

pure. — kSLsin (d-papa-), mfn. not ill-looking, VS. 

— krlt (d-papa-), mfn. not committing sin, SBr. 

— puri, f., N. of a town ; also written pdpa-puri, 
q. v, — vasyasa (d-papa-), n, not a wrong order, 
no disorder, SBr.; (cf. pdpa-vasyasd.) —viddha 
(, i-pdpa -), mfn. not afflicted with evil, VS. xl, 8. 

a-pdmam-bhavishnu, mfn. not 

becoming diseased with herpes, MaitrS.: (cf. pdmam- 

qPTT*TT^ apd-marga, as, m. ( Vmrij), the 
plant Achyranthes Aspera (employed very often in 
incantations, in medicine, in washing linen, and in 
sacrifices), AV.; VS. &c. 

Apd-marjana, am, n. cleansing, keeping back, 
removing (of diseases and other evils). — stotra, n. 

* removing of diseases/ N. of a hymn. 

apa-inttya, n. (cf. apa-m(tya), 

equivalent, MaitrS. 

qpTPJIJ apd-mrityu — apa-mrityu, L. 
apdya. See ape. 

apdr ( apa-Vri ), to open by remov¬ 
ing anything, RV. v, 45, 6 (Subj. A. 3. sg. dpa ri- 
nutd); ix, 10. 6 (3. pi. dpa rinvanti) & 102, 8 
(impf. 2. sg. rindr dpa). 

■*rqTI a-para, mfn. not having an oppo¬ 
site shore, TS. ; not having a shore, unbounded, 
boundless (applied to the earth, or to heaven, and 
earth [rodasf j, Sec.), RV. <&c.; (as), m. ‘not the 
opposite bank/ the bank on this side (of a river), 
MBh. viii, 2381; (am), n. (in Sihkhva phi!.) f a 
bad shore/ ‘the reverse of pdro, y a kind of mental 
indifference or acquiescence ; the reverse of mental 
acquiescence, L.; the boundless sea. — pSra, mfn. 
carrying over the boundless sea (of life), VP. ; (am), 
n. non-acquiescence, L. 

A-pp.ramya, mfn. not to be got over, not to be 
carried to the end or triumphed over, MBh.; BhP. &c. 

A-p 5 rayat, mfn. incompetent, impotent (with 
Inf. or loc.) ; not able to resist, MBh 

qrqTTHTt'qqi ci-paramarthika , mf(I)n. not 
concerned about the highest truth. 

apdrch (apa-Vrich), to retire, L. 

qrqifjFlfT apdr jit a, mfn. (Vnj with apa), 

flung away, L. 


apdrna, mfn. (fr. apdr above, BR. 
see abhy-arna), distant, far from (abl.), Nir. 

apdrtha, mfn. without any object, 
useless ; unmeaning, BhP. &c.; (am), n. incoherent 
argument. — karana, n. a false plea in a lawsuit. 
Ap&rtbaka, mfn. useless, Mn. viii, 78, &c. 

a-parthiva, mfn. not earthly, 


qiqTcS a-pala, mf(o)n. unguarded, unpro¬ 
tected, undefended; (a), f., N. of a daughter of Atri, 

RV. viii, 91, 7, See. 

WTTWS apalahka, as, m. the plant Cassia 
Fistula ; (see palahka.) 

apd-lambd, as, m. a kind of break 

• • i 

let down from a carriage to stop it, SBr.; KatySr. 

1. a-pali, mfn. having no tip of 
the ear, Susr. 

2. apdli, mfn. free from bees, &c., 

L. (see alt). 

apa-Vi- vri (epazz. apa, cf. apa- 

Vl.vri), -vrinoti, to open, uncover, reveal, Laty.; 
Up. & c. 

Apa-vrit, mfn. unrestrained, BhP.; (cf. dn - 
apavrit .) 

A'pS-vrita, mfn. open, laid open, RV. i, 57, 1, 
&c. ; covered, L. ; unrestrained, self-willed, L. 

Apa-vyiti, is, f. a place of concealment, hiding- 
place, RV. viii, 66, 3. 

qniT ^%apd-vrikta( Vvrij), removed,avoid- 
ed, RV. viii, 80, 8. 

apa- Vvrit (aor. A. 3. pi. apa avrit - 

sata [v. 1 . av 0 "]) to turn or move away, SsnkhSr. 

Apd-vartana, am, n. turning away or from, 
retreat, L.; repulse, L. 

Apa-vritta, mfn. (for apd-, the vowel being 
metrically lengthened in the antepenultimate of a 
sloka), (with abl.) turned away from, R. ; abstain¬ 
ing from, rejecting, MBh.; (am), n. the roiling on 
the ground (of a horse), L. 

Apd-vritti, is, f. = nd-vartana, L, 
Apd-vritya, ind.p. turning away from (with abl.), 
AV. xri, 2, 34. 

^rqi^T dpavya, mfn., N. of-particular gods 
& Mantras,TS.(Comm, —apa-dvya) ; TBr.(Cornm. 
?= apa-avya , fr. Vav). 

a-pdsyd , f. no great number of 
nooses or fetters, Pan. vi, 2, 156, Sch. 

qrcrpqq 1. apasraya, mfn. helpless, desti¬ 

shtjtOst apa-Vsri, P. A. - srayati, °te, to 

resort to ; to use, practise. 

2. Apd-sraya, as, m. the upper portion of a bed 
or couch on which the head rests, Das. ; refuge, re¬ 
course, the person or thing to which recourse is had 
for refuge ; an awning spread over a court or yard, 
R. v, 11, 19. 

Apd-srlta, mfn. resting on ; resorting to. 

apashti. See dyo-'pashti. 
Ap£sbtka y as, m. (fr. V sthd with apa, APrSt.; 
cf. apashtha ), the barb of an arrow, AV. iv, 6, 5 ; 
(cf. satdpdshtha.) — vat (apdshthd-), mfn. having 
barbs, RV. x, 85, 34. 

Ap&shthl = apashti in comp, with -ha or-h&n, 
mfn. killing with the claws, SBr. 

1 . apas (V1 . * to be absent from, 

not to participate in/ see apa-pare. 

2. apds (V2. as), to fling away, 

throw away or off, discard; to scare, drive away; 
to leave behind ; to take no notice of, disregard, 
Apasana, am, n. throwing away, placing aside, 
KStySr.; killing, slaughter, L. 

Apkaita, mfn. thrown down, injured, destroyed,!.. 
Apaata, mfn. thrown off, set aside; driven away; 
carried off or away, abandoned, discarded; disre¬ 
garded ; contemned. 

Apasya, ind. p. having thrown away or discarded; 
having left, having disregarded ; having excepted. 


qnqq apy-aya, 


Apasyat, mfn. discarding, throwing off, &c. 

vtrnrffrtpd -sanga, n$,m. (x/saff/jr, Kath.; 
— upasauga, L. 

^rqtfq si, mfn. having a bad or no 

apdsu, mfn. lifeless, Naish, 
qrqTtl apa-*/sri (apa-d -; or a pa for apa, 

the d standing in the antepenultimate of a sloka), 
to turn off front, avoid (with abl.), Yiljn. ii, 262. 
Apd-sarana, am, u. departing, L. 

Apit-srita, mfn. gone, departed, gone away, L. 

WHFm apd-/stkd , to go off towards, 
AitBr.; SahkhSr. (v. L upd-*/sthd, q.v.) 

apd-/han, to throw off or hack, 


apd-haya, ind. p. (fr. \ / ^. ha. with 
apa, the a being metrically lengthened), quitting, 

MBh.; disregarding, ib.; excepting, except, ib. 


wnf apa-/kri, A. to take off, SBr. 

'srfq dpi , or sometimes pi (see pi-dribh, 

Pi-dhd, pi-nah), expresses placing near or over, unit¬ 
ing to, annexing, reaching to, proximity, &c.[ct.Gk. 
<7u; Zendtf//; Germ, and Eng. prefix be] ; in later 
Sanskrit its place seems frequently supplied by abhi. 

(As a separable adv.) and, also, moreover, besides, 
assuredly, surely ; a pi a pi or api-ca, as well as; na 
vdpi or na apivd or na nactipi , neither, nor; (dpi, 
(and at the beginning of a sentence) api-ca, moreover. 

Api is often used to express emphasis, in the sense 
of even, also, very ; e. g. any ad api, also another, 
.something more ; aa'ydpi, this very day, even now; 
tathdpi, even thus, notwithstanding; yady api , 
even if, although; yadyapi tathapi , although, 
nevertheless; na kadiicid api , never at any time ; 
sometimes in the sense of but, only, at least, e. g. 
niuhurtam api , only a moment. 

Api may be affixed to an interrogative to make it 
indefinite, e.g. ko ’ pi , any one; kutr&pi, anywhere. 

Api imparts to numerals the notion of totality, 
e. g. calurndm api varndndm , of all the four castes. 

Api may be interrogative at the beginning of a 

Api may strengthen the original force of the Po¬ 
tential, or may soften the Imperative, like the English 
‘be pleased to sometimes it is a mere expletive. 
Api tu, but, but yet. 

Api-tva,<7W, n. having part, share, AV.; SBr.; (cf. 
apa-piivd .) Api-tvm,mfn.having part,sharing,SBr. 

A pi-n am a (in the beginning of a phrase), per¬ 
haps, in all probability, I wish that, Mricch.; Sak. See . 
Api-vat, :nf(z^//)n. See api- /vat. 

api-kakskd , as, rn. the region ofthe 

arm-pits and shoulder-blades (especially in animals), 
RV. iv, 40, 4; x, i 34, 7 ; Laty.; N. of a man & (Jj), 
m. pi. his descendants. 

Api-kaksbyA (5), mfn. connected with the region 
of tire arm-pits, RV. i, 117, 22. 

api-karnd , am, n. the region of 
the ears, RV. vi, 48, 16. 

’srlnqcji dpi- \/1, kri, to bring into order, 
arrange, prepare, TS.; TBr.; PBr. 

'ti \V^l[^api-- /2 . krit (1. sg. - krintnmi, fut. 

I. sg. - 1 \artsyami) to cut off, VS.; AY.; TS.; SBr. 

^n*n| api-Vkshai, Caus. - kshapayati , to 

consume by fire, AV. xii, 5, 44 & 51. 

api-Vgam, Ved. to go into, enter, 
approach, join, [aor. Subj. 3. pi. dpigman, RV. v, 33, 
XO] RV. Sec .; to approach a woman, RV. i, l 79. I. 

Wfqxfi api-/, Ved. to enter, get into, 
mingle with, RV, vii, 21, 5, &c. 

api-gtrna , mfn. praised, L. 

api-guna , mfn. excellent, MBh. 

xii, 2677. 

api-\/grah (with or without mu- 
kham, ndsike, &c.), to close (the mouth, nose, &c.), 
SBr.; AitBr.; ChUp. 

1. Api-gxihya, ind. p. closing the mouth, TS. 

2. Api-gribya [Ved., Pan. hi, I, 118] or api- 
gfrStbyapb., Comm.],«w, n. impers. (with abl.) the 
mouth to be closed before (a bad smell, Sic.) 

api- /ghas, to eat off or away 
(pert. 3. pi. -jakshnh), SBr. ; (aor. A. 3. sg. -gdiia. 
[fr. gh-s-ta], winch by Say. is derived fr. /nan), 
RV. i, 158, 5. 

a-picchila, mfn. clear, free from 

sediment or soil. 

^fqq api-jd, as, m. horn after or in addi¬ 

tion to (N. of Prajfipati and other divinities), VS. 

_ ^ 

a-piwla, mfn. without funeral balls. 

1. a-pit, mfn. ( /pi), not swelling, 

dry, RV. vii, 82. 3. 

2. a-pit, mfn. (in Or.) not having 

the it or Anu-bandha p, Pfiu. 

d-pitri , id, m. not a father, SBr. 

xiv. — devatya (d-pitri-), mfn. not having the 
Manes as deities, SBr. 

A-pitrika, mfn. not ancestral or paternal, unin¬ 
herited ; fatherless, Ap. 

A-pitrya, mfn. not inherited, not ancestrai or 
paternal, Mn. ix, 205. 

'■H fq^ api-Vdah, -dahati (impf. -adahat) 
to touch with tire, to singe, TS.; Kath. 

api- V do (i. sg. - dydmi ) to cut off, 

AV - 37 . 3 - 

^rqtPF( api-Vdham, to blow upon, Kaus. 

api-/ dhd, Ved. to place upon or 

into, put to, give ; chiefly Ved. to shut, close, cover, 
conceal (in later texts more usually//- /dhd, q. v.) 

Api-dbana, am, n. placing upon, covering, 
Kitty Sr.; a cover, a cloth for covering, RV. See. ; 
a lid, BhP. ; a bar, Kum. ; (/), f. a cover. Ap. ; 
(c f.pi-dhdna.) — vat {apidhana-), mfn. ‘having a 
cover,’ concealed, RV. v, 29, I 2. 

Api-dbi, is, m. ‘ that which is placed upon the 
fire,’ a gift to Agni, RV. i, 127, 7. 

Api-hita, mfn. put to, placed into, RV.; shut, 
covered, concealed, RV. &c.; (cf. pi-hita ) 
Api-hiti, is, f. a bar, MaitrS.; PBr. 

qVtq api-/ dh at, to run into, Yait. 

api-*/nah, to tie on, fasten (usually 

pi-*/nah, q.v.); to tie up, close, stop up (Ved.; 
later on pi-*/nah, q. v.) 

Api-naddha, mfn. closed, concealed, RV.x, 68, 
8; vSBr.; (cf. pi-naddha.) 

api-Vni , to lead towards or to, 

bring to a state or condition, TS.; SBr.; AitBr. 

Api-netri, td, m. one who leads towards (gen.), 

^fqq^J api-pakshd, as, m. the region or 

direction to the side, TS. 

api-\ / path, Caus. -pdthayati, to 

lead upon a path (acc.), KaushBr.; SahkhSr. 

api-•/pad, to go in, enter, SBr. 

’Srfq'qT *a -pipasa, mfn. free from thirst or 

desire, SBr. xiv; ChUp. 

api-s/pric (aor. 3. sg. aprdg dpi) 
to mix with (loc.), AV. x, 4, 26 ; {-priiicanti , AV. v, 
2, 3, according to BR. a mistake for -vyinjanti.) 

api-prana , mf( 7 )n. uttered or pro¬ 
duced with every breath, RV. i, 186, 11. 

api-y/bandh, A. to fasten upon, 

put on (a wreath), AsvGr. 

Api-baddba, mfn. fastened, R. iii, 68, 42. 

’srfqfvrtn dpi-bhaga, mfn. having part in, 

sharing in, SBr. 

api-x^bhii, to bt in, AY.; to have 

part in, RV.; AitBr. 

apt-mantra , mfn. giving an ex¬ 
planation or an account of, Rath. 

^Pq*pf api-x 'mrish , A. -mrishyate (1. sg. 
-mrishye; aor. Subj. 2. sg. - mrishthds ) to forget, 
neglect, RV. 

^fqxj|'q api-\ /r ydc. Cans, -ydedyate ,to de¬ 
spise, refuse(?), AV. xii, 4, 38. 

tHfqiTK dpi-ripta , mfn. (vVip),* smeared 

over,’ i, e. grown blind, RV. i, 1x8, 7; viii, 5, 23. 

api- \ ,/ ruh, dpi-rohaii, to grow to¬ 
gether, grow whole again, TS. 

api- \vat (Opt. 1 . ph -vatemaj pr. 
p. -vatat) to understand, comprehend, RV. vii, 3, 10; 
60. 6: Caus. (Irnper. 2. sg. -vdtaya ; pr. p. -vat ay at ; 
aor. 3. pi. avlvatcn, RV. x, 1 3,5) to cause to under¬ 
stand, make intelligible to (withor without dat.), RV.; 
(1. pi. -vdtayamasi) to excite, awaken, RV. i, 1 2 8,2. 

A'pi-vatx (scil.zffc), f. of a conjecturable adj .dpi- 
vatya, intelligible, TBr. [‘containing the word api 
or what is meant by api, 5 Comm. Si BR.] 

■?TrCpTq api- %/ 2 . vap (1. eg. -vapdrni) to 
scatter upon, AV. ; SBr.; TBr. 

Api-vapa, as, m. ‘ scattering upon/ N. of par¬ 
ticular Purodasa, TBr. 

% / 

^TtqqT^^l apivd nya-vatsd-=:aOhivdnyd } 

q. v., Kaus. 

opi-\ /1. vri (perf. A. -vat-re) to con¬ 
ceal, RV. iii, 38, 8. 

Apx-vrita, mfn. concealed, covered, RV. 

api- x'vrij (3. pi. - vrinjanti; aor. 

3. pi. avrijann dpi , RV. x, 48, 3) ‘to turn to/ 
procure to, bestow upon (dat. or loc.), RV. 

api-writ, Caus. (impf. 2. sg. 

- avartayas ) to throw into (acc.), RV. i, 121, 13. 

^fq^T Gpi-/rye (1. pi. P. -vy a yam a si) to 
cover, AV. i, 27, 1. 

api-vrata, mfn. sharing in the 

■ • 

same religious acts, related bv blood, SBr.; KatySr. 

api-*/ (perf. Irnper. 2. du. 

-vavriktam, RV. vi, 62. 10 s ) to strike off, cut off', 
RV.; AV. 

^ C i 

api-sarvara, mfn. contiguous to 

the night/ being at the beginning or end of the night, 
AitBr.; {dm), n. the time early in the morning, RV. 

apisala, as,m., N. of a man; (bis), 
m. pi. the descendants of Apisala. See dpi tali. 

api-sds , f. (only used in abl. -id- 

sets) slitting, ripping up, MaitrS.; AitBr. 

a-pisuna , mfn. unmalicious, up¬ 
right, honest. 

api-Vsri, V. to break off, AV.; A. 


id., SBr.; Pass, -slryate, to break, PBr. 
Api-sirna, mfn. broken, AV. iv, 3, 6. 

^rfq^r lapi-shtuta, mfn. (\ZsJm), praised,L. 

api-shtha {x'stha), to stand (too) 
near, stand in any one's way, A V. iii, 13, 4 & v,T3, 5. 
Api-sbtbita, mfn. approached, RV, i, 145, 4. 

api-sam-gribhdya , Nom. P. 
(Irnper. 2. sg. -gribhdya) to assume, RV. x, 44, 4. 

quqT^pq api- */ sic, to sprinkle with, L. 
^Tfqg api-Vsri , to Bow upon, SBr.; TBr. 

s/srij, P. to place to or upon, 

TS.; SBr.: P. Sc A. to add to, mingle to, Laty. 


^rrq^T api- v han (3. pl.^ hnan t i) to rem ove 

or suppress (pregnancy, sic turn), TS. 

api-hita, See. See api-x^dhd. 

mq|r api- /him (3. du. dpi hiutah) to re¬ 

fuse, RV. viii, 31, 7. 

^Ttq^f api-hve (1. sg. A. - huve ) to call in 
addition to (or besides), RV. x. 19, 4. 

1 . dpi. See dpya. 

wftz . apt ( /i), (Ved.) dpy-eti, to go in or 

near; to enter into or upon ; to come near, ap¬ 
proach (also in copulation, RV, ii, 43, 2, ind. p. 
apftyd) ; to partake, have a share in ; to join ; to 
pour out (as a river). 

Api-yat, mfn. entering the other world, dying, 
RV. i, 162, 20; dissolving, disappearing, BhP. 

1. Apita, mfn. gone into, entered, SBr. x (used 
for the etym, of svapiti), ChUp.: (cf. svdpyayd.) 

A'piti, is, (. entering into, RV. i, 121,20; dissolv¬ 
ing, dissolution, SBr.; Up. 

Apy-aya, as, m. joint, juncture, KauL: Sulb.; 
pouring out (of a river), PBr.; entering into, van- 

► * 


^rorxr^f%R apyaya-dikshita. 

'sjrfhxi* a-paurusha. 

<r\- - 

*' ^ * 

’ r ::* r .rv /hrz'j or utpatti), Up. 

:' rv : :• — dikshita, ra., N. ot' a 

-a...: _:..i 'a* iter ;or" the sixteenth century, 

/ v - r : - y,-'-rkj, celebrated as a Saiva, and 


' be v: incarnation of Siva; also apydya : 

* § ~ ^ * "f 1 • 

s. ■ ► /■ f * k I ► ► 

^ ✓ 1 

Apy-ayana, <?///, n. union, copulating, L. 

oi'lcjh (3,4), mfn. (fr. se¬ 

cret, hidden. RV.; very handsome (v. 1 . apivya), BhP. 

Tt op l-j ft , m (d u. -j uv a ) f n. i mp ellin g, RV. 
R 3U 5- N 

^r’TfTH 1- pidana, am, n. not giving pain, 

gent 1 ene$s, kindness. 

A-pidayat» mfn, not paining. 

A-pIda, f. id.; (.2 yd), ind. not unwillingly. 

WtiT 3 . a-pita, mfn. not drunk; not 
having drunk, MBh. ii, 1902. 

A-pitva, ind. p. not having drunk, without 


\ #• 

apt-nasa, as, rn. (api for api; cf, 

fi-nasa), dryness of the nose, want of the pituitary 
secretion and loss of smell, cold, Susr. 

wtrtarr dpl-vrita. See api - ^ 1. vri. 

apivya, mfn. See apicya. 

-puns (nom. -pwndn), m. not a man, 

a eunuch, Mu. iii ; 49, &c. — tva, n. the state of a 

A-pnnska, f. without a husband, Bhatt. 

a-puccha, mfn. tailless; («), f. the 

tree Dalbergia Sisu. 

a-punya, mfn. impure, wicked. 

-kpit, mfn. acting wickedly, wicked. 

_ ♦ 

’srgs d-putra , as, m. not a son, SBr. xiv; 

(< i-putra ), mf(ri)n. soilless, SBr. See. — ta ( c,p>utrd -), 

f. sonlessness, SBr. 

A-putraka, mf(rVvJ)n. soilless, Kathas.; Das. 
A-putrika, as, m. the father of a daughter not 
fit to be adopted as a son because of her not having 
any male offspring. 

A-pntriya, mfn. sonless, childless, SahkhGr. Sec. 

- puudr , ind. not again, only once, 
RV. x, 68,10. — anvaya, mfn. not returning, dead. 
— Svartana, n. or -Svritti, f. final exemption 
from life or transmigration, Jain.; Up. — ukta, n. 
or ~ukti, f.110 (superfluous) repet it ion. — diyamana 
(d-pu>mr-) ) mfn. not being given back, AV.xii,5,44. 
w-bhava, m. not occurring again, Car.; exemption 
from further transmigration, final beatitude, BhP. 
* bhSva, m. id. — Vb&u, not to recover conscious¬ 
ness, SBr. A-punah-pripya, mfn. irrecoverable. 

a-purana or a-puratana , mfn. not 
old, modern, new. 

a-purusha , mfn. unmanly. A-pu- 

smsbartha, tn. a rite which is not for the benefit 
of the sacrificer; not the chief object of the soul. 

d--pur og av a ,mfo .without a leader, 
AV. xx, 135, 7 ; AitBr.’u.uv&ky&ka, mfn. without a Puronu- 
v 5 ky 3 s SBr. 

* _ + 

A-parorukka, mfn. without a Puroruc, SBr. 

A-pnrobita, as, m. not a Purohita, SBr .; (mfn.), 
without a Purohita, AitBr, 

a-pushkala, mfn. *not eminent/ 

mean, low, Venis.; Hear. 

a-pushta , mfn. unnourished, lean; 
soft, L.; invalid, unimportant, Kpr. 

t a-pyshpd, raffajn. not flowering, RV. 
See ,; (as), rn. the glomerous fig tree. — pbala or 
•pb&la-da, m. * bearing fruits without flowering.’ 

‘ having neither flowers nor fruits,’ the jack tree, 
A n oca rpus Integrifoiia, the glomerous fig tree. 

apus, u$, n., v. 1. for vdpus , Naigh. 

5 a-pujaka , mfn. irreverent. 

A-ptijS, f. irreverence; disrespect. 

A-pSjita, mfn. not reverenced or worshipped. 
A-pnjya, mfn. not to be worshipped or revered. 

a-puta , mfn. impure, SBr.; KatySr.; 

not purified (by purificatory rites), Mn.; Gaut. 

*U*°P npd , as, in. (cf. pupa), cake of flour, 

meal, Sec., RV. Sec .; a kind of fine bread ; honey- 
| comb, ChUp.; wheat, L. — nab hi (apupa-), m. 
having a navel consisting of a cake, AV. x, 9, 5. 
- maya, mtn. consisting of cake, Pan. v, 4, 21, 
Sch, — vat (apf/pd-), mfn. accompanied with cake, 
RV.; AV. Apupddi,a gana of Pan.(v,i, 4). Apu- 
papibita, mfn. covered with cake, AV. xviii, 3, 63 . 

1. Apuplya, mfn. fit for cakes, Pan. v, 1, 4. 

2. Apuplya, Nom. P= °yati, to have a desire for 
cakes, KatySr. 

Apupya, mfn. = 1. apuplya, Pan. v, 1, 4 ; as, 
m. Hour, meal, L. 

apurani, f. the silk cotton tree 

(Bombax Heptaphyllum). 

a-purusha , mfn. lifeless, inanimate, 
RV. x, 155, 3. — fflma ( d-pfirusha -), mfn. not 
| killing men, RV. i, 133, 6. 

a-purna , mfn. not full or entire, in¬ 
complete, deficient; (am), n. an incomplete number, 
a fraction. — kala, mfn. premature; (as), m. in¬ 
complete time. — kala-ja, mfn. bom before the 
proper time, abortive. — ta, f. incompleteness. 

A-purti, is, f. non-accomplishment (of wishes), 


A-puryam 5 na, mfn. not getting full, KatySr. 

a-purvd , mf(fl)n. unpreceded, un¬ 
precedented, SBr. xiv, Sec .; not having existed before, 
quite new; unparalleled, incomparable, extraordinary; 
not first; preceded by a, Pan. viii, 3, I 7; (as), m., 
N. of a sacrifice (offered to Prajapati), PBr.; Vait.; 
(am), n. the remote or unforeseen consequence of an 
act (as heaven of religious rites), Nyayam.; a conse¬ 
quence not immediately preceded by its cause; (cna), 
ind. never before, AV. x, 8,33. — karman, n. a re¬ 
ligious rite or sacrifice (the power of which on the 
future is not before seen). —1&, f. or -tva, n. the 
being unpreceded, the not having existed before, in¬ 
comparableness, &c. — pati, f. one who has had no 
husband before, Pat. —vat, ind. singularly, unlike 
anything else. 

A-purviya, mfn. referring to the remote or un¬ 
foreseen consequence of an act, L. 

A-purvya(4), mf(ff)n. unpreceded, first, RV.; 
incomparable, RV. 

a-prikta, mfn. unmixed, uncom¬ 
bined (said of a word [as a and u , Prat.] or an affix 
[Pan.] consisting of a single letter, i. e. of one not 
combined with another). 

vpnp* - prinat , mfn. * not filling, not pro¬ 

pitiating by gifts, 5 stingy, RV. 

- prithak , ind.not separately,with, 

together with, collectively. — srnti,mfn. not audible 
separately, RPrSt. Aprithag-dlxarmaslla, mfn. 
of the same religion. 

a-prishta, mfn. unasked, Gaut. &c. 

to be looked for or expected ; to be wished or re¬ 
quired ; desirable. 

Apeksba, t. looking round or about, considera¬ 
tion of, reference, regard to (in comp.; rarely loc.); 
dependence on, connection of cause with effect or of 
individual with species; looking for, expectation, 
hope, need, requirement; (aya), ind. with regard to 
(in comp.) — bttddhi, f. (in Vaiseshika a 
| mental process, the faculty of arranging and methodiz¬ 
ing, clearness of understanding. 

Ap£kghita, mfn. considered; referred to; looked 
1 for, expected ; wished, required. 

Apdkslxitavya = ap'ekshariiya, q. v. 
ApdksMn, mfn. considering, respecting, regard¬ 
ful of, looking to (in comp. ; rarely gen.) ; looking 
for, expecting, requiring; depending on. Ap&csM- 
ta, f. expectation, Kum. iii, 1. 

1. Apeksbya -apekshaniya. 

2. Apekshya, ind. p. with regard or reference to. 

apej (Vy)> ape]ate, to drive away, 

RV. v, 48, 2 & vi, 64, 3. 

apendra, mfn. without Indra, SBr. 

a-peya , raf(a)n. unfit for drinking, 
not to be drunk, Mn. Sec. 

apd (Vi), P. A., apaiti, apayati (impf. 
A. dpdyata, RV. x, 72, 6) to go away, withdraw, 
retire, run away, escape; to vanish, disappear. 

Apiya, as, m. going away, departure ; destruc¬ 
tion, death, annihilation; injury, loss; misfortune, 
evil, calamity. 

Ap&yln, mfn. going away, departing, vanishing, 

Ap 4 ta, mfn. escaped, departed, gone ; having re¬ 
tired from, free from (abl. or in comp.) — bhl, mfn. 
one whose fear is gone, Mn. vii, 197. — rSkshasI, 
f. the plant Ocimum Sanctum (also apreta-r°). 

Ap&hi (Imper. 2. sg. in comp.) means 'exclud¬ 
ing, expelling.’ — praghasa (soil, kriya), f. a cere¬ 
mony from which gluttons are excluded, (gana 
mayuravyansaketdi.) — vSnijS (scii. kriya), f. a 
ceremony from which merchants are excluded, ib. 
— vftta (soil, laid), f. 'useful in expelling wind,’ the 
plant Poederia Foetida, Susr. 

’snrw apeksh (y/iksh), to look away, to 
look round, AV.; SBr.; to have some design; to 
have regard to, to respect; to look for, wait for; 
to expect, hope; to require, have an eye to, S 5 h.; 
with na, not to like, KathSs. 

Apdkshana, am, n.~ apekshd, L. 

Apdksbaplya, mfn. to be considered or regarded; 

a-pesala, mfn. unclever. 

A-pesas, mfn. shapeless, RV. i, 6, 3. 

I . apesh ( \/ish ), (aor. 3, sg. dp a at 
ych) to withdraw from (ab!.) } RV. v, 2, 8. 

apehi-praghasa, Sec. See ape. 

WWH a-paisuna , am, n. non-calumny, 


a-poganda , mfn. not under six¬ 
teen years of age, Mn. viii, 148 ; a child or infant, 
L.; timid, L.; flaccid, L.; having a limb too many 
or too few, L. 

apdcckad (ud-Vchad ), (iml. p. 

- chadya) to uncover, AsvSr. 

apddha, mfn. (Vvah), earned off, 

removed, taken away. 

apot-krish (Vbrisk), (ind. p. -fcn- 
s/iya) to disjoin, Kau$. 

apddaka, mf(a)n. waterless, water¬ 
tight, RV. i, 116, 3 ; not watery, not fluid, AV. ; 
(ikd), t. the pot-herb Basella Rubra or Lucida, L. 

apod-i ( Vi), to go away altogether, 

withdraw from (abl.), AV.; SBr.; AitBr. 

Apod-itya, (mfn.) n. irnpers. to be completely 
gone away from (abl.), SBr. 

apod-V 1. uh, to strip off, TBr. 

^ntT^riq apod-dharya. See an-apod - 
dkaryd . 

apd-naptri , &c. See 2. dp. 
apdbh ( vubh ), (Imper. 2. pi. dp6m - 

bhata) to bind, fetter, AV. viii, 8, li. 

Apobdba, mfn. bound, TS. 

Apombbana, am, n. a fetter, TS. 

apdrnu ( \/urnu), dp a nrnoti, dp or- 

yiute, once apornauti [KatySr.], to uncover, unveil, 
open, RV.; AV.; SBr.: A. to uncover one’s self, 
TS.; SBr. 

Apdrnava^ia, am, n. untying, Comm, on ApSr. 

^TCTT^ aposh ( Vush)=zapa-\ / 2.vas , q.v. 

apok (%/1 . uh), -uhati (impf. dpau- 
hat) to‘strip off. push away, frighten away, RV. 
&c. ; to remove or heal (diseases), Susr.; A. to keep 
j away from one’s self, avoid, Mn.; to give up, Ragh.; 

1 (in disputation) to object, deny, Sah. 

Apdha, as, m. pushing away, removing ; (in dis¬ 
putation) reasoning, arguing, denying. 

Apdbana, am, n, id. 

Apdhaniya, mfn. to be taken away, or removed, 
or expiated. 

Apdblta, mfn. removed ; (in disputation) denied 
(the opposite of stkdpita). 

Apdbya, mfn. - apohaniya. 

a-paurusha, a>m, n. unmanliness; 

superhuman power; (mfn.), unmanly; superhuman. 


d-p ra t ima ny uyam an a . 


A-paxtruskeya, mfn. not coming from men, 

d-paulkasa, as, m. not a Paul- 

kasa, SBr. 

^TflUfi^a-paushkaly a, am, n.immaturity. 
^TR apta. See dn-apta. 

apt as, as, n. a sacrificial act, Un. 

Aptur (only acc. sg. & pi. uram & tiros), m. (fr. 
I. dp 4- V tvar), active, busy (said of the Asvins, of 
Soma, of Agni, of Indra), RV. 

Apturya (4), am, n. zeal, activity, RV. iii, 12, 
8 & 51, 9. 

Apaa-raj, mfn. (apna = dpnas below), presiding 
over property, RV. x, 132, 7. 

A'pnas, as, 11. possession, property, RV. [cf. Lat. 
ops) ; work, sacrificial act, Naigh. ; Un. ; progeny, 
Naigh.; shape, ib. —vat (dpnas-), mfn. giving 
properly, profitable, RV. Apnah-stha, m. pos¬ 
sessor, RV. vi, 67, 3. 

aptu, mfn. small,tender [Comm.; but 
perhaps connected with aptur above, because also 
applied to the Soma], MaitrS.;TS.; SBr.; body,Un. 

— m&t, mfn. containing the word aptu, MaitrS. 
Aptor-y£ma,aj [SBr.&c] or-yJman, a [PBi.; 

Lsty.], m. a particular way of offering the Soma sacri¬ 

■w'Sq aptyd. See 2. dp. 

^TVN 1 *T apnavana , as, m., N. of a Risbi 

(appointed with the Bhrigus), RV. iv, 7,1; the arm, 
Naigh. — vEt, ind. like Apnavana, RV. viii, 102, 4. 

^qfrf ap-pati, is, m. See 2. dp. 

appadikshita or apyadikshita , 
as, m., N. of an author » apyaya-dikshita, q. v. 

ap-pitta, am, n. See 2. dp. 

WUJ dpya. See 2. ap. 

apy-aty-Varj (3. pi. - arjanti ) to 
add over and above, AitBr. 

VH apy - v ad, to eat off, SBr. xiv: Caus. 
adayati , to give more (food) to eat, AitBr. 

apy-aya. See 2. api. 

apy-ardham, ind. within proxi¬ 
mity, near to (gen.), SBr.; (cf. abhy-ardhds.) 

apy-y/ 1. as, -asti (1. pi. - shmasi ; 

Imper. -astu ; Opt. -shyat), Ved. (with loc. or local 
adv.) to be in, be closely connected with, RV &c.; 
to helong to (as a share), RV.; SBr. 

apy-\/ 2. as (Subj. A. 2. sg. - asyd - 

thdh) to insert, AitBr. 

apy-d-</hri (Pot. dpy a haret) to 
take or assume in addition, TS. 

*ngir apy-uta = api-\-uta, q.v, 

a-prakata, mf(a)n. unmanifested, 

unapparent; (am), ind. without having been per¬ 
ceived, Kathas. 

a-prakampa, mfn.unshaken ; firm, 
steady; unanswered, unrefuted. — tS, f. firmness, 
stability, unanswerabieness. 

A-prakainpin, mfn. not shaking, steady, AitAr. 

’fTTHfiT. a-prakara, mfn. not acting excel¬ 
lently, L. 

A-prakarana, am, n. not the principal topic, 
not relevant, to the main subject. 

A-prak?ita, mfn. not principal, not relevant to 
the main topic under discussion, not chief; occasional 
or incidental; not natural, 

A-prakriti, is, f. not an inherent or inseparable 
property, accidental property or nature. 

^iPE f iTr a-praiar.s^a,mfn.notexceeded; 


A-prakrish$a f as, m. a crow, L.; (cf. apa- 


a-prakalpaka, mf(*£a)n. not pre¬ 
scribing as obligatory. 

A-praklripta, mfn. not explicitly enjoined. 

— tS, f. the state cf not being explicitly enjoined, 

a-prakdnda , mfn. stemless, L.; 

(<7r), m. a bush, a shrub, L. 

a-prakasa, mf(fi)n. not shining, 
dark ; not visible, hidden, secret, Mn.; not manifest 
or evident; {am), ind. in secret, M11. viii, 351 ; 
(as), ni. indistinctness, darkness, Ragh. i, 68. 

A-prakaBaka, mf(/&i)n. not rendering bright, 
making dark. 

A-prakasamEna, mfn. not manifested, unre¬ 

A-prakEsita, mfn. id. 

A-prakasya, mfn. not to be manifested. 

- praketd , mfn. indiscriminate, un¬ 
recognizable, RV. x, 129, 3. 

'HUftJrT d-prakshita, mfn. undiminished, 
inexhaustible, RV, i, 55, 8. 

a-prakhara, mfn. dull, obtuse, L.; 
bland, mild, L. 

rTT a-prakhya-ta, f. want of a strik¬ 
ing or dignified appearance, MBh. xii, 5881. 

a-pragama , mfn. (in speech or dis¬ 
cussion) going too fast for others to follow, not to be 

a -p ragalbha, mf( a )n.not arrogant, 

modest; timid. 

H <d a-praguna, mfn. perplexed, L. 

a-/ >ragraha [TPrat.] or a-pragri- 
hya [RPrat.], as, m. not a vowel called pragrihya 
(q. v.) 

A-pragrEha, mfn. unrestrained, L. 

a-pracohkasa , without 

power of seeing, AV. viii, 6, 16. 

a-pracura , mfn. little, few. 

d-pracetas, mfn. deficient in un¬ 
derstanding, foolish, RV.; AV. xx, 128, 2. 

A-pracetita, mfn. not having been perceived, 

IT a -pracodita, mfn. undesired, not 
bidden or commanded, unasked, Mn. iv, 248. 

a-pracchinna , mfn. not split, 


A-pracchedya, mfn. inscrutable, L. 

a-pracyava , as, m. not falling in, 


A-pracy&vnka, mf(ff)n. not decaying, KaushBr. 

A-praoynta, mfn. unmoved, RV. ii, 28, 8; (with 
abl.) not fallen or deviating from, observing, fol¬ 
lowing, Mn. xii, 116. 

A-pracyuti, is, f. not decaying, SBr.; SankhSr. 

d-praja, mf(a)n. ( Vjan ), without 
progeny, childless, RV. i, 31, 5; Mn. &c.; (a), f. 
not bearing, unprolific, MBh. i, 449 1 . 

I. A-prajajni, mfn. not generative, having no 
power of begetting, SBr. 

A-prajanislxxm, mfn. id., MaitrS. 

A'-prajas [AV.] or a-prajas [SBr. Sec .; cf. P5n. 
v, 4, 122], mfn. without progeny, childless. —tS 
(< aprajds -), f. or apraj£s-tva, n. childlessness, AV. 

A-praJasyE, am, n. childlessness, TS. 

A-praj&tS, f. not having brought forth (cf. a- 
praja above), MBh. v, 3047. 

2. a-prcjnjni, mfn. ( Vjnd ), inex¬ 
perienced, inexpert, RV. x, 71, 9. 

A-prajna, mfn. not knowing, RamatUp. 

A-prajnSta, mfn. not known, TS.; Mm i, 5. 

A-pradnEtra, mfn. ( ix.pra-jildtri), not know¬ 
ing, erring, being wrong, TS, 

d-pranasa, as, m not perishing, 

SBr.; PBr. 

a-pranlta, mfn. (Vnl), unconse¬ 
crated, profane, Mn. ix, 317 ; (am), n. the act of 
frying clarified butter without consecrated water, 


^Th<uW a-pranodya, mfn. {Vnud), not to 
be turned away (as a guest), Mn. iii, 105 ; Gaut. 

rf a-pratarkya, mfn. not to be dis¬ 
cussed, L.; incomprehensible by reason, undefinable, 
Mn. i, 5 & xii, 29; BhP. &c. 

a-prata (Ved. loc. fr. prati), ind. 
without recompense, for nothing, RV. viii, 32, 16. 

^fTTiUR, m. want of brilliancy, 
dullness; meanness, want of dignity. 

a-prati, mfn. without opponents, 

irresistible, RV.; BhP.; (/), n. irresistibly, RV.vii.83, 
4 & 99, 5 ; AV. ; (ff), ind., see s. v. above. — l. -ru- 
pa, mf(a)n. of unequalled form, incomparable, R. 
&c. [cf. 2. a-pratiriipa, p. 58]. - rupa-katlifi , 
.f. incomparable or unanswerable discourse, L. — vlr- 
ya, mfn. of irresistible power, R. iv, 35, 4 Sc 38, 13. 

a-pratikara , mfn. trusted, con¬ 
fidential, L.; (end), ind. without recompense, Rajat.; 
(cf. a-prata.) 

A-pratikarman, mfn. of unparalleled deeds, R. 
A-pratikEra [Venis.] or a-pratlkSra [Mn. 
xii, 80 ; Kad.], mfn. not admitting of any relief or 



A-pratikErin, mfn. (said of patients) not using 
a remedy, not permitting the employment of a 
remedy, Susr. 

-pratikula , mf(a)n. not resist¬ 
ing, not obstinate. 

a-pratikhydta, mfn. not seen, 


a-pratigrihyd, mfn. one from 

whom one must not accept anything, SBr. xiv. 

A-pratiffraliana, am, n. not accepting (a girl 
into marriage), not marrying, R. 

_ A'-pratigxShaka,mf(f,£a)n.not accepting,SBr.; 

A-pratigrEhya, mfn. uaacteptable. 

TZVfKV a-pratigha, mfn. ( Vhan), not to 

be kept off, not to*be vanquished, Mn. xii, 28, &c. 

a-pratidvandva , mfn. ‘not hav¬ 
ing an adversary in battle,’ not to be vanquished, 
irresistible, R. Sec. — tS, f. unrivalledness. 

a-pratidhura, mfn. without a 

match in going at the pole of a carriage (as a horse), 

’fnrfinp a-pratidhrishta, mfn. ‘irresisti¬ 
ble,’ in comp, with -rsavas, mfn. of irresistible 
power, RV. i, 84, 2. 

A-pratidhrishya, mfn. irresistible, VS. &c, 

Winpftc' d-pratinoda, as, m. not repell¬ 
ing, MaitrS.; PBr. 

’STRfrtRTR a-pratipak&ha , infn. without a 

rival or opponent. 

a-pratipanya, mfn. not to he 

bartered or exchanged. 

’SUfirqftla - pratipatti, is, f. non-ascertain¬ 
ment ; not understanding, NyJyad .; the state of being 
undecided or confused, Sah. &c.; non-performance, 

A'-pratlpad, mfn. confused (vikala), VS. xxx, 8. 
A-pratipadyamEna, mfn. not consenting to 
(acc.), Sak. 

A-pratipanna, mfn. unascertained; unaccom¬ 

a-pratibandha, as, 'm. absence 

of obstruction; (mfn.) unimpeded, undisputed, direct 
(inheritance), not collateral or presumptive. 

a-pratibala, mfn. of unequalled 

power, R. 

oftV a-pratibodha, mfn. without con¬ 
sciousness, Ragh. viii, 57. — vat, mfn. id., MarkP. 

a-pratibruvat, mfn. not con¬ 
tradicting, AV. iii, 8, 3. 

’STirffT*? a-pratibha, mfn. modest, bashful, 
L.; (a), f. shyness, timidity, Nyayad. 

a-pratima, mf(d)n. unequalled, in¬ 
comparable, without a match. 

A-pratimEna, mfn. incomparable, RV. viii, 

96, 17- 

A-prattmeya, mfn. id., Hariv. 

a-pratimanytiyamana, mfn. 

being unable to show resentment or to retaliate anger 
for anger, AV. xiii, I, 31. 


?TCFftr a-pratiyaina -purva. 


ffl Mr#(i-pratiyatna-piirva, mff«'n 



i ' ;-y \ = artificially, natural, Sis. 

^TRPinpTn?^ a-pmtiuogin, mfn. not op- 

f •:?ei r.~t i:::•'»nipat:L»ie with ; not correlative to. 
^TUnnrnVH a-pratiyodhin, mfn. not hav- 

i".i an adversary,’ irresistible, MBit.; (cf. gana^w/jg- 

(-<- : . 

*Twl rt iMQ-pi ntiratha, mfn. id., SBr.,Sak.; 

, m., N. cf a Rishi (son of Indra and composer 
f * me hymn RV. x, 103) ; N. of a son of Rantinara, 
VP.; am , n., N. of the above-named hymn (coin- 
posed b\ Apratiratha), MaitrS.; SBr. &c. 

^nrtiTT.^ a-pratirava, mfn. uncontested, 


2. d-pratirupa, mffa)n. not cor¬ 
responding with, unfit, SBr. xiv ; odious, disagree¬ 
able, R. See. (For I. see a-praH.') 

_ _ _ 

a-pratilabdha-kama, mfn. 

never satiated in one’s desires. 

^narnr^rrf^t. d-prativddin, mfn. not con¬ 

tradicting, TS. &c. 

not reciting 

or shouting towards, SBr. 

A-pratisasta, mfn. not shouted towards, id. 

TfTTrTTTTT a-prutisdsana, mfn. not sub¬ 
ject to the orders of another, not giving a counter 
or rival order, completely under subjection. 

d-pratishikta , mfn. not poured 
upon, not moistened, MaitrS. 

A-pratishekya, mfn. (a ceremony) at which 
there is no pouring upon, MaitrS.; ApSr. 

_ ^ ^ 

'STTTnrnnj a-pratishiddha , mfn. ( V2. sidh), 
unprohibited, unforbidden,,Susr. 

A-pratiskedha, as, m.‘ non- prohibition,’ non¬ 
negation, an invalid objection. Nyayad. 

^fUnns^fW d-pratishkuta, mfn. not to be 

kept off, unrestrainable, RV. 

^THfrt^rt a-pratishkrita , mfn. to whom 
nothing has been opposed, Nir. 

a-pratishtabdha, mfn. not sup¬ 
ported by (instr.), Ap.; (cf. a-praiislabdha below.) 

^TTlfrT'? a-pratishtha , mfn. having 110 solid 

• ground, no value, fluctuating, unsafe, MBh.; Mn. iii, 
180, &c.; (as), m., N. of a hell, VP. 
A-pratishtha, f. instability, TBr. 
A-pratishthana, mfn. having no solid ground, 
AV. xi, 3, 49. 

A-pratisktkayuka, mfn. id., MaitrS. 
A'-pratishthita,,SBr.; AitBr.jTBr.; un¬ 
limited, BhP.; Jain. 

^ a-pratisamkrama, mfn. having 

no intermixture. 

^TTlfTO^n a-pratisamkhyd , f/not observ¬ 
ing,’ in comp, with -nirodha, m. the unobserved 
annihilation of an object, Buddh. 

a-pratistabdha , mfn. unre¬ 
strained, BhatJ.; (cf. a-pratishtabdha above.) 

a-pratikata , mfn. uninterrupted, 
unobstructed, irresistible ; unaffected, unimpaired, 
indestructible, uninjured ; not passed away, PSrGr. 
— netra, in. 4 whose eyes are unimpeded,’ N. of a 
deity, Buddh. 

a-pratihdra, as,m. not stopping, 
PBr.; (mfn.), without the syllables contained in the 
pratihdra (q.v.), Laty. 

A-pratiharya, mfn. not to be repelled, irre¬ 
sistible, R. 

a-pratikdra. See a-pratikdra, 

ynnrfatf a-pratiksha ,in fn. not looking hack - 

ward. ApSr.; ' d -pratiksham ), ind. without looking 

backward, SBr. 

_ ^ / + 

^TITimnrrrin a-praiighatita , f. the state of 

not having 'or meeting with) obstacles, of not being 
rer.rair.abie, MBh. xii, 9138. 

d-pratita, mfn. unapproached, un- 

artarkabie, RV.; AV. vii, 25, I; not understood, un- 

| common (as an expression), Sah. &c.; not merry, 
I sad, R. 

i A-pratiti, is, f. the state of not being under¬ 
stood ; mistrust, want of confidence. 

d-pratitta , mfn. not given back, 

AV. vi, 117, 1. 

^TtnfTq a-pratipa , mfn. not contradictory, 

not obstinate; (as), m., N. of a king of Magadha, VP. 

^TRrJH a-pratula, as , m. want of weight, 

want, L. 

a-pratta, mfn. (for a-pradatta), not 
given back, PBr.; (0), f/not given away (in marriage),* 
a girl, Nir.; Gaut. 

■^ntrCTgJ a-pratyaksha , mfn. not present to 

the sight, invisible, imperceptible. — ta, f. imper- 
ceptibility. — Rishta, mfn. not distinctly taught. 

’SnTKTR a-pratyaya, as, m. distrust, disbe¬ 
lief, doubt; not an affix, Pan. i, 1,69 ; (mfn.), distrust¬ 
ful (with loc.), Sak.; causing distrust; having no affix. 
— stha, min. (in Gr.) not pertaining to an affix. 

1 ^irwrenK a-pratydkhyata , mfn. uncon- 

tradicted, unrefuted, assented to. 

A-pratyakhyana, am, n. non-refutation. 
A-pratydkhyeya, mfn. not to be contradicted, 

a-pratyamnaya , as, m. not a 

contradictory statement, RPrSt. 

d-pratyalabhamana , mfn. 

not offering resistance, SBr. 

a-pratyrita , mfn. ( — an-arva), not 

encountering any resistance in (loc.), Nir. 

_ r * 

a-praihita , mfn. not spread, Nir. 


d-pradagdha, mfn. not burnt, SBr. 
a-pradadi , infn. not. liberal, AV. 

xx, 128, 8. 

A-pradanavat, mfn. id., R. 

d-praddha, as , in. not consuming 

by fire, SBr.; TBr.* 

a-pradlptagni, mfn. dyspeptic. 

u-pradugdha, mfn. not milked to 

the end, RV. iii, c,s, 16. 

^nf^nrfr d-prudripita , mfn. not thought¬ 

less, not careless, RV. i, 145, 2. 

^STTPIPT a-pradhana, mfn. not principal, 
subordinate, secondary, Pan. ii, 3, 19, See. *-ta, f. 
or -tva, n. inferiority. 

a-pradhrishya, mfn. not to be van¬ 

quished, invincible, MBh.; Pancat. 

d-prapadana , am, n. a bad place 

of refuge, SBr. 

A-prapada, as, m. non-abortiveness, TS.; TBr. 
A'-prapaduka, nun. not abortive, MaitrS. 

^TWRI-QJ a-prapdnd, mfn. not containing 
drinkable w r ater, AV. xx, 128, 8. 

a-prabala, mfn. inefficacious,weak. 

a-prabha, mfn. obscure; dull, L. 

d-prabhu , mfn. wanting power, un¬ 
able, incompetent (with loc.), RV. ix, 73, 9 ; AitBr. 
See. — tva, n. want of power, insufficiency, MBh.&c. 
A-prabhuta, mfn. insufficient, inadequate. 
A'-prabliuti, is, f. (Ved. instr. °lt), little effort, 

RV. x, 1 24, 7. 


d-prabhransa , as. m. not getting 

deprived of, not losing (with abb), SBr. 

a pramatta , mfn. not careless, care¬ 
ful, attentive,vigilant, SBr, &c. •« vat, mfn. id.,MBh. 
xii, 8889. 

A-pramada, as, m. care, vigilance, MBh. &c.; 
(min.), ‘careful, cautious,’ see -id below; ( d-pra - 
madam j, ind. attentively,carefully, AV.; VS.; with- 
our interruption, AV. —ta, f. the being cautious, 
Yajn. iii, 314. 

A-pramadin, mfn. careful, Mn. ii, 115, See. 

a-pramada, as, in. not pleasure, 

joylessness, MBh. xii, 10414. 

W1I a-prdmaya, mfn. imperishable, SBr. 

xiv; (cf. a-prdmi-satya .) 

A-pramayuka, mfn. not dying suddenly, AV. 
xix, 44, 3 ; TBr. 

A-pramiya, min. (that) which ought not to 
perish, ShadvBr. 

a-prama , f. a rule which i.s no 

authority (see a-pratnana ); incorrect knowledge. 

A-pramana, am. n. a rule which is no standard 
of action, MBh.; Sak. &c.; (in discussion) a statement 
of no importance or authority. — vid, mfn. incapa¬ 
ble of weighing evidence, BhP. — subka, as, m. pi. 
‘of immeasurable virtue,’ N. of a class of divinities, 
Buddh. Apramanitbha, as, m. pi. ‘of unlimited 
splendour,’ N. of a class of divinities, Buddh. 

A-pramita, mfn. unbounded, unmeasured ; not 
proved, not established by authority. 

A-praxueya, mfn. immeasurable, unlimited, un¬ 
fathomable, Mn. i, 3 & xii, 94, See.; not to be proved. 
Apramey&tman , m/of inscrutable spirit, ’ N. of Si¬ 
va. Aprameyaxmbh&va, mfn. efuniimited might. 

a-pramayuka . See a-prdmaya. 

A-pramiya. See ib. 

a-pramuditd, f. c joylessness,* (in 

Saiikhya phil.) N. of one of the eight Asiddhis. 

A-pramoda, as, m. joylessness, Mn. iii, 6 l« 
MBh. xiii, 2487. 

A-pramodamana, f., N. of another of the above 

’WSPJT a-pramura, mfn. not foolish, pru¬ 

dent, RV. i, 90, 2. 

a-pramrishyd, mfn. not to be des¬ 

troyed, indestructible, RV. 

a-prayata, mfn. not intent (on devo¬ 
tion), not prepared (in mind) for any important action 
or performance, M11.; Ap.; (once said of food) Ap. 

A-prayatya, am, 11 the state of being a-pra¬ 
yata, BhP.; Ap. 

a-prayatna, as, m. absence of ef¬ 
fort, indifference; (rnfn.), indifferent, apathetic in 
(loc.), Mn. vi, 26. 

’WITOTiT a-prayajd , mfn. without a Pra- 
y 5 ja, TS. 

a-praydnaka, am, n. halt (on a 

journey), Paucat. 

A-prayani, is, F. not going, not moving (used 
in execrations), Pan. viii, 4, 29, K;l$. 

A-prayapani, is, f. not allowing to go (used 
in execrations), Pan. viii, 4, 30, Sell. 

a-praydvam [VS. xi,7fj; AV.xix, 

55 ,1] or d-praydvan [AV. iii, 5, i], ind. (Vi *yn), 
not carelessly, attentively ; (cf. d-prdyu.) 

A'-prayucchat, mfn. attentive, RV.; AV. 

A-prayuta, mfn. id., RV. vii, 100, 2. 

A-prayutvan, mfn. id., RV. vi, 48, 10. 

Zh R'RW a-prayasa , as, m. absence of toil; 

(end), ind. easily, V 5 jn, iii, 115. 

a-prayukta, mfn. not used or ap¬ 
plied, MaitrS.; (of words) not in use, Pat.; unsuit¬ 
able, Pancat. — 15 , f. or -tva, n. unusualness (of 
expressions), S 5 h. 

A-prayoga, as, m. non-application; the not 
being in use (of words), Pat. 

A-prayojaka, mf. ika) n.not causing or effecting; 

a-pralambam y ind. without de¬ 

lay, L. 

a-pravadat, mf(a^)n, not roaring, 


a-pravargya , mfn. without the 

♦ » 

Pravareva ceremony. SBr.; KatvSr. 

J * * y 

a-pravartaka, mf(iito)n. abstain¬ 
ing from action, inert; not exciting to action. 

A-pravartaxia, am, n. the act of refraining 
from, not engaging in ; not exciting to any action. 

A-pravritta, mfn. not acting, not engaged in; 
not commenced, not instigated. 

A-pr&vrittl, is, f. not proceeding ; no further 
effect or applicability of a precept, KatySr.; abstain¬ 
ing from action, inertion; non-excitement; (in 

^sral*!! a-pravina . 

abaddha-vat . 

med.) suppression of the natural evacuations, con¬ 
stipation, ischury, &c, 

a-pravina, mfn. unskilful. 

^TUTtfTr a - pravita, f,(s eepra- V i?t), not im¬ 
pregnated, RV. in, 55, 5; iv, 7, 9; SBr.; KatySr. 


a -pravriddha , mfn. not excessively 
grown, (gana pravriddhcLdi, q.v.) 

d-praveda, mf(d)n. (said of heaven 


and earth, together with a-trasnu ), not insidious, SBr. 

a-pravlaya , as, m. not sinking 
down, AitBr. 

1. a-prasastd, mfn. not praised, 
fameless, RV. ii, 41, 16 & iv, 78, 4 ; not good, in¬ 
ferior, worthless; (am), n. dirt, natural excretion, 
Mu xi, 255. 

2. A-prasasta, mfn. not praised, blamable, RV. 

i, 167, 8. 

A-prasasya, mfn. not praiseworthy. 

a-prasakta , mfn. not addicted, not 

attached to. 

A-prasakti, is, f. non-addiction, non-attach¬ 
ment to (loc.), Mn. i, 89. 

A-prasahga, as, m. (in NySya phil.) want of 
connection with ; non-applicability, KatySr. 

WinffW a-prasanna , mfn. not quiet, not 

clear; turbid, muddy; displeased, unfavourable. 
A-prasfida, as, m. disfavour, disapprobation. 
A-pras&dya, mfn. not to be propitiated; un¬ 
appeasable, implacable. 

i .a-praSava, as, m. (, not 
preparing the Soma juice, KatySr. 

2. a-prasava, mfn. (Vq.sw), not 
being prolific;^.?),m. non-propagation. — dkarmin, 
mfn. (in Sankhya phil.) not having the property of 
producing (one of the characteristics of Purusha). 

A-prasuta, f. ‘ not giving birth to,’ a barren 

MtJfy a-prasahya, mfn. intolerable, M Bh.; 

irresistible, ib. 

A-prasakisknu, mfn. quite unable (to), Sis. i, 54. 
A-prasaka, mfn. not subjected to any force, 


aprasiddha, mfn. not settled, un¬ 
established ; unknown, uncelebrated; unusual, un¬ 
common, of no real existence, not current, not gene¬ 
rally known. — pada, n. an obsolete word. 

'ETtrenf a-prasuta , mfn. (, not al- 
lowed, SankhSr. (ofpersons); SBr. (of things). 

a-prastata, mfn. unconnected with, 
irrelevant, unsuitable to the time or subjec t ; not 
principal, not being the chief subject-matter; in¬ 
direct, accidental or extraneous; not laudable, R. 
— prasansS or -Btuti, f. ‘conveying the subject- 
matter by that which is not the subject-matter,’ (in 
rhetoric) implied or indirect expression. 

A-prastSivika, irrelevant to the subject- 

matter, Mslatfm. 

’SnrahfT d-prasransa, as, m. not falling 
down, TBr,; Kath.; AitBr. 

a-prahata , mfn. unhurt, intact ; 

untilled, waste, L. 

A-prakan, m(ac c.°/ia>iam)(n. not hurting, RV. 
vi, 44> 4- 

a-prahdran, mf(carl)n. not di¬ 
minishing, not vanishing, MaitrS. j 

d-prahita, mfn. not stirred up, 
RV. viii, 99, 7; not sent out, AV. vi, 29, 2. 

d-prahrita, mfn. (a stick) not ad¬ 
vanced for striking, SBr. 

a-prdkaranika, mfn. not con¬ 
nected with the subject-matter, Comm.on Mn. 111,285. 

A-prakrita, mfn. not principal , not original; 
special, particular; not vulgar, extraordinary, Mcar. 

a-pragrya, mfn. secondary, L, 

a-prdcina, mfn. not eastern,west¬ 
ern ; not old, modern, recent. 

^ His* a-prdjria , mfn. unlearned, ignorant. 

— ta, f. ignorance, Mn. iv, 167. 

1 Snn*II i .d-prdna,as,m. no breath.MaitrUp. 

2. A-prana, mfn. inanimate, lifeless, AV.; SBr. 
A'-pranat, mfn. id., AV. x, 8, 11; Latv. 

a-prdtilomya, am; n. the not 

being hostile to, Rajat. 

a-pradesika, mfn. not pointing 

to or suggestive of (the etymol. of a word), Nir. i, 13. 

a-pradhdnya, am, n. non-supe- 

rioritv, inferioritv, subordination. 

^ 7 J * 

I "df U(W d-prdpta, mfn. unobtained ; unar¬ 
rived; not accomplished, Yajn. ii, 243; not yet 
full-grown, Mn. ix, 88; not resulting (from any 
rule), Pan. viii, 2, 33, Sch. — kala, mfn. out of 
season, inopportune, ill-timed; under age; (am), 
11. an irregular debate, Nvayad. — yauvana, mfn. 
not arrived at puberty. — vikalpa [Ban. i, 4, 53, 
Comm.], m. or -vikkaska [Pan. i, 3, 43, Sch.], f. 
the optional permission of an operation which with¬ 
out such permission would not take place at all. 
— vyavakara, mfn. a minor in law ; under age, 
not of years to engage in iaw or public business. 
Apraptavasara, mfn. unseasonable, inopportune, 


A-pr&pti, is, f. non-attainment, non-acquisition. 

1 I. A-prapya, mfn. unobtainable, MBh. &c.; 
superl. -iatna, Mricch. 

2. A-prdpya, ind. p. not having obtained; not 
reaching. — karin, mfn. acting on any object with¬ 
out direct contact with it, Comm, on N vayad. — gra- 
kapa, n. perception of an object though the senses 
are not in any direct connection with it, Nyavad. 

a-pramdnika, mfn. unauthen- 
tic; unauthoritative. 

A-pramanya, am, n. absence or insufficiency of 
proof or authority. 

-prami-satya (Vmi with prd = 

fra, cf. a-prdmaya ), ‘of imperishable truthfulness,’ 
unalterably true, RV. viii, 61,4. 

a-prayatya. See a-prayata. 

a-prayv, mfn. (Vi.yu with prd = 
pra [cf. a-praydvani ); Padap. a-pr&yu fr. ay 11 or 
avus), not careless, assiduous. RV. i, 89, 1 & viii, 24, 
18; (u), ind. assiduously, RV. v, 80, 3. 

A-prayus, mfn. (Padap. d-prdyus fr. ay us) id., 
RV. i, 12 7, 5. 

a-prdrthaka , rnfn. not demanding 
in marriage, Comm, on M11. ii : , 27. 

a-pravrita, mfn. not covered, SBr. 


^‘CrnjT'H a-prdsana,am, n. not eating, M Bh. 

A-prasitri, mfn. not eating, MBh. 
A-prasitriya, mfn. not fit fo- food called prd- 
3 i/rd (q. v.), TS. 

d-priya , mfn.disagreeable, disliked; 

unkind, unfriendly ; (<w)» m. a foe, an enemy, Mn.; 
N. of a Yaksha, Buddh.; (d), f. a sort of skeat fish, 
Silurus Pungentissimus. — m-vada, see apriya-vd - 
din. — kara, mfn. ‘not giving pleasure,’ disagree¬ 
able, Mn.vii, 204. — bhagin, mfn. unfortunate. — va- 
din [Mn. ix, 81], rnfn. or apriyam-vada [Yajn, 
i, 73], mf(/F)n. speaking unkindly or harshly. 

A-prlti, is, f. dislike, aversion, enmity, Mricch.; 
pain. — kara, mfn. unkind, adverse ; disagreeable, 
Mn. xii, 28. Aprlty-atmaka, con¬ 

sisting of pain. 

A-preman, a, n. dislike, aversion, L.; (mfn.), 
iiutrieudlv, L. 

^nnT d-preta , mfn. not gone away, SBr. 

— r&kshasi. f. a plant (also called priia-rdkshasi 
or apcta-rdicshasT, q. v.) 

*TlN a-pra'isha , mfn. no't invoked with a 
prdisha (q. v.) mantra, Comm, on AsvSr. 

d-prdkshita, mfn. not sprinkled, 

not consecrated, SBr. &c. 

d-prddvta, mfn. not uttered, TS. 

mta-prdshita, mfn. not departed, not 
absent. 1 

A-prosMvas, m(nom. z’dn)(n. not gone away, 
staying, RV. viii, 60, 19. 

_ \i 

a-praudha , mf(r 7 )n. not arrogant, 
timid, gentle ; not capable of (Inf.), Rajat.; (<•?), f. 
an unmarried girl ; one very recently married and 
not come to womanhood. 

d-placa, mf(«)n. without a ship, AV. 

xix, 50, 31, Sec.; not swimming, — vat, mfn. with¬ 
out a ship, MBh. A-plaveaa.mfn. unable to swim. 

apvci (3; apod, Naigh.), f., N. of a 
disease (got in danger) v RV. x, 103, 12 (voc. apvc); 
AV. ix, 8, 9 (a^c. apn,'dm ). 

Apnvaya, Nom. A, : yatc, to get ill, become 
spoiled, TS.; (cf. anvart.) 

l^ap-sards, as[RV.; AV. &c.], oro/)- 

sard [AV. &c.], f.- (fr. 2 .dp+ Vsri), ‘going in the 
waters or between the waters of the clouds,’ a class of 
female divinities (sometimes called ‘ nymphs;’ they in¬ 
habit the sky, but often visit the earth; they are the 
wives oftheGandharvas (q.v.) and have the faculty of 
changing their shapes at will; they are fond of the 
water ; one of their number, RambhJ, is said to have 
been produced at the churning of the ocean). Apga- 
rah-pati, m. ‘ lord of the Apsarasas,’ Indra, L. 
Apsaras-tirtka, n. a pool in which the Apsarasas 
bathe, Sak. Apsara-pati, m. ‘ lord of the Apsara¬ 
sas,’ N. of the Gandharva Sikhandin, AV. iv, 37, 7. 

Apsaraya, Nom. A. apsarayatc , to behave like 
an Apsaras, Pan. iii, I, 11, Comm. 

Apsarayita, mfn. made or grown an Apsaias, 

Ap-sava, mfn. giving water, RV. x, 65, 3. 

Apsavys-t, mfn. (fr. 2 .apsu, q.v.), beinginthewa¬ 
ter (Varuna), MaitrS.; Kath.; cf. Pan. vi, 3,1, Comm. 

Ap-sa, mfn (Vw»), g^ing water, RV. 

dps as, as, 11. ‘ the hidden part of 
the body, ’the secret charms (ofa wife), RV.; AV.; SV. 
[‘breast or tfdAiror,’ Gmn.; ‘cheek/ BR.; ‘forehead, 
tace,’ NBD.]; hidden fault, sin, MaitrS.; Kath.; 
(apsvas) KapS. 


2. apsu (loc. pi. of 2. dp, q.v.), in the 

water or waters. — kshit, mfn. dwelling within the 
clouds, inthe region between heaven and earth, RV. 
i, 139, II. — cara, mfn. (Ved.) going m the waters, 
Pan. vi, 3, I, Comm. — ja [TS.] or -ja [RV. viii, 
43, 28, &c.], mfn. born in the waters, —jit, mfn. 
vanquishing among the waters or in the region of 
the clouds (N.of Indra), RV. — dlksha, f. conse¬ 
cration in water, — mat, mfn. possessed of or shining 
in the waters (e. g. the lightning which does not lose 
its brilliant nature in the clouds';-, MaitrS. &c. ^con¬ 
taining the word apsu , SBr.; N. of an Agni, ApSr. 

— yoga, in. the connecting power in water, AV. x, 
5,5. — yoni (apsu-'':, mfn.born from the waters,TS.; 
SBr. — vah, m(nom. pi. -vdhas)i\\. driving in water, 
SV. — shad, mfn. dwelling in the waters, RV. iii, 
3, 5 ; AV.; VS. — skadas, 11. dwelling in the waters, 
MaitrS. — skoma, rn. * Soma in water,’ a cup filled 
with water, SBr.; KatySr. — samsita {aps/i-), mfn. 
raised or excited in the waters, AV. x, 5,33. — kom- 
ya, m., N. of a man, MBh. ii, 107. 

a-phald, mf(a)n. unfruitful, barren, 

RV. x, 97, 15, &c.; vain, unproductive, RV. x, 71, 

5, &c.; deprived of virility, R. i, 49, 1 & 11 ; (<zx), m. 
Tamarix Indica ; (a), f. the Aloe (Aloes Pertoliata) ; 
Flacourtia Cataphracta. — kankshin, mfn. disinter¬ 
ested, not looking to beneficial consequences. — ta, 
f.or-tva, n. barrenness, unprofitableness. — prdpsu, 
mfn. one who desires no recompense, Bhag, A-pka- 
idkankskin ,mth. — a-pha la -kdh ks h in ,q. v., B hag. 

a-phalguy mfn. not vain, produc¬ 
tive, profitable, Sis. iii, 76. 

a-pkulla, mf(a)n.unblown (a rose),L. 

a-phena , mf(d)n. frothless; (am) } n. 

opium, L. 


d-banda, mf(d)n. not crippled, SBr. 

d-baddha % mfn. unbound, unre¬ 
strained, at liberty, TS. Sec. ; unmeaning, nonsensi¬ 
cal, N. — mukka, mfn. foul-mouthed, scurrilous, L. 

— mula, mfn. whose root does not hold last, is not 
firm, — vat, mfn. unmeaning, ungrammatical, RhP. 



T&rm a-bhava. 

A-baddbaka, mfn. unmeaning, nonsensical, L. 
A-badbira, mm. not clear. RV. viii, 45, 17. 

1. A-ba&bya, mfn. unmeaning, nonsensical, L. 
A-banddbra .ordefectively written 
mt’n. wirr.out bonds or ligatures, AV. iv, 16, 7, 
A-bandbaka, m:'n. not binding; (as), m.,N. of a 
man. x ". m. pi. his descendants, (gana up a k Mi.') 
A-bandbana, mfn. without fetters, free, RV. iii, 

c5- 6. 

1 . A-bandbya, mfn. not to be fettered or bound. 
A-bandbra. See a-banddhrd. 

a-badha. See a-vadha. 

2. A-badbya. See a-vadhya. 

V 5 fVT abadkd , f. segment of the basis of 

a triangle; (cf.dbadhdiw&avabadhd. InJainaPra- 
krit abaha or avdha.) 

a-bandku, mfn. without kindred, 

without companions, friendless, RV. i, 53, 9 & viii, 
21, 4; AV. vi, 122, 2. — krit ( d-bandhu -), mfn. 
causing want of companions, AV. iv, 19, I. 

A-b&ndbava, mfn. having no relation or kindred, 
lone, Mn. x, 55. — krita, mfn. not caused by rela¬ 
tion or kindred, Sak. 

fTW 2 .a-bandhya, mf(a)n. not barren, 

not unfruitful, fruitful, productive; (cf. a-vandhya, 
which is perhaps the better spelling.) 

a-baidy mf(a)n. weak, feeble, RV. v, 

30,9, Sec. ; (as), rn. the plant Tapia Crataeva; a king 
of Magadha,VP.; (d), f. a woman, Sak. &c.; N. of a 
woman, Kathas.; ( = acala) one of the ten Buddhist 
earths; (am), n.want of strength, weakness. — dban- 
van (1 abala -), mfn. possessing a weak bow, AV. iii, 
19,7. — vat, mfn. strengthless, Venis. A-balabala, 
mfn. ‘neither powerful nor powerless,’ N. of Siva. 

AbaUyas, mfn. (compar.) weaker, SBr.; superl. 
abalishtha, mfn. weakest, PBr. 

A-baly& [SBr.] or a-balya [SBr. xiv], am, n. 
weakness, sickness. 

a-balasa , mfn. not causing con¬ 

sumption, AV. viii, 2, 18. 

- bahir , ind. ‘ not outside,’ in the 

interior, in one’s heart, BhP. — dhS (d-bahir-), ind. 
not outside, SBr. — vasas, mfn. without an upper 
garment, BhP. 

a-bahu , mfn. not many, few. Abahv- 

aksbara, mfn. having not many (i. e. not more than 
two) syllables, RPrat. Ababv-ac,mfn. id.,Pan.Sch. 

’SPTTV a-badha , mfn. unobstructed, un¬ 
restrained ; free from pain ; (d), f. freedom from 
pain, M 3 rkP.; = a-bad/ui, q. v. 

A-badhaka, mf(<f)n. unimpeded, KathSs. 
A'-bftdbita, mfn. unimpeded, unobstructed, RV. 
x, 92, 8, &c.; unrefuted ; not forbidden, Comm, on 
Mn. iv, 

A-b 5 dhya, mfn. not to be opposed or pained. 


a-bdndhava. See a-bandku. 
a-bdlisa, mfn. not childish, Nir. 

ix, 10; R. 

a-baltndu , us, m. ‘not the infan¬ 

tine moon,’ full moon, Ragh. vi, 53. 

a-bahy a,mfn.not exterior,internal, 

Ragh. xiv, 50; without an exterior, SBr. xiv. 

ab-indhana , as, m. ‘ having water 
(ap) for fuel,’ submarine fire, Ragh. xiii, 14. 

’stfsrwhiq; a -bibhivas , m(instr. °bhyuskd ; 
nom. pi ,°bhyushas)fi\. (perf. p.) fearless, confident, 
RV. i, 6, 7; 11, 5 & ix, 53, 2 ; AV, iii, 14, 3. 
A-bibbyat, mfn. (pr. p.) id., RV. vi, 23, 2. 

a-bija , mfn. seedless ; impotent, 

Mn. ix, 79. 

A-bijaka, mfn. unsown, Mn. x, 7 1 . 

^T«ft*rr$n a-bibhatsd, f, non-disgust, TBr. 

mfn. unwise, foolish. — stha, mfn. not being in the 
conscience of. Comm, on Mn. iii, 266. 

A-budh [BrArUp.] or a-budba [SBr. xiv], mfn. 
stupid, foolish ; (a-hudha), as, rn. a fool, Hit. 

A-budhya,mfn. not to beawakened.RV. iv, io, 3. 

A'-budhyamana, mfn. not being awake, RV. 

A-bodba, as, m. non-perception; ignorance, stu¬ 
pidity; (mfn.), ignorant, stupid; puzzled, perplexed. 
— gamy a, mfn. incomprehensible. 

A-bodbanlya, mfn. unintelligible; not to be 
awakened or aroused. 

* 7 * a-budhnd , mfn. bottomless, RV. i, 
24, 7 & viii, 77, 5. 

^ a-huddha , mfn. unwise, foolish ; not 

seen or noticed, KaushBr.; R. — tva, n. foolishness. 

A-buddbi, is, f. want of understanding ; igno¬ 
rance; stupidity; (mfn.), ignorant, stupid ; (a-bud- 
dhyd), ind. unintentionally, — purva or-purvaka, 
mfn. not preceded by intelligence ; beginning with 
non-intelligence ; pm), ind, ignorantly. — mat. 

ab-ja, mfn. (fr. 2. dp and vjan), born ; 

in water; (as), m. the conch ; the moon ; the tree 
Barringtonia Acutangula ; N. of Dlranvantari (phy¬ 
sician of the gods, produced at the churning of the 
ocean) ; a son of Visala ; (am), «. a lotus ; a mil¬ 
liard (c i.padmd). — ja, m. ‘sprung (at the creation) 
from the lotus (which arose from the navel of Vishnu),’ 

N. of Brahma. — dr is or -nayana , mfn . lotus-eyed, 
having large fine eyes. — nabha, m. ‘ whose navel is 
a Iotus/N.ofVishnu. — netra,mfn. = -dris. — ban- 
dbava, m. ‘friend of the lotus,’ the sun. — bba- 
va [BhP.] or-bbu [Das.], m. Brahma. — bbogu, 
m. the root of a lotus, L. — yoni, m. ( — -ja above) 
N. of Brahma, Heat. — vabana, in. ‘carrying the 
moon (on his forehead),’ N. of Siva. — hasta, m. 
the sun (represented as holding a lotus in one hand), 
L. Abjada, m.‘eating lotus-leaves,* a swan,VarBrS. 

Ab-jS, mfn. born in water, RV. iv, 40, 5 Sc vii, 

3 4 * l6 - 

Ab-jit, mfn. conquering waters, RV. 

Abjinl. f. a multitude of lotus flowers, (gana 
pushkaradi.) — pati, m. the sun, Kathas. 

Ab-da, mfn. giving water, L.; (as), m. a year; 
a cloud, Bhatt.; the grass Cyperus Rotundus ; N. of 
a mountain, L.; (a), f., see abdaya below. — tan- 
tra, n., N. of an astronomical work, — vabana, rn. 
(for abja-vdhana,<\. v.), N. of Siva, L. — sata, n. a 
century. — sabasra, n. a thousand years. — sara, 

m. a kind of camphor. Abdardha, n. a half year. 

Abdaya (instr. of abda ), ind. out of desire of 
giving water, RV. v, 54, 3. 

Abdi-mat, mfn. possessed of clouds (abdi = abda), 
RV. v, 42, 14. 

Ab-durga, am, n. a fortress surrounded by a 
moat or lake. 

Ab-daivata, mfn. having the waters as divinities, 
praising the waters (said of certain hymns; see ab- 
litiga below), Mn. viii, 106 & xi, 132. 

Ab-dbi, is, m. (Vd/id), a pond, lake, L.; the 
ocean, Hit. &c.; (hence) the numeral 4. — kapha, in. 
cuttle fish bone, being considered as the froth of the 
sea. — ja, mfn. bom in the ocean ; (a?i), m. du. the 
Asvins, L. ; (d), f. spirituous liquor, L. — jivln, m. 
a fisherman, KathSs. — jbasha,m. a sea-fish, — ta- 
naya, an, m. du. the Asvins, Kathas. — drlpS, f. 
earth, L. — nagarl, f., N. of Dvaraka, the capital 
of Krishna. — navanltaka, m. the moon. — phe- 
na, rn. cuttle fish bone. — manduki, f. the pearl 
oyster. — Bayana, m. ‘sleeping on the ocean (at 
the periods of the destruction and renovation of the 
world),’ N. of Vishnu. — sSra, m. a gem. Abdby- 
agnl, m. submarine fire. 

Ab-bindu, us, m. a tear, BhP. 

Ab-bhaksha, mfn. living upon water, Yajn. iii, 
286 ; Gaut.; (as), m. a snake, L. 

Ab-bhaksbana.izw, n. living upon water (a kind 
of fasting), BhP. 

Ab-linga, dm’, n. pi. [Y 5 ih. iii, 30] or ab- 
linga, ds, f. pi. [Gaut.], N. of some Vedic verses 
[RV. x, 9, 1-3) addressed to the waters; (cf. ab- 
daivata above.) 

a-brahmacarya , mfn. not keep¬ 
ing a vow of continence, unchaste, Nir. 

A-brahxnacaryaka, am, n. incontinence, L. 

a-brahmanya , mfn. not favour¬ 
able to Brahmans, MBh.; BhP.; (am), n. an unbrah- 
manical or sacrilegious act, used as an exclamation, 
meaning ' help !’ * a disgraceful deed is perpetrated!’ 
Pahcat.; Kathas.; (Prakrit abbamhannam ), Sak. 

A-brahman, mfn. not a brahman, SBr.; with¬ 
out devotion (brdhman), RV.; without Brahmans, 
Mn. ix, 322 ; (d), n. not the brahman, TBr. Abra- 
bnxa-tS, f. want of devotion, RV.v, 33,3; VS. A- 

brabma-bandbuka, mfn. without brakmaban - 
! dhu (q. v.), Pan. vi, 2,173, KSs. A-brabma-vid, 
mfn. not knowing Brahma or the Supreme Spirit. 

I. A-brahmana, as, rn. not a Brahman, AV. 
&c.; (f), f. not a Brahman!; (a-brdhmand), mfn. 
without Brahmans, SBr, 

A-brSbmanya, am, n. violation of the duty of 
a Brahman, AsvSr. 

a-hruvat , mfn. (pr. p.), not speak¬ 

ing, silent, Yajn. ii, 76. 

a-bhakta, mfn. not received as a 
share, RV. i, 129, 5 & iii, 30, 7; not attached to, de¬ 
tached, unconnected with; not eaten. — ccbanda, 

m. or -ruci, f. want of appetite. 

A-bbakti, is, f want of devotion to, w r ant of faith. 

— mat, mfn. undevoted to, unbelieving. 

-bhaksha , as, m. or a-bhakshana , am, 

n. not eating anything, fasting. 

A-bbaksblta, mfn. not eaten, 
A-bbaksbya,mfn.nottobe eaten by(mstr.orgen., 

Mn.) — bbaksbana, n. eating of prohibited food, 
RSmatUp. — bbaksbln, mfn. eating forbidden food. 

a-bhagd, mfn. without enjoyment, 

unfortunate, AV. v, 31, 11. 

a-bhagna, mfn. unbroken, entire; 

uninterrupted. — kSma, mf(«)n. whose desire or 
wishes are not disturbed, Ragh. 

A-bhangura, mf(J)n. not fragile; unchange¬ 
able, invariable, firm ; (not curved), flat, plain, Susr. 

A-bbaJyamSna, mfn. (Pass.) not being detached; 
not being vanquished, Sec. 

a-bhadra , mfn. inauspicious, mis¬ 

chievous ; (am), n. mischief. 

d-bhaya, mf(d)n. unfearful, not 

dangerous, secure ; ( a-bhdya ), mfn, fearless, un¬ 
daunted, SBr. xiv ; (</j), m., N. of Siva ; of a natural 
son of BimbisSra ; of a son of Idhmajihva, BhP.; of 
a river in Krauncadvipa, BhP.; (a), f. the plant Ter¬ 
minals Chebula ; (d-bhayam), n. (ifc. f. a) absence 
or removal of fear, peace, safety, security, RV, See. 
(cf. dbhaya-tama below); ‘safety,’ (applied as proper 
name to) a child of Dharma and his reign in Plaksha- 
dvipa, BhP.; a kind of symbol procuring security, 
Heat.; a sacrificial hymn recited to obtain personal se¬ 
curity, Kaus.; the root of a fragrant grass, Andropo- 
gonMuricatum. — glri-vSsin, ‘dwelling on the 
mountain of safety,’ N. of a division of KStySyana’s 
pupils, Buddh. — giri-vihfira, rn. Buddhist monas¬ 
tery on the Abhayagiri. — m-karA [RV. x, 152, 2; 
AV. &c.] or -rn-krit [SBr.], mfn. causing safety. 

— jata, m., N. of a man, (gana gargetdi, q. v.) 

— dindima, m. a war-drum, L. — tain a ( dbhaya -), 

n. greatest safety, RV. x, 17, 5. —da, mfn. giving 
fearlessness or safety; (as), m. an Arhat of the Jainas; 
N. of \ king (the son of Manasyu and father of Su- 
dhanvan), Hariv.; VP. — daksbinS, f. promise or 
present of protection from danger, Mn. iv, 247, &c. 

— d&na, n. giving assurance of safety. — m-dada, 
m., N. of Avalokitesvara, Buddh. — pattra, 11. (a 
modern term), a written document or paper granting 
assurance of safety, a safe conduct. — prada, mfn, 
giving safety, Mn. iv, 232, See. — prad&na, n. =-• 
-ddna, Pancat. — yacanS.f. asking for safety, Ragh. 
xi, 78. — vacana,n. [Pancat.] or-v£o,f. [Hit.] as¬ 
surance of safety. — sAni, mfn. giving safety,VS.xix, 
48. Abbay&nanda, m., N. of a man. 

a-bhartrika , f. an unmarried wo¬ 

man ; a widow. 

’SW'ST a-bhava , as, m. non-existence; de¬ 

struction, end of the world. 

A-bhavanlya, mfn. what is not to be, what will 
not be. 

A-bhavan-mata-yosra or a-bhavan-mata- 
sombandba, as, m. want of fitness between words 
and the ideas expressed by them (a defect in com¬ 

A-bhavya, mfn. not to be, not predestined ; what 
ought not to be, improper. — hansa, m. a swan as 
it ought not to be (i. e, with black wings), L, 

A-bb&va, as, m. non-existence, nullity, absence ; 
non-entity, negation (the seventh category in Ka- 
nada’s system); proof from non-existence (one of the 
six praminas in VedSnta phil. [‘since there are no 
mice, therefore there must be cats here ’], see pra - 
mdno ); annihilation, death. 

^THT^n a-bhavana. 



A-bb&vanli, am, f. n. absence of judgment or 
right perception. 

A-bh&vaxuya, mfn. not to be inferred or con¬ 

A-bb§,vayitri, mfn. not perceiving, not infer¬ 
ring, not comprehending. 

A>bbavin, mfn. what is not to be or will not be, 
not destined to be. 

A-bbavya, mfn. id. 

-bhavadiya, mfn. not belonging 

to your Honour, Das. 

a-bhastra , mfn. without bellows. 

A-bbastrak§, or &-bbastrik£, f. a badly made 
or inferior pair of bellows (i.e. small), said to mean 
also (a woman) who has no bellows. Pan. vii, 3, 47. 

a-bkaga, mf(«)n. having no share, 

RV. x, 83, 5, &c. 

A-bhagin, mfn. having no share; not partici¬ 
pating in, excluded from (gen.) 

A-bhagya, mfn. unfortunate, wretched. 

a-bhashana, am, n. not speaking, 


wfHaM/, ind. (a prefix to verbs and nouns, 

expressing) to, towards, into, over, upon. 

(As a prefix to verbs of motion) it expresses the 
notion of moving or going towards, approaching, &c. 

(As a prefix to nouns not derived from verbs) it ex¬ 
presses superiority, intensity, &c.; e. g. abhi-tdmra, 
abki-nava, q. v. 

(As a separate adverb or preposition) it expresses 
(with acc.) to, towards, in the direction of, against; 
into, SBr. & KstySr.; for, for the sake of; on account 
of; on, upon, with regard to; by, before, in front 
of; over. It may even express one after the other, 
severally, Pan. i, 4, 91, e. g. vriksham vriksham 
abhi , tree after tree [cf. Gk. dy<pi ; Lat. ob; Zend 
aibi, aiwi; Goth, bi; Old High Gcrrn.^/]. 

Abb. it a, mfn. (Pan. v, 2, 74) lustful, libidinous, 
Ragh, xix, 4; (cf, I. abhika and aiiuka) ; (ur), m. a 
lover, Naish. 

Abh.i-tar6.rn [MaitrS.] or abbi-tar£xn [SBr.; 
AitBr. (see 2. abhi)], ind. nearer. 

Abbi-tas,ind. near to, towards, MBh.&c.; near, in 
the proximity or presence of (gen.), Bhag. Sec. ; (with 
acc.) on both sides, SBr, Sec. ; (with acc.) before and 
after, AsvSr.; KatySr.; Gant.; (with acc.) on all 
sides, everywhere, about, round; entirely, MBh.; 
quickly, L. Abhitah-aara, mfn. running on both 
sides. Up. Abbltas-cara, as, m. pi. the attendants, 
retinue, MBh. &c. 

Abbito (in Sandhi for abhitas). — deva-yajana- 
m&tra-desa, mfn. whose space on all sides suffices 
for a sacrificial ground, KitySr. — bhfivin, mfn. 
being on both sides, Pan. vi, 2, 182. — rStrain, 
ind. near (i. e. either just at the beginning or end of) 
the night, SBr. — 'stbl (abhitd-), mfn. surrounded 
by bones (as the eyes), SBr. 

abhi-Vham (fut. - kamishyate ) to 
desire,love,TBr.: Cans.-kdmayafe,id., MBh.; BhP. 

Abhi-k&ma, as, m. (ifc. f. a) affection, desire, 
N.; BhP.; (mf(J)n.), affectionate, loving, desirous 
(with acc. or ifc.); ( am ), ind. with desire, L.; (cf. 

'Iff \/ k amp ,-k amp ate,to tremble 

vehemently, MBh. iii, 15721; Caus. -kampayati, 
to stir, allure, KatySr. 

abhi-^kahksk, -kahkshati, °te, 
rarely Caus P-ay ate, to long for, desire ; to strive. 

Abbi-kSixksb&, f. longing for, desire (with acc. 
or ifc.) 

Abbl -k&akshl ta, m fn. 1 onged for, wish ed, d esi red. 

Abhi-kSflkshin, mfn. longing for, desiring (with 
acc. [BhP.] or ifc. [Mn. iv, 91, &c.]). 

abhi-kala, as, m., N. of a village, 

R. ii, 68, 17. 

wfirersi abhi-Vkas, Intens. -cakasiti (1. 

sg. °simi ; Imper. 2. sg. °sihi ; impf. 1. sg. -acaka- 
Jam) to illuminate, irradiate, VS.; to look on, to 
perceive, RV.; §Br. xiv. 

abhi-</kut$, to revile, inveigh 
against, R. ii, 75, 2. 

abhi-y/kush, -kushndti , to tear, 

pull at, pinch, Susr. 

abki-Vkuj, to twitter, warble, R. 

abki-\b 1. kri, to do with reference 

to or in behalf of, SBr.; (perf. 2. pi. -cakra) to pro¬ 
cure, effect, AV. iii, 9, 1 ; (with nivesam) to settle. 
Abbi-karana. See svapn&bkikdrana. 
Abhi-kriti, is, f., N. of a metre (containing one 
hundred syllables'!, RPrat. &c. 

Abbi-kritvarl, f. ‘producing (diseases),’ a female 
demon, AV. ii, 8, 2. 

abhi-Vkrish, -karskati, to over¬ 

power, MBh. iii, 15064. 

1 . kri, -kirati , to pour over, 

throw over, cover. 

’SrfwfR abhi-Vk trip , A. (p. - kalpamana ) 

to be adequate to, be in accordance with (acc.), VS. 
xiii, 25: Caus. -kalpayati, to put in order, R. 

Abhi-klripta, mfn. being adequate to, in accord¬ 
ance with, SBr.; Up. 

abhi-kmyam, ind. (Vknuy), so 

as to bemoisten, SBr. xiv. 

^3 insolent,haughty, 

RV. iii, 34, 10. 

abhi-v'kr and (aor. 2.s g.-kran) to 

shout at, roar at, neigh or whinny at, RV.; AV.; 
Llity.: Caus. (aor. - ankradat ), id., RV. ix, 68, 2 & 
82, I: Intens. (p. -kdnikradat), id., RV. 

Abbi-kranda, as, in. a shout, MBh.; tndrasyd- 
bhikranda, m., N. of a Saman. 

abhi-Vkram (aor. -akramitj ind. 

p. -krdmyd) to step or go near to, approach, RV. 
Sec. ; to attack, overpower, RV. vi, 49, 15 Sc ix, 40, 
I ; to step upon ; to undertake, begin, RPrat.; (with 
gamandya) to get on one’s way, R. i, 77, 18 : Caus. 
-kramayati, to bring near, TS. 

Abhi-krama,fl.r, m. stepping near, approaching; 
assault, attack, L.; overpowering, PBr.; Gaut.; as¬ 
cending; undertaking, attempt, beginning. — nfisa, 
m. unsuccessful effort, Bhag. 

Abhi-kramana, am, n. stepping near, approach¬ 
ing. Gaut. See. 

Abbi-kranta, mfn.approached; attacked; begun; 
(am), n.-abhi-krdnti, PBr. 

Abbl-kr&nti, is, f.,Ved. overpowering, bringing 
into one’s possession, TS.; AitBr. Sec. 

Abhi-krSntin, mfn. one who has undertaken 
(the study of), i.e. conversant with (loc.), Laty. 
Abbi-kr&maxn, ind. so as to step near, KatySr. 

’Wfastf abhi- Vkri, to buy for a special 


purpose, SBr. 

Xffaip^abhi-s/krudh, to be angry with 
(acc.), Pan. i, 4, 38, Sch.; Vikr. 

AJbi-kruddba, mfn. being angry, MBh.; BhP. 

abhi-Vkrus , to cry out at, call 

out to, to call to (in a scolding manner), AV. Sec. ; 
to lament with tears, bemoan, R. iv, 24, 22. 
Abbi-kr6saka, as, m. a reviler (nindaka), VS. 

ab hi-ks h a ttri, ta ,m .( x^kshad ) ; ^ 1 o ne 

who carves and distributes (food),’ an host, RV. ii, 
29, 2 & vii, 21, 8; [‘a destroyer/ Say.] 

a-bhiksha-da [Padap. abhi-ksha- 

da), mfn. giving without being asked, RV. vi, 50,1; 
[according to the Padap. (cf, abhi-kshattri) ‘destroy¬ 
ing, a destroyer,’ SSy.] 

A'-bbiksbita, mfn. not asked for aims, SBr. 

abhi-Vksham (Opt. -kshametaj 

Imper. 2. pi. - kshamadhvam) to be gracious, pro¬ 
pitious to (dat. or loc.), RV.; ^to pardon (perf. Opt. 
2. sg. -cakshamithah), RV. ii, 33, 7. 

abhi-^kshar (aor. 3. sg. - akshah, 
RV. ix, 97, 45) to flow near or round, RV.; SBr.; 
to pour on, AV. 

frfirf ^{abhi-\/k$kip (only P., Pan. i, 3, 

80 ; pr. p. -kshipdt) to fling at (as the lash of a whip 
at a horse), RV. v, 83, 3 ; to excel, Bhatt. 

abhi-Vkhan, to dig up, turn up 

(the soil), SBr. Sec. 

i. abhi-y/khya (Suhj. I. 2 . 3. sg. 

-khyam, -khyas 8c -khyds, -khydt; impf. 3. sg. abhy 

dkhyat; ind. p. -khydya) to see, view, perceive, 
RV.; to cast a kind or gracious look upon any one, to 
be gracious, RV.; (impf. 3. pi. abhi dkhyati) TS.: 
Caus. k/iydpayati , to make known, Mn. Sec. 

2. Abhi-khya, f. a gracious look, RV. x, 112, 
10; splendour, RV. i, 148, 5 & viii, 23, 5 ; beauty, 
Ragh. &c.; fame, glory, Kathas.; telling,L.; ‘calling, 
addressing/ a name, appellation. 

Abbi-khyata, mfn. become known, manifested, 
MBh.; (neg. an-') Yajh. iii, 301. 

Abbi-kbyatrx, ta, m. a supervisor (N. of Indra), 
RV. iv, 17, 17. 

Abbi-kby 3 .n&, am, n. fame, glory, L. 

abhi- s/gam, -gacchati, to go near 
to, approach (with acc.); to follow, Kath.; R.; to 
meet with, find; to cohabit (said of men and 
women), Yajn. ii, 205, Sec.; to undertake; to get, 
gain, obtain, AV.; SBr. &c.; (with mdnasa or me- 
dhdya or hridayend) to understand, RV. iii, 60, 1 ; 
TS.; SBr.: Caus. -gamayati, to study, MBh. i, 1295. 
Abhi-gracchat, mfn. approaching, Sec. 
Abhi-gata, mfn. approached, &c. 
Abbl-gantrl, ta, m. one who understands, SBr.; 
‘one who pursues/ insidious, Kath.; one who has 
intercourse with a woman. 

Abbi-guma, as, m. (gana anusatikddi, q. v.), 
approaching ; visiting, Megh.; Ragh. v, 1 1; sexual 
intercourse, Yajh. ii, 291. 

Abhi-g'amana, am, n. = abhi-gama; the act of 
cleansing and smearing with cowdung the way lead¬ 
ing to the image of the deity (one of the five parts 
of the updsana with the Ramanujas), Sarvad. 

1. Abhi-gamya, mfn. to be visited, Kum. vi, 56, 
&c.; accessible, tempting (for.a visit), Ragh. i, 16. 

2. Abbi-gamya, ind, p, having approached. 
Abbi-gamiii,mfn. having sexual intercourse with 

(in comp.). Mn. iii, 45 ; Yajh, ii, 282, Sec. 

faflZabhi-gara. See abhi-i.gri below. 
abhi-Vgarj , to roar at, bawl at, 

raise savage or ferocious cries, MBh. &c. 

Abhi-g-arjana, am, n. ferocious roaring, up¬ 
roar, R. 

Abhi-g-arjita, am, n. a savage erv, uproar, R. 

’stfvrm abhi-\b I. yd, -jigdti (impf. -ajigdt j 

aor. Subj. -gat) to go near to, to approach, arrive at, 
RV. Sec.; to get, gain. 

abhi-Vgah , A. (p. -gahamuna) to 

penetrate into (acc.), RV. x, 103, 7. 

aohi-gupta, mfn. guarded, pro¬ 

Abbi-gnpti, is, f. guarding, protecting, SBr.&c. 
Abbl-goptri, mfn. guarding, protecting, SBr. 

ij dbhi-gumphita, mfn. strung to¬ 

gether, interwoven, Sis. 

abhi-Vgur (Subj. -jugurat; Opt. 

2. sg. -juguryds) to assent, agree, approve of, RV. 
Abhi-grurta,mfn. approved of,RV. i, 162,15 ;TS. 
Abbi-gurtl, is, f. songofpraise,RV. 1,162,68c 12. 
Abbi-srusy&, (Ved.) ind. p. having approved of, 
RV. ii, 37, 3. 

abhi-gridhna, mfn. Seemithyabhi- 


abhi-y/ 1, gn, -grinati , to call to or 

address with approbation ; to join in (acc.); to wel¬ 
come, praise ; to approve of, accept propitiously, allow, 
Abhi-gara, as, m. a calling out in approbal on 
(part of the sacrificial ceremony), VS.; Katy&r.; the 
priest who calls out approvingly (to the other priests), 
MaitrS.; L 5 ty.; (cf. apagara.) 

abhi-\/gai (Imper. 2. sg. -gaya or 

-gaya ; 2. pi. -gdyata) to call or sing to (acc.), 
RV.; to enchant, AitBr.; to sing (a hymn, Sec.), 
SBr.&c.; to AH with song, R.; to celebrate in song, R. 

Abbl-gita, mfn. addressed or praised in song, RV. 
ix, 96, 23. 

Abbi-gesbna, mfn. calling to, AitBr. 

abhi-grasta, mfn. = abhi-panna 

(overcome), L. 

abhi -\/ grah , -grihnati, to take hold 
of, take up (from the soil),TS. &c.; to accept, receive, 
MBh.; to set (as a blossom), BhP.; to lay together, 
to fold (the hands), see abkigrikita-pdni below; 


abhi-grihita . 


Caus. -grahayati , to catch, surprise, e.g. rupdbhi- 
grdhita, taken in the very act, Das. 

Abhi-grihlta, mm. taken hold of, Sec. — pSni, 
mfn. having the hands joined, BhP. 

Abhi-grata, as, m. seizing, taking hold of; at¬ 
tack, onset, L.; defiance, challenge, L.; robbing, 
plundering, L.; authority, I,.; a vow, Jain. 

Abhi-grahana, am, n. robbing, L. 

Abhi-gr&hitri, mfn. one who seizes, MaitrS. 

rubbing, friction, L.; possession by an evil spirit, L. 

^rfmJTiT abhi-ghdta,as,u] striking, 

attack ; infliction of injury, damage, Mn. xii, 77, &c.; 
striking back, driving away, warding off; abrupt 
or vehement articulation (of Vedic text), VPrat.; 
(am), n. an irregular combination of consonants, i.e. 
the combination of the fourth letter of gutturals, 
cerebrals, &c. with the first or third letter, of the 
second with the first letter, and of the third with the 
second letter of those classes of consonants. 

Abhi-ghat aka, mf {ihd)n. counteracting, re¬ 

Abhi-ghatita, mfn. struck, wounded (ifc. as 
sar&bhighdtita , wounded by arrows). 

Abhi-ghatin, mfn. (generally ifc.) striking, at¬ 
tacking, hurting; inflicting injury; (T), m. an assail¬ 
ant, enemy, Hit. 

ahhi-\/ghri (perf. Pass. p. abht-ghri- 

ta, see below): Caus. -gkdrayati, to cause to trickle 
down, TS. &c.; to sprinkle with, SBr. Sec. 

Abhi-gh&ra, as, in. sprinkling over, SarikhGr.; 
scattering over, mingling with, Gobh.; ghee or clari¬ 
fied butter, L. 

Abhi-gh&rana, am, n. the act of sprinkling 
ghee, besprinkling, Kaus.; KatySr. 

Abhl-gh&rita, mfn. sprinkled with, AV. &c. 

Abhi-gharya, mfn. to be sprinkled. 

Abhi-ghrita, mfn. sprinkled (as ghee), dropped 
upon, TS.; sprinkled with, BhP. 

abhi-Vghra , -jigkrati (ind. p. -ji- 
ghrya, Gobh.) to snuffle, smell at; to bring the nose 
close to another’s forehead in caressing, or as a token 
of affection, TS. Sec .; to smell, scent, Kad. 

Abhi-ghrana, am, n. smelling at, caressing, 
Comm, on Gobh, 

Abhi-jighrana, am, n. id., Gobh. 

Abhi-jighrat, mf(du. anti) n. caressing, RV. i, 
185, 5. 

abhi-\/caksh , -cashte (2. sg. -ca- 

hshase,RV.v, 3,9; VedInf.-r<£6.r^,RV.)tolookat, 
view, perceive, RV.; BhP.; to cast a kind or gracious 
look upon any one, RV.; to address, BhP.; to assail 
with harsh language, RV. vii, 104, 8; to call, BhP, 

Abhi-cakshana, am, n. conjuring, incantation, 
AV. vi, 127, 2 ; (a), f. (in augury or astron.) ob¬ 
servation (of the sky), AV. ix, 2, 21. 

Abhi-cakshya, mfn. manifest, RV. viii, 4, 7. 

abhi-\/ car (Ved.Inf. abhx-carita - 
vat, TBr., & abhi-caritos, Kath.; cf. Pan. iii, 4, 
13, Sch.) to act wrongly towards any one; to be 
faithless (as a wife) ; to charm, enchant, bewitch, 
RV. x, 34, 14 (Subj. 2. pi. -caratdbhl); AV. See. ; 
purvdbhicarita (f. perf. Pass, p.) = piirva-dig-ga¬ 
min 1, R. i, 34, 10. 

Abhl-cara, as, m. a servant, L. 

Abhi-caramya, mfn. fit tor enchanting or exor¬ 
cising, SBr. &c.; (neg. an-), Comm, on Mn. xi, 197. 

Abhi-car&, as, m. exorcising, incantation, em¬ 
ployment of spells for a malevolent purpose, A V. &c.; 
magic (one of the Upapatakas or minor crimes). 
— kalpa, m., N. of a work on incantations (belong¬ 
ing to the Atharva-veda). — jvara,m. a fever caused 
by magical spells. — mantra, m. a formula or prayer 
for working a charm, an incantation. — yajna or 
-homa, m. a sacrifice for the same purpose. 

Abhi-cSraka,mf(f£ff)n. enchanting, exorcising, 
conjuring, VarBrS. &c. ; a conjurer, a magician. 

Abhi-cRranlya, mfn. to be enchanted, L. 

Abhi-c&rlta, mfn. enchanted, charmed. 

Abhi-c&rin, mfn. enchanting, AV. x, 1,9. 

Abhi-carya, mfn. —abhi-edramya, L. 

AbhI-cRra, as, m. exorcising, incantation, Ap. 

abhi-cakas. See abhi-Vkds. 

abhi-Vcint (impf. - acintayat ) to 

reflect on, MBh. xiii, 4341. 

abhi-cihnaya , Nom. P. (perf. 
Pass. p. - cihnita ) to mark, characterize^, iv, 42,12. 

abhi-V cud, Caus. -codayati, to 

impel, drive ; to inflame, animate, embolden ; to in¬ 
vite ; to fix, settle ; to announce, inquire for (acc.), 
MBh. i, 2913. 

abhi-caidyam , ind. against the 

. prince of the Cedis (i. e. SisupSla), Sis. ii, 1. 

abhi-cchad (Vchad), abhi-ccha- 

I ' • 

dayati, to qover over, SBr.; Kaus. 

abhi-cchdyam , ind. in dark¬ 
ness, AV. xiii, 1, 57. 

abhi-\/jan , cl. 4. A. -jdyate (Ved. 
Inf. abhi-janitos, SBr.) to be born for or to, RV. 
i, 168, 2, &c.; to claim as one’s birthright; to be 
bom or produced ; to be reproduced or born again, 
Bhag. &c.; to become; Caus. -janayati (with abhi- 
jitanam) to reanimate, revivify, Sarvad. 

Abhi-ja, mfn. ifc. produced all around, L. 

Abhi-jana, as, m. family, race; descendants; 
ancestors; noble descent; the head or ornament of a 
family, L.; native country, Pan. iv,3, 90; fame, noto¬ 
riety,Rajat.&c. — vat,mfn. ofnobledescent,Sak.&c. 

Abhi-jfita, mfn. born in consequence of; bom, 
produced ; noble, well-born ; obtained by birth, in- 
bred ; fit, proper, L.; wise, learned, L.; handsome,R.; 
Kum. i, 46 ; {am), n. nativity, BhP.; high birth, 
nobility. — tS, f. high birth, nobility. 

Abhi-jSti, is, f. descent, birth, Comm, on Nir. 
ix, 4; ifc. °tlya (f. a), R. vi, 10, 24. 

abhi-Vjap , to mutter over or 
whisper to, R. 

abhi-Vjabh , Intens.(p.^/<f?t/a6Aa- 

na ) to try to swallow, open the month to do so, AV. 
v, 20, 6; Kaus. 

abhi-Vj alp, to address; to ac¬ 
company with remarks; to advocate; to settle by 
conversation, MBh. iv, 711. 

abhi-Vji, -jayati, to conquer com¬ 
pletely, acquire by conquest, AV.; TS. &c.: Desid. 
-jigishati, to try to win, attack, Susr. 

Abhi-jaya, as, m. conquest, complete victory. 

Abhi-Jit, mfn. victorious,VS. xv, 7; bom under 
the constellation Abhijit,Pan. iv, 3,36,(cf. dbhijita ); 
(/), m., N. of a Soma sacrifice (part of the great 
sacrifice GavSm-ayana), AV.; SBr. &c.; N. of a son 
[Hariv.] or of the father [VP.] of Punarvasu ; of 
Vishnu, L.; N. of a star (a Lyrse), L.; of the 20th (or 
22nd) Nakshatra, AV. &c.; the eighth Muhurta of 
the day (about midday), Kaus. &c. Abhij id-vis va- 
jitau, f. du. the two Soma sacrifices called Abhijit 
and Visvajit, SBr. Abhijin-muhurta, m. the 
eighth Muhurta (the period comprising twenty-four 
minutes before and twenty-four after midday). 

Abhl-jlta, as, m., N.of a Nakshatra (see abhi¬ 
jit), MBh.; of the eighth Muhurta (see abhi-jit), 
MBh.; Hariv. 

Abhi-jltl, is, f. victory, conquest, SBr.; AitBr. 

abhi-jighrana . See abhighra. 

abhi-Vjush (Subj. - jujoshat; pr.p. 
-jushand) to be pleased with, like, RV. iv, 23,1 Sc 4. 

Abhi-jUBhta,mfn .visited, frequented, surrounded 
by, possessed of, MBh. &c. 

^ fa*^*^abhi- y/jrimbh, to open the mouth 
wide (for swallowing), R. vi, 2, 18. 

wfWsrr abhi-Vjnd, -janati, °nite, to recog¬ 
nize, perceive, know, be or become aware of ; to 
acknowledge, agree to, own ; to remember (either 
with the fut. p. or witfoj yad and impf.), P 5 n. iii, 2, 

112 seqq.; Bhatt. 

Abhi-jna, mf(i)n. knowing, skilful, clever ; un¬ 
derstanding, conversant with (gen. or ifc.); (a), f. 
remembrance, recollection, Pan. iii, 2, 112 ; super¬ 
natural science or faculty of a Buddha (of which five 
are enumerated, viz. I. taking any form at will; 2. 
hearing to any distance ; 3. seeing to any distance ; 
4. penetrating men’s thoughts; 5. knowing their state 
and antecedents). — tfi,f. [Ragh.vii,6l] or-tva, n. 
the knowledge of. 

Abhi-jnSna, am, n. remembrance, recollection ; 
knowledge, L.; ascertainment; a sign or token of 

remembrance; any sign or token serving as a proof 
for (loc. or prati ), R* abhij flan a - sakuntala, q .v., 
Sah. — pattra, n. certificate. — sakuntala, n. title 
of a play of Kalidasa, i. e. (the ndtaka or play') on 
the subject of ‘ token-(recognized)-Sakuntal 5 / Sak. 
Abhl-jnSpaka, mfn. making known, BhP. 
Abhi-jnayaxn.. See yath dbh ijhayam. 

T^abhi-y/jnu, ind. on the knees, RV.; 
up to the knees, RV. i, 37, 10 Se viii, 92, 3. 

abki-v'jval, to blaze forth, MBh.; 

Caus. -jvalayati, to enlighten, illuminate, Vait.; In- 
tens .-jajvaliti, to blaze up, rise suddenly (as anger,&c.) 

am, n. (Vdj), act of 

flying towards, MBh. 

abhi- v / tans (perf. 3. pi. -tatasrf), 

to shake out of, rob, RV. iv, 50, 2 & x, 89, 15. 

abhi- \/tad, -tadayati, to thump, 

hit, beat, wound, bruise ; (in astron.) to eclipse the 
greater part of a disk, VarBrS. 

Abbi-tSdita, mfn. knocked, struck. 

abhi- vtan, to stretch or spread 

across or over, be prominent, (aor. 1. pi. -tatdnama) 
RV. i, 160, 5 & v, 54, 15 ; to extend or enlarge in 
front of, (perf. A. 2. sg. - tatnishe) RV. viii, 6, 25 
& ix, 108, 6. 

ti^abhi-v'tap, to irradiate with heat, 

to heat, AV. &c.; to pain, distress : Pass, -tapyate, 
to suffer intensely : Caus. -tdpayati, to distress. 

Abbl-tapta,mfn.scorched, burnt; afflicted about 
(acc.), R. 

AbM-tRpa, as, m. extreme heat, Sis. &c.; agita¬ 
tion, affliction, emotion ; great pain. 

^ d abhi-tardm , &c. See abh(. 

ahhi-\/tarj, -tarjayati, to scold, 


abhi-tas , ind. See abhi. 

abhi-tamra, mf( a) n. very red ,d ark - 

red, murry-coloured, MBh.; Ragh. xv, 49, &c. 

abhi-tigmarasmi , ind. to¬ 

wards the sun, Sis. ix, ir. 

abhi-Vtush, -tushyati, to be glad 

or pleased, Kathas. 

abhi-Vtrid, -trinatti{ Imper. 2. sg. 

-trindhi [for trind-dht] ; aor. Subj. 2. sg. -t dr das, 
RV. vi, 17, 1) to burst open, open, procure (waters) 
by bursting (the clouds) or by boring (i. e. digging 
a well), RV. 8 c c.; to procure {vajam, vajan, gak, 
gandharvdm), RV.; ann&dyam, Sec., SBr. &c.: 
Desid. (Subj. 3. pi. - titritsan ) to try to open, RV. 

^ / 4» 4* 

Abhi-tritti, is, f. the act of procuring or gaining, 
K 5 th. 

v trip,C& us. -tarpay ati (pr. p. 

f. pi. -tarpdyantlh, AV.) to satiate, refresh. 
AbM-tyipta, mfn. satiated, refreshed. 

wfWir abhi-Vtri, to come near, approach 

(A. 3. du. -tarete), RV. i, 140, 3 ; to overtake, get 
up to, MBh. vii, 280. 

a - bhitti , is, f. not bursting, VS. xi, 

64; no wall, KathSs.; (mfn.), having no walls, i.e. 
no solid foundation, Sis. iv, 53. 

abhi-v'tyaj, to abandon, R. ii, 47, 

5 (ed. Bomb.) 

wfvr^l^abhi-trdsajas, m, putting in fear, 

intimidating, Ap. 

abhi-tripishtapa , mfn. being 

over the three worlds, Hariv. 

abhi-g / ivar , to be in haste. 

abhi-v'tsar (3. pi. -tsdranti) to 

catch, entrap, R V. viii, 2, 6. 

Abbi-tsRra, as, m. catching, entrapping, KSth. 

ahhi-dakshinam , ind. to or to- 


wards the right, Kaus.; KatySr.; Laty. 

dbhi-dadi. See abhi-y/i.dd. 

ob hi-dad hat. 


H^f\abhi-dadhat, mfn. pr.p.of i .abhi- 
*/dha , q. v. 

abhi-darsana. See abhi-Vdris. 
^fw^Vabhi- / dashta,mfn,(\/dans), bitten. 

abhi- */ dak, to singe, burn,RV. 11,4, 

7(aor.p. ab/u'-dd hs hat .-dh d.kshat)),SBr .Sec. 

abh,i-\ /1 . da. -dadati, to give,bestow 

(for a purpose), MBh. iii, 13309. 

Abbi-da&i , is, rn. an oblation of boiled rice {earn) 
upon which ghee has been sprinkled, TS. 

Abhi-dapana, am, n. the being trampled on by 
elephants as a punishment (?), 

T{abhi-\/das, Ved. -dasati (Subj. 3. 

sg. - ddsat [RV. vi, 5, 4] or - dasdt , AV. v, 6, 10) 
to consider and treat as an enemy. 

abhi-dipsu , mfn. (dips, Desid. of 

aJ dambh), ‘wishing to deceive,’ inimical, cunning, 
RV. h. 23, 1 o & 13. 

'srmfirsi abhi-v'dis, to point out, PBr. 

abhi-*/dih, to wrap up, envelop 

in, ApSr. 

Abbi-digdha, mfn. polished, glazed (in the fire, 
tdpasa ), i.e. sharp, AV. v, 18, 8. 

abhi-y / 2.di (Imper. 2. sg. - didiht ) 

to radiate, beam forth or towards, RV. ix, 108, 9. 

abhi-y/diksh, to consecrate one’s 
self (for a purpose, acc.), PBr. 

abhi- %/ dip, to blaze towards, 

Hariv.: Caus. dipayati , to cause to shine, make bril¬ 
liant, Car.; to blaze or shine all round, AV. iv, 19,3. 

abhi - */ 2. du (pr. p. m. nom. -dunvan) 
to bum or pain by burning, AV. v, 22, 2. 

a bhi-\/dush, -dushayati, to conta¬ 
minate ; to wound. 

Abbi-dusbta, mfn. contaminated, MBh. 
Abbi-dasblta, mfn. wounded, injured, Susr. 

abhi- */ duh, to milk in addition to, 

TBr.: Cans. P. to cause to milk in addition to, ApSr. 
Abbi-dobana, am, n. milking upon, ApSr. 
Abbi-dobya, am, n. (impers.) to be milked upon, 

^BrfagflT abhi-duti, ind. to or towards a 

female messenger, Sis, ix, 56 (quoted in Sah.) 

abhi-\/dris (Inf. -drashturn) to 
look at; Caus. - darsayati, to show; to point out, 
denounce any one (acc.), MBh.i, 7740 : Pass, -dris- 
yate, to be visible, be in view, appear, Mil. ix, 30S, &c. 

Abbi-darsana, am, n. becoming visible, appear¬ 
ance, Mn. ix, 274. 

abhi-devana , am, n. a board for 
playing at dice, MBh. ix, 760. 

'erfWg abhi-dyu, mfn. directed to heaven, 
tending or going to heaven, RV.; heavenly, bright, 
RV. ; SBr. 

abhi-V2. dra (aor. Subj. - drasat ) 
to overtake, RV. viii, 47, 7. 

abhi-y/ 2. dru, to run up to or near, 

RV. x, 75, 2, Sec. ; to attack, overrun, infest. 
Abbi-druta, mfn. run towards, attacked. 
Abbl-drutya, ind. p. having attacked. 

1 .abhi- */ druh,- dru hy a ti (aor. Subj. 

3. pi .-druhan ; perf. 1. p. dudrdha) to hate, seek 
to injure or maliciously assail, RV. &c.: Desid. (p. 
-dudrukshat) id., Kath. 

Abbl-drugdba, mfn. injured, oppressed, BhP.; 
injuring, oppressing, MBh. v, 2160; P&rGr. 

2. Abbi-drub, mfn. seeking to injure, inimical, 
RV. i, 122, 9 (nom. -dhruk) & ii, 27, x6; (cf. dn- 

Abbi-drubyamaxui, mfn. being injured. 
Abbi-drobd, as, m. injuring, RV.; Mn. &c. 

abhi-\/dhanv (aor. 3. pi. - ddhan- 

vis huh St perf. A - dadhanvirt ) to come up in 
haste, RV. iv, 31, 6; ix, 13, 7 & 24, 2. 

*!\*ymabhi-Vdkam (p.m. du .-dhamanta) 

to blow towards or against, RV. i, 117, 21. 

Abbi-dbm&ta, mfn.blown on (asaninstrument), 
K at has. 

abhi-dharma, as, m. the dogmas of 
Buddhist philosophy or metaphysics. — kosa, m., N. 
of a work on the preceding. — pitaka, m. ‘basket 
of metaphysics,’ N. of the third section of Buddhist 

ab hi-dharshana, am , n. ( Vdhrish ), 
possession by demoniac spirits, L. 

■wfwvni .abhi-y/ dha,-dadhati, to surrender 

any one to (dat.; aor. Subj. 2. du. dhdtam), RV. i, 
120,8 ; to bring upon (dat.), RV.ii, 23,6: A. (rarely 
P.) to put on or round, put on the furniture of a horse 
(cf. abhi-hita below), RV. &c.; to cover (a country) 
with an army, MBh. ii, 1090; to cover, protect, RV. 
viii, 67, 5 (aor. Pot. 2. pi. - dheiana ), &c.; (in clas¬ 
sical Sanskrit generally) to set forth, explain, tell, 
speak to, address, say, name (cf. abhi-hita below); 
Pass, -dhiyate, to be named or called : Caus. -dha- 
payati, to cause to name, AsvGr.; Desid. A. - dhit- 
sate , to intend to cover one s self, RV. x, 85, 30. 

2. Abhi-dha, f. name, appellation; the literal power 
or sense of a word, Sah.; a word, sound, L.; (as), 

m. f. surrounding, VS. x.xii, 3. — dbvansin, mfn. 
losing one’s name. — mula, mfn. founded on the 
literal meaning of a word. 

Abbi-dbatavya, mfn. to be told or named; to 
be manifested. 

Abbi-dbatri, mfn. saying, telling, Sis. 
Abbi-db&na, am, n. telling, naming, speaking, 
speech, manifesting ; a name, title, appellation, ex¬ 
pression, word ; a vocabulary, dictionary ; putting 
together, bringing in close connection, VPrat.; 
(compar. -tara) KaushBr.; (2), f., sees.v. — cinta- 
mani, m. ‘the jewel that gives every word,’ N. of 
Hemacandra’s vocabulary of synonvms. - tva, n. the 
state of being used as a name. — mdla, f. a dictionary. 
— ratnamala, f., N. of Halayudha’s vocabulary. 
Abbl-dbanaka, am, n a sound, noise, L. 
Abbi-dbdnl, f. a halter, AV.; SBr.; AitBr. 
Abbi-dbanlya, mfn. to be named, L. 
Abbi-dbaya, ind. p. having said, having called. 
Abbi-dbayaka, mfn. naming, expressing, ex¬ 
pressive of,denominating, RPrat. &c.; teliing, speak¬ 
ing. — tva, n. the state of being expressive. 
Abbi-dhayam, ind. ifc. See gotrdbh id hay am. 
Abbl-dhayin, mfn. = abhi-dhayaka ; (c i.pri- 

Abhi-dhits&, f. desire of expressing or naming, 

Abhl-dheya, mfn. to be named or mentioned ; 
to be expressed, to be spoken of, Pan. iii, 3, 51, Sell. 
&c .; being spoken of, being expressed, Sah.; (am), 

n. signification, meaning ; ‘ that which is expressed 
or referred to,’ the substantive. — ta, f. signification, 
meaning. — rahita, mfn. having no sense or mean¬ 
ing, unmeaning, nonsensical. 

Abhi-hita, abhi-hiti. See s. v. 

abhi-\/dhav, - dhdrati, to run up 

towards, to rush upon, attack, RV. &c. 

Abbi-db&vaka, mfn. running up, hastening to¬ 
wards, Yajti. ii, 234; assailing, an assailant. 

Abhi-dhavana, am, n. running up, attack. 

abhi-y/ 3. dhi (impf. 3. pi. abhy - 

adhinvan) to satisfy, Kath.; PBr. 

trfWvft abhi - Vdhi (perf. 1 . sg. -didhayd ; p. 

A. - didhydna , RV. iv, 33, 9) to reflect upon, con¬ 
sider, RV. iii, 38, x & x, 32, 4. 

abhi-Vdhu (p. - dhunvat) to shake, 

TAr. ^ 

abhi-\/dhri,Cnus.-dharayati, to up¬ 

hold, maintain, MBh. 

hi- v/ dhrish,ta overpower, (impf. 

3. pi. - adhrishnuvan) Kath.; (perf. 3. pi. - dadhri- 
shuh ) AV. i, 27, 3: Caus. -dhar shay ati, id., MBh. 
Abhi-dhrishnd,mfn. powerfu? over (acc.), SBr. 

’SffifuniT abhi-dhmata. See abhi-*/dham, 

abhi-*/dhyai, - dhyayati , to direct 

one’s intention to, set one’s heart upon, intend, de¬ 
sire, TS.; SBr. &c.; to-meditate, Mn. i, 8, &c. 
Abhi-dhyS, f. wish, longing for, desire. 
Abhi-dhyaua, am, n. desiring, longing for (loc,), 
Mn. xii, 5, &c.; meditation, Up. 

Abhi-dhySyin, mfn. (ifc.) giving one’s attention 
to, MarkP. 

Abhi-dhyeya, mfn. deserving attention, BhP.; 
(neg. an-) MBh. 

abhi-*/dhvans . Caus. -dhvansa- 

yati, to sprinkle with dust, dust, Kath. 

Abhi-dhvasta, mfn. afflicted by (instr.), MBh. 
v, 3230. 

abhi-vdftvan, to resound, whiz 


(as arrows), SiS. xx, I 3. 

abhi-*/naksk,-nakshati( perf. 3. pi. 

-nanahshuh : p. P. -nabshat, A. -ndkshamana) 
to approach, come to, arrive at, RV.; AV. 

abhi-*/nad ,to sound towards(acc.), 
BhP.; to sound, raise a noise, Hariv.; Caus. - nada - 
yati (perf. Pass. p. -nddita or for the sake of the 
metre -nadita [R.]), to causeto sound,fill with noise. 

abhi-naddha, mfn. (y^nah), * tied 
round,’ abhi-naddhdksha, mfn. blindfold, ChUp. 
Abhi-nahana, a?n, n. a bandage (over the eyes), 


abhi-*/nand, to please, AV. ix, 2, 
2 ; to rejoice at, salute, welcome, greet, hail; to praise, 
applaud, approve (often with na neg. ‘ to refflse ’); 
to acknowledge: Caus. -nandayati, to gladden, R. 

Abhi-nanda, as, m. the delight, pleasure (of 
sensuality), SBr. xiv; ChUp.; wish, desire for (ifc.), 
Susr.; N. of the first month ; N. of a commentator 
on the Amara-kosha ; N. of the author of the Yoga- 
v 5 sishthasara ; (a), f. delight, L.; wish, L. 

Abbi-nandana, am, n. delighting, L.; praising, 
applauding, L.; wish, desire, L.; (cj), m., N. of the 
fourth Jaina Arhat of the present Avasarpini. 

Abbi-nandamya , mfn. to be acknowledged or 
applauded, Sak. 

Abbi-nandita, mfn. delighted, made happy, sa¬ 
luted, applauded, &c. 

Abbi-nanditri, mfn. gladdening, MBh. 
Abbi-nandin, mfn. lejoicing at, wishing, desir¬ 
ing (ifc.) 

1. Abbi-nandya,mfn. **abhi-nandanTya,§lV..\ 
Ragh. v, 31. 

2. Abbi-nandya, ind.p.having rejoiced at; hav¬ 
ing gladdened. 

b hi-n a b h a s, in d . to^war d s th e sk y . 

Abhi-nabbyam, ind. near the clouds or the sky, 
RV. x, 119, 12. 

abhi- /nam (aor. 3. sg. -anamat or 

-andn [Kath.]) to bow or bend or turn towards. 
Abbl-nata, mfn. bent, inclined, KaushBr. &c. 
Abbi-namra, mf(a)n. deeply bowed or curved, 
Ragh. xiii, 32. 

Abbi-n 5 jnin, /, m., N. of a Rishi in the sixth 
Manvantara, VP. 

abhi-naya . See I. abhi-*/nu 
abhi-Vnard , P. (ep. also A.) to roar 

towards, MBh.; to roar, R. 

abhi-nava , xnf(d)n. quite new or 

young, very young, fresh ; modern (cf. -kaliddsa Sc 
-sdkatdyana below); N. of two men, Rajat.; not 
having experience, L. — kfilid&sa, m. the modern 
Kalidasa, i.e. MadhavacSrva. — gnpta, m., N. of 
a well-known author. — candrargba-vidbi, m.‘a 
ceremony performed at the time of the new moon,’ 
N . of the 11 4th chapter in the BhavP.ii. — yauvana, 
mf(a)n. youthful, Hit. — vaiyakarana, m. a mo¬ 
dern grammarian. — sakatSyana, m. the modern 
Sakatayana. Abbinavi- %/ bbu, to become new, 
Comm, on Bhatt. Abbinavodbbld, m. a new bud. 

^{abhi-V i.n«s(aor., 

RV. vii, 104, 23) to attain, reach, RV. 

abhi-nahana. See abhi-naddha. 

a b hi -nasikd viv aram, 

ind to the opening of the nose, Sis. ix, 52. 

abhi-nih-/sri, to stream forth, 

issue, Susr. 

Abbi-nib-srlta, mfn. issued or issuing from 
(abl.), ChUp. ( = KathUp.); YSjn. &c. 

abhi-nih- y/srij , to pour out to¬ 

wards, SBr. 

III UHIIHWH wwm * m aw H * w» h* hhi -»■ i wstfua 


^rfn^ ab hi-pat. 

hi-nih-y^srip, to move to¬ 
wards, AsvSr. 

’WT^rtTJ^n^flfc^i-ni. 7 /- sound hea¬ 

vily as a drum';, Pan. viii. 3, 86, Sch. 

Abhi-nishtana, as, m. ‘a sound which dies 
awav,' the Yisarea, APrSt ■ AsvGr. &c, 

Abhi-nistana, as, m.— abhi-nis'htdna, Pan. 
v;n, 3, 86. 

'srfH'fR-gi^ofcA i-ni- y/ kram(&or .2 .sg.-akra- 
tnls) to tread down (with acc.), RV. x, 60, 6. 

abhi-ni- y/ gad, to speak to, Kaus. 

abhi-nidhana, am, n., N. of dif- 


ferent verses of the Sama-veda, KatySr. &c. 

«f*rffnn dbhi-ni-\ dha , place upon or 

into (loc.), SBr.; A. to place upon one’s self (as a 

burden), AitBr.; to touch slightly with (instr.), SBr.; 
KatySr. &c,: Pass, -dhiyate, ‘ to be touched by each 
other,’ be in close contact (as the letters c, 0 8c a in 
the Sandhi called ahhinihita, q. v.), Pr2t. 

Abhi-ni-dbSna, am, n. placing upon, KStySr.; 
(as), m, [APrat. & TPrat.] or (am), n. [RPrat.] 
‘touching’ or close contact (of letters in pronuncia¬ 
tion, especially in the cases where initial a is sup¬ 
pressed after e 8c 0). 

Abhi-ni-hit a, mfn. touched with (instr.; also 
dn- neg.), SBr.; (as), ni. ‘close contact,’ N. of a 
special Sandhi (by which final c 8c 0 are brought into 
close contact with the initial a of the following word, 
which in the old language probably was not entirely 
suppressed), PrSt. 

abhi-ni-y/dhyai, to give atten¬ 

tion to, R. 

dbhi-ni-narlam, ind. (Vnrit), 

so as to accomplish step by step, i. e. repeating sepa¬ 
rately, KaushBr.; (cf. abhy-d-garam.) 

dbhi-ni- \/ ni, to pour out (water 

&c.) upon, Comm, on K 5 tySr.; (cf. ni-\bni.) 

dbhi-ni-Vvat, Caus. - patayati , 

to throw down, MBh. 

Abhi-ni-pata, as,m. * abhini-dhdna (m.or n.) 
above, Comm, on A Prat. 

abhi-ni- y/pid, to press, squeeze, 

trouble, MBh, &c. 

Abhi-ni pldita, mfn. pained, tormented. 

abhi-ni-y/mantr, to summon, 

invite, liariv. 

abhi-ni-y/mruc, -mrdcati (said 

of the sun) to set upon anybody who is sleeping or 
has not finished his work, TS.; TBr.; Kath. 

Abhi-ni-mrukta, mfn. upon whom while not 
doing any work or while sleeping the sun has set, 
TBr.; (wrongly written abhi-nir-muktd) Mn.ii,2 21 
& BhP. 

abhi-ni- \/mluc y/mruc be¬ 
fore, Mn, ii, 219 ; (cf. ni-y/mruc 8 c ni-y/mluc.) 

abhi-ni-mlupta z=z abhi-ni-mru¬ 
kta above, Gobh. 

abhi-niyukta , mfn. (Vyuj), oc¬ 

cupied in. 

abhi-nir-y/2. as, to throw to¬ 

wards, Kaus. 

-nir-rnukta for abhi-ni-mru- I 

kta, q. v. 

^rfWf^T abhi-niryd, to march out, go 
out towards (dat.) or from (abl.), MBh. &c. 
Abhi-niryana, am, n. march of an assailant, L. 

ahht-nir-y/vad , to declare with 

regard to (acc.), PBr. 

abhi-nir- '/ 2 . vap, to share out 
or add anything to another thing (either acc. & loc. 
[TS.] or instr. 8c acc. [AitBr.]). 

- nir-y/vrit , to result from, 

proceed, MBh.: Caus. -vartayati, to produce, ac¬ 
complish, Hariv. &c. 

Abhi-nirvritta, mfn. resulting from, MBh. See. 
Abhi-nirvritti, is, f. resulting, proceeding, ac¬ 

-ni-liyamanaka, mfn. 

(VIi)y (a bird) lying down in its nest in the pre¬ 
sence of (a spectator), VarBrS. 

abhi-ni-vdrtam , ind. (y/vrit), 

so as to turn back towards (acc.), TS.; SBr.; Kath. 

wfafjTfasT abhi-ni - v /i <:is, -visate, to enter 
(with acc.), P 3 n. i, 4, 47, Sch.; to disembogue (as a 
river) into (acc.), BhP.; to devote one’s self entirely 
to (acc.), Das.&c.: Caus. - vesayati , to cause to enter, 
lead into (acc.), BhP.; to cause to sit down upon 
(loc.), Sis.; to cause any one to devote himself en¬ 
tirely to, MBh. See.; (with manas or atmdnam) to 
devote one’s attention to (loc.), BhP. 

Abhi-nivishta, mfn. entered or plunged into; 
intent on (loc. or in comp.); endowed with, Ragh. 
ii, 75 ; determined, persevering. — t&,f. state of being 
persevering, S2h. 

Abhi-nivesa, as, m. application, intentness, 
study, affection, devotion (with loc. or ifc.); deter¬ 
mination (to effect a purpose or attain an object), 
tenacity, adherence to (loc.), Kum. v, 7, &c. 

Abhi-nivesita,infn.made to enter inlo,plunged 

Abhl-nivesin, mfn. intent upon, devoted to, 
Yajfi.iii, 134; determined. 

abhi-ni-Vsam (ind. p. -samya) 

to perceive, notice, Das. 

mabhi -niscit a,mfn.( \-2 .ci ),quite 

convinced of, MBh. xii, 10635 » settled or fixed with 
regard to (acc.), MBh. iii, 1085. 

^wftTfsr abhi-ni-y/sri, to pass (from one 

thing) to another (acc.), Ap. 

*f*f*T^ abhi-ni-shad ( sad), to sit down 

or settle round (perf. 3. sg. - shasdda), RV. vii, 15, 

2 ; (Opt. 1. pi. - shidema ) AV. xii, 1, 39. 

ahhi-nish-kdrtn, tnfn. in- ! 
tending anything evil against, injuring, AV. x, 1, 31; 
(cf. abhi-kritvari .) 

Abhi-nish-krita, mfn. directed against (as an 
evil action), AV. x, I, 12. 

*rfVrf****r abhi-nish-y/kram , to go out j 
towards; to lead towards (as a door), Pin. iv, 3, 86 ; 
to leave the house in order to become an anchorite, 
Buddh. & Jain. 

Abhi-nishkramana,tfw,n. going forth; leaving 
the house in order to become an anchorite, Buddh. 
& Jain. 

xiv; ChUp.; to appear, ChUp.: Caus. -pddayati, to 
bring to (acc.), SBr. 

Abhi-nishpatti, is, f. appearance, Comm, on 


abhi-ni-\/syand (or -shyand), 

to trickle upon, MBh. xii, 3881. 

Abhi-ni-shyanda, as, m. trickling, R. 

abhi-ni-y/han (p. -ghnat) to 

beat, strike, MBh. &c. 

Abhi-ni-hata, mfn. put on (as on a spit), (abhl 
iu'kata)RX. i, 162, 11; ioi abhi-ni-hit a, q.v.,APrat. 

W (TjiTT abhi-ni-h it a. See abhi-ni-y/dha. 

abhi-nihnava, as, in. (y/hnu), 
denial, L.; N. of a Saman. 

I. abhi-y/ni (perf. Opt. -nimydt, 
RV. vii, 88, 2; aor. Sub). 2. sg. -tieshi, RV. vi, 61, 
14) to conduct towards, bring near, RV. &c.; to 
represent dramatically, act ; to adduce, quote, L. 

Abhi-naya, as, m. (indication of a passion or 
purpose by look, gesture, &c.) acting, dramatic ac¬ 
tion (expressive of sentiment). 

Abhl-nlta, mfn. brought near ; performed, L.; 
highly finished or ornamented, L.; fit, proper, MBh. 
&c.; = mar shin or amarshin (? patient or im¬ 
patient), L. 

Abhi-niti, is, f. gesture, expressive gesticulation, 
L.; friendship, civility, L. 

Abhi-netavya, mfn. to be represented drama¬ 

- £ 

Abhi-netri, la, in. one who brings near, RV. 
iv, 20, 8 ; SBr. 

Abhi-neya, mfn. = abhi-netavya. 

WWt 2 .abhi-ni (-ni-y/i), (Iinper. -nyetu) 
to enter into (as in approaching a woman), RV. x, 
149, 4. 

black or dark. 

.abhi-y/^.nu, A.(3.pi.tfMi? navante) 

to turn one’s self towards (acc.), RV. ix, 100, 1. 

<«!rfkr[ 2 . abhi- \/ 4. nu,l J . A .(pr. I. })1. - nava- 
make, 3. pi. -navante ; impf. P. 3. pi. - anavan; 
aor. 1. sg. -atiiishi, 3. du. - anuskdtdm, 3. pi. and - 
shata [very frequently] or -n us hat a, RV. ix, 103, 
3) to shout towards (acc.), RV.: Inlens. (1. pi. 
- nonttmas), id., RV. 

^"^ 3 ? abhi-y/nud, to push, press: Caus. 

-nodayati, to excite, spur or urge on. 

abhi-fit, -nrityati, to dance to¬ 

wards (acc.) or in imitation of (acc.), BhP. 

f p s , Abhi-nishkr 5 nta,mfn.goneouttowards;de- 

WihT abhi-nir-y/gam, to go out or scended from (abl.),R.;havingleft the house (abl.) in 

away from (abl.), R. order to become an anchorite, Mn. vi, 41; Buddh. & 

^rfWftrfsfir abhi-nirjita, mfn. (Vii), con- &T b ° USe (for 

^ 7 x ^ /7 hpfnm P an anrhor tpV H irfdh 

quered, MBh. xiv, 2220. 

abhi-nir-nud(\/nud),(Vot. - nu- 
det) to drive out, frighten away, MBh. xii, 10728. 

abhi-nir-\/dis, to point out, 

indicate, TS. &c,; to appoint, characterize, Mn. x, 
20; to settle, fix, MBh.; VarBrS. 

abhi - nir- */ bharts (ind. p. 
-bh artsy a) to scold thoroughly, R. ii, 78, 19. 

trfwfsrf^w abhi-nirmita, mfn. (y^. wig), 
made, created, R. iii, 76, 30; Kir. v, 3. 

becoming an anchorite), Buddh. 

wfwffTSR abhi-nishtana. See abhi-nih- 


fV«^ abhi-ni-y/shthiv , to spit upon, 
SBr.; Kaus. 

ahhi-nish->/pat , to fly out to¬ 
wards (acc.), A V. vii,64,1: to spring forth,shoot forth. 

AbM-nlshpatana, am, n. springing forth, is¬ 

VRfrWjJ ahhi-nish-y/pad, to come to 
(acc.), SBr.; to enter into, become (with acc.), SBr. 

abhi-nrimna, mf(a)n. exceedingly 

propitious, BhP. 

d-bhinna, mfn. (Vbkid), uncut, un- 

broken, SBr. &c.; uninterrupted, RV. vi, 28, 2 ; (a- 
bhinnd) AV.; (in arithm.)*undivided,’ integer,whole 
(as numbers); unchanged, unaltered, not different 
from (abl. or in comp.) — gfati, mfn. not changing 
its course, Sak. — taraka, mfn. (compar.) not at ail 
different, Pat. — tS, f. or -tva, n.[R.] ‘non-differ¬ 
ence,’ identity ; (with numbers) wholeness. «-pari- 
karm&shtaka, n. the eight processes in working 
whole numbers. — sthiti.mfn.not breaking its rules, 
Sak. AbMnniitman,rnfn.‘ofundaunted spirit,'firm. 

abki-ny-y/2. as, - asyati , to de- 

press (as fire), KatySr. 

Abhi-nySsa, as, m. a kind of fever, Bhpr. 

abhi-ny-y/ubj, to press down, 

hold down, AV. viii, 8, 6 ; Kaus. 

nfiur't abhi-y/pac, to boil up (as milk), 


'^Wnfrf abhi-pathita, mfn. denominated, 

named, Susr. 

I. abhi-y/1. pat, -palyate, to be 
lord over (acc.), RV. viii, 102, 9; pr. p. -patya- 
mana, possessing, RV. x, 132, 3. 

'SFrfWtny? . abhi- V 2 . pat, to fly near, hasten 

near ; to rush towards, assail; to fall down upon 
(acc.), AV. vi, 124, I & 2 (aor. abhy-apapta 8c 
abhy-dpaptat), 8cc. ; to fall or come into (acc.); to 
fly through or over, MBh. v, 3051; to overtake in 

wfatUPT abhi-patana . 



flying, MBh. viii, 1910: Caus. -patayati, to throw 
after with (instr.),T 3 r.; to throw upon (dat. or loc.); 
to throw down ; to pass (time). 

AbM-pataaa, am, n. flying towards. 
Abhi-pata, as, m. hastening near, Kad. j 

Abhi-patin, mfn. hastening near; running to 
the help of (in comp.), MBh. iii, 284. 

Abhi-pitva, am, n. (cf. apa-pitva), approach- j 
ing, visiting, putting up (for the night at an inn), ! 
RV.; (with or without the gen. pi. dhnam) close 
or departure of the day, evening, RV. 

'srfrrtr^ ahhi-Vgad , to come near or to¬ 
wards, approach; to approach (a deity) for imploring j 
her help, Sis. ix, 27; to come up (as an auxiliary), 
assist; to seize, catch, overpower, master, RV. x, 71, 

9; SBr. &c.; to take possession of, Mn. i, 30, &c.; 
to accept, R.; to undertake, devote one’s self to (acc.) 
Abhi-patti, is, f. seizing, SBr. 

Abhi-panna, mfn. approaching for imploring 
the help of, L.; assisted, MBh. &c .; seized, over- 1 
powered, SBr. Sic. ; undertaking, taking in hand ; 
undertaken, taken in hand; one who has acted 
wrongly towards (in comp.), MBh. xii, 68, 50 Si 58 ; 
distant, L.; dead, L. 

wfirtra abhi-padma , mfn. (said of ele¬ 
phants) having red spots on the skin, MBh. i, 7013* 

abhi-para-Vvad, to speak to, 

address, SBr.; KaushBr. 

dbhi-pari-Vgrah , to clasp, em¬ 

brace, MSnGr. 

abhi-pari-gldna, mfn.. (*/glai), 

tired, exhausted, MBh. i, 4489. 

W a b hi-p arip lu ta , m fn. over flowe d 

with (as medasd, rajasa [said of a wife during men¬ 
struation, MBh. iii, 523 ; cf. abhi-pluta below], 
&c.); attacked, afflicted by (instr.; as by anger, sor¬ 
row, compassion, &c.), MBh. Sic. 

abhi-pari-shvahj ( Vsvahj ), 
(p. -shvajat) to embrace, R. 

abhi-pari-x/han , to overpower 

entirely, SBr. 

abhi-pari-yhri , P. to move 

round (in a circle), SBr.: P. with atmanam [Kaus.] 
or Caus. A. (Opt. 3. pi. -harayeran) [AsvSr.] to 
move round one’s self. 

Abhi-pari-hara, as, m, moving round, {an-, 
neg.), AsvSr. 

abhi-parita, mfn. {Vi), filled or 

taken with, seized by (instr., in comp.), MBh. &c. 

'WfkVCfcjiT abhi-pari-vrita , mfn. ( Vvri ), 

filled or taken with (instr.; as with anger), R. 

’WftrqT abhi-pare (Vi), (Imper. 2. sg. -pa¬ 

re hi) to go away towards (acc.), AV. xiv, 2, 34 

& 35 - 

><rrirc%yr abki-pary-d- Vdhd (— pary-d- 

V dhd, q. v.), to surround (as a pan with fire), SBr. 

A. to turn 

one’s self towards (acc.), A\^.; TS. &c.; to turn 
one’s self round (acc.), AitBr. 

ab hi-p ary-d-Vsic, to pour 

out round, AitBr. 

abhi -pary -Vi. uh, abht pdry 

uhaU, to carry or bring towards (acc.), TS. 

abhi-pary-e ( Vi), (said of the time) 

‘ to pass round ’ (acc.), i. e. to pass away or elapse, SBr. 

abhi-pale (Vi), to follow after any 
one running away (acc.), PBr.; (cf .pale.) 

?Z\XV${abhi- Vpas, -pasyati , to look upon 

r: at. view, RV. &c.; to perceive, notice, MBh. i, 
1002. Sic.; (with gen.), BhP.; to know, ChUp. 

1. , to drink of, Gobh. 

Abhi-pita, mfn. watered (as the earth by rain), 
MBh. xii, 12844. 

2. ab hi-/2. pa,-pati,to guard,RV.; 

VS , to behold with attention, RV. viii, 59, 3 ; 
C-.-i. ?. -t.V.:yati, to protect, assist, MBh. &c. 
Abhi-pala, a:, m. protector, MBh. 
Aohi-pSlana. am. n. protecting, R. 

abhi-pihgala , mfn. ‘very red/ 

reddish-brown, Hariv. 

^rfkfqpr abhi-pitva. See apa-/2.pat. I 

abhi-Vpis (impf. - apinsat , perf. 

A. 3. pi. -pipisre) t© adorn with (instr.), RV. v, 
60, 4; x, 68,11; TBr. 

abhi-Vpid , to oppress, torment. 

Abhi-pJdita, mfn. pressed (as the soil by the 
foot or by an army), ShadvBr. &c.; oppressed, tor- j 
mented, afflicted, MBh. &c. 

abhi-Vputh, Caus. -pothayati , to 1 

throw with violence upon (loc.), Hariv. 

abhi-pushpa, mfn. covered with 
flowers, R.; (am), n. an excellent flower, L. 

^?f W-^abhi-Vpu, -pavate, to flow purified 
towards or for (acc. or dat.), RV.; to blow towards, 
TS.; TBr.; to make bright, glorify, AV.; TS. 

abhi-Vpdj, to honour, reverence 

greatly ; to approve of. 

Abhi-piajita, mfn. honoured; approved, assented 
to, Mn. vi, 58, See. 

’srfk^t abhi-purva , mfn. following in regu¬ 
lar order, PBr .; {dm [AV.; SBr.] or ena [PBr.]), 
ind. in regular order, successively. 

abhi-prishthe, ind. at the back of, 

behind, Kum. 

abhi-Vpn (Imper. 2. sg. -prinihi) 

to fill up, PSrGr.; - puryate , to become full or abun¬ 
dant, ParGr.; MBh.: Caus .-pur ay ati, to make full, 

fill, SBr. 8ic .; to load with, Kath2s.; to cover with (as 
with arrows), MBh. vi, 1721; to present with (instr.), 
Hariv.; Kathas.; (said of sorrows, &c.) to fill the heart 
of any one, overwhelm; to accomplish, R. vii, 35, 14. 
Abhi-purana, am, n. filling, KatySr. 
Abhi-purna, mfn. full of (instr. or gen.) 
Abhi-purta, am, n. that which has been fulfilled, 
AV. ix, 5, 13. 

Abhi-purya, mfn. to be filled, MaitrS. 

abhi-Vpyai (perf. A. p. -pipyand) 

to swell, abound with (instr.), RV. vii, 36, 6. 

W *-k^abhi-pra-Vkamp, Caus. - kamp- 

ayati, to stir, allure, SBr. 

abhi-pra-/kas, - kdsate , to be¬ 
come visible, MBh. {cakshusha, * to the eye ’) ; R. 

^f^abhi-pra-Vkram, P. - kramati , to 

go up to (acc.), SBr.; Kaus. 

Abhi-pra-kramya, mfn. to be stepped upon or 
walked on, PBr. 

abhi-pra-Vkshar, to stream to¬ 
wards (acc.), SBr. 

Abhi-pra-ksharita, mfn. poured out, SBr. 
'erfkira'?? abhi-pra- Vkshal , -kshalayati, 

to dean thoroughly, polish up (as a jewel), Vikr. 

abhi-pra-Vgdh, -gdhate , to dip 

or plunge into, penetrate, RV. ix, 99, 2 Si 110, 2: 
Caus. (ind. p. -gdhya) to immerse, dip, SankhSr. 

abhi-pra- Vgai (Imper. 2. pi. -gd- 
yata) to begin to praise, RV. 

’STfaHVS [abhi-pra- V caksh (V ed. Inf. -oa¬ 
ks he) to see, RV. i, 113, 6. 

abhi-pra-Vend, Caus. -codayati, 

to impel, induce, persuade, MBh.; R. 

abhi-pra-Vcyu (Imper. 2. sg. A. 
-cyavasva ) to move towards, arrive at (acc.), VS.; 

dbhi-\/prach , to ask or inquire 

after, MBh. &c. 

Abbi-prisMa, mfn. inquired after, BhP. 
AbM-praszun, mfn. inclined to ask, inquisitive, 

^fwVft^abhi-pra-Vjan( 3 .p\.A.-jdyantc) 
to bring forth, bear, RV. v, 19, 1; Caus. -janayati , 
to generate for the sake of (acc.), SBr. 

abhi-pra- vjval (perf. -jojvala) 

to flare up, MBh. 

abhi-pra-naksh ( Vnaksh ), (perf. 
A. -nanakshe) to overpower, RV. viii, 51, 8. 

abhi-pra-nad(Vnad), (perf. 3. pi. 

-liedull) to begin to roar or sound, Bhatt. 

^favtJQJ{abki-pra-nam ( Vnam) ,to bow be¬ 

fore (dat. or acc.), MBh. &c. 

Abhi-pranata, mfn. bent, bowing before. 

abhi-pra-ni (Vni), (aor. Subj. 2. 

sg. -neshi) to bring towards (acc.), RV. i, 31, 18. 
Abhi-pranaya,aj,m.affection,L.; (cf. pranaya.) 
Abhi-pranlta, mfn. brought to (as fire to the 
altar), Bhatt.; (cf. pra-ni.) 

abhi-pra-nu (V4. nu), (aor. A. 3 .pi. 

- dnushata) to shout towards, praise highly, RV. iv, 
32, 9: Intens. (1. pi. -nonumas [frequently]; perf. 
3. pi. -nonuvuh) id., RV. 

abhi-pra-*/tan, to spread over 

(acc.), KaushUp. 

’STTHUrtW abhi-pratapta , mfn. ‘intensely 

heated,’ dried up, Susr.; exhausted with pain or 
fever, R. 

abhi-pratarin, t, m.» N. of a 

descendant of Kaksha-sena, ChUp. 

^rfWljfrPT abhi-prati -/1 .gfi, * to call out 

to (acc.) alternately,’ answer in singing, TS.; (cf. 
prati-V 1. gru ) 

abhi-prati-/pad, P. (fut. -pat- 
syati ) to begin with or at (acc.), AitBr. 

abhi-prati-/pish (perf. -pipe- 

' i 

sha) to dash or crush out, SBr. 

abhi-praty-ava-/ruh, to step 

down upon (acc.), AitBr. 

*rfkniinr abhi-praty-ave (/i), to move 

down towards, SBr. 

abhi-praty-e (/i), to come back 

towards (acc.), SBr. 

’STfWipl abhi-Vprath (perf. A. -paprathe) 
to spread, extend itself towards (acc.), RV. ix, 80, 3; 
Caus. -prat hay ati, to spread or scatter over (acc.), 
TS.; to spread (as one’s fame), MBh. 
Abhi-prathana, am, 11. spreading over, L. 

fa ^ a b h i-p r a- daks hi n am, ind. to 

the right (e. g. with Vi.kri, to circumambulate 
keeping the object on the right), R. 

abhi-pra-darsana, am, n. point¬ 

ing out, indicating, S 5 h. 

abhi-pra-*/dis, Caus. - desayati, 

to urge on, R. 

abhi-pra- /dri (perf. 3. pi. -dadrur 

= abhi-jagmuh , Say. fr. -V2. dr a, Mo run to¬ 
wards ’) to put forth by bursting or opening, RV. iv, 
19, 5: Pass. - dtryate, to be scattered or divided 
asunder, MBh. viii, 397b. 

abhi-pra-/2. dr a. S ee-Vdri. 

abhi-pra-/2. dru (perf. A ,-dudru- 
ve) to rush towards (acc.), assail, MBh. 

abhi-pra-dharshana, am, n. op¬ 

pressing, injuring, MBh. iii, 14937* 

abhi-pra-Vpac, Pass. - pacyate, 

1 to get ripe,’ develop itself, Susr. 

abhi-pra-Vpad , to come towards, 
reach at, enter into (acc.), SBr. &c.; to resort to 
(acc.), MBh. &c.; to undertake, MBh. 
Abhi-prapanna, mfn. approached, attained. 

abhi-pra-Vgas (impf. - prdpa- 

syat) to look out after (acc.), RV. x, 113, 4. 

abhi-pra- Vpid, Caus. -pidayati, 

to cause pain, torture, MBh. &c. 

abhi-pra-Vpri, -puryate, to be 

filled, fill one’s self completely, MBh. xv, 678. 

abhi-pra-bhahgin , mfn. (/ 

bhanf), breaking completely, RV. viii, 45, 35. 


’SffrMR abhi-bhava. 



*TT*I J^abh i-pra- bku (Ved. Inf. aor. abhi 

pra-bhushsni . to assist, RV. x, 132, 1. 

- pra- \ bhri{ 1 . pl.-6Aar«maAe) 
to oner to -iat.), RV. iv, 36,5 ; (Imper. 2. sg. - bhara) 
to throw, cart, RV. viii, 89, 4. 

i-pra--s/ math, Caus. -mantha- 

ya:i. to churn thoroughly, Susr. 

abhi-pra-v man, A. (3. pi. - man - 
zatd) to take any one for, look upon him as, AV. vi, 
84. 1. 

abhi-pra-\/i.mand( A. 
-mande, -mandate; perf. P. 3. pi. -manduh) to 
gladden, RV.; P. (Imper. - manda ) to confuse, 
infatuate, RV, vi, 18, 9. 

^ ^W^abhi-pra-mur, mfn,( vi inri ), bruis¬ 

ing, crushing, RV. x, 115, 2. 

^TWtPJ 5 I abhi-pra-vmris (Imper. 2. sg. 

- mrisa; aor. Subj. 2. sg. -mrikshas & 2. pi. -mri- 
kshata) to seize, grasp : Intens. (p. nom. m. -mar- 
mrisat) id., RV. i, 140, 5. 

w^-tnr abhi-pra-v yd (Itnper. 2. pi. -yd- 
thdna ) to come towards, approach, RV. viii, 2 7,6; 
to set out, march off, go to battle, MBh. &c. 
Abhi-p ra-y ayam, ind. so as to approach, KatySr. 
Abhi-pra-ySyin, mm. approaching, TS. 

abhi-pra-v^yuj, -prd-yuhkte , to 
seize, grasp, bring in one’s possession, TS.; TBr.; 

ahhi-pra-/ruh, to put forth or 

produce shoots, Susr. 

’Sffanreir abhi-pra-/vah, to carry or bring 

towards, AitBr. 

ahhi-pra-\/vip (Opt. 3. pi. -ve¬ 
teran) to move against (acc.), threaten, TS. 

abhi-pra-Vvis, to disembogue 

into (acc.), BhP. 

Abhi-pra-vishta, mfn. fallen or come into 
(acc.), R. 

Abhi-pra-vesa, as, m. entering into, MBh. i, 

ahhi-pra- v 7 vrit, A. to advance up 

to (acc.), AitBr.; KaushUp. ; todisembogue into 
(acc.), R.; to go forth, advance, AsvGr.; (see also 
abhi-pra-vritta) : Caus. - vartayati , to cause to ad¬ 
vance against, throw against (acc.),TS.; (dat.), SV. 

Abhi-pravartana, a?n, n. coming or flowing 
forth (said of the sweat), Susr. 

Abhi-pravritta, mfn. being performed, advanc¬ 
ing, proceeding, MBh. viii, 3464; occupied or en¬ 
gaged in, Bhag. 

abhi-pra-vridh, Caus. -vardhayati 

(generally used in the perf. Pass. p. - varahita ) to 
enlarge, Susr.; render prosperous, MBh. 

ahhi-pra-/ vrish , to pour down 

rain, MBh. Sec. 

■wfwira^f abhi-pra-/vraj , to step or ad¬ 

vance towards, ChUp.; KaushUp. 

abh i-pra-/ saws,to praisehighly, 


abhi-pra-y/sudh, Caus. - sodha- 

yati , to clean thoroughly, Suir. 

^Tf*TUf W[abhi-prasnin. See abhi-Vprach. 

El ^^abhi-pra-/ svas,to blow towards 
(acc.), AitBr. 

abhi-pra-/sad (p. -sidat; perf. 

3. pi. -sedufr) to sit down or settle along (acc.), RV. 
iv, 1, 13 Sc x, 32, 1; Caus. - sadayati , to cause to 
be well-disposed or gracious, pray for grace or favour, 

MBh. See. 

abhi-pra-y/sah, to be able to 

(Inf.), Kir. xii, 18. 

abhi-pra-supta , mfn. (/svap), 

fallen asleep, MBh. 

abhi-pra-/ (3. pi. -sutanti) to 

drive towards (acc.), Nir, 

1. Abhi-pra-suta, mfn. engaged, induced, or¬ 
dered, Nir. 

2. abhi-pra-suta , mfn. (/ 4. su ), 
generated, bom, MBh. v, 964. 

abhi-pra-/sri, Caus. (ind. p. -sar- 

yd) to stretch one’s self out towards (acc.), SBr.; A. 
(Pot. -sarayitd )_to stretch out (as a foot) towards 
or upon (loc.), Ap. 

Abhi-pra-sarana, am, o. stretching out the 
feet towards (gen.), Ap. 

Abhi-pra-srita, mfn. devoted to, R.; (cf. pra- 
srita .) 

abhi-pra-/srip (p. - sarpat) to 

creep near, AV. viii, 6, 22. 

abhi-pra-/skand , to jump into 

(acc.), SahkhBr. 

abhi-pra-/stu, to praise with a 

stoma (q. v.), TS. 

abhi-pra-/stri, to scatter, SBr. 

£ * 

^rfWlTWT abhi-pra-\ / stha (aor. Subj. 2. pi. 
-sthata ; perf. 3. pi. - tasthuh ) to start or advance 
towards, reach, RV.; AV. &c.; to surpass, have the 
precedence of (with or without acc.), RV. i, 74, 8 & 
x, 65, 15; (cf. ati-pra-*/stha ): Caus. to drive (as 
the cattle to pasture), ChUp. 

Abhi-pra-sthita, mfn. one who has set out, 
started, MBh. Sec. 

abhi-pray / -han (3. pi. - ghnanti ) 
to overpower, RV. vi, 46, 1 o; SBr. 
Abhi-pra-hata, mfn. struck at, hurt, Susr. 

abhi-pra-y /2. ha, -jihite, to jump 

or fly upwards in the direction of (acc.), SahkhSr. 

abhi-pra-hit a, mfn. (/hi), sent 

hither, AV. x, I, 15. 

abhi-prdn {y/an), -praniti , to ex- 

' • 

hale, breathe forth towards (acc.), SBr.; to exhale, 
breathe forth, AitBr.; TBr. Sec. 

Abhi-pranana, am, 11. exhaling (opposed to 
apdnana, q. v.), L. 

abhi-pratar , ind. towards morn- 

ing, early, SBr. xiv; (according to some Comm, ‘on 
the fourth day early in the morning’). 

^J^Umabhi-prap ap), to reach, obtain, 

SBr.; ChUp. 

Abhi-prffpana. See arthdbhip?-dpana . 
Abhi-prSpta, mfn. reached, obtained. 
Abhi-prtipti, is, f. arrival, Nir. 

Abhi-pr£psu, mfn. desirous of gaining, Mn.&c, 

abhi-praya. See abhi-pre . 

abhi-prarc ( y/arc ), to celebrate 

in song, RV. viii, 49, 1 & 69, 4. 

abhi-prarth ( arth), to long for, 

wish, R. 

^BTfWinST abki-prds ( y/2 . as), to eat in ad¬ 
dition to (acc.) another thing (in order to get rid of 
the taste of it), ChUp. 

abhi-prds (*/2. as), to throw upon 

(acc.), SBr.; KStySr. 

I . abhi-*/pri, Caus. to gladden, re¬ 

fresh, Car. 

2. Abhi-pri, mfn. gladdening, RV. i, 162, 3 & 

ix, 3 U 3* 

Abhi-prlta, mfn. pleased, (an-, neg.) AitBr. 
Abhi-priti, is, f. pleasing, pleasure, PBr. 

wfvrg abhi-y/pru, to hasten near or to¬ 
wards, RV. iv, 58, 8; to jump into, SBr. 
Abhi-prava- as, m. —abhi-plavd. below, Kath. 

abhi-/prush, - prushnute , -prusha- 
yati [RV. x, 26, 3], to sprinkle with, RV. 

abhi-pre (*/i), -praiti (Imper. 2. sg. 
-prejii, 2. pi. preta, RV.; AV.) to go near to, ap¬ 
proach ; to approach with one’s mind, to think of, 
Pan. i, 4, 32, &c.; to aim at, intend. 

Abhi-praya, as, m. aim, Pan. i, 3, 72; purpose, 
intention, wish, R. &c .; opinion, Mn. vii, 57, &c.; 
meaning, sense (as of a word or of a passage). 
Abhi-preta, mfn. meant, intended, R. Sec.; ac¬ 

cepted, approved, Nir. Sec.; to whom one’s heart is 
devoted, dear, MBh.; Sak. Sec. 

Abhi-pretya, ind. intending, meaning by, Nir. 

ahhi-preksh ( y/iksh ), (generally 

ind. p. - prekshya ) to look at, to see, view, MBh. &c. 

abhi-prepsu. See abhi-prap. 

abhi-prer ( y/ir ), Caus. -prerayati, 

to drive forwards, push on, Susr. 

Abhi-prerana, am, n. pushing, setting in motion 
(as a see-saw). 

^nf^il^abhi-presh (■/l.ish), (1 • S R* "presh- 

ydmi) to summon, command, AV. 

Abhi-pr£shita, mfn. that which has been com¬ 
manded or ordered, (an-, neg.) SBr. 

^TTHRf abhi-prokshana, am, r\.(*/uksh ), 

sprinkling upon, affusion. 

ssfinT abhi-y/plu, to swim or navigate to¬ 
wards, approach, SBr. &c.; to overflow, See. (see 
abhi-pluta ); to jump near to, Hariv, Sec .; Caus. 
(said of the sea) to wash, Kaus. 

Abhi-plava, as, m., N. of a religious ceremony 
(lasting six days and performed five times during the 
sacrifice Gavam-ayana), SBr. &c. 

Abhi-pluta, mfn. overflowed, overrun ; over¬ 
whelmed, affected by, labouring under (instr.), MBh. 
&c.; ( rajasd , said of a wife during menstruation ; 
cf. abhi-pari-pluta above), Mn. iv, 41. 

abhi-bala,am , n.(in dramatic lan¬ 
guage) overreaching or deceiving anybody by dis¬ 
guise, Sah. 

abhi-y/badh, -bddhate, to check, 

stop, RV. viii, 5, 34; to attack (in battle), MBh. xii, 
3731; to cause pain, afflict, R. 

Abhi-badhitri, mfn. causing pain, Hariv.; (v. 1 . 
adh i-bddhitri.) 

abhi-buddhi , is, f. (in Sankhya 

phil.) N. of a function of the intellect (comprising 
adhyavasdya, abhinuina, icchd, kartavyata, and 

abhi-'/bhaj, to turn or flee to¬ 

wards (acc.), Hariv. 

2.bkahj(p. gen. pl.f.-Man- 
jatinani) to break down, destroy, RV. x, 103,8. 

Abhi-bhahga, mfn; breaking down, destroying, 
RV. ii, 2i, 3. 

. abhi-bhartri, ind. towards the hus- 

. ^ 

band, Sis. ix, 35; before (i. e. in presence of) the 
husband. Sis. ix, 77. 

abhi-/bharts (ind. p. -bkartsya) 
to scold, threaten so as to terrify, R.; to deride, ridi¬ 
cule, MBh. iii, 10921. 

abhi-bhava. See 1. abhi-y/bhu 


1. abhi-y/bha, to glitter (around), 

be bright, appear, MBh. Sec. 

2. Abhi-bha, f. ‘apparition, phenomenon,’ in¬ 
auspicious omen, RV. ii, 42, 1 ; AV.; (with Buddh.) 
act of overpowering, superiority, L. Abhibhaya- 
tana, n. ‘abode of superiority,’ N. of the eight 
sources of superiority with Buddhists, L. 

abhi-bhara. See abhi-y/bkri. 
abhi-'/bhash, to address, speak 

to (acc.), MBh. 8 ec. ; converse with (instr.), Mn. &c.; 
to utter, say (abh ibh ash ante, ‘ people use to say,’ 
Nir.); to confess, Mn. xi, 103. 

Abhi-bh&shaua, am, n. the act of addressing 
or speaking to, AsvSr. &c. 

Abhi-bbashita, mfn. addressed, spoken to. 
Abhi-bhSshiu, mfn. addressing, speaking to. 
Abhi-bhashya, mfn. to be addressed. 
Abhi-bhashyamana, mfn. being addressed. 

abhi-/3. bhuj, P. to be useful to 

(acc.), SahkhSr. 

abhi-/bhu , to overcome, over¬ 
power, predominate, conquer, surpass, overspread; to 
attack, defeat, humiliate ; to approach, come near to 
(acc.), RV. iv. 31, 3; AV.; to be victorious or pros¬ 
pering in (loc.), RV. v, 37, 5. 

Abhi-bhava , mfn. overpowering, powerful, AV. 


^rfa'mf^OT abhi-ydelta . 


i, 29, 4; (as), m. prevailing, overpowering, pre¬ 
dominance, Bhag. &c.; defeat, subjugation under 
(instr. or abl., or in comp.); disregard, disrespect; 
humiliation, mortification. 

Abhi-bhavana, am, n. overpowering, Lalit.; 
the state of being overpowered, Mn. vi, 62. 
Abbi-bbavaniya, mfn. to be overcome. 
Abbi-bbavaka, mfn. overpowering, surpassing, 
Comm, on Nyayad. 

Abhi-bhavana, am, n. causing to overcome, 
making victorious, L. 

Abhi-bhavin, mfn. (ifc.) overpowering, Ragh. 
i, 14, &c. 

Abbi-bhavuka, mfn. — abhi-bhdvaka, L. 
Abhi-bhu or 2. abhi-bhu, mfn. one who sur¬ 
passes, a superior (with or without acc.), RV.; AV.; 
VS.; (Compar. abhibhutara , RV. viii, 97, 10); 
(us), m., N. of a month, Kath.; (us), m., N. of a 
die, TS.; Kath.; of a prince of the Nagas, ParGr. 

Abhi-bhuta, mfn. surpassed, defeated, subdued, 
humbled ; overcome, aggrieved, injured. 

Abhi-bhuti, is, f. superior power, overpowering, 
RV. iv, 38,9; SBr.; KatySr.; disrespect, humilia¬ 
tion, L.; (mfn.), overpowering, superior, RV.; AV. 
Abhibhuty-ojas (6), mfn. having superior power, 


Abhi-bhuya, am, n. superiority, AV. xix, 37, 3. 
Abhi-bhuvan, mf(vari)i\. superior, victorious ; 
over, RV. x, 159, 5 & 6. 

abhi-/b hr i (Subj. - bhdrdti ) to lay 

or throw upon (as a fault or blame), RV. v, 3, 7. 
Abhi-bhara, mfn. very heavy, SBr. 

abhi-/mad (p. -madyat) to be in- 

ebriated, SBr.; (cf. abhi-\ /1. viand below.) 
Abhi-mada, as, m. intoxication, inebriety, L. 
Abhi-madyat-ka, mfn. partially intoxicated, 
half-drunk, SBr. 

man, -manyatc (Subj. -man- 
yate, RV. x, 27, 11) to think of, long for, desire, 
RV. &c.; (aor. Subj. 2. sg. - inansthafi . 3. sg. 

- mansta; Ved. Inf. abhi-mantoh, SBr.) to intend 
to injure, be insidious, threaten, injure,VS.; AV. &c.; 
to kill, AitBr. (aor. -amansta) \ KatySr.; to allow, 
agree, MBh. ii, 1374, &c.; to think of self, be proud 
of; to think, suppose, imagine, take for (acc.) 

Abhi-mata, mfn. longed for, wished, desired ; 
loved, dear; allowed, AsvGr.; supposed, imagined; 
{am), n. desire, wish. — ta, f. agreeabieness, desir¬ 
ableness ; desire, love. 

Abhi-mati, is, f. self-reference, referring all ob¬ 
jects to self (as the act of Ahamkara or personality), 

Abhi-manas, mfn. ‘ having the mind directed 
towards,’ desirous of, longing for (acc.), R. &c. 

Abhi-manasya, Nom. A. (Opt. -manasycta) 

‘ to have the mind directed towards,’ be pleased with, 
like, AV. xi, 3, 25. 

Abhi-manaya, Nom. A. (Opt. - mandyeta) to 
long tor, desire, Bhatt.; (cf. gana bhrisddi ): Desid. 

- mimdnayishate, Pat. 

Abhi-mantavya, mfn. to be considered, Parlcat.; 
to be desired. 

Abhi-mantri, ta, m. one who refers all objects 
to self (N. of Isvara, together with ahamkara ; cf. 
abhi-mati above), Mn, i, 14; one who injures or 
threatens, GopBr. 

Abbi-mantoSjVed. Inf. See s. v. abhi-*/man. 
Abhi-manyu, us, m., N. of a son of Manu 
Cakshusha ; ol a son of Arjuna (by Subhadra); of 
two kings of Kasmira, Rajat. — pura, n., N. of a 
town, Rajat. - svamin, m., N. of a temple, Rajat. 

Abhi-mati, mfn. insidious, RV. v, 23, 4 &. x, 
v' *->' , t. striving to injure, RV.; an enemy, 

: KA . : AV.; SBr. — jit, mfn. subduing the enc- 

ri. 'o. — shah [RV.] or -shaha [RV.; AV.], 

- ".:uer:ng enemies. — shahya (7), 11. con- 
r'.r::.:es. RV. iii, 37, 3. — ban, mfn. striking 

• ‘ ” ;• -g :r.eb enemies, RV.; VS. 

Atbi-raatin. insidious, RV. i, 85, 3. 

Arr.ina. intention to injure, insidious- 

• -' - : -t one’s self, self-conceit, 

- - - - ' - - . M.'kfiya phi 1.) = abhi-mati 

' .07,v an erroneous one re- 

- ^ 2C : : afiectinn, desire ; N. of 

- • v.tara, VP. — ta, f. pride, 

- - —vat. : or having ideas 


■ •- ■■■ — saiin, mfn. proud, 

At hi-matin. 

arrogant, Kir. ii, 48. — sunya, mfn. void of conceit, 

Abhi-manita, am, n. copulation, sexual inter¬ 
course, L. 

Abhi-manin, mfn. thinking of one's self, proud, 
self-conceited; (ifc.) imagining one’s self to be or 
to possess, laying claim to, arrogating to one’s self; 
(i), m., N. of an Agni, VP.; BhP. Abhimani- 
ta, f. or -tva, n. the state of self-conceitedness. 

Abhi-manuka, mfn. insidious (with acc.), SBr.; 
(cf. an-abhimdnuka.) 

Abbl-mana. See nir-abhimana. 

Abbi-manin, 2, m., N. of an Agni, MarkP. 

abhi-/mantr, A. to address or 
consecrate with a Mantra (acc. & instr.; or rarely 
dat. & acc. [RV. x, 191, 3]); to address with any 
formula (as when inviting a guest [R.], Sec.) 

Abbi-mantrana, am, n. making anything 
sacred by a special formula (called abhi-mantrana- 
mantra), consecrating; addressing, Kaus. 

Abhi-mantrita, mfn. consecrated by a certain 

abhi-/manth, to churn or rub 

(for eliciting fire), SBr. xiv. 

Abbi-mantba, as, m. (ophthalmia) = adhi- 
mantha, q. v. 

Abbi-mantbana,.2W, n. the upper piece of wood 
(arani) which is churned in the lower one (lor 
kindling the fire), Kaus. 

abhi-/ 1. mo.nd , P. (3. pi. aor. -a- 

mandishuh) to gladden, RV. viii, 50. 3; A. (2. sg. 
-mandase) to be pleased with, enjoy (with loc.), , 
RV. x, 50, 2; (cf. abhi- V mad above.) 

^rf *mz.abki-mara. S te abhi-/mri. 

abhi-marda. See abhi-/mrid. 

abhi-marsana. See abhi-/mris. 

1. abhi-y 3. ma, to measure upon, 

SBr.; KatySr. 

2. Abhi-ma, f. measure (with regard to the 
breadth), MaitrS. | 

*rf**rf?r abhi-mati. See abhi-*/man. 

wfiwK abhi-mada. See abhi-/mad. 

abki-miina. See abhi-/man. 

abhi-maya, mfn. (fr. mdyd), per¬ 

plexed, confused, L. 

f^m^^^abhi-mdrutam, ind. against the 


abhi-Vmith , to address with in- 

^ • • • 

suiting speech, insult, SBr.; AsvSr.; SankhSr. 

Abbi-metbana, am, n. insulting or injurious 
speech, Yait. 

Abbi*metbika f f. id., SBr. 

^ffwfy^abhi- /mih( pr. p. gen. sg. m. - me- 
katas) to wet (by urining upon), Yajfi. ii, 293. 

Abbi-mihya, mfn. to be wetted (by urining 
upon), SBr. 

abhi-rnvkha, mf (l, rarely «)n. with 

the face directed towards, turned towards, facing 
(with acc., dat., gen.; or ifc.); (ifc.) going near, 
approaching (as yauvandbhimukhi, 1 approaching 
puberty, marriageable,’ Paficat.) ; (ifc.) disposed to, 
intending to, ready for; taking one’s part, friendly 
disposed (with gen. or instr.), R.; (am), ind. towards 
(often used in a hostile manner, Kir. vi, 14, See .), in 
the direction of, in front or presence of, near to (acc., 
gen.; or ifc.); (e), ind. in front or presence of (gen.; 
or ifc.), R.; (f), f. one of the ten Bhumis to be 
passed by a Bodhisattva before becoming a Buddha. 
— ta, f. presence, proximity. 

Abbimukbaya, Nom. P. °yati, to face, Kir. xii, 

l 9 * 

Abbimukbl (tor abhvnukha in comp, with 
V1 . kri and V bhu). — karana, n. turning the face 
towards, addressing, Pan. ii, 3, 47, Sch. — a/i. kri, 
to turn the face towards, address; to cause to turn 
the face forward, push forward, Das. — bbuta; mfn. 

I being in presence of or facing; (said of the fate) being 
favourable to. 

abhi- Vmuc, P. -jnuncati, to let go, 
let loose, MBh. xii, 10949: A. to throw or shoot 
(as arrows), MBh. vii, 3967. 


faint away, Susr. 

abhi-murchita, mfn. augmented, 
intensified, Susr.; excited, stirred up (as by passions), 

MBh. i, 7794. 

abhi-*/mri, A, (impf. -amriyata) to 

touch or defile while dying, TS. 

Abbi-mara, as, m. killing, slaughter, L.; com¬ 
bat, L.; treachery, mutiny, L.; binding in tetters, L. 

Abbi-mrita , mfn. afflicted or rendered impure 
by the death of (instr.), defiled, K:ith.; AsvGr. 

abhi-*/mriksk (impf. A. 3. gg. -a- 

mrikshata) to smear, anoint. MBh. xiii, i486: 
Caus. (impf. I. sg. -amrikshayam), id., MBh. xiii, 

abhi-s/mrij (ind. p. - mrijya ) to 

wipe, cleanse, Susr.: Caus. (impf. -amarjayat), id., 
R. iv, 6, 16. 

abhi-/mrid (Ved. Imper. 2. sg. 
-mrila) to protect graciously from (abl.), RV.x, 25,3. 

abhi-/mrid , to oppress, to devas¬ 
tate, destroy, MBh. &c.; (in astrou.) to be in op¬ 
position to, VarBrS. 

Abhi-marda, as, m. devastation (of a country 
&c. by an enemy), MBh.; battle, L.; spirituous 
liquor, L. 

Abhi-mardana, mfn. (ifc.) oppressing; (am), 
11. oppression. 

Abhi-mardin, mfn. (ifc.) oppressing, R.; one 
who devastates. 

abhi-/mris, P. (1. pi. -mrisamasl ; 

Ved. Inf. -mr/se, RV. ii, 10, 5) to touch, come in 
contact with, RV. Sec.: A. - mrisatc , id., RV. i, 
145, 4, &c.: Caus. to cause to touch, SankhSr.: 
Intens. (p. -mar mri sat) ‘to intend to bring in con¬ 
tact with one’s self,’ to long for (acc.), RV. iii, 38, 

I; (AitBr.) 

Abhi-marsa (or less correctly abbi-marsba, 

Mn. viii, 352,&c ; ), as, rn. touching, contact, Kuril. 
&c.; (ifc. f. d), Sak.; grasping, seizing (as by the 
hair), BhP. 

Abhi-marsaka (or less correctly abhi-mar- 
sbaka, R.), mfn. touching, coming in contact with. 

Abhi-marsana (or less* correctly abhi-mar- 
sbana, R.), am, 11. touching, contact, KatySr.; 
Yajfi. &c.; (mfn.), (ifc.) = abhi-marsaka , R.; BhP. 

Abhi-mrishta, mfn. touched ; struck (as by a 
weapon), BhP. — ja, mfn. ‘born from (women) 
touched (by others).’ illegitimate(?), MBh. ii, 2422 ; 
summoned, invited, BhP. 

/mrafesh. See abhi- /mriksh, 

abhi-mlata. See an-abhimlata. 

abhi- Zyaj , to honour with sacri¬ 
fices, Gobh. Sec .; to offer (a sacrifice), MBh.; to 
honour (aor. A. 3. sg. -ayashta), RV. vi, 47, 25. 

Abhi-yashtavya, mfn. to be honoured with 
sacrifices, Gobh. 

Abhxjya, infn. id., L.; (ax), m. a god, L. 

1. abhi-\ yd, to go up to in a hos¬ 
tile manner, attack, assail, RV. i, 174, 5 (aor. Subj. 
-ydsishat) ; AV. &c.; to go up to, approach, obtain, 
MBh. &c.; to devote one’s self to, take up (as pa- 
j shani}am, ‘heterodoxies’), BhP.: Cans, to cause to 
1 approach, send towards, BhP. 

1 2. Abhi-ya, mfn. going up to, approaching, L.; 

| assailing, L.; (said of a prince) ‘going all round,* 
i. e. vigilant, careful, MBh. 

Abhi-y a ta, 111 in. approached ; attacked. 
Abbi-yati, is, or -yatin, i, m. an assailant, 
enemy, L, 

Abbi-yatri, id, m. id., R. ii, 2, 21. 
Abhi-yana, am, 11. coming near, approaching, 
L.; attacking, MBh. 

Abbi-yayin, mfn. going towards, approaching 
(with acc. or ifc.); (ifc.) attacking, Ragh.xii, 43. 

abhi-Zyac, to ask for, solicit, 


Abbi-yacana, am, n. asking for, entreaty, re¬ 
quest ; scf. satydbhiydcana.) 

Abbi-ydcita, mfn. asked for, requested. 

r 2 



Abbi-yScaS, f. id,, L. 

’?tT*TS'ST i . abhi-\ yujt A. -yKii&te } toputto 

( i: hcrses to a carriage) for a special purpose (acc.) } 


rB:. : ? to put to (as horses) subsequently, SBr.: 
A. :: summon, invite to (dat.), R. vii, 6i, 9: P. to 
crior. charge with (loc.), MBh. xiv, 2637: A. 

' rarely P.) to encounter, attack, assail; to accuse of 
( arc, , Mn. viii, 183, &c.: P. A. to undertake, apply 
to. make one’s self ready to (acc. or Inf.): Caus. to 
furnish with, make anybody share in (instr.), MBh. 

Abhi-yukta, mfh. applied, intent on (loc.); dili¬ 
gent, versed in (loc.); appointed; attacked (by an 
enemy), assailed ; blamed, rebuked, L.; (in law) ac¬ 
cused, charged, prosecuted, a defendant, Y5jh. &c. 
Abbi-yugnran, mfn. attacking,, 45,15VS. 
2. Abh.i-.yrij, k s f. an assailant, enemy, RV. 
Abhi-yujyamfina, mfn. (in law) being perse¬ 
cuted (as a defendant). 

Abbi-yoktavya, mfn. (in law) to be accused or 
prosecuted, Mn. viii, 50. 

Abhi-yoktri, mfn. assailing, attacking; ( ta), m. 
ail enemy, Hit.; (inlaw) a plaintiff, claimant, pre¬ 
tender, accuser, Mn. viii, 52 & 58, &.c. 

Abhi-yogra, as, m. application ; energetic effort, 
exertion, perseverance in, constant practice (with loc. 
or inf.); attack, assault, Kurn. vii, 50, &c.; (in law) 
a plaint, a charge, accusation, Yajn. &c. — pattra, 
n. a petition or writing of complaint. 

Abhi-yogin, mfn. intent upon, absorbed in at¬ 
tacking ; (in law) accusing, Yajfl. ii, 11; (i), m. a 
plaintiff, prosecutor. 

Abhi-yogya, mfn. assailable, L. 

Abhi-yojana, am, n. putting to (as horses) sub- 1 
sequently, Say. on SBr. (cf. abhi-*/yuj ). , 

Abhi-yojya, mfn. assailable. 

abhi-yuta , mfn. inclosed in (acc.), , 

Nir. ii, 19. 

abhi-Vyudh (pr. Subj. 2. sg. -yu- 
dhyds; aor. 2. sg. - yodhis , 3. sg. -dyodhit, 2. du. 
-yodhishtam, p. -yodhdnd) to tight against (acc.), 
RV.; toacquireby fighting, RV.;tofight,Hariv.; BhP. 

^rfarOST abhi-/raksh , P. A. -rakshati, °te 

(p. -rdkshamdna, RV. x, 157, 4) to guard, pro¬ 
tect, preserve, RV. &c.; ‘to govern or command * (cf. 

Abhi-rakshana, am, n. guarding, protection, 
MBh. &c. 

Abhi-raksha, f. protection, VarBrS. 
Abhi-rakshita, mfn. protected,preserved,guard¬ 
ed ; governed, commanded, Bhag. Sec. 

Abhi-rakshitri, mfn. one who preserves, a pro¬ 
tector of (gen.), Mn. vii, 35. 

Abhi-rakshya, mfn. to be protected, VarBrS. 

abhi-raftj, - rajyate , to be pleased 

with (instr.): Caus. P.‘to colour’ (cf. abhi-rafijita'). 
Abhi-rakta, mfn. devoted to, MBh. Sec. 
Abhi-ra£jita, mfn. tinted, coloured, R. 

'srfaTvrWii - v'rabh, A. (perf. 3. pi ,-rebkire) 

to embrace, BhP.: Caus. perf. Pass. p. - rambhita , 
see below. 

Abhi-rambhita, mfn. embraced, BhP.; seized 
by (acc.!), BhP. 

abhi- / ram, -ramate , to dwell, 
A$vGr,; to repose, SSnkhGr.; Mn. iii, 251: Yajn. 
i, 251; to delight in, be delighted, MBh. &c.: Caus. 

-rdmayati, to gladden, MBh. &c,; to delight in, to I 
be delighted. 

Abhi-rata, mfn. reposing, Yajh. i, 25T ; pleased 
or contented with (loc.), satisfied ; engaged in, at¬ 
tentive to (loc.), performing, practising. 

Abhi-rati, is, f. pleasure, delighting in (loc. or 
in comp.), Ragh. ix, 7, &c.; N. of a world, Buddh. 
Abhi-ramana, am, n. delighting in, delighting. 
Abhi-ramaruya. mfn. delightful. 

Abhi-r5ma, mf(<z)n. pleasing, delightful, agree¬ 
able, beautiful; (jj), rn., N. of Siva; I. (am), ind. 
so as to be agreeable to (in comp.), Sak.; (for 2. 
abhi-rdmam, see s, v. below.) — tS, f. loveliness, 
beauty, Sis. i, 16, &c.; the state of being agreeable 
to (in comp.), Mcar. — tva, n .--td. — pasupati, 
m., N. ot a poet, — mani, n., N. of a drama of 
Sundaramisra; (cf. Wilson, Hindu Theatre, ii, 395.) 

abhi- y 7 !. ras , to neigh towards 

(acc v , KatySr. | 

TO<1H 1. abhi-*/raj, -rajate, to shine, be 

brilliant, MBh. iii, 10960. 

2. Abhi-rSj, mfn. reigning everywhere, Kaus. 
Ab bi-raj a, as, m., N. of a Burmese king. 
Abhi-rashtra, mfn. overpowering or conquer¬ 
ing dominions, RV. x, 174, 5. 

wfHtlV abhi-Vradh, Caus. - radhayati , to 
propitiate, conciliate, SBr. &c.: Caus. Pass. - radh - 
yate , to be rendered propitious, R.: Caus. Desid. 
-riradhayishati, to intend to render propitious, SBr. 

Abhi-raddha, mfn. rendered propitious, propiti¬ 
ated, conciliated, Sis. i, *jl. 

^ 2. abhi-rdmam, ind, referring to 


abhi-*/ribk, - rebhati , to howl to¬ 

wards (acc.), BhP. (v. 1. for abhi-*/ 1. ru, q. v.) 

abhi -v / rish (Subj. - reskat ) to fail, 

miscarry, AV. iv, 35, 1. 

. ru, -rauti(v. 1. - rebhati ) to 

roar or howl towards (acc.), BhP.; (Irnper. 2. sg. - ru- 
va ) AV. v, 20, 3. 

Abhi-ruta, mfn. filled with roaring or any noise, 
resounding with (in comp.), MBh. &c.; (am), n. 
cries, R.; singing (as of birds), R. 

abhi-*/rue, A. to be bright, shine, 

R.; MSrkP.; to please any one (dat.), Vikr.: Caus. 
P. to delight, amuse, MBh. xiii, 476 (v. 1. abhi- 
*/ram, Caus.): P. A. to be pleased with, approve 
of, be inclined to, like, MBh. Sec. 

Abhl-rucl, is, f. delighting in, being pleased with 
(loc. or in comp.), BhP. Sec. 

Abhi-rucita, mfn. pleasing, agreeable to; pleased 
with, delighting in (loc. or in comp.); (cf. yathd- 
bkirucita) \ (as), m., N. of a prince of the Vidy5- 
dharas, Kathas. 

Abhi-rucira, mfn. very bright, R. iii, 39, 5. 

abhi-rudita, mfn. cried, uttered 

in a lamenting manner, R. 

Abhi-roruda, mfn. causing tears (indicative of 
strong passion), AV. vii, 38, 1. 

^rf»TC>V abhi-*/rudh , to keep off, MBh. 

viii, 4308. 

Abhi-roddhri, mfn. one who wards off, MaitrS. 

abhi-rushita , mfn. very angry, 

MBh. viii, 1747. 

abhi-ruh (perf. 3. pi ,-ruruhuh) to 

ascend, mount, RV. v, 7, 5, Sec. 

Abhi-ruhya, ind. p. having ascended. 

^sriwi abhi-rupa , mf(a)n. corresponding 

with (dat.), conformable to, SBr.; AitBr.; pleasing, 
handsome, beautiful, AV. viii, g, 9; M11. &c.; wise, 
learned, Mn. iii, 144; Sak.; (as), m. the moon, L.; 
Siva, L.; Vishnu, L.; Kamadeva, L. —1£, f. the 
state of being learned or well educated, K5d. —pati, 
m. ‘having an agreeable master/ (a rite) to secure 
such a master in the next world, L. —vat, mfn. 
handsome, beautiful, MBh. iii, 10070. 

AbM-rupaka, mfn .-abhi-rupa, Pan. viii, 1, 8, 
Sch.; (gana sreny-ddi and sraman&di , q. v.) 

abhi-*/rai , to back towards (acc.), 


abhi-roruda. See abhi-rudita. 

^abhi-*/laksh , Pass, -lakshyate, to 

appear, MBh. viii, 1045. 

Abhi-lakshana,<z.w ; n. the act of marking (with 
signs), Heat. 

Abhi-lakshita, mfn. fixed or indicated by (as 
by special signs); determined for, selected as, MBh. 
xii, 13223 ; indicated, pointed out, R. ii, 57, 2 ; ap¬ 
pearing, visible, Hariv.; (an- or na, neg.) unseen, 
unperceived, MBh. i, 5822 ; Yajn. iii, 59. 

Abhi-lakshya, mfn. to be fixed or indicated by, 
distinguishable through (in comp.); (am), ind. to¬ 
wards a mark or aim, R. ii, 63, 23. Abhilak- 
shyi-kritya, ind. p. (*/l.kri), aiming at a mark, 
directing towards. 

a b hi-*/la iig h, Caus.10 jum p acr 0 s s 

or over; to transgress, violate; to injure, MBh. xii, 


Abhi-laxtffhana; am, n. jumping over f*en.), 

R .; violating, acting contrary to (in comp.), MBh. 
xiii, 2194. 

Abhi-lanffMn, mfn. violating, acting contrary 
to (in comp.), MBh. xiii, 4964. 

lap, to talk or speak about, 

AitBr.; KaushBr. 

Abbi-lapya, mfn. See nir-abhilapya. 
Abhl-l£pa, as, m. expression, word, Sah. &c.; 
declaration (as of the object of a vow), Kad.; (cf. 

abhi-labh , A. to take or lay hold 
of, BhP.; to reach, obtain, gain, MBh. &c.: Desid. 
(p. P. -lipsat) to intend to catch or obtain, MBh. i, 

Abbi-lipsS, f. desire of obtaining. 

%^ahhi-*/lask, -lashati, to desire or 

wish for (aco.), covet, 'crave. 

Abhi-lashana, am, n. craving after, desiring. 
Abhi-lasbaxuya, mfn. desirable, to be coveted. 
Abhi-lasliita, mfn. desired, wished; (am), n. 
desire, wish, will. 

Abhl-lfisba (or less correctly abbi-lSsa),^;, m. 
(ifc. f. a), desire, wish, covetousness, affection (with 
loc. or ifc.) 

Abhi-ISshaka, mfn. wishing, desiring (with 
acc.), R. 

Abh.i-lS.shin, mfn. id. (with loc. or ifc.), Sak. 
Sec. ; (less correctly abhi-lasin, Megh. &c.) 

Abhi-lSshuka, mf(a)n. id. (with acc. [Kir.] or 
ifc. [KathSs.]) 

abhi-lava, as, m. (\//w), cutting, 

reaping, mowing, Pan. iii, 3, 28. 

abhi - /likh , to engrave, write 

upon, draw, paint: Caus. to cause to paint, have any¬ 
thing painted, Kathas.; to cause to write down, Yajn. 

i, 318. 

Abhi-lekhana, am, n. writing upon, inscribing. 
Abhi-lekhita, am, 11. a written document, Yajn. 

ii, 149. 

to smear with, TS.; 

Kaus.: Caus. id., MBh. xiii, 7427. 

abhi-Vli, -Ivy ate , to adhere to, 

cling to (acc.), MBh.; Das. 

Abhi-llna, mfn. adhering to, clinging to (acc.), 
Megh. &c.; ‘adhered to,’ chosen (as a seat by birds 
or bees), Hariv.; Ragh. iii, 8. 

abhi-*/lup (p. - lumpat ) to rob, 

plunder, BhP. 

Abhi-lupta, mfn. disturbed, injured. 

^ f<N lubh, Caus. - lobhayati , to 

entice, allure. 

abhi-lulita , mfn. touched or 

grazed by (anything); shaken about, agitated, Sak. 

abhi-luta,i. a kind of spider,Susr. 

abhi-s/lok, Caus. (p. -lokayat) to 

view, look at (from a height), R. vi, 2, 7. 

*rfV[^ abhi-*/vac(=.abhy-anu-*/vac),* to 

declare or utter a verse with reference to/ only perf. 
Pass, p . abhy-ukta, q.v.; to say to (acc.), tell, 
MBh: &c. 

abhi-vancita , mfn. cheated, de¬ 

ceived, MBh. v, 7506. 

\abhi-vdt, mfn. containing the word 
abhi, SBr. 

abhi- *J vad, P. (rarely A., e.g. MBh. 

v, 923) to address or salute with reverence, SBr. 
&c.; to declare with reference to, express by, name, 
call, SBr. Sec .; to say, speak, BhP.; Up.: Caus. - va- 
dayati, °te, to address or salute reverently ; to pre¬ 
sent one’s self to (dat.), SankhGr.: A. to salute 
through another person (acc. or instr.), P3n. i, 4, 53, 
Comm.: P. to cause to recite, BhP.; ‘ to cause to 
sound/ play (on an instrument), MBh. iii, 14386. 

Abhl-vadana, am, n. salutation, MBh. iii, 1835; 
addressing, Comm, on Kum. vi, 2. 

AbM-vSda, as, m. reverential salutation, Mn. ii, 
I20seqq.<> Gaut.; (v. 1. ati-vdda) opprobrious or 
unfriendly speech, abuse, MBh. xii, 9972. 
Abbi-vSdaka, mfn. a saluter, saluting, Comm. 

|>»vf abhi-vadana. 



on Mn. ii, 125; having the intention to salute, N.; 
(cf. abhi-vandaka) ; civil, polite, L. 

Abbi-vSdana, am, n. respectful salutation (in¬ 
cluding sometimes the name or title of the person so 
addressed and followed by the mention of the person’s 
own name); salutation (of a superior or elder by a 
junior or inferior, and especially of a teacher by his 
disciple; in general it is merely lifting the joined 
hands to the forehead and saying aham abhivddaye, 
I salute). — si la, mfn. one who habitually salutes,- 

Abhi-vAdaxuya, mfn. deserving respectful salu¬ 
tation, MBh. iii, 10035; (said the name) used for 

the salutation, AsvGr; Gobh. 

Abhi-vadayitri, mfn. saluting respectfully, 
Comm, on Mn. ii, 123. 

Abbi-vAdita, mfn. saluted respectfully. 
Abbl-vAdin, mfn. telling, enunciating, describ¬ 
ing, Nir.; ( i ), m. an explainer, interpreter, MaitrUp. 

AbM-v&dya, mfn. to be respectfully saluted, 
MBh. &c. 

55rf*T3>l abhi-/vadh (aor. -avadhit) to 

strike, MBh.; R. 

abki-/van (impf. 3. pi. -avanvan) 

to long for, desire, RV. i, 51, 2. 

Abhi-vanya [TBr.] or abhivAnya-vatsA 

[AitBr.] (or apiv&nya-vatsA [Kaus.]), f. a cow 
who suckles an adopted calf; (cf. also ni-vanya, See.) 

abhi-/vand, A. (rarely P.) to sa¬ 
lute respectfully, MBh. &c. 

Abhi-vandaka, mfn. having the intention to 
salute, Jain. 

Abhi-vandana, am, n. saluting respectfully, 
MBh. See. 

^f*m*{abhi-/2 nap (impf. 3. pi. -vapdntaj 

Ved. ind. p. -ripya) to scatter over, cover with (instr.), 
RV. ii, 15,9 & vii, 56, 3. 

'*&faft*{abhi-/vam, to spit upon ,TS.; SBr. 

abht-vayas, mfn. very youthful, 

fresh, RV. x, 160,1. 

abhi-varnana , am, n. description, 


Abhl-varnita, mfn. described, MBh.; Susr. 

abhi-/valg, to jump towards, 

MBh. vi, 3265; (said of boiling water) to bubble up, 
AV. xii, 3, 29. 

abhi-/vas, -vashti (perf. A. -va- 

vase, p. 1.- vavasand , RV. i, 164, 28; for 2. -vava- 
sand see abhi-*/vas), P. to rule or be master over 
(acc.), RV. ii, 25, 3: P. A. to long for, desire, RV. 

1. abhi-/4. vas, -vaste, to wrap 
on$ ? s self up in (acc.), Kaus.: Caus. (impf - dvasa- 
yat ) to clothe, cover, RV.; TS. &c. 

Abhi-vAsa, as, m. covering, Nyayam. 
Abhi-vAsana, am, n. id., Comm, on TS. Se on 

Abhi-v^sas, ind. over the garment, SBr.; (as), 
n. (scil. aiigirasam) ‘ the cover of the Angiras,’ N. 
of a Saman. 

Abhl-vlUya, mfn. to be covered, TBr. 

. abhi-/ 5. vas. See abhy-ushita. 

abhi-/vah (3. pi. -vahantd ; Pot. 

3. pi. - vaheyuh; aor, Subj. 2. sg. -vakshi, 3. du. 

-volham [RV. viii, 32, 29 & 93, 24]) to convey or 


carry near to or towards, RV.; SBr.; AitBr.: Caus. 
-vahayati (incorrectly for ati-v°), to pass (time), 

Raj at. 

Abhi-vahana, am, n. carrying near to, Nir. 
Abhiv 5 .ha-.tAs, ind. in consequence of the flow¬ 
ing towards, TS. 

Abhi-vAhya, am, n. conveyance, transmission. 
Mn. i, 94. 

Abhi-vodhri, dha, m. one who conveys towards, 

Abhy-udhi, is, f. conveying towards, TBr. 

abhi-*/ 2 .va (perf. - vavau, SBr.) to 

blow upon or towards, RV. vii, 35, 4&X, 169,1; 
SBr. &c. 

Abhi-v&tAm, ind. windwards, SBr. 

1 abhi-*/vanch, to long for, desire, 

MBh. &c.: Caus. id., MBh. xii, 2907. 

Abhi-vAnchA, f. longing for, desire (ifc.), KathSs. 
Abhi-vanchita, am, n. wish, desire, R. Sec. 

abhi-vdta, inf(c)n.(-/ vai ), ill, sick, 


abhi-vanya. See abhi-*/van. 

abhi-v vas (aor. 3. pi. - avava- 
Santa ; perf. 3. pi. -vavasire or - vavasrc , p. 2. -vi¬ 
vas and [RV. x, 1 23, 3; cf. abhi-*/vas]) to low.(as 
a cow) or roar towards, RV.; Nir. 

Abhi-vAsat, mfn. lowing (as a cow) or roaring 
towards, MBh. ;VarBrS. 

Abhi-vasin. See basi&bhivasin. 

abhi-vikrama, mfn endowed 
with great courage, R. 

abhi-vi-*/kship, to flap one’s 
wings over, ApSr. 

Abhi-vi-kshepa, as, m. flapping one’s wings 
over, Comm, on ApSr. 

abhi-vi-*/khy a, to look at, view, 

VS.; Gobh. 

Abhi-vikhyAta, mfn. universally known, re¬ 
nowned, known as, called, MBh. &c. 

•ZtfxfzmSabhi-vi -/caksh , -cashte, to look 
towards, RV. iii, 55, 9; AV. ii, 10, 4. 

abhi-vi-*/car, A. (Subj. 3. pi. 

-carant a) to go near to (acc.), RV. iii, 4, 5 : Caus. 
edrayati , to consider, reflect upon, Nir. 

abhi-*/vij (aor. Subj. A. -vikta) 

to tip over (a vessel), RV. i, 162, 15. 

Abhi-vega, as, m. tottering, vacillation, RV. x, 
27, I. 

abhi-vi- /janh, Intens. -jahgahe 
(Ved. 3. sg.) to struggle, move in convulsions, AV. 

v, 19, 4. 

abhi-vi-*/jna (impf. I. pi. - ajani - 
mas!) to be aware of, perceive, AitBr. 
Abhi-vijnapta, mfn. notified, made known. 
Abhi-vi-jnAya, ind. p. being aware ot) perceiv¬ 
ing, MBh. &c. 

abhi-vi- */jval, to flame or blaze 
against or opposite to, Bhag. 

' ; xf*?['m{f{abhi-vi-\/tan (Imper. 2* sg. -ta- 

nu) to stretch (the string) over or across (the bow), 
AV. i, 1, 3: P. A. (3. pi . -tanvanti, - tanvate ) to 
stretch over, cover, SBr.; SankhSr. 

1. abhi-*/ 1 . vid, Caus. - vedayati , 

to report, relate, R. (v. 1 .) 

’STiVfcf? 2. abhi-*/ 3. vid, to find, obtain, 
SBr.: A. (3. pi. -vindate) to know, MBh. iii, 13698. 

abhi-vi-dipita, mfn. entirely 
inflamed, MBh. xiv, 2033. 

S'rfWfW ^(abhi-vi- /dris,Cd>\is.-darsayati, 
to show to (gen.), ApSr. 

abhi-vi-*/1. dyut (aor. - dyaut) 
to break open, open by force, RV. iv, 4, 6. 

abhi-vi-druta , mfn. (/ 2. dru), 

run towards, MBh. vi, 1770 ; run away, fled, MBh. 

vi, 4614. 

*rfrrfw abhi-vi-*/dha, to bring near to 

or in contact with (acc.), SBr. 

Abhi-vidhi, is, m. complete cornpr tension or 
inclusion, Pan. ii, 1, 13; (au), loc. ina. inclusively, 
Pan. iii, 3, 44 & v, 4, 53. 

Abhi-vi-hita, mfn. covered entirely, Llty. 

abhi-vi-*/i.dhav, to run near 
to, R J. x, 29, 3. 

abhi-vi-*/nad, to raise a loud 

noise, R. 

abhi-vinita , mfn. well disci¬ 
plined, well educated, versed in (loc.), R. &c. 

abhi-vi-*/nud, Caus. -nodayati, 

^0 gladden, cause to rejoice, MBh. xii, 898. 

abhi-vi-panyu, mfn. (= aihi- 
j kcLmushmika-karma-rahita) absolutely indiffer- 

A ent, BhP. 

abhi-vi- /pas, ~pdsyati , to look 
at, view, RV.; SBr.; Nir.; to iook hither, RV. iii, 
23, 2. 

abhi-vi-*/budk, -budhyate, to 

notice, learn from. 

abhi-vi-*/bkaj , A. to distribute, 


abhi-vi- */bha, -bhati, to illumi¬ 
nate, RV. vii, 5, 2; AV. xiii, 2, 42. 

i-vi- s/mant.h (Opt .-mathni- 
yat) to grind, triturate, SBr. 

abhi- 4 nmana ,mfn.en dowed with 

the faculty called abhimanai/ self-reference ’),ChUp, 

abhi-vi-\ J mrij (ind. p. -mrijya) 
to rub in, rub with, Kau§. 

abhi-vi-/ya, -yati, to approach, 
visit, RV. j, 48, 7. 

abhi-vi-*/raj (=. vi-\/raj, 6 to 

govern’), Nir.; to shine, be radiant, MBh. &c. 

Abhi-virAjita, mfn. quite bright or brilliant, 

^fvTP^( abhi-vi-*/rue , A. (impf. - aroca - 
ta ) to shine or be brilliant over, MBh. vi, 1669 (v. 1 . 
at i-vi-*/rue). 

ab hi-vi- /li ,Cau s. (in d. p. -1 dpi; a ) 

to cause to melt, Susr. 

abhi-vi-/2. vas (Pot. - ucchet ) 

to shine forth during or at the time of (acc.), AsvSr.; 
PBr.; (A. - uccheta ) SankhSr. 

abhi-vi-vriddhi, is, f. increased 

prosperity, VarBrS. 

'yStfitf^n^abhi-V vis, Caus., perf. Pass. p. 

-vesita , 1 caused toentcrupon,’directed towards, BhP. 

Abbi-vishta, mfn. ‘entered by,’ seized by, being 
in the power of (in -omp.), R. 

abhi-vi-/sans, - sa'psati , to di¬ 
vide (verses) in reciting, TS.; (cf. vi-*/sans.) 

abki-vi-sahkin, mfn. afraid 

of (abl.) 

abhi-vi-/sri. Pass.(impf.- asirya- 

ta) to be torn t«> pieces. MBh. vii, 4378. 

abhi-visruta, mfn. widely cele¬ 

brated, MBh. Sec. 

a b h i-vi- / sv as, C au s. - sv as ay ati, 

to render confident, MBh. iii, 10021; Susr. 

abhi-vi-shavj {Vsafij), Pass. 

-shajjate, to be entirely devoted to, have one’s heart 
set upon (loc.), BhP. 

ffT ahhi-vi-shtha (/stha), A. (2. sg. 

- tisht/iuje, perf. 3. sg, -t as the) to extend one’s self 
towards or over, RV. v, 8, 7 & vi, 21, 7 - 

i-vi-shy and( */sy an d ),Cau s. 

to pour water upon, moisten, Kaus. 

abhi-vi-/srij, A. (impf. 3. pi. 

-asr jantd) to throw or shout towards (acc.), Kath.; 
to assume from (abl.), KaushUp. 

abhi-vi-/hri (Pot. 3. pi.- fiGreyu h) 

to divide, AsvSr. 

abhi-vi {/ i), (3. pi. abhi vi yanti) 

to come towards from different parts, RV. vi, 9, 5. 

ahhi-vihsh (/ iksh ), A. -vikshate 
(rarely P., e. g. impf. -vyaikshat, AitUp.) to look 
at, view, perceive, MBh.; Mn. &c.; to examine, 

| Susr.; to look upon as (nom.), behave as (nom.) 
with regard to (acc.), MBh. xv, 379; to be affected 

Abbi-viksbita, mfn. seen, perceived. 
Abbi-vikshya, ind. p. having seen or observed. 

ahhi-/vij, Caus. to fan, MBh. 

xii, 6347, Sec. 

dbhi-vita, mf(a)n. -(/, de¬ 
sired, RV. vii, 27, 4; driven, impelled by (in comp.), 


abhi-vira . 

cibhi-sri . 

^747TT ahhi-rlra, mfn. surrounded by 

• - - * « ' , ^ . A , A V ( -, ( £ I 

* / 

^7*^5 i. abhi-v i. rn*, Caus. -varayati, to 

:e:.d MBh.' 


: Abhi-vrita, :n;n. Mirrounded by, R. vi, 92,83. 
Abhi-vrita, mfn. surrounded by, bordered by, 
RY ; said of a cow) covered by (the bull), RV. i, 

: .4. 29. 

^ f2. abki-y/ 2. vri , - vrinite , to choose, 
p r efer. Kath.; (perf. 3. pi. -vavrire) to select, MBh. 
xii. 4861. 

2. Abhi-vrita, mfn. chosen, selected, MBh. v, 

= 971 - 

abh-i-y/vrit , to go towards, ap¬ 
proach, SBr. Arc.; to attack, RV. v, 31, 5 ; (ind. p. 
-vritya x, 1 74, 2, &c.; to be victorious (perf. -vd- 
vritc r ' : , RV. x, i 74, I; to turn up, arise, R. Sec .; to 
take place, happen, exist, MBh. Sc c.: Caus. P. (aor. 
-aidvritat) to conquer, RV. x, 174, 3; AV.; ‘to 
render victorious in,* place over (dat.), RV. x, 174, 
i ; to drive over (with a cart), RV. ii, 34, 9. 

Abhi-varta, as, m. ( — abhi-i?) N.of a Saman, 

Abhi-vartin, mfn. coming towards, approach¬ 
ing, Hariv.; going towards (in comp.), R. 

Abbi-vritti, is, f. coming towards, TBr. 

Abhi-varta, mfn. rendering victorious, RV. x, 
I 74.1 Sc 3; (as), m, victorious attack, victory, VS.; N. 
of different S.lmans (especially of thehymn RV. x, 
174) supposed to render victorious, AsvGr.; Laty. 

Abhi-vrit, mfn. ‘approaching’ (Say.), RV. i, 
3 7, 4; the form (acc. n). abhi-vrit am) is however 
better derived fr. abhi-vrita by BR. Sc Gmn. 

abhi-y/vridh, to grow higher than 

'acc.), surpass, RV.; AV. (i, 29, I, nerf. -vdvridhe 
for vdvritc, cf. RV. i, 174, 1), Sec .; to grow up, 
grow or increase more and more, MBh. &c.; to 
prosper, Mn. See .: Caus. P. (aor. - avivridhat ) to 
increase, strengthen, render prosperous, AV. i, 29, 1 
Sc 3 , for abhi- \'vrit,d. RV. x, 174,1 Sc 3); MBh.&c. 

Abhi-vriddha, mfn. increased, augmented. 

Abbi-vriddbi, is, f. growth, increase, VarBrS.; 
Susr.; increase, prosperity, MBh.; Mn. vii, 109. 

ahhi-\ / 1'risk, P. (aor. - dvarshit) to 
rain upon, RV. vii, 103, 3 ; AV. See.: P. (sometimes 
A. ) to bedew, cover with (instr.) a shower (as of ar¬ 
rows or blossoms, See.), MBh. Sec .; (said of gods) 
to cause to rain, VarBrS. Sec. 

Abhi-varsha, as, m. rain, BhP. 

Abhi-varsbana, am. 11. raining upon, Kaus.; 
A.svSr.; raining, R.; (cf. kdmdbhivarshana.) 

Abhi-varshin, mfn. raining, R.; BhP, 

Abbi-vrisbta, mfn. rained upon, RV. vii, 103, 
4, See.; covered with (instr.); (said of clouds) having 
rained, MBh. vii, 8104 ; also (am), n. impers. it has 
been raining* VarBrS.; (cf . yathabhivrishtam.) 

abhi-y/vrih , Caus. (Imper. 2. sg. 
- vrinhaya ) to strengthen, encourage, MBh. vii. 

•\ T *» 

A t 1 . 

WWT abhi-vegd. See abhi- a/ vij. 

abhi-vedhin. See abhi--/vyadh. 

abhi-\/vesht, Caus. to cover with 

(instr.', Kathas. &c. 

abhi-vy -\/ anj, Pass. -vyajyate, to 

be manifested, become manifest. 

Abhi-vyakta, mfn. manifest, evident, distinct, 
Sak.; Ragh. &c,{ (am), ind. manifestly, Yajn.; N. 

Abhi-vyakti, is, f. manifestation, distinction, 
Pan. viii. 1. 13; Sah. &c. 

Abhi-vyaitjaka, mfn. revealing, manifesting, 
BhP.; Sah.; indicative, showing. 

Abbi-vyanj ana, am, n, making manifest, L. 

&*W^fibhi-\/vyadh, ?. (rarely A., e.g. 
MB~. vii:. 4591) to wound, TS. &c. 
Abhi-viddha, mfn. wounded, MBh. iv, 1691. 
Anbi-vedhin, mfn. (in geom.) cutting (as one 

rfj ♦ V — ♦ ■ « 4 A w # s 

Abbi-vyadbin, mfn. wounding, AV. i, 19, 1. 

+ / 

ohei-ry-van. -aniti, to breathe 

t'-ro-rh. :•* r w:t:: breath, SBr.-; (aor. -anit) to 

\ -- ■'i * ‘ - • ’ r\ S •* • Iv ? ♦ L 

• t 

ahl i-vy-Ci-\ 1. da (impf. -vyada- 

ddt ) to open one’s mouth for swallowing (with acc.), 
SBr.; Kath. 

Abhi-vyadana, am, n. ‘swallowing,’ i. e. sup¬ 
pressing (a vowel), RPrat. 

abhi-vy-Vbp (ind. p .-vyapya), 

(said of a rule) to extend to (acc.), have value unto 
(acc.), Pan. ii, I, 134, Sch. 

Abbi-vyapaka, mfn. (in Gr.) extending to (acc.; 
as a rule), including, comprehending. 

Abbi-vyapin, mfn. id. 

Abhi-vyapta, mfn. included, comprehended. 

Abbi-vyapti, is, f. inclusion, comprehension 
( —abhi-vi-dhi, q. v.), Pan. vi, 4, 53, Sch. 

1. Abbi-vyapya, ind. p. up to a certain point, 

2. Abbi-vySpya, mfn. to be included, Susr. 

abhi-vy-a- \/ hri , to utter, pro¬ 
nounce, TS. &c.; to speak or converse about (acc.), 
TS. &c.: Caus. to cause to pronounce, Kaus.; to 
pronounce, Mn. ii, 172. 

Abbi-vyaharana, am, n. =* abJii-vyahara, 
Comm, on Nir. 

Abhi-vyahara, as, m. pronunciation, utterance, 
ChUp. &c.; an articulate significant word or phrase, 

Abhi-vyaharin, mfn. (if:, e. g. kokildbhivyd- 
hdrin) speaking like (a cuckoo), Pan. vi, 2, So, Sch. 

Abhi-vyahrita, mfn. pronounced, spoken ; ad¬ 
dressed, SBr.; (am), n. what has been said, AitUp .; 
what is being said, Pan. iii, 2, 188, Comm. 

Abhi-vyahritya, mm. to be said, AitBr. 

nbhi’Vy- -v/i. vksh (Opt. - ukshet) 

to sprinkle towards (acc.), SBr. 

abhi-vy-ud- a/: 2. as, to give up or 

abandon entirely, BhP. 

ahhx-s/vye (Imper. 2. sg. A. -vya- 
yasva) to wrap one’s self into (acc.), RV. iii, 53, \ 9. 

abhi-vvraj (p .-vrajat) to go up 

to (acc.), RV.: (ind. p. -vrajya) to pass through, j 
Kaus.; to go to (acc.), BhP. 

abhi-vlahga, as, m. turning off, 

shaking off, RV. i, 133, 4. 

abhi-A/vli (impf. - avliyata ) to sink 

down, fall down, PBr. 

abhi- a/ sans, to accuse, blame, 

calumniate, TS. &c.; (2. sg. -sansasi ; ind.p. - sasya ) 
to praise, R. ii, II, 16 Sc 23, 8. 

Abhi-sansaka, mfn. accusing, L. ; insulting, L. 

Abbi-sansana, am, n. accusation ; insult (with 
gen.), M11. viii, 268 ; ‘accusation,’ ifc. e. g. anritd- 
bLisansana [Gant.] or mithyabhisansana [Yajn. 
ii, 289] a false accusation. 

Abhi-sansin. See mithy abhi sansin. 

Abhi-sas (only instr. -sasd), f. accusation, im¬ 
precation, RV. x, 164, 3. 

Abhi-sasta, mfn. accused, blamed, calumniated ; 
defamed, infamous, MBh. Sec.; threatened, Mn. xi, 

11 2 ; see also s. v. 

Abhi-sastaka, mfn. accused, defamed, Yajn.; 
caused by imprecation (as a disease), Susr. 

Abhi-sasti, is, f. curse, imprecation, damnation, 
RV.; AV.; effect of imprecation, misfortune, evil, 
RV.; VS.; one who curses or injures, RV.; AV.; 
blame, SBr.; ‘accusation’(ifc.; see mithy abhi sasti); 
calumny, defamation, L.; asking, begging, L. — krit, 
mfn. accusing, ApSr. — catana, mfn. keeping off 
imprecation, RV. iii, 3, 6. — pa, mfn. defending from 
imprecations, RV.; VS.; AV. — pavan, mfn. id., 
RV.; VS. 

Abhi-sastenya, &c. See an-abhisasta. 

abhi- a/ sank, A. (rarely P., e.g. 

aor. Subi. 2. sg. - sahkih , MBh. v, 5000; but A. 

- sahkithdh , MBh. iii, 1166) to doubt, suspect (with 
acc.; rareiy with gen., e.g. Mn, viii, 96), have doubts 
about (acc.; rarely gen., e.g. MBh. v, 6078). 

Abhi-saiika, f. suspicion (with gen.), R.; appre¬ 
hension, fear, Kathas. 

Abhi-sahkita, mfn. having doubts; suspecting ; 
being alarmed, being in solicitude (v. 1. ati-sahkita), * 
Hariv.; Bhatt.; (am), ind. (an-, neg.) without fear 
or shvness. Mark?. 

J 7 

Abhi-sahkin. mfn. doubting, suspecting, MBh. 

Abbi-sankya, mfn. suspicious, MBh. iii, 1167; 
(an-, ncg.) MBh. ii, 190. 

sap , P. to curse, MBh. &c.t 

Caus, (ind. p. -sapya') to conjure, implore with so¬ 
lemnity, Yajn. ii, 108. 

Abhi-sapana,ft/«,n. false accusation,calumny, L. 
Abhi-sapta, mfn. cursed, accursed, calumniated, 
reviled, defamed, MBh.; Hariv. &c. [often v. 1 . abhi- 
sasta ]; (cf. mithydbhisapta.) 

Abbi-sapa, as, m. curse, Nir. &c.; charge, ac¬ 
cusation, Yajh. ii, 12 & 99 (cf. abhi-sapa Sc mithyd- 
bhisapa ); false accusation, calumny, L. — jvara,m. 
fever caused by a curse ; (cf. abhi-sastaka at end.) 
Abbi-sapana, am, n. pronouncing a curse, L. 
Abbi-sapa, as, m. charge, accusation, YajfL ii, 


abhi-sabdaya, Nom. P. (pr. p. 

°yat) to name, call, AsvSr.: Pass. - sabdyate , to be 
called, M 3 rkP. 

Abbi-sabdita, mfn. announced, mentioned, Mn. 
vi, 82 ; named, MBh.; Susr. 

^abhi-s/sam,-sdmyati, to be calmed, 

cease, MBh. xii, 6020. 

’STfH 51 W abhi-sasta, mfn. perf. Pass. p. fr. 
abhi- a/ sans , q. v., but sometimes (e. g. Comm, on 
MBh. v, I 277 & on Mn. xii, 11 2) derived fr. abhi- 
a/ sas, which does not occur. 

abhi- a/, sas,-sa$a 1 i, to assign.allot, 
RV. vi, 54, 2 ; to rule, govern, MBh. xiii, 4582. 
Abhi-sastri, mfn. one who assigns, allots, TBr. 

ab hi- Vsiksh, Caus teach (with 

acc.), MBh. i, 8033; (with double acc.) Hariv.4910. 

1. abhi- a/ 1. si, to lie upon (acc.), 


2. abhi-V 3. si (Imper. 3. sg. A. 

-sly at dm) to fall down upon, TBr. 

abhi-sita or abhi-sy at a, mfn. 
(a/ syai), cold, chilly, Pan. vi, 1, 26, Kas. 

Abbi-slna or abhi-syana, mfn. coagulated, 
congealed, Pan. vi, 1, 26. 

1. abhi-V I. sue , to mourn, MBh. 

xii, 11242. 

2. abhi- a/: 2. sue (Imper. -socatu; 

Subj. 2. sg. -socas) to flame towards, burn, consume, 
RV.; VS.; KatySr.; to burn, torment, AV.; VS.; 
KatySr.: Caus. (aor. Subj. 3. pi. -siisucan) to burn, 
consume (by fire), VS.; TS.; lntens. (p. -sdsucana), 
id., RV. x, 87, 9 & 14. 

Abbi-soka, as, m. ardour, AV. i, 25, 3. 
Abbi-soca, mfn. shining, glowing with heat, AV. 
iv, 37 - 10 . 

Abhi-socana, am, n. a tormenting spirit or 
demon, AV. ii, 4, 2 & iv, 9, 5. 

Abhi-socayishnu, mfn. causing heat or tor¬ 
ments, AV. vi, 20, 3. 

abhi- sun a, mfn. successful, having 

an advantage over (as one wrestler over another),TBr. 

abhi- a/ subh, A. (part. f. -suvXbha- 

mdna) to adorn one’s self with (acc.), RV. i, 92, 
10 ; (3. pi. -Sobhaute) to be bright, Hariv. 

Abbi-sobhita, mfn. adorned, looking bright or 
smart, Hariv.; Kathas. 

’^f^^tlft.abhi-sauri, ind. towards Sauri (or 


bhi- v/. scut, Cduus. P. (aor .-aeuscu- 

tat) to sprinkle with, KatySr.; Kaus.; A. to scatter 
over one’s self, cover one’s self with (instr.), Kaus. 

abhi-v snath, to pierce through, 

(Ved. Inf. [abl.] -snathah [with abibhet, he was 
afraid] of being pierced through), RV. x, 138, 5 ; 
(Gmn., combining abhi-sndthah with vdjrdt, takes 
a bhi snath as an adj. ‘piercing through, killing’). 

-sydta and -syana . See abhi- 

sita and -sina. 

abhi- a/ sri (aor. to spread, 
extend (as brightness), AV. xiii, 2, 9; (perf. 3. pi. 
-sisriynh) to resort to, MBh. i, 8274. 

I. Abhi-sn, mfn. (Ved. du. - sriyd ) attached to 
each other, RV. i, 144, 6 ; AV. viii, 2, 14 ; arrang¬ 
ing, putting in order (with acc.), TBr.; (is), m. (or 
f., RV. x, 130, 5) one who arranges, puts or keeps 
in order, RV. 



, srf*rf^rs abhi-srish. 

abhi-shvanj . 


abhi-srish (abl. - sri'shas ), f. a liga¬ 
ture, RV. viii, I, 12. 

2. abhi'\/sri (3. pi. - srinanti , p. 

-Snndt; plusq. 3. pi. -asisrayiiJi) to mix, mingle. 
RV.; -srlndti, ‘to prepare or dress,’ produce, cause, 
TBr.; (by BR. placed under abhi-'jsri.) 

3. Abbi-sri, nom. pi. - sriyas, f. anything added 
by mingling, RV. ix, 79, 5 & 86, 27. 

Wfirg abhi-s/sru (p. -srinvat) to hear, 

learn, Hariv. 4583; BhP. 

Abbi-sravaiaa, am , n. repeating Vedic texts 
(while sitting down tp a Sraddha), L, 

* Abbi-srava, as, m. hearing (a prayer), grant¬ 
ing an answer, RV. i,^l 85, 10 Sc x, 12, t. 
Abbi-sruta, mf(a)n. renowned, AV. vi, 138,1. 
Abbi-srutya, ind. p. hearing of, learning, MBh. 

h 442 7 - 

%lfyFBGabhi-</$vas(p. -svasat; Ved. Inf. 

(abl.) -svdsas) to blow towards or hither, RV. i, j 40, 
5 & 92, 8 ; (p. - svasat ) to whistle, R.; to groan, R. 
Abhi-svasa, as, m. blowing (into a flame), 


wf»rvaf N i . abhi-shac (\/sac), A. - sacate , 

to tum to, be favourable to (acc.), RV.: P. -sisha- 
kti , to approach for revering, RV. vii, 67, 3. 

2 . Abbi-abac, m(acc. -acam ; n. pi. -dcas) fn. fol¬ 
lowing, accompanying, RV. vi, 63, 9; AV. xviii, 4, 
44; paying attention to, devoted to, favourable, RV. 

abki-sharij (*Jsanj), -shajati( Pan. 

viii, 3, 65, Sch.) ‘to be in close contact with,’ have 
2 claim to or lay claim to, MBh. iv, 95 (v. 1 . abhi- 
fiat) ; to put a slur upon (acc.), revile, curse. 
Abbi-sbakta, mfn. possessed by evil spirits, L.; 
humiliated, defeated, L.; reviled, cursed. 

Abbi-sbaiigu, as, m. (ifc. f. d, Ragh. xiv, 77) 
propensity or inclination to, BhP.; the state of being 

consecrating (bv sprinkling water), inauguration of 
a king, royal unction ; the water or liquid used at 
an inauguration, SBr. &c.; religious bathing, ablu¬ 
tion, MBh. &c.; bathing of the divinity to whom 
worship is offered, L.; (cf. mahabhisheka Sc mur- 
dh&bhisheka .) — sala, f. the hall of coronation. 
Abbishekdrdra-siras, mfn. wet on the head 
with the royal unction. Abbisbekaba, m. day 
of inauguration. 

Abbi-sbektavya, mfn. to be consecrated or 
anointed, Kath as. 

Abbi-sbektri, td , m. one who consecrates (by 
sprinkling), VS.; SBr. 

Abbisbekya, mfn. worthy of inauguration 
(iabhisheka ), Kaus.; KatySr.; (said of the elephant) 
used for the inauguration, Jain. (Prakrit abhisekka). 

Abhi-sbecana, am, n. sprinkling, MBh.; BhP,; 
initiation, inauguration, R. &c. 

Abbi-sbecaniya, mfn. worthy of inauguration, 
SBr.; belonging to inauguration (as vessels, &c.), 
SBr. &c .; {as), m., N. of a sacrificial ceremony per¬ 
formed at the inauguration of a king, SBr.; AitBr.&c. 

Abbi-sbecita, mfn. caused to be sprinkled, 
watered, wetted, Hariv.; inaugurated. 

Abbi-sbecya, mfn. to be anointed, R. 

abhi-shidh, -shedhati. Pan. viii, 3, 

65, Sch.: Caus. Desid. - shishedhayiskati, ib., 64, 

Abbi-sbiddha, mf(fl)n. driven hither, AitBr. 

■srfrrfqcT abhi-shiv (\Zsiv), to sew round, 


rib hi - shishenayishu. See 


HVabhi-shu (*/, (3. pi. -shunvanti; 
ind. p. - shutya ) to press out (with stones) the Soma 
juice (or any other juice), SBr. &c.; to press out with 
the help of any liquid, M11. v, 10 (Pass. 3. pi. --re¬ 

possessed by evil spirits (cf. bhutdbhishahga) or yantej, Susr,; (fut. p. -soshyat, cf. Pan. viii, 3,117) 
disturbed in mind, MBh.; humiliation, defeat, MBh.; to moisten, Bhatt.: Caus. - shdvayati , Pan. viii, 3, 

Ragh.; Kum.; curse or imprecation, MBh.; false 
accusation, calumny, L. (cf. mithydbhishahga) ; 
oath, L.; embracing, L, — jvara, m. a fever sup¬ 
posed to be caused by evil spirits. 

Abbi-sbaiigin, mfn. humiliating, defeating, 
MBh. iv, 2108. 

Abbi-sbanga, as, m. curse or imprecation, L. 

abhi-shad ( Vsad ), - sidatl , to be¬ 
siege, RV. ix ; 7, 5 ; Ved. (impf.) -ashhiat or -asl- 
dat, Sec., Pin. viii, 3, 119, in classical Sanskrit only 
forms with sh are allowed, Pan. viii, 3, 63 & 118. 
Abbi-sbamia, mfn. besieged, oppressed, TS.; 



abhi-shava , &c. See abhi-shu. 

abhi-shah (a /sah), (perf. Subj. -sa- 

sd/iat, Prec. 2. sg. -sdsahishthds, p. P. -sdhvds Sc 
A. -sehana) to overpower, conquer, RV.; (aor. A. 
I. sg. -as&kshi) to gain, win, RV. x, 159, 1; Kaus.; 
Nir.; to tolerate, allow, pardon, (Pass, -sahyate) Sah. 
Abbi-sbaba, as, m. — nigraha (q. v.), L. 
Abbi-sbabya, ind. p. with V1. kyi, ‘to treat 
by force,’ commit a rape, violate (a female), M11. 
viii, 367. 

AbhI-sbah, m(nom. -shat) fn. overpowering, 
RV. vii, 4, 8 ; AV.; Nir.; (-, shdhd ), instr. ind. by 
force, SBr. 

Abbi-sbaba, as, m. pi., N. of a people, MBh. 
viii, 127. 

^rf*T 3 TrT abhi-shdta , mfn. gained, RV. v, 

41, 14. 

VF^ribki-shic ( Vsic ), P., rarely A. 

(e. g. MBh. vii, 4593 ; Bhatt.) to sprinkle, water, 
wet, RV. i, 121, 6 (pr. p. - sinccit ), &c.; to conse¬ 
crate, anoint, appoint by consecration, AV. &c.: A. 
(Imper. 2. sg. - shineasva, sometimes v. 1 . Pass. 
- shicyasva ) to consecrate one’s self or have one’s 
self consecrated, MBh.; Hariv.; R.: A. or Pass, to 
bathe, MBh. xii, 8894 & xiii, 1702 : Caus. P. to 
water, wet: P. (rarely A.) to consecrate, anoint: 
A. (with or without [Nir.] atmdnani) to have one’s 
self consecrated: Desid. -shishikshati Sc Intern. 
- sc s icy ate, Pan., Sch. Sc Comm. 

Abhi- sbikta, mfn. sprinkled; anointed, in¬ 
stalled, enthroned; (cf. mdrdhdbhishikta .) 
Abbi-sbeka, as, m. anointing, inaugurating or 

6 0 , Comm. 

Abbi-shava, as, m. pressing out (the juice of 
the Soma plant), AsvSr.; KatySr.; distillation, L.; 
religious bathing, ablution (preparatory to religious 
rites), L.s drinking Soma juice, sacrifice, L.; fer¬ 
ment, yeast, any substance producing vinous fermen¬ 
tation, L.; (aw), n. sour gruel, VP. 

Abbi-sbavana, am, n. pressing out (the juice 
of the Soma plant), Nir.; (abhi-shavanis), Ved. 
nom. pi. f. the utensils used for pressing out (the 
Soma juice), AV. ix, 6, I, 16 ; (cf. adhi-shdvana.) 

Abbi-shavanlya, mfn. to be expressed (as Soma 

Abbi-sb 5 ,vaka, as, m. the priest (or any one) 
who expresses the Soma juice, L. 

Abbi-sbuta, mfn. expressed (as Soma juice), 
SBr. Sec .; (am), n. (= abhi-shava, n.) sour gruel, L. 

Abbi-sbotri, td, m. = abhi-shdvaka , SBr.; 

Abbi-savakiya, Nom. P. °yati, to long for a 
savaka (q. v.), Pan. viii, 3, 65, Comm. 

Abbi-sususb, mfn. desirous of expressing Soma 
juice, Pan. viii, 3, 117, Sch. 

abhi-shuka , as, m., N. of a plant, 


‘abhi-shu (\/ 1. su),-shuvati, to endow 

with (instr.), Kath.; to consecrate for a purpose 
(acc.), SBr.; impf. - ashuvat , Pan. viii, 3, 63 : 
Desid. -. susushati , ib., 64, Comm. 

abhi-shud (*J$ud), Caus. to kill, 

destroy, R. i, 27, 19. 

abhi-shend, as,m. directing arrows 

against, RV. vi, 44, 17. 

Abbi-sbisbenayishu, mfn. (fr. Desid.) desir¬ 
ous of marching against. Sis. vi, 64. 

Abhi-shenana, am, 11. marching against (in 
comp.) with an army, Rajat. 

Abhi-sbenaya, Nom. P. - shenayati (impf. - a - 
shenayat, Pan. viii, 3, 63), to assail with an army, 
to march with an army against (acc.), Venis. &c.: 
Desid. -shishenayishati, Pan. viii, 3, 64, Sch. 

ahhi-sho {\ /so), (1. sg. -shy a mi) to 

fetter, chain, AV. iv, 16, 9 ; (pr. p. -shyat) to put 
an end to, destroy, Bhatt.; impf. -ashyat, PSn. viii, 

3 * 63. 

abhi-shtan (\^stan). (Imper. 2. sg. 

shtand) to thunder, AV. vi, 126, 2: Caus. id., 
TS.: Intens. (Imper. 2. sg. -ta&stamhi) to roar, 
AV. v, 20, 1. 

Abbi-sbt&na, as, m. roaring, hollow noise, RV. 
i, 80, 14. 

’WWW abhi-shtambh (*/sta.mbh), - shta - 

bhnoli or -shtabhndti, impf. -ashtabhnat, perf. 
-tashtambha, Pan. viii, 3, 63 seqq. 

abki-shtava. See abhi-shtu. 

• • 

abhi-shti, is, m. (s-ti, fr. \/i. as, cf. 
I. pi. s-mas, See.) an assistant, protector [‘ one who 
is superior or victorious,’ NBD.], (generally said of 
Indra), RV.; VS.; (abhl-shtis), f. assistance, pro¬ 
tection, help, RV,; AV.; VS.; (cf. sv-abhishti.) 
— krit, mfn. procuring help, assisting, RV. — dyu- 
mna {abhishti-), mf(<f)n.‘whose glory is protecting 
or superior,’ being of benevolent majesty, RV. iv, 
51, 7. —pa, m(nom. -pa)i n. protecting with as¬ 
sistance, RV. ii, 20, 2 ; (the nom. ~pa being irregular 
for ~pdh, Gmn. proposes the emendation [adopted by 
the NBD.] abhishti (Ved. instr.) pasijdndn instead 
of abhishtipasi jdndn). —mat, mfn. rendering 
assistance, RV. i, it6, 11. — savas (abhishti-), 
mfn. rendering powerful assistance, RV. iii, 59, 8. 

abhi-shtu ( \/stu ), -shtauti (impf. 

-ashtaut, Pan. viii, 3, 63, or also -astaut, Pan. viii, 
3,119, Kas.; Subi. I. pi. -shtavdma, RV. viii, joo, 
3; Imper. 2. sg. -shtuhi, RV. i, 54, 2) to praise, 
extol, RV. &c.; A. (3. sg.) - shtuvate, id., MBh. 
xii, 7715. 

Abbi-sbtava, as, m. praise, eulogy, BhP. 

Abbi-sbtuta, mfn. praised, RV.; AV. &c.; 
praised or addressed (with omkaras), consecrated, 
Yajh. iii, 307. 

Abbi-sbtuvat, mfn. pr. p. P. praising, Hariv. 

Abbi-shtuv&na, mfn. pr. p. A. praising, BhP. 

Abbi-sbtuya, irreg. ind. p. praising, BhP. &c. 

abhi-shtubh ( y/stubh ), -shtobhati 

(impf. -ashtobhaty Pan. viii, 3, 63) to sing or recite 
in addftion to, Laty, 

’sri'HT fT abhi-shtha(\/stha), -tishthati (aor. 
-asthdt, RV., - ashthat , Pan. viii, 3, 63 ; perf. p. 
-tashthivdsjstdy. iv,4,9)to tread or step upon (acc.), 
RV.; AV.; TS.; SBr.; to overpower, defeat, RV.; 
AV.; VS.; to extend or rise over (acc.), RV. i, 149, 
4 Sc iii, 14, 4; to step or advance towards (acc.), 
PBr.; Kaus.; to stay, live, MBh. xii, 3316 ; to stop, 
ib., 4475. 

Abbi-sbtbita, mfn. trampled upon, defeated, 
RV. x, 7.66, 2 ; AV.; stepped upon, serving as 
basis, SBr. 

abhi-\/.shthiv (perf. -tishtheva, 

_ • 

perf. Pass. p. -shthyutd) to spit upon, SBr/ 

abhi-shnata , as , m. pi. (\/sna), 
N. of a family, Kariv. 1466 (v. 1 . abhUgldna and 
at i-gland), 

^ _ 

abhi-shy at, mfn. pr. p. fr. abhi - 

sho, q. v.; (an) or ( abhishyantas , n. sg.), m., N. of 
a son of Kuru, MBh. i, 3740. 

abhi-shyand (\/syand), -syan - 

date (or also -shyandate, if said intransitively of 
lifeless objects, Pan. viii, 3, 72) to run towards or 
along (generally said of liquids), AV. v, 5, 9 (perf. 

sishyade, said of a plant growing or running along 
the stem and branches of a tree), See. 

Abbi-sbyanda or -syanda, as, m. oozing or 
flowing, L.; running at the eyes, Susr.; great in¬ 
crease or enlargement, Ragh.; Kum. (Cf. pittd- 
bhishyanda, raktdbJd, vjtdbh 0 , sleshmdb/r .) 

Abhi-sbyandamana, mfn. (said of a cloud) 
raining, Uttarar. 

Abbi-sbyandin or -syandin, mfn. oozing, 
trickling, Susr.; laxative, Susr.; causing defluxioiis 
or serious effusions, Susr. Abbisbyandi- or abbi- 
syandi-ramaiLa, n, a smaller city appended to a 
larger one, suburb, L. 

abhi-shvanj (\^svanj), -shvajate 

(impf. - ashvajata , Pan. viii, 3, 63 ; perf. shasvaje 
or - shasvahje, ib., 118. Kas.) to embrace, MBn. 
viii, 1652 ; (exceptionally) P. (Opt .-shvajet), id., 
MBh. xii, 8796. 



Abhi-shvaiig’a, as, m. intense attachment or 
affection to (ioc. [MBh. &c.], rarely instr. [Kathas.]). 
Abhi-shvahgin, mfn. intensely attached to or 

mad for, MaitrUp. 

abhi-sa?n-yatta , mfn. (/yat), 
being taken care of or governed by (v. 1. abhi-sam- 
fanna), MBh. vii, 5173. 

abhi-sam-/yd, - ydti, to visit, ap¬ 
proach to (acc.), RV. ix, 86,15 ; Kath.; to approach 
in hostile manner, assail, MBh. viii, 1826. 

^WWQ^abhi-sam-\/yuj, Caus. to bring 

iri close contact with (instr.), Hariv. 

Abhl-samyakta, mfn. furnished or endowed 
with, R. 

Abhi-samyogfa, as, m. (in MlmSnsJ phil.) close 
contact or relation to. 

abhi-sam-rakta , mfn. ( /ranj), 
intensely attached to (in comp.), R. 

abhi-sam-/rabh , A. (3. pi. -ra- 

bhanie; Opt. - rabhemahi ) to take hold of 
(for support), RV. 

Abhi-samrabdha, mfn. excited, furious, MBh. 

Abhl-s&xnrambha, as, m. fury, rage, MBh. 
xiv, 874. 

abhi-sam-rddhana. am, n. paci¬ 
fying, conciliating, BhP. 

V1. abhi-sam-/. 4. vas , A. (pr. p. r. 

- vdsana ) to wrap one’s self into (acc.), A V. xii, 3,52. 

. abhi-sam-/§.v as, A. (pr. p. 2. 

- vdsana ) to settle round (acc.) together, TBr.; Laty. 

abhi-sam-/vanch , to long for, 


’srfaHfa? 1 . abhi-sa?n ~\/ 1. vid (perf. 3. pi. 
-vidtis) to know thoroughly, AV. iii, 21, 5. 

abhi-sam-/^.vid, A. (pr. p. 
-vidand) to meet each other [BR.], VS. Xxix, 6 ('to 
relate, explain,’ Comm.) 

abhi-sam-*/vis, P. A. (Imper. 

3 . pi. - sdm-viiadhvam) to meet round or near, 
surround, AV. &c.; to enter into, dissolve in, TUp.; 


wftRTTf ^1 abhi-sam-vtksh ( /iksh) ,to look 

at in astonishment, gaze at, Kad. 

abhi-sam--/ 1 . vri (impf. -vrinot) 
to cover, conceal, MBh. v, 7239. 

Abhi-(tarn vrita,mfn.covered, concealed, MBh. 
See.; surrounded by, accompanied by, ib.; filled 
with, furnished with, ib. 

\abhi-sam-/vrit, A. (imper. -var- 

tatdm ) to turn one’s self towards, AV. vi, 102, 1. 

Abhi-samvrltta, mfn. undertaking, beginning 
to (Inf.), R. * 

abhi-samvriddha , mfn. (said of a 

tree) ‘having grown a very long time/ very old, 
MBh. xii, 5805. 

abhi- samsina or °sydna, mfn. 
(y/syai), coagulated, congealed,,i, 26, K 5 s. 

abhi-sam-/sri, P. to resort to 
(for refuge), have recourse to (acc.), SBr. &c.; to 
give way to, devote one’s self to (acc,), MBh. xii, 
518; to attain, (Pass. - sriyate ) MBh. xii, 10977. 

Abhi-samsraya, as, m, refuge, R.; connec¬ 
tion, MBh. i, 2398. 

Abhi-samsrita, mfn. who hasresorted to anyone 
(for refuge), MBh. xii, 2766 ; (for a visit), MBh. 

abhi-sam-/sru (ind. p. -srutya) 
to hear, learn, R. 

abhi-sam-/slish (ind. p. -sli- 
shya') to cling to each other, MBh. vi, 3127. 

abhi-sam-/ 3 . su (3. du. -sam-su- 
Mutas) to press out (Soma juice) together for the 
sake of (acc.), TBr. 

abhi-sam-/sri (ind. p. - sritya ) to 
ru?. ;rainst or assail each other, BhP. 

Abhi-sam-sir am, ind. running near in crowds, 

I. sg. - einvtya ) to pile up (the sacrificial fire) for 

the benefit of (one’s self, dtmanam ), SBr. 

/» ■» _ _ • 

^ abhi-sam - Vcint (ind. p. -cin- 
tya) to remember, MBh. vii, 5551. 

WHH \ ri abhi-samjata , mfn. (/jan), pro¬ 
duced (as joy, karsha ), Hariv. 

abhi-sam-/jnd (3. pi. - janate , 
Subj. - jdndntai , impf, - ajdnata) to agree, allow, 
concede anything (dat.) to (acc.), MaitrS.; TS.; SBr. 

Abhi-sanijnita, mfn. (fr. 2. samjna,ci. sam- 
jnita ), called, named, MBh. &c. 

abhi-sam-/jvar ,to envy, regard 

with spite, MBh. v, 1615. 

abki-satkri (/i.kri), (ind. p. 

-kritya) to honour, receive (a guest) with reverence, 
MBh. ii, 2549. 

Abhi-satkrita, mm. honoured, received with 
reverence, MBh. &c. 

Abhi-s am-sr it a, mfn. one who has come near, 
MBh. viii, 4417. 

abhi-sam-s-Z r. kri, -s-karoti, to 

^ . — ' 

shape, form, SBr.: A, (Subj. i. sg. -s-kardvai) to 
render or make one’s self {dtmanam) anything 
(wished to be, acc.), SBr. 

Abhi-samskara, as, m. ‘the being formed/ 
development (as of seeds), Car.; preparation, ib.; 
conception, idea, Buddh. 

Abhi-samskrita, mfn. consecrated, MBh. 

abhi-sam-/stambh (ind. p. 

-stabhya) to support, render firm, Karts.; R. 

'srfinftcfhii abhi-sam-stirna, mfn. {/sirt ), 

entirely covered with, MBh. xii, 7613. 

abhi-sam-/,stu (pr. p. -stuvat) to 

praise highly, MBh. xiii, 3695. 

Abhi-samstava, as, m. praise, L. 
Abhi-samstnta,mfn.highly praised, MBh. ;BhP. 

abhi-sa?n-/stka, -tiskthate, to 

♦ • 

stop at, finish at (acc.), SankhSr.: Caus. to cause to 
stop or finish at (acc.), ChUp. 

Abhi-samstham, ind. in regular order, GopBr. 
Abhi-samsthita, mfn. stopping or standing or 
watching at someplace, MBh.; reflecting upon(loc.), 
MBh. iv, 553. 

^C^S^Hyabhi-sam-/spris, to wash one’s 

self, MBh. iii, 8080; to seize, ib. xii, 2140. 

abhi-sam-/snari, to recollect 

(with acc.), MBh. iii, 15758. 

abhi-sam-/sru, to unite in flow¬ 
ing into (acc.), SBr. 

abhi-sarn-/svanj , A. (Imper. 

2 sg. -svajasva) to embrace, AV. xii, 3, 12. 

abhi-sam-/svri (impf. 3. pi. -a- 

svaran [four times] or -dsvaran [once]) to praise 
or call or invite unanimously, RV 

’srfrra^ abhi-sam-/han (ind. p. -haiya) 

to combine, confederate, MBh. 

Abhi-sam-hata, mfn. attacked, assailed, BhP. 

h d abhi-sam-hita. See - sam-/dha. 

abhi-sam-/krudh (pr. p. -kru- 

dhyat) to be angry with (acc.), Bhatt. 

Abhi-samkxuddha, mfn. angry with (acc.), 
MBh. iv, 1572 ; (gen.), ib. iii, 682. 

■^rfH^j'^^a 6 ^-^^-V / ^ r “ 5 (ind.p.-^rMsya) 

to call out to, R. 

/kship (ind. p. -kshi- 

pya ) to compress, render quite small (the body by 
magical power), MBh. v, 283. 

Abhi-samkshipta, mfn. one who has com¬ 
pressed his body so as to render it small, MBh. i, 
5368 . 

Abhi-samkshepa, as, m. compressing, L. 

I. abhi-sam-/khya (perf. Pass. 

p. - khyata ) to enumerate, R. 

Abhi-samkhya, mfn. inferable, clearly ascer¬ 
tainable, Jaim.; 2. {a), f. number, MBh. i, 617. 
Abhi-samkhyeya, mfn. to be enumerated, R. 

abhi-sam-Vgam (ind. p. -gdtya f 
AV. xi, 1, r6, or -gamya, R.; BhP.) to approach 
together, RV. ix, 14, 7 (aor. A. 3. pi. -agmata), 
&c.; to join in welcomihg, BhP.; to meet with, R. 

Abhi-sam-gata, mfn. together with (in comp.), 

abhi-samgupta, mfn. guarded, 

protected, MBh. iii, 274. 

^Srf m^abhi -sam-/i .^rn,to promise,Kaus. 

abhi-sam-/grah, to grasp at 

once with several fingers, Gobh. 

See abhi-shac. 

abhi-sam-/car (3. pi. -caranti, 

pr. p. f. du. -c dr anti) to go up to, seek for, RV. 

Abhi-samc&rin, mfn. ‘moving in every direc¬ 
tion,’ inconstant, changeable, Nir. 

fa abhi-sam-/ 1, ci, A..-cinute (Opt. j yanti) to bind or stri"? together. Kaus.: A. (impf. 

abhi-satvan, a, m. surrounded 
by heroes, RV. x, 103, 5 ; (cf. abhi-vtra.) 

abhi-sam-y/tan (3. pi. - tanvanti ) 

to use for bridging over or stretching across, TBr ; 

Abhi-samtata, mfn. spread over, covered with 
(in comp.), Hariv. (v. 1 . abhi-sam-vrita). 

abhi-sam-/tap (Subj. - tapati) 
to press hard on all sides, AV. ii, 12, 6. 

Abhi-samtapta, mfn. tormented, MBh. &c. 

abhi-sam-/tri, to cross over to¬ 

wards (acc.), AitBr. 

^f*mm*{^abhi-sam-/tyaj (ind. p. -tya- 
jya) to abandon, give up, desist from (acc.), MBh. 

abhi-samtrasta, mfn. (/tras ), 

terrified, much alarmed, R. 

a b h i-samdashta (abkisdmdas ht a ), 

mfn. (y/dans), compressed ortightened together,TS. 

f* ♦ 

OTHW?? abhi-samdeha , am, n. organ of 

generation, (du. acc. c he) MBh. v, 7494 (v.l. abhi- 
sam do ha). 

abhi-sam-/dham (1. sg. - dha- 
mami ) to blow at, AV. viii, 2, 4. 

'SfireW 1. abhi-sam-/dha (3. du ,-dhat- 

tas ; Imper. 2. sg. -dheki; aor. -adhat) to snap at 
(acc.) for devouring, RV. x, 87, 3 ; AV,; SBr.; 
Kath.; to take aim at (dat. or acc.), MBh. &c.; to 
aim at, have in view (with acc.; rarely dat.), ib.; 
to acknowledge unanimously, (perf. 3. pi. -dadhuh) 
RV. i, 101, 6 ; to overcome, master, Mn. &c.; to 
win (as by presents), R. iv, 54, 5 ; to ally, associate 
with (instr.) 

Abhi-sam-hita, mfn. aimed at; agreed upon, 
R. v, 82, 5 ; acknowledged by (in comp.), MBh. 

4793 ’ overcome ; (ifc.) connected with, at¬ 
tached to, MBh. &c. 

Abhi-sandhaka, mfn. ifc. deceiving [‘calum¬ 
niating/ Comm.], Mn. iv, 195. 

2. Abhi-samdha, f. ‘speech, declaration’ (only 
ifc., cf. anrit&bhisandka & satydbhisandha). 

Abhi-samdhana, am, n. the being allied or 
connected, connection between (in comp.), MBh. i, 
3639 ; ‘ speech, deliberate declaration ’ (only ifc., 
cf. satydbh 0 ) ; attachment or interest in any object; 
special agreement; overcoming, deceiving, Ragh. 
xvii, 76; making peace or alliance, L. 

Abhi-samdhaya, ind. p. aiming at, having in 
view'; coming to an agreement regarding (acc.), 
Mn. ix, 52 ; overcoming, Mslatlm. &c.; bringing 
in contact with (as an arrow with a bow), place 
upon (instr.), R. v, 36, 42. 

Abhi-samdhi, is, m. speaking or declaring de¬ 
liberately, purpose, intention, object, meaning; 
special agreement, S2h.; cheating, deceiving; mak¬ 
ing peace or alliance, L.; joint, junction, L. — kri- 
ta, mfn. done intentionally. — purva, mfh. that 
which has been intended, aimed at, Gaut. -»pur- 
vakam, ind. with some intention, purposely, VP. 

abhi-sam-/nam (Opt. - namet ) 

to alter, modify, AsvSr.; SankhSr. 

abhi-saj/i-Znah (3. pi. - nah - 


abhi-skand . 


3. du. • anahyetdtn ) to arm one’s self against (acc.), 


Abhi-sam-naddha, mfn. armed, MBh. iii, 
14883. ^ 

abhi- sam -ni- vishta, mfn. 

(<\A ns), being united or combined in, Comm, on 

a 67 it-$aj?i-\/ni,toleadtD or upon 
(loc.), MBh. xii, 6566. 

abhi-sam-*/4. nu, A. (3. pi. -na- 
vante ; aor. 3. pi. - anushata ) to rejoice or cheer 
together at or towards (acc.), RV. 

\ abhi-V sap (3. pi. A. - sapante ) to 
carry on, manage, RV. vii, 38, 5. 

’SffrfWTO abhi-samaya. See aohi-sam-*/i. 

abhi-samavdya, as , m. (Vi), 

union, association, L. 

abhi-sam-V 2. as , to put toge¬ 
ther, group, collect, Car. 

abhi-sam-d-Vgam, to ap¬ 
proach together, Nir,; to come to (acc.), MBh. xi, 

445 - 

abhi-sam-a-Vpad, A. (perf. 

- pede) to enter upon (acc.), R. ii, 12,1. 

W abhi-sam-a-Vyam, -ydcchati, 
to fasten to (acc.), TBr. 

abhi-sam-a-Vyd, to approach 
together, MBh. v, 1974. 

abhi-sam-d-yukta, mfn. con¬ 
nected or endowed with (instr.), MBh. xii, 3478. 

abhi-sam-a-Vruh (impf. 3. pi. 

- arohan) to enter upon (the sacrificial fire-place) 
for a purpose (acc.), TBr. 

wit, Ved. (3. pi. 

-avartante & impf. -dvartanta; fut. p. -vartsya- 
mana) to return home, TBr. Sec. 

abhi-sam-a-V sic, to pour 

together, Kaus. 

a 6 Ai-sam-d-fci/a, mfn. (>/ dhd), 

fastened to, connected with (instr.), R, 

abhi-sam-d-Vhri, to scrape up 

or together, Kaus. 

abhi-sam-Vi; -eti (3. pi. - yanti , 

Imper. -yantu), Ved. to approach together, come 
together or meet at (acc.), RV. i, 125, 7; AV. &c.; 
(Opt. 3. pi. - tyilh) to invade, TS. 

Abhi-samaya, as, m. agreement, Car.; clear 
understanding, Buddh. 

abhi-sam-Vindh, to set on fire, 

kindle, PBr. 

abhi-sara-ikshya , ind. p. (V 

iksK), seeing, viewing, R.; noticing, perceiving, 
learning from, RPrSt.; Susr. ; considering, with 
reference to, Susr.; Car. 

’^f^'^t^^abhi-sam-Vir, Caus. (perf. Pass. 

p. -irita) to put in motion, MBh. x, 579. 

abhi-sam-Vubj, to spread a 
covenng upon (acc.), PBr. 

abhi-sam-V 1. Hh, -uhati , to heap 

up, PBr.; to heap up and cover with (as with ashes, 
instr.), TS.; SBr. 

abhi-sam-Vri, A. (aor. Opt. -on¬ 
to) to reach, seize, RV. ix, 79, 3. 

abki-sam-e (-a-Vi), Ved. (Imper. 

abhi. . .. sam-ditu [AV. vi, 102, 1] or a ... . 
abhi sdm-etu [RV. vi, 19, 9]) to join in coming 
near (acc.), approach together. 

Abhi-sam-eta, mfn. assembled, $Br. xiv. 

abhi-sam-Vpac, Pass. (3. pi. 
- pacyante) to become ripe up to a certain time 
(acc.), PBr. 

abhi-sam-Vpat (p. -patat; 
perf. 3. pi. - petuh) to fly to, hasten to (acc.), MBh. 

vii, 7 3 95 » &c * 

Abhi-aampSta, as, m. concourse, war, battle,L. 

1. abhi-sam-Vpad, Yed. - pad - 
yate , to become ; to become similar to, be changed 
to (acc.), §Br. &c.; to come to, arrive at, obtain, 
SBr. xiv ; Up.: Caus. -padayati, to make equal to, 
change into (acc.), SBr.; AitBr. 

Abhi-sampatti, is, f. becoming anything, be¬ 
coming similar or equal to, KatySr. 

2. Abhi-sampad, t, f. id., SBr. 

Abhi-samp anna, mfn. becoming similar to, 
being changed to (acc.), SBr.; RPrat.; being in ac¬ 
cordance with, agreeing with (instr.), Uttarar. 

abhi-samparaya, as, m. (Vi), 

futurity, Lalit. 

^tfi%Ti**^abhi-$am-Vpu, - pavate , to blow 

along over or towards (acc.), TBr. 

abhi -sam-Vpvj (generally ind. 

p. - fujya ) to honour, revere greatly, MBh.; MarkP. 

IJ;* abha-sam-pra-Vpad, -pad- 
yate ( = abhi-sam- V pad) to be changed to, assume 
or obtain the shape of (acc. ), Up. 

abhi-sam-pra-V t/a(ind.p.-ya- 

ya) to go towards, MBh. vi, 3762 (v. 1 . abhi-vdra- 

Caus. to 

change (?as a battle-field, randjirhm), MBh. i, 

Abhi-sam-pravritta, mfn. having begun,Var- 

’grfir wv t^ abhi-sam-prap (Vap),to reach, 

come to, arrive at, obtain, L. 

abhi-sam-preksh (Viksh), (ind. 

p. -prekshya) to look at, perceive, MBh.; R. 

abhi-sam-Vplu (ind. p. -plutya) 

to bathe, MBh. xii, 365 {an- neg.) 

Abhi-sam-pluta, mfn. poured upon, overflowed 
with, MBh. ix, 3279 ; deeply engaged in (in comp.), 


abhi-sam- Vbandh, -badhndti , 

to refer to (acc.), mean by, Comm, on BrArUp.: 
Pass, -badhyate, * to be referred to,’ belong to, re¬ 
quire to be connected with (instr. [Pat.] or acc. 
[Pan. ii, 1, 6 & 2, 11, Sch. &c.]). 

Abhi-sambaddha, mfn. connected, (an- neg.) 

Abhi-sambandha, as, m. connection with, 
relation to (instr.), Jaim.; being connected with, 
belonging to, Sah.; Pan., Sch.; sexual connection, 
MBh. xiii, 2924; Mn. v, 63. 

abhi-sambadha, mfn. pressed 

together, crowded, R. 

abhi-sam-buddha, mfn. deeply 

versed in, MBh. iii, 12515 ; having attained the 
Bodhi, Buddh. 

Abhi-gam-bodhana, am, n. attaining the 
Bodhi, Buddh. 

abhi-sam-bhagna, mfn. broken, 

crashed, MBh. viii, 2801. 

*Kfv{TF*^abhi-$am-Vbhu,Yed. (perf. 

-babhiithd) to reach, come to, arrive at, RV. x, 
18, 8, Sec .; to obtain the shape of (acc.), be changed 
into, SBr.: Caus. to salute, BhP. 

abhi-sam-bhrita, mfn. endowed 

with (in comp.), MBh. xii, 12959 (v. I. abhi-sam- 

abhi-sam-mata, mfn. honoured, 

esteemed, MarkP. Sec. 

abhi-sam-mukhd,mi(d)n. look¬ 
ing respectfully towards (acc,), SBi. 

abhi-sam-mudha , mfn. entirely 

confused, MBh. iii, 12219. 

abhi-sam-Vmarch (p. - mur - 

chat ) to assume a solid form with regard to or in 
connection with (acc.), SBr. 

abhi-sara, &c. See abhi- Vsri. 
dbhi-sarga , &c. See abhi-Vsrij. 
abhi-sarpana. See abhi- Vsrip. 

abhi- Vsantv (p .-santvayat; ind. 

p. -santvyd) to conciliate, pacify, comfort, MBh. iv, 
383 ; R. ii, 32, 39; MarkP. 

Abbi-s&ntva, as, m. consolation, conciliation, R. 

v, 56, 44 - 

Abbi-s5ntvita, mfn. conciliated, pacified, Kim. 

’SrfHOTWT abhi-sayam, ind. about evening, 
at sunset, ChUp.; (cf. abhi-pratdr.) 

abhi-sara, &c. See abhi-Vsri. 
^rf*T¥i abhi-sdvaka , &c. See abhi-shu. 

1. abhi-V i» sidh, -sedhati , Pan. 

viii, 3, 113, Sch. 

*rfaf*r^2. abhi-V 3. sidh, -sidhyati, to be 

accomplished, MBh. xii, 74 2 7 * to obtain, win (with 
acc.), ChUp. 

Abfci-siddhi, is, {. the state of being effected 
or realized, AgP. 

abhi-susush. See abhi-shu . 

’erfWHf^rT abhi-sucita , mfn. pointed out, 

MBh. iii, 2939. 

abhi-Vsri (3. pi. impf. -asaran, 
perf. -sasrur) to flow towards (acc.), RV. i, 52, 5 
8c ix, 82, 3 ; to approach, go towards, advance in 
order to meet, attack, MBh. Sec. ; to go to a rendez¬ 
vous (said of lovers), Sah.: Caus. to lead towards, 
KathSs.; to cause to attack, lead to battle, MBh. 
iii, 665 (v. 1 .); to invite to a rendezvous, Sah.; to 
approach, visit, MBh. i, 1221; Mricch. 
Abbi-sara, as, m. (ifc. f. a) a companion, Das. 
Abhi-sarana, am, n. meeting, rendezvous (of 
lovers), Sah. &c. 

Abhi-sartri, mfn. attacking, assailant, VS. xxx, 
* 4 - 

Abbi-s&ra, as, m. attack, assault, R.; meeting, 
rendezvous (of lovers), Sah.; Git. &c.; ‘pay for 
coming,’ messenger’s pay, Buddh.; companion, L.; 
a purificatory rite, L.; {ena), instr. (with sarvena ) 
-- sarvdbhisarena, q. v., MBh. iii, 639 ; (cf. lohd- 
bhisdra Sc abhisdra ); {as), m. pi., N. of a people, 
MBh. &c.; (f), f., N. of a town, MBh. ii, 1027. 
— stbSna, n. a place of rendezvous (of lovers), Sah. 

Abbi-sarika, f. a woman who goes to meet her 
lover or keeps an assignation, Kum. vi, 43 ; Ragh. 
xvi, I 2, &c. 

Abbi-sarin, mfn. going to meet, Vikr.; (ini), 
{. = abhi-sdrika , L.; N. of a species of the Trish- 
tubh metre (as that in RV. x, 23, 5, in which two 
Padas contain twelve instead of eleven syllables, and 
which therefore is said to approach another metre 
called Jagati), RPrat. 

Abbi-sisSrayisbu, mfn. intending to go to a 
rendezvous or to visit (a lover), Sis. x, 20. 

Abbi-srita, mfn. gone near (acc.), MBh. vii, 
4449: Git.; one who has approached (for attack¬ 
ing), MBh .; directed towards (in comp.), VarBrS.; 
visited by (instr.), Kathas. 

Abbi-sritya, ind. p. having gone near (acc.) 
Abbl-a&ra, as, m. assault, MBh. vii, 8785. 

abhi-Vsrij (impf. - asrijat; aor. 

Pass. - asarji [RV. ix, 106, 12] & 3. pi. -asrigran 
[RV. ix, 88, 6] or -asrikshata [RV. i, 135, 6 Sc 

ix, 63, 25]) to pour into or upon (acc.), pour out for 
a purpose (acc.) or for the sake of (acc.),RV.; AV.; 
AitBr.; to let loose in a special direction, SBr.; 
AitBr.; (aor. Subj. 2. sg. -sras for - srdksh-s ) to 
throw upon, AV. xi, 2, 19; to surrender, give, grant, 
aliow, permit, R. &c.; to assail, attack, SBr. xiv. 

Abbi-sarga, as, m. creation, MBh. xii, 13801. 
Abhi-sarjana, am, n. for ati-s° (q. v.), L. 
Abbi-axisbta, mfn. ‘ let loose in a special direc¬ 
tion,’ running towards (acc. or loc.), RV.; allowed 
to, R.; uttered, Hariv.; surrendered, given, granted, 
R. &c, 

abhi-srip (Imper. 2. sg.-sarpa) to 

approach silently or softly, AV.; Kith. ; Nir. 
Abhl-aarpana, am, n. approaching; the ascent 

(of sap in the trees). 

abhi-sevana, am, n. practising, 

cultivating, Susr. 

abhi-Vskand (perf. -caskanda) 

to ascend, AV vii, u 5, 2. 



^»TtS73r>T abhishta-lnhha. 

Abhi-skandam, ind. running near, AV. v, 14, 


abhi-\fskambh , Cans. (p. -ska- 
bhdyat), Pan., iii, I, 84, Comm. 

abhi-\/stri, to scatter over, cover, 
Tiff.; Susr. 

^fVff abhi-sthiram, ind. very firmly, 

intensely, SBr. 

abhi-snigdha, See an-ahhisn°. 
Abb* »r..eha, as, m. affection, desire, BhP. 

"?rfM T4 rJT abhi-spris (O pt. -spriset) 101 ouch, 

MBh, ’■ .;(),■; to influence, affect, Susr. 

vrf abhi-sphurita, mfn. expanded 

to the ini! ias a blossom\ 

♦ ✓ 

abhi - sphurj, - sphurjati , to 
sound towards, AV. xii, 5, 20. 

abhi-4/smi (p. -smayat) to smile 
upon, MBh. iii, 8732. 

abhi-*/sy and. See abhi-shyand. 
abhi-/srans ; aor. Subj. 2. sg. 

-srii,. diich is better derived fr. abhi-*/srij, q. v. 

rtf *1 & abhi-Vsru (Imper. 3. pi. - sravantu ) 

to ca: 1 ,; e to flow near, RV. x, 9, 4; (p .-sravanla for 

-sravat) MBh. xiii, 901. 

0 + _ _ 

Hq**r EWMabhi-sravamdtrinndm. i n ri. 

amatrinndm, i n d. 
on rhe brick (used in sacrifices and called ) svayam- 
atrir. na (q. v.), SBr. 

^f»r^ abhi-\/svri (Ircper. 2 . sg. - svara , 

3. pi. - svarantu) to join in praising or invoking, 
RV.; to keep a note (in singing) up to (acc.), PBr. 
Abhi-sv&r (instr. -svara), f. invocation, RV. 

ii, 21,5 & viii, 97, 12 ; {-svare), dat. ind."for calling 
into one’s presence,’just behind (with gen.), RV. 

iii, 45, 2 & x, 11 7, 8; VS. 

Abhi-avartrl, id, m. an invoker, RV. x, 78, 4. 

ah hi-*Jhan ( 2 . sg. Imper. -jaUi, 
impf. -hdn [RV. v, 29, 2] & perf. -jaghantha) to 
thump at, strike, kill, RV. dec.; to beat (as a dram, 
&c.), MBh. vi, 1535; Bhag. &c.; to afflict, visit 
with (instr.), MBh. xiii, 4375; Mark?.: Desid. -jt- 
ghdnsati, to intend to strike down, RV. vii, 59, 8. 
Abhi-gh&ta, abhi-ghatita. See s. v. 
Abhi-hata, mfn. struck, smitten, killed, AV. xi, 
jo, 22, &c.; attacked, R.; beaten (as a drum, &c.), 
R.; VarBrS.; afflicted, visited with, MBh. &c.; (in 
arithm.) multiplied. 

Abhi-hati, is, f. striking (as of an arrow), Kad.; 
(in arithm.) multiplication; the product of multiplied 

Abhi-hatya, ind. p. striking, killing, Mn. xi, 
206, &c. 

abhi-hara , &c. See abhi-/hri. 

abhi- v hary (3.pi. - hary anti ; Subj . 

A. -hary at a [AV. iii, 30, 1]) to wish anything to 
be near, call it near, TS.; to like, love, RV. x, Ii2_, 
6; AV.; (-haryati) SBr. xiv (cf. abhi-^ hr i, Caus. 

^rf^TST abhi-hava. See abhi-\^hu & \/hve, 

abhi-hdsya, mfn. ridiculous, AV 

Vi, 30, 2. 

Ablii-h£sa, as, m. jest, joke, AsvSr. 

^rf*r?T abhi-*/ ' 2 . ha. (ind. p. -haya) to rush 
upon, seize hastily, Kith.; AitBr. 

abki-hihkri («/ i.jfcn),Ved. ( 3 . pi. 

-hih-kurvanii) to make a sound towards, low or 
roar or neigh towards, Kath.; PBr. &c, 
Abhi-hthk£r&, as, rn. the sound hi it (used) in 
addition to (a certainformula), AsvSr. 

abhi-hita,mfn.(v dhd), harnessed 
or put to (as a horse), RV.; AV. ; SBr.; named, 
caned, Mn. iii, 141, &c. ; held forth, said, declared, 
5;-Ken, MBh,; Mn. &<_.; spoken to, Kam. &c.; 
\us . m., N. of a chiei, L ; (am), n.- a name, ex- 
p'es:-. word. — tS, t. [Sarvad.] or -tva, n. the 
hav:r;g ceen said or stated or named ; a holding 
forth., declaration, L.; authority, test. L. 
Abhi-hiti, is, t. telling, manifesting, title, L. 

^abhi-Vku,to make an oblation upon 

(acc.) or for the sake of (acc.), shed or pour over 
(acc.), SBr. &c. 

j . Abhi-hava, as, m. pouring the oblation upon. 


Abhi-havana, am, n. id., AsvSi*. 

Abhi-hnta, mfn. poured upon with an oblation, 
shed or poured over, AV. vi, 133, 2 ; AitBr.; SBr. 

Abhi-hotavax, Ved. Inf. to pour upon (an ob¬ 
lation), MaitrS. 

Abhi-homa, as, m. — i. abhi-hava , Vait. 

abhi-huti. See abhi-*/hve. 

abhi-Vhri, to bring, offer, SBr. 

&c.; to pull off, tear off, MBh. iii, 14610: Caus. 
-hdreyati, to have brought tc by, send by, Hariv.; 
to bring, offer, MBh. iv, 2364 ; to put on (as a 
cuirass), ib. iv, ioilseqq.; to assail, attack, MBh.: 
Pass, -haryate incorrectly for -haryati (see abhi- 
*/hary', BrArUp. 

Abhi-hara, mfn. (if’e.) carrying off, removing, L. 
Abhi-harana, am, n. bringing or conveying 
near, MBh.; Ragh. 

Abhi-haraniya, mfn. to be brought near. 
Abhi-hartavya, mfn. id. 

Abhi-hartri, td, m. one who carries off, takes 
by violence (ifc.), MBh. iii, 15761. 

Abhi-hSra, as, m. bringing near, Pat. (cf. abhi- 
karika) ; robbing, seizing anything (in the owner’s 
presence), MBh. xiii, 3047 ; brisk attack, L.; effort, 
L. ; arming, taking up arms, L.; mingling together, 
Car. &c. 

Abhi-hfirya, mfn. —abhi-haraniya. 

\ Q bhi-\/ ’brisk, Caus. (p. -harshayat) 
to gladden, MBh. vi, 1833 ; xii, 1894. 

abhi-\/'ne$h (p. dat. jn. - keshate ) 

to neigh towards, AitP>r.; MBh. viii, 4471. 

abhi-hruty mfn. (y/hvri), causing 

a fall or damage, injurious, RV. i, 189,6; AV. vi, 4, 
2 ; f. (abl. -hrutas) fall, damage, injury, RV. i, j 28, 
5& x, 63, 11. 

A bhi-h rati, is, f. fall, damage, injury, RV. i, 
166, 8 ; AV. vi, 3, 3. 

Abhi-hvara. as, m. a crooked or damaging way 
or place, AV. vi, 76, 3. 

abhi-\/hve , to call near, SBr. 


2. Abhi-hava, as, m. calling near, Pan. iii, 3,72. 
Abhi-hnti, is, f. calling near (as the gods to the 
sacrifice), Nir. 

WTT 1. a-bhh mfn. fearless, R.; Ragb. 

— pa da (v. 1. -pada), m. 1 whose foot or step is 
without fear,* N. of a Rishi, VBr. 

I. A-bhlka, mfn. fearless, L. 

A-bhlta, mf(«f)n. id., R. —vat, ind. fearlessly, 
MBh. xii, 3730 ; R. &c. 

1. A-bhiti, is, f. fearlessness, L, 

A-bhxru, m(acc. c r 7 jam, 4 ; nom. pi. °ravas)( n. 

fearless, RV.; Mn. vii, 190 ; not terrific (nom. pi. f. 
°ravas , RV’. viii, 46, 7 ; (us), m., N. of a prince, 
MBh. i, 2689 ; N. of Bhairava or Siva ; (us) [L.] 
or (ri) [Susr.], f. the plant Asparagus Racemosus. 

— pattri, f. the above plant Asp. Rac. 
A-bhimka, mfn. fearless, MBh. vii, 2522. 

A-bhirtma [AV. vii, 89,3] or a-bhiruria [VS.], 
mfn. not terrific. 

^*Tt 2 .abhi (\/i), abhy-eti (Imper. 2. sg. 

abhfki ; impf. 3. pi. -ayan, 3. sg. A. -ayata; ind. 
p. abhifya ) to come near, approach, go up to or to¬ 
wards l acc.), RV. &c.; (with sakdsam or samlpam 
or pdrsve) id., Pahcat.; to go along or after (acc.), 
RV. Sic .: to enter, join, go over to, Mn.; Bhatt.; 
(with a pr. p.) to begin to, tperf. 3. pi. abhtytih) 
SBr.; to reach, obtain, RV. &c.; to get or fall into 
(acc. ,, MBh. ice.: to come to, fall to one’s share 
(with acc.), Bhatt.; (said of the sun) to rise (as if 
he came nearer; also with abhitardm [q. v,] in¬ 
stead of abhi , AitBr., (with astarn) to set, MR!., 
i, 1797 (u. abhy-aya ): Pass, abhiyate, to be per¬ 
ceived, known, BhP.: Intens. (l. pi. - intake } to ask, 
request, RV. i f 24, 3. 

2. Abhxti, is, f. assault, RV. ii, 33, 3 & vii, 21,9. 
Abhitvan, xni{vart)n. attacking, VS.; AitBr. 
Abhy-aya, as, m. approaching v as of darkness), 

KatySr.; setting (of the sun), ib. 

Abhy-Syuka, mfn. coming up to (acc.), KapS. 

’SOfrfi 2. abkika , mfn. (= abhika, q.v.), 
longing after, lustful, libidinous, Pan. v, 2, 74; (as), 
m. a lover; a master, L.; a poet, L. 

3. abhika, am, n. (fr. abhi-anc; cf. 
dnuha), meeting together, collision, RV. ix, 92, 5 ; 
(e), ioc. ind. in the presence of (gen.), near, to¬ 
wards, RV.; (with Vmuc or with are) 
away from, out of (abl.), RV.; (with verbs express¬ 
ing defending from, as V3.^ pa 8c \turushya ) from 
(with abl.), RV.; before (as before midday; with 
abh), RV. iv, 28, 3. 

^f^^^abhiksh (\^tksh), A. (impf. 3. du. 
-atksketdni) to look towards (acc.), RV. x, 121, 6. 

abhikshna , mfn. (contr. of abhi- 
kshana, cf. Nir. ii, 25), constant, perpetual, L.; in 
comp, for abhikshnam , q.v.; (am), ind. repeatedly, 
again and again, perpetually, constantly ; presently, 
at once; very, exceedingly (in comp, abhikshna -), 
Rajat. — sas, ind. constantly, R.; 5 usr. 

ssnrNrn: abhi-edra . See abhi- \/ car . 

abhijya . See abhi-*/yaj. 

Wfhia -bkita, &c. Seei.a-bkh 

abhindh ( *Jindh ), abhtndhe (for 

°nddht) to surround with flames, inflame, AV. xi, 3, 
18; SBr. 

Abhxddha, mfn. inflamed, RV. i, 164, 26 & x, 

190, 1; VS. 

abhipa , m. or n. (fr. 2. dp with 

abhi : cf. aniipd), only in comp, with -t&s, ind. 
from the waters or clouds [Ginn.],‘at the right time* 
[NBD. (fr. V dp with abhi)], RV. i, 164, 52. 

abhi-pada. See 1 .a-bhi. 

abhips (Desid.), &c. See abhy - 


a-bhima , mfn. unterrific, causing 

no fear ; (as), m., N. of Vishnu. 

abki-mana. See nir-abhmdna. 
Abhl-manin. See abhi-*/man. 

abkimoda-mud (or -dbhi-moda - 
mud, fr. irreg. Intens.), mfn. (Vmud), excessively 
joyful, AV. xi, 7, 26 & 8, 24; (cf. abhilapa-ldp.) 

abhir (\Ar), Caus. (p. - irayat) to 
bring near, TBr. 

Abhi rani, f. a kind of serpent, L. 

’WbTt abhira (incorrectly) for abhir a, q. v. 

WmI < t'WI abhiraji, f., N. of a poisonous 

insect, Susr. 

a-bhiru, &c. See 1. a-bhi. 

cSmW{abhildpa-ldp (or abhi-ldpalap , 
fr. irreg. Intens.), mfn. ( */lap), excessively whimper¬ 
ing, A V. xi, 8, 25 ; (cf. abhimoda-mud.) 

ahki-vargd , a.9, m. (vrij), circuit, 
compass, AV. iii, 5, 2; vi, 54, 2 8 c xi, 2, 4. 

abhi-vartd. See abhi-*/vrit. 

abki-vrita. See 1. abhi-J 1. vri. 
abhi-sdpa. See abhi-vsap. 

abhisUy us , m. (fr. \/i. as with abhi, 

Nir. iii, 9), chiefly Ved. rein, bridle, RV. &c.; ray 
of light, Naigh.; (through incorrect interpretation of 
ddsdbhisu , q.v.) arm, finger, Naigh.; N. ofa Rishi, 

Abhlshu, us, in. (incorrectly for abhisu) rein, 
bridle, MBh. vii, 8180; ray of light. Sis. i, 22. 
-mat, mfn. ‘having rays of light,’ radiant, bright, 
Sis. xvi, 50 ; (an), m. the sun, Sis. vi, 63. 

abhish {VZ'teh), dbhicchati (Subj. 

ab hue hat) to seek for, long for (acc.), AV.; AitBr.; 
to intend to (Inf.), Kathas. 

Abhishta, mfn. wished, desired, dear, TS. &c.; 
(as), m. a lover, Pahcat.; Sail. (cf. -tama below); 
(d), f. a mistress; betel, L.; (am), n. wish, -ta¬ 
ma, mfn. (superl.) deareff, Pahcat.; (as), m. a 
dearest lover, Sah. — ta, f. state of being desired. 
— devata, f. beloved goddess, favourite deity (in¬ 
voked in the last prayer before death), Pahcat. — la- 
bha, m. or -siddhi, f. the gaining a desired object. 

wfifs abhishti . 


i 5 

Abhishti, zV, f. wish, PBr. I ’Srvrta; a-bhol 

Atfcy-eshana, am n (only for the expla... of - abstemious . 

L 7. . A /a i a \ ^ n / r\ i 4 rv w* « r\ r\ J Mf ^ w* M /~v A ^ 

’srvrte a- bhoktri , mfn. not enjoying, not 

abhishti ) approaching (either in a friendly or hos¬ 
tile manner), Say. on RV, vii, 19, 8 & i, 9, 1; de¬ 
siring, wishing for, Say. on RV. i, 116, 11 & iv, 
II, 4. 

Abby-esbajilya, mfn. (only for the explan, of 
abhishti) to be desired, Say. on RV. i, 119, 8. 

abhl-shahga, See abhi-shahj . 

abhi-shdh. See abhi-shah. 

4 i <jY*U a-bkishma-drona, mfn. with¬ 
out Bhishma and Drona, Venls. 

Wf^TTt abki-sara . See abhi- V sri. 

-bhukta, mfn. uneaten ; unenjoyed, 

unused, unexpended ; one who has not eaten, en¬ 
joyed or expended, — purva, mfn. what has not 
been enjoyed before, MBh. xii, 180, 32. —vat, 
mfn. one who has not eaten, MBh.; Susr. 

A-bhuj, mfn. one who has not experienced or 
enjoyed, RV. x, 95, II. 

A-bhujisbya, as, a, m, f. not liberal, stingy, 
SankhSr.; not a servant. Abbujishya-tva, n. 
the state of a woman who lives independently, 
Mriccfc.; (cf. a-bhaujishya. ) 

A'-bbunjat, mfn. not being useful to, not liberal, 
stingy, RV. i, 120, 12 & viii, 1, 6 ; not eating. 
A-bbtmjana, mfn. not eating, fasting, R.; Gaut. 

a-bhugna , mfn. not bent, straight; 

free from disease, well. 

a-bhuj a, mfn. armless, maimed. 

a-bhuva, am, n. (Vbhd), ‘no real or 

common being,’ a monster, MaitrS.; (cf. a-bhva.) 
A-bbu, us, m. ‘unborn,’ N. of Vishnu, L. 
A-bhuta, mfn. whatever has not been or hap¬ 
pened. — tadbbava, in. the becoming or changing 
into anything which one has not been before, Pan. 
iii, 1,12, Comm. — tva, n. ‘ the state of not having 
existed or happened any time,’ impossibility, Comm, 
on Kavyad, — dosha, mfn. faultless. — purva, 
mfn. unprecedented, R. &c. — pradurbhava, m. 
the becoming manifest of what has not been before. 

— rajas, asas, m. pi., N. of a class of deities (sup¬ 
posed to have existed in the fifth Manvantara), VP. 

— satru, mfn. having no enemy. Abbutartba, 
as, m. anything unheard of or impossible, Sah. 
(v. 1.) Abhutdharana, am, n. relating anything 
Which in fact has not happened, a wrong account 
(given for deceiving or puzzling anybody), Sah.; 
Dasar. &c, 

A-bbuti, is, f. non-existence, SBr. xiv ; ‘ want 
of power,’ wretchedness, AV.; VS.; mischief, cala¬ 
mity, MBh. 

a-hhhmi , is, f. non-earth, anything 

but earth, KatySr.; no proper place or receptacle or 
object for (gen.), Sak. &c. — ja, mfn. produced in 
unfit or unsuitable ground, Susr. — s&hvaya, m. 
‘named a-bZiumi (bhiimi-dhard, earth), i. e. a- 
dhara ,’ lip, Kavyad. 

’STJT f «i ^ a-bhuyah-samnivritti, is, f. 

no return any more, Ragh.x, 28. 

A-bbuyisbtba, mfn. few, scanty. 

A-bburi, mfn. few, some. 

-bhusha , mfn. unadorned, Bhatt. 
A-bbusbita, mfn. id. 

a-hhrita , mfn. not receiving hire, 

not paid, Mn. viii, 231. 

A-bbritaka, mfn. id., MBh. vii, 4463. 
A-bbritydtman, mfn. ‘ not behaving as a ser¬ 
vant,’ disobedient towards (loc.), Kad. 

’SOJSt a -bhrisa , mfn. not much, little, few. 

a-bheda, as, m. non-fracture, com- -dti-ricycta) Ved. to remai 
pactness, closeness of array, RPrat. &c.; absence of TS.; SBr. &c. 

difference or distinction, identify; (mfn.) not dif- —p-. 1 , . • / . j „ j 

ferent, identical, VP. y-rt-MW. T. (=*f*-v rad. 

A-bbedaka, mfn. not dividing, not causing any ?• ^ eak ouder or b 

distinction, Pat. m £> r - 

A-bhedin, mfn. not different, Sarvad. ^^K^p^abhy-ati- Vl 

A-bhedya, mfn. not to be divided or broken or p ast ( v . }.') 

pierced ; indivisible ; not to be betrayed (as a secret ’ < - ’ 

formula), BhP.; (am), n. a diamond, L. — ta, f. or abhy-ati- V 

-tva, n. 4 [R.] indivisibility, impenetrability. mas) to let pass, AV. x, 5, 

A-bboktavya, mfn. not to be enjoyed or used. SBr. 
A-bbogfa, as, m, non-enjovment, Megh. &c. Abb 
Abbog--g-ban, m(nom. pi. -ghanasMn. (fr. a- iii, 121 
bhoj — a-bhunjat), killing the stingy, RV. j, 64, 3. 

A-bbogya, mfn. not to be enjoyed, Megh. (v-. 1 . trans f e 
for a-bhoga , q. v.); not to be enjoyed sexually, 

MBh. xiii, 4529. 

A-bhoj ana, am, n. not eating, fasting, KatySr.; (in nu 
Mn. &c.; (ani), n. pi. id., Kathas. mon r 

A-bbojita, mfn. not fed, not feasted. &c.; s 

A-bbojin, mfn. not eating, fasting. : author 

A-bbojya, mfn. uneatable, Hariv.; not to be or in c 
eaten, prohibited as food, Gaut. Sec.; one whose BrS.]t 
food is not allowed to be eaten, M11. xi, 152. A- MBh. 
bhojyanna, mfn. one whose food is not allowed to 
be eaten, Mn. iv, 221. ^ 

A-bbaujishya, am, n. ‘ not the state of a ser- KatyS: 
vant,’ independence, Suparn.; (cf. a-bhujiskya s. v. WMC 
a-bhukta .) ' provc , 

a-bhautika, mfn. not relating to j thoriz* 

or produced by the gross elements, not material, 

Comm, on Nvavad. &c. -jhdti 

r ' ' . MBh. 

abhy-agni , is, m., N. of a son of -jndA 

F.tasa or Aitasa, AilBr.; KaushBr.; ( i), ind. towards 2 . A 
the fire, Pan. ii, 1, 14, Sch. Ragh. 

abhy-agra,mf(a)n.h&\ r \ng the point RP ia t. 

turned or directed towards (acc.), ApSr L ; quick, 

KaushBr.; SankhSr.; constant, perpetual, Ap.; fresh 

(as blood), Bhatt.; near, L.; (am), n. proximity, L. n \ u 

abhy-aghaya, Nom. P. - aghoyati , n/; a 

to intend to injure, AV. vii, 70, 3. Abl 

abhy-ahka , mf(a)n. recently marked Comni 

(as cattle), Pan. ii, 1, 14, Kas. ** 

WEHT abhy-aj (Vaj), (Imper. or Subj. 1. 
du. - djdva ) to combine, unite, RV. i, 1 79, 3. 

atter^ j 

abhy-Vanj , P. to smear, anoint, 

TS.; AitBr. &c.: A. to anoint one’s self: A;_(3. pi. 
abhy ailjate) to decorate, RV. ix, 86, 43 : A. -ah- ^ ass - I 
kte, to decorate one’s self, TS. (quoted in P 5 n. ii, to > a Pl 
3, 62, Kas.); (in Pass, sense; p. - aiijand ) to be 
decorated, RV. ii, 8, 4 - t0 app 

Abby-^kta, mtn. oiled, anointed, SBr.; Mn. iv, * 

44, 8 c c.; decorated, AV. x, i, 25. 

Abhy-aixga, as, m. rubbing with unctuous sub- to j ec ] 
stances, inunction, Mn. ii, 178, &c.; unguent, Susr. AitBr. 

^ by son 

Abby-ahjaka, mfn. (ifc.) rubbing (the feet) with ' ^.hl 

unctuous substances, Kathas. ence t 

Abhy-aiijana, am, n. rubbing with unctuous u hfai\ 

substances, inunction (especially > of the feet, once . 

[BhP.] said of the hairs), KatySr.; Mn. &c.; un- 

guent (used for rubbing the feet; cf. ah j and), SBr. V vac 

See.; (5) ornament, embellishment, RV. ■«r*I 

Abhy-ah j anymfn. whose feet are to be rub- • - -. 

bed with unguents, TBr. sasah 

Abby-ahjya, mfn. to be rubbed with unguents (as vT** 
a foot), Kathas. v. 1 . -5; 

^wrfrT 3 i*r abhy-ati-\/kram (ind. p. - kram - ’ST** 

ya ; Inf. -kr ant urn) to step over, walk through, R.; id., ib. 

to overpower, MBh. xiv, 1551; to transgress, vio- 

late, MBh. i, 190. , * 

r . r being : 

abhy-aii-Vkskar (impf. -aksha- [cf. ^ 
rat) to flow over to (acc.), TBr.; AitBr. in, con 

abhy-atita , mfn. (Vat), one who rc ' ate ^ 
has walked towards (acc.% one who visits (used for s j . 

the etvm. of a tit hi), Nir. * C ' 

' C % , . vrtW), 

1 ahhy-ati-Vni , to bring or place pi. the 
upon (loc.), Kaus. ind. in 

abhy-ati-Vric, Tass. -dti-ric- 

yatc. or -ati-ricydic (Subj. abhy-dti-ricydtai; Pot. ni cur . 
-dti-ricycta) Ved. to remain for the sake ot ^acc.), c u ^ r . 

abhy-ati (Vi), (ind. p. -atifya) to 

pass over (acc.), R.; to get through towards (acc.), 

Abby-atita, mfn. passed away (as time' 1 , MBh. 
iii, 12547; dead, Mn. iv, 252 ; MBh. vii, 1061. 

abhy-aty-Vrij, to carry over or 

transfer upon (acc.), AitBr. 

’Sajfqaif abhy -adhika , mf(c)n. surpassing 

(in number, power, kind), R. exceeding the com¬ 
mon measure, pre-eminent, extraordinary, MBh. 
&c.; superior to, more excellent than, having more 
authority or power than, more than (abl. or instr. 
or in comp.), MBh. &c.; augmented by (abl. [Var- 
BrS.l or instr. or in comp.); (am\ ind. exceedingly, 
MBh. xiii, 580, &c. 

’JWWl ' abhy-adhvam, ind. upon the way, 
KatySr.; (e), loc. ind. cn the way, AV. iv, 28, 2. 

1. abhy-anu-Vjha, to assent to, ap¬ 
prove, allow, permit, concede, MBh. &c.; to au¬ 
thorize, direct, MBh. ii, 1225; to aliow one to 
depart, dismiss, MBh. See.; (ind. p. -j hay a; Inf. 
-jhdtum) to take leave, ask for leave to depart, 
MBh. xiv, 146; R.: Caus. (ind. p. -jhdfya; fut. p. 
-jhdpayishyai) to ask for leave to depart, MBh. 

2. Abhy-anujna, f. (ifc. f. a) assent, approval, 
Ragh. ii, 69; Nyayad.; authorization, permission, 
RPiat.; AsvGr.; granting leave of absence, dismiss¬ 
ing, R. Sec. 

Abby-anujnata, mfn. assented to, approved, 
Mn. ii, 1 ; authorized, allowed to; MBh. &c.; (an-, 
neg.) Mn. ii, 229; favoured by tmstr.), R. iii, 36, 
19 ; allowed to depart, dismissed, MBh. &c. 

Abby-annjnana, am, n. assenting to, approval, 
Comm, on Nyayad.; authorization, permission, R. 
h 3 > 14 - 

Abby-anujnapana, am, n. causing to assent to. 

abhy-anu-Vprach , to inquire 
after, ask for, MBh. xii, 1933 & xiii, 2169. 

abhy - anu mvd, Caus. (perf. 

Pass. p. -modita ; p. necess. - modanlya ) to assent 
to, approve of, MBh. i, 4447 ; Inscr. 

abhy-anu- \ yuj (ind. p. -ynjya) 
to apply to, ask, MBh. xii, 5667. 

^^^^abhy-anu- \ y vac (perf. -amivdea) 

to declare or state or utter with reference to (acc.', 
AitBr.: Pass. (3. pi. -anucyantc) to be referred to 
by some statement or verse, SBr. 

Abby-anukta, mfn. stated or uttered with refer¬ 
ence to (acc.;, SBr.; AitBr.; ChUp.; (cf. abhy- 



abhy-anu- Vrad , V. (= —ahhy-anu- 

V vac) to utter with reference to (acc.), SBr. 

abhy - anu-Vsus (Imper. 1. p. 
-sdsdni) to indicate, denote, ChUp. 

^^5? abhy-anu-Vsri (ind. p. -sritya, 
v. 1 . -srijya) to learn by investigating, Hariv. 1440. 

abhy -anu-Vsrij (ind. p. -srijya) 

abhy-antara , mf(r7)n. interior, 

being inside of, included in (loc.; gen. or in comp. 
\ci.gandbhyantara\p h MBh. ii, 2 282,&c.; initiated 
in, conversant with (loc.), R. ; Megh. ; next, nearly 
related, intimate, Paftcat.; (am), 11. inner part, in¬ 
terior, inside, middle, Sak. Sec. ; ^generally loc. ; 
ifc A interval, space of time, Mricch.; Pahcat.; Hit.; 
(am), ind. (ifc.) into, Kathas. Sec. — kala, as, f. 
pi. the secret arts or the arts of coquetry, Das. — tas, 
ind. in the interior, inwards, Susr. — dosba-krit, 
mtn. ‘doing a wrong to one's own land,’ raising a 
sedition or rnutinv, VarBrS. Abhyantardyama, 
m. curvature r,f the spine by spasm, eniprosthonos, 
Susr.: (cf. bJhyJyawc. \ 

Abby-antaraka, as, m. an intimate friend, L. 
Abhyantari . n>i abhyantara in comp, with 

q. v.) ‘to speak louder or better,’ surpass in disput- Vl. kri and it- dem atn e *). — karana, n. initiai- 
j n g pg r ing in loc.), Das. — V I. ikvi, to put between, in- 

r' ,, , . , . sert. Pat. — krita, mfn. initiated in Hoc.), R.; made 

^Rwtfftnbhy-ati-Vvrity-vartate, to drive * ' 

abhy-ati- Vsrij ( t. pi. -ati-srijd- 
mas) to let pass, AV. x, 5, 15 —xvi, 1, 5. 

intimate, Pahcat. 

abhy-apa-Vkram, -kramati , to 
go away towards (acc.), SBr.; (aor. Subj. 2. sg. -dpa- 
kraniis) to come up to, AV. xii, 2, 18. 



*rwrfer abhy-apa-sru 

^rwrpFT abhy-dsa . 

abhy-apa-Vsri , A. to retice to¬ 
wards (acc.), ShadvBr. 

abhy-apan (van), to breathe to¬ 
wards (acc.), AitBr. 

TR^P^abhy-s/am, abhy-amiti(VS. [quoted 

in P 5 n. vii, 2, 34, Sch.; cf. also ib. 3, 95, Sch.]; 2. 
sg. -amishi; 3. pi. Subj. -amanti 8c impf. A. - d- 
manta ) to advance violently against, pain, hurt, 
RV. i, 189, 3 ; vii, 25, 2 & x, 86, 8 ; VS. 
Abhy-amana, am, n. paining, oppression, Nir. 

— vat, mfn. paining, hurting, ib. 

Abhy-amita or abhy-Snta, mfn. (perf. Pass, p.) 

diseased, sick, L. 

Abhy-amitrina [Bhatt.] or °trlya or °trya 

[Bhatt.], mfn. [apparently derivatives fr. abhy-ami- 
tram (see below s. v.), but probably originally de¬ 
rived from the rt., which is also indicated by the 
parallel form abhy-amin (see below)] advancing 
against or attacking (the enemy), Pan. v, 2, 17. 
Abhy-amitrl^a-ti, f. a good opportunity to at¬ 
tack the enemy, Rajat. 

Abhy-amin, mfn. attacking, Pan. iii, 2, 157. 

WJjfapf abhy-amitra (basis of abhy-arni- 
tram & its derivatives °trina, &c.), Pan. v, 2, 17; 
(am), ind. against the enemy, Venls. 
Ahhy-amltrina, &c. See abhy-am. 

abhy-aya. See 2. abhi. 

abhy - ayodhyam, ind. towards 

or against Ayodhya, Bhat{. 

abhy-ari, ind. towards or against 

the enemy, L. 

abhy-arkabimbam, ind. to¬ 
wards the disk of the sun, Sak. 

abhy-*/arc (3. pi. -arcanti & impf. j 

-arcan [RV. iv, 1, 14] ; Imper. 2. sg. -area, 2. pi. 
-areata; A. I. sg. -arcs 8c aor. -arcase [RV. x, 64, 
3]) to praise, celebrate in song (instr.), RV.; AV.; 
VS.; (ind. p. -arcya) to worship, reverence, MBh.; 
Mn. &c. 

Abhy-arcana, am, n. worship, reverence, Mn. 
ii, 176, &c. 

Abhy-arc&nlya, mfn. * abhy-arcya. 
Abhy-arcS, f. = abhy-arcana above, L. 
Abhy-arcita, mfn. reverenced, MBh. ii, 1390, 
&c.; incorrectly for abhy-arthita, MBh. v, 1532. 
Abhy-arcya, mfn. to be reverenced, VarBrS. &c. 

dbhy-arna, mfn. (fr. */ri or accord¬ 
ing to Pin. vii, 2, 25 fr. Vard, in which case it 
should be written abhy-arnna) near, proximate, 
Ragh. ii, 32, &c.; (am), n. proximity, Malatim. &c. 

— tS, f. proximity, K 5 d. 

abhy - V art (aor. A. 2. pi. - artidhvam ) 

[NBD.] incorrectly for abhy-*/arth, PBr.; cf. an - 
•tart (anv-artT). 

abhy-*/arth , A. (Opt. 2. sg. - artha - 

yethds; rarely P., e.g. fut. -arthayishyati, KathSs.) 
to request, ask for (acc. or dat. or loc. or in comp, 
with artham), MBh. iii, 16990,&c.; (see also abhy- 
V art .) 

Abhy-arthana,aw,n. asking, requesting; gene¬ 
rally (a), f., id., Kum. i, 53, &c, 
Abhy-arthaniya, info. to be requested or asked. 
Abhy-arthita, mfn. asked, invited, Mn. ii, 189, 
&c.; (am), n. request,Yajn. ii, 88; (cf. yathabhyar- 

Abhy-arthin, mfn. (ifc.) asking, KathSs. 

1. Abhy-arthya, mfn. ■> abhy-arthaniya. 

2. Abhy-arthya, ind. p. asking, requesting, 

^ m 

^ abhy-*/ard, to oppress, afflict, pain, 

R.: Cans, id., BhP, 

Abhy-arnna, mfn. (as ni-shanna fr. ni-shad). 
See abhy-artm. 

Abhy-ardita, mfn. (fr. Caus.) distressed, op¬ 
pressed, MBh. i, 4116 ; Pan. vii, 2, 25, Sch. 

abhy-ardha , as, m. only (e) loc. ind. 

opposite to, in the face of (abl.), SBr. — y&jvan 
(6), mfn. (said of Pushan) receiving sacrifices apart 
or separate ones, RV. vi, 50, 5. 

Abhy-ardhas, ind. apart, separate from (abl.), 

M zitrS.; TS. 


^^\abky-\^arsk (Tmper. 2. sg. - arsha 

(most frequently in RV.) ; p. - arshat) to flow or run 
near (acc.), RV.; to cause to flow near, afford, RV.; 
(aor. or plusq. -anarshat) TAr. 

’SWijin abhy-arkana , am, n. reverencing, 
honouring, BhP. 

Abhy-arhanlya, mfn. to be greatly honoured, 
venerable. — tS, f. honourableness, Mn. ix, 23. 

Abhy-arhita, mfn. greatly honoured, venerable, 
Kad.; (cf. Pan. ii, 2, 34, Comm.); more honoured, 
Kad.; more important than (abl.); fit, proper, be¬ 
coming, L. 

abhy-alamkrita, mfn. decorated, 

R- iii, 53, 36- 

Abhy-alamk&ra, as, m. (ifc. f. a), decoration, 
MBh. iii, 16166. 

abhy-alpa, mfn. very small, AitBr. 

abhy-Vav (aor. -amt) to refresh, 
RV. Lx, 97, 35. 

abhy-avakarshana, am, n. (*/ 

krish ), extraction, drawing out, L. 

abhy-avakasa, as, m> (v'kas), 

an open space, Kaus. 

abhy-ava-Vkri (Pass. 3. pi. -kir- 

yante) to throw or cast on, pour on, cover, R.; 

Abhy-ava-kirna, mfn. covered, R, 

abhy-ava-Vkr and, to call out 

towards (acc.), K 5 th. 

abhy-ava-Vgah, Caus. to ride 
or walk (horses) into the ford, Comm, on TBr. 

abhy-ava-Vcar (Subj. 3. pi. ~cd- 

rdn) to approach, assail, SBr.: Caus. (Opt. -carayet) 
to send away, MBh. xii, 3779. 

abhy-ava-Vjval, Caus. -jvala- 
yate, to enlighten, illumine, GopBr. 

abhy-ava-Vtan, - tanoti , to send 

out or spread (as rays, instr.) towards (acc.), SBr.; 
Pass. (3. pi. - tayante) to be sent out or spread (as 
rays) towards (acc.), SBr. 

1. abhy-ava-*/ 1. da, to place into 

(loc.), Car. 

2. abhy-ava-V 3. da, to cut off in 

addition to, SBr. ^ 

Abhy-ava-danyd (or -danya), mfn. depriving 
of (gen.), SBr. xiv. 

abhy-ava-dugdha, mfn. that 
upon which milk has been milked, Kaus. 

abhy-ava-Vdha (perf. Pass. p. 

-hita) to allay, lay (as dust), R. ii, 40, 33. 

abhy-ava-Vnam , Caus. (ind. p. 

namya ) to bow, incline,*MBh. iii, 10062. 

frf^ abhy-ava-V nij, P. - nenekti, to 

wipe or wash, clean, Kaus.; (aor. A. -niksht) 
AV. x, 5, 15: Caus. to cause to wash, Kaus. 

abhy-ava-Vni, to lead down (into 
water), SBr.; AitBr.; (perf. - ninaya ) to pour into 
or upon (acc.), AitBr.; PBr. 

abhy-ava-Vpat, to fly near, 


abhy -ava-Vman, -manyate, to 

despise, reject, Mn. iv, 249. 

abhy-ava-*/ruh, to step down 
upon, SBr.; (perf. p. -rudhavat) R.v, 52,15. 

abhy-ava-Vvrit , A. (Opt. 3. p] 

-vdrteran) to turn one’s self away from (abl.), TBr.: 
Caus. P. to turn towards or to this side, SBr. 

abky-ava-\/sri (ind. p. -sritya ) to 
retire from (abl.) towards (acc.), MBh. vii, 8479. 

abhy-ava-Vsrij (1. p. - srijami ) 

to dismiss towards (acc.), AV. xvi, 1,6; to dismiss 
(as rays), MBh. xii, 3295; to throw, shoot (as ar¬ 
rows), MBh.; R. 

dyd) to jump down or into, MBh.; to meet, en¬ 
counter, MBh. iv, 1549. 

Abhy-avaskanda, as, m. or c dana, am. n. 

impetuous assault, L. 

abhy-ava-sthita, mfn. resisting 

(with acc.), BhP. 

^*mf3*^abhy-ava-Vsyand, to drive (on 
a carriage) towards, SBr. 

abhy-ava-*/hri , to throw down 

into water (acc.; apdh or samudrdm or hraddm ), 
VS.; SBr.; AsvSr.; (cf. abhy-o/va-*/ni)\ to bring 
near, SBr.; to take food, eat, Susr.; Car. &c.: Caus. 
to cause to throw down (into water), Laty. ; to at¬ 
tack (as an enemy), MBh. iii, 16369 ; to take food, 
eat, MBh. iii, 15905 ; to cause to eat, Das. 

Abby-avab.d.rana, am, n. throwing away or 
down, SBr.; KatySr.; taking food, eating, Vishnus.; 
Comm, on Y2jn. 

Abhy-avakSra^m. taking food,Mn.^vi, 59.&C. 

Abhy-avaharin. See satrindbh 0 . 

Abhy-avahSrya, mfn. eatable, R.; Pan. Sch. 
& Comm.; (am), n. [Vikr.] or (am), n. pi. [MBh.] 
food, eating. 

abhy-avds (*/2. as), (Opt. - avds - 

yet) to throw upon (acc.), Kaus. 

abhy-ave (Vi), - avaiti , to go down, 
descend (into water, as in bathing), AitBr.; SBr.; 
KatySr.; (fut. 3. pi. -avdishyanti) to condescend, 
SBr.; (impf. 3. pi. - avetyan ) to perceive, TS. 

Abhy-av&yana, am, n. going down, §Br. 

abhy-aveksk (Vtksh), -avekshate, 

to look at or upon, SBr.; MBh. ii, 2686. 

Vi • as,-asnoti (frequently Opt. 

or Prec. I. sg. -asydm, 3. sg. -aiyds [RV. iv, 5, 7], 
1. pi. -asydma; aor. P. -dnat and A. -ashta; perf. 
1. pi. -anasma, ,3. pi. -anasuh) to pervade, reach 
to, gain, RV.; (Subj. 1. du.- asndvava , 1. pi. -ajnd- 
vama) to overpower, RV. 

Abhy-asana, am, n. reaching to, gaining, Nir. 

Abhy-asa, as, m. (also written 1. abhy-ftsa), 
reaching to, pervading, Yajn. iii, 114; (with yad 
and Pot.) prospect, any expected result or conse¬ 
quence, ChUp.; proximity (with gen. or abl.), R. 
&c.; (mfn.) near, Kum. vi, 2; (am), ind. near, at 
hand, AitBr.; PBr.; (e), loc. ind. near (with gen. 
or abl.), R. 8cc .; (at), abl. in comp, with (a perf. 
Pass, p., as) agata, &c., arrived from near at hand, 
&c., Pan. ii, l, 39, Sch. & vi, 3, 2, Sch, AbhySsI- 
Vbhu, to come near to, Pat. 

1. abhy-V 1. as, -dsti (1. pi. abhi 
shmas, but 3. pi. abhi santi and pr. p. abhi sat 
[according to Pan. viii, 3, 87 abhismas, but abhi- 
shanti and abhishat ] ; Subj. - asat , 1. pi. -dsdma, 

3. pi. - dsan ; Pot. sg. -shydm, -shyas, -shyat, 1 . 
and 3. pi. -shydma, -shyuh or - shyuh; perf. 1. sg. 
-dsa) to be over, reign over, excel, surpass, overpower, 
RV.; AV.; to fall to one’s share, Pan. i, 4, 91. 

Abhi-shti. See s. v. 

2. abhy-V^. as (ind. p. -asya) to 
throw towards or upon, SBr.; AitBr.; (p. gen. sg. 
-asyatas) to throw_(as arrows), MBh. 1,5479; to add, 
Sulb.: P. (rarely A.) -asyati (but also Pot. -aset, 
Mn.; p. -asat, MBh. iii, 1450; R.; Yajn. iii, 204: 
A. - asate, Mn. iv, 149) to concentrate one’s atten¬ 
tion upon (acc.), practise, exercise, study, MBh.&c.; 
to repeat, double ; to multiply, SQryas. &c .: Caus. to 
cause to practise or study, teach, Comm, on Sis. ix,79« 

Abhy-asana, am, n. practice, exercise, R. &c. 

Abhy-asaniya, mfn. to be practised, Kathas. \ 
to be studied ; to be repeated ; (in Gr.) to be redu¬ 

Abby-asitavya, mfn. to be practised, Comm, on 

Abhy-asta, mfn. accumulated by repeated prac¬ 
tice (as food), Susr.; practised, exercised, Mricch. &c.; 
learnt by heart, repeated, studied, Ragh. i,8,&c.; mul¬ 
tiplied, Nir.; Suryas.; (in Gr.) reduplicated (as roots), 
Nir.; (am), n. the reduplicated base of a root, Pan. 

2. Abhy-asa, as, m. the act of adding anything, 
Sulb.; (in Gr.) ‘what is prefixed,’ the first syllable 
of a reduplicated radical, Pan.; reduplication, Nir.; 
repetition, Mn. xii, 74, 8cc .; (in poetry) repetition 
of the last verse of a stanza [Nir.] or of the last word 
of a chapter [Comm, on AitBr.); (in zrithm.) mui - 

a ^ i/u . j f ^ iii j 

tiplication; repeated or permanent exercise, disci- 


^WTHTTT abhyasa-ta. 


piine, use, habit, custom; repeated reading, study; 
military practice, L.; (in iaterVedanta phil.) inculca¬ 
tion of a truth conveyed in sacred writings by means 
of repeating the same word or the same passage ; (in 
Yoga phil.) the effort of the mind to remain in its 
unmodified condition of purity (sattva). —1&, f. con¬ 
stant practice, use, habit. — nimitta, n. the cause 
of the reduplication-syllable, Pan. Comm. — pari- 
vartin (for abhydia -), mfn. wandering about or 
near, N. —yoga, m. the practice of frequent and 
repeated meditation on any deity or on abstract spirit, 
repeated recollection, —vat, m, (in Yoga phil.) 
‘being in the condition called abkyasa i. e. a Yogin 
of the first degree. — vyavaya, m. interval caused 
by the reduplication-syllable, P5n. Comm. Abby- 
Ss&kupara, n. ‘the sea of meditation,’ N. of a verse 
of the SV. 

Abby5sin, mfn. (ifc.) practising, repeating, 
Gaut.; = abkydsa-vat, q. v., Sarvad. 

J5 abhy-asitya, Nom. P. A. - asvyati , 

°te , to show indignation, be indignant at, MBh. &c. 

Atby-asuyaka, mfn. indignant, Bhag. 

Abby-asuy5, fi indignation, anger, Megh.; envy, 
jealousy, Kum. iii, 4; Ragh. 

abhy-astam , with *Ji [Pot. - iyat, 
§Br.; AitBr.] or */ [aor. - agdt, SBr.], (said of 
the sun) to set upon anybody (acc.) who is not work¬ 
ing or while anything (acc.) is not done or performed; 
(cf. abhi-ni - Vmruc.) 

Abhy-astam* ay a, as , rru See anuddhritdbh 0 . 

Abhy-astam-ita, mfn. one on whom while not 
(working or) being asleep the sun has set, Gaut. 

dbhy-dkarsha , as, m. (Vkrish),SL 
striking of the flat of the hand upon the breast in 
defiance (a practice common to wrestlers and pugil¬ 
ists), MBh. i, 7109. 

abhy-dkdhkshita, am, n. a 

groundless complaint, false accusation, L. 

abhy-d-kdram , ind. (\/i.kri), 
by or in drawing near to one’s self) AitBr.; SBr. (Kan- 
va Rec.) 

abhy-a-kramam, ind. (Vkram), 
by or in stepping towards repeatedly, AV. x, 7, 42. 

^'WttSl^ubhy-d-x/kruS (impf. 3. pi. -dkro- 

san) to assail with harsh language, revile, SankhSr. 

^WT^TT abhy-a-\/khyd (Inf. - khyatum— : 
mithyabhiyoktum ) to accuse falsely, Comm. 011 Kir. 
xiii, 58. 

Abhy-5khy5ta, mfn. accused falsely, calumni¬ 
ated, Kaus.; TUp. 

Abhy-Skhy ana, am, n. a false or groundless ac¬ 
cusation, calumny, Buddh.; Jain. 

abhy-d-x/gam (fut. p. neg. an- 
abhydgamishyat , SBr.) to come near to, approach, 
visit, SBr. &c.; (with cintdm) to happen to think, 
R. iii, 4, 20. 

Abhy-5grata, mfn. come, arrived, MBh. &c.; 
(with kramdt) inherited, Y 5 jh. ii, 119; {as), m. 
(opposed to atithi) an uninvited guest, BhP.; a 
guest in general, Hit. &c. 

Abhy- 5 grama, as, m. approaching, arrival, visit, 
visitation, Ragh. &c.; arriving at or enjoying a re¬ 
sult, NySyad.; neighbourhood, L.; rising (to receive 
a guest), L.; war, battle, L.; encountering, striking, 
killing, L.; enmity, L. 

Abhy-a-gramana, mfn. arrival, visit, R. i, 8, 24; 
Kir.; (cf. kaldbh 0 .) 

^*nrn abhy-a-x/ 1 .ga (aor. abhy-agat) to 
approach, come to (acc.), RV. i, 164, 27; MBh.; 
(gen.), BhP.; (said of evil) to visit, MBh. iii, 1120; 
to begin to (Inf.), Mn. x, 108. 

- garam, ind. (\/i.^ri), so 
as to call or shout to each other (at the different 
steps of a dance), i.e. repeating separately, KaushBr. 
(see also abhi-ni-nartam ); cf. apa-garam. 

1 3WT 7 TIT abhy-agare , loc. ind. in the house, 
AsvGr.; v. 1 , abhy-dear e [ParGr.J'and abhy-acare 
[ManGr.J, ‘in the reach or compass.’ 

Abhy-agSrika, diligent in supporting a 
family, L. 

abhy-aghata , as, m. {\/han), as¬ 
sault, attack, Mn. ix, 272; interruption, Comm, on 

Abhy-5grh5tin, mfn. attacking, Pin. iii, 2,14 2. 
Abby-5gb&tya , mfn. recited with interruption, 

W*VFTC&{abhy-d-ghdram. S eepunar-abh°. 

<?t«n^ , SSr abky -a-Vcaksh (impf. - dcashta) 

to look at (acc.), BhP.; to speak, BhP. 

^wn^a%-d-V / car( 

a-cdrantis ) to approach (with acc.), RV. viii, 96, 
15; to undertake, practise, MBh. xii, 9719. 
Abby-5care, loc. ind. See abhy-dgdre. 
Abby-ac5r&, as, m. approaching (as an enemy), 
assault, AV. x, 3, a; mishap, an accident, KaushBr.; 
{e), loc. ind. See abhy-dgdre. 

abhy-dj (\/aj), (Imper. 2. sg. - dja ) 

to drive near, P 5 n. viii, 1, 8, Sch. 

abhy-d-jnaya , as, m. order, com¬ 
mand, SBr. 

^OZRt(f{abhy-d-\/tan y A. (impf. 3. pl.-ato- 
vata ) to take aim at, shoot, TS. 

Abhy-Stana, as, m. pi. ‘aiming at,’ N. of cer¬ 
tain war-songs, TS.; Kaus. — tva, n. the state of 
those war-songs, TS. 

abhy-a-\/tap (3. pi. - tapanti ) to 

torment, pain, RV. vii, 83, 5. 

abhy-d-x/tri (Imper. 2. sg. - tara) 

to come up to (acc.), RV. viii, 75, 15. 

abhy-dtmdm , ind., Ved. towards 

one’s self, SBr. 8 cc. 

AbbyEtma (in comp, for abhyatmam ). — ta- 
ram, ind. more towards one’s self, AsvSr. Abby- 
atmagra, mfn. having the points turned towards 
one’s self, AsvGr. 

a b h y - a-x /1. da , A. (r ar ely P., H ar iv.) 
to seize, snatch away, (Pot . -dadita) MBh. i, 3558 
== xii, 10999 = xiii, 49 ^ 5 : A. to put on (as a wreath), 
Hariv.; (with vakyam ) to take up the word, com¬ 
mence to speak, MBh. v, 3384. 

Abhy-S-tta, mfn. encompassing, ChUp. 
Abby-5dana, am, n. beginning, Pan. viii, 2, 87. 

abhy-a-davyd , as, m. {V2. du), 
N. of the non-sacrificial fire which in coming close 
to the sacrificial one blazes up together with it, 

abhy-a-y/dis (Intens. p. - dedi - 

sdna) to aim at (in hostile manner), RV. vi, 44,17. 

abhy-d-y/2. dru (perf. - dudrava ) to 

run towards (acc.), SBr. 

abhy-a-Jdha, chiefly Ved. to lay 
on (fuel, &c.), VS v &c.; to place the fire upon, 
SBr. &c. 

i • 

Abby-5dbana, am, n. laying on (fuel), SBr.; 

Abby-£bita, mfn. laid on (as fuel), SBr.; ChUp. 
— pasu, m. a present or duty (usual in some dis¬ 
tricts of India), Pan. vi, 3,10, Sch.; (v. 1 . abliyarhita - 

H abhy-anana, mfn. having the face 

turned towards, BhP. 

abhy-a-\/ni (ind. p. - niya) to pour 

into, mix with, AitBr. 

abhy-a-\/nrit (pr. p. -7 irityat) to 

dance towards, hasten near, TBr. 

'JffrflTnf abhy-anta = abhy-amita, q.v. 

^•QV^abhy-x/ dp , - dpndti, to reach to, get, 

obtain, SBr.: Caus. -dpdyati, to bring to an end, 
SBr.: Desid. P. abhipsati (rarely A., M Bh. v, 1 7), 
to strive to reach, ask for, desire, MBh. &c. 

Abbipsat, mf (atl, MBh. i, 6469; R.; anti, Mn. 
v, 156)11. (pr. p.) longing for, desiring. 

Abbipsita, mfn. desired, acceptable, dear. 
Abbipsin, mfn. (ifc .) — abhipsat, KathUp. 
Abbipsn, mfn. id. y with acc., N. &c.; with Inf., 
Sis. i, 14). 

Abby-apti, is, f. obtaining, AitAr. 

abhy-a-Vpat y to jump on, hasten 

near to, rush towards (acc. without or with prat! 
MBh.; Kathas.: Caus. to extend (a string; towards [ 
(acc.), Sulb. 

Abby-SpSta, as, m. calamity, misfortune, L. 

abhy-a-\/pad L (Pot. -padyeta) to 

enter into, come to (acc.), AsvGr. 

Abby-&-pfidam , ind. so as to enter into or pass 
through (acc.), Nir. vii, 26. 

^vm^abhy-d-*/bhu (Pot. - bhavet) to hap¬ 

pen to, occur to (acc.), SBr.; AitBr. 


abhy-amarda , as, m. war,battle, L. 

y&XX\TF^abhy-a-\/yam, P. (3. pi.- yacckan - 

ti) to lengthen (as a syllable in speaking^, AitBr.; 
to draw or pull (as the udder in sucking), Kath.: 
A. (Imper. 2. sg. - yacckasva) to assume (‘to grant,’ 
Comm.),VS. iii, 38: P.(Subj. 3. pi. -yaman; ind. p. 
-ydtya) to aim at, RV. viii, 92,31; SBr.; AitBr.; for 
abhy-a- *Jgam, KaushBr. 

Abby-a-yaiis6nya, mfn. (said of the Asvins) 
one who allows himself to be drawn near (for ac¬ 
cepting the sacrificial oblation), RV. i, 34, 1. 

abhy-a-\/yd, to come up to, ap¬ 
proach, MBh. &c. 

abhy-a-\/2. yu, A. (3. pi. - yuvate) 

to strive towards (acc.), AitBr. 

dbhy-ayuka. See 2. abhi. 

abhy-a-\/rabh , A. to lay hold of 
(acc,), SBr.AitBr.: P. (impf. -drabhat) to com¬ 
mence, MBh. iii, 10724. 

Abby-araxnbba, as, m. beginning, SBr.; re¬ 
beginning, repetition, PBr. 

abhy-aram , ind. (cf. drd) near, at 

hand, RV. viii, 72, II. 

^WJT^ abhy-a-\/ruh , - a-rohati , to as¬ 
cend, mount, step upon, AV.; TS.; SBr.: Caus. 
(Subj. I. sg. - rohaydni ) to cause to ascend, SBr. 

Abby-£rudba, mfn.ascended,TS.; { neg.) 

Abby-5roba, as, m. ascending, SBr. (cf. an- 
neg.) ; increase, growth (as of days), SBr.; ‘ascend¬ 
ing in devotion,’ praying, SBr. xiv. 

Abby-Srobamya, as, m., N. of a sacrificial 
ceremony, AsvSr.; Laty. 

Abhy-5r6huka, mfn. ascending, MaitrS. 

Abby-5robya. See an - neg. 

abhy-a-Vvadh (aor. - avadhit ) to 

strike, R. i, 45, 1/ (v. 1 .) 

abhy-a-Vvah (3. pi. Imper. - va - 

bantu and impf. -avahan) to convey, bring towards 
(acc.), RV. i, 51,10; 134, I & vi, 63, 7. 

abhy-a-\/vis (impf. -avtsat) to 
rush into (acc.), MBh. vii, 5812; P. A. to enter 
into, penetrate, MBh. 

W*(T^ , i^ah%-d-\/i7n7, -vartate (Imper. 2. 

sg. - vavritsva; P. impf. 3. sg. -dvart [RV. vii, 59, 
4]) to roll (as a cart) towards, come up to or towards 
(acc.), approach, RV.; AV.; VS.: Caus. (Ved.) - va - 
yartati, id., RV. x, 6 4 > 1; - vartayati , to repeat, 

Abby-5-vartam, ind. so as to repeat, repeatedly, 

SBr.; PBr. 

Abby-avartin, mfn. coming near, coming re¬ 
peatedly, VS. (voc.); Kaus. ; returning (as days), 
AitBr. {an- neg.); (/), m., N. of a king (son of 
CayamSna and descendant of Prithu), RV. vi, 27, 

5 & 8 . 

Abhy-Svritta, mfn. come near, approached, VS. 
viii, 58; (with acc.) SBr.; turned towards, KstySr. 

Abby-avritti, is, i. repetition, P 5 n.; Jaim. 

Abby-5-vritya, ind. p. turning one’s self towards 
(acc.), MBh. v, 4128. 

^ abhy-asa , as, in. See abhy-y/ 

WJDITH abhy-dsa. See ( abhy-x /1 .as and) 

2. abhy -V2. as. 

abhy-a-sakta,mf n.(\/sanj), close- 
iv linked together (as days by beginning a day with 
the same ceremony which has been performed at the 
end of the preceding day), AsvSr.; Comm, on PBr. 

Abby-asangya, mfn. to be closely linked to¬ 
gether (as days; see before), PBr.; Vait.; (<w), m., 
N. of a PancSha, PBr.; ApSr. 

abhy-a-sad (Ved. Inf. - sddam) 
to sit down into (acc.), RV. ix, 3, I & 30, 4; to at¬ 
tain, obtain, Kir. v, 52. 



Abhy-asadana, am, n. attacking an enemy, L. 
Abhy-asadayitavya, min. to be allowed to ap¬ 
proach, MBh. iii, 17101. 

^Xfif^abhy-a -Vsic, to pour on, Gobh.; 


V • v" 

> 5 WT abhy-a-Vkan (Imper. 2. s g.-jahi; 
per:’. A. -jaghie) to strike, wound, RV. ix, 85, 2; 
MBh.; ChUp.; to impede (Inf. - hanitum ), Hariv. 

Abhy-abata, mfn. struck, wounded, MBh. &c.; 
seized by, afflicted with, MBh. &c.; impeded, Bhatt., 
(an-, neg.) AsvSr.; Mark?. 

Abhy-ahanana, am, 11. impeding, interruption, 
Comm, on FBr. 

abhy-ahita. See abhy-d-Vdha. 
abhy-a-Vhri, to bring near, band 

over, MBh.; R.; to carry off, R. ed. Bomb, i, 61, 7. 

Abhy-ahara, as, m. bringing near, SBr.; carry¬ 
ing off, robbery, L, 

abhy-a-V hve , - hvdyate , to address 

(with the ahava formula),TS.; SBr.; AitBr.; (pr. p. 
-hvayat) to shout at, challenge, attack, PBr. 

abhy-ukta , mfn. declared or uttered 

(as a verse) with reference to (acc.), SBr.; Up. 

ubhy-\/i . uksh, P. -ukshati (ind. p. 

-24 k sky a) to sprinkle over, besprinkle, SBr. &c. : 
A. .pert' - vavakshe) to cover with sparks, RV. i, 

1 46, 

Abby-ukshana,<z.w, n. sprinkling over, wetting, 
KatySr.; Laty; Ragh. xvi, 57. 

Abhy-uksbita, mfn. besprinkled, R.; Mricch. 

abhy-Vuc, -ucyati, to like, take 

pleasure in visiting, TS. 

Abby-ucita, mfn. usual, customary, R. 

abhy-uc-V car (Imper. 2. sg. -card) 

to rise over (acc.), RV. viii, 25, 21. 

abhy-uc-V 1. ci, to bring together 

i*i one place, Comm, on Bsd.; to treat (a subject) in 
connection with (another), ib. 

Abby-uccaya, as, m. increase, Nir.; Bhatt. 
Abhy-uccita, mfn. increased, Comm, on Nir. 

obky-ucchraya , as, m. ( Vsri),* ele¬ 
vation,’ in comp, with -vat, mfn. having a great 
elevation, being higher than (abl.), MBh. iii, 11699. 

Abhy-ucchrita, mfn. raised aloft, elevated, SBr. 
&c.; prominent, VarBrS.; Ragh. ix, 62; excellent 
through (instr.), Ragh. xvi, 2. — kara, mfn. with 
uplifted proboscis, MBh. iii, 15735. 

abky-uj-Vji* to obtain by conquer¬ 

ing, GopBr. 

bhy-uj-Vjiv, jivati , to preserve 

life, MBh. v, 4538. 

abhy-ut-Vkram , to go up to, as¬ 
cend, Vait.: P. (fut. 1. pi. -kramishyamas, SBr.) 
and Caus. P. -kramayati [SBr.] or -kramayati 
[AsvGr.] to cause to go or step towards (loc.) 

^* 3 ^^ a bhy-ut-*/krus (Subj. 1. pi. - kro - 

sdma) to raise loud acclamations towards (acc.), 

Abhy-utkrtishta, mfn. applauded with loud ac¬ 
clamations, AitBr. {an- neg.) 

Abby-utkrosana,a;«, n. loud acclamation, Say. 
on AitBr. — mantra, m. a hymn of applause (with 
which Indra is addressed), ib. 

abhy-ut-Vtri (3. pi. -ut-taranti) to 


cross, SBr.; (1. pi. - tarema) to cross over towards, 
penetrate to (acc.), RV. x, 53, 8. 

abhy-ut-tha (V st ha), (impf. -ud- 

at is hi hat; perf. - ilt-tasthau ) to rise for going to¬ 
wards (acc.), AV. xv, 8, 5; SBr. &c.; to rise from 
a seat to do any one (acc.) honour, Sak. &c.; (with 
dtithya-karma) id., MBh. viii, 634 ; to rise in re¬ 
bellion, MarkP.; to leave 6ff, desist from (abl), 
Comm, on ChUp. 

Abhy-uttbana, am, n. rising from a seat through 
politeness, Pancat.; rising, setting out, R.; rebellion, 
Hariv.; elevation, gaining a high position, gaining 
authority, respectability, Bhag.; Ragh.; (said of des¬ 
tiny) gaining efficacy, power, MBh. xiii, 343; rise, 
origin, birth, MBh. xii. 

Abby-uttbayin, mfn. rising from a seat to do 
any one honour, Comm, on KatySr. (an- neg.) 

Abby-ntthita , mfn. risen, R. &c.; risen from 
the seat to do any one (acc.) honour, Hariv.; BhP.; 
appeared, visible, Ragh. i, 53, &c.; risen for doing 
anything, making one’s self ready for (acc.), Nir.; 
(Inf.), MBh. xii, 4130; ready, Hariv.; BhP. 

Abby-uttheya, mfn. to be greeted reverentially 
(i. e. by rising from one’s seat), Comm, on KatySr. 

abhy-ut-V pat (p. -patat • perf. 

-papata) to fly or jump or rush up to (acc.), Hariv.; 
Kathas.; Caus. -iit-pdtayati, to cause to fly up to 
(acc.), SBr. 

Abhy-utpatana, am, n. springing or leaping 
against any one, Ragh. ii, 27. 

< abhy-ut-V sad, Caus. (Yed. aor. 

-sadayam akah [ akar , %/1 . kri\ ) to cause to set 
out towards (acc.; for obtaining), MaitrS. (quoted 
by Pan. iii, I, 42). 

abhy-ut-Vsarj (Pot. - ut-sarjet ) 
to rattle towards (acc.), TS. 

wgwf abhy-ut-V sah, to be able to resist 

(with acc.), MBh. vi, 2351; to feel competent, ven¬ 
ture (with Inf.), MBh. iii, 13206; Ragh. v, 22. 

abhy-ut-Vsic (ind. p. -sicya) to 
fill up by pouring, SBr.; to sprinkle with (instr., 
addins'), SahkhGr. 

abhy-ut-V srij , to throw (as an 

arrow) towards (dat.), MBh. vii, 8852: Desid. (p. 
sisrikshat ) to be about to give up (as one’s life), 
MBh. xii, 833. 

abhy-ut-Vsmi (only p. - smayat) 

to smile on (acc.), smile, MBh.; Hariv. 

abhy-Vud (p. -unddt; Imper. 2. pi. 

- undtta [for unttd, see Whitney’s Gr. § 690]) to 
wet, flow over, RV.; SBr.; AitBr. 

^^^r^abhy-ud-v an, - aniti , to breathe to¬ 
wards or upon (acc.), SBr. 

abhy-ud-ava-Vso, - syati , to set 

out or go towards (acc.), AitBr. 

abhy-ud-a-s/ni, to lead up (out 
of water), ManSr.; MSnGr.; Gobh. (cf. ud-a«/nT); 
to fetch out from, ManSr. 

abhy-ud-a-Vhri, to give an ex¬ 
ample in addition, Ap. 

Abhy-udabarana, am, n. an example or illus¬ 
tration of a thing hy its reverse, L. 

abhy-ud-V i (2. sg. -eshi; Imper. 

2. sg. - ild-ihi; Pot. -lydt [SBr.], -iydt [MBh. iii, 
2010 & 10272]; fut. -ud-ayishyati, MBh. iv,688), 
(said of the sun) to rise over (acc.), rise, RV. viii, 
93, I ; AV. &c.; to engage in combat with (acc.), 
MBh. (Pot. -iydt, see before); to finish off at (acc.), 

Abhy-udaya, as, m. sunrise or rise of luminaries 
(during or with reference to some other occurrence), 
KatySr.; Jaim.; beginning, commencing (as of dark¬ 
ness, &c.), R.; elevation, increase, prosperity, hap¬ 
piness, good result, Mn. iii, 254 ; R. &c.; a religious 
celebration, festival, M11. ix, 84. Abhyuday^sbti, 
f., N. of an expiatory sacrifice, Jaim.; (cf. abhytidi- 

Abhy-udayln, mfn. rising, Rajat. 

1. Abhy-udita, mfn. risen (as the sun or lumi¬ 
naries), MBh.; R.; Mil. iv, 104; one over whom 
(while sleeping) the sun has risen, M11. ii, 221; 
Comm, on TS.; engaged in combat, MBh. iii, 15362; 
arisen, happened; elevated,prosperous; (abiiyiidita), 
tf/w,n.(said ofthe sun or the moon)rising (during some 
other occurrence), SBr.; KatySr.; (a), f., N. ofthe 
ceremony (to be performed at the abiiyiidita), 
KaushBr. — sayi-ta, f. the state of lying asleep 
while the sun has risen, MBh. xiii, 5093. Abhy- 
uditesbti, f. — abhyuday&shti, KaushBr. ;SankhSr. 

2. abhy-udita, mfn. (Vvad), ex¬ 
pressed (in words), KenaUp. (an- neg.); see abhi- 
V vad. 

obhy-ud-y/lksh , A. (impf. -aiksh- 

ata) to look towards (acc.), R. 

abky-ud-\/ir , Caus. (p. -irayat) 

to raise (one’s voice), MBh. i, 2170; Pass. - iryate, 
to be stirred up, be intensified, Susr. 

Abby-udirita, mfn. * raised (as the voice), said,’ 
(e), loc. ind. after it had been said by (instr.), KathSs. 

abhy-ud-x/i.uh (impf. auhat) to 

move or push farther out, AitBr. 

abhy-ude (Vi), (ind. p. -etya) to go 

out in order to meet any one (acc.), AV. xv, u, 2 

& 12 , 2 . 

abhy-udga, mfn. fr. >y /ubj, Pat. on 

Pan. Sivasutra 5 & viii, 3, 38. 

abhy-ud-gata, mfn. risen (as the 

moon); one who has gone out in order to meet 
any one (acc.), MBh. i, 3572 ; extended (as fame), 
R.; Lalit. —raja, m., N. of a Kalpa, Buddh. 

Abhy-tidgama, as, m._rising from a seat to 
honour any one, Kathas. 

Abhy-udgamana, am, n. id., L. 

’STSJST abhy-ud-V 1 -ga (aor. 2. sg. -dgas; 

3. sg. -tia-agdt) to rise over or during (acc.), RV. 
viii, 93, 4; SBr. 

abhy-ud-Vdis, to point at any¬ 
thing above with reference to, ManGr. 

abhy-ud-drishta, mfn. having be¬ 
come visible (as the moon) during anything, KatySr.; 
an - (neg.), one during the sacrifice of whom the 
moon has not become visible, SBr.; KatySr; (abhy- 
uddrishta), fi, N. of a ceremony, KaushBr. Abby- 
nddrisbt&sbti, f., N. of a ceremony (beginning 
only after the moon has become visible), KaushBr.; 

abhy-ud-V2.dru, -dravati, to run 

up to (acc.), TBr. 

abhy-ud-dha {V2.lid), A. (3. pi. -t/y- 
jihate) to rise together with, ChUp. 

abhy-ud-dhri (Vhri), Ved. to take 

out (especially one fire in order to add it to another), 
TS.; SBr. Sec.; to take or draw out, draw (as water), 
MBh. &c.; to take up, lift up, SahkhSr.; MBh. xii, 
12322; to re-obtain, Yajn. ii, 119 ; to elevate, ren¬ 
der prosperous, MBh.; Sah. Sec.: Caus. (ind. p. -ud- 
dharya) to raise, lift up, MBh. iii, 13326. 

Abhy-uddbrita, mfn. taken up, Sec. ; drawn (as 
water),Yajn. i, 17; collected (for a purpose), Mricch. 

^1^3El K abky-ud-yata, mfn.(\/ yam), raised, 

lifted up, MBh. Sec .; offered, Mu. iv, 247 seq.; pre¬ 
pared for, engaged in, ready for (Inf. [Hariv. &c.] 
or dat. [VarBrS.] or loc. [Mn. ix, 302] or in comp. 
[Megh.J); (for abhy-udgata), received kindly, wel¬ 
comed, BhP. 

ri abhy-unnata , mfn .(Vnam), raised, 

elevated, VarBrS.; Sak. Sec. 

abhy-un-Vni, to pour upon, scoop 

towards, SBr.; PBr.; Laty. 

abhy-upa-Vgam, to go near to, 
approach, arrive at (acc.), MBh. Sac .; to obtain ; to 
assent, agree to. Das. &c.: Caus. (ind. p. -gamayya) 
to prevail on any one to assent, Das. (see also abhy - 

Abby-upagata, mfn. gone near to, approached, 
arrived at; agreed, assented to, admitted, MBh.; 
Sak. Sec. 

Abhy-upagantavya, mfn. to be gone to or set 

out for (dat.), MBh. xiv, 327; to be assented to or 

agreed upon, Pan. i, 2, 55, Kas. ; to be admitted. 

Comm, on Bad. and on Nvavam. 

* * 

Abhy-upagantri, mfn. one who assents or ad¬ 
mits, Comm, on ChUp. 

Abby-upagama, as, m. going near to, approach¬ 
ing, arriving at, L.; an agreement, contract, Mn. ix, 
53; assenting to, admitting, Sah. Sec. ; (as a state¬ 
ment) Comm, on Bad. — siddhanta, m. an ad¬ 
mitted axiom, Nyayad. 

Abhy-upagamita, mfn. * made to consent,’ ob¬ 
tained by assent or free consent (as a slave for a 
fixed term), Comm, on Yajh. 

’SrajW abhy-upa-Vdha, - upa-dadhdti , to 
place upon, TS.; to cover with (instr.), SBr.: P. A. 
(3. pi. -upa-dadhati, Subj. 1. pi. -dddh&mahai) to 
place upon (the fire) in addition or together with, SBr. 

abhy-upa-ru v. 

> 7 

x *X * 

’vUtJOTi? ahhri'khdlt *.. 

abhy-upa-ni-\Awrit, to return, 

be repeated, KaushBr. 

abhy-upa-Vpad, A. - padyate , to 

approach in order to help, MBh. &c.; to ask tor 
help, R. iii, 14, 7; to furnish with, MBh. ii, 187. 

Abby-upapatti, is, f. approaching in order to 
assist, protection, defence (ifc. [Mn.; Das.] or with 
gen. [MBh. i, 112]); favour, the conferring of a 
benefit or kindness; agreement, assent, Comm, on 
N yayad.; impregnation of a woman (especially of a 
brother’s widow, as an act of duty), L. 

Abby-upapanna, mfn. protected, rescued; ask¬ 
ing tor protection or help, Mricch.; agreed to, ad¬ 
mitted ; agreeing to. 

abhy-upa-Vmantr (impf. -man- 
tray at) to address with a formula, MBh. viii, 4720. 

abhy-upa-Vyd, to approach, go 

towards (acc. or dat.), MBh. vii, 1967; R.; (with 
samam) to enter the state of rest, MarkP. 

^^^kcibhy-upayukta, mfn. {Vyuj), em¬ 
ployed, used, Comm, on Pat. 

abhy-upa-Vlaksh (perf. Pass, p, 
- lakshita ) to perceive, notice, R. v, 28, II. 

abhy-upa-V vis, to sit down 

upon (acc.), MBh. v, 3244; Gobh. (v. 1 . adhy-upa- 
Vvis)\ to sit down, Rajat. 

’JT^STCfTPir abhy-upa-stint a, mfn. (Vsam), 

allayed, calmed. 

abhy-upa- Vsad, Caus. (ind. p. 

- stidya ) to reach (as a town). 

a bhy-upa-\/sri , to come near, R. 

abhy-upa-Vsev, -sevate , to ob¬ 
serve religiously, MBh. iii, 13432. 

abhy - upa - Vstha , to honour, 

BhP.: Caus. to cause to bring near, R. iv, 38, 28., mfn. come, arrived, Kathas.; 
attended or accompanied by (iustr.), MBh. iii, 16132. 

abhy-upd-V I hri , to prepare or 
make preparations (for a sacred action, see upa- 
V i.kri ) with reference to (acc.) or in connection 
with (acc.), MaitrS.; SinkhSr.; KatySr. 

W*pTP}T^ abhy-upa-V brisk, to draw to¬ 
wards one’s self, BhP. 

abhy-upd-gata, mfn. come near, 

approached, Lalit.; (with vyasandya, said of a sad 
fate), R. 

aony-upd-V i.da (ind. p. -daya) 

to pick up (as fruits from the ground), MBh. xii, 672. 

abhy-upa-V yd, to come up to, 

approach, KathSs. 

abhy-updua-Vhri, -uptiva-hara - 

ti , to bring or set down upon (acc.), SBr.; to lower 
(as one’s arms, bdhu),V S. x, 25 ; SBr. 

abhy - upa - Vvfit , - upa-vartate 

(also P., aor. Subj. 1. Sc 3. sg. -upd-vritam, -up$- 
vritaf) to turn one’s self or go towards (acc.), TS.; 
SBr.; AitBr. 

Abby-upt£-vritta, mfn. turned or gone towards 

^acc.), SBr.; returned, R. 

abhy-upa-Vhri (impf. -vpdharat, 

which might also be -updharat fr. abhy-upa- 
Vhri) to bring near, offer, MBh. xv, 11. 

wyti . abhy-upe (Vi), -upaiti (3. pi. - upa- 
yanti) to go near, approach, arrive at, enter, RV. 
vi, 28, 4; SBr. &c.; (with apah) to bathe, KatySr.; 
Mn. xi, 259; Yajh.; to approach (in copulation), 
Hit.; to go to meet any one (acc.), BhP.; to enter 
a state or condition, obtain, share, AitBr. (Ved. Inf. 
- upditos ); MBh. &c.; to admit as an argument or 
a position, RPrat. (perf. p. gen. pi. - upeyusham ); 
Comm, on Nyayam. and on Bad.; to select as (acc.), 
MBh. i, 811; to agree with, approve of, Das. (see 
abhy-upeta)\ Pass. - upeyate , to be approved of, 
admitted, Sarvad. 

Abhy-upaya, as, m. an agreement, promise, en¬ 
gagement, Ap.; a means, an expedient, MBh.; Mu. 
xi, 210, &c. 

Abhy-upayana, am, n. a complimentary gift, 
an inducement, BhP. 

Abby-up£ta, mfn. approached, arrived at (acc.), 
MBh. i, 3592; Ragh. v, 14; (with griham) stay¬ 
ing in a house, VarBrS.; furnished with (in comp. 
[VarBrS.] or instr.); agreed upon, assented to, Das.; 
promised, Megh. 

Abby-up&tavya, mfn. to be admitted or assented 
to. Comm, on Nyayam. 

Abhy-up4tya, ind. p. having arrived at (acc.); 
having entered, Nir.; having assented or agreed to. 
AbbyupetyasusrnsbS., f. breach of a contracted 
service, a title of law treating of disputes between 
the master and a servant who has broken his agree¬ 
ment, Comm, on Yajh. ii, 182 seqq. 

Abby-up£yivas, mti(yushi)v\. (perf. p.) having 
approached, arrived at (acc.), R.; Bhatt.; having 
admitted, RPrat. (see 1. abhy-upe). 

2. abhy-upe (-upaVi), (Imper. 2. sg. 
-upaihi) to approach (for refuge, sarana?n), R. vi, 

9 > 39 - ^ 

abhy~vp$ksh (v'iksh), (perf. p. 

-upekshitavat) to overlook, allow, MBh. xvi, 160. 

abhy-ullasat, mfn.( V las), gleam¬ 
ing, flashing, Sis. v, 2. 

abhy-Vush (impf. 3. pi. - ushndn; 

Ved. Inf. -ushas) to bum, consume by fire, RV. ix, 
97, 39 ; Kath. 

Abby-nsha or abhy-usba or abhy-osba, as, 

m. a kind of cake of grain &c. (half dressed, slightly 
scorched, or parched so as to be eaten from the hand), 
(gana apupddi, q.v.) 

Abbyusbiya or abbyrlshlya or abbyusbya 
or abbyusbya or abby-osbiya or abby-osbya, 

mfn. consisting of, or belonging to, or fit for the 
above cake or preparation of parched grain, (gana 
apupddi , q. v.) 

Abhy-usbta-misra, mfn. partly burnt, SBr. 

abhy-ushita, mfn. (V5. vas), hav¬ 
ing dwelt, having passed the night with, R. iii, 17, 2. 

abhy-udhi. See abhi-Vvah . 

abhy-Vurnu , abhy-urnoti (Imper. 2. 

sg. -urnuhl) to cover, conceal, RV. viii, 79,^2 Sc 
x, 18, 11; AV.: A. -urnute (p. f. -urnvdna) to 
cover or conceal one’s self, AV. xiv, 1, 27 ; RV. v, 
4C 19. 

'W'&m abhy-usha. See abhy-usha. -kha- 

dika, f. ‘eating of abhyusha- grains,’ N. of a play, 

1. abhy-V l.uh,io cover with (instr.), 
TS.; SBr.; KatySr. 

2. abhy-V2. uh, A. (aor. - auhishta , 

p. - Shasdnd ) to watch for, lie in ambush for (acc.), 
RV. vi, I 7, 8 & 9 : P. - uhati , to infer, guess, Nir. 
Abby-ndba, mfn. concluded, inferred, Nir. 
Abby-uba, as, m. reasoning, deduction, infer¬ 
ence, conjecture, Nir.; MSlatim. 

Abby-ubitavya, mfn. to be inferred, Nir. 

1. Abby-ubya, mfn. id., L. 

2. Abby-ubya, ind. p. having deduced by reason¬ 
ing, having inferred, Susr.; Pin. vii, 4, 23, Kli. See. 

abhy-Vri , -rinoti (perf. 3 . pi. abhy- 

aruh) to run towards, reach, RV. i, 35, 9 & iii, 1 ,4. 
Abhy-arna. See s. v., p. 76, col. 1. 

ahky-s rich , - archati , to come to, 
c \ 

visit or afflict with, MBh. i:i, 11875 ; (linpi. -ar- 
chat) to strive against ^acc.V strive to overpower, 
MBh. iii, 11726. 

•ibky-VruV> A. -rxjyate :P. pr. p. 

-rljyaf) to stretch out the hand ior, hasten towards 
(acc.), RV. i, 140, 2 Sc vi, 37, 3. 

abhy-Vrisk- See abhy-Varsk. 

abhy-e {Vi), -ayati [RV. vii;, 35 , I j 

or -aiti [VS.], to go near, come to, approach, RV. 


ah hr, cL 1. F. obhrati (perf. «na- 
x bhrd) to err or wander about, Bhatt. 

abhra (sometimes spelt abbhra, ac¬ 
cording to the derivation ab bhra, ‘water-bearer ;’ 
cf. Comm, on ChUp. ii, 15, 1), am, n. (rarely as, 
m., AV. ix, 6, 47 & TS.) cloud, thunder-clo id, 
rainy weather, RV. &c.; sky, atmosphere, Sis. ix, 
3 ; (in arithmetic) a cypher ; [NBD.] dust, AV. xi, 
3, 6 ; (in med.) talc, mica; gold, L.; camphor, L.; 
the ratan (Calamus Rotang), L.; Cvperus Rotundus, 
h. ; [cf. Gk. opfipos Sc Lat. imber. ] — m-liba 
{abhram-P), mfn. [Pan. iii, 2, 32] ‘cloud-licking/ 
what touches the clouds, high, lofty, Ragh. xiv, 
29, &c.; (as), m. wind. Pan. iii, 2, 32, Sch.; Sah. 

— gangs, f. the celestial Gang§, Kad. — gbana, 
mfn. thickly covered with clouds, Ragh. — m-ka- 
sba (abhram-k°X mfn. [Pan. iii, 2, 42] ‘ grazing 
(hurting) the clouds,’ very high, KSd.; (as), m. wind, 
Pan. iii, 2, 42, Sch. — j£, mfn. ‘ bom from clouds,* 
caused by rainy weather, AV. i, 12, 3. — taru, m., 
N. of a certain phenomenon, VarBrS. — n&ga, as, 
m. pi., N. of the eight elephants supporting the 
globe, L. — patba, m. sky, atmosphere, L. — pi- 
saca or -pisacaka, m. ‘sky-demon,’ N. of Rahu 
(the descending node personified), L. — pusbpa, 

m. the cane Calamus Rotang, L,; (am), n. ‘ a flower 

in the clouds,’ castle in the air, anything impossible, 
Naish. ; (cf. ambara-pushpab) — prusb, f. the 
sprinkling of the clouds, rain, RV. x, 77, 1. -man- 
si, f. the plant Valeriana JatamSnsi, L. — m&t&n- 
ffa, m. AirSvata, Indra’s elephant, L. — mala, f. a 
line or succession of clouds, L. — roha, n. lapis 
lazuli, L. — lipta, partly overspread with 

clouds, Pan. iv, 1, 5% Sch. — varsba (abhra-), 
mfn. dripping or raining from the clouds, RV. ix, 
88, 6. — v&tika for amra-valika, q. v. — vilip- 
ta, mf(/)n. = -lipta, q.v,, Pan. iv, I, 51, Kas. 

— vriksba, m .- -taru, q. v., VarBrS. — siras, 

n. a head formed of the sky, Sis. — sani, mfn. pro¬ 
curing clouds, TS. Abbranadbyaya, in. pause in 
the study on account of rainy weather, Gobh. 
Abbr&vak&slka [Mn. vi, 23, &c.] or °kasin [R. 
iii, 10, 4], ccfn. haring the clouds for shelter, open 
to the sky (as an ascetic). Abbrottba, mfn. ‘cloud- 
bom,’ Indra’s thunderbolt, L. 

Abbraka, am, n. talc, mica, Bhpr. &c. — bba- 
smau, n. calx of talc, L. — sattva, n. steel, L. 

Abbrayanti, f. (pr. p. fr. abhraya , Nom. *P.) 
‘ forming clouds, bringing rainy weather,’ N. of one 
of the seven KrittikSs, TS.; TBr. 

Abbraya, Nom. A. °yate, to create clouds, Pan. 

iii, I, 17. 

Abbr&yita, mfn. ‘ shaped like a cloud,’ similar 
to a cloud, Bh 5 m. 

Abbrita, mf(<z)n. covered with clouds, (gana 
tdrakadi, q. v.), Ragh. iii, 12. 

Abbriya (once abbrlya, RV. x, 68, 12), mfn. 
belonging to or produced from clouds, RV.; AV.; 
(as, am), m. n. thunder-cloud, RV. 

Abbriya, mfn. belonging to or produced from 

] Abbrya, as, m. ‘clothed only by t